Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations - 2012

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

BUILDING WORKS

AND

OTHER INSTALLATIONS

(2012 EDITION)

Published by Housing and Development Board, Republic of Singapore. No part of this document may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means without the prior permission of the publisher.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS AND OTHER INSTALLATIONS

CONTENTS Page

SECTION 1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 2

PILING

2-1

SECTION 3

EXCAVATION

3-1

SECTION 4

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

4-1

SECTION 5

METAL FORMWORK

5-1

SECTION 6

SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION

6-1

SECTION 7

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

7-1

SECTION 8

HOUSEHOLD SHELTER

8-1

SECTION 9

REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK

9-1

SECTION 10

PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITION

10-1

SECTION 11

NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

11-1

SECTION 12

BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

12-1

SECTION 13

ROOFING

13-1

SECTION 14

CONCRETE FLAT ROOF

14-1

SECTION 15

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

15-1

SECTION 16

IRONMONGERY

16-1

SECTION 17

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

17-1

SECTION 18

METALWORK

18-1

SECTION 19

FLOOR FINISHES

19-1

SECTION 20

WALL FINISHES

20-1

SECTION 21

ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLING INSTALLATIONS

21-1

SECTION 22

GLAZING

22-1

SECTION 23

PAINTING AND DECORATING

23-1

The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. HDB, being a ISO 14001 certified organisation, is committed to be the leader in environment management. The details of HDB's environmental policy can be found in the Corporate Philosophy at HDB Website http://www.hdb.gov.sg


CONTENTS Page

SECTION 24

UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION CABLE, TELECOMMUNICATION AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE

24-1

SECTION 25

CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT

25-1

SECTION 26

TREE PLANTING AND TURFING

26-1

SECTION 27

MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27-1

SECTION 28

ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION / UTILITIES CENTRE / DUSTBIN COMPOUND

28-1

SECTION 29

EATING HOUSE

29-1

SECTION 30

MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)

30-1

SECTION 31

FABRICATION AND PROVISION OF REFUSE BINS, LITTER BINS, BULK CONTAINERS AND TROLLEYS

31-1

SECTION 32

RESERVED

32-1

SECTION 33

RESERVED

32-1

SECTION 34

RESERVED

32-1

SECTION 35

RESERVED

32-1

SECTION 36

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER, GAS AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

36-1

SECTION 37

SANITARY INSTALLATION

37-1

SECTION 38

WATER INSTALLATION

38-1

SECTION 39

GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

39-1

SECTION 40

EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES, RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES

40-1

SECTION 41

MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)

41-1

SECTION 42

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND TELEMONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

42-1

SECTION 43

BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

43-1

SECTION 44

DRY/WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION

44-1

SECTION 45

FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION

45-1

SECTION 46

RESERVED

46-1

The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.


CONTENTS Page

SECTION 47

RESERVED

46-1

SECTION 48

RESERVED

46-1

SECTION 49

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

49-1

SECTION 50

SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS

50-1

SECTION 51

MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES

51-1

SECTION 52

CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS

52-1

SECTION 53

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES

53-1

SECTION 54

LUMINARIES

54-1

SECTION 55

EARTHING SYSTEM

55-1

SECTION 56

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

56-1

SECTION 57

PUBLIC LIGHTING

57-1

SECTION 58

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES

58-1

SECTION 59

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP), GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS

59-1

SECTION 60

OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING

60-1

SECTION 61

TELEVISION (TV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION

61-1

SECTION 62

TELEPHONE CABLING

62-1

SECTION 63

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

63-1

SECTION 64

VENTILATION SYSTEM

64-1

SECTION 65

FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION

65-1

SECTION 66

REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION

66-1

SECTION 67

RESERVED

67-1

SECTION 68

RESERVED

68-1

SECTION 69

RESERVED

69-1

SECTION 70

LISTS OF APPENDICES

70-1

The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.

SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTENTS Page 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.1.10 1.1.11 1.1.12 1.1.13 1.1.14 1.1.15 1.1.16 1.1.17 1.1.18 1.1.19 1.1.20 1.1.21 1.1.22 1.1.23 1.1.24 1.1.25 1.1.26 1.1.27 1.1.28 1.1.29 1.1.30 1.1.31 1.1.32 1.1.33 1.1.34 1.1.35 1.1.36 1.1.37 1.1.38 1.1.39 1.1.40 1.1.41 1.1.42 1.1.43 1.1.44 1.1.45 1.1.46 1.1.47 1.1.48 1.1.49 1.1.50 1.1.51

GENERAL Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations Reserved Payment Of Employer's Bills Expenses, Etc Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS Diversion of Services Stamp Duties TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion Provisional Sum Items Prime Cost Sums Overclaim Leading To Overpayment Carriage By Sea Existing Ground / Road Levels Raising Or Lowering Of Existing Sewer Manholes And Other Services Manholes Work Method And Trade Demonstration Reserved Site Layout Plan Site Offices And Canteens Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus Devices, Etc Reserved Provision Of Transport Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures Construction Site Main Signboard and Hoarding Signage Site Management Employment of Contractor's Site Personnel Contractor's Work In Connection With Subsidiary Contracts Cables/Services Detection Reserved Damage To Public/Private Property General Housekeeping Reserved Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc Provision Of Respiratory Masks Reserved Reserved Research Work Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms Handing Over Of Completed Works And Certification Of Substantial Completion Reserved Management Of Defects Rectification Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements Completion Of Site Works Erection Of Temporary Buildings Goods And Services Tax Works And Materials Warranty Cost Of Water And Electricity

1-1 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-10 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-26 1-28 1-29 1-29 1-31 1-31 1-31 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-33 1-33 1-33


SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTENTS Page 1.1 1.1.52 1.1.53 1.1.54 1.1.55 1.1.56 1.1.57 1.1.58 1.1.59 1.1.60 1.1.61 1.1.62 1.1.63 1.1.64 1.1.65 1.1.66 1.1.67 1.1.68 1.1.69 1.1.70

GENERAL (CONT'D) Site Control And Security Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather Shortfall In Floor Area Registered Trade Subcontractors And M&E Subcontractors Insurance Policies Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site Provision Of Building Service Centre Reserved Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures Computer Hardware And Software Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claims And Request For Variation Works Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc Provision Of Keys Envelopes During Handover Scheduling Of PE Submission Earth Control Measures Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites Material Samples Display Room Audit of M & E Systems Environmental Management

1-34 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37 1-39 1-40 1-40 1-41 1-41 1-45 1-47 1-47 1-48 1-49 1-51 1-58 1-58 1-59

1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 1.2.10 1.2.11 1.2.12 1.2.13

MATERIALS Metric Components Materials And Workmanship Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials Reserved Approval Of Samples And Trade Names Sample Unit And Quality Standards PSB Quality Certificate Storage Facility For Cement Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site Ready-Mixed Concrete From Approved Suppliers Water Supply Of Concreting Materials Aggregates For Non-Concreting Works

1-60 1-60 1-60 1-60 1-61 1-62 1-65 1-65 1-65 1-65 1-65 1-66 1-67

1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6

LABOUR Labour Laws Keeping Records Of Workmen Employment Of Illegal Immigrants (Prohibition) Reserved Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements Employment Of Skilled Tilers

1-68 1-68 1-68 1-68 1-68 1-69

1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT Provision Of Construction Equipment Technical Specification Recovery For Non-Provision Maintenance Approved Construction Equipment

1-69 1-69 1-71 1-72 1-74

1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3

SAFETY Site Safety Measures Safety Infringement Reporting Of Accidents And Dangerous Occurrence

1-75 1-85 1-85

1.6

NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES

1-86

1.7

SPECIAL CONDITIONS ON SURVEY WORKS

1-86

1.8

CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE OF WORK

1-88


GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bldg Spec Page 1-1 SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1

GENERAL

1.1.1

Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations In the Specifications, the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires : "SO Rep"

shall mean the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"as approved"

shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"as directed"

shall mean as directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"or other approved"

shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative and as further defined in subclause 1.2.5 "Approval Of Samples And Trade Names" of the General Specifications.

"as required" or "as shown" or "as indicated" or "as specified"

shall mean as required or as shown or as indicated or as specified in the Drawings and/or Specifications.

The following abbreviations are used in the Specifications : ABGSM AC or ac AISI Amp or amp AMCA ANSI AS ASTM BCA BS cm cm² or cm2 cm³ or cm3 CPF CP dB DC or dc DIN DU or du EIA EMA MEWR EPR FSSD GS or gs g HDB HRC HVAC Hz IDA IEC IECEE IP ISO ITE JIS KA or kA

BLDG12/S01.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

Association of British Generating Set Manufacturers alternating current American Iron & Steel Institute Ampere Air Movement and Control Association American National Standard Institute Australian Standard American Society for Testing and Material Building And Construction Authority British Standard centimetre square centimetre cubic centimetre Central Provident Fund Board Code of Practice decibel direct current Deutche Industrie - Normen dwelling units Electronic Industry Association Energy Market Authority Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources Ethylene Propylene Rubber Fire Safety and Shelter Department Galvanised Steel gram Housing & Development Board High Rupturing Capacity Heating Ventilation Air-Conditioning Hertz Info-Communications Development Authority of Singapore International Electrotechnical Commission IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment Index of Protection International Organization for Standardization Institute of Technical Education Japanese Industrial Standard Kilo Ampere

Bldg Spec Page 1-2 1.1.1

Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations (Cont'd) kg KN or kN kPa or KPa KV or kV kW or KW Kwh or kWh LEW MCB MCCB MSSL MW m Max or max Min or min ml mm mV m² or m2 mm² or mm2 m³ or m3 mm³ or mm3 MHz MOM MRT MS or ms N NEA No. or no. Pa ONORM PBTS PE

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

PLS PowerGrid or Grid PSB PTL PUB PVC or pvc RC or rc RCCB rms SAC SCV SINGLAS SMRT SPSL SS SWA SWG SingTel TIA UHF UL m uPVC or UPVC V V VHF v/v W w/w

= = = = = = = = = = == = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =


kilogram kilonewton kilopascal kilovolt kilowatt Kilowatt hour Licensed Electrical Worker Miniature Circuit Breaker Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Market Support Services Licensee Megawatt metre maximum minimum millilitre millimetre millivolt square metre square millimetre cubic metre cubic millimetre Megahertz Ministry of Manpower Mass Rapid Transit mild steel newton National Environment Agency number pascal Osterreichisches Normangsinstitut (Austrian Standard) Public Basic Telecommunications Service Operators Professional Engineer registered under the Professional Engineers Board, Singapore Product Listing Scheme PowerGrid Ltd TUV SUD PSB Pte Ltd Public Telecommunication Licensees Public Utilities Board Polyvinylchloride Reinforced Concrete Residual Current Circuit Breaker root mean square Singapore Accreditation Council StarHub Cable Vision Pte Ltd Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme Singapore MRT Ltd SP Services Ltd Singapore Standard Steel wire armoured Standard Wire Gauge (British) Singapore Telecommunications Ltd Telecommunications Industry Association Ultra High Frequency Underwriters Laboratories Inc micrometre Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride microvolt Volt Very High Frequency measured by volume watt measured by weight


Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations (Cont'd) XLPE ºC % ± ≤ or < ≥ or > < >

= = = = = = = =

Cross linked polyethylene degree Celsius percent plus or minus less than or equal to greater than or equal to is less than is greater than

Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires. The clause or subclause headings in the Specifications shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. All clauses including all subclauses under them in the Specifications shall be deemed to be directed at the Contractor unless expressly specified otherwise to the contrary and the Contractor shall perform and/or comply with such instructions, directions, requirements and obligations specified in the Specifications and required under the Contract. All Acts of Parliament, statutes, regulations, bye-laws, orders, local and foreign standards and codes of practice specified shall be deemed to refer to the latest and shall be deemed to include any amendments, and/or modifications and/or additions and/or re-enactments thereto. 1.1.2

Reserved

1.1.3

Payment Of Employer's Bills, Expenses, Etc The Contractor shall duly and punctually pay to the Employer the billed and any other expenses incurred by the Employer in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc. The Contractor shall also pay to the Employer interest at the rate of seven percent per annum (7% p.a.) or such other rate as may be determined from time to time by the Employer in respect of any arrears of payment or other outstanding sums due and payable to the Employer, from the due dates until payment in full is received by the Employer. The Employer reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming due to the Contractor before payment of the balance, if any, to the Contractor. In this respect, all Employer's bills and other expenses due from the Contractor shall have priority over debts due to third parties.

1.1.4

Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS All payments under the Contract by the Employer to the Contractor shall be effected through the Interbank GIRO System and/or other Electronic Payment Systems. The Contractor shall submit all the necessary forms, such as Inter-bank GIRO (IBG) form, etc., duly completed and signed, to the Finance Department, HDB, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480; within fourteen days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to effect payments through such Systems. In the event the payment arrangement through such Systems terminates for whatever reasons, the Contractor shall re-submit all the necessary forms to the Finance Department within 14 days from the date of the termination. The preceding requirements shall not be applicable to payments by the Employer to the Contractor in approved foreign currencies, where required under the Contract. Under such a case, the provisions under the clause "Tenders In Approved Foreign Currencies" including all subclauses under it shall apply.



Diversion of Services Where in the case the SO Rep is of the opinion that it becomes essential to divert permanently any sewer, drain, pipe, cable, or other services, the cost for the diversion shall be borne by the Employer. Provided always that such diversion does not form part of the Works.

1.1.6

Stamp Duties The Contractor shall have all documents required by or arising out of or in connection with this Contract properly stamped to comply with the Stamp Duties Act. The cost and expense arising out of this obligation, including all stamp duties required, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.

1.1.7

TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary Where the Contractor requires land outside the contract boundary for the setting up of Construction Equipment and other temporary facilities for the Works, the Contractor shall check on the availability of such land and apply to the relevant Authority or Lands Management Section of HDB for the use of such land. In the event the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Administration Section allows the Contractor the use of such land, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense comply with all the terms and conditions, pay all TOL (Temporary Occupation Licence) fees, bear all costs and expenses for the use and maintenance of and access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Management Section. Such land allocated shall solely be used for the purpose of executing Works under the Contract only. Any payment for unused materials or goods stored at such land shall be subject to the provisions in Option Module B "Unused Materials or Goods not Delivered to Site" of the Conditions.

1.1.8

Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion In the event of re-arrangement of the completion of the Works into separate phases or sub-phases, the rate of liquidated damages in respect of each phase or sub-phase of the Works shall be recomputed according to the following rates and pro-rated against the original amount specified in the Appendix To Public Sector Standard Conditions Of Contract For Construction Works. $ per unit per day per unit per day per unit per day per unit per day per unit per day per unit per day per unit per day per unit per day per no. per day per 1,000 m² of total area within the contract boundary per day 5.00 per lot per day 1.50 per lot per day

Rental Flat (30m²) Rental Flat (40m²) Studio Apartments (35m²) Studio Apartments (45m²) 2-Room Flat 3-Room Flat 4-Room Flat 5-Room Flat Electrical Substation Link Building/Linkway/ Siteworks/Landscaping works Carpark Lot Motorcycle Lot Shop Market Foodcourt/Fastfood/ Coffee House/Restaurant/ Eating House/Kiosk/ Offices/Chidcare Centre/ Various Centres

15.00 20.00 15.00 20.00 20.00 25.00 35.00 40.00 1,800.00 40.00

) ) ) ) ) ) )

Civil Engineering Works

) )


1.00 per m² of internal floor area per day

500.00 per phase per day (for Contract Sum less than or equal to $2 million) 35.00 per phase per day (for every subsequent $100,000.00 exceeding $2 million)


Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion (Cont'd) For the purpose of this clause, the internal floor area shall be defined as the total floor area in the commercial unit/centre including the floor area occupied by toilet, store, kitchen, staircase, etc within the commercial unit/centre. The internal floor area shall be measured as follows : (a)

Partition Wall/Column For partition wall/column, to measure up to the centre line of partition wall (party wall) which separates 2 adjoining units.

(b)

External Wall And Party Wall Along Corridor For external wall and party wall along the corridor, to measure up to the external face of the wall surrounding the floor slab.

1.1.9

Provisional Sum Items Where Provisional Sum Items are included in the Contract, they shall be inclusive of all costs necessary in carrying out or supplying the work, materials or goods. These Provisional Sum Items shall be inclusive of the Contractor's profit and overheads but shall be net of trade and cash discounts.

1.1.10

Prime Cost Sums Where Prime Cost Sums (hereinafter referred to as P.C. Sum for the purposes of this subclause) are provided for any work, materials or goods, these sums shall be inclusive of carriage but exclusive of Contractor's profit and attendance. These P.C. Sum shall also be net of trade and cash discounts. The Contractor shall allow and separately price for profit and attendance in respect of such P.C. Sum in the Form of Tender. P.C. Sum shall be deducted from the Contract Sum and in lieu thereof shall be added the sums due to the Contractor for the said work, materials or goods. The sum allowed by the Contractor in the Contract for attendance in respect of any P.C. Sum shall be fixed regardless of whether the actual sum expended is greater or lesser than the P.C. Sum. In respect of profit, the amount to be paid shall be the percentage quoted by the Contractor against the actual sum expended in relation to the P.C. Sum. Should the work, materials or goods for which a P.C. Sum is provided in the Contract be not required, or if the Employer chooses to carry out or supply the aforesaid work, materials or goods by his own workmen or by other contractors, which the Employer is contractually entitled so to choose, then such P.C. Sum together with the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. Should the Contractor himself be engaged or instructed to carry out or supply any work, materials or goods under a P.C. Sum, the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract in respect of the P.C. Sum shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. In such event, the amount to be paid to the Contractor for the work, materials or goods shall be inclusive of the Contractor's overheads and profit for the work, materials and goods.

1.1.11

Overclaim Leading To Overpayment If at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, the Contractor is found to have over-claimed and was paid for more than the value of the Permanent Works carried out and/or approved unfixed materials at the Site, the SO Rep shall be empowered to deduct from the Contractor's subsequent payments the sum overpaid together with the Employer's charge, and interest calculated at seven percent per annum (7% p.a.).



Carriage By Sea The Contractor shall ensure that the carriage by sea of all goods, materials, Plant and equipment imported for the purposes of this Contract shall be on vessels owned and operated by shipping lines which are approved lines at the time the contract of carriage is entered into. Other ships may be used only if no approved line : (a)

can deliver the goods, materials, Plant and equipment in time to meet the delivery dates specified in the Contract; or

(b)

can provide the same measure of service at the same cost.

The Bills of Lading for the goods, materials or Plant and equipment used by an approved line(s) shall be sufficient evidence of their carriage by an approved line(s) in compliance with this subclause. Where the carrier is not an approved line, the Contractor shall satisfy the SO Rep that the conditions herein stated have been satisfied. The SO Rep may require and the Contractor shall forthwith furnish to the SO Rep a letter from at least one approved line at the time the contract of carriage with the carrier is entered into stating that in respect of the shipment in issue they are either unable to quote or to provide the service required. Notwithstanding anything contained in this subclause, the Employer shall not be responsible for any act or default of the carrier or for any loss or damage sustained by the Contractor on account of him having to comply with this subclause. The list of current approved lines can be obtained from the Procurement Office, Development And Procurement Department, HDB, Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480. 1.1.13

Existing Ground / Road Levels The existing ground/ road levels/ drain invert levels as shown in the drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall note that existing ground/road levels and drain invert levels may not necessarily be the same as shown in the drawings. He is to ascertain this and visits the Site prior to the tender and is deemed to include whatever extra cost of cut and fill in the Contract Sum. In the event of the Contractor failing to visit the Site, the tender shall be deemed to have been submitted with his satisfaction of the actual levels on Site and other related ground conditions. The Contractor is deemed to have made necessary provision in the Contract Sum to cater for additional earthwork arising from the difference in levels found on Site and that shown in the drawings and no claims or compensation shall be entertained.

1.1.14

Raising Or Lowering Of Existing Sewer Manholes And Other Services Manholes The Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum the cost of raising or lowering of existing sewer manholes and other services manholes / chambers, and their related works within the contract boundary to suit and match the proposed driveways and platform levels.

1.1.15

Work Method And Trade Demonstration The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the work methods of various trades as required by the SO Rep to ensure good in-process quality control and reasonably acceptable final workmanship. A marking system, where applicable, showing inter alia, the control, grid and level reference lines shall be included in the work methods. The Contractor shall also ensure that sub-contractors engaged for each trade shall also comply with the work methods approved by the SO Rep. As instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall conduct trade demonstration for all critical work methods as approved prior to full scale production in the contract.



Work Method And Trade Demonstration

(Cont’d)

Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the work methods proposed by the Contractor will not ensure good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep may require the Contractor to make at his own cost and expense such modifications to the original work methods as the SO Rep may consider necessary or appropriate. The Contractor shall employ only skilled workers who are capable of executing the Works in accordance with the work methods approved by the SO Rep. When there is a change in subcontractors, the SO Rep may instruct the Contractor to re-conduct the relevant trade demonstration if deem necessary. Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor’s work methods, revised work methods or any details and information provided under this subclause shall not in any way relieve the Contractor’s liabilities or obligations under the Contract. 1.1.16

Reserved

1.1.17

Site Layout Plan After the Contract is awarded, submit a site layout plan to the SO Rep indicating proposed locations of all temporary structures (for example site offices, workers' quarters, canteens, stores, hoistways, Construction Equipment and labour lines) for approval before their erection. Notwithstanding such approval, the Contractor shall relocate any such structures at his own cost and expense when required to do so by the SO Rep. All such materials and structures shall be kept away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and services lines. Should any hoistway or structure be erected without the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall pull down and re-erect the hoistway or structure in an approved position within seven days from the date of instruction by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance of all such structures in a clean, hygienic and safe condition for the duration of the Works. All such structures and hoistways shall be removed on Substantial Completion of the Works.

1.1.18

Site Offices And Canteen

1.1.18.1

Within 21 days from the date of taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall erect site offices and a site canteen complying with the requirements of the MEWR and shall remove them on Substantial Completion of the Works or at a time approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's Standard Drawings may be used as a guide in designing the site offices and canteen. Submit proposals for the design (inclusive of PE calculations), configuration and layout for the approval of the SO Rep taking full consideration the site constraints and conditions. Locating the site offices and canteen at the first storey void areas shall only be considered under special circumstances and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Should approval be given to set up the site offices and canteen at the first storey void areas, ensure and make all provisions necessary to protect the structures and finishes. When such void areas are required by the Employer for other purposes, remove and re-erect the site offices and canteen at alternative locations all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. No claim whatsoever shall be entertained in such event.




1.1.18.2

Site Offices

(Cont’d)

The following rooms shall have at least the minimum stipulated areas and complete with basic facilities, fittings and furniture and made available at all times for use by the SO Rep and the Employer's officers : Facilities, Furnitures and Fittings

S/N

1.

Room (Minimum size & able to accommodate all facilities specified)

2.

Tables and Chairs :

24 m

2

Computer Room

24 m2

34 m2

8 m2

a) 1.5m x 0.8m office table complete with at least 3 drawers

4

4

-

-

b) 1.5m x 0.8m working table complete with storage space for drawings

-

Maximum 2

-

-

c)

0.8m wide side tables for computer and its peripherals

-

-

-

1

d)

1.2m x 0.8m table

-

-

6

-

e)

Chairs with hand rests

4

4

-

-

f)

Chairs without hand rests

4

2

15

2

g)

High Chairs without hand rests (for working table)

-

Maximum 2

5

-

3

Steel Cabinet complete with Shelves and Double-Leaf Doors with lock

1

Maximum 3

-

-

4

Soft Board complete with Accessories

1

1

2

1

5

White Board complete with Accessories

1

1

1

-

6

Key cabinet

-

1

-

-

7

Air-Conditioner of Minimum 10,000 BTU Output

2

2

2

1

8

Telephone Installation a) Separate telephone line

1

1

-

1

b) Telephone set

1

1

-

1

Drawing Rack complete with Drawing Holders

-

2

-

-

9


SO Rep Room

No. of Items Resident Meeting Technical Officer Room Room



1.1.18.2

Site Offices

(Cont’d) Facilities, Furnitures and Fittings

S/N 10

(Cont’d)

SO Rep Room

No. of Items Resident Meeting Technical Officer Room Room

Computer Room

Electrical Installation, Connections and Accessories (The illumination level in the meeting room and the SO Rep room shall be set at 300 to 400 lux) a) 40W Fluorescent lighting

4

4

4

2

b) 13 Ampere socket outlet

2

2

2

3

c) 15 Ampere socket outlet

2

2

2

1

The doors leading to the SO Rep room, the Resident Technical Officer room and the meeting room shall be provided with locksets and all the keys to the locksets shall be given to the SO Rep. 1.1.18.3

Site Canteen The structure of the site canteen shall be a steel column-roof truss design, anchored to a reinforced concrete base and footings. All structural steelwork shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 17 “Structural Steelwork” including all clause and subclause under it. The Contractor shall further submit detailed structural plans and design calculations, certified by his PE to the SO Rep not later than three months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or two weeks before the actual commencement of the Works, whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission. The Contractor shall erect the site canteen in strict compliance with his Professional Engineer's plans and calculations. The Works shall be supervised by the Contractor's PE. His PE is also to ensure that the site canteen is designed in compliance with the Technical Guidelines for the Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Sites, including any amendment thereto, issued by FSSD; and the Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations (2000 edition) including any latest requirements by BCD, BCA. Not later than two weeks after the completion of the Works, the Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate of Supervision, stating that he has carried out such supervision work and is fully satisfied that the Works have been constructed in accordance with his structural plans and design calculations as approved by the SO Rep. The site canteen is to be enclosed with half-height panels. The panels are to be made of fire-rated colour-bond galvanized steel sheet complete with 42mm thick rockwool panel (sandwich concept). Solid block wall are to be installed only at the preparation and dapur areas where wall tiles are provided. All solid block wall facing the external/exposed shall be plastered and painted with at least 3 coats of algae-resistant emulsion paint. No timber or other combustible material shall be used for the site canteen. Notwithstanding the Employer’s Standard Drawings being adopted as a guide, the site canteen shall be provided with the following facilities and amenities: S/No. 1. 2. 3. 4.


Facilities, Furniture and Fittings Wash basins Wash area Wall / Ceiling mounted fans Ceiling mounted lightings

Refreshment Area 1 4 4

No. of Items Preparation Area 1 1 2

Dapur Area 2

Bldg Spec Page 1-10

1.1.18


1.1.18.3

Site Canteen

(Cont’d)

(Cont’d)

All canteen counter tops, dining tables and benches are to be wrapped with linoleum or other approved waterproof material. The concrete base shall also be 100mm above the surrounding level to keep the floor area dry. Adequate scupper drains graded to discharge into public sewer / septic tank are to be provided for washing purposes. Discharge into the site’s perimeter cut-off drains shall not be allowed. All roof purlins and runners are to be concealed with false ceiling made of softboard or other approved materials for aesthetic purposes. The site canteen is to be sited at a well-ventilated location, away from vehicular accesses and refuse collection areas for hygiene purposes. The location and layout of the site canteen shall be subjected to approval of the SO Rep. 1.1.18.4

The Contractor shall allow for the maintenance of the site offices and canteen and all the facilities, furniture and fittings therein in a clean, habitable and good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall pay all charges for the provision and use of the telephone and electricity at the site offices and canteen.

1.1.18.5

Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned facilities, furniture and fittings after the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

1.1.19

Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (A)

Facsimile Machine The Contractor shall provide 1 number of plain paper (A4 size) facsimile machine at the site office. Facsimile machine of the thermal paper type shall not be acceptable. Such machine shall be kept in the Resident Technical Officer room throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The facsimile machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employer's officers only. The Contractor should provide another facsimile machine for their own use. The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the continuous proper, good and efficient working conditions and maintenance of such facsimile machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the vendor to the SO Rep for checking when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.

(B)

Digital Camera On Site The Contractor shall provide a digital still camera on the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the purpose of photographing site occurrences (within the Site) by the SO Rep. The digital still camera shall have zooming functions and be capable of taking pictures at a digitized resolution of at least 2.1 million pixels. The digital still camera shall have an expandable and removable memory storage media with a minimum capacity of 128 Mbytes, and be provided with all the necessary softwares and accessories for editing and transferred digital images from the camera to the computer hardware. The Contractor shall bear all the costs and expenses incurred arising from usage of the digital camera and shall be responsible for its continuous and proper functioning.

(C)

Torch Lights The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of torch lights on the Site at all times for use by the SO Rep, Resident Technical Officer and/or representatives from other Authorities. These torch lights shall be in good working condition and sufficiently bright enough for use.

(D)

Metal Detector The Contractor shall provide a battery-operated portable metal detector for the purpose of detecting metal reinforcement embedded in cement mortar joints of brickwalls. The detector must have either a light or buzzer indicator to indicate the presence of metal.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd) (E)

Moisture Meter The Contractor shall provide a portable, battery operated, digital LCD display moisture meter with integral electrode pins for measuring moisture content of timber doors and frames delivered to the Site. The moisture meter shall be capable of measuring actual moisture content of wood in the range from 8% to 44% (minimum) with a 1% indicating tolerance at 0 to 40 degrees Celsius ambient temperature. The meter shall also possess a built-in device for performing simple calibration checks.

(F)

Safety Helmets And Safety Boots The Contractor shall provide sufficient safety helmets and safety boots for use by the Employer's officers and visitors visiting the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The ownership of the safety helmets and safety boots shall be reverted back to the Contractor upon the satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works. The requirements are as follows : (a)

Safety Helmets (i) (ii) (iii)

(b)

white colour with HDB logo in front of helmet. (Colour code for HDB logo : Pantone 485) complete with canvas chin straps and sweat resisting lining. comply with SS98:1987.

Safety Boots (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix)

at least 24 cm in height black/brown colour with steel toe cap long-wearing of great flexibility and resilience slip proof, resistant to oil, acid and heat nail proof of excellent insulation comfortable and light comply with SS105:1987

The Contractor shall immediately replace those safety helmets and safety boots which the SO Rep considers to be not in good working condition. (G)

Stationery For Resident Technical Officer The Contractor shall provide stationery and other devices for site use by the Employer's officers upon commencement of the Works. The list of stationery to be provided is as follows : Item No.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Description

Quantity (Maximum)

1.

Ball Point Pen (Black/Blue/Red)

2.

Correction Fluid

2 no. each per Resident Technical Officer 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer

3.

Eraser (Pencil)

1 no. per Resident Technical Officer

4.

Glue Tube


5.

Hard Cover Book : a) A4 size b) A5 size

a) b)

6.

Manila File

25 no.

5 each. 5 each.


Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd) (G)

Stationery For Resident Technical Officer (Cont’d) Item No. 7.

Description

Quantity (Maximum)

Paper Clip : a) Medium Size b) Large Size

a) b)

8.

Pen Knife

2 no.

9.

Pencil (2B)


10.

Perforator

2 no.

11.

Pocket Notebook


12.

Ruler (300 mm)


13.

Scissor

2 no.

14.

Stamp Pad (Violet)


15.

Staple Machine (B3)


16.

Staples (B3)


17.

Calculator (without scientific functions)

1 no.

18.

Colour Pencils

1 set

19.

Highlighter of Assorted Colours

1 set

20.

Scale Ruler

1 no.

21.

Writing Pad (A4)


22.

Hard Cover Ring File

40 no. plus 3 no. per building block

23.

Ear Plugs


24.

Rubber Stamp

Max. 5 nos per contract

25.

Retractable tapping rod


26.

3.5 inch diskettes (1.44MB)

2 boxes of 10 formatted diskettes per contract

27.

Measuring Tape of 7.5 metre Length


28.

Laser Pointer


29.

CD Re-write able discs

1 box of 10 CDRW discs

2 boxes. 2 boxes.

Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned stationery after the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd) (H)

Photo Copying Machine Provide 1 number of plain paper photocopying machine at the site office with the following specifications : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

minimum 50 ppm in black and white; Support paper up to 160gsm and A3+; Auto paper selections; Auto response sensor

The photocopying machine shall be kept in the Resident Technical Officer room throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The photo copying machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employer’s officers only. The Contractor should provide another photo copying machine for their own use. The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the maintenance of such photocopying machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the vendor to the SO Rep for checking when requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. 1.1.20

Reserved

1.1.21

Provision Of Transport The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide suitable transport throughout the Time for Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the SO Rep and other Employer's officers, from the nearest bus stop or MRT station or site or public carpark near to the Site, to the Site, including the return journey, for the discharge of their official duties. Such pick up point shall be decided by the SO Rep. The vehicle shall be driven by the Contractor's own personnel.

1.1.22

Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities

1.1.22.1

Access Roads And Protective Crossings The Contractor shall repair and maintain all access roads serving the Site and provide temporary protective crossings over existing drains, channels, footways, etc throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all damage and/or clearing away on Substantial Completion to the requirements of the relevant Authorities and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

1.1.22.2

Reserved

1.1.22.3

Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation The Contractor shall engage a Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW) of at least an ‘Electrical Technician’ Grade to design all temporary electrical installations necessary for building operations and works of engineering construction. The installations shall comply fully to the requirements as stated in the latest edition of Singapore Standard CP 88 applicable at the date of closing of the Tender. Throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, the Contractor’s LEW shall ensure good safety standards and practices and including the following : (a)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)

For re-development sites, the Contractor is strongly encouraged to use M/s PowerGrid Ltd’s power supply to provide temporary electricity supply during the construction stage. For new town development sites, all electrical generator sets shall be licensed with valid EMA licence. A minimum capacity of 75kVA generator shall be used at each block. However when the generator is used for the passenger cum material hoist and other general purposes, the minimum capacity of the generator for each block shall be upgraded to 100 kVA.


Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities (Cont’d)

1.1.22.3

Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation (Cont’d) (b)

The electrical switch board which holds the ELCB shall be housed in a switch box located at least 1.5 m from the floor level.

(c)

Socket-outlet assembly complete with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and residual current operated circuit breakers (RCCBs) is to be provided at each storey of the building block. The precast refuse chute shall serve as a temporary service riser. The installation shall last the entire Time for Completion unless authorized to be removed earlier by the SO Rep or when permanent electricity supply is secured (whichever is earlier). The temporary incoming supply cable located within the precast refuse chute shall be supported with insulated lock bands. Upon termination of the temporary electricity supply, all cables and lock bands installed in the precast refuse chute shall be removed and the surface of the precast refuse chute shall be made good to a smooth finish.

(d)

All sheaths of cables, sockets outlets and plugs are in good working condition.

(e)

All cables are properly bound and do not cause obstruction to passageways, walkways and stairs.

(f)

All cables are properly supported with L-shaped galvanised steel brackets or insulated lock bands and placed at a suitable height, away from any source which cause mechanical damage.

(g)

All plugs, socket-outlets, socket-outlet assembly (SOA), cable couplers and plug adaptors are to be of the standard industrial type and of minimum classification of latest edition CP 88.

(h)

The supply to provide artificial lighting shall be taken from the socket-outlet assembly located at each storey. 4 feet fluorescent lighting enclosed in suitable mechanical enclosure to a minimum classification of IP 44 shall be used to provide lighting or to achieve a minimum lighting level of 400 lux.

(i)

The Contractor shall provide sufficient temporary lighting, according to the instruction of the SO Rep, for their workers/sub-contractors to carry out in-process construction works such as internal plastering/skimming, wall and floor tiling, application of water-proofing membrane etc., within the units or common areas of the building under construction.

1.1.22.4

Reserved

1.1.22.5

Temporary Store Room For Lift Parts The Contractor shall provide a temporary storage space with a floor area of at least 50 m2 and another temporary store room properly secured and complete with door and latch and with a floor 2 area of at least 15 m at the ground floor of each building block where lifts are to be installed. The temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be used solely by the lift contractor for keeping lift parts during the lift installation period which shall commence from the date of handing over of the lift hoistway and lift motor room to the lift contractor. If the abovementioned temporary storage space/temporary store room need to be removed to allow the Contractor and/or other contractors to proceed with their work, the Contractor shall at its own cost and expense first provide an alternative storage space/store room and arrange with the lift contractor to vacate the original temporary storage space/temporary store room and transfer such lift parts to the alternative storage space/store room. The location and type of temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be approved by the SO Rep.

1.1.22.6

Temporary Use Of Lift For each building block in the Works designed with lift facilities, the Contractor shall secure for the temporary use of one lift upon completion of lift testing and commissioning by the lift contractor engaged by the Employer. The Contractor shall execute an agreement with the lift contractor for the temporary usage of the lift for a period of 1 month or longer prior to the Substantial Completion of each respective building block. A copy of the executed agreement shall be given to the SO rep for record. All costs and expenses incurred in complying with the provisions of this clause shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities (Cont'd)

1.1.22.6

Temporary Use Of Lift (Cont'd) The temporary use of the lift shall be subjected to the terms and conditions stipulated hereunder. Such terms and conditions shall be incorporated into the agreement to be executed between the Contractor and the lift contractor. The terms and conditions shall be as follows :

1.1.23

(a)

The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep for the use of the lifts.

(b)

The Contractor shall arrange for a designated person to certify that the lifts are for temporary use and seek approval from MOM before it can be used. Alternatively the lift contractor can arrange for the inspection on behalf of the Contractor at a cost of $680.00 per lift.

(c)

The Contractor shall provide proper protection such as plywood, adhesive tapes, etc. to the lift cages, floors, car doors, architraves, transoms and landing doors, etc. The Contractor shall ensure that the protection for the lifts is always in a proper condition. Any physical damage to the lifts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

(d)

The Contractor shall engage a full-time lift attendant to operate each lift. Under no circumstance shall a lift be left unattended when it is in operation.

(e)

The Contractor shall ensure that the lifts are not over loaded.

(f)

The Contractor shall take up additional insurance for the use of the lifts as temporary use lifts and Public Liability coverage, naming the Employer and the lift contractor as the co-insured, for the period of usage. Copies of the insurance policies shall be given to both the SO Rep and the lift contractor before the lifts are allowed to be used. Alternately, the Contractor may pay the lift contractor for taking up the insurance and public liability coverage on its behalf.

(g)

The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily maintenance of the lifts, such as cleaning up the cages and sills in order to prevent unnecessary breakdown and damage to the lifts.

(h)

The lift contractor shall service the lifts once a month during normal working hours. In case of a need for emergency service, the Contractor shall contact the lift contractor direct. The Contractor shall pay the lift contractor a monthly maintenance fee of $630.00 per lift or prorated accordingly. The lift contractor may stop the use of the lifts if the maintenance fee is not paid up.

(i)

Smoking is strictly prohibited in the lifts.

(j)

At least three days prior to handing over each building block to the Employer, a joint inspection shall be conducted between the Contractor and the lift contractor for the purpose of handing the lift back to the lift contractor. Any damage that occur during or as a result of or arising from the temporary usage of the lift which affect the handing over of the lift to the Employer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All costs and expense for rectification and repair shall be borne by the Contractor, subject to verification by the SO Rep.

Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures In addition to the requirements specified in subclause 1.1.18 (or as amended) "Site Offices and Canteens" and other clauses and subclauses on temporary structures as specified, additional protective materials for the roof shall be incorporated into the roof design of these temporary structures. The protective material shall be made of 18mm thick timber ply. For site office and workers' quarters, the timber ply shall be laid in dual double layers; with one double layer laid just beneath the metal roofing sheet and another double layer at the bottom of the steel truss system supporting the metal roofing sheet. For all other temporary structures, such as canteens, toilets, carpenter yards, etc, the protective timber roof shall be laid in single double layer beneath the roofing sheet. However, at the sole discretion of the SO Rep, such protective materials may not be necessary if the temporary structures are deemed far beyond the nearest building block under construction. Under such cases, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor's PE shall consult with the SO Rep on these protective roofs before proceeding with the design of the temporary structures.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Construction Site Main Signboard and Hoarding Signage

1.1.24.1

The main signboard shall consist of an overall perspective of the project and is to be prominently located for maximum exposure to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. It is a separate signboard from BCA construction project data signboard. The design for the main signboard is :

1.1.24.2

(a)

Signboard Size : 4m (Width) x 5m (Height)

(b)

Perspective Size : 50% of signboard size (min) -

Perspective to be chosen by Consultant Supervising Architect and agreed by HDB Project Director.

-

Image printed on adhesive laminate film and mounted on 0.6mm thick aluminium sheet with 12mm thick waterproofed plywood backing. All exposed edges shall be weather protected.

-

The precinct name as approved by the Street and Building Names Board(SBNB) shall be prominently displayed and integrated with the perspective.

(c)

The background colour is HDB's corporate colour Pantone 485 (100M 91Y - process colour). The red symbolises new trends and directions in Singapore's public housing.

(d)

The fixing and securing of the main signboard shall be designed and endorsed by Professional Engineer. The main signboard shall be fixed with stainless steel screws of AISI Grade 304, screw driven and countersunked to form a sound fixing connection.

A pair of hoarding signage with photographs depicting HDB's Vision, shall to be located on each side of the main signboard. The design for the hoarding signage is: (a)

Hoarding Signage Size: 10m (Length) x 2.4m (Height)

(b)

HDB Corporate image printed on adhesive laminate film and mounted on 0.6mm thick aluminium sheet with 12mm thick waterproofed plywood backing. All exposed edges shall be weather protected.

(c)

The background colour is HDB's corporate colour Pantone 485 (100M 91Y - process colour). The red symbolises new trends and directions in Singapore's public housing.

(d)

The fixing and securing of hoarding signage shall be designed and endorsed by Professional Engineer. The hoarding signage shall be fixed with stainless steel screws of AISI Grade 304, screw driven and countersunked to form a sound fixing connection.

1.1.24.3

The Contractor shall submit a complete set of workshop drawings to be endorsed by his Professional Engineer and approved by the SO Rep. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove all or part of the signboard/signage or relocate and reconstruct all or part of the signboard/signage and reinstate all the affected grounds to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works, the main signboard and the hoarding signage shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep.

1.1.24.4

Where erection of signboards with more than one language is required, all translations shall be carried out by competent translators approved by the SO Rep. All completed signboards shall be approved by the SO Rep before they are erected. The Contractor shall bear all cost and expense arising.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Site Management Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the following details on site planning : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Site organizational structure; Names, roles and responsibilities of Contractor's site management, technical and supervisory staff; Manpower schedule for each trade; Schedule of heavy equipment and machineries; Measurement Plan and Survey method; Safety Management system;

Within 30 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the Master Construction Programme for each building blocks and entire project. Furnish the SO Rep with such further details and information as the SO Rep may require in regard to the above items. Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the site planning proposed by the Contractor is not able to ensure a smooth progress and of good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep is empowered to require the Contractor to make, at the Contractor’s own cost and expense, all necessary modifications to the plans. Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's site planning details, revised site planning details and further information provided under this subclause shall not in anyway affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract. At least 14 days before the commencement of the Works by the sub-contractors or the supply of the materials by the manufacturers / suppliers, the Contractor shall submit the names of his subcontractors for the Works and the manufacturers / suppliers of the materials to the SO Rep. Where the Contractor changes his sub-contractors / suppliers, he shall also submit such information to the SO Rep 14 days prior to the commencement of the Works or supply of materials. 1.1.26

Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel

1.1.26.1

Requirements For Employment Of Site Personnel Unless otherwise stated in other clauses and sub-clauses, the Contractor shall employ all the site personnel and station them full-time on the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract all as specified below : Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed Based On Contract Sum Value

S/N

1

Type of Personnel

Project Manager

BLDG12/S01.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Not Exceeding $10 Million

Exceeding $10 Million But Not Exceeding $25 Million




Exceeding $100 Million

One

One

One

One

One

One

Fully Agreed & Accepted Rate by the Contractor & the Employer For the Cost & Expense Deemed to be Allowed by the Contractor for the Employment of Each Personnel $8,600 per Project Manager per month


Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel (Cont'd)

1.1.26.1

Requirements For Employment Of Site Personnel

(Cont'd)

Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed Based On Contract Sum Value

S/N

Type of Personnel

2

Workplace Safety & Health Officer

3

Not Exceeding $10 Million





Exceeding $100 Million

Fully Agreed & Accepted Rate by the Contractor & the Employer For the Cost & Expense Deemed to be Allowed by the Contractor for the Employment of Each Personnel $5,000 per Workplace Safety & Health Officer per month $4,500 per Workplace Safety & Health Coordinator per month

Nil

One

One

One

One

One

Workplace Safety & Health Coordinator

One

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

4a

Site Supervisor for Architectural & Structural Works

One

Two

Three

Three

Four

Four

$4,000 per Site Supervisor per month

4b

Site Supervisor for Mechanical & Electrical Works

One

One

One

One

One

One

$4,000 per Site Supervisor per month

5

Horticultural* Supervisor

One

One

One

One

One

One

$2,000 per Horticultural Supervisor per Month

6

Environmental Control Officer

7

Security Guard

Nil

One

One

One

One

One

$2,000 per Environmental Control Officer per Month

One

One

One

One

One

One

$2,000 per Security Guard per month

* Note: The period and duration of employment of the Horticultural Supervisor shall be in accordance with sub-clause 26.1.5 and sub-clause 1.1.26.2(d) “Horticultural Supervisor”.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.26.2

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (a)

Project Manager The Contractor's Project Manager shall be qualified, competent and possess the skill, knowledge and ability to manage and co-ordinate the project effectively. The Project Manager shall be the Contractor's Representative as required under the Contract. The Project Manager shall possess the following minimum academic qualifications and experiences:

BLDG12/S01.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(i)

For Contract Sum of $50 million and above, the candidate shall have a Degree in Architecture, Civil / Structural / Electrical / Mechanical Engineering, Building Science or Quantity Surveying with 4 years of relevant post-graduate working experience in the building construction industry or 3 years of relevant post-graduate project management experience. The degree shall be recognized either by the respective Professional Bodies, professional institutions or Building and Construction Authority.

(ii)

For Contract Sum less than $50 million, the candidate shall have: (a)

A degree in Architecture, Civil / Structural / Electrical / Mechanical Engineering, Building Science or Quantity Surveying with 4 years of relevant post-graduate working experience in the building construction industry or 3 years of relevant post-graduate project management experience. The degree shall be recognized by the respective Professional Bodies professional institutions or Building and Construction Authority; or

(b)

A diploma in Civil / Structural / Mechanical / Electrical Engineering, Building Science, Building Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 10 years of relevant working experience in the building construction industry. The working experience should preferable be working on past HDB projects and shall be recognized by HDB as relevant working experience.



1.1.26.2

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (Cont’d) (b)

Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator/Workplace Safety & Health Officer (WSHO) The Contractor's Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator shall possess recognised and approved certification in construction safety to take charge of all matters related to safety. The said Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator shall spend their time fully performing the following : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

To supervise safety and promote safety conduct; To inspect and rectify any unsafe place of work; To correct any unsafe practice; and To ensure that the provisions of the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation made thereunder are complied with.

The Contractor shall employ a full-time Workplace Safety & Health Officer to comply with the requirements under the Workplace Safety & Health Act, Workplace Safety & Health (Workplace Safety and Health Officers) Regulations. The Workplace Safety & Health Officer shall implement appropriate safety measures and ensure a safe work environment and safe work procedures in accordance with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and Subsidiary Legislation including the provisions of the Workplace Safety & Health (Construction) Regulations 2007 and the requirements specified under the Contract. (c)

Site Supervisors The Contractor's Site Supervisors shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant skills, knowledge and the ability to supervise and co-ordinate the Works; and with the following academic qualifications and experience : (i)

Possess a National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years of similar capacity relevant working experience in the building construction industry; or

(ii)

Possess a recognised Diploma in Civil/Structural/ Mechanical/Electrical Engineering, Building Science, Building Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 3 years of relevant working experience in the building construction industry; or

(iii)

Possess a Degree (foreign university) in Civil/Structural/ Mechanical/Electrical Engineering and at least 2 years of relevant working experience in the local building construction industry; or

(iv)

Possess a Building Construction Safety Supervisor (BCSS) Certificate.

Notwithstanding the requirements as specified in (i) to (iv) (inclusive) above, where the Contractor is required to employ the Site Supervisor for mechanical/electrical Works, the Site Supervisor must be suitably qualified under the mechanical/electrical engineering academic qualifications and with the relevant work experiences and also received adequate safety and health training to ensure that the work which he oversees or supervises can be carried out safely. (d)

Horticultural Supervisor The Horticultural Supervisor shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability to coordinate and supervise all tree planting and landscaping works. The qualified Horticultural Supervisor shall possess the minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture with a minimum of 2 years relevant experience. The appointment of Horticultural Supervisor has to be submitted to SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of any tree planting or landscaping works. The date of appointment shall take effect from the date of SO Rep approval and shall be in full-time site-based employment by the building contractor when the physical trees planting or/and landscaping work is progressing on site till Substantial Completion of the Works.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 1-21

1.1.26


1.1.26.2

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (Cont’d) (e)

Environmental Control Officer (ECO) The Contractor shall employ Environmental Control Officer (hereinafter referred to as "ECO" for the purposes of this subclause) to comply with the Environmental Public Health Act – Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999. The ECO shall be employed on a full-time basis where the Contract Sum is above $50 million or on a part-time basis where the Contract Sum is between $10 million and $50 million. The ECO shall be responsible for monitoring and advising the Contractor on the following main areas: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi)

Control of disease-bearing vectors and rodents. Proper management and disposal of solid waste. Control of noise and dust pollution. Drainage and silt control. Air and water pollution control. General housekeeping management of the project/Site.

The ECO shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt corrective actions to ensure that the workers' quarters, canteens, toilets, site offices and other facilities and general surroundings of the Site are kept clean, tidy and hygienic at all times. In addition, the ECO shall also ensure that the Site is kept mosquito-free at all times. The ECO shall compile and submit environmental related data to the SO rep upon request. This data can include: (i) (ii) (iii)

Water, electricity and diesel consumption on site. Concrete wastage on site. Amount of construction debris generated on site.

The ECO shall also compile a record of on any checks by the authorities (eg. NEA for noise & vectors, PUB for ECM) and the result of such checks. This record shall also be submitted to SO rep upon request. If the Works have been certified more than 95% completed, the contractor may write to NEA’s Regional Office to seek approval to allow the ECO to perform on a part-time basis and copied to SO rep. There shall be no cost recovery from the contractor if NEA is agreeable to allow the ECO to perform on a part-time basis. (f)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Security Guards (i)

The Contractor shall employ Security Guards from agencies that are certified/accredited to the Association of Certified Security Agencies (ACSA) or the Security Association Singapore (SAS). A listing of these certified/accredited security agencies may be obtained from the Licensing Division of the Singapore Police Force. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing on the security agency who supplied the Security Guards, within two weeks from the commencement date of the Time for Completion.

(ii)

All Security Guards shall at all times be in proper uniform of their security agency with their names and identification tags on. Essential security enforcement equipment such as whistle, torchlight, walkie talkie etc shall be provided to them. They shall respond within five to ten minutes whenever they are called either through telephone or walkie talkie. They shall also have the necessary access to the telephone at the Contractor's site office during and after normal working hours for emergency reporting purpose. The Security Guards must not be armed with weapons that are disallowed by the Singapore Police Force.

(iii)

A proper guard post with adequate security lighting and communication facilities shall be erected at every major entrance to the Site. All temporary gates/openings along the fencing/hoarding shall be guarded by a Security Guard during normal working hours and locked up after normal working hours.

(iv)

The Security Guards shall be responsible for the general security of the Site and shall ensure that unauthorized personnel and vehicles do not entered the Site. They shall also responsible for the security of the contractor and HDB's site offices during and after normal working hours.



1.1.26.2

Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (Cont’d) (f)

1.1.26.3

Security Guards (Cont’d) (v)

The Security Guards shall be employed to perform site security duties on a 24 hour basis. A minimum of one (1) Security Guard shall be on duty at any one shift including Sundays and public holidays throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. No Security Guard shall leave the Site until he is properly relieved by a replacement, even if his shift has ended.

(vi)

A proper record of the Security Guards' attendance must be kept and made available to the SO Rep upon request.

Replacement Of Site Personnel The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own costs and expenses if any of the site personnel is found not carrying his duties to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

1.1.26.4

Compliance With Requirements And Submission Of Information Of Site Personnel (a)

The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep within 21 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the name, identity card numbers and documentary evidence of the educational qualifications and experience of all the site personnel employed by the Contractor. The employment of the site personnel shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

(b)

In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements and keep records and submit these information to the SO Rep where required by him as specified below :

BLDG12/S01.DOC(22) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(i)

Except for the security guards and safety supervisors, all the site personnel employed shall be on the Contractor's monthly payroll. The Contractor shall keep records indicating the number of days the site personnel are employed for each month and the monthly contributions to CPF. Such information may be proof of employment of the site personnel.

(ii)

A letter from every site personnel employed by the Contractor to testify that he is employed full-time for this Site only;

(iii)

Further to (ii) above, if any site personnel is found to be working in more than one running site, the particular site personnel will be barred from working in all the Employer's sites for a period of two years from the date of the breach. It shall be the Contractor's duty to bring to the attention of the site personnel the contents of this clause.


Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel

1.1.26.5

Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel

1.1.26.6

(Cont'd)

(a)

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.

(b)

In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site personnel, required by the Contract or not employing such site personnel for the period or periods required by the Contract, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates as specified for each of the respective site personnel per month and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor. These rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the employment of each of the respective site personnel for each month. For the purpose of this clause, each of the site personnel shall be employed by the Contractor for at least 20 days within a calendar month before he can be considered as being employed for that particular month under the Contract, except where expressly specified otherwise. In the event that the first and/or the last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, have less than 20 days, each of the site personnel shall be employed for the full number of days in the said first and last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.

(c)

Notwithstanding other provisions in this clause, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and expenses over and above the agreed rates specified herein in complying with the requirements stipulated in this clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in full.

Application For Release Of Site Personnel The SO Rep may consider a request by the Contractor in writing to release any of his site personnel from the obligations of this clause if the Works has been certified more than 95% complete. It shall be up to the absolute discretion of the SO Rep to decide whether the Contractor's site personnel can be released and the number of site personnel to be released as provided for under this clause. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained in this respect.

1.1.26.7

Superintending Officer's Decision All differences and/or disputes arising under this clause including all subclauses under it (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(23) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts For completed service roads, driveways and drains within the Site contract boundary, the Contractor is obliged to maintain washing and cleaning; and making good any damage arising from their own actions to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the SO Rep may exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities' to impose a charge against the Contractor. Alternatively, the SO Rep may engage other parties to execute the outstanding works and all costs and expenses incurred shall be borne by the Contractor. For lift installation works, after taking over of the lift door jambs from the lift contractor, the Contractor has to schedule and complete all the brickworks (beside the lift door jambs) at all lift walls in a building block within the stipulated time period as specified below : Number of storeys

Maximum Period for Building Works (ie. Brickwork) per building block

Less than or equal to 30 storeys

2.0 weeks

Equal to or higher than 31 storeys

2.6 weeks

The Contractor may use the lifts temporarily for their material hoisting and other works associated with the preparation for handing over subject to the terms and conditions in his agreement with the relevant lift contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for any delay of the building completion arising from the late completion of the brickwall at the lift lobbies to enable the lift contractor in carrying out the lift assembly works within the lift shaft at each building block. 1.1.28

Cables/Services Detection The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and have ascertained its nature and made provision in the Contract Sum or prices for the type of ground conditions, constraints and underground services. The Contractor shall provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services prior to the commencement of excavation or any other work such as driving of piles, piling of earth electrode and lightning conductors or poles and columns which are liable to damage existing buried services. The Contractor shall engage EMA licensed cables/services detection workers to carry out all cables/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or area of other work shall be checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid formation to cover the entire area of work. The extent of checking carried out shall be properly documented and countersigned by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs and charges incurred if he damages any services. The Contractor shall seek assistance from the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board if he has any query on the location of existing cables/services belonging to the Government Department or Statutory Board. In the case of PowerGrid or SPSL cables/services, the Contractor may seek assistance from the Cable Damage Prevention Unit, PowerGrid or SPSL. In addition, the Contractor shall engage the services of EMA Registered Excavator Operator only for all excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ EMA Registered Excavator Operator, no excavation Works shall be allowed.

1.1.29

Reserved

1.1.30

Damage To Public/Private Property In the event damage is caused to public/private services or property such as cables, pipes, fittings and fixtures etc. by the Contractor whether by accident or otherwise leading to black-outs or other nuisance or inconvenience to the public or is likely to bring the Employer into disrepute, all costs and expenses incurred for necessary reinstatement or repairs including charges shall be recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(24) Sal(151211) (DPD)


General Housekeeping (a)

Periodic Cleaning Up All rubbish and debris shall be cleared from the Site and buildings under construction at least weekly or from time to time as they accumulate or when so directed by the SO Rep. Particular attention shall be directed to those areas where other tradesmen or contractors will be working in. Housekeeping shall be carried out in such manner and at such times so as not to cause any inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to minimize the risk of dust pollution

(b)

Provision Of Bins & Skip Containers For Waste And Debris During the course of construction, the Contractor shall provide proper bulk bins of adequate size for the proper storage of construction wastes, chemical wastes and debris in compliance with the relevant legislative requirements or regulations imposed by MEWR. Upon handing over of 1st building block, the Contractor shall provide one no. of skip container per building block for disposal of construction wastes and debris. This skip container shall be placed at the temporary lorry lot as provided for in the Contract. All skip containers shall be removed at the completion of the site works or upon the instruction of the SO Rep.

(c)

Dumping Of Debris And Rubbish The Contractor shall dispose of all unwanted debris, rubble or excess earth at MEWR approved dumping grounds/sites. All charges levied for the use of the dumping grounds/sites shall be borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor indiscriminately dumps construction debris, rubble or excess earth on land owned by the Employer or the Government without written permission, he shall remove all such debris, rubble, or excess earth from such land at his own cost and expense. Further to this, SO Rep may exercise his contractual right and impose an administrative charge for the irregularities committed in accordance with Clause 1.6 “Nuisance And Irregularities”.

1.1.32

Reserved

1.1.33

Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection The Contractor shall complete the Works or any phase or sub-phase thereof as set out in the Letter of Acceptance in accordance to the Time for Completion or any subsequent extensions of time approved by the Superintending Officer. All completed Works or any phase or sub-phase thereof shall be handed over to the Employer within or by the Time for Completion or any subsequent extensions of time approved by the Superintending Officer, prior to the issue of any Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall note that the Time for Completion has been computed to include the time allowed for preparation of handing over inspections. Therefore, the duration required for the preparation of and the handing over inspections shall be incorporated into the Programme for the Works or revised Programme, if any, to be submitted to the SO Rep for approval, as required under the Contract.

1.1.34

Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc The Contractor shall ensure that he or his subcontractors/suppliers do not quote or make reference to the project design, products, technologies or methods of construction used in the Works for trade promotion, advertisement, publicity, etc or for any other purposes without the written approval of the SO Rep. This requirement shall not be applicable to proprietary products, technologies or methods of construction introduced by the Contractor or his subcontractors/suppliers.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(25) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Provision Of Respiratory Masks Building contractors are required to provide suitable respirators for their outdoor workers, as well as the supervising consultants' site staff and HDB officers at the sites, when the haze level at the site reaches a very unhealthy level with a 24-hr Pollutant Standards Index (PSI) value measured by NEA exceeding 200 or upon appropriate public advisories by NEA The air-purifying respirators must have an efficiency to filter 95% of 0.3 micron diameter fine particle size, commonly referred to as N95. The contractor shall start to purchase and stock up the N95 respiratory masks when the haze condition is getting into the unhealthy range with the PSI Index value exceeding 100.

1.1.36

Reserved

1.1.37

Reserved

1.1.38

Research Work The Contractor shall provide and render all necessary assistance to the SO Rep or other authorised persons conducting research work or procuring publicity materials on any aspects of the construction Works in progress. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall also provide all brochures, quotations, sub-contract agreements, invoices, etc from his subcontractors, suppliers and specialists for goods and services provided for the Works, all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

1.1.39

Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (A)

Programme Requirement For Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms The Contractor is required in the programme for the Works to be submitted under the Contract and any revised programme to show completion of the following items of works to the satisfaction of the SO Rep within the time periods specified below : Item of Works a)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(26) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Pump Rooms

Specified Time Period a)

3 calendar months

b)

Consumer Switch Rooms

b)

5 calendar months

c)

Lift Wells including Machine Rooms

c)

As specified in the table marked ## hereunder

d)

MDF Room

d)

6 calendar months

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

In each case prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion, or where there are sections, phases or sub-phases, prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the Letter of Acceptance for the respective sections, phases or sub-phases containing the item(s) of works; or by any subsequent extension of time certified by the Superintending Officer for the completion of the Works or such sections, phases or sub-phases.

Prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion, or where there are sections, phases or sub-phases, prior to the earliest expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the Letter of Acceptance for the respective section, phase or sub-phase containing a residential building block or by any subsequent extension of time certified by the Superintending Officer for the completion of the Works or such section, phase or sub-phase containing the residential building block.


Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (Cont'd) (A)

Programme Requirement For Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms ## Storey Height of Building Block

(Cont'd)

Specified Time Period for Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (In each case prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion, or where there are sections, phases or sub-phases, prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the Letter of Acceptance for the respective sections, phases or sub-phases containing the item(s) of works; or by any subsequent extension of time certified by the Superintending Officer for the completion of the Works or such sections, phases or sub-phases) For Lift stopping at every storey

7 and below

4.50 months (i.e. 3.50 months + 1 month*)

8 to 12


13 to 16


17 to 20


21 to 25


26 to 30


31 to 40


* where the Contractor is required to undertake the temporary usage of tested and commissioned lifts (installed by others engaged by the Employer) for testing, commissioning of the Works and other building related Works prior to the certification of Substantial Completion.

This arrangement shall not be construed as giving rise to separate sections, phases or subphases of the Works. If the Contractor fails to complete any of such items of works within the respective specified time period or if the Superintending Officer shall certify in writing that in his opinion the Contractor despite previous warning by the SO Rep in writing fails to proceed with any of such items of works with due expedition and without delay, the Employer may himself complete such item or items of works or may employ any other contractors to complete such item(s) of works. All costs and expenses for such completion including the Employer's charges shall be recovered by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor under the Contract or may be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor without prejudice to any other remedies available to the Employer. In the event of the Employer completing any such item(s) of works, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of the Time for Completion or to any loss or expense in connection with or in consequence of the Employer carrying out such item(s) of works. The Defects Liability Period in respect of any such item(s) of works (whether completed by the Contractor or the Employer) shall not commence until the Substantial Completion of the respective sections, phases, or sub-phases in which such item(s) of works is (are) included. (B)

Payment In Connection With Work On MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms The Employer and Contractor agree that five per cent of the value of the building part of the Works as indicated by the Contractor in the Form of Tender or as amended by the Employer (if applicable) is deemed to be the value of the items of works representing the MDF Rooms, Consumer/Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms and Lift Wells including Machine Rooms irrespective of whether the Works include all or only one or more of such items of works. At any time during the carrying out of the Works, if in the opinion of the Superintending Officer, the progress of the Works is such that the Contractor is unable or unlikely to complete such Rooms and Lift Wells within the Specified Time Period for any of such Rooms and Lift Wells, the Superintending Officer shall be empowered to exclude from any certificate issued under Clause 32.2 of the Conditions up to five per cent of the said value of the building part of the Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to comply with the requirements of this subclause or clause. For the avoidance of doubt no such sum shall be excluded from the Final Account Certificate.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(27) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Handing Over Of Completed Works And Certification Of Substantial Completion (a)

The Works can be considered as substantially completed only upon: (i)

Obtaining a Temporary Occupation Permit and a Temporary Fire Permit; and

(ii)

Successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and the Employer’s Inspection Team.

(b)

The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works to ensure that all Defects are rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet the requirements of the Contract and the workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample Units or Sample Panels before the handing over inspection by the SO Rep and the Employer’s Inspection Team.

(c)

The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in advance to request for a handing over inspection and the following functional tests: S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Type Of Test Chokage Test For Main And Secondary Stack Pipe Leakage Test For Refuse Chute Flushing System Water Pipe Pressure For Concealed Pipes Gradient Test For house Drains Gradient Test For House Sewer Lines Water Test For Main Roof Water Test For Scupper Drains Watertightness Test For Window/Wall Joints Water Test For Toilet And Kitchen

% of Units To Be Tested Per Block 100 % 100% 10% of Total DU 100% 100% 100% 100% 5 Windows 25% of Total DU

Upon receipt of the Contractor’s request, the SO Rep shall arrange for a joint inspection date with the Employer’s Inspection Team. The Employer’s Inspection Team shall be present to witness the functional tests. In the event the tests fail to meet the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and without delay and arrange for re-tests in accordance with the requirements under the Contract. (d)

If the Works are considered to have met the requirements of the Contract including the approved workmanship standards and there is no major Defect detected during the handing over inspection, the Works shall then be taken over by the Employer’s Inspection Team. Otherwise, the SO Rep shall give the Contractor a list of outstanding Defect for rectification. The Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and without delay. The Contractor’s liability to rectify the Defect under this subclause shall not be limited to the list of Defect given by the SO Rep, but shall include all other Defect surfaced in between the handing over inspections. Upon completion of the Defect rectification, the Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in writing that all outstanding Defect found in the inspection, as well as all apparent Defect surfaced in between the handing over inspections have been rectified and to request for another handing over inspection. The provision of the preceding sub clause (c) above shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

(e)

If the Contractor is unable to hand over the Works to the Employer after two handing over inspections, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities.

(f)

The Contractor shall on Substantial Completion of the Works, remove all rubbish, Construction Equipment and surplus materials, wash and scrub clean all floors, staircases, pavings, drains and all parts of the buildings and leave the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit for habitation. The Site and periphery shall be cleared of all rubbish left from the Contractor's work.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(28) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Reserved

1.1.42

Management Of Defects Rectification

1.1.42.1

Employment And Deployment of Site Supervisor The Contractor shall employ and deploy the number of site supervisors full time on the Site for every day where Defect rectification Works is carried out during the Defects Liability Period (DLP) as specified hereunder : Total No of Dwelling Units

No. Of Site Supervisors For Architectural And Structural Defect Rectification Works

Less than 800

One

Equal or more than 800

Two

The Contractor's site supervisor shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant skills, knowledge and the ability to co-ordinate and supervise the Defect investigation and rectification Works; and possess either one of the following academic qualifications and experience: (a)

National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years of similar capacity relevant working experience in the building construction industry;

(b)

Recognized Diploma in Civil/Structural/Mechanical/Electrical Engineering, Building Science, Building Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 3 years of relevant working experience in the building construction industry;

The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own cost and expense if any of the site supervisor is found not carrying out their duties to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site supervisors required by the Contract or not employing such site supervisors for the period or periods required by the Contract, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate of $133/- per day per site supervisor not employed and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor. This rate shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the cost and expense allowed by the Contractor for the employment of a site supervisor for each day. Notwithstanding other provisions in this subclause, if the Contractor incurs additional cost and expense over and above the agreed rate specified herein in complying with the requirements stipulated in this subclause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional cost and expense in full. On expiry of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor may put forth a written request to the SO Rep for the release of the site supervisor. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained with this request.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(29) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 1-30

(Cont’d)

1.1.42


1.1.42.2

Standby Plumber And Electrician For Restoring Essential Services

1.1.42.3

(a)

The Contractor shall also provide a stand-by plumber and a stand-by electrician for 24 hour stand-by duties for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays, throughout the Defects Liability Period. The plumber and electrician need not be stationed on the Site but would be called upon to rectify Defect causing disruption to essential supply such as water and electricity

(b)

The Contractor or his representatives shall be contactable 24 hours a day, for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays throughout the Defects Liability Period by means of telephone, handphone, radio pager, facsimile or any other suitable modes of communications

(c)

The stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician shall attend to such Defect within 30 minutes from the time a request for their services is made. They shall carry out the rectification expeditiously and in a workmanlike manner to restore the essential services quickly to minimise any inconveniences to the residents. In the event the stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician fail to attend or fail to attend within the time frame stipulated, the SO Rep shall exercise his right to impose charges under clause 1.6 'Nuisance and Irregularities".

Information of Key Personnel st Within fourteen days from the Date of Substantial Completion of the 1 building block, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the following:

1.1.42.4

(a)

Name and contact numbers of the Contractor's key management staff and the appointed site supervisors for Defect investigation and rectification Works within the Defects Liability Period;

(b)

Name and contact numbers of the relevant manufacturers, suppliers and specialist contractors etc.,

(c)

Name and contact numbers of the stand-by plumber and stand-by electrician.

Defects Investigation And Rectification During Defects Liability Period The Contractor shall within fourteen working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep, at the Contractor's own cost and expense, investigate, repair, rectify and make good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all Defect, imperfections, shrinkages and other faults arising from or out of the use of materials or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract or from neglect or failure of the Contractor to comply with any obligation on his part under the Contract which may become manifest. Prior to the commencement of any Defect rectification Works, the Contractor shall submit the schedule of repair and method statement for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall mobilise only skilled and certified workers who are capable of executing the Works in accordance with the method statement as approved by the SO Rep. All Works must be attended to and supervised in person by the appointed site supervisor. Dust and noise must be minimised, whenever possible and cleaning up must be carried out daily if the unit is occupied and/or after the repairs. Inconvenience caused to others should be minimised by completing the Defect rectification Works in the shortest possible time. If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the SO Rep may exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor. Without prejudice to the foregoing provisions, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage other persons or contractors to repair, rectify and make good all such Defect, imperfections, shrinkages and other faults if the same are not repaired, rectified and made good after fourteen working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep, and the cost and expense incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor. In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(30) Sal(151211) (DPD)



(Cont’d)

1.1.42.5

Rectification of Defects Prior To Issuance Of Final Completion Certificate For the purpose of certifying completion of Defect rectification prior to the issuance of the Final Completion Certificate, one month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. A second final joint inspection shall be arranged to verify the completion of Defect rectification. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final joint inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

1.1.43

Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic The contractor shall be required to implement necessary precautionary measures as advised by Ministry of Health or other relevant Authorities during a disease pandemic. Based on the recommendations from government's advisory, the contractor shall follow up expeditiously to plan for such contingency and stock up necessary supplies or equipment (e.g. thermometers) so as to be able to implement the required measures in a short notice.

1.1.44

Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone The Contractor shall comply with the Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice for Railway Protection and the Mass Rapid Transit (Rail Protection, Restricted Activities) Regulations for construction of the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone and railway safety zone. The Contractor shall submit proposals on the effective measures for the protection of MRT above ground structure together with the detail of activities of mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical equipment adjacent to the MRT line structures to the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to the use of such Construction Equipment. No jib or lifting appliance or any other moving or stationary part of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall encroach within 6.0 m on plan from the edge of the nearest MRT above-ground or at-grade structure unless the Construction Equipment is restricted to work beneath the structure. The foundation of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall be certified structurally sound and adequate by the Contractor's PE prior to its installation. Auto cut-off system shall be installed for tower cranes to prevent the top of the boom to swing closer than 6.0 m from edge of the viaduct structure. The jibs of the cranes must always be pointed away from the MRT line structure. The temporary access shall be stable and level for the Construction Equipment to move on. Regular checks shall be carried out to ensure that all mechanised Construction Equipment are in good working condition at all times. Only experienced, trained and competent operators shall be employed for mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical equipment. Temporary height restriction gantry with signboard shall be installed 6.0 m away from the edge of both sides of the viaduct structure for any access passing underneath the MRT line structures.

1.1.45

Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings All legal costs, charges and expenses (including but not limited to solicitors' fees as between solicitor and client) incurred by the Employer for the purpose of or incidental to the enforcement by the Employer of any rights and remedies under the Contract or any other contracts between the Employer and the Contractor or in respect of any garnishee proceedings which may be brought or commenced against the Employer by the Contractor's creditors may be deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or other bonds.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(31) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements In the event the management and maintenance of the Employer's properties or the Works or any part thereof shall be taken over by a duly constituted Town Council, the Employer shall have the right to arrange for and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept to the whole or part of the Contract to be novated and/or assigned to the aforesaid Town Council upon the same terms and conditions. The Employer shall also have the right to require and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept that any Deeds of Warranty and/or Maintenance Agreements and/or Bonds and/or Deposits required under the Contract shall be executed and submitted direct to and for the benefit of the aforesaid Town Council. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs, expenses, stamp duties and losses arising from compliance with these provisions.

1.1.47

Completion Of Site Works The Contractor shall take note that Site Works are phased together with one of the building blocks as one phase of the Works. Site Works refer to all site structures/facilities, such as, but not limited to, children play ground/hard courts/footpaths etc., and landscaping works, such as earth mound formation, turfing, trees and shrubs planting etc., where included in the Works It is essential to the Employer for the Site Works and the building block which are phased together as one phase of the Works to be completed and handed over to the Employer as one phase. In the event the Contractor fails to substantially complete the Site Works and the building block as one phase within or by the Time for Completion or any subsequent extension of time approved by the Superintending Officer, the rate of liquidated damages for the whole phase as stipulated in the Appendix shall be imposed for every day the Works for the phase so remains incomplete.

1.1.48

Erection Of Temporary Buildings In addition to the submission of the site layout plan, the Contractor shall further submit detailed structural plans and design calculations, certified by his PE, for temporary buildings of two storeys or higher, to the SO Rep not later than three months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or 2 weeks before the actual commencement of the Works for such proposals whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission. His PE may make use of the Drawings in the Standard Construction Detail Manual as a guide to the design and submission of the temporary buildings in compliance with the Technical Guidelines for the Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Sites, including any amendment thereto, issued by FSSD; and the Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations (2000 edition) including any latest requirements by BCD, BCA. The Contractor shall erect all such temporary buildings in strict compliance with his Professional Engineer's plans and calculations. The Works shall be supervised by the Contractor's PE. Not later than two weeks after the completion of the Works, the Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate of Supervision, stating that he has carried out such supervision work and is fully satisfied that the Works have been constructed in accordance with his structural plans and design calculations as approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(32) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Goods and Services Tax The Contractor shall not include in the rates and prices quoted in the Contract Sum, the GST chargeable for the supply of goods, services or Works required in the Contract. All rates and prices quoted shall be exclusive of the GST. The Employer shall reimburse the Contractor any GST charged on the goods, services or Works supplied. The Contractor shall declare his GST status in his Tender. The Contractor shall clearly indicate whether he is, or whether he will be a taxable person under the GST Act. The Contractor shall, if available, furnish the GST registration number to the Employer. The Contractor will be deemed to be a taxable person if no declaration to the contrary is made in the Form of Tender. The Contractor who declares himself to be a non-taxable person under the GST Act but who becomes a taxable person after he has been awarded the contract shall forthwith inform the Employer of his change in GST status. The Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement by the Employer of any GST charged on the goods, services or Works he supplies after his change in GST status.

1.1.50

1.1.51

Works And Materials Warranty (a)

In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to co-warrant the Works and/or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject to such other requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed by the Contractor with the Employer's prior written approval, and the Employer will approve such employment if the Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of Warranty prescribed in the Specifications. If such written undertaking is not given, then the Contractor shall appoint an alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The employment of any Specialist who refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised by the Employer, and no Specialist may commence any work or supply any materials before his written undertaking is given.

(b)

The Employer's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in any way affect or diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the Employer in respect of any Works or materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the provisions of this subclause shall not in any way affect or diminish the Employer's entitlement to withhold the payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.

Cost Of Water And Electricity The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate supply of water and electricity for the Site including for the purposes of conducting tests on the Works. Where directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall provide and allow other contractors on the Site employed by the Employer, free and unrestricted use of the water and electricity for carrying out testing and commissioning of such other contractors' works. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses for the water and electricity consumed at the Site including the cost of water and electricity consumed for carrying out testing and commissioning by such other contractors employed by the Employer on the Site. Where applicable, the SO Rep may at his sole discretion, direct the Contractor to transfer the account for the water and electricity supply to the Employer or such Town Council(s) or such other party. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this subclause.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(33) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Site Control And Security

1.1.52.1

Identification Pass The Contractor shall provide serially-numbered security identification pass to each of his workers and subcontractors' workers. The identification pass shall consist of the worker's photograph, name, identification card number or passport number and name of the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue temporary entry pass, on a day to day basis, to workers from other contractors employed by the Employer or other Government/Statutory Board authorities or other companies carrying out works on the Site. The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling and issuing these security identification passes and temporary entry passes. The Contractor shall maintain an updated list of the passes issued for accountability and to facilitate enforcement checks. The Contractor shall ensure that all workers on the Site wear and display their passes prominently and securely at all times while working on the Site.

1.1.52.2

Erection And Removal Of Temporary Metal Hoarding Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a continuous metal hoarding around the entire contract boundary before the commencement of the Works. The hoarding shall be erected at not less than 300mm away from any permanent structure such as footway, drain, pipeline etc. The Contractor shall provide metal gates/doors for the main and side entrances. Location of these entrances shall be approved by the SO Rep. There shall be a maximum of two entry points for the entire Site, unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The metal gate at the main entrance (for vehicular traffic) shall be closed and locked up after working hours when construction activities have stopped. A side entrance beside the main gate shall be provided for passage of workers and visitors that can be monitored by the Security Officers. These entrances/gates and the perimeter shall be well lit during the hours of darkness (7.00 pm to 7.00 am). The hoarding shall be constructed in accordance with the standard Drawings and detailing. Should the Contractor fail to comply with this requirement, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose any action deemed necessary and any cost and expense incurred thereof including charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor. The materials used for the metal hoarding shall comply with the following minimum requirements : (a)

0.42mm thick zincalume steel or galvanised steel for the metal hoarding laid horizontally. All exposed metal sheet surfaces of the metal hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns colourbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing coat, graphic pattern and safety slogan shall be in accordance to the theme and colour of each estate. The Contractor shall obtain the theme and colour of each estate from the SO Rep.

(b)

Timber posts and horizontal bracings of common grade timber under strength Group A of Singapore Standard CP 7. If steel members are used instead of timber, the steel members shall be of Grade 43 of BS 4360.

(c)

Grade 20 concrete foundation.

(d)

Undamaged recycled metal hoarding are allowed subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All exposed surface of the recycled metal hoarding shall be painted with at least 3 coats of approved paint. The finishing coat, graphic pattern and safety slogan shall be in accordance to the theme and colour of each estate. The Contractor shall obtain the theme and colour of each estate from the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval, the SO Rep reserve the right to instruct replacement of installed metal hoarding that are found dented or bent.

The hoarding and gates shall be maintained at all times to ensure no deterioration of the structures and fading of the paint works throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. 'DANGER - KEEP OUT' and 'NO TRESPASSING' signs in the four official languages are to be displayed on the exterior side of the hoarding. Such signs shall be painted in red on white background with reflective material and approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(34) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Site Control And Security

(Cont’d)

1.1.52.2

Erection And Removal Of Temporary Metal Hoarding

(Cont’d)

As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove all or part of the hoarding or relocate and reconstruct all or part of the hoarding and reinstate all the affected grounds to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works, the hoarding shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep. 1.1.53

Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather The assessment of exceptionally inclement weather shall not take place until the expiry of the Time for Completion or previously extended Time for Completion. Such assessment shall be made on the following basis : (a)

There shall first be assessed the number of wet days and equivalent wet days (as specified in paragraph (f) below on which the Contractor has been substantially delayed in the carrying out of the Works by rain (hereinafter called "delay days").

(b)

A wet day shall be one where the rainfall figure as calculated as described in this paragraph exceeds 10.2 mm during the 24 hour period used by the Meteorological Service. The rainfall figure shall be the average island-wide rainfall calculated by the Employer using rainfall records received by the Employer monthly from the 5 Standard Stations of the Meteorological Service.

(c)

The expected number of wet days during the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may be shall be derived from the following table which is deemed to record the average number of wet days for the respective months based on the Meteorological Service's records between 2001 and 2010 (hereinafter referred to as "expected wet days") : Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun

8

3

9

9

6

5

Jul

Aug

Sep

Oct

Nov

Dec

7

6

7

7

9

9

(d)

For each month of the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may be there shall be assessed whether the number of delay days in that month is more than (positive) or equal to (zero) or less than (negative) the expected wet days in that month.

(e)

The positive, zero and negative monthly assessments made in accordance with paragraph (d) above shall then be added together and a net total reached. If such total is a positive number then such total shall constitute the extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather.

(f)

The period commencing from excavation works to the completion of ground beams where the ground floor slab is not a critical activity or the completion of ground floor slab where the ground floor slab is a critical activity is hereinafter called "sub-structure construction period" and the works carried out during such period is hereinafter called "sub-structure works". For the assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the sub-structure construction period, the respective monthly average number of wet days as specified in paragraph (b) above shall be multiplied by a factor of 2.0 if the wet days are less than or equal to 5 or by a factor of 1.6 if the wet days exceed 5. The product so derived shall be referred to as "equivalent wet days" and are subject to a maximum of 30 days per month.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(35) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather (Cont’d) (g)

1.1.54

If the sub-structure works do not commence on the first day of the month, then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works commence shall be prorated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month. Similarly, if the sub-structure works are not completed on the last calendar day of the month, then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works are completed shall be pro-rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month. The assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the sub-structure construction period shall be based on the actual sub-structure construction period of each building block, including multi-storey carpark / garage.

Shortfall In Floor Area The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense ensure that the flats constructed comply in all respects with all Drawings and Specifications. In the event of any departure from such Drawings and Specifications resulting in a shortfall in the floor area of any of the flats constructed as compared to the same floor area as measured in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall indemnify, reimburse and hold the Employer harmless in respect of any demands, claims, damages, loss and/or expense (including any legal fees and expense that the Employer may incur) arising therefrom. The Contractor shall remain so liable notwithstanding the issuance by the Superintending Officer of any Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Completion Certificate and/or any Final Account Certificate under the Contract.

1.1.55

Registered Trade Subcontractors And M&E Subcontractors

1.1.55.1

Registered Trade Subcontractors The Contractor, with the exception of his own direct employed workers, shall engage only BCA registered contractors or corporations/firms listed in the HDB Materials List for executing the Works for the following trades : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(36) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Timber formwork; Metal formwork; Steel reinforcement work; Structural steel fitting; Concreting; Bricklaying; Joinery; Painting; Plastering; Roofing; Tiling; Electrical engineering; Air-conditioning, refrigeration & ventilation works; Plumbing & sanitary and gas piping; Fire protection; Waterproofing; Piling; Concrete repairs; Metal work; Cable installation & road reinstatement; Drain laying/Pavement & kerb construction; Curtain Wall/Cladding; Metal scaffolding (Erectors);


Registered Trade Subcontractors And M&E Subcontractors

1.1.55.1

Registered Trade Subcontractors

(Cont’d)

(Cont’d)

At least 14 days before the commencement of the Works by the subcontractors for the respective trades, the Contractor shall submit the name of his subcontractors for the Works to the SO Rep. Where the Contractor changes his subcontractor, he shall also submit such information to the SO Rep. For the purposes of this clause, the relevant BCA register and HDB Materials List shall be those applicable at the commencement of work for the respective trades. The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay in the progress of the Works owing to his failure to ensure the required on-time registration of his subcontractors and no extension to the Time for Completion shall be granted on account of such delays. 1.1.55.2

M&E Subcontractors Subcontractors engaged by the Contractor to carry out the mechanical or electrical engineering works shall be BCA registered contractors of at least L2 grade. In addition, the contractor or his electrical subcontractor shall also be registered with Qualified Electrical Contractors Registry by IES/ACES.

1.1.56

Insurance Policies The Contractor shall warrant that the insurance policies issued in accordance with Clauses 27 and 28 of the Conditions shall include the following requirements : (A)

(B)

Insurance For Work Injury Compensation (i)

The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form as produced in Appendix A11.

(ii)

The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his subcontractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".

(iii)

The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract. The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.

Insurance For Personal Injury And Property Damage (i)

The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and all his sub-contractors.

(ii)

The limits of liability shall be read as follows : (a) (b)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(37) Sal(151211) (DPD)

In respect of any one accident : $2,000,000.00 Unlimited for the period of insurance

(iii)


(iv)

The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read 30 days.


Insurance Policies (B)

Insurance For Personal Injury And Property Damage (v)

(vi)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(38) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(Cont’d) (Cont’d)

The Policy shall expressly include coverage of the following risks : (a)

Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by the Insured's sub-contractors or by such sub-contractors' employees.

(b)

Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by or connected with or arising from the ownership, possession or use by or on behalf of the Insured of any equipment or machinery not expressly specified in the Schedule of such equipment or machinery.

(c)

Liability assumed by the Insured by agreement, unless such liability would have attached to the Insured notwithstanding such agreement.

(d)

Liability in respect of loss or damage to property belonging to or in the charge or control of the Insured or of any servant or agent of the Insured.

(e)

Liability in respect of injury to or illness of any person or loss or damage to any property or land or building caused by vibration or removal or weakening of support.

(f)

Liability in respect of injury, illness, loss or damage caused by or connected with or arising from any commodity, article or thing supplied, repaired, altered or treated by or to the order of the Insured, happening at any of the Insured's premises.

The Policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements : (a)

"This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's insurance obligations with regard to personal injuries or death and injury or damage to property real or personal (including property of the Housing & Development Board but not the Works themselves) arising out of or in the course of or by reasons of the carrying out of the Works stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)"

(b)

"Each of the parties comprising the Insured shall for the purpose of this Policy be considered as a separate and distinct unit and the words "the Insured" shall be considered as applying to such party in the same manner as if a separate policy had been issued to each of the parties and the insurers hereby agree to waive all rights of subrogation action which they may have or acquire against any of the aforesaid parties arising out of any accident in respect of which any claim is made hereunder provided nevertheless that nothing in this clause shall be deemed to increase the limitation on extent of Insurer's liability in respect of any one accident or series of accidents as stated in the Schedule".

(c)

"This Policy is extended to cover the employees and/or representatives of the Housing & Development Board, consultants, other professional parties and Resident Technical Officer whilst on the contract site as third parties".

(d)

"Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".

(e)

"All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".


Insurance Policies (C)

1.1.57

(Cont’d)

Insurance For Works (i)

The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor.

(ii)

The Works insured shall read the project title given in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance.

(iii)

The sum insured shall be the same as the Contract Sum.

(iv)


(v)

The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read 30 days.

(vi)

The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements : (a)

"This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's Works insurance obligations stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)".

(b)

"Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".

(c)

"All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".

Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site The Contractor shall keep at the Site a complete set of the signed contract documents described in the Agreement, a complete set of the further or revised Drawings and instructions referred to in the Conditions, and the relevant Codes Of Practice or Standards referred to in the Specifications. These documents shall be made available for inspection and use by the Superintending Officer, SO Rep and any other person authorised by the Superintending Officer in writing.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(39) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Provision Of Building Service Centre The Contractor shall provide an operationally ready Building Service Centre (BSC) upon the hand over of the first residential building block of the Works. The Building Service Centre shall remain open during the Defects Liability Period for a period of 1 year from the date of the hand over of the first residential building block in the Works. The Contractor shall liaise with the Employer's representative from the Building & Infrastructure Department (BID) for a suitable location within the Site at the void deck to host the Building Service Centre at least 2 months before the estimated handover date of the first residential building block. The minimum room size of BSC is 20m2. The Contractor shall use materials that are non-combustible and water-resistant properties to enclose the BSC. Provision of metal gate in front of the aluminium framed glass door is required. The plan layout of the items such as furniture, equipments within the BSC shall be submitted to Employer’s BID for comments before setting up. The Contractor shall employ a full-time staff to manage the Building Service Centre and attend to resident's feedback and complaints. The staff hired must have the relevant working experience in building trade and with educational qualifications with a minimum pass in at least 2 subjects at GCE 'A' levels or a Diploma in Civil Engineering/Building/Architecture. The staff shall be bi-lingual and have a pleasant personality and friendly disposition. The Curriculum Vitae of the staff shall be submitted to the Employer's BID for approval prior to the confirmation of employment of the staff by the Contractor. The working hours of the staff shall be decided by the Employer's BID and is to be taken into consideration in the employment contract of the staff. The Employer’s BID shall reserve the right to increase the number of staff managing the Building Service Centre. The cost of employing the additional staff will be paid according to the schedule of rate. The Building Service Centre shall be equipped with air conditioner of minimum 10,000 BTU output, a minimum of 2 office desks with lockable drawers, 1.7m x 0.8m x 0.4m steel cabinet complete with shelves and double-leave doors, 2 Personal Computers (PCs), 1 printer, 1 colour scanner, 1 photostating machine, 1 fax machine, telephone with call waiting service & auto-message recording machine with ½ hour recording time, 40W fluorescent lighting, a 1 digital camera, torch lights, chairs , 0.3m x 0.3m aluminum suggestion box, 2.4m x 1.2m soft board and white board with accessories, hot & cold drinking water dispenser, drawing rack complete with drawing holders, timber shelves to display HDB’s renovation guide booklets and catalogue, 2 potted plants and office stationary. The 2 PCs shall have a minimum of Pentium 2.0 GHz clock speed with 256 MB of memory RAM with 17 inch CRT monitors and supported with minimum 512 kbps broadband internet access. Licensed software such as Microsoft Windows 98 (Second edition) or Windows XP and Microsoft Office 2000 Professional edition and Anti-virus software shall be installed in the PCs. The Contractor shall subscribe to e-PTC e-mail account and pay prevailing subscription charges for the duration that the Building Service Centre remains open. The Contractor shall provide and install a signboard at least 1.4m x 1.0m before starting the operation of the Building Service Centre. The design of the signboard shall be submitted to Employer's BID representative for approval. The Contractor is also to provide and install two notice boards at the Building Service Centre. Each notice board shall be of size: 1.8 m x 1.2 m with aluminium casing and aluminium frame door in-filled with 5mm thick clear polycarbonate sheet. Associated hinges, locksets including softboard with velvet finish and plywood to be provided and installed. The notice boards are to be lighted with necessary lightings and wirings. The Contractor is to maintain (e.g remove stain, markings, etc) and rectify, repair or replace the notice board if there are wear and tear and/or damages. The rectified, repaired or replaced notice boards are subject to the approval of HDB. The location of the notice boards shall be subjected to the approval of HDB. The Contractor shall pay for all rental and associated ancillary charges incurred by the Building Service Centre during the period of operation including all utility bills for water, electricity and registration and subscription charges for telephone, fax, internet broadband access, directional signboards guiding residents to locate the BSC at various blocks, resident’s defects feedback forms, service survey forms and BSC’s leaflets. After closing the Service Centre, the Contractor shall reinstate and make good any Defect to the Works.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(40) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Reserved

1.1.60

Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary buildings such as site office, site electrical substation, workers' quarters, site canteen, carpenter and bar bending sheds and temporary structures with continuous metal such as steel framework, scaffolding, tower cranes, batching plants and mobile machinery such as crawler cranes and concrete pumps are adequately and effectively protected from lightning strike at all times. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with and complying with latest edition of SS 555 and/or any latest requirements by the BCA. Notwithstanding the provisions of SS 555, reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural component and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing the design of the lightning protection system duly signed by the Contractor's professional electrical engineer (PE) stating that the design complies with latest edition of SS 555. The Contractor's professional electrical engineer shall provide a Certificate of Supervision together with the earthing reports after the lightning protection installation is completed. The Contractor's PE shall also conduct routine inspections including submitting earthing reports once every 6 months to ensure that the Contractor has provided adequate and effective lightning protection system for the Site. The inspection and earthing reports are to be submitted to the SO Rep and a copy submitted to the Employer's Safety Unit, Building & Infrastructure Department.

1.1.61

Computer Hardware And Software

1.1.61.1

Computerised Project Management Software Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide and implement a Computerised Project Management Software (hereinafter called the "CPMS" for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The SO Rep and the Employer's officers shall be allowed to have full and free access and usage of the CPMS at all times. The Contractor shall use the CPMS which shall be installed on the Site to prepare the programme for the Works based on the Critical Path Method. The programme for the Works shall include the duration, early start/finish dates, late start/finish dates and floats for all activities involved in the Works. It shall also include constraints and parameters such as fixed start/finish and target start/finish dates for the activities and milestones for the different phases or stages of the Works. The programme for the Works shall comprise of summary and detailed reports in textual and graphical forms. It shall be updated monthly or as and when required by the SO Rep to indicate, inter-alia, the critical path, actual start and finish dates of completed activities, actual start dates and percentage completion of the activities in progress and target start and finish dates of the delayed activities, their slippages and floats. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep the actual programme for the Works within three weeks after the Date of Substantial Completion.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(41) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Computer Hardware And Software (Cont’d)

1.1.61.2

Computer Hardware Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide the Computer Hardware during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Personal Computer The Contractor shall provide ONE Personal Computer (hereinafter referred to as "PC") for the exclusive use of the SO Rep. The PC shall comply with the following minimum specifications : (i)

An Intel Core 2 Duo running at a speed of 1.86GHz or higher;

(ii)

2 GB of Memory RAM or more;

(iii)

One 3½-inch form factor Serial ATA hard disk of total capacity of 80 GB or more [The hard disk must have 2 partitions eg. C and D drive];

(iv)

Minimum 256 MB Integrated Intel graphic Media Accelerator 3100 or equivalent, able to display at least 32-bit true colour at minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels.

(v)

One 17” LCD monitor;

(vi)

Integrated sound card audio feature with integrated/external speakers;

(vii)

System BIOS updateable via software should be licensed flash BIOS of the latest version;

(viii)

One bi-directional 25-pin parallel port, one 16550 UART compatible asynchronous serial ports, one mouse port, one keyboard port and at least four universal serial bus(USB) port;

(ix)

Bus architecture should consist of 64-bit process-cache memory data bus and at least three PCI/PCI-express expansion slots;

(x)

One power supply of at least 250 Watts at 220/230 Volts 50Hz;

(xi)

One enhanced AT type keyboard with 104 typematic repeating keys;

(xii)

One optical USB mouse or compatible;

(xiii)

One internal IDE DVD/CD-RW Combo drive; (48X Write / 32X Rewrite / 40X for CD Read and 16X for DVD Read) or higher. Must be able to read CD-ROM, Multi Read, CD Text, Audio CD, CD-I, CD-RW, CD-R, CD-DA, Video CD, CD EXTRA, CD-ROM XA, Photo CD/Multi-session, DVD, DVD+R, DVD+R Multi-session, DVD+RW and DVD-RW Multi-Border and also able to write CD-R and CD-RW, Track at once, Disc at once, Fixed Packet, Variable Packet and Multisession;

(xiv)

Integrated 10/100 network interface or higher;

(xv)

Casing must be secure and comes with one good quality chassis lock of unique combination. All keys to the lock shall be given to the SO Rep.

(xvi)

Must include all the necessary features and accessories required to support the type of broadband connection services specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.

(xvii) Loaded with the software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(42) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.61.2

Computer Hardware (Cont’d) Personal Computer (Cont’d) The PC must be fully compatible with Windows XP Professional, with provision for upgrade to Windows Vista or later, and shall be Microsoft certified. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide and maintain Broadband Connection Services (with minimum connection speed of 512 kbps) via a major Broadband Service Provider (such as StarHub MaxOnline, Pacific Internet Ltd, SingNet or equivalent to be approved by the SO Rep) for the PC during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The broadband cable or telephone line shall be used solely for the PC Laser Printer The Contractor shall provide ONE LaserJet printer complying with the following specifications : (i)

At least 16 MB of RAM and upgradeable to at least 160 MB;

(ii)

Able to print at least 20 pages of A4 per minute and 11 pages of A3 per minute;

(iii)

Automatic Duplex Printing Unit;

(iv)

Print at 600 x 600 dpi resolution or more;

(v)

Support high speed bi-directional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel port (C-type connector);

(vi)

Support PCL 5e, PCL 6 and Postscript Level 3 emulation;

(vii)

Must be able to support printing in the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it;

(viii)

Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) The Contractor shall provide ONE Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) complying with the following specifications : (i)

Conform to industry standards as follows : IEEE 446, NEMA PE1, ANSI C62.41, IEEE587B, IEC 801-146;

(ii)

Conform to the safety standards as follows : UL 1778, CSA C22.2 and VDE;

(iii)

10 minutes or more runtime at full load;

(iv)

Shall provide alert on AC power failure, power restore and diagnostic tests through management software;

(v)

Shall provide at least 3 output ports;

(vi)

Must include all connecting cables joining the UPS output ports and equipment.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(43) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.61.2

Computer Hardware (Cont’d) Colour Scanner The Contractor shall provide ONE colour scanner complying with the following specifications :

1.1.61.3

(i)

Flatbed, one-pass colour and monochrome

(ii)

At least 600dpi x 600dpi resolution

(iii)

Able to scan A4 size documents

(iv)

Support Universal Serial Bus(USB) port

(v)

Shall include scanning software that can display the image file size to users at the preview screen

(vi)

Able to support all image formats including but not limited to,  TIFF  BMP  JPEG  FPX  GIF  WMF  PDF

(vii)

Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.

Computer Software Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide the Computer Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the following licensed software packages (full packs with original licences, documentation and media provided) for each PC provided under this clause including all subclauses under it : (i)

Microsoft Windows XP Professional, with provision for upgrade to Windows Vista or later;

(ii)

Microsoft Project 2003 Standard Edition or later;

(iii)

Microsoft Office 2003 Professional Edition or later;

(iv)

Norton Internet Security Software 2008 (with firewall & anti-virus package) or later.

The Contractor shall purchase maintenance license for the VirusScan softwares to cover the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The PC must be set to automatically scan for virus at least once a day when the PC is switched on. 1.1.61.4

Computer Software Licensing All the Computer Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be licensed copies obtained from Authorised distributors or dealers. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide any software upgrade, to the latest version or release upon request by SO Rep during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that only authorised software are used with the Hardware and obtain written approval from the SO Rep before installing any software other than the ones specified in this clause including all subclauses under it, into the Computer Hardware System.

1.1.61.5

Approval and Testing of Computer Hardware and Software The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Computer Hardware and Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it to the SO Rep for approval BEFORE the purchase of the Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the hardware and software to be tested at the relevant Consultant's office and the subsequent delivery to the work site upon request by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(44) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.61.6

Installation/Upgrade/Removal of HDB Applications The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the installation/upgrade/removal of HDB software at HDB office and the subsequent delivery to the work site upon request by the SO Rep.

1.1.61.7

Computer Furniture and Accessories The Contractor shall provide the necessary furniture and accessories at the site office to accommodate and facilitate the usage of the Computer Hardware and Software. The PC designated for the exclusive use of the SO Rep shall be located in a fully enclosed room within the site office. The room shall be of minimum size 8 m² as specified. The room shall be provided with a lock and be partitioned in half-height glass panels.

1.1.61.8

Computer System Maintenance The Contractor shall ensure that the Computer Hardware and Software are in good working condition and pay for all maintenance, license fees, subscription fees and etc for the Hardware and Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within one calendar month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or fails to rectify any Hardware or Software faults, within one day, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire or to rectify the faults and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payments due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.

1.1.61.9

Security The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement and provision to prevent theft/burglary of the Computer Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall replace any stolen or missing Hardware and Software within 3 days of such occurrence, failing which the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire the systems and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payment due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.

1.1.61.10 Unauthorised Usage The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software are not used for any other purpose except for those approved by the SO Rep. 1.1.61.11 E-mail Account The Contractor shall apply for and maintain an E-mail account to facilitate transmission of information and correspondence. Provide the E-mail address to the SO Rep within one month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. 1.1.62

Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claim And Request For Variation Works The Contractor may be required to use an online web-based electronic submission system provided by the Employer for the submission of the Monthly Claims for Progress Payment and Claim for Authorisation / Variation Order (collectively and hereinafter known as e-submission system). There will be no additional charges to be imposed by Employer for the use of the e-submission system. If the Employer decided that the e-submission system is to be used, the Contractor shall at his own expenses arrange to use e-submission system complying with the requirement hereinafter mentioned.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(45) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claim And Request For Variation Works (Cont’d) The e-submission system shall be Secured Socket Layer encrypted, password-protected with rolebased workflow security features at the document/form level and have an audit trail. The e-submission system shall be accessible by all relevant users from the Employer, Superintending Officer, SO Rep and Contractor concurrently and all data accessed shall be confined to the Project and the relevant role and scope of works. All relevant parties in the workflow shall be timely notified by email to complete their respective area of work. The e-submission system shall comprise the following modules: (A)

Monthly Claims For Progress Payment This module allows the Contractor to submit online, the values of the monthly progressive valuation of work completed for the assessment and certification of the SO Rep as hereinafter described but not limited to the following: a.

This module shall capture the monthly detailed breakdown of the scope of works and cost information as specified in the Contract showing both the Contractor’s claims and the SO Rep’s corresponding assessment in terms of individual percentage of work done for each work item.

b.

The validation rules shall apply to each item of claim and shall be based on the following rules or such rules to be given by the SO Rep: i.

The SO Rep's certification should not be more than Contractor’s claim.

ii.

The values submitted/certified for current month should not be less than previous the month’s submission.

c.

The Contractor shall not be allowed to amend the SO Rep’s valuation and vice-versa.

d.

The following data shall be automatically uploaded each month into the e-submission system and shall include but not limited to the following: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii.

(B)

Nett Contract Sum (Less Provisional Quantities / Sums) Probable Actual Contract Value (Adjusted For Variation Orders) Contractor's Cumulative Total Claim (excludes Loss & Expense) Contractor's Nett Claim for Month (excludes Loss & Expense) Total SO Rep's Estimated Value Computed (excludes Loss & Expense) Cumulative Certified Value of Work Value for each work category for apportionment under respective activity account codes.

Authorisation / Variation Order This module shall include but not limited to the following: a.

Allow the SO Rep to submit an Authorisation / Variation Order for the approval of the SO for subsequent issue to the Contractor.

b.

Allow the SO Rep to issue to the Contractor an Authorisation Order.

c.

Allow the SO Rep to issue a Variation Order.

All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(46) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc The Contractor shall assign the copyright of the photographs (including the prints/slides/transparencies/negative) taken and all documents prepared under this Contract to the Employer. The Employer shall have unfettered rights to use or reproduce all the photographs (including the prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) taken and all documents prepared by the Contractor under this Contract for any purpose other than for the purpose for which the Contract was entered into. In the event that the Contractor engages third parties to take the photographs (including the prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) or prepare the documents, the Contractor shall procure the assignment of the copyright from such third parties to himself and thereafter, assign the copyright to the Employer. The Contractor and/or any third parties are strictly prohibited from using or reproducing any of the photographs (including the prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) taken and all documents prepared under this Contract in any other publication or for any other purpose whatsoever.

1.1.64

Provision Of Keys Envelopes During Hand Over Upon successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and the Employer's Inspection Team, the Contractor shall provide the necessary number of envelopes to contain the household keys of each dwelling unit in the Contract. The envelope to be provided shall fulfil the following requirements : (a) (b) (c) (d)

C6 size (114mm by 162mm) Key envelope with string and white eyelet 120 gsm paper Colour - white

The Contractor shall propose the type of envelope to the SO Rep for approval. The 2 external sides of the envelope may either be printed or stamped with the following information : On the Front of the envelope –To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 18, the following statement:

KEY TO PREMISES NO. ___________ and; On the Back of the envelope:–To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 12, the following statements:

S/N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

BLDG12/S01.DOC(47) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Location Main Gate Main Door Master Bedroom Bedroom 1 Bedroom 2 Balcony Service Duct Letter Box Others Total

No. of keys


Schedule Of PE Submission The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the table below : Category

General

Maintenance

Clause No.

Description Of Works

Date Of Submission

1.1.18 or as amended

Site offices & canteen

At least 2 weeks prior to erection


Temporary buildings


1.1.67.8 or as amended

Temporary chute

At least 1 week prior to installation

1.4.2(c) or as amended

Passenger cum material hoist foundation, masts & tie-back

At least 2 weeks prior to construction

The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the table below : Category

Clause No.

Description Of Works

Date Of Submission

1.5.1(b) or as amended

Access scaffold and working platforms. Temporary structures.


1.5.1(d) or as amended

Alternative system to safety net system

At least 1 week prior to installation

1.5.1(e) or as amended

Working platforms for lift shafts, central refuse chute and voids


1.5.1(f) or as amended

Overhead shelters

At least 1 week prior to construction

1.5.1(m) or as amended

Tower cranes & other tall construction equipment foundation & tie-back

At least 1 month prior to construction

1.5.1(n) or as amended

Mobile crane & piling machine access


1.5.1(t) or as amended

Temporary staircases


3.15 or as amended

Planking & strutting

At least 2 weeks prior to the excavation work

4.18 or as amended

Rectification of defective work

At least 1 week prior to the rectification work


Design of formwork


Formwork

9.5 or as amended

Formwork system for reinforced concrete water tank


Metal Roofing and Insulation Sheet


Metal roof structural plans & fastening details

At least 2 weeks prior to installation

Site Safety Measures

Excavation Structural Concrete

For the avoidance of doubts, requirements for PE submission for other Works which are not shown in the table above shall be as specified in the respective clauses and/or subclauses in the Specifications.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(48) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Earth Control Measures The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into public drains by implementing effective Earth Control Measures (ECM) for the construction site to meet the requirements under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap 294. (Information on ECM requirements can be found in the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage and the website www.pub.gov.sg/ECM). The contractor shall note that the ECM are for the containment and treatment of silty discharges due to the impact of rainwater. ECM are not meant for the treatment of wastewater due to construction activities (such as slurry from tunnelling, pipe-jacking and bore-piling works) which shall be treated to comply with the requirements under Environmental Protection and Management Act (EPMA) (Chapter 94A).

. In his tender submission, the Contractor shall submit his schematic ECM plans of the construction site for the whole of the Time for Completion including any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, taking into account the different phases of construction activities. He shall also provide the name of the Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP) who will be endorsing the ECM plan after the tender is awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the Contractor aware of the ECM requirements and the cost to implement an effective ECM. Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans, the Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses for complying with all the ECM requirements in the Contract Sum. Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a QECP to plan and design the ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the QECP's design. The ECM plan and design shall be submitted 1 week after the award of the contract. During the course of the construction works, the Contractor together with his QECP shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of the construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by his QECP. The planning and design of the ECM shall meet the minimum requirements stipulated and in accordance to the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage. The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the Time for Completion including any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, to ensure that it is effective at all times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works, supported by dated photographs, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification. The Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the advice of his QECP. The Contractor shall submit the ECM proposal duly endorsed by his QECP to PUB for records. The proposed ECM shall consist of the following four parts: (i)

Project Particulars The following information shall be provided under the Project Particulars: (a) (b) (c) (d)

Project description Name and address of site occupier; Site area and contract period; Location map and site plan.

(ii)

Erosion Control Plan (described in 1.1.66.1)

(iii)

Sediment Control Plan (described in 1.1.66.2)

(iv)

Site ECM Management System (described in 1.1.66.3)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(49) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Earth Control Measures (Cont’d)

1.1.66.1

Erosion Control Plan During construction, the Contractor shall minimize the formation of bare surfaces under the ECM's Erosion Control Plan. The Plan shall depict graphically the activities, including sequence of work, type and duration for each phase of construction activities to include the following measures to:

1.1.66.2

(a)

sequence and schedule of the earthworks I demolition works in stages and progressively with the subsequent construction activities and building works.

(b)

minimise site disturbance by keeping site clearance works to a minimum by retaining as much of the existing vegetation as possible.

(c)

pave up the bare surfaces and all construction access by concrete or milled waste or other suitable materials.

(d)

protect the bare slopes with close-turfing, concrete grouting, or erosion control blanket.

(e)

protect the earth stockpiles with erosion control blanket.

(f)

restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become bare, as soon as possible.

(g)

cover up the active work surfaces with canvas sheet during rain or at the end of the workday.

Sediment Control Plan The Contractor shall put in place the ECM's Sediment Control Plan, which aims to capture the sediments washed down from the construction sites. Some of these sediment control measures and facilities, which must be in place before the works start, shall include but not limited to the following:

1.1.66.3

(a)

concrete-lined cut-off drains (minimum C7 precast channel) along the perimeter of the construction sites.

(b)

silt fence properly installed and embedded onto the ground along the perimeter cut-off drains (between the construction site and the cut-off drain).

(c)

sedimentation basins or any other sediment filtering or settling system of adequate size and sufficient numbers along the perimeter cut-off drain and before the discharge points into public drain.

(d)

a storage basin / tank may be required to temporarily store the large amount of rainwater falling on to the whole site before treatment.

(e)

a treatment system to treat silty discharge shall be provided before the discharge points into public drain.

(f)

turbidity curtains shall be installed along all the exposed slopes / riverbanks for works in or adjacent to water bodies, such as canals, rivers, sea or in a reclamation work. The silty discharge trapped within the turbidity curtain shall be allowed to be settled / treated and removed.

Site ECM Management System The contractor, shall at the advice of his QECP, put in place a site monitoring and reporting system including but not limited to the following: (a)

Daily ECM inspection report by the QECP appointed site personnel

(b)

Regular site inspection by the QECP

(c)

Continuous monitoring and recording system shall be installed at the discharge point (after ECM) before public drain

BLDG12/S01.DOC(50) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Earth Control Measures (Cont’d)

1.1.66.4

Submission Of Design Basis And Calculations The QECP shall submit full basis of design back up with design calculations to show clearly how the perimeter cut-off drains, silt fence, sedimentation basins, storage basin / tank and treatment system are designed and sized as well as how such design will effectively filter off silt and allow only clean water to discharge into public drains. The QECP shall also submit the design specifications on the treatment system which can effectively treat the silty discharge from the construction site. The intensity of a one-in-two year storm should be adopted for the proposed design.

1.1.67

Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites

1.1.67.1

General Requirements The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this subclause) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999, (hereafter referred to as "the Order" for the purposes of this subclause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.

1.1.67.2

Reserved

1.1.67.3

Noise Nuisance Judicious management and control over the activities within the Site shall be exercised by the Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. In this respect, the Contractor shall implement all necessary noise control measures at his own cost and expense, to comply with the Environmental Protection and Management Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this subclause) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental Protection and Management (Control of Noise at Construction Sites) Regulations, (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for the purposes of this sub-clause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site and its surroundings and to have satisfied himself as to the surrounding developments and construction activities. Prior to the commencement of Works, the Contractor shall propose a noise management plan and execute the appropriate noise control measures at his own cost and expense.

1.1.67.4

Noise Control At Construction Site (i)

Noise Management Plan Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit a noise management plan complying with SS CP 49: Code of Practice for Noise Control on Construction and Demolition Sites (hereafter referred to as "the Code" for the purposes of this sub-clause) to the SO Rep for approval. The noise management plan shall include, but not limited to the following :

BLDG12/S01.DOC(51) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(a)

comparison charts between baseline noise monitoring results prior to the commencement of works and the anticipated noise emission levels during construction ;

(b)

identification of sensitive buildings, for example hospitals, schools, institutions of higher learning, homes for the aged sick, etc., and residential buildings within 150m from the construction site boundary ;

(c)

site utilisation plan, indicating the locations of site facilities and noise generating equipments including, but not limited to generators, compressors and concrete pumps ;


Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites (Cont’d)

1.1.67.4

Noise Control At Construction Site (Cont’d) (i)

Noise Management Plan (d)

specification of the machinery, equipment and plant proposed to be utilised on site as well as their indicative noise emission levels. Construction equipment and methods of work that generates excessive noise will not be allowed to be used on Site ;

(e)

identification of noise generating activities and delineate the sequence of work and construction methods for such activities, as well as indicate the anticipated noise levels accompanying each type of activity ;

(f)

propose noise control measures for noise generating activities along with the estimated reduced noise levels in the form of administrative and engineering controls or other measures deemed effective in noise abatement. Noise control measures shall take into consideration site planning and layout (administrative controls), adoption of engineering controls and behavioral considerations of site personnel ;

(g)

propose scheduling of works with due consideration to noise generating activities;

(h)

contingency noise abatement measures for unavoidable works that have to be carried out after 7pm with the approval of the SO Rep ;

(i)

noise monitoring system to be implemented, which includes the details of instrumentation, locations of installation, measured values of Leq and correction factor to be applied in the presence of ambient noise ; and

(j)

Public relations strategies to foster close community relationships throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, such as signboards, newsletters, circulars, complaint handling procedures and investigation, standard response time to public feedback and complaints and rapportbuilding events or activities with residents.

In formulating the noise management plan, the Contractor shall take into account the working days and hours, as well as consider the effects of construction noise on personnel working in or around the site as well as the neighbourhood within proximity of the Site. The Contractor shall take into account the nature of land use in the area, duration of works and the effect of lengthening works period or other nuisances that may affect the neighbourhood. (ii)

Noise Control Measures The Contractor shall implement all noise control measures included in the approved noise management plan, including any other noise control measures as instructed by the SO Rep or NEA from time to time. Noise control measures shall include the following, where necessary to comply with the Regulations :

BLDG12/S01.DOC(52) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(a)

all machinery and plant shall be identified to be sound-reduced prior to entering the site ;

(b)

all plant, machinery and equipment shall be pasted with a weather-proof sticker clearly indicating its noise emission level (at source) under normal operating condition ;

(c)

all machinery in operation shall have their covers properly shut at all times ;

(d)

noisy plant and equipment shall be housed in acoustic sheds or enclosures ;

(e)

noisy activities shall be barricaded with portable noise barriers and panels ; and

(f)

noise barriers shall be erected prior to commencement of works.



1.1.67.4

Noise Control At Construction Site (Cont’d) (ii)

Noise Control Measures (Cont’d) Noisy construction equipment (for example compressors) and installation (for example temporary refuse chute) shall be sited away from occupied blocks. All construction equipment shall be properly insulated and maintained to minimise its operating noise level. The SO Rep has the discretion to require the Contractor to take necessary precautions, whether specified herein or not, to maintain or to repair such construction equipment or to instruct their removal from site when it is determined that the noise level generated from the construction works fails to comply with the Regulations or the Code.

(iii)

Noise Monitoring System The Contractor shall be required to set up the wireless, web-based real-time noise monitoring system prior to the commencement of work on Site. The cost of setting up, operating and maintaining the noise monitoring system shall be borne by the Contractor. The system shall include an integrated solar-powered sound level meter complying with IEC 61672 (Type 1) or other comparable standards approved by the SO Rep. In addition, the system shall provide wireless, real-time transmission of the sound level data to a secured (password-protected) website, where data is presented for Leq 5 mins, Leq 1 hour and Leq 12 hours periods. The system shall enable all current and historical sound level data recorded from the Site to be retrieved from the website. The system shall also incorporate a short message service (SMS) alert system to notify the designated recipients when the construction noise levels exceed the permissible noise limits stated under the Regulations. The sound level meter must comply with the following requirements: (a)

an integrating-averaging sound level meter set to frequency weighting ‘A’ ;

(b)

Equipped with a data logger for sampling the running value of ‘A’-weighted sound level pressure levels with adequate memory to store 5-minute equivalent continuous readings on a 24-hour basis for up to one month ;

(c)

Dynamic range shall be of at least 40 dB ;

(d)

The sound level meter shall have a laboratory calibration certificate dated not more than three (3) months before the commencement date of the contract. The integrating sound level meter shall be sent to an approved accredited laboratory for calibration at every six (6) months interval or as and when required by the SO Rep.

The Contractor shall install the sound level meter at a suitable location at the nearest occupied building. The location is to be approved by SO Rep or NEA. The Contractor shall liaise with the relevant authorities, for example Town Council, for permission to install the sound level meter. Where there is no suitable location outside the Site, the Contractor may install the sound level meter within the Site, subject to approval the SO Rep or NEA. The installed sound level meter can be sheltered, but the microphone of the sound level meter must face the construction site and in the line of sight of the construction activities without any physical barrier or obstruction. (iv)

Sites In Close Proximity to Sensitive Buildings For construction sites close to premises that are sensitive to noise disturbances, for example schools, hospitals, institutions of higher learning, homes for the aged sick, etc., the SO Rep reserves the right to direct the Contractor to implement any noise control measures deemed necessary to reduce the noise disturbances regardless of the noise level generated and compliance with the permissible noise levels in the Regulations. For the avoidance of doubt, the measures could include, but not limited to erection of temporary noise barriers to shield the affected buildings from excessive noise, switching to use of quieter machinery or adoption of quieter construction methods, installation of airconditioning systems within the noise sensitive premises, etc. The Contractor shall also be responsible for dismantling all temporary noise control measures and make good any affected premises when requested by the occupier of the affected buildings. The Contractor shall obtain written permission from the SO Rep prior to the dismantling of such measures. The cost of implementation of such measures, including dismantling, shall be borne by the Contractor.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(53) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.67.5

Preservation Of Trees Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as "Preserved Trees" for the purpose of this subclause), the Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to avoid damage or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following requirements : (A)

Treatment of Preserved Trees In Area Of Fill (a)

Tolerable Depth of Fill The area around Preserved Trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth.

(b)

Construction of Well Around Trees Well not exceeding 1 m in depth shall be constructed around Preserved Trees. The minimum diameter of the well shall be 6 times the diameter of Preserved Trees measured at the trunk 0.5 m above ground level. Details of the well shall be as shown in the Drawings.

(B)

Treatment Of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut (a)

Tolerable Depth of Cut The area around Preserved Trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300 mm.

(b)

Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree An area around Preserved Trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of Preserved Trees measured at the trunk 0.5 m above ground level. Details of retention of raised planter are as shown in the Drawings.

(C)

Protection Of Existing Trees From Physical Damage By Equipment Etc During Construction (a)

All Preserved Trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of Preserved Trees shall be placed before commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of fencing shall be determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less than 1.2 m from the trunk of Preserved Trees. Individual Preserved Trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny sacks and 50 mm x 100 mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and spaced at no more than 50 mm apart to a height of 1.5 m above ground.

(b)

Any damage to Preserved Trees root system shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed and/or damaged during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of the exposed and/or damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved sealing compound and topsoil spread over the exposed root area.

(c)

Any damage to Preserved Trees branches shall be treated in accordance with the Drawings. (i)

Branch Trimming Of Damaged Branches (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(54) Sal(151211) (DPD)

A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300 mm from the main trunk of Preserved Trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The depth of the cut shall not be more than ½ of the diameter of the branch. A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The distance between these two cuttings shall be 75 mm to 150 mm. Make a shallow cut at C. Final cut is to be sharp and clear. 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.



1.1.67.5

Preservation Of Trees (Cont’d) (ii)

Wound Treatment (1) (2) (3)

(d)

(D)

If any Preserved Trees are severely injured by mechanical equipment, etc., the SO Rep shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities".

Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees (a)

The Contractor shall ensure that : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

1.1.67.6

Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife. Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends. Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.

Compaction of soil around Preserved Trees shall be avoided. No materials shall be stored within the root system. There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the Preserved Trees. There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the Preserved Trees. There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc. within the spread of the Preserved Trees crown. Soil around Preserved Trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply of air and water get to the roots. The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of drought.

(b)

The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the Preserved Trees eg. branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep.

(c)

If the growth of the Preserved Trees is stifled, the Contractor shall inter-alia bear the cost of making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" shall be imposed against the Contractor.

Temporary Site Access Within Site Boundary The Contractor shall propose and construct a temporary site access within the Site boundary linking the main construction entrance/exit to all building blocks, inclusive of multi-storey carpark building. The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations endorsed by the PE shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the construction of the access. The access shall be of concrete or bituminous pavement or precast concrete plank. It shall be laid over well compacted hardcore base or other suitable material to the Contractor’s PE design. The access shall be inspected by the Contractor’s PE and certificate of supervision issued prior to use. The precast concrete plank shall be 175mm thick with modular size of 1.20m by 2.20m. Contractor can opt for any other size subject to SO reps approval. It shall be reinforced with welded mesh and the edges shall be protected with angle iron. It can be cast with grade 40 eco-green concrete. To ensure proper site drainage, properly-graded Type C7 composite channel cut-off drains shall be laid along the perimeter of the construction site. Similar cut-off drains shall be laid along the access and other areas where required. The drainage system shall comply with the requirements specified in Clause 1.1.66 “Earth Control Measures” and sub-clauses under it. The area between the temporary site access and the building blocks/multi-storey carpark shall be laid with well compacted sub-grade with lean concrete surface. The access shall be provided immediately after the completion of the first storey. The provision of access prior to the completion of first storey shall comply with the requirements specified in Clause 1.9.1.1 (o) “Access For The Use Of Mobile Crane And Piling Machines Next To Build Area”. The access shall be maintained in good working condition and free from water stagnation at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, or unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(55) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.67.6

Temporary Site Access Within Site Boundary (Cont’d) As part of the housekeeping effort, the Contractor shall deploy workers to clear the mud deposits/droppings regularly and maintain the access as clean and dry as practically possible. A heavy duty vehicular washing bay shall also be provided at the main entrance/exit point abutting completed public road. All tyres of vehicles shall be thoroughly clean if necessary before leaving the Site. The area at main construction entrance/exit shall laid with concrete surface to improve the maintainability of the site access. Where the access had been excavated for underground services work (e.g. sewer construction, underground piping system draw pit), the Contractor shall use steel plate to temporarily cover these excavated areas and the access shall be immediately reinstated to good working condition upon the completion of the underground services work in accordance to PE design.

1.1.67.7

Temporary Sanitary Facilities Within 21 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall provide temporary sanitary facilities in suitable structures with adequate lighting, on the Site. Such temporary sanitary facilities shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. The Contractor may use the Employer's Standard Drawings as a guide in designing the temporary sanitary facilities. The temporary sanitary facilities shall comprise water closets and shower compartments in the proportion of 1 closet and 1 shower to every 25 workmen, throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. In addition, the Contractor shall provide separate sanitary facilities with water closet and shower compartment for the exclusive use of the Employer's officers. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before commencing the erection of these facilities. The water closets shall be of the type, make and pattern approved by the MEWR and PUB (Water). Provide and lay glazed wall tiles or other approved material to the internal walls of the temporary sanitary facilities up to a height of 1.8 m from the floor. The doors to the cubicles of the temporary sanitary facilities shall be of approved material. All waste discharge from the water closets and all waste water from the temporary sanitary facilities and from the Site shall be discharged into a public sewer. Arrange with the MEWR to carry out connection work from the temporary sanitary facilities to the public sewer and pay all charges and maintenance in connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to and shall indemnify the Employer against all liabilities in respect of such sewer connections. Where a public sewer is not available or where it is not possible to connect to a public sewer, the Contractor shall provide and install temporary septic tanks of the type, pattern and capacity approved by the MEWR, to serve the water closets, showers and baths. Prior to commencing the installation of the temporary septic tanks on the Site, the Contractor shall engage a Licensed Plumber who shall submit his proposal to the MEWR and SO Rep for approval. The proposal shall include the manner and frequency of post installation management and maintenance of the septic tanks on the Site. The Contractor and his Licensed Plumber shall be fully responsible for any mis-management or mis-use of the temporary sanitary facilities, which may result in the pollution of the controlled water course.

1.1.67.8

Removal Of Construction Debris From Building Blocks Before the commencement of Works on site, the Contractor shall submit proposal for the daily removal of the construction debris from the building blocks to the SO Rep. for approval.

1.1.67.9

Pest Control And Surveillance The Contractor shall engage an approved Pest Control Operator who is registered with the (i) (ii)

BCA under the Work Head for Pest Control NEA under the Control of Vector and Pesticide Act

to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work on the Site. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator and proof of BCA/NEA registration to the SO Rep for approval prior to carrying out the Works. The SO Rep may disapprove the Pest Control Operator selected by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation and extension of time arising from such decisions. BLDG12/S01.DOC(56) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.67.9

Pest Control And Surveillance

(Cont’d)

Pest Control measures and surveillance programmes shall fully comply with the requirements of NEA as well as the following : (a)

The Contractor is required to submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme inclusive of “Source reduction regime/strategy”, “Water bearing receptacle removal team” at the Site to the respective NEA’s regional office and the SO Rep prior to commencement of the Works. The frequency of fogging shall be in accordance to NEA’s requirement. Fogging is to be carried out only by licensed Pest Operator using approved chemical.

(b)

The Contractor shall maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of the pest control and surveillance work that has been carried out. The site register shall be made available and ready for inspection by the SO Rep when required.

(c)

The Contractor shall submit monthly summarised returns of the site records required by NEA to the respective NEA’s regional office.

(d)

On the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall seal up all sanitary openings in the dwelling units prior to the handing over of the completed Works all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

The Works required under this subclause shall include all necessary measures to prevent the Site from becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors. The Contractor shall carry out site checks at least once a week to detect and remove all breeding and harbouring grounds. If breeding or harbouring of vectors is found at the Site, enforcement action may be taken against the Contractor by NEA. The SO Rep may also exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance & Irregularities" by imposing charges on the Contractor. 1.1.67.10 Air Pollution By Construction Equipment The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to abate the discharge of smoke, fumes or obnoxious gases from Construction Equipment and other equipment on the Site. When notified by the SO Rep that a particular Construction Equipment or equipment is discharging excessive smoke, fumes or obnoxious gases, the Contractor shall stop the use of that Construction Equipment or equipment, and replace the same with acceptable Construction Equipment or equipment. No claims from the Contractor for extension of Time for Completion or costs and expenses shall be allowed. 1.1.67.11 Reserved 1.1.67.12 Cleaning Of Public And HDB Maintained Roads And Drains The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles used by him, his servants or agents, or by his subcontractors or suppliers, their servants or agents (hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor's Vehicles" for the purposes of this subclause) shall not dirty any public or HDB maintained roads and drains. In this respect, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all such Contractor's Vehicles are properly cleaned before they move onto these roads. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep if he is in doubt whether any road is a public or HDB maintained road and the decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. In the event the Site abuts a public or HDB maintained road and the Contractor's Vehicles use the road for site access, the Contractor shall provide a washing bay to wash and clean the Contractor's Vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. If vehicles of other contractors also use such public or HDB maintained road for site access, the Contractor shall provide at his own cost and expense, similar washing, cleaning facilities and services for these other contractors' vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. The Contractor shall also provide at his own cost and expense, the same facilities and services for similar purposes in the event a road abutting the Site becomes a public or HDB maintained road and is used for site access by the Contractor's Vehicles or other contractors' vehicles.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(57) Sal(151211) (DPD)



1.1.67.13 Restriction On The Use of Styrofoam in Construction processes Where specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete", the use of styrofoam in the course of formwork erection or concreting Works shall be disallowed. The Contractor shall ensure that he or his sub-contractors do not use styrofoam in openings and recesses. 1.1.68

Material Samples Display Room Within 21 days from taking possession of the site, a Material Samples Display Room of 3m X 5 m 2 (ie.15 m ) shall be provided at the Site office and situated beside the meeting room. A new airconditioner set and adequate lightings shall be provided to the Material Samples Display Room. Appropriate and proper display racks/shelves shall be provided. The display room shall be maintained neat and tidy at all times. The following material samples, among others, shall be displayed upon HDB’s Technical Professional/SO Reps’ approval if they are to be provided under the contract : (a)

Architectural materials: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii)

sanitary wares, pipes and fittings, solvent cement; integral cultured basins and vanity tops; water taps, pipes, valves and fittings; shower sets and accessories; gratings; rainwater downpipe system; clothes drying racks; doors, door holders, viewers and hinges, door locks, ironmongery; windows, stainless steel screws, friction stays, window stoppers, gaskets; paint and primer; foot-operated steel hoppers; tiles, tile grout; parquet flooring and related products etc.

(b)

Structural materials : Splice sleeves, sealants for precast joints, form ties etc.

(c)

Civil Engineering Materials : Road marking paint, interlocking concrete blocks etc.

(d)

Rendering/screeding/waterproofing/repair materials : Waterproofing membranes, prepacked waterproof screed and prepacked skim-coat, polymer modified cement mortar etc.

(e)

Electrical materials : Electrical conduits and fittings/CATV materials eg. sockets, switches, door bells, splash proof guards, light fittings etc.

The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to provide and display the sample for other building materials and components, especially newly introduced items, big ticket items and special items, under the Contract where deemed necessary and fit all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The approved material samples shall be provided and displayed before construction, erection or installation. All approved materials shall be labelled with the Supplier's name and materials' type/grade/model. 1.1.69

Audit Of M & E Systems The Contractor shall test the M&E systems and rectify all Defect before submitting all M&E systems test reports endorsed by the Consultant to HDB Building Quality Department. HDB Building Quality Department reserves the right to audit any of the M & E systems installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the necessary manpower, equipment and means of access for the audit by HDB. The Contractor shall rectify all Defect detected during the audit and report to the Consultant for verification. For buildings under construction, the Contractor shall ensure compliance with the requirements of the FSSD (such as dry/wet rising mains etc). The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from FSSD, SO Rep, and/or officers from HDB Building Quality Department to carry out any inspection and testing during the construction stage.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(58) Sal(151211) (DPD)


ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

1.1.70.1

Environmental Management Programme (a)

The contractor shall implement an effective Environmental Management Programme.

(b)

The Programme shall including monitoring and tracking to minimise: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

1.1.70.2

Electricity consumption; Diesel consumption; Water consumption; Concrete wastage

(c)

The contractor shall submit data to the SO rep on a monthly basis and present it as a standing item in the monthly meeting.

(d)

The programme shall also include measures to be taken to raise awareness and promote environment friendly habits amongst site personnel.

Environment Friendly Practices (a)

The contractor shall implement a system to facilitate the use recycled water obtained through Earth Control Measure for: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

wash bay; dust control; tremie piles; washing of site access.

(b)

The contractor shall segregate metal and concrete waste from general construction waste for recycling purpose.

(c)

The contractor shall provide recycling bins near the site office to facilitate recycling.

(d)

The contractor can use eco-green concrete, subject to Contractor’s PE approval where necessary, for the base slab of: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

(e)

site office; worker’s quarter; canteen; worker’s toilet; cube room

To reduce energy consumption for the site office, the contractor is encouraged to : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi)

Use aircon with green rating; Use white colour for the roof of the site office; Use the east and west end for meeting room or toilet as it has lower occupancy; Reduce the office ceiling height at about 2.4 m reduce air con and lighting energy consumption; Provide UV film or blinds at site office windows; Maintain office temperature at more than 24 deg C; Provide door closer at doors where space is air conditioned Design the site office toilet such that they do not need mechanical ventilation; Use pedestal pan integrate with wash basin; Use motion sensor for lights and ventilation fan for toilet; Orientate the site office in the north–south facing if feasible

(f)

The contractor is encouraged to be familiar and closely follow the BCA’s Green and Gracious Builder’s Guide. (e.g use energy efficient air conditioning system complying with Singapore Energy Labelling Scheme, use T5 lights combined with motion sensors to reduce energy consumption etc).

(g)

The contractor is also encouraged to : (i) (ii)

BLDG12/S01.DOC(59) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Provide more greening on site to lower ambient temperature during construction period; Elimination of environmentally unfriendly products and packaging

Bldg Spec Page 1-60 1.2

MATERIALS

1.2.1

Metric Components All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, when metric components are not available, their equivalent in imperial units may, subject to the approval of the SO Rep, be used and such a substitution shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.

1.2.2

Materials And Workmanship As directed, furnish the SO Rep with approved documents to prove that materials are as specified. The documents shall include but not be limited to any or all of the following, such that the authenticity of the materials can be easily ascertained : (i) (ii) (iii)

shipping documents serial numbers warranty certificates

In the event that any documents submitted are not original copies, they shall be duly certified by the originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the Contract. Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model numbers are offered by the Contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, it shall be deemed that the finished products are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by the Manufacturer's warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or any other intermediary, the approval of the SO Rep shall be sought and the result of the alteration shall be fully supported by the Manufacturer such that the Manufacturer's warranty is maintained. All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive of the prevailing amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice. Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before order is placed with the supplier. Such approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials are free from any defects, damages or any other flaws. 1.2.3

Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials For materials directly supplied by the Employer, a 2-month credit facility from the date of delivery may be allowed. The Employer reserves the right to deliver the materials to the Contractor's site or other designated locations even if he fails to re-confirm his earlier purchase order to the Employer. The cost of the materials so delivered shall be deducted by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer. The Employer reserves its sole and unfettered discretion to withdraw such credit facilities without any prior notice to the Contractor under any circumstance as it deems fit, including but not limited to where a garnishee order is served on the Employer in respect of any contracts the Contractor has with the Employer or where a petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is presented by or made against the Contractor. Under no circumstances shall the Employer be liable to the Contractor's claim for any cost, expense, profit and loss arising out of or in consequence of the withdrawal of such credit facility. Where such credit facility is withdrawn, the Contractor has to pay the Employer in cash for all materials he has ordered for the Works before the Employer will deliver the materials to the Site or allow the Contractor to collect the materials. Where the garnishee order is discharged or withdrawn or made absolute or where the petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is withdrawn, the Contractor may apply to the Employer in writing, with documentary proof, to have the credit facility reinstated. The Employer shall have the absolute right to decide whether or not to reinstate credit facility to the Contractor and the Employer is under no obligation to provide any explanation if it decides not to reinstate the credit facility.

1.2.4

Reserved

BLDG12/S01.DOC(60) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Approval Of Samples And Trade Names Where trade names or catalogue numbers are specified in the Specifications and/or shown in the Drawings, they are intended only to serve as a guide to the respective type and quality of material required. Other material proposed by the Contractor may be used subject to the prior approval of the SO Rep. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit samples of the proposed material to the SO Rep for approval. When a sample is approved by the SO Rep and subsequently work is carried out in accordance with this approved sample, any cost difference resulting from the higher price of the approved sample as compared with the price of the material as required and/or as shown shall not be payable to the Contractor, unless the change of material is ordered by the SO Rep. With the exception of lighting luminares, where the requirements for cost recovery are provided for differently, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract variation in accordance with the following table : Recovery (or Non-Recovery) by the Employer from the Contractor in the event that the price of the approved material is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown S/N

Material as required and/or as shown

Material proposed by Contractor and approved by the SO Rep

Cost Adjustment

1.

On the HDB Materials List


No cost recovery

2.


Not on the HDB Materials List

3.



4.



) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

Cost Recovery by the Employer from the Contractor

For lighting luminaires, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract variation regardless of whether or not the approved sample and/or the material as required and/or as shown are shown in the HDB Materials List. For the purposes of this subclause only, the applicable HDB Materials List shall be the prevailing HDB Materials List applicable at the time the Contractor submits the material for approval by the SO Rep. Where cost recovery is required, the basis of such adjustment shall be the difference between the price of the proposed material and that of the material as required and/or as shown (where one type of material is specified) or that of the cheapest of the materials as required and/or as shown (where more than one type of material is specified). The Contractor shall point out to the SO Rep all items in the approved sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings. Notwithstanding approval of the sample by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be liable for any items in the sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings and which the Contractor has failed to point out to the SO Rep. Where the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain materials from the HDB Materials List or where it is specified that materials provided are subject to the approval of the SO Rep, such requirements shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials used or selected by them: (a) are free from defects, damages or faults; (b) are of merchantable quality and fit for their intended purpose; and (c) comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(61) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Sample Unit And Quality Standards

1.2.6.1

Sample Unit The Contractor shall provide at his own costs and expenses, for the inspection, testing and approval of sample units for each of the different dwelling unit types as instructed by the SO Rep. These sample units shall be truly representative of the actual units to be constructed in every respect inclusive of all architectural details, architectural and structural features, finishes, services, fittings, etc. The Contractor shall comply with the Quality Standards specified under this clause for setting up of sample units and sample panels. The specifications, drawings or details shall be read in conjunction with the quality standards specified under this clause. In case of discrepancies between the specifications, drawings or details and the quality standards specified under this clause, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding with the works. The approved sample units shall be used as reference for the standard and quality of workmanship and materials that are acceptable to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that the completed Works (including works that are not listed in the quality standards specified under this clause) are at least of the same standard and quality as that in the sample units. The Contractor shall commence to construct the sample units when the structural works of the first building block reaches the fifth (5th) storey floor slab. The contractor shall complete the sample units within three (3) months from the aforesaid commencement date for inspection and approval by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall maintain the sample units to a clean, neat and tidy condition at all times. Adequate artificial lightings shall be provided where possible and as directed by SO Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep in respect of these sample units, the Contractor shall not be released from any of his duties and obligations as required of him under the Contract.

1.2.6.2

Quality Standards For Architectural Works S/N 1.

2.

ITEMS Column/ Wall (Plaster or skim finish)

Ceiling /Beam (Skim finish)

• • • • • • • • • • •

3.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(62) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Metal Gate and Frame

• • • • • •

QUALITY STANDARDS Walls meet at right angles (deviation not to exceed 4mm over 300mm) Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2 m No stain marks, paints drips and any visible damage No crack No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object Straightness of corners and joints Beams meet at right angles (deviation not to exceed 4mm over 300mm) Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2 m No crack Straightness of corners and joints Surface should be visually even with no waviness or patches due to patching works Verticality (tolerance of max 3mm) Evenly painted, no stain or scratches No dent, rust or mortar dropping Inner frame align with outer frame with consistent gap Welding at joints ground even or flushed Consistent gap between gate and unit slab (between 45mm to 55mm)



1.2.6.2

Quality Standards For Architectural Works S/N 4.

ITEMS Door

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5.

6

Wall Tiles

Floor: a) Unfinished floor b) Screed Finish

BLDG12/S01.DOC(63) Sal(151211) (DPD)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(Cont’d) (Cont’d)

QUALITY STANDARDS Alignment/level with walls No visible gaps between door frame and wall Door surface and joints properly sanded down and with consistent varnish finish (including on top and bottom of door leaf ) Both leaves aligned when close (offset not more than 2mm) Consistent gap between door & frame (not more than 5mm) Warp not more than 2mm Ease in opening and closing No stain marks and any visible damage Door and frame corners maintained at right angles No sign of corrosion and any visible damage in ironmongery or metal frame Consistent gap between door & finished floor (between 3mm to 10mm) Door gap between door frame & finished floor to comply to FSSD’s requirements for fire-rated door Consistent gap between door and unfinished floor level (between 45mm to 55mm) Verticality (tolerance of max 3mm) Gap between HS door and unfinished floor level (not less than 60mm) No mortar stains or paint drips No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object Consistent colour tone Consistent and neat pointing Consistent joint size Lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not more than 1mm. For homogenous tiles, the lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not more than 0.8mm Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 2m Alignment of joints with floor tiles where applicable Surface unevenness not more than 10mm within the unit No foot print or indentation No mortar dropping No faeces stains Ponding not deeper than 3 mm No crack No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object Surface unevenness not more than 3mm per 1.2m No stain marks and any visible damage Surfaces should not be unduly rough or patchy Consistent skirting thickness and no gap between wall & skirting



1.2.6.2

Quality Standards For Architectural Works S/N 6

ITEMS c) Floor Tile

• • • • • • • • • •

d) Timber floor

• • • • • • • • • •

7.

Windows

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

8

BLDG12/S01.DOC(64) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Painting

• • • • •

(Cont’d) (Cont'd)

QUALITY STANDARDS Surface unevenness for dry areas (without fall) not more than 3mm over 2m Falls in wet areas should be in the correct direction towards floor traps or discharge points Consistent colour tone Consistent skirting thickness Consistent joint size No mortar stains or paint drips No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object Lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not more than 1mm. For homogenous tiles, the lippage between 2 adjacent tiles not more than 0.8mm Consistent drop between kitchen and unfinished living room floor (between 45mm and to 50mm) Alignment of joints with wall tiles where applicable No cracks and warpage Timber strips to rest firmly on screed with no hollow sound when tapped No gaps in between timber strips (joint width not more than 0.5mm at localized areas) Edges of the floor to be properly sealed No unevenness between timber strips Surface unevenness (not more than 3mm per 1.2m) Consistent skirting thickness and no gap between wall & skirting Uniformity in timber strip tone Surfaces are evenly varnished with no patchiness resulted from touch up works No stain marks and any visible damage Alignment /level with wall openings (offset not more than 5mm) No visible gap between window frame and wall No sign of rainwater leakage Ease of opening and closing When closed, tight fit with no gap No mortar droppings and paint drips on frames and glazing Window leaf and frame corners maintained at right angles Neat joint between window and wall internally and externally Consistent gap between window leaf and frame (not more than 5mm) No dents, scratches or visible damage Accessories firmly secured and functioning Glazing clean, evenly sealed with gasket for aluminium windows Glazing no chips, cracks, scratches, mortar droppings, paint drips No obvious brush line Surfaces are evenly painted Good opacity, no patchiness resulted from touch up works Free from peeling, blistering and chalkiness No tonal variation, discoloration and fading


PSB Quality Certificate Where two or more alternative materials are proposed by the Contractor under subclause 1.2.5 "Approval Of Samples And Trade Names", the SO Rep may at his sole discretion give preference to the use of a material that is approved under any of the PSB quality certification schemes.

1.2.8

Storage Facility For Cement Where storage of cement is required, the Contractor shall provide adequate storage facilities at the Site to accommodate cement up to two weeks' requirements for the Works. The store to accommodate the cement shall be constructed so that each consignment of cement can be separately stacked. Each consignment of cement shall also be used in the same sequence as they are delivered, that is, on a "first-in first-out" basis. The Contractor shall ensure that the cement stored at the Site is kept dry and properly protected against loss or damage at all times.

1.2.9

Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of cement and all other materials delivered to the Site and shall therefore ensure adequate protection and prevention of such materials from being taken out of the Site. The SO Rep will not accept any excuse for materials taken out of the Site by the Contractor, his foreman or other individual even without the knowledge of the Contractor who is deemed to have provided for proper control against such malpractice. If it is established that cement or any other material is taken out of the construction Site without specific written approval from the SO Rep, this shall be deemed to be an irregularity and inter-alia, the right of the Contractor to compensation for price fluctuations for all materials shall lapse.

1.2.10

Ready-Mixed Concrete from Approved Suppliers The Contractor shall obtain ready-mixed concrete from any of the pre-approved suppliers. Provide the name and address of the ready-mixed concrete suppliers to the SO Rep. The use of ready-mixed concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep. All Delivery Orders for ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the Employer's Resident Technical Officer and submitted to the SO Rep. Failure to inform the SO Rep or non-compliance with the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep for the use of ready-mixed concrete shall, inter-alia, result in the Contractor forfeiting his right under the Contract to claim compensation for price fluctuations for all materials.

1.2.11

Water Water approved by the SO Rep shall be used for building purposes except where specified in Clause 4.3 "Water". The Contractor shall pay for all charges and temporary plumbing required.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(65) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS

1.2.12.1

Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Employer Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the Contractor shall have the option to purchase the following concreting materials from the Employer: (a) (b) (c)

Ordinary Portland Cement 20mm Granite Aggregate Concreting Sand

For the purpose of this clause, these materials to be supplied by Employer shall hereinafter be referred to as the “Protected Materials” and their respective quantities indicated by the Contractor shall hereinafter be referred as the “Protected Quantity” for the purpose of this clause only. . 1.2.12.2

Quantity To Be Supplied The Contractor shall indicate the respective quantities of the above materials to be purchased from the Employer in Annex D – Part A of the Form of Tender, subject to the Maximum Protected Quantity specified therein. The Maximum Protected Quantity indicated in Annex D – Part A of the Form of Tender does not include the quantity of concreting materials required for precast concrete components that are supplied by the Employer. The Contractor shall place his orders directly with the Employer and comply strictly with the "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer" as stipulated in Appendix A13. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause in the Contract Sum. The SO Rep reserves the right to allocate the monthly quantity to the Contractor as well as to nominate the Employer’s supplier. The Contractor shall absorb the total quantity allocated to him. If the Contractor's requirement is more than the Employer's capacity to supply, the SO Rep may direct the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources. In this event, the Contractor shall bear any additional cost and expense so incurred.

1.2.12.3

Quantity To be Protected The quantity to be covered under the provision of this clause shall be as stipulated in the Maximum Protected Quantity (MPQ) or Protected Quantity (PQ) whichever applicable (hereinafter referred to as the "Protected Quantity"). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity at the Basic Price. In the event that the source of any precast concrete components listed in Annex F of the Form of Tender is obtained from the Employer or where the Contractor’s production of precast components are carried out in overseas precast plants, the Protected Quantity shall be reduced according to the quantities indicated in the same Annex F and the Contractor shall be notified within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The HDB posted prices of the Protected Materials at any time shall be deemed to be those in the HDB's Monthly Price Lists which are also available for viewing at the Procurement Office, Basement 1 HDB Hub. The Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price for the Protected Materials and Protected Quantity, at the date Fourteen (14) days before the closing date of the Tender (hereinafter referred to as the "Basic Price"), for the Protected Materials. To illustrate: if a Tender closes on the 14th day of a particular month, the Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price prevailing on the last day of the preceding month.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(66) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS

1.2.12.3

Quantity To be Protected

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

In the event of the Contractor failing to obtain the Protected Quantity in full throughout the Time for Completion and any time during which liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, a shortfall recovery shall be effected using the following formula: Amount of Shortfall Recovery where:

=

PB x (QP - QA)

PB QP

= =

QA

=

Basic Price; Protected Quantity (MPQ or PQ where applicable); Actual quantity purchased under this clause;

In a situation where the Employer is not able to supply in full the Protected Quantity and the SO Rep has directed the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources, such purchases shall not be covered by the provisions under this clause. However, for the purpose of ascertaining for shortfall quantity, the quantity purchased from the Contractor's own source shall be included in QA when determining whether the Contractor has obtained in full the Protected Quantity. For this purpose, the Contractor shall be required to maintain proper documentary evidence of the delivery of each of the materials and such evidence shall be duly endorsed by the SO Rep. 1.2.12.4

Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Contractor’s Sources The Contractor shall be allowed to use his own supply only after the Protected Quantity or Approved Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable, has been used up. The Contractor shall be required to seek the SO Rep’s approval in writing prior to using his own supply. The Contractor shall also ensure that the quality of the concreting materials obtained from his own supply shall fully comply with the Specifications.

1.2.13

AGGREGATES FOR NON-CONCRETING WORKS Where the contractor intends to buy imported aggregates that fail the S2 or S3 Tests under the BCA testing regime and use these aggregates for non-concreting works must seek prior written permission from the SO Rep. The contractor is required to inform BCA (Strategic Materials Department, Attn: Officer-in-Charge, email to [email protected] and [email protected]) of such purchases by providing the following details and cc a copy of the e-mail to the relevant officer of the Employer within 7 days of approval from the SO Rep to use the aggregates for the said project: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(67) Sal(151210) (DPD)

Project Name; Project Location; Contact details of relevant officer of the Employer overseeing the project; Name of Importer of the Aggregates; Quantity of Aggregates (Tonnes) Delivered; Date of Delivery; Intended Non-concreting Use of Aggregates; The Contractor shall declare that he has obtained the SO Rep's permission for the intended nonconcreting use; Location and Quantity of Aggregates Used; Remarks.


LABOUR

1.3.1

Labour Laws The Contractor shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays in accordance with current laws and regulations. He shall keep records and produce them for inspection by the SO Rep.

1.3.2

Keeping Records Of Workmen The Contractor shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement of non-citizen workmen. Work Permits from MOM shall be obtained for these workmen. The Contractor shall be held solely liable for and shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all actions against the Employer for employing foreign workmen without permits. The Contractor shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on Site. These records shall include the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Name of Workmen (and alias if any) Identity Card No./Passport No. Address Work Permit No., if any Expiry date of work permit

This information shall be recorded before any workman is allowed to commence duty. Appropriate action will be taken by the SO Rep if the Contractor fails to record any of the abovementioned information of any worker found at the Site. 1.3.3

Employment Of Illegal Immigrants (Prohibition) For the purpose of this subclause "Illegal Immigrants" shall refer to any person who enters the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof. The Contractor shall ascertain the legitimacy of all Foreign Workers employed by him and/or any subcontractor prior to employment and throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Clarification as to the legitimacy of Foreign Workers may be made with the Immigration Authority, the Ministry of Manpower and/or the Police. The Contractor shall ensure that no illegal immigrants are employed by him and/or any sub-contractor in the execution of the Works. The Employer shall not be responsible for any such act or acts by the Contractor and/or any of his sub-contractors and the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for all consequences arising thereof.

1.3.4

Reserved

1.3.5

Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements Where materials, goods or products for the Works are to be purchased and/or obtained by the Contractor from HDB and/or the Employer, the Contractor shall allocate Man-Year Entitlements to such suppliers and/or contractors engaged by HDB and/or the Employer for the supply of such materials, goods or products. This requirement shall be applicable for, but not limited to, the supply of precast components and cut and bend steel reinforcement bars which are supplied by HDB and/or the Employer. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising from his compliance with the requirements stipulated in this subclause.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(68) Sal(151210) (DPD)


LABOUR

(CONT’D)

1.3.6

Employment Of Skilled Tilers The Contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good workmanship for all tiling Works. They shall possess Skill Evaluation Certificate on tiling works from local institutions. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work. These workers are also required to wear identification pass upon approval by the SO Rep. The pass shall be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the Site, by their colour, size or pattern.

1.4

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT

1.4.1

Provision Of Construction Equipment Where the Contract comprises 200 or more dwelling and/or commercial units, the Contractor shall provide for a minimum of one number concrete pump, one number crane and one number rough terrain forklift to the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall provide one tower or luffing crane and one passenger cum material hoist per building block of six storeys and above regardless of the number of units in the Contract. The Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications for the construction of all building blocks.

1.4.2

Technical Specification (a)

Concrete Pump The concrete pump shall be either trailer mounted or truck mounted type. The pump shall have an output of at least 40 m³ per hour of compacted concrete. The pump shall be used for casting of slabs from the second storey to the roof of all building Blocks / MSCP. The requirement for provision of concrete pump may be waived at the discretion of the SO Rep if an extra crane over and above the specified requirements is used to transport fresh concrete.

(b)

Crane The crane shall be either crawler truck mounted, rough terrain or tower crane. The age of the crane used on the Site shall not exceed 15 years. The lifting capacity of the crawler truck mounted or rough terrain crane shall be at least 20 metric tonnes. The moment capacity of the tower crane shall be at least 50 metre-tonnes. The crane shall be based on the Site during the concreting stage. The concreting stage shall be defined as the duration of concreting work from the second storey slab to the roof of all building blocks.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(69) Sal(151210) (DPD)



1.4.2

Technical Specification (c)

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

Passenger Cum Material Hoist The design of the passenger cum material hoist shall be in accordance with BS 4465 or other approved equivalent standards. The payload shall be at least one tonne and the travel speed of the cage shall be at least 25.0 m per minute. For passenger cum material hoist serving buildings of more than 16 storeys, each hoist shall have a minimum of 2 winches. The Contractor shall ensure that the foundations, the masts and tie-backs for the passenger cum material hoist be designed by a PE. The design calculations and detailings shall be certified by the PE. The Contractor shall also ensure that his PE submit a Certificate of Supervision to the SO Rep not later than two weeks after the completion of installation of each hoist. The age of the hoist used on the Site shall not exceed 10 years. The hoist shall be provided and commissioned for use before concreting the sixth storey of each building block of six storeys and above. Provide an overloading device to detect and stop the current if the hoist is overloaded. Provide a siren warning device to warn users that the hoist is ascending or descending. Provide a "one-way" locking device to the swing gate at every landing of the hoist in accordance with the details shown in the Drawings or sketch attached. Provide a bell system for all hoists. The bell shall be loud enough for the hoist operator to hear whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell activation button at every storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that level.

(d)

Rough Terrain Forklift The rough terrain forklift shall have a lifting capacity of at least 2 tonnes and a lifting height of at least 3.6 m. The rough terrain forklift shall be provided on the Site not later than the completion of concreting work for the sixth storey slab of the first building block or any other time as instructed by the SO Rep and shall not be removed without his prior approval.

(e)

Formwork System Generally, the Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and design calculations of all formwork system to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance. Trial setting out of the formwork system shall be carried out on the Site two weeks after approval of the submission. Formwork support system of beams and slabs shall consist of rigid steel props or steel frames of adequate strength.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(70) Sal(151210) (DPD)



1.4.3

Recovery For Non-Provision

(CONT’D)

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this Clause including all subclauses under it. In the event of the Contractor not providing all or any of the specified Construction Equipment to the Site as required under this Clause, including all subclauses under it, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates specified hereunder and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor : Type Concrete Pump Crane Passenger cum Material Hoist Rough Terrain Forklift Formwork System

Rate Recoverable $100,000 per number $200,000 per number $40,000 per number $60,000 per number $150,000 per set per building block

The above rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the provision of the specified Construction Equipment. In addition to the abovementioned recovery, the SO Rep may also exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor. In the event the SO Rep approves in writing that all or any of the specified Construction Equipment need not be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates specified above in this subclause and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor. In such event, the SO Rep may not impose any charge under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" against the Contractor. In the event approval in writing is given by the SO Rep for the replacement of a concrete pump with an extra crane over and above the specified requirement for provision of cranes, there shall be no recovery by the Employer from the Contractor. In such event, the additional costs arising out of the replacement shall not be reimbursed by the Employer to the Contractor. Notwithstanding other provisions in this Clause including all subclauses under it, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and expenses over and above the agreed rate or rates specified above in complying with the requirements stipulated in this Clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in full. All differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause including all subclauses under it, (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(71) Sal(151210) (DPD)



1.4.4

Maintenance

(CONT’D)

All Construction Equipment provided to the Site shall be kept in good working order at all times and the Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations vis-a-vis the said Construction Equipment. (a)

Mobile Crane Before operating a mobile crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i)

Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;

(ii)

Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the condition of parts/components by an Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately; and

(iii)

Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised Examiner.

The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :

(b)

(i)

Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. licensed crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;

The

(ii)

Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three months; and

(iii)

Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once in every six months.

Tower Crane Before operating a tower crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i)

Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;

(ii)

Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the condition of parts/components by an Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately;

(iii)

Record of checking the installation and functioning of safety devices by the Authorised Examiner; and

(iv)


The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :

BLDG12/S01.DOC(72) Sal(151210) (DPD)

(i)

Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. licensed crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;

The

(ii)

Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three months;

(iii)

Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the installation and functioning of the safety devices once in every six months; and



1.4.4

Maintenance (Cont'd) (b)

(CONT’D)

Tower Crane (iv)

Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once in every six months.

For every extension of height made on the tower mast and before operating the crane with the new height, the Contractor shall engage the Authorised Examiner to conduct test and thorough visual examination on the crane. (c)

Passenger Cum Material Hoist Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following : (i)

Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the hoist shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site;

(ii)

Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the conditions of parts/components by an Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall be rectified immediately; and

(iii)


The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site. Document and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall:

(d)

(i)

Require an authorised hoist operator to check and operate the hoist daily before operation;

(ii)

Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three months;

(iii)

Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the connecting devices between parts/components and condition of parts/components once in every three months. Any Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and

(iv)

Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist once in every three months.

(v)

The swing gates are to be maintained, checked and certified to be in good working condition by the Authorised Examiner every month.

(vi)

Interlocking gates shall be provided at every lift landing level and they shall comply with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation including any amendment or re-enactment thereto.

Authorised Examiner For the purposes of this Clause including all subclause under it, the Authorised Examiner is any person who is approved by the Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health of the Ministry of Manpower by a Certificate in writing for the purpose of carrying out examinations and tests on lifting equipment in accordance with the Workplace Safety & Health (General Provisions) Regulations.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(73) Sal(151210) (DPD)



1.4.5

Approved Construction Equipment

(CONT’D)

All Construction Equipment used at the Site as specified hereunder shall be obtained from Approved Suppliers registered with HDB. Such Construction Equipment are : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

mobile crane; tower crane; gondola; mast climbing platform; and metal scaffold.

The HDB Materials List can be inspected at HDB website ; www.hdb.gov.sg and http://ml.eptc.sg. For Construction Equipment obtained from other sources, such Construction Equipment shall firstly be registered with the HDB before the Contractor can use such Construction Equipment at the Site. Where, such Construction Equipment is used at the Site for a duration of less than a week, the SO Rep may at his sole discretion, waive the aforementioned requirement. Under such a case, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(74) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (a)

General Requirement The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Workplace Safety & Health Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) and its Subsidiary Legislation including the provisions of the Workplace Safety and Health (Construction) Regulations (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. The subsidiary legislations are:(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii)

The Workplace Safety and Health (General Provisions) Regulations The Workplace Safety and Health (Registration of Factories) Regulations The Workplace Safety and Health (First-Aid) Regulations The Workplace Safety and Health (Exemption) Order The Workplace Safety and Health (Composition of Offences) Regulations The Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations The Workplace Safety and Health (Risk Management) Regulations The Workplace Safety and Health (Workplace Safety and Health Officers) Regulations

Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration, under the Act and its subsidiary legislation, The Workplace Safety And Health (Registration Of Factories) Regulations. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practice. The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his workmen when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety provisions, to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provisions are safe. The Contractor shall submit a safety management system to the SO Rep within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. The submission of the safety management system shall comply with and be kept in the site office and made available for reference at all times. The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen, exit/entry points of buildings and passenger cum material hoist area. The Contractor shall submit drawings, detailings and calculation for all temporary structures as required, certified by his Professional Engineer, for approval at least one week before the commencement of the Works unless otherwise specified. The approval of the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor and his Professional Engineer of the need to ensure the adequacy and sufficiency of the safety provisions. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all cost and expense for the safety provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendments to the Act and its Subsidiary Legislation or changes in the requirements of MOM and the HDB. The Contractor shall engage external auditors to conduct 6 monthly audits on the worksite Safety and Health Management System to comply with the Act and its Subsidiary Legislations. In these audits, every year the Contractor shall require the external auditor to use the Construction Safety Audit Scoring System (ConSASS) as an auditing tool to assess the Safety and Health Management System at the worksite. The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the requirements specified hereunder are strictly complied with at all times.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(75) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (b)

(CONT’D) (Cont’d)

Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all metal access scaffold for all multi-storey carpark/garage or buildings other than residential of 4 storeys and above or 12.0m in height and above. This requirement may be waived, subject to approval by the SO Rep, where industrialised and semi-industrialised methods of construction together with peripheral safety nets are employed. Under such case, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall allow free use of the scaffold by all sub-contractors, specialists, artisans and other tradesmen employed by the Employer or the Contractor. The metal access scaffold shall be of the type approved by the MOM. It shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Scaffolding, CP 14 and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. The metal access scaffold shall be prezinc galvanised or other approved by the SO Rep. The metal access scaffold shall be erected, or substantially extended to, or dismantled, by approved scaffold contractor, in accordance with the Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations. The metal access scaffold and any components therein shall be designed according to the CP14 and Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations by a Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor (herein referred to as “PE”) and they shall be removed only with the permission of the SO Rep. The PE’s drawings and calculations shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the erection and dismantling. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC structure. The submission shall be submitted before the commencement of the works. The metal access scaffold, for access and finishing work, shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of water tank rooms), from the second storey and shall be supported by cantilevered platforms erected in accordance with the drawings of the PE. The cantilevered platforms shall project about 1.1m from the edge of the building or any other distance approved by the SO Rep. Where the structure does not allow the metal access scaffold to be erected from the second storey or where the building is less than 12m in height, the Contractor may erect the metal access scaffold from the first storey subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The material used for the metal working platform shall be prezinc galvanised steel and comply with SS 280. The working platform shall be adequately secured to the metal access scaffold frame at the required levels. The connections between metal working platform and metal access scaffold frame, and between the working platforms shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. For any portion of the working platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor may use timber working platform subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The working platform shall be complete with at least 90mm high coloured toeboards and metal guardrails of at least 1.1m above the platform. The vertical distance between any 2 adjacent guardrails shall not exceed 600mm. Any working platform or workplace and the guardrail immediately above it shall not exceed 600mm. The working platform shall be at least 500mm in width and distance between the edge of the platform shall not exceed 300mm from building edge The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence closely. A 90mm high toeboard shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements: (i) Maximum mesh size : 15mm square (ii) Twine No. : Minimum 350D (iii) Minimum 12 ply (iv) Knot Type : Single or English knot

BLDG12/S01.DOC(76) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (b)


Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms

(Cont’d)

The overlying screening net shall be installed on the entire external face of the access scaffold and its installation shall follow the erection of the metal access scaffold closely. The SO Rep shall have the right to decide on the colour of the net all at the Contractor’s cost and expense. The metal access scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tiebacks. All tie-backs shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification. (c)

Prefabricated Mesh Barricade The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a vertical prefabricated mesh barricade (hereafter referred to as “mesh barricade” for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) for all peripheral open sides of construction level of building (excluding multi-storey carpark/garage) where a person is liable to fall from height. Mesh barricade shall be of sound construction and produced in the factory and installed at the construction level from the inside of the building. Mesh barricade and its support shall be prezinc galvanised or other approved equivalent by the SO Rep, easily installed and dismantled, and reusable throughout the construction (super-structure) stage. External works of the building, such as painting, touching up works, repair and redecoration, and other minor works, shall be carried out using mechanical suspended scaffold or other vertical access equipment. Where the use of mesh barricade is not feasible, as interpreted by SO Rep, during the construction (super-structure) stage, the contractor can counter-propose localised alternative system other than the use of metal access scaffold Mesh barricade/ counter-proposals for localised alternative system, its vertical support and any components therein shall be in modular sizes and designed according to the Workplace Safety and Health (Construction) Regulations by a PE employed by the Contractor. The PE’s drawings and calculation shall then be submitted to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance, before installation and use. Trial setting out of mesh barricade shall be carried out on Site two weeks after approval of submission. The mesh barricade shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of water tank rooms) from the second storey and held by a supporting system designed by the said PE. The height of the mesh barricade shall be at least 1.1m above the construction level. The Contractor and his PE shall ensure that the substrate at which the mesh barricade is affixed to, can resist the designed imposed loads. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC structure. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire internal face of the mesh barricade. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence closely. Where necessary, a 90mm high toeboard shall be provided at the base of the net from the inside of mesh barricade. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Maximum mesh size (square) Twine No. Knot Type Minimum 12 ply

: 15mm square : Minimum 350D : Single or English knot

The vertical supports of mesh barricade shall be effectively anchored to the building structure. All vertical supports shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification. The mesh barricade shall be erected according to a pre-determined safe work procedure established by the Contractor, or substantially dismantled, by trained erectors, under the immediate supervision of a competent supervisor. The mesh barricade and its components shall only be erected and dismantled by workers using life-line and safety belts or other equivalent, if not better, means of preventing a fall. The Contractor shall under no circumstance, use the prefabricated mesh barricade and vertical supports for other purposes.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(77) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (d)


Personal Protective Equipment The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment to all workmen employed on the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that such personal protective equipment comply with the requirements of the Regulations. The Contractor shall also ensure that all equipment are properly used by his workmen during the course of their work. The Contractor shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen. The forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times. The colour code of safety helmets provided by the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Regulations. Three mirrors of sizes 600 mm x 1500 mm are to be installed for the workers to check their personal protective equipment during Tool Box Meeting. The locations of these mirrors are to be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide life-lines and safety harness for workers who are required to carry out work within 2m from any open sides; at or near the external of the building blocks, any floor or top most construction level, lift shafts and void areas or any other locations as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. Approved Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) station shall be set up near the site entrance where the PPE are issued/stored.

(e)

Safety (Anti-Fall) Net The Contractor shall provide and maintain a safety net system to catch person(s) falling whilst working in any location from where he would be liable to fall. The safety net system shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor may propose an alternative system, to be certified by his PE, to the SO Rep for approval. The safety net shall comply with SS 292 or other approved standards. The net shall be of sufficient size and strength to catch any person for whose protection it is to be used and the net shall be so located to cover the area of the possible fall. The Contractor shall conduct a sample test on the safety net system, comprising the net and its supporting structures, before it is installed. Subsequent tests shall be carried out when directed by the SO Rep. For all building blocks of four storeys and above, a peripheral safety net system shall be provided. Initially the net shall be installed at the second storey. As construction progresses, it shall be repositioned to follow the topmost working level but shall be kept at not more than 6.0m below it. It shall be removed only with the approval of the SO Rep. Where access scaffolding is used, or any alternative safety measure approved by the SO Rep is used, a peripheral safety net system is not required. The colour of the safety netting shall be approved by the SO Rep. Safety netting of orange colour shall not be used unless such colour is specifically decided by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

(f)

Working Platforms For Lift Shafts, Central Refuse Chute And Voids The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his Professional Engineer, for the erection of lift shafts and void walls except for central refuse chute. The lift shaft and central refuse chute platforms shall effectively cover the voids at alternate storeys. The lift shaft, central refuse chute and void wall platforms shall be left in place until approval is given by the SO Rep to remove them.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(78) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (g)


Protective Shelter As Overhead Shelter The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain protective shelter as overhead shelter at every point of entry/exit to buildings of two more storeys height. The protective shelter shall be constructed immediately below the second storey. It shall protrude at least 3.0m from the building edge. It shall have a clear width of at least 1.5m and a clear height of at least 2.0m as shown in the drawings. If the protective shelter is intended for access by forklift, it shall have a clear width of at least 2.0m and a clear height of at least 3.0m. The contractor shall ensure that the protective shelter rest on a rigid base. The protective shelter shall be aesthetically pleasing, free of rust and does not trap water. The access to, along and egress from the entry/exit points shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of oil, grease, water and other substances that may cause slipping and tripping. The protective shelter shall be sufficiently strong enough to support a point load of at least 75 kg. It shall be endorsed in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements by a Professional Engineer. The PE’s drawings, detailings and calculations shall be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep. The protective shelter can be made of curved metal roofing with a diameter of at least 1.5m or pitched metal roofing with a slope of greater than one in two, with timber boarding below support by steel pipes. Alternatively, the Contractor can use the HDB patented protective shelter as shown in the Safety Standard Detail Manual. The Contractor shall source on their own directly from suppliers. The contractor can approach HDB’s Centre of Building Research (CBR) for more details on the protective shelter.

(h)

Peripheral Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of more than 15m in height. It shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the fourth storey slab. The overhead shelter shall be at least 2m wide and erected at a height not more than 5m from the base of the building, and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150 mm higher than the inner edge. The overhead shelter shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 75kg point load.

(i)

Barricades To Lift Openings, Voids, The Open Sides Of Buildings And Excavations The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids and the open sides of buildings and excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1m high with 90mm high toeboard and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point load of 50 kg. All services opening shall be fully covered and secured to prevent unauthorised removal.

(j)

Mechanical Suspended Scaffold Mechanical suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair and redecoration and minor work. Where mechanical suspended scaffold system is to be used, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration under the Workplace Safety & Health Act from MOM and a written approval from the SO Rep prior to its installation and usage. The mechanical suspended scaffold system shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code Of Practice For Suspended Scaffold CP20 and any amendment or reenactment thereto. Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffold may be used for finishing Works. Life-lines shall be provided for the mechanical suspended scaffold users to anchor their safety belts.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(79) Sal(151210) (DPD)


SAFETY

1.5.1

Site Safety Measures (k)


Authorised Operators For Machinery And Vehicles The Contractor shall employ only qualified operators for his site machinery. The operator for the machinery shall possess a Skill Evaluation Certificate (SEC) from the BCA Academy or other approved training centre. For those machinery whereby BCA Academy or other approved training centre does not conduct courses or practical tests for machinery operator, the Contractor shall only authorise an experienced and trained operator who has at least a minimum of 2 years experience in operating the machinery. In the case of vehicles, which are operated within the contract boundary, the authorised operator shall possess a minimum valid Class 3 driving licence from the Registrar of Vehicles (Singapore) or its equivalent from their originating countries. The equivalent of a minimum Class 3 driving licence shall first be verified by the respective embassy in Singapore and thereafter submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor shall record the particulars of the operators for the machinery and vehicles in the prescribed form and submit to the SO Rep for approval one week before the commencement of the Works. The prescribed form shall be updated and kept on the Site and made available for inspection at all times.

(l)

Enhanced Hoarding Where the buildings under construction are more than 6 stories and less than 30m away from the Site contract boundary within or next to build-up areas, the Contractor shall provide a 6m hoarding with an overhead shelter. The design and position of the enhanced hoarding shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The design and material requirements shall be in accordance with subclause 1.1.52.2 (or as amended) “Erection And Removal Of Temporary Metal Hoarding”. The hoarding shall be cleared away upon the instruction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also barricade all unauthorized entries/exits at first storey open sides by using at least 1m high orange PVC netting with steel cables going through the top and midheight of the netting. The steel cables shall act as supports for the barricade.

(m)

Safety Training (i)

Safety Orientation Course The Contractor shall employ workmen who possess valid Safety Orientation Course Certificates. The Contractor shall be required to ensure that his workmen attend a prescribed safety refresher course at an interval of time to be decided by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(80) Sal(151210) (DPD)


Site Safety Measures (m)

Safety Training (ii)

(Cont'd) (Cont'd)

Safety Training Course When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send his employees/staff as stipulated hereunder to MOM’s accredited training providers for appropriate safety training as shown hereunder :  Safety Training Courses Conducted by MOM’s Accredited Training Providers Courses

Applicable To

Specialist Diploma in Workplace Safety and Health / Workplace Safety & Health Officer (WSHO) Training Course

Safety Personnel for registration as Workplace Safety & Health Officer (WSHO)

Construction Safety Course for Project Managers

Chairmen of Safety Committees, Project Managers and Engineers

Safety Management Course

Chairmen of Safety Committees, Managers, Engineers and Supervisory Staff

Advanced Certificate in Workplace Safety and Health

Safety Coordinator

Training Course for Safety Committee Members

Safety Committee Members

Building Construction Safety Supervisor Course

Building Construction Foremen and Supervisors

SIC (Manhole) for Supervisors

Supervisors

Lifting Supervisors Safety Course

Supervisors and Foremen

Industrial First Aid Course

Workers, Safety Personnel and Supervisors

Industrial First Aid Refresher Course

Trained First Aiders

Crawler Crane Operator Course:  New entrant programme  Refresher programme  Familiarisation programme

Crane Operators

Erection of Metal Scaffold

Erectors

Slingers/Riggers Course

Workers, Foremen and Supervisors

Tower Crane Operator Course:  New Entrant Programme  Familiarisation Programme

Crane Operators

Supervision of Metal Scaffold Erection

Supervisors

Climbing Work Platform Operation

Supervisors, workers and operators

Explosive Powered Tools Operation

Workers and Operators

The safety training shall be applicable to all levels of employees/staff stipulated in this subclause including top management at the work Site. Particular attention shall be given to the needs of young employees/staff. training shall be required where : (1)

Employees/staff are transferred or where employees/staff take on new responsibilities or where a change in the work activity or work environment could arise; and

(2)

There is a change in the work equipment or systems of work in use.

Training shall be repeated periodically to ensure continued competence.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(81) Sal(151210) (DPD)

Further


Site Safety Measures (n)

(Cont'd)

Tower Cranes And Other Tall Construction Equipment The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions on the use of tower crane or other tall Construction Equipment, imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore and Ministry of Defence. In addition, the height clearance of tower crane or other tall Construction Equipment shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before they are brought to the Site. Force limiting device, speed limiters and moment limit switches shall be installed for all cranes. The Contractor shall submit detailed layout drawings and safety requirement of the tower cranes to MOM and the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to their installation. The Safety Factor for tower crane shall have a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of safety for the tower crane. The Lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam and the lifting device. The tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest component including the necessary lifting appliances. The slewing radii of the tower cranes shall not overlap, unless the tower cranes are equipped with an anti-collision system. It is not permitted to be hoisted over temporary building structures, outside the contract boundary and other sensitive areas. The slewing limit switch shall be activated to stop the slewing action before the jib slews into the overlap zone. The jib of a tower crane shall not be allowed to slew outside the contract boundary lines without the written approval of the SO Rep. The free standing mast of the tower crane must be certified by the Contractor's PE prior to its use on the Site. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations of the type of foundation support and the tie-back for the tower crane, duly endorsed by his PE, together with technical information to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor's PE shall certify that the free standing height of the mast is structurally adequate and sound before the tie-back is installed. No tower crane shall be installed and supported on the constructed RC structure of a building.

(o)

Access For The Use Of Mobile Crane And Piling Machines Next To Built-Up Area Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to existing buildings or public roads or MRT lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved by the SO Rep. All such access shall be provided over adequate compacted hardcore base. The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the cranes and piling machines and for their lifting or pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load so as not to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials. The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations endorsed by the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of the access. The access shall be constructed according to the approved Drawings and maintained in a good condition at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The access shall be inspected by the Contractor's PE prior to its use.

(p)

Warning Signs And Lights The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900 mm x 600 mm at strategic points around the periphery of the Site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the words "DANGER - KEEP OUT" in the four official languages in red on white background with reflective material and approved by the SO Rep. Warning lights shall be placed at similar positions at night to serve as a warning. If work is carried out near public roads, all signage shall comply with the recommendations of the Temporary Road Signage Manual issued by the Land Transport Authority.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(82) Sal(151210) (DPD)


Site Safety Measures (q)

(Cont'd)

Mobile Crane The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO Rep for approval prior to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the crane access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of the crane access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the SO Rep. The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside the contract boundary without the written approval of the SO Rep. All the hoisting area must be effectively barricaded. The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions. Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Safety Factor for mobile crane shall have a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of safety for the mobile crane. The lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam and the lifting device. The tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest component including all necessary lifting appliances. A Permit-To-Hoist must be obtained before any hoisting operation is carried out. The Contractor shall station a lifting supervisor on the Site to oversee and guide the crane operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The cranes shall be tested by an "Authorised Examiner" before its use on the Site irrespective of any valid test certificate. The Contractor shall ensure daily checks are carried out by the crane operator and maintenance checks conducted once every three months. The crane must have overhaul checks before it is used on the Site. Test certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection records by the crane operator, data on the Authorised Examiners and the Contractor's site engineer shall be properly documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO Rep.

(r)

Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger And Signalman The Contractor shall comply with the Factories (Operation of Cranes) Regulations 1998. He shall appoint at least one full time lifting supervisor to supervise all lifting operations of any crane for the Site. However, where more than one crane is used on the Site, the number of lifting supervisor employed by the Contractor shall be increased as required by the SO Rep. No lifting activity shall be allowed without the supervision of the lifting supervisor. The lifting supervisor shall have a minimum of 3 years of experience in construction work and lifting operations. He must be a site foreman or site engineer and possesses a certificate on Safety Instruction Course for Lifting Supervisor. He shall spend his time fully on all lifting activities and ensure that unsafe conditions are rectified. For lifting operation within the Site which is next to existing buildings, public roads or MRT lines, the crane operator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the operation of cranes. For lifting operation within the site not next to existing buildings, public roads or MRT lines, the crane operator shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the operation of cranes. Riggers and signalmen shall also be appointed for all lifting operations and they must have completed an approved training course. The crane operator, lifting supervisor, rigger and signalman shall carry out their duties strictly according to the abovementioned Regulations and other duties as the SO Rep deems necessary from time to time. The Contractor shall submit a list of crane operators, lifting supervisors, riggers and signalmen with their names, identification card or passport numbers, qualifications and years of experience to the SO Rep for approval one week before the use of the crane. The list shall be updated and kept on the Site at all times. The SO Rep reserves the right to examine the list as and when required.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(83) Sal(151210) (DPD)


Site Safety Measures (s)

(Cont'd)

Temporary Staircases The Contractor shall provide and maintain 0.8m minimum wide temporary metal staircases from one working floor to another. The staircases shall be placed against the adjacent staircase walls or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction. The outer sides of the staircases shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1m above the outer staircase strings. The bottom of the staircases shall be covered fully with metal plate. The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the staircases. The Professional Engineer's drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of the staircases.

(t)

Gas Cylinders and Related Equipment The Contractor shall use gas cylinders fitted with a low pressure gauge and a high pressure gauge, a reducing valve with pressure regulator, and safety relief device. The gas cylinders shall not be kept in the same room where welding, cutting or heating is being carried out or placed within five metres of any source of heat. The gas cylinders must always be kept upright in a wheeled-trolley. The hose connecting a gas cylinder to an apparatus for cutting, welding, heating or other related works shall be of good construction and sound material, free from Defect, properly maintained, and not entangled or kinked. A flashback arrester or any other similar device which stops flashback that is acceptable to the Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health must be fitted at every outlet of a gas cylinder and every inlet of an apparatus. The gas cylinders and hoses shall be colour-coded to conform to SS 152 : Indentification of Contents of Industrial Gas Containers or any amendments thereof. The Contractor shall engage a competent person to check the safety devices referred herein once in every 6 months. The competent person is any person who is competent by education, training and experience on the safety and operational aspects of the use of gas cylinders and related equipment.

(u)

Socket Outlet Assembly The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain the socket-outlet assembly (hereinafter referred to as "SOA" for the purpose of this subclause) for all temporary electrical installations. The SOA shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of CP 88 (Code of Practice For Temporary Electrical Installations in Construction & Building Sites). It shall be designed for wall mounting or fitted with castors so that it can be moved around on the Site. Every electrical equipment used shall be plugged directly into the industrial SOA.

(v)

Others The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards or fences or barriers around excavations, lift pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The guards, fences and barriers shall be of sound material, good construction and possess adequate strength. At the site entrance gate, the Contractor shall provide a gantry fitted with a height control device and a siren to control the height limit of construction vehicle/machinery when they leave the Site. This limit shall comply with the requirements of LTA. The Contractor shall provide and maintain storey number indicators of size 400mm x 400mm at every staircase area and 900mm x 900mm at the metal scaffold enclosing passenger cum material hoist. The indicators shall be displayed at alternate storeys starting from the second storey.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(84) Sal(151210) (DPD)


Safety Infringement The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for complying with the safety requirements. The SO Rep will conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures with the Contractor's site safety supervisor or the Contractor's Representative. The Contractor shall rectify immediately any contravention of or non-compliance with the Workplace Safety and Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health (Construction) Regulations or safety measures specified. All Works or part of the Works may be stopped when the SO Rep considers the working environment or procedure is unsafe for Works to continue. In such event, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of Time for Completion. If the contravention is not rectified by the subsequent inspection, the SO Rep may exercise his right under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a further charge against the Contractor. Upon any accident or dangerous occurrence, occurring on the Site, the SO Rep, HDB or any Competent Authority may order a total or partial stoppage of the Works, depending on the nature and extent of the accident/dangerous occurrence, to allow for investigations and/or to carry out remedial measures. Under such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of Time for Completion. The SO Rep shall, at its absolute discretion, also exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for the following type of incidents occurring in the course of or arising out of or in consequence of the Works :

1.5.3

(i)

Fatal accident, if the SO Rep or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident is the result of the defaults, acts, omissions or negligence, in part or in whole, of the Contractor.

(ii)

Other accident which the SO Rep, HDB or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident is the result of failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the Contract or the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations.

(iii)

Dangerous occurrence as classified in the Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations, Part II if the SO Rep, HDB or the Competent Authority is of the opinion that the dangerous occurrence is the result of failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the Contract or the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations.

Reporting Of Accidents and Dangerous Occurrence In the case of an accident or a dangerous occurrence as classified under the Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations, Part II, the Contractor shall notify the Commissioner and HDB within one hour of such accident or dangerous occurrence. Upon receipt of information of an accident or dangerous occurrence, the SO Rep or HDB may at its discretion make a preliminary investigation of the circumstances and record its finding upon such investigation. Notwithstanding the aforementioned requirements, the Contractor shall in addition, make an incident investigation in the form set out in the INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT - HDB and submit it to HDB on a timely basis. The form is obtainable at HDB. Upon submitting the INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT to HDB, the Contractor shall arrange for the injured workman, witnesses and an interpreter, if necessary, to report to HDB to furnish evidence relating to the accident or dangerous occurrence. If the Contractor fails to give any required notice or fails to furnish evidence of the accident or dangerous occurrence as required in this Clause, the SO Rep or HDB may at his absolute discretion exercise his rights under Clause “Nuisance And Irregularities” to impose charges against the Contractor.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(85) Sal(151210) (DPD)


NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES If the Contractor is found to have committed any of the following irregularities : (i)

Omitting building materials or labour, reducing the sizes of the materials, using inferior materials; or materials constructed not according to the Specifications or Drawings;

(ii)

Creating nuisance at the Site thereby causing inconvenience to the SO Rep or the public or committing similar acts (such as not complying with site safety requirements, etc.) which are likely to bring the Employer into disrepute;

(iii)

Non-compliance with any part of the Specifications or Drawings, or non-fulfilment of any contractual obligation.

the SO Rep reserves the right to impose on the Contractor, and the Contractor hereby fully accepts and agrees to pay without dispute or question, a charge based on prevailing guidelines set by the Employer but not exceeding $100,000/-, and for contract with a Contract Sum of less than $300,000/-, a charge not exceeding 30% of the Contract Sum per occasion as agreed compensation to the Employer for the inconvenience caused, investigation and administrative expenses incurred by the Employer and for damage to the Employer's reputation and standing generally. Furthermore, the Contractor may be barred from tendering for a specified period. In addition to the above charges, the SO Rep or HDB is empowered either : (a)

to order any irregular work to be removed and made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep or HDB at the Contractor's own costs and expenses; or

(b)

in lieu of correcting work not done in accordance with the Contract, the SO Rep or HDB may allow such work to remain and shall recover any cost differences between the specified requirements and the non-compliance.

For nuisance committed on the Site, the Contractor shall take immediate action to cease the nuisance committed upon instruction given by the SO Rep or HDB. 1.7


1.7.1

General Requirements For Land Survey Services The contractor shall engage a registered surveyor at its own cost and expense to provide Land Survey Services to facilitate construction works and to carry out surveys for record purposes or for submission to authority as and when requested by HDB during construction and post construction stage. The cost incurred shall include the purchase of information and equipments required for the survey works. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the accuracy of all the survey works carried out by its registered surveyor and for ensuring the works fully comply with the following ; (a)

the technical requirements and standards in the conduct of the surveys as specified in the latest version of the land surveyors board directive on engineering and hydrographic survey practices;

(b)

the technical requirements and standards in the conduct of the surveys as specified in the latest Singapore Land Authority (SLA) directive on cadastral survey practices;

(c)

circulars that are issued from time to time by the Chief Surveyor, Singapore, SLA.

(d)

all field works and office works are executed by the registered surveyor or qualified staff under the registered surveyor direct supervision and direction;

(e)

all documents and survey works pertaining to the survey are certified and dated by the registered surveyor supervising the survey.

BLDG12/S01.DOC(86) Sal(151210) (DPD)



1.7.2

Engineering Survey Services (Construction Stage)

(CONT’D)

All forms of land survey services required for the purpose to facilitate the construction works or survey works requested by HDB in relation to the construction of the projects are to be performed by the contractor’s registered surveyor. Such surveys shall include the setting out of parcel boundaries, grids, piles position, building blocks, minor sewer and service roads alignments, etc. piles eccentricity checks survey, topographical survey of surrounding services and roads, as-built survey of services and preparation of setting out plans, cross-sectional and longitudinal plans and surveys to monitor ground settlement, where applicable. 1.7.3

“As- Built” Survey (Post Development Stage) The “As-built” survey plan of the parcel is to be submitted to HDB within 2 months from the date of handover of the site to HDB. The survey includes the verification of SVY 21 datum and establishment of horizontal and vertical controls, spot levelling, site features and boundaries details, height of buildings, establishment of at least 3 level control benchmarks (TBM’s) near to the designated site, preparation of cadastral based map information for overlaying onto the topographical plan, including the provision of digital files, DWG format. Details of the surveys, where applicable; (a)

all visible details are to be surveyed;

(b)

samplings and trees where required shall be surveyed and described accordingly;

(c)

for sewer manhole, electrical manholes and inspection chambers, the cover levels and invert levels shall be surveyed. The type of manhole and inspection chambers, direction of flow shall be reflected in the plan;

(d)

for drains, invert levels and coping / top levels shall be surveyed generally at 20m interval. For cascading drain, the coping / top levels shall be surveyed. Covered drains with iron grating shall be surveyed.

(e)

Over-ground electric boxes, lamp / cable posts with numbers, exposed / overhead cables, etc; shall be surveyed;

(f)

Levels of at least 2 extreme corners of the roof including the highest point of the building structure are to be surveyed;

(g)

Spot levels shall be taken generally at 15m interval, at intersection, building corners, permanent features and at all changes of grades. For road, the cross-sectional spot levels are generally at 20m interval;

(h)

Road names and house numbers shall be picked up as appearing on site; and,

(i)

edges of ponds shall be surveyed;

BLDG12/S01.DOC(87) Sal(151210) (DPD)


CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE OF WORK The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken note of all conditions for the construction and completion of the Contract, in particular, the following conditions pertaining to this Contract and satisfy himself on and make provision in the Contract Sum : (a)

The nature of sites and soils both above and below ground with respect to various stages of construction in particular the possible existence of boulders/granite underground and other buried materials which have to be removed from site.

(b)

The provision of temporary access for traffic diversion while work is in progress to ensure undisrupted movement of traffic at all times.

(c)

The effect of existing properties, building structures / foundations.

(d)

The availability, supply of and conditions affecting labour within the Time for Completion.

(e)

The effect of other contractors or persons approved by the SO Rep, working within the contract area.

(f)

The probable adverse effect of the weather on the execution of the Contract.

(g)

The effect of execution of works due to the presence of hard soil strata, existing services, etc.

(h)

The means of access to facilitate the transportation and movement of construction equipment.

(i)

The general ground levels, spot levels of the work site.

(j)

The provision of earth drains; silt traps and the requirements to deal with drain diversion.

(k)

All aspects of local conditions, physical or otherwise, at the site that pertains to or affects in any way the construction works required at the site concerned.

(l)

The effect of encountering various existing cables, pipes, sewers, etc. which may require diversion.

(m)

The effect of heavy vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

(n)

The necessary re-instatement of all affected turfing areas and works affected by this contract.

The Contractor must also ascertain for himself the most convenient and expeditious method of carrying out the work. The working conditions and the space to be made available as a work site should be inspected and no claims will be allowed on the ground of lack of knowledge of the conditions under which the work will be executed. The Contractor shall note that all information regarding existing levels given in the drawings only serve as a guide and he shall obtain his own information whenever he is doubtful. No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any misunderstanding or misinterpretation in respect of any such matter nor shall the Contractor be released fromany risks or obligations imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground or on the ground that he did not or could not foresee any matter which might affect or have affected the execution of the Works.

Section 2/.....

BLDG12/S01.DOC(88) Sal(151210) (DPD)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bldg Spec Page 2-1 SECTION 2 PILING

2.1

SCOPE OF PILING WORKS The Contract requires the supply of all materials, labours, tools, machinery and everything necessary for the construction and complete installation of one or a combination of the following piling systems under the supervision of the Superintendent Officer's Representative (SO Rep): (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

H-Section Steel Piling Large Diameter Bored Piling Micro Pile System Jack in Piling System Reinforced Concrete Piling; and Timber Piling

Where the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender provides for the rates of the specified piling system to be indicated by the Contractor, the Contractor shall fill in all such tender rates clearly. Where the Tender Cost Breakdown does not provide such rates to be filled in by the Contractor even though the item of work involves piling, such piling work is deemed to be included in the Contract Sum for the said item of work.

2.2

PILING EQUIPMENT/MACHINERY The type of piling machine adopted shall be able to install piles taking into account the headroom constraint and proximity of the piles to the existing building. The Contractor shall provide sufficient piling machines and accessory equipment at any one time throughout the contract period. The use of diesel piling machines is strictly disallowed in the contract. The Contractor shall provide all necessary piling equipment/machinery to overcome obstructions such as hard soil layers, concrete or rocks, etc. such that when these obstructions are encountered the piles can be installed to the required depth for their sound performance.

2.3

EXPERIENCE OF CONTRACTOR/CONTRACTOR'S SPECIALIST FOR PILING WORKS The Contractor shall assess the load capacity of the piles in the various ground conditions encountered. He may engage a Piling Specialist for the piling works. The Piling Specialist so engaged shall be registered under BCA Construction Work Head CR08 and of Financial Grade L5 and above. The Piling Specialist shall also have a minimum of 5 years of relevant experience in large scale piling works and sufficient equipment for the piling works. In addition, the Site Supervisor to be engaged by the Piling Specialist shall have a minimum of 5 years of relevant experience in large scale piling works. The Contractor shall submit the names of the Piling Specialist as well as the Piling Specialist's Site Supervisor and proof of the relevant resources, experience and expertise for approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the Piling Specialist and Piling Specialist's Site Supervisor by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the works. Further, such approval shall not affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. If the Contractor is also registered under BCA Construction Work Head CR08 of Financial Grade L5 and above and with a minimum of 5 years of relevant working experience in large scale piling works, the Contractor may seek the approval from the SO Rep to carry out the piling works himself. In addition, the Contractor shall submit written evidence to show that he has sufficient equipment and the persons to be engaged for the piling Works have had the required experience and expertise.



WORK SCHEDULES The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress and the time required for piling and follow up works to the SO Rep as soon as that site is handed to the Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule otherwise he shall be liable for Liquidated Damages. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at every site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.

2.5

SITE CONDITIONS AND CONSTRAINTS The Contractor shall visit the project site to determine the nature of site conditions and extent of site constraints e.g. poor soil condition. He shall consider the effects of the above condition/constraint may have on his machinery movement, method of pile installation, temporary works or special equipment required, etc. for the completion of foundation works, when he submits his tender.

2.6

PLATFORM LEVEL The Contractor shall check and ensure that the platform level as indicated in the piling plans tallies with the corresponding architectural plans and structural plans. The Contractor shall highlight to the SO Rep if there is difference of platform levels indicated in different sets of plans before commencement of works.

2.7

INFORMATION ON GROUND CONDITIONS Geotechnical information concerning the site shall be provided to the Contractor. However, the SO Rep / HDB accepts no responsibility for the accuracy and/or comprehensiveness of any such information provided. The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surroundings, and carry out all independent investigations, satisfy himself as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the form and nature of the site and nature of the Works and obtain all necessary information as to other circumstances which may affect his tender price. If the Contractor wishes to carry out his own ground testing, he shall submit his proposal to the SO Rep for approval prior to such tests and all expenses incurred as a result of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. All such proposals must be submitted not later than 2 weeks before the tender closing date for the project. The tender closing date will not be extended for any ground testing requested by the Contractor. No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any misunderstanding or misinterpretation of any such matter or for the Contractor's failure to obtain all necessary information nor shall the Contractor be released from any duties, responsibilities or obligations imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground or on the ground that he did not or could not foresee any matter which might affect the Works.

2.8

CABLES/SERVICES DETECTION The Contractor shall visit and examine the site carefully and ascertain its nature and make provision in the Tender Price for the type of ground conditions, constraints and presence of any underground services. The Contractor is to provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services prior to the commencement of excavation or piling work. He shall engage PUB licensed cables/services detecting companies to carry out all cable/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or piling work shall be checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid formation to cover the entire area of work. The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep where mains, pipe or conduit are encountered during excavation and where any excavation is carried out adjacent to or under any existing cable, pipe, structure; or any other such work that may be affected by subsidence, regardless of whether such work is shown on the Drawings or not. If it becomes essential, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the SO Rep may direct and the Contractor shall be paid for this additional work unless in the opinion of the SO Rep such additional work has been necessitated by the Contractor's negligence, lack of foresight or faulty workmanship.



CABLES/SERVICES DETECTION

(CONT’D)

In the event that damages have been caused to the public services due to the Contractor's work or otherwise, all expenditure for such necessary repairs etc incurred by the relevant public Authorities shall be borne by the Contractor regardless of whether such repairs are due to accident or otherwise. The costs for such repairs shall be deducted from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or by direct payment by the Contractor to the Authorities. If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, it is essential to permanently divert any cable, pipe or other services, the cost of diversion shall be paid for by the Employer.

2.9

NOISE, VIBRATION, DISTURBANCE AND SAFETY OF EXISTING BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Environmental Pollution Control Act and all relevant authorities’ rules and regulations, in respect of work that affects the public. All piling operations and excavation works shall be carried out without unreasonable noise, vibration and disturbance. The Contractor shall bear all risks and responsibilities in carrying out the piling operations and excavation works and shall be responsible during the progress of the piling operation and excavation works for any damage or disturbance to existing or adjoining properties, or annoyance or nuisance to residents and users of these properties. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the existing buildings/structures and shall include in his contract sum the provision and construction of necessary and adequate shoring and supports within existing buildings/structures, to underpin and strengthen the existing building foundations against any adverse effect arising out of the execution of the piling operation and excavation works.

2.10

SITE SURVEY, GROUND MOVEMENT / VIBRATIONS CONTROL MONITORING The Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) who will specify the method, procedure, precautions etc, where piling / excavation works are to be carried out close to existing buildings or structures at his own cost and expense. The PE shall study the nature of the proposed piling / excavation works, ground conditions, existing and proposed buildings and structures within the site, existing neighbouring buildings, structures, properties, and gather any other relevant information in order to make the following necessary submissions to the SO’s Rep or other relevant Authorities : (a)

The PE shall submit a vibration monitoring layout plan. The allowable vibration level must be explicitly stated in the submission.

(b)

The PE shall submit his design drawing on retaining works and instrumentation monitoring programme. The allowable ground movements for excavation work must be explicitly stated in the submission.

(c)

The Contractor and his PE shall carry out a pre-construction survey on all the neighbouring properties. A Registered Surveyor has to be engaged in the process if necessary. The Contractor and his PE shall extend a copy of the survey report to the owners of all the neighbouring properties.

(d)

The Contractor and his PE shall carry out crack monitoring to measure movement across cracks in vertical and horizontal directions.

(e)

The Contractor and his PE shall carry out settlement monitoring. When any of the following criteria is reached irrespective of whether damage has occurred, the Contractor shall notify the SO Rep immediately. (i) 5mm settlement or movement between consecutive readings. (ii) 15mm total settlement of any part of a building/structure.

Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted within two weeks after the completion of the monitoring works. The Contractor and his PE shall be fully responsible on the adequacy of the above designs and submissions. The PE shall be aware of his responsibility as spelt out by BCA’s circulars and announcements in making the above submissions. All of the above requirements are to be complied with before commencement of works. BLDG12/S02.DOC(3) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 2-4

2.11

PROTECTION TO EXISTING FOUNDATION While carrying out any excavation work, the Contractor shall exercise due care and diligence to protect the existing foundation. Exposure of existing footing and piles under the pilecaps shall be avoided to prevent disturbance to the bearing soil or the soil around piles. The costs and expenses for protection during excavation are deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.

2.12

STANDARD AND CERTIFICATES All materials used in the installation of piles shall be obtained from approved manufacturers. Materials and articles used shall comply with appropriate Singapore Standards (S.S.) where these exist, otherwise British Standards (B.S.) or other approved Standards will apply. Where the standard given in this document has been amended or superseded, the current Standard shall apply. Where British Standards are given in this document, the corresponding Singapore Standards where existing shall prevail. The recommendations in the appropriate Singapore Codes of Practice (C.P.) shall be referred to during the construction where these exist otherwise British Codes of Practice or other approved codes shall apply unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. In all cases where materials or articles are specified to comply with respective Standards the Contractor shall, if required, obtain from the manufacturers and supply to the SO Rep the appropriate Certificate of Compliance with the Standard.

2.13

TESTING OF MATERIALS The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out test on materials to be used in the works. The cost of conducting any test shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested and the results of such testing shall be accepted as final. Any material test that fails shall be considered not to have fulfilled the requirements. In that event, the SO Rep may, without prejudice to other rights under the Contract, order such further test(s) as he deems necessary, all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. In addition, the whole consignment may be liable to be rejected and shall be removed from site at the Contractor's own expense when directed by the SO Rep. The costs of the failed tests together with all administrative expenses incurred shall be borne by the Contractor. All the tests as and when directed by the SO Rep. must be carried out at HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory or Accredited Laboratories

2.14

RESERVED

2.15

REMOVAL OF OBSTRUCTION The Contractor shall allow for at his own cost, excavation in any material to remove obstructions which prevent driving / drilling or which interfere with the proper alignment of the piles, timbering, backfilling, restoration of ground surrounding the piles and any other works necessary to complete the operation to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. No claims for standing time for rigs will be allowed in consequence of any kind.


Bldg Spec Page 2-5

2.16

PENETRATION AND SIZE OF PILES The Contractor shall be required to install any size of the piles as shown in the specifications or drawings and each pile in the position indicated on the drawings to the required depth. The onus of obtaining the required resistance to withstand the required test load within the limit of settlement shall rest with the Contractor but the piles shall not be installed unnecessarily beyond the depth for them to develop the required test load. Should Contractor find that a longer penetration is required due to poor ground conditions being encountered as work proceeds, this will be permitted only if it is proved to be justified by examination and tests of the soils in the boreholes. The Contractor must also state sound and acceptable basis for determining the penetration required. If ground conditions indicate that the sizes of any subsequent piles as proposed and shown on the drawings are inadequate then the Contractor shall produce sufficient evidence to prove that a larger diameter would be more suitable. Conversely, where a pile is to be constructed in very good ground, the Contractor must produce sufficient evidence to show that the reduced length of pile will be capable of carrying the specified load. However, the Contractor must first obtain the approval of the SO Rep if longer or shorter penetration is required.

2.17

TOLERANCE FROM TRUE POSITION The centre of each pile at the cut-off level shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the drawings by more than 75 mm in any direction. Should the deviation be more than the stated tolerance in any direction, the affected pile is liable to be rejected and compensating piles shall be installed at Contractor's own expense when directed by the SO Rep. All additional cost of amendment in pile cap, beams, etc designed as a counter measure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance shall also be borne by the Contractor.

2.18

DAMAGED AND REJECTED PILES Damaged piles and piles installed out of position or twisted shall be rejected and/or removed and replacement pile(s) shall be substituted by the Contractor at his own expense even if piles of bigger capacity are required. Piles shall be installed truly vertical and any pile with an inclination exceeding 1 (horizontal) to 75 (vertical) is liable to be rejected and shall be similarly removed and replaced when ordered by the SO Rep at Contractor's own expense. In addition, the Contractor shall also bear the extra cost as a result of rejection and replacement or supplemented by additional pile(s) due to an increase in size of pile caps, strengthening of the ground beam, etc. Piles which have risen or are disturbed as a result of installing adjacent piles shall be reinstated to the original depth and resistance. Otherwise, it shall be replaced by compensating piles at the Contractor's expense.

2.19

PILE VERTICALITY MEASUREMENT The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipments to facilitate the measurement of the verticality of the piles. All such equipments shall be pre-approved by the SO Rep.



LOAD TESTS (a)

Standard Load Test (SLT) The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the number of standard load tests as specified by the SO Rep for the whole Contract. Unless otherwise required under the Contract, Standard Load Test shall be conducted on working piles by loading the piles to twice their nominal working loads. The SO Rep shall decide when testing can commence and the Contractor shall proceed with testing only after the instruction of the SO Rep has been given to him to test the pile. As soon as a test pile has been selected the Contractor shall prepare for the test without delay. All selected test piles must be tested within two weeks from the date of selection. Standard Load Tests shall be carried out on any such working piles as may be ordered by the SO Rep.

(b)

Ultimate load test (ULT) The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the number of ultimate load tests (including the installation of the test piles) and the pile instrumentations as specified by the SO Rep for the whole contract.

2.21

ULTIMATE LOAD TEST The Ultimate Load Test (ULT) on a test pile shall be conducted before the installation of the working piles, and/or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. The ULT is conducted to determine the expected settlement and the ultimate capacity of the pile, and to check the pile integrity. It shall be a pile different from the working pile. Unless otherwise required under the Contract, NO Ultimate Load Test shall be conducted on a working pile. For non-instrumented ULT, the pile is tested to 2.5 times nominal working load. For instrumented ULT, the pile is tested to 3 times nominal working load. The Ultimate Load Test on a test pile will be deemed to fail if, (i)

its settlement under the test load (a) (b) (c)

exceeds 25mm at 2 times nominal working load; or continues without further load increment before or at 2.5 times nominal working load; or does not meet other requirements as specified in the relevant clauses of the SS CP4 for Foundations; or

(ii)

any portion of the pile has failed, crumbled or distorted from its original position; or

(iii)

the load test cannot be completed for any reason.

In the event of failure of this ultimate load test on the test pile, instrumented or non-instrumented as the case may be, ONE (1) further test (including the installation of the test piles) shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense. In addition, for bored pile system, the compensating ultimate load test shall be carried out as an instrumented bored pile at the Contractor's expense. If the subsequent test fails again, the ultimate load test results may be used to assess the suitability of the pile type, pile design and layout proposed, or more further tests (including the installation of the test piles) may be ordered by the SO's Rep if deemed necessary all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.



LOADING OF TEST PILES Adequate facilities and sufficient equipment shall be provided by the Contractor for at least two (2) load tests to proceed simultaneously at any one time. (a)

The test load may be applied to the pile by jacking against kentledge or anchor pile. The clear distance between a test pile and any anchor pile shall not be less than 3 metres. Where piles are in groups, the use of other working piles as anchor piles may be allowed subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be solely responsible for making good as the SO Rep considers necessary any damage to such anchor piles which are used as permanent piles.

(b)

Pile top levels of test piles shall be recorded immediately after selection and in any case before the erection of kentledge platform. This shall be done by reading levels on two diagonally opposite corners of the pile top.

(c)

All test equipment such as surveying level, oil pumps and hydraulic jacks shall be accurate and in sound condition. Prior to commencement of test, Certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep to show the date of last checking for accuracy. The last calibration date of all test equipment must not be more than three months or as directed by the SO Rep.

(d)

The hydraulic pump for the jack shall, when required, be encased in a steel or wooden box under lock and key. The area surrounding the test pile shall be cordoned off by protective fencing.

(e)

In the preparation of all test piles the Contractor shall ensure the rigidity of the supports at all corners of the platform. If piles are required to support the platform they shall be installed at Contractor's own expense.

(f)

If any test is discontinued or fails to reach the specified load due to (a) faulty jack or gauge, (b) unstable support of kentledge, (c) cracking in or damage to the pile, (d) the datums not being set out properly, (e) unstable benchmark or scales, (f) pre-jacking or pre-loading or any other cause, then the test shall be abandoned and the results disregarded. A further test shall be carried out at Contractor's own expense.

(g)

The settlement shall be measured to an accuracy of not less than half mm from a datum which must be on an immovable structure or be on a pile and it shall not be affected by any movement of the ground due to the test loading, driving of piles or any other causes.

(h)

For Standard Load Test, the test load shall be imposed by equal increments at approved intervals of load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being maintained for at least 15 minutes until the full test load is reached. This test load at the nominal working load shall be maintained for 24 hours before the operation to load the pile to its full test load (2 times the nominal working load) is continued. The full test load shall remain for a period of no less than 3 (three) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The results shall be plotted to produce a loadsettlement curve.

(i)

For Ultimate Load Test, the test load shall be imposed by equal increments at approved intervals of load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being maintained for at least 15 minutes until the full test load is reached. This test load at the nominal working load and at two times nominal working load shall be maintained for 24 hours before the operation to load the pile to its full test load (3 times the nominal working load) is continued. The full test load shall remain for a period of no less than 3 (three) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The result shall be plotted to produce a load-settlement curve.

(j)

All pile load test shall be carried out in compliance with CP4: 2003. Amongst other requirements, a calibrated load gauge and a calibrated pressure gauge shall be used to measure the force exerted on the pile under test.


Bldg Spec Page 2-8

2.23

FAILURE OF STANDARD LOAD TEST A Standard Load Test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceeds 25 mm at 2 times nominal working load for driving steel piles, large diameter bored piles, jack-in piles, micropiles, precast reinforced concrete piles and timber piles. For pile subjected to negative skin friction, the standard load test can be performed in the normal manner, but with its acceptance subject to satisfaction of an additional criterion that pile settlement at the test load of 1.0 time column load plus 2.0 times negative friction should not exceed 10mm. If a working pile so tested as herein specified, fails to sustain the full standard test load over a period to be decided by the SO Rep, but in any case not less than 3 days, then TWO further tests on other piles in any block at the same area selected by the SO Rep shall be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at Contractor's own expense. Where a pile fails under test, compensating piles, as directed by the SO Rep shall be provided and the group retested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, the whole of the work shall be carried out at the Contractor's own expense.

2.24

SOUNDNESS OF WORK The Contractor shall be aware that load tests on piles are conducted for the purpose of studying the behaviour of piles and in particular settlement under load. As not every pile can be tested, the Contractor shall ensure that all piles are installed such that the total settlement or differential settlement shall be limited to a maximum angle of 1:500 so that the building to be supported will not be damaged due to settlement. For bored piles in buildings of ten(10) storeys or taller, the Contractor shall monitor and submit the settlement records at various selected columns to the SO's Rep. The acceptance of a few piles which pass the load tests does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for the soundness of the whole of the pile foundation. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring that all the piles are installed to such a depth that the required resistance is obtained.

2.25

ULTIMATE LOAD TEST AND STANDARD LOAD TEST REPORT Three sets of test reports, endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to the SO Rep three working days after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain such detailed information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the test results, etc. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form. If the pile tested failed to sustain the required load or if the pile top settlement exceeds the permitted settlement specified, the report shall also contain an analysis of the pile behaviour concerning the pile settlement. Recommended measurement on improving the pile performance shall also be included.

2.26

MULTIPLE FAILURE OF WORKING PILES A block containing up to 500 piles will be deemed to have failed if 5 tests therein fail. In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall carry out sufficient further piling in accordance with the contract document as will ensure the safety of the buildings which are to be carried by the piles. The whole of such work shall be executed at the Contractor's expense, and the cost of amending pile caps and ground beams arising out of this, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor.


Bldg Spec Page 2-9

2.27

CHECKING AND CUTTING OF PILES The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum, excavation, trimming of the pile, true and level, to the cut-off level and any other necessary works for the completion of the operation. Immediately after piling is completed in a block, the Contractor shall check and record the exact actual position of every pile as compared with the positions indicated on the drawings. Excavation and cutting of piles to the required cut-off levels (+/- 25 mm) shall follow immediately. Test loading of working piles shall commence immediately after a selection is made by the SO Rep and may be carried out before the completion of piling in the block. In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to be responsible for the measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles. The Contractor shall make available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement All the above works shall take no more than 3 (three) weeks as from the date the last pile is driven in the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate number of licensed surveyors are available at the sites for such work. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereof shall be deducted from the monies due to the Contractor without prejudice to the Employer's right to claim any sum over and above monies thus applied.

2.28

PILE PENETRATION AND ECCENTRICITY PLANS Completed pile penetration plans and eccentricity plans (3 copies each) shall be checked and certified by the Contractor's Licensed Surveyor and endorsed by a Professional Engineer directly employed by the Contractor before submitting to the SO rep. The duly endorsed eccentricity plans and penetration plans for each block must be submitted to the SO Rep not more than one month from the date the last pile is driven in the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time.

2.29

SUM AND/OR RATES INSERTED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN THE TENDER COST Breakdown of the Form of Tender shall be the full and inclusive cost and expenses to cover the supply of plant, materials and labour for the execution of piling works in any ground, completely and as specified including but not limited to the following: (a)

All preliminary works on site including the setting up of site office, test cube shed, water supply, washing bay, etc.

(b)

The provision and mobilisation of piling rig to install any size of piles including hammer or auger and all necessary accessories, equipment, tools and appliances brought to the site, erection, movement of piling rig from pile to pile and from building block to other building block within the piling site, dismantling and removal on completion of the work on site.

(c)

The installation of piles to any level below ground level including rocks and to a resistance as specified, including the supply, use and removal of drilling mud or steel casings to support the borehole prior to concreting or cement grouting.

(d)

The setting out of all pile positions in accordance with the drawings.

(e)

To excavate in any material and cut back piles to cut-off level as specified.

(f)

To check the final position and cut-off level of all piles.

(g)

The removal of all spoil, cement slurry and water from site or pile pits as directed by the SO Rep.

(h)

The cleaning of the site on completion.

(i)

The payment of all insurance, water and other charges.

(j)

The observance of all other directions, instructions and clauses contained in all documents forming this tender and the carrying out of the complete work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and in accordance with the Specifications.



ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT SUM AND PAY LENGTH OF PILES Upon completion, the value of piling works executed by the Contractor shall be determined by the SO Rep. The Lump Sum for the whole of the piling works as entered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender shall then be adjusted based on the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The adjustment (addition or omission) shall be the net difference between the Lump Sum and the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The addition or omission amount shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum as the case may be.

(a)

For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre) for the respective pile size is shown in the Form Of Tender The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total actual pay length and the Basic Rate per metre. The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the accuracy of the nearest 10mm. The Basic Rate for the respective pile size shall be derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender* Provisional Quantity (metre) for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*

The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the Basic Rate as derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender* Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*

The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the Basic Rate as derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender* Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*

Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of Tender.

(b)

For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre tonne) for the respective pile size is shown in the Form Of Tender The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total metretonne and the Basic Rate per metre tonne. The metre-tonne of each pile shall be the product of the actual pay length of the pile and the nominal working load of the pile. The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the accuracy of the nearest 10mm. The Basic Rate for the respective pile type shall be derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Type in the Form of Tender* Provisional Quantity (metre tonne) for Respective Pile Type in the Form of Tender*

The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the Basic Rate as derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender* Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*

The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the Basic Rate as derived as follows: Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender* Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*

Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of Tender.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 2-11

2.31

COMPLETION OF PILING WORK Piling Works to a building block shall only be considered complete if the piles are piled, excavated, cut-off, checked and recorded in the pile layout drawings for eccentricities and levels and compensated for rejected piles.

2.32

H-SECTION STEEL PILING

2.32.1

Hydraulic Hammer Pile Driving Machines The Contractor shall use only hydraulic hammer pile driving machines which are fully enclosed with noise dampening enclosures and the usage of such machine shall comply with all relevant regulations as well as provisions in this Specifications in regard to pollution control. Generator sets for electricity supply and welding purposes shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.

2.32.2

Steel Pile Sections The steel pile sections shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standard BS 4360 for mild steel. Before driving commences, all sections shall be clean and free from any contamination or materials which will impair their strength.

2.32.3

Nominal Working Load The nominal working loads of various sizes of piles are indicated in the Drawings

BLDG12/S02.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


H-SECTION STEEL PILING

2.32.4

Length of Steel Pile Sections

(CONT’D)

The length of new steel pile sections delivered to piling site shall be 12 m long. If the Contractor intends to use steel pile sections of other lengths, the approval of the SO Rep must first be obtained prior to their delivery to the stockyard or piling site. 2.32.5

Use of Jointed Sections If the Contractor wishes to drive piles made up of remaining sections from site, he shall obtain written approval from the SO’s Rep first. Where jointed steel sections are proposed to be used for the installation of steel piles, the following conditions must be complied with :-

2.32.6

(a)

Jointed steel sections shall not be used in pile groups of less than 4 piles.

(b)

For pile groups of four or more piles, the number of jointed section piles shall be not more than one out of every four piles.

(c)

The length of each jointed section shall not be longer than 12 metres nor should be shorter than 9 metres, comprising not more than three short sections shop-welded together, each short section being not less than 3 metres. All joints shall have splice plates at both flanges.

(d)

All jointed sections piles shall be straight, free from dents and corrosion pits. They shall be measured and properly recorded before installation.

(e)

All jointed section piles shall be fabricated from sections obtained from the same site. Jointed section piles built up from sections imported from another site shall be strictly prohibited.

Quality of Welded Joints and Welders The Contractor shall ensure and maintain a high standard of quality welded joints. The quality of the welded joint between pile sections depends not only on the quality of the weld material but also on the skill of the worker. The welder shall possess at least National Trade Certificate 3 (NTC 3) for Arc welding issued by a recognised and approved institute. Notwithstanding this, the welder shall be subjected to re-qualifying by approved welding inspectors as and when required by the SO Rep. A high standard of workmanship of welders shall be maintained to ensure a high standard of quality of the welded joints. All pile sections at each piling site must be neatly stacked in the "H" position to facilitate cutting of the 45 degree chamfer. Before commencement of piling, each welder shall execute a sample joint for inspection. If the quality of the welded joint is unsatisfactory, the welder will not be allowed to carry out welding until he has proved by the way of a subsequent demonstration that he can perform a welded joint satisfactorily. During piling, all welded joints of pile sections shall be checked. A welder who produces unsatisfactory welds shall be replaced and shall not be allowed to carry out welding at any other site. The contractor shall fabricate and supply adequate number of weld gauge for use by Consultant’s site supervision staff.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


H-SECTION STEEL PILING (CONT’D)

2.32.7

Record of Steel Pile Driving Records of driving for every steel pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep on site. The records shall include the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (i)

set temporary compression full length and serial numbers of steel sections reduced level at top of pile reduced cut-off level pay length time of completion inclination of the pile

The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before driving commences. The method of measuring the set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above record must show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the process of driving. Once the driving of a pile has commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached. Immediately after a pile reaches its final set, the reduced level of the top of the pile section shall be certified so that the exact pay length of the pile may be recorded. 2.32.8

Marking of Steel Sections Serial number and length shall be marked in paint on every steel section on arrival to site. Length of section shall be measured to the nearest 10 mm. Full record shall be submitted to the SO Rep daily for checking.

2.32.9

"Dolly" or Follower Disallowed During Pile Driving "Dolly' or Follower is strictly not allowed to be used during pile driving on site. The SO Rep shall exercise his right under "Nuisance and Irregularities" Clause to impose charges against the Contractor for any noncompliance.

2.32.10

Dynamic Test Pile For Steel H-Pile The Contractor shall engage an independent testing specialist who provides at all times, operate and maintain a set of portable equipment for the dynamic testing of pile foundations. The equipment shall be the latest model of its kind, Model GCPC Pile Driving Analyzer or its equivalent. The equipment shall also be equipped with the latest revision of the CAPWAP programme to perform data analysis of the field data. The CAPWAP programme should include features for interactive or automated mode for calculation and matching of the forces, velocity waves, calculation of CASE capacity, calculation of pile-toe resistance vs toe movement for end-bearing piles, wave equation analysis using pile top measurements, static loadsettlement analysis based on the CAPWAP results and capable of giving both numerical and graphic output and other utilities for the processing of the field data. The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software owned by the third party testing specialist are in good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Hardware and Software for the SO Rep approval before carrying out the dynamic test pile. If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within 2 weeks after notification by the SO Rep on the need to carry out the test, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to engage other testing specialists to carry out the dynamic pile test and CAPWAP Analysis and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor. The portable dynamic testing equipment should be in a compact unit suitable for rugged use at the piling site. The unit shall contain automatic signal conditioner, printer and a high resolution screen for display. The printer should be capable of producing report quality graphs as well as printout of data in the field. The Contractor shall ensure that qualified personnel viz. an engineer and a technician are available at all times for the operation of equipment and for conducting the test.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


H-SECTION STEEL PILING (CONT’D)

2.32.10

Dynamic Test Pile For Steel H-Pile

(Cont’d)

Three sets of test reports, endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to the SO Rep one week after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain such detailed information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the test results, etc. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form.

2.32.11

Failure of Dynamic Pile Test A Dynamic Pile Test shall be deemed to have failed if the maximum resistance of pile (RMX) at any time during blow, using a Case Damping Coefficient (J) as approved by the SO Rep, is less than 2 times the nominal working load of a working pile under test. If the force/velocity-time graph taken during the test does not indicate any abnormality, the SO Rep may allow the Contractor to re-tap the pile and another Dynamic Pile Test may be carried out all at the Contractor's cost and expense. If a working pile so tested fails and is rejected by the SO Rep, then TWO further Dynamic Pile Tests on other piles in any building block at the site may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's cost and expense. In addition, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense. When the integrity of the pile from a Dynamic Pile Test is doubtful to the SO Rep, the Contractor is required to show proof that the integrity of the pile is acceptable to the SO Rep. Otherwise, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

2.32.12

Bracing of Steel Piles When penetrations of steel piles are short or when site conditions warrant the need to strengthen the steel piles against movement, the Contractor is required to brace the piles as directed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum the cost of bracing these steel piles with steel sections or reinforced concrete.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


LARGE DIAMETER BORED PILING

2.33.1

System of Piling The system and equipment offered by the Contractor for installation of large diameter bored piles: (a)

shall be capable of sinking bored holes with a range of diameters between 600 mm and 1800 mm and to a depth ranging from 10 m to 60 m depending on the nature of the ground.

(b)

may include, Flight Auger type system as the principal method for the work in general.

(c)

shall be capable of being modified to deal with whatever strata encountered, by the addition of further cutting or extraction or protective devices as may be required to deal with all ground conditions including: 1. Water bearing ground 2. Soft ground which caves in unless supported 3. Medium stiff or stiff clays 4. Sands or sandstone 5. Coarse gravels 6. Very stiff clays 7. Boulders and granite bedrocks 8. Thinly bedded shales 9. Tree roots or buried trunks

(d)

shall generate the minimum degree of vibration when operating alongside weak structures or until such depth is reached where vibrations may be dissipated without damage to existing foundations.

(e)

shall be capable of sinking and removing casings for the support of the boreholes to whatever depth that may be required (to the full depth of the borehole where necessary) and without disturbance to the ground surrounding the pile.

(f)

shall be capable of under-reaming the bases of the piles.

The Contractor shall be prepared to work in all ground conditions. 2.33.2

Cement All cement used in the works shall be from approved local manufacturers except otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Where cement is specified it shall comply with SS26 and BS12. The SO Rep may make test of the quality specified at the Contractor's own expense. With each delivery, the Contractor may be required to send to the SO Rep a memorandum of the quantity delivered and the manufacturer's test certificate. Unless otherwise specified, the compressive strength test shall be used to determine the strength of cement.

2.33.3

Aggregates The materials used as aggregates shall be strong, hard, durable and free from clay lumps and organic and other impurities. All materials and grading of aggregates shall comply with SS 31. Notwithstanding the above, fine aggregates for concrete shall be clean well graded sand, free from clay, loam or organic matter. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their use as fine aggregates. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall be clean crushed granite, well graded between the limits of 5 mm and 20 mm. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their use as coarse aggregates.

2.33.4

Steel Steel reinforcement shall be obtained from local manufacturer or other manufacturers as may be approved in writing by the SO Rep and shall comply with SS2, SS 18, SS 32, BS 4449, BS 4461, BS 4482 and BS 4483 wherever applicable. All reinforcement shall be free from scale and all loose rust. It shall not be coated with any grease, oil, paint or adhering earth that may impair the bond between the concrete and reinforcement.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


LARGE DIAMETER BORED PILING (CONT’D)

2.33.5

Testing of Concrete For Bored Piling Works Where bored piles are included in the Works, a minimum of 4 cubes shall be cast for every 10m3 of concrete or part thereof for the purpose of compression tests at 7 days strength and 28 days strength. 2 cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor for every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age as specified; in addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating piles that will ensure the safety of the building to be supported by the piles. The compensating piles shall be installed all at the Contractor's cost and expense, and as directed by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be made and cured in accordance with SS 78 and BS 1881. The cubes shall be tested at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory.

2.33.6

Concrete Strength The compressive strength of the concrete shall not be less than the strength in the following : Class (Grade) of Concrete Grade 35

2.33.7

Compressive Strength N/mm2 7 days

28 days

28

38

Ready-Mix Concrete The Contractor must obtain prior approval from the SO Rep who will, inter alia, require to be satisfied that the propose supplier will adhere to this Specification and that the quality and control of the mix are satisfactory and comply with SS 119 and BS 1926. The SO Rep shall have access to the concrete batching plant of the Contractor's ready-mix concrete supplier during all working hours of the plant. The ready-mix concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete as outlined in this Specification, and the Contractor shall arrange and pay for the making of all requisite tests. Ready-mix concrete shall only be transported in continuous mixing trucks and comply with the manufacturer's operating standard. Appropriate retarder when used shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. No additional water shall be added to the ready-mix concrete.

2.33.8

Concrete Mixes The Contractor shall submit, for the SO Rep's approval, a chart showing the design mix he proposes to use in the ready-mix concrete. The SO Rep shall at his own discretion, instruct the Contractor to carry out trial mix. For concrete mix used, the Contractor shall inter alia state the weights of cement, granite and fine aggregates, the type and amount of admixture and the water-cement ratio to be used in the mix. Grade 35 concrete shall be used for concreting in the dry and for tremie concreting under water or any other approved water-sealing fluid. In all conditions, the free water-cement ratio shall not be more than 0.5 for Grade 35 concrete. Notwithstanding the above, the slump for concrete measured by the standard slump cone shall be between 100 mm and 150 mm and the cement content in any mix shall not be less than 360 kg/m3. Where concrete is to be placed under water or where pile will be exposed to sea water, the cement content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3. For tremie concreting, the slump for the concrete shall be between 170 mm and 225 mm. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to modify, alter and improve the concrete mix, if necessary.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)



2.33.9

Nominal Working Load For large diameter bored piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 600mm to 1800mm in increment of 100mm. The nominal working loads of various sizes of bored piles shall be indicated in the Drawings.

2.33.10

Steel Reinforcement and Stirrups For bored piles subjected to compression, the cross-sectional area of the main steel reinforcement and length of the reinforcement cage shall comply with CP4. Details of the steel reinforcement cage are indicated in the drawings. For bored piles subjected to both compression and uplift, the length of the reinforcement cage shall extend to the base of the bored pile. The lap length of the reinforcement shall comply fully with the relevant Singapore Standards CP65 : 1999. The first top rung of stirrups where the reinforcing cage will be lifted shall consists of 3 layers of T10 bars, fully welded to the main steel reinforcing bars. All other stirrups (one layer of T10 bar) shall be spot welded to the main reinforcing bars of the reinforcing cage. The lapping joint for the stirrups shall be 50mm (fully welded) or 200mm (without weld) and the weld of the stirrups to the main reinforcing bars shall be able to withstand all condition of handling, transportation and during concreting. The reinforcing cage should not be distorted in any way during these processes and shall be vertical when lowered into the boreholes.

2.33.11

Plastic Circular Spacers Plastic circular spacers of 55 mm thickness to provide 80 mm cover to the main reinforcement shall be used. The spacers shall be placed at not more than one metre below the top of the reinforcement cage and at not more than 4 m interval along the main reinforcement.

2.33.12

Trial Bore The Contractor shall carry out trial bores by boring outside the pile location at his own expense to determine the required depth or suitability of bored piles as directed by the SO Rep. Sufficient safety measures must be provided to ensure protection against falling or tripping into the bored holes. The bored holes must be covered up immediately after it has been inspected.

2.33.13

Boring and Concreting of Piles (a)

Boring shall be carried down to such soil strata determined from results of trial boring and soil tests carried out previously as agreed by the SO Rep.

(b)

The sides of all boring shall be kept intact and no loose material shall be permitted to fall to the bottom of the bored holes. The Contractor's equipment shall be capable of sinking a steel casing to support and keep the side of the bored hole intact when directed by the SO Rep.

(c)

In cases where soil conditions are sufficiently stiff to hard to dense, and steel casings are not necessary, temporary casings of at least 5 m long shall be placed in the bored holes before inspection of bored holes by the SO Rep. These temporary casings must project at least 1 m above ground to prevent fall of loose materials or persons into the bored holes. All bored holes waiting for concreting shall be set up with the temporary casings at all times.

(d)

All bored holes shall be inspected by the SO Rep on site prior to placing of concrete. All loose material likely to affect the strength of the pile shall be removed forthwith by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(e)

The Contractor must provide all facilities to enable the SO Rep to carry out his inspection safely.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)



2.33.13

Boring and Concreting of Piles

2.33.14

(Cont’d)

(f)

Holes reamed out at the base shall likewise be clean and firm before placing of concrete.

(g)

If ground water is found in the borehole and it affects the excavation and removal of soil from the borehole, or if it causes the collapse of the sides of the borehole, or if the side collapses irrespective of the presence of water, then steel casing of appropriate length and size shall be installed in the bored hole.

(h)

All concrete placed in boreholes shall be lowered by hoppers with exceptional care so as to prevent segregation. Tremie pipes extending to the full depth of the pile shall be used for concreting under water.

(i)

The top of the pile shall be brought up at least 500 mm above the cut -off level of the pile to permit all laitance and weak concrete to be removed and to ensure that it can be properly keyed into the pile cap. Any defective concrete in the head of the completed pile should be cut way and made good with new concrete well bonded into the old concrete

(j)

All boreholes shall be protected from the possibility of ground surface water entering the hole from the time the boring is completed and ready to be concreted until the pile is complete. No concreting shall commence until the hole has been inspected and the above precautions made.

(k)

Reinforcement cages shall be supported centrally and firmly within the hole so that no movement will occur during the concreting operation

Record of Each Pile A record of each pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep within 1 day after the installation of the respective pile. This record shall include the following information: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o)

Length of pile measured from cut off level Length of pile measured from ground level Diameter of pile Ground level Cut-off level Length of reinforcement cage Water table below ground level Length of casing Strata of ground penetrated and where boring stops Result of tests on concrete cube Time for commencement and completion of boring and concreting works Grade of concrete used Volume of concrete used and Concrete slump Other information as required by the SO Rep. Dry or tremie concreting

The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before piling commences. The Contractor shall also be required to provide log-book for use by the SO Rep for recording of the above information on site. 2.33.15

Piles in Same Group or in Close Proximity The Contractor must submit proposed sequence of installation of piles in a group or in close proximity to the SO Rep for approval. The SO Rep reserves the right to order changes to the approved sequence of piling if he considers it necessary to do so. Generally, no two piles in the same group or in close proximity may be allowed to be bored and/or concreted on the same day, unless with the written approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)



(CONT’D)

2.33.16

Installation of UPVC Pipe And Wire For Pile Penetration Checking The Contractor shall install in all bored piles an approximately 16mm Nominal Internal Diameter hollow UPVC pipe of approved quality with a prelaid 3mm diameter wire inside the UPVC pipe within each castin-situ pile. The Contractor shall be paid separately for the installation of these UPVC pipes with wires (based on the pile penetration lengths) as a variation to the tender sum. The UPVC pipe with prelaid wire shall be placed from the base of the bored hole to the ground level for checking the length of each completed bored pile immediately after concreting. Upon completion of concreting of the pile, the UPVC pipe shall then be cut about 0.5m below ground level and capped. The UPVC pipe shall include joints and stoppers at the top and bottom ends of the pipe and the 3mm diameter wire shall be prelaid inside it from bottom of the pile to 0.5m above the cut off level prior to capping of the UPVC pipe. The prelaid wire, UPVC pipe thickness, glue length for joints, strength of pipe material and other qualities must be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative before the commencement of work. Notwithstanding this, the pipe thickness and joint length between pipes shall be not less than 3mm and 150mm respectively. The pipes shall be installed vertically and concrete counterweights shall be used at the base of the UPVC pipe to ensure the verticality of the pipe. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipe is vertical and free from any obstruction which may prevent measurement of its length at a later date. The prelaid wire shall not be removed from the UPVC pipe and the contractor shall facilitate in the measurement of the pile length after the hacking of the bored pile to cut off level. In the event that substantial ground water is present in the borehole and the pile has to be formed by tremie concreting underwater or any other approved fluid, the Contractor shall not be required to install the UPVC pipe with wire. The Contractor shall note that the Employer attaches great importance on the condition of the UPVC pipes and prelaid wires. Where UPVC pipes are found choked or damaged or missing or without the prelaid wires during construction, the Contractor shall not be paid for the installation of these UPVC pipes with wires. In addition, during the conduct of pile penetration checking of selected piles for a block, a UPVC pipe is considered choked if the prelaid wire is unable to be extracted from the UPVC pipe for pile penetration checking. The percentage of chokage of the UPVC pipes based on these selected piles shall be calculated for this block. This percentage shall be deemed as representative of the percentage of chokage of UPVC pipes installed in piles in the entire block. For the payment of UPVC pipes with wires installed for this block, the Contractor shall be paid only for the total length of UPVC pipes with wires installed in the block (excluding UPVC pipes that are found choked or damaged or without the prelaid wires during construction) less the percentage of chokage of UPVC pipes for this block. In addition, an administrative charge may be imposed on the Contractor for the chokage of UPVC pipes.

2.33.17

Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Bored Pile Where bored piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist testing firm to conduct Pile Integrity Tests on the bored piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building block, whichever is greater. The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time, if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed. The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialist’s testing firm to carrying out the test. The pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation. During preparation, loose concrete, mud or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small impact hammer.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)



(CONT’D)

2.33.17

Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Bored Pile (Cont’d) The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a technician. Upon completion of the Pile Integrity Test, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the SO Rep. Two sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to the SO Rep. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

2.33.18

Contract name and number Block number Pile reference number Pile diameter Date of pile installation and date of testing Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which cover concrete quality, location and severity of the defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.

Instrumented Bored Piles Load Test The Contractor shall install the types and number of instruments as shown in the drawings for conducting the instrumented pile load test as follows:(a)

Weldable type vibrating wire strain gauges, or equivalent, which measure strain in the cast-in-situ concrete bored pile during the load test, shall be used. Each vibrating wire strain gauge shall have, at least, a maximum strain range of + 1500 microstrain, and a thermal coefficient of expansion of 10 x 10 –6 per oC . The pick-up sensor used shall be mounted on top of the vibrating wire strain gauge and shall be of a constant oscillation type, or equivalent.

(b)

8 mm diameter stainless steel telltale rod extensometers to measure the axial compression between the pile and the pile top.

(c)

Heavy-duty signal cables shall be used to connect the pick-up sensors to a terminal box at ground level.

(d)

The vibrating wire strain gauge shall be welded directly onto a single reinforcement bar positioned at the center and extended to the base of the pile. The central bar must be held in position vertically by means of horizontal ties connected to the reinforcement cage and shall be of the same diameter as the main reinforcement bars of the steel cage. The position and number of strain gauges that will be installed in the pile shall be as directed by SO’s Rep.

(e)

The reinforcement bar must be grounded to provide a flat surface before the strain gauges are welded on. The pick-up sensors must be firmly secured on top of the strain gauges by means of suitable clamps. Every strain gauge/pick-up sensor assembly shall be adequately rustproofed and waterproofed.

(f)

The 8mm diameter stainless steel telltale rod extensometers shall be installed vertically in the pile. 12mm internal diameter steel pipe shall be used for the protection of the telltale rod extensometer. An anchor plate must be provided at the toe of the telltale rod. All joints are to be properly welded to avoid grout ingress. A reference head and a depth micrometer must be provided for measuring the relative axial compression of the pile.

(g)

Proper protection must be provided for the strain gauges, pick-up sensors, cables, and telltale rods during all stages in the casting of the pile. The contractor shall carry out function test for the strain gauges and sensors : (i) after installation onto the steel reinforcement (ii) after hoisting and lowering of the steel reinforcement into the bore hole (iii) after concreting the pile

(h)

A Linear Vertical Displacement Transducer (LVDT) shall be placed on a magnetic stand fixed to the pile top and the probe of the LVDT shall be seated on top of a brass reference head at the top of each stainless steel rod. A readout unit shall be used to monitor the movement of the tell-tale extensometers.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)



(CONT’D)

2.33.18

Instrumented Bored Piles Load Test

(Cont’d)

(i)

Equipment, tools, heavy-duty cables, readout unit and other accessories must be in good working condition and calibrated.

(j)

Test load increments and pile settlement measurement must be carried out in accordance with the testing procedures detailed in Clause 2.20.

(k)

The installation data for every instrument and test results shall be captured and recorded by the contractor’s instrumentation specialist.

(l)

Two sets of the comprehensive reports incorporating relevant soil logs and interpretation of results, to be verified and certified by the contractor’s Professional Engineer involved in the installation of the instruments, shall be submitted to the SO’s Rep within two weeks after the completion of work.

(m)

The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of all the instruments installed.

(n)

The Contractor will carry out at his own cost, another instrumented pile load test as instructed by the SO’s Rep if the test produces erroneous results due to damaged or malfunctioned instruments.

2.34

MICRO PILE SYSTEM

2.34.1

Hydraulic Drilling Rig and Accessories The Contractor shall use only electrically powered hydraulic drilling rigs to minimise noise generated during drilling operation. The slurry circulation tanks shall be used to remove all spoil cement slurry and water from the pile pits. Generator sets for the supply of electricity shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.

2.34.2

Installation of Micro Piles The installation of the micro piles or any other sizes approved by HDB shall include inter alia the following requirements: (a)

The quality of materials such as Grade 460 steel bar, cement grout, grout additive, splice material, etc must be approved by the SO Rep. Equipment, tools and other accessories must be in good working condition.

(b)

All site safety precautions must be observed and safety measures provided and maintained throughout the installation work.

(c)

Grout shall be mixed from ordinary Portland cement complying to current British or Singapore Standards and clean water supplied from the public mains. Whenever necessary, "Intrusion Aid" grout additive shall be added to the manufacturer's recommendation to improve workability and reduce shrinkage. The grouting shall be executed within such time as may be directed or approved by the SO Rep. The strength of grout shall not be less than Grade 30.

(d)

The installation of every micro pile and the test results of any one piling site shall be captured and recorded and a comprehensive report, to be verified and certified by the Contractor's Professional Engineer involved in the micro pile installation, shall be submitted to the SO Rep within two weeks after the completion of the work at each piling site.

(e)

Any other conditions that may be imposed by the SO Rep to ensure the safety and soundness of each micro pile.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MICRO PILE SYSTEM (CONT’D)

2.34.3

Nominal Working Load For micro piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 150mm to 300mm in increment of 25mm. The nominal working loads of various sizes of micro piles shall be indicated in the Drawings.

2.34.4

Boring of Micro Piles For soft and collapsible soils, the boreholes shall be temporarily cased or stabilised with bentonite slurry. Upon reaching rock or firm soil strata, drilling may be continued without casing. Drilling in rock shall be executed with a down-the-hole air hammer. Boring in soil can be done by wet or dry rotary drilling depending on the soil type and site environment. Upon completion of the drilling, the borehole shall be cleaned by flushing out any loose chipping/soil particles from the inside of the casing with water or air.

2.34.5

Main Steel Component of Micro Pile Axial steel component of the micro pile shall be in accordance with the specifications and drawings. The main steel bars shall be joined by splicing. Splicing shall be of approved mechanical splicing. Top anchorage of the micro pile shall consist of extension of the axial steel component of the pile through a steel bearing plate. The circumference of the steel bars through the steel plate shall be securely welded. The contractor shall propose his method of reinforcement splicing or coupling to SO Rep for approval. Upon approval of the method, the contractor shall proceed to fabricate samples of splicing or coupling and send them to an approved laboratory for testing on its tensile strength. The splicing or coupling shall be strong enough such that its tensile strength is higher than the reinforcement. Three samples shall be tested and the results of the tests are to be accepted before installation of working piles. The costs of fabrication of the test samples and testing are to be borne by the contractor.

2.34.6

Grout Mix The proportion of grout according to minimum cube strength shall comply with the following requirements:

Range of Water/Cement Ratio 0.40 to 0.45

Resistance to Crushing (cube strength) 7 days

28 days

24 N/mm2

33 N/mm2

The quantities of cement in the mix shall be measured by weight. Grout shall be mixed on site and shall be pumped into its final position not later than half an hour after mixing. Grout shall be free from segregation, slumping and bleeding. 2.34.7

Grouting Grouting shall be placed using tremie method where grout mix is pumped into the bored hole by grouting pump under low pressure and delivered using PVC hose or galvanised iron pipe in one continuous operation until "good grout" appears at the top of the borehole.

2.34.8

Grout Test 4 test cubes shall be taken from the grout mix of every 3 m3 or a portion thereof for testing purpose for each day when there is grouting works, unless further tests are required due to failure in complying with the specified strength. 2 test cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days at HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory at the Contractor’s expense. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor for every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age as specified; in addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating piles that will ensure the safety of the building to be supported by the piles. The compensating piles shall be installed all at the Contractor's cost and expense, and as directed by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(22) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MICRO PILE SYSTEM (CONT’D)

2.34.9

Fabrication of Steel Bar Spiral reinforcement (R6) is fixed around the bars to prevent bursting of grout under load. Lantern centralisers are fixed to the bars at 3 m intervals to ensure sufficient grout cover to the steel bars. Steel spacers are placed at 3 m interval to ensure that the bars are placed vertically.

2.34.10

Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for MicroPile Where micro piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist testing firm to conduct Pile Integrity Tests on the piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building block, whichever is greater. The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time, if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed. The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialist’s testing firm to carrying out the test. The pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation. During preparation, loose concrete, mud or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small impact hammer. The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a technician. Upon completion of the Pile Integrity Test, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the SO Rep. Two sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to the SO Rep. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Contract name and number Block number Pile reference number Pile diameter Date of pile installation and date of testing Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which cover concrete quality, location and severity of the defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.

2.35

JACK-IN PILING SYSTEM

2.35.1

System of Piling The jack-in piling system consists essentially of H-section steel piles or Reinforced Concrete piles forced into the ground using a non-impact jacking system. The pile sections used shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standards. The Contractor shall ensure that when concrete piles are used, they would not be damaged during handling and transportation.

2.35.2

Nominal Working Load The nominal working loads are indicated in the Drawings.

2.35.3

Resistance and Penetration of Piles The resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 2.5 times the nominal working load of the pile. The Contractor shall install all working piles to such a depth that the required resistance is obtained. The minimum depth of pile shall not be less than 7.0 metres below the cut-off level of the pile or as may be agreed by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(23) Sal(151211) (DPD)


JACK-IN PILING SYSTEM

2.35.4

Installation

(CONT’D)

During pile installation, the hydraulic pressure of jack corresponding to depth of pile penetration shall be recorded at every 0.5 metre depth intervals. Except for pile joining, each pile shall be jacked in continuously until the required penetration of required resistance as shown on the pressure gauge of the jack is achieved. A maximum jacking pressure of 2.5 times the nominal working load shall be maintained for at least 2 minutes. The final set recorded shall not exceed 10 mm. 2.35.5

Quality of Welded Joints and Welders The quality of welded joints and welders is as provided in subclause “Quality of Welded Joints and Welders” under Clause 2.32.6 of this Specification.

2.36

PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILING WORK

2.36.1

Penetration Of Driven Piles The pay length of driven piles shall be the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the SO’s representatives and the Contractor and endorsed by the SO Rep. The concrete pile shall be marked with red paint at every 1m interval to enable easy determination of pile penetration.

2.36.2

Precast Concrete Piles Precast concrete piles can be non-prestressed or prestressed, obtained from the approved supplier. The design, manufacturing, handling, transportation, lifting and driving shall be in accordance with CP4, 'Code of Practice for Foundations'. The position of lifting points shall be clearly specified. The piling system proposed shall be verified by design calculation that the pile section and area of steel required shall be sufficient to safely resist all stresses arising from handling, transportation, driving and lifting, and in no case shall the percentage of area of steel to pile cross-section be less than 1% for non-prestressed concrete pile, and 0.3% for prestressed concrete pile using high tensile strength tendons. The details for splicing of pile sections and method of splicing shall be submitted and for the approval of the SO Rep. Joints shall be designed to resist possible uplift due to nominal eccentric moment of column.

2.36.3

Materials For Precast RC Piles All materials used for precast RC piles shall where appropriate, comply with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Minimum 28-day strength of concrete in the piles shall be 40 N per sq mm.

2.36.4

Nominal Working Load For precast reinforced concrete piles, the sizes of the square piles shall be 150mm, 175mm, 200mm, 230mm, 260mm and 300mm. The nominal working loads of precast reinforced concrete piles shall be indicated in the Drawings.

2.36.5

Pile Hammer And Set Where piles are included in the Works, impact hammer, either single-acting or double-acting, or hydraulic hammer shall be used in driving piles. However, diesel drop hammers shall not be used. The hammer shall be capable of producing sufficient kinetic energy to drive the piles to the required set without causing damage. The type of hammer and the height of drop of the hammer shall be first approved by the SO Rep. If hydraulic hammer is used, ensure that the hydraulic hammer provided is suitable for the piling of all sizes of reinforced concrete piles without causing damage. The allowable set for the final 10 blows of piles, which is dependent on factors such as pile size, pile penetration, hammer size and subsoil condition, etc. shall be proposed by the Contractor’s PE and shall be approved by the SO Rep before being adopted as a criterion on the Site. The ultimate resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 3 times the given nominal working load of the pile section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall rest with the Contractor.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(24) Sal(151211) (DPD)


PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILING WORK (CONT’D)

2.36.6

Construction Equipment And Experience For Driving Piles The Contractor shall submit together with the Tender, a progress schedule and full details of the Construction Equipment to be committed on the Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling work shall also be submitted.

2.36.7

Casting Yard At least one month before the commencement of piling Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval of the following : (a) (b) (c) (d)

2.36.8

location and contact number of casting yard; date of casting; type, length and number of piles to be cast; pile design drawing(s) (if alternative systems of piling are used).

Warranty The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage to the super-structure resulting from defective execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The warranty period shall be one year after the completion of the superstructure.

2.36.9

Driving Of Piles No pile shall be driven before concrete reaches its 28-day working cube strength. Notwithstanding the earlier achievement of the specified 28-day strength, no pile shall be driven until a period of at least 14 days has elapsed after casting of the pile. Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings. Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the SO Rep. A dolly shall not be used as an aid to driving a pile to its final penetration unless approval has been obtained from the SO Rep. Where a dolly is used, the allowable set for the final blows of a pile shall be reduced to account for higher energy loss in the dolly-pile head system. The magnitude of the reduction shall be determined by site observation and shall not be less than 25 percent. The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than 75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear the cost of amendment of pile caps, ground beams and other structural work designed to counter pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance, as directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.

2.36.10

Raking Pile For raking piles, the piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the specified inclination. The maximum permissible deviation of the installed pile from the specified inclination shall be 1 in 40.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(25) Sal(151211) (DPD)



2.36.11

Piling Record Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO Rep on site and a copy to be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

Set temporary compression penetration from ground level length of pile and size of section ground level cut-off level to the top of pile time of starting and time of completion inclination of the pile

The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of driving. Once the driving of a pile commences, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached. 2.36.12

Damaged Or Rejected Piles All piles which are cracked, broken, or damaged in any manner during transportation, handling or driving shall be rejected. All piles driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb in excess of 1 in 75, or if no set can be obtained after driving for a considerable length well in excess of estimated penetration based on soil data and site condition, shall be rejected. In situation where a dolly is used, the pile shall be rejected if it does not achieve the allowable set and the full length of the dolly has been utilised to drive the pile.

2.36.13

Compensating Piles All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. The position and number of compensating pile(s) as decided by the SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of the pile group is not altered. The Employer will only pay the cost for the original number and size of pile(s) in the pile group as shown in the Drawings. In the computation for payment, the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the pay length of the compensating pile shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the rejected pile, the computation shall be based on the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the shortest pay length of the compensating pile (which compensate the particular rejected pile, as decided by the SO Rep). If there are two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no indication which compensating piles are for which rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep), the computation for payment shall be based on the sizes of the original piles as shown in the Drawings and the two or more shortest pay length of the compensating piles.

2.36.14

Cutting Of Piles Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout Drawings or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately. Precast concrete pile shall be stripped to the cut-off level to expose the longitudinal reinforcement bars leaving the dressed head of the pile projecting 75mm into the pilecap. The longitudinal steel shall be left projecting 600mm above the dressed head level and cast into the pilecap. In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to be responsible for the measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles, and to check and endorse the pile eccentricity drawings for submission to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(26) Sal(151211) (DPD)



2.36.15

Failure Of Working Load Test A working load test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceeds 25mm at 2 times the nominal working load. If a working test pile fails to sustain the full working test load over a period of not less than 3 days as decided by the SO Rep, then 2 further tests on other piles at the same site selected by the SO Rep shall be carried out. Where a pile fails under test, additional adjacent piles, as directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, and the whole of the work shall be carried out at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. That part of the Works shall be deemed to have failed if 2 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing up to 150 piles, or 3 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing 151 to 750 piles. In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, carry out sufficient further piling to the satisfaction of the SO Rep to ensure the safety of the structures carried by the rejected piles.

2.37

TIMBER PILING

2.37.1

Construction Equipment And Experience For Driving Piles Submit together with the Tender, a progress schedule and full details of the Construction Equipment to be committed on the Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling work may also be submitted.

2.37.2

Penetration Of Driven Piles The penetration of driven piles shall be the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the Contractor in the presence of the SO Rep. The timber piles shall be marked with red paint at every 300mm or other suitable interval to enable easy determination of pile penetration.

2.37.3

Timber Piles Timber piles specified shall be from the HDB Materials List and of approved brands/trademarks. Timber piles shall be 100mm x 100mm, 125mm x 125mm, 150mm x 150mm or 175mm x 175mm square sawn timber foundation piles with an allowable tolerance of ±5mm, produced from the species Kempas or Keruing. The safe working load shall be 8.5 N per mm2 in direct compressive stress and with an ultimate resistance of all piles of not less than 3 times the nominal working load. The centre line of pile shall not deviate from the straight line joining the mid points of the butt and toe by more than 25mm for any pile up to 6m in length, or 38mm for pile over 6m in length. Use only timber piles produced under the ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing Scheme) Certification Scheme Suppliers. Each batch of piles delivered to the Site shall be subjected to random sampling, for testing by an SAC accredited laboratory, in accordance with the following frequency : (i) (ii)

For every contract supply, a minimum of two tests; For supply up to 1,000 metre run, the first test will be carried out from any batch of piles, subsequent test will be made at each interval of 1,000 metre run, the number of test will depend on the quantity of supply but subject to a minimum of two tests for each contract as stated in (i) above.

All piles shall be pressure-treated with copper-chrome-arsenic wood preservative under a pressure of not less than 14.0 kg per cm2, with minimum depth of penetration of preservative of 25mm and with a net dry salt retention in the outermost 25mm of pile of not less than 16kg per m3. All methods of chemical treatment and testing shall be in accordance with SS 72 : 1988 or BS 4072. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each test that fails to comply with the above requirement. In the event that any test by SAC accredited laboratory resulted in failure, remove the batch of piles from which the random sampling is obtained completely from the Site. Should the Contractor negligently or wilfully transport the same batch that had failed previously to the Site again, this act shall be deemed to be an infringement and Clause 1.6 "Nuisance & Irregularities" shall apply.

BLDG12/S02.DOC(27) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TIMBER PILING

2.37.4

Steel Box Joint

(CONT’D)

Join two piles by using a mild steel welded box joint 450mm long made from 4.5mm thick plate and coat with bituminous paint and approved by the SO Rep before use. 2.37.5

Pile Hammer And Set for Pile Driving Use free drop hammer to drive the timber pile. The hammer weight for driving 175mm x 175mm pile shall be 1.5 tonnes, and for driving 150mm x 150mm, 125mm x 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall be 1 tonne. The hammer shall drop a minimum of 1300mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for 175mm x 175mm pile shall be not more than 15mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for 150mm x 150mm, 125mm x 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall be not more than 20mm. The ultimate resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 3 times the given nominal working load of the pile section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall rest with the Contractor.

2.37.6

Warranty The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage or Defect to the inspection chambers and main drain lines resulting from defective execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

2.37.7

Driving Of Piles Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings. Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the SO Rep. The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than 75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear all additional costs of the amendment in pile caps, ground beams, etc designed as a countermeasure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance, as directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. During driving, protect the heads of all piles with the helmet of mild steel fitting closely around the pile. A 25mm thick plywood covering the head of the pile shall be contained within the helmet to separate the helmet from the head of the pile. Rigidly & securely join all piles with metal box joints. The joints shall be driven to a tight fit with the pile hammer and spiked to the section of both piles.

2.37.8

Piling Record Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO Rep and a copy shall be kept by the Contractor on the site. The record shall include the following items: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

Set Temporary compression Penetration from ground level Length of pile and size of section Ground level Cut-off level to the top of pile No. of joints used Time of starting and time of completion

The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is reached. BLDG12/S02.DOC(28) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TIMBER PILING

(CONT’D)

2.37.9

Damaged Or Rejected Piles All piles which are cracked, broken, broomed, split or damaged in any manner during transportation, handling or driving shall be rejected. All piles damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb in excess of 1 in 75, or if no set can be obtained after driving for a considerable length well in excess of estimated penetration, where it should set based on soil data and site condition, shall also be rejected.

2.38

PILING WORKS TO LINKWAYS AND PRECINCT PAVILIONS Where piling Works to linkways and precinct pavilions are required as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required and allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing the piling Works to the requirements specified under the Contract. In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil Investigation Report available from the Employer. However, for the avoidance of doubt, the Soil Investigation Report shall not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall take note that all the information in the Soil Investigation Report are only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Contractor shall at his own cost, ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations Notwithstanding the pile penetration lengths ascertained by the Contractor, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum for any difference in pile penetration lengths between those actually provided for the Works and those ascertained by the Contractor. However, in the case where any pile as shown in the Drawings is not provided at all, omission by way of variation to the Contract shall be effected. For the purpose of computing such omission amount only, the penetration length of each pile shall be deemed to be 8.0 m.

2.39

PILING METHOD OF STATEMENT The Contractor shall study the soil report and submit the method statement for piling and the type of machinery to be used for the piling works for the approval of the SO Rep within one month of the issue of the Letter of Acceptance.

Section 3/.....

BLDG12/S02.DOC(29) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 3-1 SECTION 3 EXCAVATION

3.1

USE OF SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR EXCAVATION WORKS The Contractor shall provide all necessary measures, including but not limited to temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling, to facilitate the carrying out of excavation Works and/or for heavy vehicular movement within the Site. The cost of such temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling, etc shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Notwithstanding such provisions, the Contractor shall, in the course of excavation Works, take great care to prevent earth movements and/or upheavals in the excavation. The Contractor shall also take precaution to prevent displacement and/or damage to the piles due to any traffic movement from heavy machinery employed on the Site. If any pile in the excavated pit is displaced or if the pile is damaged by earth movement and/or upheavals, the Contractor shall be held accountable for the displacement and/or damage to the piles and shall bear all cost and expenses incurred in remedial Works. The Contractor may, if he wishes to, make reference to the Soil Investigation Report available from the Employer to facilitate the Contractor in ascertaining the temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling required. However, the Soil Investigation Report shall not form part of the Contract or to be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall take note that all the information in the Soil Investigation Report are only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable to the Contractor for the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses whatsoever arising from and/or out of any inaccuracy, inadequacy or incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.

3.2

RESERVED

3.3

DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL The Contractor shall comply with the following site control requirements in addition to those required by the Drainage Department, Public Utilities Board (PUB) : (a)

Submitting all proposals for temporary drains and silt control measures to the Head, Drainage Department for approval before commencement of the Works;

(b)

Providing adequate silt-control facilities including lined temporary drains at the Site boundary surrounding the Site comprising of composite channel drains of adequate capacity (minimum Type C7) to capture the surface run off with proper sump outlets subjected to the prior approval of PUB and the SO Rep, close turfing on both sides of the perimeter drains, silt-trapping devices, turfing, wash-bays incorporating proper discharge outlets, etc. to control silt and mud from the Site to enter the drains;



DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL

(CONT'D)

(c)

Maintaining regularly all such silt-control facilities to ensure their effectiveness and in a clean, hygienic, pest free and good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, and desilting all affected drains until Substantial Completion of the Works;

(d)

Ensuring that the execution of the Works shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland flow, existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains;

(e)

Ensuring that runoff within, upstream of and adjacent to the Site can be effectively drained away without causing flooding within the Site or in areas outside the Site;

(f)

Ensuring that discharge consequent to de-watering from basement or trench excavation is channelled into silt trapping devices before reaching existing drains;

(g)

Implementing adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the work areas and existing drains, to ensure that construction materials are not discharged or washed into the drains.

The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing at his own cost and expense, any additional or more stringent measures as may be necessary to achieve satisfactory site control standards as required by the Drainage Department, PUB on surface water drainage.

3.4

EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES The Contractor shall not allow and be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into drains and canals. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements strictly : (a)

Treatment Of Silt-Laden Water Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. The siltladen water shall be channelled to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for removal of silt before discharging into drains or canals.

(b)

(c)

Provision Of Silt Traps And Perimeter Cut-Off Drains (i)

Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be provided to ensure that earth, silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be duly designed and endorsed by a PE engaged by the Contractor. These facilities shall be constructed before the commencement of the Works.

(ii)

Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be desilted and maintained at least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from the Site.

Protection Of Exposed Earth Surfaces Provide and carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at the Site. All exposed earth surfaces not affected by construction activities shall be planted with turfing on an immediate basis. Where necessary to prevent soil erosion, the Contractor shall also carry out progressive turfing on Site. In cases where turfing is not practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth surfaces which are left bare and undisturbed for more than one month, such surfaces shall be protected from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based emulsion or other effective methods to be approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.



EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES (CONT'D) (d)

(e)

Excavated Material (i)

All surplus excavated materials shall be carted away to the disposal ground immediately. The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on the Site.

(ii)

Earth materials stockpiled on the Site for construction work shall be within properly contained areas and covered to prevent the earth from being washed into drains or canals. The locations for stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not washed into drains or canals.

(iii)

The Contractor shall only carry out trench excavation work provided the rate of construction keeps pace with the rate of excavation.

Treatment Of Mud Slurry Check and ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet grouting, etc, are not discharged into drains or canals.

3.5

SURFACE EXCAVATION The Contractor shall grub up and clear all shrubs, vegetable matter, bushes, roots and other obstructions encountered on the Site. No tree shall be removed without written permission from the SO Rep. Any top soil which covers the Site shall be carefully scraped and piled up at a suitable location, with the use of mechanical or manual labour, for subsequent use in turfing or tree planting. The Contractor shall salvage whatever existing top soil there is on the Site, failing which he shall be liable to reimburse the Employer for the loss. No top soil shall be removed from the Site without the permission of the SO Rep.

3.6

SITE FORMATION LEVEL The proposed platform levels for the building platforms and open areas for the Works are as indicated in the Drawings. The existing earth ground levels shall be prepared by the Employer at 300mm below the proposed platform levels, subject to an average tolerance of ±150mm, before the Site is handed over to the Contractor. The Contractor shall top up, fill, consolidate and level up to the proposed platform level as indicated in the Drawings all in accordance with the requirements specified in clause 3.13 "Backfilling". The Contractor shall be deemed to include in the Contract Sum for the cost of all additional works arising from or out of such ±150mm average tolerance as specified. Where excavated earth is not suitable for filling up to the proposed platform levels as indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense fill up with suitable imported earth approved by the SO Rep.

3.7

EXCAVATION GENERALLY The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and to have ascertained the nature thereof and the kinds of materials to be excavated, and to have made provision in the Contract Sum to cover for the type of materials to be excavated. Prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall carry out a pre-construction survey of the neighbouring properties and comply with the requirements of BCA and any other requirements as required by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall set out the lines and structures for the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Original ground levels shall also be taken and submitted to the SO Rep for record.



EXCAVATION GENERALLY (CONT'D) Excavation shall be carried out neatly in accordance with the Drawings, in whatsoever material may be found, including hard rock or other hard material which requires breaking up by pneumatic drills and the excavated materials shall be used as filling if required. The Contractor may be allowed to carry out the excavation by his own methods subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The excavated materials may be temporarily stockpiled on the Site during the course of the Works provided there is sufficient space available and such stockpiling shall not cause obstruction at the work Site and such stockpiling shall be covered to prevent the excavated materials from being washed into the drains and canals. In areas of poor soil, all excavated materials shall be completely removed from the Site. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for all damages caused by the non-removal or improper stockpiling of excavated materials on the Site. The SO Rep may prescribe and limit the lengths and/or widths and/or depths of excavation to be proceeded with at any one time. Excavation shall not be carried down in the first instance to a depth nearer than 150mm to formation level. The bottoming-up to formation shall be done by hand immediately in advance of placing hardcore, concrete or other Permanent Works unless directed otherwise by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also take such steps as are necessary, in the opinion of the SO Rep, to prevent damage to the formation owing to exposure to the atmosphere and the trampling of the formation by workmen. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the formation is softened or spoilt by the Contractor, the soft or spoilt areas shall be excavated and filled with Grade 15 concrete at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. No Permanent Works shall be constructed in any excavated area or position until the SO Rep has inspected and approval given to commence further work. The entire excavation Works shall be formed and left complete and as accurate to the widths, levels, contours and slopes or as otherwise directed by the SO Rep. The Contractor may be provided with a site to dump and spread the surplus excavated materials as directed by the SO Rep. Alternatively, the Contractor may be required to dispose of any surplus materials and shall if so required provide lorries for transport and shall make all necessary arrangements for the use of an approved dumping ground and bear all costs and expenses thereof. The Contractor shall not deposit surface excavated materials on private land unless he can produce the written permission of the owner of the land.

3.8

EXCAVATION IN ROCK Any rock or boulders encountered in excavation to the required depths shall be removed by wedging, blasting or other means as the SO Rep may direct, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. When blasting is required, the Contractor shall obtain prior written permission from the SO Rep. The Contractor shall comply with the Local Laws and Regulations and any requirements imposed by the relevant Authorities with regard to blasting operations. The SO Rep shall be fully informed by the Contractor as to the steps and precautionary measures taken to safeguard the surrounding properties. The Contractor shall be liable for any accident, damage or injury to any person, property or thing, resulting from the use of explosives. Prior to the start of blasting operations, the Contractor, in the presence of the SO Rep, shall conduct a survey of all structures within 120m of the site where blasting is proposed, and any other structures which the SO Rep considers may be affected, in order to determine the existing or pre-blast condition of these structures. Prior to commencing blasting operations, a written report, supported by photographs where necessary, listing any existing defects in the structures, shall be submitted to the SO Rep. When blasting operations are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the appropriate signs erected.



ERRORS IN EXCAVATION The Contractor shall excavate to such depths only as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. Any excavation done to a greater depth than is necessary shall be filled with concrete of such proportions or with such compacted material to the required formation levels as directed by the SO Rep. The cost of such filling shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.10

EXCAVATION FOR PILE CAPS The Contractor shall excavate for pile caps and complete excavation expeditiously after the piling contractor has cut off excess length of piles. The Contractor shall take care and precaution to avoid damaging or displacing the piles and the Contractor shall be held fully responsible for any damage or displacement to piles in the excavation pits. Any water accumulating in excavated pits shall be pumped dry to facilitate construction of pile caps.

3.11

TEMPORARY COVERS Prior to excavation for footing foundations, the Contractor may erect temporary covers over the area to be excavated to prevent rainwater from getting into the excavations. However, when such temporary covers are instructed to be erected by the SO Rep specifically, they will be paid for as a variation.

3.12

KEEPING EXCAVATIONS DRY The whole of the excavations shall be kept free from water arising from rain, drains, floods or other causes by pumping, bailing, drainage or other means. Should any water get into the excavations, the Contractor shall remove such water, excavate the affected wet soil and fill up the excess excavation with Grade 15 concrete, all at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

3.13

BACKFILLING The Contractor shall backfill with selected excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to the required level in layers not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram and consolidate. Upon approval by the SO Rep, backfilling shall commence as soon as practical and completed expeditiously and without delay.

3.14

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL The Contractor shall allow for spreading and levelling on Site or transporting off the Site, all surplus excavated material which remains after completion of backfilling and compaction of excavations, including the surplus excavated material left by the services departments of the relevant local authorities.

3.15

PLANKING AND STRUTTING The term "planking and strutting" shall be deemed to cover whatever method the Contractor adopts to uphold the sides of excavations to prevent damage to adjoining properties, earth movement and injury to workmen. The Contractor shall be held responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and shall provide all planking and strutting to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such planking and strutting shall be designed and supervised by the Contractor's PE



3.16.1

PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Pest Control Operator (the Pest Control Operator hereinafter referred to as the “Specialist”), executing the Works as required in this Clause including sub-clause have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as the “Performance Requirement”). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor and his Specialist’s duties and obligations arising under the Contract.

3.16.2

Scope Of Work Chemically pre-treat the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites. The treatment shall be for residential building blocks and mixed development with commercial building blocks. The ground below multi-storey carparks, linkways, link buildings, precinct pavilions shall not be treated. Other low rise buildings not for residences or storage of merchandise shall not be treated. The areas to be chemically treated shall include: (a)

The entire ground floor slab area prior to the laying of the concrete floor slab. The area below the basement, lift pits and drop-off porch shall be excluded; and.

(b)

All round the building perimeter prior to concreting the apron area. The width of the treatment shall follow the perimeter defined by the apron slab but shall not exceed 2.0 m in width.

The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the National Environment Agency (NEA) pertaining to such soil treatment work and such compliance shall form part of the Scope of Work. The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements specified in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), product labels and instructional materials supplied by the chemical and equipment manufacturers or their licensed representatives. In addition, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Work Method statement, stipulating the strategic work processes control and personnel responsible etc., to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of such Works. 3.16.3

Chemical To Be Used The non-repellent active ingredients (AI) and products to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil for works which are within or/and outside Water Catchment areas, shall be those approved by the National Environment Agency (NEA) The Contractor may propose either one of the following active ingredients listed in the table below. Active Ingredient (AI)

Fipronil

Imidacloprid

Thiamethoxam


Concentration of AI / Dilution rate / Application Rate An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (Al) concentration within the range 8.6%w/w to 9.6%w/w of Fipronil. Dilution rate 1:160 Acceptable range of concentration after dilution is 0.05%w/w to 0.07%w/w. Application rate of 5L per m2 or the soil is saturated, whichever occurs first. An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (AI) concentration within the range 17.2%w/w to 19.4%w/w of Imidacloprid. Dilution rate 1:400 Acceptable range of concentration after dilution is 0.04%w/w to 0.06%w/w. Application rate of 5L per m2 or the soil is saturated, whichever occurs first. An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (AI) concentration within the range 20.1%w/w to 22.5%w/w of Thiamethoxam. Dilution rate 1:240 Acceptable range of concentration after dilution is 0.09%w/w to 0.20%w/w. Application rate of 5L per m2 or the soil is saturated, whichever occurs first.

Bldg Spec Page 3-7

3.16

3.16.3

PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES (CONT’D)

Chemical To Be Used

(Cont'd)

Any other non-repellent active ingredients approved by NEA but not listed above shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval for use prior application on site (refer to the NEA website: http://app2.nea.gov.sg/soil_Termiticide.aspx for approved list). Prior to the start of each treatment, the Contractor shall propose to the SO Rep the size and the location to be treated. The Contractor shall conduct all the calculations required to ensure accurate application and dilution rates for the termiticide and submit, to the SO Rep prior to the application on the Site. The SO Rep shall be informed for all dilution and mixing procedure by the Contractor. The Contractor is only to mix/dilute the exact amount to be used on the Site. No premixing will be permitted. No mixing offsite prior to its use on the Site will be allowed. All chemicals mixed on the Site MUST be completely used on the Site. No chemical mixed for use on the Site shall be permitted to be removed or disposed off without the approval of the SO Rep. The diluted chemical shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated. The total volume of flow of diluted chemical used will be measured /metered using a Flow Meter. Other methods for measuring the flow of diluted chemicals will not be permitted. The Contractor shall submit the report to the SO Rep on the Application rate and Dilution rate of the chemicals at the end of each site treatment and/or as directed by the SO Rep. The Report shall contain the following information: Date of Application Amount of Area Treated Amount of Concentrate Termiticide used Amount of Diluted Chemical used Amount of Diluted Chemical unused after the treatment

DD/MM/YYYY XX.XX m2 XX.XX Litres XX.XX Litres XX.XX Litres

This report must be verified and signed by the SO Rep at the end of each treatment.

3.16.4

Chemical Preparation Preparation of chemicals shall be conducted in strict accordance with the Product Labels. All emergency measures shall compile with the recommendation of the Material Safety Data Sheet that will come with each chemical. All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required for the chemical preparation and the PPE required for the site will be used at all times. The Contractor shall also ensure that the instructions on handling of the chemicals for the following procedures are in accordance with the published safety information. A declaration document on these safety procedures on handling of chemicals shall also be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of such works. o o o o o o o o o

Washing of hands Washing of equipment used Calibration of equipment used on site Pre-application Checklist Mixing Procedure Dilution Procedure Amounts of diluents used Type of diluents used All PPE required for the works to be carried out

No work shall commence without these procedures and safety documentations submitted to the SO Rep.


Bldg Spec Page 3-8

3.16

3.16.5

PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES (CONT’D) Time of Application Treatment shall be carried out immediately before the lean concreting of the floor slabs and apron areas. Soil treatment shall not be carried out when the soil is saturated, eg. during or immediately after rainfall. Verify the ground water table before soil treatment is conducted. For this purpose, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, excavate trial holes of more than 0.5m deep measured from the level of the soil to be treated. The Contractor shall submit a report on the ground water table to the SO Rep prior to commencing the soil treatment As required by National Environment Agency (NEA), soil treatment shall not be carried out if the ground water table is 0.5m or less below the level of the soil to be treated, and in such event the Employer is entitled to recover from the Contractor the value of work so omitted by way of a variation order. The variation order shall be priced based on the applicable or analogous or pro-rated rates in the Rates times the untreated area measured flat on plan. Notwithstanding such cost recovery, the Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for the provision of warranty for the work and the cost recovery shall not absolve the Contractor from his responsibilities to rectify future occurrence of Defect in respect of the work under the warranty. The restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with National Environment Agency (NEA)'s requirements shall not in any way affect or diminish the Contractor’s responsibilities under the warranty. Provided always that in the event chemical pre-treatment of the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites is omitted altogether from the Scope of Work for a building block either on account of National Environment Agency (NEA)'s requirements or by reason of an Authorisation Order, then the provision of a warranty for the chemical pre-treatment of the soil for that building block shall be deemed to be waived by the Employer.

3.16.6

Application Procedure Immediately after the soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be securely covered with black polythene sheet. A layer of lean concreting shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet. When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered immediately with black polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one (1) metre into the untreated areas. The polythene sheet, especially their overlapping parts, shall be properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all rain water runs into the surrounding temporary drains.

3.16.7

Application Equipment All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable condition. A list of all equipment to be used on the Site shall be provided to the SO Rep. Also all these equipment must be accompanied with last service date records prior to their use on the Site.

3.16.8

Provision Of Temporary Drainage Temporary drainage of adequate capacity shall be provided around the whole area to be treated with an outlet connected to a sump.

3.16.9

Quality Control Sampling To verify the concentration of the chemical used, one (1) sample of the chemical shall be taken randomly on each day of application as directed and witnessed by the SO Rep and stored in a one (1) litre container, properly marked with the date and location of the sample taken. The samples taken shall be kept under lock and at a cool and dry location in the SO Rep room. The keys shall be kept by the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall select the required number of samples for concentration test according to the schedule of material tests. The selected samples are to be sent to an accredited/approved laboratory not more than three (3) calendar days after samples taken. The Contractor shall provide at his own cost and expense containers of one litre capacity for the collection of the samples. The sample container must be able to protect its contents against Ultra Violet Light


Bldg Spec Page 3-9

3.16

3.16.10


Failure of Test On Chemical Concentration The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 “Nuisance and Irregularities” to take action against the Contractor for each sample that fails to attain within the range of the acceptable concentration as specified in the foregoing requirement in the subclause “Chemical To Be Used. Due care shall be exercised by the Contractor when mixing and preparing the chemical on site. For any areas that were deemed to have failed the minimum concentration, immediate re-treatment by the Contractor is required at no additional cost to the Employer. However, if the slab were already placed and the Chemical Concentration were found to be below an acceptable level, Slab-Injections of the previously used chemicals shall be introduced to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at no additional cost to the Employer.

3.16.11

Approved Pest Control Operators Only Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA under the work head for Pest Control shall be engaged to execute the pre-treatment of soil. The Pest Control Operator shall hold a valid letter for the chemical to be used from NEA. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator, proof of BCA registration, letter for the chemical to be used from NEA and the type and details of chemicals to be used (including the rate of application) to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the treatment. In addition, the Contractor shall also ensure that the Pest Control Operator produce a letter of support from the supplier confirming the availability of the chemical to be used for the Works. The SO Rep reserves the right to disapprove the use of the type of chemical and/or the Pest Control Operator so selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim and there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum nor extension of Time for Completion arising from or out of such decision by the SO Rep.

3.16.12

Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the Deed of Warranty for Pre-Treatment of Soil for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-terranean Termites as produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) to such Town Councils. The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty

3.16.13

Re-treatment During Warranty Period If subterranean termite infestation should occur in the treated buildings within the warranty period, the Contractor shall re-treat the soil using the Post-Construction Soil Treatment method at his own costs and expenses. Drilled holes shall be patched and walls and/or floors refinished. In addition, in the event of additions or extensions to the buildings during the warranty period, the Pest Control Operator and the Contractor shall be informed and shall also execute soil treatment to extend the chemical barrier to cover such additions or extensions. The costs of such extensions of soil treatment shall, however, be borne by the Employer.



3.16.14


Safety Precaution Provide and exercise safety precautions during all treatment processes. Personnel engaged in the soil treatment shall wear protective clothing eg. goggles, long sleeved shirt and long legged trousers or an overall type garment, impervious footwear and gloves as specified in the foregoing requirements. Spray drifts beyond the area to be treated shall be avoided. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent accidental spillage of the chemical. Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials. The affected soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the National Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds. Signs in the areas of application shall be posted to warn workers and the public that the area has been treated with poisonous chemicals. Unwanted chemicals and containers shall be disposed off safely at the National Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds.

3.17

FINISHED PLATFORMS, SLOPES AND EMBANKMENTS Platform levels shall be the level at the top of surface drains around the building. The Contractor shall finish the open spaces between buildings with a fall of not less than 1 in 80 towards surface drains. The Contractor shall cut, trim and adjust all slopes and banks to give gradual and regular slopes with no abrupt change of direction, or as directed by the SO Rep.

3.18

SERVICES ROUTES The Contractor shall clear all obstructions from proposed sewer, electrical, water, gas, telephone and Rediffusion services routes and either fill or excavate ground to within 70mm of proposed final platform level as directed by the SO Rep at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Such instructions may be given separately for each of the services at different times and each instruction shall be carried out within seven days.

BLDG12/S03.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


ELECTRICAL CABLE PIPES AND TRENCH The Contractor shall excavate and lay 4 no. of 150mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth of 750mm from the trench in the PowerGrid/SPSL switch room to the position as shown in the Drawings. The pipes shall be laid on 100mm thick mass concrete bed of 600mm width. One end of the pipe shall project 600mm beyond the surface drain or as shown and the other end shall be flushed with the trench. The trench shall be covered with removable RC slabs of 300mm width, capable of supporting a minimum load of 100 kg. Sand shall be provided to fill the trench after installation of the cables into the trench. Excavate and lay 2 no. of 100mm diameter UPVC pipe and 1 no. of 50mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth of 300mm from the floor of the HDB switchroom to the positions as shown in the Drawings. Pipes used shall be free from leakage, distortion and cracks. Gaps between pipes and trench wall shall be patched up with cement mortar and made watertight. A length of drawn wire strong enough to pull in the cable, shall be provided in each pipe. The drawn wire shall project 600mm at both ends of pipe. All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C (wall thickness 6.6mm) type, complying with the requirements of SS 141:1976.

3.20

TELEPHONE CABLE DUCTS The Contractor shall provide and lay where shown 100mm diameter underground UPVC pipes to serve as ducts for telephone cables. Ducts shall turn with gradual bend and continue to extend 600mm beyond aprons, drains and paths outside the building. Provide threading wires for electrical cable ducts. The number of pipes required are as shown in the Drawings.

3.21

DRAIN CASCADES The Contractor shall excavate and lay cascade drains where surface drains flow down steep slopes or banks. Cascades shall not exceed 600mm in length and 300mm in each drop with top of sides finished straight and parallel to slope of ground.

3.22

PUB REGISTERED EXCAVATORS The Contractor shall in addition, engage the services of PUB Registered Excavator Operator only for all excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ PUB Registered Excavator Operator, no excavation Works shall be allowed.

Section 4/..... BLDG12/S03.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 4-1 SECTION 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 4.1

CEMENT

4.1.1

General Requirements Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and manufacture and comply with the following standards : Type Ordinary Portland Cement Rapid Hardening Portland Cement

Relevant Standard SS EN 197 SS EN 197

High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work. When requested by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall produce a certificate showing the date and place of manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take samples for testing. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the relevant standard shall be rejected. The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks. Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in the same mix. Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed in writing of any change in the source of supply. Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.

4.1.2

Supply From The Contractor’s Source (a)

Certificate Of Compliance The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications and Approved Standard. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance inform and seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing of his source of supply together with the following documents: (i) (ii) (iii)

Test Reports showing that the Contractor’s supply is tested according to and in compliance with SS EN 197. If the Contractor’s supply is obtained from a local mill, a copy of the ISO 9000 certification on the mill. If the Contractor’s supply is imported, a letter of supply declaration from the overseas manufacturer.

All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date of the test reports to the SO Rep. Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required to seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the documents laid down hereinabove.



CEMENT (CONT’D)

4.1.2

Supply From The Contractor’s Source (b)

(Cont’d)

Test Requirements The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract for testing at the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. : The Cement shall be tested in accordance with the Approved Standard for Physical and Chemical Test. The test for Elemental Analysis is not required. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows: Supply Source Local mill with ISO 9000 Local mill without ISO 9000/Imported cement

Number of Test Minimum one test six-monthly Minimum one test quarterly

The Contractor offering from two different supply sources i.e. a local mill and imported cement will have both sources subjected to the test requirements. All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne by the Contractor.

4.2

AGGREGATES

4.2.1

General Requirements Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS EN 12620. Where crushed granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed 30%. Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS EN 12620. Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced concrete, unless otherwise specified. All-in aggregates as specified in SS EN 12620 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials inferior to granite shall not be used. Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling of different materials and contamination. Aggregates used for concrete batching plant on site shall be covered with a light roof cover. Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to facilitate moisture compensation during concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on the Speedy method or other approved equivalent method approved by the SO Rep. The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have them tested for compliance with Approved Standards of SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097, ASTM C295 and ASTM C289. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory. Aggregates failing to comply with the Approved Standards shall be rejected.



AGGREGATES (CONT’D)

4.2.2


Certificate Of Compliance The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications and Approved Standards. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance inform and seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing of his source of supply together with test reports from SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories for each source of his supply on the following properties: (i)

20mm Aggregate (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)

(ii)

Concreting Sand (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j)

(k) (l)


shape; surface texture; particle size distribution - sieving method; flakiness index; shape index; aggregate impact value; aggregate resistance to abrasion; bulk density; particle density and water absorption; clay, silt and dust content; shell content; acid soluble sulphate content; sulphate content; organic impurities; chloride ion content; potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method); petrographic examination and other properties as specified by the SO Rep.

particle size distribution - sieving method; clay, silt and dust content by decantation method (not more than 3.00%); organic impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3); chloride content (not more than 0.01%); bulk density; particle density and water absorption; assessment of fines; potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method); magnesium sulphate soundness; elemental analysis (in percentage): - Silica as SiO2 - Aluminium Oxide as AI2O3 - Iron Oxide as Fe2O3 - Titanium Oxide as TiO2 - Calcium Oxide as CaO - Magnesium Oxide as MgO - Chromium Oxide as Cr2O3 - Sodium Oxide as Na2O - Potassium Oxide as K2O - Sulphate as SO4 - loss on Ignition at 900 0C any other element(s) which may exist in the concreting sand; and other properties as specified by the SO Rep.



4.2.2


Certificate Of Compliance

(Cont’d)

(Cont’d)

All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date of the test reports to the SO Rep. Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the documents laid down hereinabove. (b)

Test Requirements The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract for testing at the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. The quality of the aggregates to be supplied shall comply in every respect with the Specifications and Approved Standards, and the conditions, analysis and test requirements laid down in the SS EN, BS EN, ASTM (especially SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097) classification for concreting purposes. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows: (i)

20mm Aggregate Properties

Frequency of Test

Particle size distribution - sieving method

Minimum one test quarterly

Flakiness index Shape index Aggregate impact value Aggregate resistance to abrasion Bulk density Particle density and water absorption Clay, silt and dust content

Minimum one test six-monthly

Shell content Acid soluble sulphate content Sulphate content Organic impurities Chloride Ion Content Potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method) Petrographic examination

Minimum one test

The Contractor shall be required to send their 20 mm aggregate supply for the Mortar-Bar test under ASTM Standard C227 if the need arises.




4.2.2

Supply From The Contractor’s Source (b)

Test Requirements (ii)

(Cont’d)

(Cont’d)

Concreting Sand Properties

Number of Test

Particle size distribution - sieving method Clay, silt and dust content by decantation method (not more than 3%) Organic Impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3) Chloride content (not more than 0.01%) Bulk Density

Minimum one test monthly

Particle density and water absorption Assessment of fines Elemental analysis (in percentage): (i) Silica as SiO2 (ii) Aluminium Oxide as Al2O3 Full list of properties as specified in the subclause “Certificate of Compliance”.

Minimum one test six-monthly

The Contractor offering from two different supply sources will have both sources subjected to the test requirements. All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne by the Contractor.

4.3

WATER Potable water supplied by the Public Utilities Board shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout. For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited.

4.4

ADMIXTURES When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture, admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS EN 934 for approval by the SO Rep prior to the use of the admixture. Admixture used shall comply with SS EN 934 or the relevant British European Standards. Requests for permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered when accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s). The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture uniformity tests in accordance with SS EN 934 or the relevant British Standards.



STEEL REINFORCEMENT

4.5.1

Description Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reinforcement for concrete shall consist of plain mild steel and high yield reinforcement bars complying with SS 2 and welded steel fabric complying with SS 32. Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. Where reinforcement is to be welded, it shall comply with CP 65. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the SO Rep in writing prior to any welding of reinforcement.

4.5.2

Testing The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling before any cutting, bending or other fabrication is undertaken. If deemed necessary, the SO Rep may cause samples to be taken from reinforcement already fixed in position. Samples for the tests shall be sent for testing at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory. For each sample, 3 bars shall be taken for testing. Reinforcement not complying with the appropriate Specifications shall be removed and replaced.

4.5.3

Galvanised Steel Galvanized steel reinforcement as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. The Contractor shall obtain galvanizing service or galvanized steel reinforcement only from those in the Approved List. The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table D1 of BS EN ISO 1461. For steel with diameter of 2 6mm and above, the mean coating (minimum) mass shall be 610 g per m and the local coating 2 (minimum) shall be 505 g per m . The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating appearance of any galvanized reinforcement be found otherwise, such reinforcement shall not be used as a galvanized reinforcement. Store all galvanized reinforcement in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas of galvanized coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint. Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanized reinforcement to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined using the gravimetric method in accordance with BS EN ISO 1460 and the nominal 3 density of the coating (7.2g/cm ). Certificates of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification.



FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT

4.6.1

On Site Fabrication All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings. Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep. Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wires. The projecting ends of the steel wires shall be directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover. Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified concrete cover. Plastic spacers shall be used for all bottom slab reinforcement. Steel bar chairs bent according to the Drawings or proprietary-type chairs shall be used for top slab reinforcement. The part of the chair that need to rest on formwork shall be coated with plastic for isolation and protection. Other than for slabs, both plastic and concrete or mortar spacer blocks may be used. Concrete or mortar spacer blocks shall be provided with tying wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. All spacers shall be obtained from sources approved by the SO Rep. Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep. Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the Works shall be approved by the SO Rep before any concrete can be placed thereon. Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from Works being concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected from accidental deformation and damage.

4.6.2

Prefabrication At Factory All column link cages and rectangular column cage reinforcement with T16 main reinforcement bars (except for open links) and all beam cages with beam cage code prefixed with "J" provided to apartment blocks shall be prefabricated in a factory approved by the SO Rep. The rectangular column cage reinforcement shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T16 main reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the column links and bent into column cage reinforcement. The "J" series beam cage shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T13 or T16 main reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the stirrup links and bent into beam cage reinforcement.



CONCRETE MIXES

4.7.1

Designed Mix For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements : Concrete Grade

30

35

40

45

50

Minimum Cement Content (kg per m )

275

300

325

350

400

3

550

550

550

550

550

50

50

50

50

50

0.55

0.50

0.45

0.40

0.40

3

Maximum Cement Content (kg per m ) Maximum % of Fine Aggregate to Total Aggregate Maximum Water to Cement Ratio

For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14mm and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be increased by 20 kg per m3 and 40 kg per m3 respectively. In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 10 N per mm2. If a current margin other than that recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available; however, such mix shall comply with the Specifications. In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable, workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified or as shown. 4.7.2

Trial Mixes The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered suitable if : (a)

the designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS 78 or BS 1881 : Part 105 if a flow test is specified; and

(b)

the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic strength by at least 10 N per mm2 or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount.

Trial mixes may not be required if concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers approved by the SO Rep. 4.7.3

Mix Adjustment Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the mix without prior approval of the SO Rep. An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg per m3 and above, or the percentage of fine aggregate by 5% and above, or any change in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is considered a change in mix design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design used in relation to the specified requirements. If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.



BATCHING Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and due allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall be measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within ±3% of the quantity of cement, water or total aggregate being measured, and with ±5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be calibrated with known weights and volume measures.

4.9

MIXING CONCRETE Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is uniform in colour and consistency. The mixing time shall be as follows : (i) (ii)

Pan mixer Truck mixer or drum mixer

-

minimum 30 seconds minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m3 of concrete plus 0.25 minute for each additional 1 m3.

The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time. The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer. The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be free from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.

4.10

READY-MIX CONCRETE All concrete used in site casting for the Works shall be obtained from pre-approved Ready-Mixed Concrete suppliers. Ready-mix concrete shall comply with SS EN 206. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.7 "Concrete Mixes" including all subclauses under it. No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.



WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY The workability shall be such that the concrete can be well compacted, worked into the corners of the shuttering and around the reinforcements, gives the specified surface finish and attain the specified strength. The mix design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable. On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on the Site at the discharge point of the mixer by means of the slump test in accordance with SS 78. If the measured slump deviates from the agreed value by more than ±25 mm or one third of the required value whichever is greater, the concrete shall be rejected. As an alternative, flow test to BS 1881 : Part 105 or other means of assessing workability may be considered subject to approval by the SO Rep. No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing.

4.12

PLACING OF CONCRETE All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall be such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients. In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with : (a)

Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating movement of the pipe.

(b)

Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be concreted.

(c)

When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted inside but no free water shall remain in the pipe.

(d)

Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.

Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well wetted and inspection openings shall be closed. Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement. Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position. For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In walls, columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not exceeding 1m deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not normally exceed 30 minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


PLACING OF CONCRETE

(CONT’D)

No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.

4.13

COMPACTION OF CONCRETE All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition shall be used on the Site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind. Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.

4.14

CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The exposed surfaces of concrete shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the SO Rep. The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturer's instruction. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the application is completed, the Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing compound again. However, the application of the curing compound may be exempted subject to the approval of the SO Rep, if continuous wetting for at least 72 hours by rain on the concrete surface occurs immediately after the concrete sets. This waiver shall not constitute a variation to the Contract. Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth and vegetation, and the excavated ground shall be kept free of any water by pumping or other means of drainage. Approved means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, moving vehicles, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influences that would impair the strength and durability of the concrete. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances shall be free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a further period of 3 days from the time of concrete placing or as otherwise instructed thereafter. Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good by the Contractor.

4.15

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes, such joints shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregates removed therefrom. Immediately before placing new concrete, the joints shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich cement grout.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS

4.16.1

General Requirements (a)

Testing of Structural Concrete Concrete shall be tested for compliance in strength and durability requirements, except for the following non-structural Works : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Foot paths and paved areas; Ramps and steps; Hardcourts; Inspection chambers and drain lines;and Floor screed

The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 100mm cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance with BS EN 12390. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test, compressive strength test, core test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO Rep. (b)

Sampling On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be taken according to the following rates : (i)

Samples Taken At Sites Where samples are taken at sites, samples shall be taken for every 40 m³ of concrete or part thereof, of each grade of concrete. At least 1 sample shall be taken from each batch chosen by the SO Rep.

(ii)

Samples Taken At Precast Plants And Ready-Mixed Concrete Plant Where samples are taken at ready-mixed concrete plants, for every 40 m3 of concrete or part thereof, at least 1 sample shall be taken from a batch. Each sample cannot be used to represent the Works for more than one Contract or project. The sampling of concrete cubes in the precast plants shall be carried out by the precasters under the Approved Precast Concrete Supplier listed in the HDB Materials List. Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor is still liable for ensuring that the precast components quality satisfies the Drawings and Specifications requirements. In the event that the precast components quality fails to meet the requirements in the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall be liable for the defective precast components. All defective precast components which failed the strength requirement shall be removed or otherwise rectified accordingly to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. No extension of time for completion shall be allowed for the rectification of such works.

A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of concrete whose properties are to be determined. The sample shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast to achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required before demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)



4.16.1

General Requirements (Cont'd) (b)

(CONT'D)

Sampling (Cont'd) At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall be tested at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory or other approved accredited testing laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test results shall be uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Employer shall recover all testing fees charged by the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory for testing of cubes including those sampled from readymixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory shall be collected by the SO Rep from the designated site at regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the designated collection site and the Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site on the day of collection. The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to hand over the cubes to the HDB’s appointed contractor for the collection of cubes.

(c)

Cube Identification The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The reader must be able to read all 125kHz RFID tags, including tags starting with hex codes of '2800' and ‘2868’. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller. The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of the cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

(d)

Cover Measurement The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for the measurement of concrete cover to reinforcement and the in-situ strength of concrete. The Contractor shall carry out measurements for all major structural elements as determined by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall analyse statistically all measurements for each of the major type of structural element. The concrete cover shall comply with the requirements of CP 65. The in-situ strength of the concrete shall be assessed in accordance with BS 6089 where applicable. The strength shall comply with the specified grade, taking into account the variability with in-situ strength.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)



4.16.2

Compliance Of Strength Requirement

(CONT'D)

The 28 day strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes. For precast concrete, the 3 day strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified by the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength shall be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any precast component should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements. Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age of 28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied: (a)

The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength plus half a fixed current margin of 6 N per mm². Thus, the minimum average strength shall be : Grade Minimum Average Strength at 28 days (N per mm²)

(b)

25

30

35

40

45

50

23.0

28.0

33.0

38.0

43.0

48.0

53.0

The sample strength is at least the level specified below : Grade Minimum Individual Sample Strength at 28 days (N per mm²)

(c)

20

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

17.0

22.0

27.0

32.0

37.0

42.0

47.0

The characteristics strength shall meet the requirement of the specified concrete grade.

If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be sought to lower the strength level as specified in subclause (a) above. For samples taken on the Site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete Works may be stopped and not be continued until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed for such stoppage of the concrete Works.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance with BS 5328. For the 28 day strength non-compliance, the quality of the sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test. The tests may include non-destructive methods, the taking of core samples, load tests or a combination of several methods as follows : Grade

Compressive Strength of Individual Sample 2 (N per mm )

20 25 30 35 40 45 50

14.5 to below 17.0 18.5 to below 22.0 23.0 to below 27.0 27.0 to below 32.0 31.5 to below 37.0 35.5 to below 42.0 40.0 to below 47.0

20 25 30 35 40 45 50

below 14.5 below 18.5 below 23.0 below 27.0 below 31.5 below 35.5 below 40.0

Test on Structure after 28 days ) ) ) ) Non-destructive method and/or core test ) ) ) ) ) ) ) Non-destructive method and core test ) and/or load test ) )

The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with CP 65 and assessed in accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of noncompliance provided that the latter are based on valid cube test results.

4.18

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which fails to meet either of the requirements in Clause 4.16 "Quality Of Concrete Works" including all subclauses under it and the assessment specified in Clause 4.17 "Testing Of Hardened Concrete" shall be determined by the SO Rep. They may range from : (a)

qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be structurally sound by a PE engaged by the Contractor; or If the average of three core tests falls below the strength level specified in sub-clause 4.16.2(b), or in the event of failure of a load test.

(b)

the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised and certified by a PE engaged by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses; or

(c)

the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete, and the costs and expenses in removing all poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

All defective concrete Works such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and plumb, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FORMWORK

4.19.1

General Requirements (a)

Material The Contractor shall solely use metalforms for the construction of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete structures. Notwithstanding Singapore Standards CP23, other type of formwork material shall not be used, unless expressly specified otherwise or as approved by the SO Rep. In the case where metalforms are not suitable for any part of a structure, the Contractor may propose to use other formwork material which shall provide similar high quality off-form finish as compared with metalforms, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The use of such alternative material shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be effected under such case. Unless specified otherwise, all formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23. It shall be true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide appropriate metal formwork system that produces concrete lines and surfaces complying with Grade II requirements of SS CP23. For cases of non-compliance with the foregoing requirements, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out rectification Works. The form face in contact with concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout, projecting nails, splits and other Defect. Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish. Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of concrete shall not be used. The same type of approved form oil shall be used for all Works. The application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be no accumulation of the oil on the formwork. Where the use of plywood is approved by the SO Rep, it shall be Phenolic film faced plywood, complying with SS 1 and cut to size from sheets at least 12 mm thick. Formwork to curved surfaces shall be of steel or other material approved by the SO Rep to give a good surface finish.

(b)

Use Of Employer's Metalforms For the use of the Employer's metalforms, Section 5 "Metal Formwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall be applicable and the Contractor shall comply with all provisions specified therein. In addition, the Contractor shall also be required to comply with all relevant provisions specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.

(c)

Use Of Contractor's Metalforms In the event the Employer is not supplying the metalform, the Contractor shall use his own metalforms or metalforms from suppliers subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The age of the metalforms used on the Site shall not exceed six years from the date of their manufacture. The Contractor shall furnish to the SO Rep with documents to prove that the metalforms provided are as specified, before the construction of the ground floor slab. Where any documents submitted are not the originals, they shall be duly certified by the originating parties.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FORMWORK

4.19.1

General Requirements (c)


Use Of Contractor's Metalforms

(Cont’d)

The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed metal formwork system for the approval of the SO Rep and comply with the following requirements : (i)

Technical Requirements The proposed metal formwork system shall comply with Singapore Standard CP23 and shall be in every respect rigidly constructed to the shapes and dimensions as shown in the Drawings.

(ii)

Technical Information The Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, the following technical information of his proposed metalforms namely; the grade of steel, steel strength such as tensile strength, yield stress and elongation (including a recent reduced section tensile test certificate), the steel plate thickness, the manufacturing process (including a recent photo of the manufacturing machine) and the name and address of the metalform manufacturer and/or supplier, for the approval of the SO Rep.

(iii)

Testing Of Metalforms 

Reduced Section Tensile Test For Contractor self-owned metalforms, the Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, samples of basic types of the metalforms for testing at SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory or other approved laboratory or as directed for the reduced section tensile test. Five samples shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing. Reduced section tensile test shall be carried out in accordance with JIS Z2241. The samples shall comply with the minimum tensile strength of 400 N per mm2, minimum yield stress of 245 N per mm2 and minimum elongation of 25%. The minimum steel thickness shall be 2.65 mm. As and when required, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, provide a thickness gauge for verification of the steel plate thickness by the SO Rep. The metalforms shall only be approved by the SO Rep upon receiving all satisfactory test results from the laboratory. The SO Rep shall retain the original copy of the test results.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FORMWORK

4.19.1

General Requirements (c)


Use Of Contractor's Metalforms (iii)

Testing Of Metalforms 

(Cont’d)

(Cont’d)

Dimension Test For Contractor's own metalforms or metalforms from suppliers approved by the SO Rep, the SO Rep shall sample metalforms for dimension test. The Contractor shall be required to send samples taken for testing at SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory or other approved laboratory or as directed by the SO Rep. The frequency of the dimension test is as follows:

Storey Height Of Building Blocks

No. of Dimension Tests Per Building Block

Building blocks up to 20 storeys

2 tests per building block





The metalforms shall be subjected to one re-test. If the result of the re-test does not comply with the requirements, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In addition to the payment of charges, the affected set of metalform shall be restricted from use at all HDB worksites and the Contractor shall use another set of metalform for the next cycle of form work erection. No extension of the Time for Completion shall be allowed for such replacement of metalforms. (iv)

Method Of Manufacture All metalforms shall be manufactured so that the surface plate and side ribs are formed from the same sheet of metal to a 90 degree bend without any cutting and/or welding. The folding of the 90 degree cold-formed bend shall be completed in one single continuous operation using a continuous series of steel rollers of a roll-forming machine. Only the two end ribs and all the internal ribs shall be welded.

(v)

Maintenance Of Old Metalforms All old metalforms shall be cleaned free of rust, grit, grout stains etc. The method of cleaning shall be by SHOT BLAST only. Such old metalforms shall be repaired to their original shape and condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to its use. The Contractor shall engage the service of the Cleaning and Repair (C&R) contractor approved by the SO Rep. In addition, the Contractor shall provide documentary proof in the form of a C&R Certificate indicating the C&R contractor and the quantities of cleaned and repaired metalforms to show that such cleaning and repair Works have been carried out.

(vi)

Marking And Identification The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep on the type of identification mark for their metalforms. In addition, the metalforms shall be engraved with the manufacturer's logo and the date of manufacture, and the identification mark shall be different from those of the Employer's metalforms.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FORMWORK (CONT’D)

4.19.1

General Requirements (Cont’d) (c)

Use Of Contractor's Metalforms (Cont’d) (vii)

Irregularities Committed If the Contractor uses sub-standard metalforms which do not comply fully with those reference samples approved by the SO Rep as specified in subclause 4.19.1(c) (iii) "Testing Of Metalforms", the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.

(viii)

Metalforms Usage The Contractor shall use form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep for each casting of concrete. The Contractor shall be fully liable and responsible for any consequential loss or damage due to or arising from the usage of his metalforms.

4.19.2

Design Formwork shall be designed to Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall cater for the appropriate method of placing and compacting the concrete. Adequate number of braces, ties and struts shall be provided so that the formwork shall be able to withstand the pressures resulting from whatever method of placing and compacting concrete adopted, and maintain the required position, slope and profile. Metal props shall be used to support formwork, except at irregular places where timber props may be more suitable or practical. Use of timber props shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Where the floor to ceiling height exceeds 9.14 m, or where the formwork deck is supported by shores constructed in two or more tiers, or where the dead, live and impact loads on the formwork exceed 732.3 kg per m², the Contractor shall engage a PE to design the formwork structure. The Contractor shall submit the details of the design of the formwork and the supports for approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the strength and adequacy of the formwork and supports shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor and his PE.

4.19.3

Construction Formwork shall be constructed sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete at all stages of placing and compacting. The arrangement of the formwork shall be such that it can be dismantled and removed readily from the cast concrete without causing shock, disturbance or damage. For beams and slabs, the arrangement shall be such that the formwork and supports for the slab soffits and beam sides can be removed without disturbing the formwork and supports of the beam soffits. Where steel props are used, such steel props shall be prezinc galvanised or galvanised by other methods. Obtain approval from the SO Rep before using such galvanised steel props. Supports to an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor has developed adequate strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the lower floor does not have the required strength to carry the supports to the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork of the upper floor shall have to be approved by the SO Rep. All props to a floor which itself supports the formwork of an upper floor shall only be removed 3 days (minimum) after such upper floor is cast.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FORMWORK (CONT’D)

4.19.3

Construction (Cont’d) Connections in formwork shall be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped or otherwise secured. Ties that are anchored against the timber shall pass through a plate washer of at least 50 mm in size and of sufficient thickness so that the load is transferred to the timber without any visible deflection or penetration into the timber. Only cast-in steel spreader ties shall be used to separate and restrain the formwork faces. The voids formed by the removal of the plastic cones after the dismantling of formwork shall be patched up using non-shrink grout. Concrete separators shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall be required to make allowances for any settlement or deflection of formwork which is likely to arise during construction. The soffits of beams and slabs shall be given a camber to allow for deflection after striking of formwork. The magnitude of the camber shall be approved by the SO Rep. Formwork across structure joints shall be erected such that it overlaps adjoining finished concrete by at least 200mm and holds tightly against it. Formwork shall be provided and run continuously at construction joints. Bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, boxouts, cores and other devices used for forming openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be as rigid as the formwork itself to prevent the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with the approval of the SO Rep.

4.20

STRIKING OF FORMWORK The minimum period before striking of the formwork for ordinary Portland Cement concrete shall be in accordance with the following table : Type of Formwork

Minimum Period Before Striking

All vertical or side formwork

12 hours

Soffit formwork to slabs and beams

3 days

Props to slabs and beams

14 days

Props to cantilever slabs and cantilever beams

21 days

Remarks ) ) The period shall commence from ) the time of last pour of concrete ) ) After striking of formwork, props ) shall be immediately put up to ) support the structure )

For residential building blocks where metal formwork (HDB Modular Formwork Design System or similar) and Grade 40 concrete and above are specified, the provision of props and re-props shall be as stipulated in the Drawings. Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock or vibration and in the manner and order approved by the SO Rep. After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good as directed by the SO Rep and at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution. All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade than the surrounding concrete as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar And Grout" including all subclauses under it.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)


OPENINGS AND RECESSES Provide openings and recesses in the reinforced concrete structure, including PVC sleeves where required, for the installation of sanitary pipes and fittings, service ducts or pipes, CATV, telecommunication and electrical cables and trunking, as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall leave openings in the lift motor room floor to the requirement of the lift contractor or as instructed by the SO Rep. No opening or opening greater than the sizes shown in the Drawings shall be formed without the prior approval of the SO Rep. No coring or hacking of holes through existing structural elements shall be permitted. However, holes not exceeding 20 mm in diameter may be drilled through these elements. If any steel bar obstructs the drilling through of a hole, a new position shall be selected slightly offset to avoid the obstructing bar. Under no circumstances shall any steel bar be cut or removed without the written consent of the SO Rep. For holes with diameter greater than 20 mm, submit drilling proposals to the SO Rep for approval. All openings in slabs shall be formed with sides tapering slightly downwards and trimmed on all sides with mild steel bars as shown in the Drawings. Check and ensure accuracy in the position, alignment, size and shape of all openings and recesses. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make the necessary rectification. Remove all formwork other than PVC sleeves required from openings and recesses after the concrete has set and ensure that the openings are not blocked up. Recesses for vertical electrical trunking shall be finished smooth. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in structural elements such as floor slabs, walls, columns and beams with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade than the surrounding concrete, after installation of the services by the Contractor or other contractors.

4.22

BUILDING ACCURACY After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the SO Rep to check the deviation of the reinforced concrete Works from specified dimensions shown in the Drawings. All measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep. Works complying with Singapore Standard CP 23 Grade II shall be deemed acceptable.

4.23

PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS

4.23.1

General Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the positions and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings. All exposed vertical sides of columns and walls and undersides of beams at expansion joints shall be covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at 300mm centres or otherwise as shown in the Drawings. The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing materials shall comply with the Drawings and the manufacturers' recommendation. Alternative joint waterproofing materials may be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Submit supporting technical information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials. All waterproofing materials provided at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)


PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS

4.23.2

Waterstops

(CONT’D)

Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt jointed according to BS 8007 and the Manufacturer's recommendations. Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the formwork to prevent displacement during concreting. 4.23.3

Sealing Compound (Permanent Structure Joint) For permanent structure joints, sealing compound for external use shall be one of the three generic types namely polyurethane, polysulphide and silicone. They shall comply with ASTM C920 or other approved.

4.23.4

Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b) (c) (d)

4.23.5

it shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subject to compression throughout its length; Good adhesion; Water resistant; Non-staining

Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b)

4.23.6

Minimum joint movement capacity of ±10% of joint width at 25°C; Resistant to dilute acids and alkali.

Bituminous Sheeting Bituminous sheeting with fibre shall comply with the following requirements : (a) (b) (c) (d)

Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion); Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight; Minimum tensile strength of 50 kg per cm²; Ozone and ultra-violet resistance.

The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less than 70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage. 4.23.7

Polyethylene Foam Backing Rods Polyethylene foam backing rods used as mortar stops in panel joints shall have the following properties : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

BLDG12/S04.DOC(22) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Minimum compressibility of 75% of original volume at 25°C: Excellent resilient properties; Density between 35 kg per m³ and 45 kg per m³; Totally resistant to common acids, lubricants and detergents; Totally resistant to water infiltration by capillary action; Suitable for up to 70°C.


APPARATUS The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use for all Works on the Site :

4.25

(a)

Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS 78 or flow test apparatus complying with BS 1881 : Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location;

(b)

Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS 78 for casting 100mm concrete test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that no stripping of the cube is required prior to the 24 hours setting and hardening period;

(c)

Three measuring cylinders of 250ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for determination of silt content (field settling method);

(d)

An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate;

(e)

One digital concrete rebound hammer equipped with an electronic transducer which converts the rebound of the hammer into an electric signal and displays it in the selected stress units;

(f)

One surveying level or theodolite complete with the necessary accessories;

(g)

One electronic calculator with statistical functions;

(h)

One 5.5m measuring tape; and

(i)

One spirit level.

MASS AND LEAN CONCRETE Mass and lean concrete shall compose of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates in the nominal ratio by weight of 1:2:4. Where, however, a denser and more workable concrete can be produced by a variation in the ratio of fine aggregate to that of coarse aggregates, this ratio may be varied within the limits 1 to 1.5 and 1 to 3, provided that the weights of fine and coarse aggregates, each measured separately, shall nevertheless be equal to the sum of the weights of fine and coarse aggregates appropriate to the nominal mix. The concrete shall be mixed as specified in the foregoing requirements in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. Reinforced concrete shall not be laid directly onto earth surfaces. A blinding coat of 40mm minimum thickness of lean concrete shall be laid on well prepared firm ground before any reinforcement is placed in position.

4.26

CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT

4.26.1

General For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one part cement to one part sand, mixed with water so that water-cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall compose of cement and water-cement ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by the SO Rep.

4.26.2

Grouting For Prestressed Concrete Ducts Grouting for prestressed concrete ducts shall be as specified in Clause 7.15 "Grouting".

BLDG12/S04.DOC(23) Sal(151211) (DPD)


CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT

4.26.3

Precast Concrete Joints

(CONT’D)

Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be waterproof. Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or concreted and these shall be carried out by trained workers. In the case where a joint need not be grouted, mortar packed or concreted immediately, such work shall be completed not later than 28 days after erection. The respective mix design shall be free of lime and chloride. They shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink and possess strength equal or higher than that of precast concrete. Curing for at least 3 days shall be provided. Designed mixes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. 4.26.4

Testing Method And Compliance For Load Bearing Grout And Mortar The method of sampling and testing prescribed in BS 4551 shall be adopted. The compressive strength shall be determined by crushing test on 50mm cubes. For each casting day and for each grade of grout or mortar, three samples shall be taken from three separate batches. One cube shall be cast from each sample for testing at 28 days. The compliance of the 28 day strength shall be judged, based on the average compressive strength of 3 cubes from 3 samples taken on the same day, in accordance with the strength requirement specified in the Drawings. In the event of non-compliance, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. If the average compressive strength of the 3 cubes is less than the design strength, the quality of the substandard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out appropriate tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.

4.27

FOUNDATIONS All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and to the exact depths required. Provide, maintain and remove any necessary planking and strutting, sheetpiling or cofferdams, and by pumping or other approved means keep the excavations free from water. In the case of loose or disturbed ground, the bottom of excavation for pile caps shall be well rammed and those for footings shall be excavated further to a sound layer. The whole work shall be approved by the SO Rep before it is covered with a blinding layer not less than 40mm thick. The required cover of concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely above the blinding layer. Excavation for all foundation work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 3 - "Excavation" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

4.28

PILE CAPS Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to check and verify the eccentricities and the cut-off levels of all piling work in the ground against pile eccentricity Drawings provided and pile cap details in the Drawings, and shall notify the SO Rep in the event of any discrepancy. Straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring pile caps, carry out excavations, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of pile caps.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(24) Sal(151211) (DPD)


LIFT PITS For lift pits below ground level, the concreting to the bottom and walls shall be carried out in one operation without construction joints and bolt holes up to the underside of ground beams and slabs. Forms ties used to connect opposite faces of formwork shall be cast-in steel spreader ties. Concrete separators shall not be permitted. Where in the case water reducing admixture is used in the concrete mix, furnish information concerning the water reducing admixture for approval by the SO Rep prior to its use. Water reducing admixture shall be mixed with the concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. All external wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproof by coating with three coats of bitumen solution complying with BS 3416 or other cold applied bituminous coating as approved by the SO Rep. The concrete surface shall be clean and dry before application of the first coat, and ample time for each coat to dry shall be allowed. The total dry thickness of the coating shall be 0.6mm minimum.

4.30

FIRST STOREY SLAB After backfilling and lean concrete to the first storey of residential building block are completed, the Contractor shall engage a licensed registered surveyor to verify the position of all column/wall grid lines and submit such report to the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall be informed of any deviations from the Drawings.

4.31

FLOORS After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforce concrete floors shall be trowelled smooth with a steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied to the floor slabs except where specified otherwise. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel reinforcement is not displaced or lowered during trowelling. For areas which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be struck off to a level or fall as required using a long timber trowel. The surface shall be densified by a jitterbug tamper or trowelling after the bleeding has stopped in order to eliminate settlement and plastic shrinkage cracks. Before it hardens, it shall be brushed with a stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.

4.32

ROOFS

4.32.1

General Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with power trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings. The finished roof slab shall be cured immediately with an approved curing compound. Roof access openings, 900mm x 900mm clear with 200mm upstanding kerbs, shall be constructed at the positions as shown in the Drawings. 100mm x 100mm mortar angle fillet shall be neatly provided around all upstands, pipe supports, RC stumps, walls and ventilating stacks. The finished concrete roof shall be protected against mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects during subsequent work on the roof.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(25) Sal(151211) (DPD)


ROOFS

(CONT’D)

4.32.2

Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test After the completion of all structural work on the roof, the roof slab shall be tested for watertightness and to ensure no water stagnation. Where the reinforced concrete roof is to be protected by a watertight secondary roof, no water test or ponding test will be conducted. The watertightness test shall be carried out by ponding with water to a minimum depth of 25mm for 24 hours. The water used for the test shall be that used for the watertightness test of the RC water tanks. At the end of the watertightness test, the soffit of the slab especially the area around the pipes shall be examined for any dampness or leakage. Immediately after discharging the water off the roof, the top surface shall be examined for any water stagnation. Water collected beyond a layer of 5mm measured from the top surface of the roof in any area is considered a stagnation. After any rectification, hacking and refilling around pipes installed after the first test, the localised area shall be retested at the Contractor's own cost and expense for watertightness, water stagnation or both as deemed necessary by the SO Rep.

4.33

DRIPS Drips shall be formed along edges of soffit to concrete roof slabs, hoods, underside of balconies, cantilevered beams and slabs and other parts of the building where rainwater is likely to adhere in drops.

4.34

RC STRUCTURE CANNOT BE USED AS LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural components and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.

4.35

INSTALLATION OF FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR FOR COLUMNS The Contractor shall provide and install encased fibre optic sensors at 10 different 1st storey columns of each building above 10 storeys. Where the columns are precast, the Contractor shall provide such sensors for the precaster to install in the precast columns. The locations of the sensors shall be approved by the SO Rep and as-built drawings indicating actual position of sensors must be submitted upon successful installation. The sensors shall have connecting cables terminating with a socket at the column face to enable the SO Rep to take readings. The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of readings per block to HDB during the construction stage to verify that the sensors are in working condition.

4.36

MONITORING DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT OF COLUMNS For buildings 10 storey or higher and supported on pile foundation, the Contractor shall install and monitor 10 numbers of settlement points per block. The location of the settlement points and the bench marks shall be selected by the SO Rep before installation. These settlement points are to be installed on the first storey columns and they have to be installed before construction works are allowed to proceed for the 2nd storey, unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep. The instruments and equipment used to take the readings shall have a minimum accuracy of 0.5mm. Readings shall be taken by after the settlement points are first installed and subsequently on every 3 floors, and/or when directed by the SO Rep. In addition, one set of reading is to be taken for the completion of the structural roof slab and another set of reading is to be taken before the building block is handed over. The contractor is required to submit two sets of monitoring reports certified by a Registered Surveyor on the above readings within 1 week after the completion of each reading. The format shall be pre-approved by the SO Rep. The contractor shall take all necessary action to protect the settlement points so that they are not damaged or subject to vandalism throughout the contract period. In the event that the settlement points are damaged, lost and/or vandalized or become defective, the contractor shall install additional points and/or take all necessary remedial action as instructed by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S04.DOC(26) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 4-27

Section 5/......

BLDG12/S04.DOC(27) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 5-1 SECTION 5 METAL FORMWORK

5.1

5.2

DEFINITIONS "Metalforms" -

shall mean the set of metalforms rented from the Employer including U-clips but excluding the supporting system.

"Workshops" -

shall mean the Employer's Warehouses or appointed maintenance workshop(s).

BUILDING BLOCKS USING METALFORM The Contractor shall use the Employer's metalforms only for the construction of building blocks. The metalforms shall be hired to the Contractor by the Employer and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to use and maintain them strictly in accordance with the instructions issued by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make provisions for his own formwork and accessories for any portion of the building blocks where in the opinion of the SO Rep the use of metalforms is unsuitable. Such situations may occur at curved or bent (other than 90 degrees) members, corners and other parts of the structure. The formwork for such portions shall be made of materials which will result in high quality off-form concrete finish. If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the concrete surface finish is poor, the Contractor shall carry out rectification Works all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The charges, terms of hiring and other requirements are specified in Clauses 5.3 to 5.10 (inclusive).

5.3

HIRE RATES, CHARGES & PAYMENT Metalforms shall be hired out at a fixed rate of $1.90 per square metre per month based on the ACTUAL DAILY AREA OF METALFORMS TAKEN BY THE CONTRACTOR. For damage or loss of metalforms and U-clips, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's latest purchase price and the SO Rep reserves the right to destroy the damaged metalforms at no compensation to the Contractor. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The Employer shall deduct the amount of hiring costs and other charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

5.4

HIRING PERIOD The hiring period shall commence on the date of the drawing of Metalforms from the Employer's Metalform Warehouses. The hiring period shall end when the Metalforms are returned to the Employer's Metalform Warehouses. Where during the hiring period, there is delay in the Contractor's construction activities due to the supply of Metalforms which in the opinion of the SO Rep, are deemed to be unavoidable, the hiring charges may be adjusted accordingly and at the sole discretion of the SO Rep. The Contractor must inform the Employer's Metalform Unit of any delay within 2 weeks from the first day of such delay. The details of notice including the number of days delayed and area of metalform affected shall be submitted to the Metalform Unit within 2 weeks from the date of resumption of work. The SO Rep shall endorse on this notice before submitting to the Metalform Unit. If the Contractor does not submit the notice within the above deadline, the SO Rep reserves the right not to consider the Contractor's request for adjustment of the hiring charges.



IRREGULARITIES COMMITTED Should the Contractor be found to have committed any of the following irregularities : (a)

Subletting or lending the Metalforms or any part thereof to any third party or removing the Metalforms from the site to which it is delivered or consigned, without first receiving written permission from the SO Rep regardless of whether the Contractor has any knowledge of it; or abuse in Metalforms usage or storage, regardless of whether the Contractor has any knowledge of it;

(b)

Using sub-standard metalforms or accessories purchased elsewhere other than from the Employer to replace lost and damaged ones upon returning;

(c)

Using sub-standard metalforms or accessories purchased elsewhere other than from the Employer for use in the Site;

the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall be liable to pay the Employer charges equal to the replacement cost of Metalforms based on the latest Employer's purchase prices. The SO Rep also reserves the right to destroy these sub-standard metalforms found on the Site at no compensation whatsoever to the Contractor if the Contractor does not immediately remove such sub-standard metalforms from the Site.

5.6

PROCEDURE FOR DRAWING OF METALFORMS The Contractor is required to submit to the Employer's Metalform Unit the request for metalform schedule not later than 2 weeks before the delivery date of the Metalforms from the Employer's warehouses. However, the Contractor may request for metalforms with shorter lead time provided the type and quantity requested is available in the warehouse. Based on the request, the Metalform Unit reserves the right to vary the type and quantity based on its availability in the warehouses. The supply of Metalforms will be based on the approved schedule. The Contractor is not allowed to revise the approved metalform schedule in terms of type, quantity and timing. Revision may be granted by the SO Rep in cases where the revision by the Contractor is due to causes beyond his control. Notwithstanding the above, in a situation where the Metalform Unit is not able to supply in full the quantity of certain type(s) of Metalforms, the SO Rep reserves the right to vary the quantity and propose substitute with other equivalent type(s) or combination of metalforms. The SO Rep may direct the Contractor to supplement his requirement from his own sources if the Contractor has objected to the proposed substitution. There shall be no claims for extension of time or whatsoever compensation from the Contractor. To facilitate the planning on the usage of metalform and U-Clip, the Contractor shall feedback to SO Rep on the estimated maximum total quantities of each type of metalforms and U-clips required for each block including MSCP within 2 months after the commencement of the Contract.

5.7

DELIVERY OF FORMWORK The Contractor shall bear all the cost of transportation of the Metalforms from the Metalform Unit's Warehouse or the Workshops to the Site and return the Metalforms to the Metalform Unit's Warehouse or the Workshops at the end of the hiring period, together with a list of the Metalform items hired. Any missing items shall be listed separately. During the delivery of the Metalforms to the Site, the Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the cost of loading, unloading, on-site handling and transportation, arranging, stacking and storing of the Metalforms. Unless notification in writing to the contrary is received by the SO Rep from the Contractor within one week of the Metalforms being delivered to the Site, the Metalforms shall be deemed to be in good order in accordance with the Terms of Contract and to the Contractor's satisfaction.



USE OF METALFORMS The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe-keeping of the Metalforms and use in a workmanlike manner and return on completion of the hiring period according to the returning schedule. The Metalforms shall not be abused ie. not used in its intended manner, for eg. as bracing or propping of formwork, as walking or working platform. The decision of the SO Rep in this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The Contractor shall be charged for the damage of the Metalforms arising from such abuse, based on the latest Employer's purchase prices. The Metalforms shall be used only at the site as stated in the Delivery Orders. No Metalform shall be allowed to be transferred to another worksite unless prior written approval is obtained from the SO Rep. The Contractor shall remove damaged metalforms and substitute with good ones from the Metalform Unit as and when directed by the SO Rep during construction. The Contractor shall use, for each casting of concrete, form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall bear the cost of timber, form ties, form tie holders, plastic cones, hooks, bolts, nuts, washers, anchor bolts & form bracing and propping or any other tools and accessories he may use in conjunction with the use of the Metalforms. The use of such accessories shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Employer accepts no liability or responsibility for any consequential loss or damage due to or arising from the usage of the Metalforms or through non-arrival arising from accident during loading and unloading or transporting of the Metalforms. The Contractor shall fully and completely indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims by any person whatsoever from injury to person or property caused by or in connection with or arising out of the use of Metalforms and in respect of all costs and charges in connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the cost of building a raised timber platform and tarpaulin covers or equivalent for the safe-keeping and storage of the Metalforms at the Site.

5.9

PROCEDURE FOR THE RETURN OF METALFORMS The Contractor shall comply strictly with the procedures for the return of Metalforms specified hereunder : (a)

Submit returning schedule and quantities to the Employer's Metalform Unit on a per building block basis within 3 weeks from the last date of casting of main roof.

(b)

The Metalforms and accessories for the block (excluding the formwork for water-tank, roof-fascia, pitched roof etc. which are to be cast after the main roof) shall be fully returned within 1.5 months from the last date of casting of main roof; failing which, the SO Rep may treat part or whole of the relevant unreturned metalforms as lost. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.

(c)

The remaining Metalforms and accessories for the block shall then be returned within 1 month from the last date of casting for the building block; failing which the SO Rep may take the action as specified in (b) above.

(d)

All Metalforms shall be lowered down carefully by mechanical means and no dumping or rough handling is allowed.

(e)

Metalforms returned to the Employer's Workshops shall be packed and strapped in neat bundles of similar sizes and placed on pallets at the Contractor's own expense for easy unloading using forklift. The Contractor shall mark the Metalform with a strip of paint of 100mm width. The colour code to be used can be obtained from the Metalform Unit. Sizes of the pallets shall be in accordance with the instructions of the SO Rep.

(f)

At the receiving Workshops, the Employer's representative shall fill up the metalforms delivery form in triplicate.



5.10

PROCEDURE FOR THE RETURN OF METALFORMS (CONT’D) (g)

Any amendment or alteration on the delivery form shall be countersigned by the Contractor and the Employer's representative at the receiving ends.

(h)

Metalforms returned to the Workshops which are found to be irreparable will be considered as damaged. An actual counting of such metalforms at the Workshops shall be witnessed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that he or his representative is present at the time and place so directed by the SO Rep, otherwise, the SO Rep reserves the right to destroy or write-off these damaged Metalforms at no compensation whatsoever to the Contractor.

CLEANING, SERVICING & REPAIR OF FORMWORK The Contractor shall return all the metalforms and the related accessories, as directed by the SO Rep to the Workshops for cleaning, servicing and repair after the completion of the use of the metalforms. The Contractor shall be charged according to the following rates for cleaning, servicing and repair : Items

Rate

(1)

Flat Forms

$ 6.40 per m²

(2)

Inner Corner Forms

$ 6.40 per m²

(3)

L, S-shaped Forms

$ 7.70 per m²

} } Based on surface area in contact } with concrete } }

(4)

Corner Angle Form

$ 7.20 per m²

Based on gross area

The Contractor shall not pay any monies directly to any of the Workshops. The costs for cleaning, servicing and repair shall be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Metalforms shall be considered as damaged beyond repair, for example; if they are twisted, severely bent or crushed. The decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The Contractor shall also be charged according to the provisions as specified under Clause 5.3 "Hire Rates, Charges & Payment" for such Metalforms. The SO Rep reserves the right to destroy or write-off these damaged Metalforms at no compensation to the Contractor.

Section 6/.....


Bldg Spec Page 6-1 SECTION 6 SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION

6.1

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS

6.1.1

Area Of Usage Precast concrete components shall be used in areas as shown in the Drawings.

6.1.2

Surface Finishes External surface treatments or finishes of the precast concrete components shall be approved by the SO Rep.

6.1.3

Suppliers The precast concrete components shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com. The Contractor shall submit the names of his suppliers, the written contractual agreements between themselves and the suppliers and the quantities to be supplied by each supplier for the precast concrete components within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The written contractual agreement submitted shall include the detailed breakdown of precast component prices. The Contractor shall not be permitted to change his suppliers without the written consent of the SO Rep.

6.1.4

Safety Measures For Precast Transportation For the precast supply from the Contractor’s appointed sources, the Contractor shall obtain the approval from the relevant authorities as and when necessary for precast transportation. The Contractor shall comply with prevailing traffic regulations and prevent damage to public roads, overhead structures, trees, lamp posts, sign boards, decorations, cables and road related facilities in the precast transportation. The Contractor shall carry out risk assessment and analysis complying with the Workplace Safety and Health (WSH) Act and Regulations for the work procedures related to precast transportation. In this regard, the Contractor shall submit a Safety Manual on precast transportation, which shall include but not limited to the following key activities, for SO Rep’s approval: (a)

Securing of Precast Components The Safety Manual shall include the method to secure precast components on trailer. Trade demonstrations shall be conducted and photographs shall be provided to supervisors and loading workers for better understanding. For precast components to be delivered in horizontal position, sling belts and stoppers shall be provided on the trailer to prevent slipping and toppling of precast components. For precast components to be delivered in vertical position, if galvanised wires and chain block are used, the Safety Manual shall indicate clearly the type and size of wire, type of chain block and the tying method. The Contractor shall provide secondary securing method using chain or sling belt to supplement galvanised wires and chain block if necessary. For trailer mounted with steel frames, the Contractor shall ensure steel frames and the connections to trailers are sound for delivery purpose. The Safety Manual shall include a system of regular checks on the conditions of the steel frames.



Safety Measures For Precast Transportation (b)

(Cont’d)

Loading on Trailer The Contractor shall specify in Safety Manual to avoid over-loading of precast components on trailer. The overall height from ground to the highest point on trailer shall be checked to ensure compliance with the prevailing traffic regulations. In addition, for trailer with steel frame, load balancing of precast components at two sides of trailer shall be checked before leaving the precast factory. For non-compliance found, the driver shall be informed and remedial actions shall be taken before leaving the precast factory.

(c)

Transportation The Contractor shall specify in the Safety Manual that the driver should observe the speed limit and prevailing regulations during the precast transportation. The driving experience of drivers employed for precast transportation shall be specified where necessary to exclude inexperience driver from precast transportation. Continuing road safety education and appropriate disciplinary actions for non-compliances shall also be included in the manual to prevent speeding during transportation. The Contractor shall ensure the transportation fleet like prime-movers and trailers are wellmaintained. The routine maintenance shall include periodic regulatory inspection by the authorities, daily checks by driver on brakes, signal, lighting, tyres. The timber platform shall be in safe condition for the loading workers and the trailer shall be free from loose debris for precast transportation.

6.2

STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

6.2.1

Design Structural precast concrete components shall be designed in accordance with CP 65. The Contractor may propose alternative design subject to the written approval of the SO Rep. Joints, connections and sealants shall be designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and fire so as to provide continued water and weather tightness and structural integrity of the buildings. The positions and capacities of all lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete components shall be carefully considered for all loads induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation and erection. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design the lifting and erection inserts, lifting hooks and erection devices. Submit precasting and erection techniques for precast concrete components including structural calculations and details for the lifting and erection devices. Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar-packed or concreted, submit respective mix design for approval by the SO Rep and carry out tests in the mix design in accordance with appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Method of installations adopted shall ensure that the joints and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted. Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. The SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to apply special coatings or epoxy bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast concrete components, be it welded, bolted, dowelled, grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.




6.2.2

Drawings

(CONT’D)

Submit the following drawings for the approval of the SO Rep within one month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep : (A)

Shop Drawings (a)

Precast Concrete Components With Shop Drawings Where in the case shop Drawings (denoted by the words "shop drawings" in the drawing title) for precast concrete components are incorporated in the Drawings, the Contractor need not submit shop drawings for approval. Notwithstanding the incorporation of such shop Drawings in the Drawings, the Contractor shall be required to check and/or ensure the following :

(b)

(i)

That the details for such precast concrete components are adequate and suitable for the Works and that there is no discrepancy. The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all costs and expenses for all rejections, reinstatements and reproductions of such precast concrete components directly and/or indirectly resulting from and/or out of any inadequacy, unsuitability and discrepancy in the Drawings;

(ii)

That the handling techniques for precasting, demoulding, storage and transportation adopted shall not over-stress such precast concrete components. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his own cost and expense, any additional steel reinforcement bars required for his handling techniques to ensure that such precast concrete components are not damaged or over-stressed during handling;

(iii)

Ensure the adequacy and suitability of the size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and any additional reinforcement bars required for handling and erection purposes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the production work;

(iv)

That the minimum concrete strength of precast concrete components required for handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection are checked and submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the production work.

Precast Concrete Components Without Shop Drawings Where in the case shop drawings for precast concrete components are not incorporated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings for such precast concrete components for approval by the SO Rep. The shop drawings shall include the following details :

(B)

(i)

The size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and reinforcement details;

(ii)

The handling techniques for precasting, storage and transportation;

(iii)

The minimum concrete strength for precast concrete components required for handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection.

Mould Drawings Mould drawings showing :


(i)

Surface treatment of moulds for casting and lifting operation.

(ii)

Method of concrete consolidation and compaction such as external vibration, internal vibration, table vibration, adjusted slump and mix method.

(iii)

Method of curing, demoulding and storage of precast concrete components.



6.2.2

Drawings (Cont'd) (C)

(CONT’D)

Erection Drawings Erection drawings showing :

(D)

(i)

Erection sequences and handling requirements.

(ii)

Calculation and position and sizes of backers/shims, temporary props, bracings and their installation method clearly shown.

(iii)

Calculation and details of method of positioning and supporting unconnected precast concrete components including temporary bracings, struts and props.

Waterproofing Joint Drawings Waterproofing joint drawings showing procedure and sequence of installation of sealants on the Site in their relation to erection sequence and handling requirements.

6.3

MANUFACTURING

6.3.1

Concrete Batching Plant The Precaster shall maintain the concrete batching plant in good working order at all times. The concrete batching plant shall be calibrated once in every six (6) months by an accredited laboratory in accordance with SS289. Any errors found during calibration shall be rectified immediately. Proper documentation and records shall be kept in the office in precast plant for inspection by the SO Rep upon request.

6.3.2

Shop Drawings Precast concrete components shall be produced in accordance with approved structural Drawings. Shop drawings shall be based upon the structural Drawings and shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval as per sub-clause 6.2.2 "Drawings".

6.3.3

Moulds Check and ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the precast concrete components to be produced. The moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to produce the casting tolerances and finishes specified. Rubber seal or equivalent shall be used in all horizontal and vertical mould joints to prevent leakage of mortar or cement paste. Moulds shall be designed to prevent damage to concrete from : (a)

restraint as the concrete shrinks;

(b)

the stripping operation when the precast components are lifted from the mould; or

(c)

dimensional changes due to demoulding of prestressed components.

High quality rubber mat shall be used for carrying the tiles of precast components with tile finish.



MANUFACTURING

(CONT’D)

6.3.4

Manufacturing Requirements Submit proposals for marking identification and date of casting of each precast concrete component for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the commencement of manufacturing. Surface finish requirements shall be consistent with the standard achieved by the use of high quality concrete and properly designed forms or moulds having rigid and smooth surfaces. Such surface finishes including surface airholes shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where tile finish is specified, check and ensure uniform width and depth of the groove between the tiles which shall be on the same plane. Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, produce at least one sample of each type of precast concrete component for approval by the SO Rep. The approved sample panel shall be displayed at the precasting yard. The approved sample panel shall be used as the yardstick for the minimum standard and quality to be achieved for all precast panels. The SO Rep may at his absolute discretion require more sample panels to be produced for his approval. Check and ensure that the approved sample panels are not damaged on display. The Contractor shall provide remedial work at his own costs and expenses to precast concrete components that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross variation from the specified finish may cause rejection of the precast concrete components and the Contractor shall replace the precast concrete components. Allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses, notches, embedded metal work or any other items affecting the precast concrete components involved. All reinforcements shall be positioned in the moulds with the prescribed concrete covers as shown on the Structural Drawings. Approval shall be sought from the SO Rep if such work cannot be incorporated into the precast concrete components. Aluminium window frames, may either be installed on site or cast-in together with the precast concrete components. In all cases the aluminium window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious material by wrapping with self adhesive protective tape. There shall be adequate lapping over the joints of two protective tapes. The protective tapes shall completely adhere to the frame and provide protection to it. In the case of aluminium window frame being installed on site, check and ensure:

6.3.5

(i)

the safety and integrity of the aluminium window frame and that no part of the precast concrete is hacked;

(ii)

the watertightness between the aluminium window frame and precast concrete component.

Manufacturing Tolerances Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall be as follows unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep : (a)

Position tolerances for cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown on approved Drawings: Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves etc Flashing relets, at edge of panel Reglets for glazing gaskets Groove width for glazing gaskets Electrical outlets

(b)

: : : : :

±10mm ±6mm ±3mm ±2mm ±13mm

Position tolerances for placement of reinforcement : Reinforcing bars and meshes shall be located within 12mm of the position as shown on the approved shop Drawings, but in casting, no reinforcement shall encroach on the specified minimum cover.



MANUFACTURING

6.3.5

Manufacturing Tolerances (Cont'd) (c)

(CONT’D)

For casting tolerances, the overall height and width measured at the face adjacent to the mould when cast shall be as follows : 3m or under

:

±3mm

> 3m to 6m

: :

+3mm -5mm

> 6m to 9m

: :

+3mm -6mm

Each additional 3m

:

Angular deviation of plane

:

+2mm per 150mm depth of side mould

Thickness

: :

+6mm -3mm

Openings (cast within one member)

:

+6mm

Out of square (difference in length of two diagonal measurements)

:

3mm per 3m or 6mm total whichever is greater

±2mm per 3m

The casting tolerances specified above shall be compatible with the installation requirements of precast concrete components, which may have attachment of sash, door frames, window frames, louvres sunshades and other materials. (d)

6.3.6

For after casting tolerances, the bowing and warpage shall be as follows: Without intermediate support dimension

:

1 panel 240

With intermediate support dimension

:

1 panel 360

Inspection Of Manufacturing The SO Rep shall have the discretion to inspect the manufacturing plant and the precast concrete components at all times. If the inspection is not conducted at the plant, this shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility in manufacturing an acceptable product, and the SO Rep shall at his liberty reject any precast concrete components on the Site not complying with the design requirements even though no plant inspection has been conducted.

6.4

HANDLING The precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with their shapes and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. Precast concrete components shall be lifted only at appropriate points shown on the production and erection Drawings. Check and allow for : (a) (b) (c) (d)

adequacy of design reinforcement to resist handling stresses; provision of additional reinforcement if required; exact number, size and location of lifting inserts or other devices; and Proper supports and support locations for storage and transportation.

Allow for developing handling techniques to ensure that all precast concrete components are successfully fabricated, delivered and installed without causing structural damage, detrimental cracking, architectural impairment, or permanent distortion.



STORAGE As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall store all precast components at the area to be occupied by the multi-storey carpark/garage. After the construction of the foundations and ground beams of the multi-storey carpark/garage, the area shall be backfilled for the temporary storage of precast components. However, construction for Works to the electrical substation (if applicable) can proceed. The Contractor shall ensure that the storage of the precast components shall not cause any damage to the constructed pile caps, column stumps and ground beams. Before recommencing construction Works to the multi-storey carpark/garage, the Contractor shall verify the position and alignment of the column stumps. Any rectification work shall be done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's cost and expense. Notwithstanding the preceding requirements, the multi-storey carpark/garage and electrical substation (if applicable) shall be Substantially Completed within the Time for Completion. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in compliance with the requirements specified in this clause. The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for handling of the stored precast components. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit well-organised storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast components. No precast component shall be placed on the ground. They shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.

6.6

ERECTION

6.6.1

Inspection Of Precast Concrete Components All precast concrete components shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before erection and after installation. Any unauthorised erection or installation work may be rejected and necessary action taken against the Contractor. Prepare, install and check that the precast components are within the specified erection tolerances prior to calling for inspection and approval by the SO Rep. After the inspection of erected precast components, the SO Rep shall be at liberty to reject any precast components on the Site not complying with the design or specification requirements. No permanent jointing or connection between a precast concrete component and other precast concrete components or in-situ structures shall be carried out without the prior approval of the SO Rep.

6.6.2

Quality Control Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete components should be employed. Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and damage to built-in items. Only minor chipping and spalling may be repaired by patching up at the Site after installation, provided this is done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Check and ensure the accuracy of location of all bearing surfaces and all anchorages for precast concrete components. Any deviations from the Structural Drawings noted shall be corrected prior to the start of erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked as to level, line and grade. Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their location shall be checked for compliance with the location as specified in the Structural or Approved Workshop Drawings. Anchorage length and exposed length of lifting hooks shall be checked for compliance with that specified in the design. The inserts or lifting hooks shall be properly secured before casting. If slings are used, the precast concrete components shall be marked so that the slings are placed at the proper locations. Field conditions shall be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete components and joint sealants installed satisfy design or specification requirements and are within the specified erection tolerances. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the precast concrete components shall be cleaned and repaired after installation.


Bldg Spec Page 6-8

6.6

ERECTION

6.6.2

Quality Control (Cont'd)

(CONT'D)

Ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the precast concrete components are on the Site and bracing or props shall be provided to maintain the required position, stability and alignment of precast concrete components prior to permanent jointing or connection. Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately positioned within the erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept correctly aligned and positioned, and uniform joint width shall be maintained as erection progresses. Adjustments or changes in connections, which could induce additional stresses shall be reviewed and approved by the SO Rep. Only qualified welders shall be employed for welded connections. . 6.6.3

Defect And Repair Ensure that no defective precast concrete component shall be delivered. The decision by the SO Rep to reject defective precast concrete components shall be final. The Contractor shall replace the rejected precast concrete components at his own costs and expenses. The rejection criteria shall be made on engineering basis as well as visual appearances. Damaged precast components shall be either patched up or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Method of repairs shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the commencement of repairing work. Major repairs should not be attempted until an engineering evaluation is made to determine whether the precast component will be structurally sound. In the case where localised defective tiles are detected, such defective tiles shall be replaced in accordance with the following suggested method: Two 1mm diameter copper wires shall be glued to the reverse side of each tile with epoxy resin and left to set. Similarly, copper wires shall be fixed 25mm into the concrete surface with epoxy resin. Mortar or cement paste shall then be applied. The tiles shall be tied to the concrete and set in place. In-situ pull out test shall be conducted as and when directed by the SO Rep. All repaired precast concrete component shall be architecturally and structurally acceptable to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

6.6.4

Erection Tolerance For correct performance and appearance of the structures, check and ensure that the precast components are located in the centre of their theoretical location on the building and adjusted to accommodate adjacent components, proper joint width, and alignment with adjacent precast or in-situ members. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the permissible erection tolerances shall be as follows : (a)

(b)

Distance Between Edge Of Panels At Joint For panels with dimensions (normal to the joint) up to 6m

:

±5mm

For each 3m increment in excess of 6m

:

±2mm

: : :

½mm 2mm 9mm

Joint Taper (Panel Edges Not Parallel) Per linear 300mm of joint Minimum allowable Maximum for entire length

(c)

Panel Alignment Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints : Jog in alignment of matching edges : 3mm


3mm


ERECTION

6.6.4

Erection Tolerance (Cont'd) (d)

(CONT'D)

Location Of Openings In precast concrete components

(e)

±6mm

: : :

±40mm ±20mm ±10mm

Verticality Of Wall Entire height of building 1st to 4th floor Each storey height

(f)

:

Parapet Alignment At Access Balcony Deviation in plan from straight line parallel to specified linear building line : Any interval less than 6m Any 50m length

: :

±1mm per metre ±25mm

: :

±5mm ±25mm

Coping level : Any interval less than 6m Any 50m length (g)

Verticality Of Column Verticality tolerance for columns shall be similar to that for walls.

(h)

Column Alignment At 1st Storey In between columns up to 6m apart : Entire length of building :

6.7

±10mm ±30mm

PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS Provide and install precast prestressed concrete planks as shown : (a)

Design Criteria And Materials For Precast Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications The design criteria and materials for precast prestressed concrete planks shall be : Low slump concrete shall be used for the production of precast prestressed concrete plank. The strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 40 N per mm², and at transfer shall not be less than 25 N per mm². The use of calcium chloride, ions or other salts is strictly prohibited. The minimum grade of concrete for the cast-in-situ structural topping shall be 40 N per mm². Submit for approval of the SO Rep, the joint details as well as the allowable strands slippage.

(b)

Manufacturing Tolerances For Precast Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications The manufacturing tolerances shall be as follows :


(i)

Length

: +3mm

(ii)

Cross-sectional dimensions (width or depth)

: ±1mm

(iii)

Flange thickness

: ±1mm

(iv)

Horizontal alignment (sweep)

: 1.25mm or 1/1,000th of overall length, whichever is greater


PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (b)

(c)

(d)

(CONT'D)

Manufacturing Tolerances For Precast Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications (Cont’d) (v)

Position of anchors and inserts

: +2.5mm of centre line location shown on the Drawings

(vi)

Position of strands

: ±2mm

(vii)

End squareness

: ±3mm

(viii)

Blockouts

: ±10mm of centre-line location as shown in the Drawings.

(ix)

Maximum camber deviation allowed

: ±5mm from designed camber

(x)

Difference in soffit level at mid-span between adjacent members or between a precast prestressed concrete plank and an adjacent reinforced concrete slab after installation shall not be more than 3mm.

(xi)

Position of reinforcement designed

: ±10mm primarily for connections

(xii)

Position of handling device

: ±20mm

The following requirements shall be complied with : (i)

Standard underside shall be smooth, dense with no surface holes.

(ii)

Standard top side can have minor chips and spalls but no major imperfections, honeycomb or Defect shall be allowed. The top surface shall be such that it is suitable for composite action with cast-in-situ structural topping.

(iii)

Exposed vertical ends shall be sawn or formed with smooth finish.

(iv)

Major openings or holes shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings. These and any other smaller openings made in the field shall be to the approval of the SO Rep.

(v)

Patching-up will be acceptable provided the structural adequacy of the product and the final appearance are not impaired. Prior to any patching-up work, submit proposal for the execution of such work for approval by the SO Rep. In any event, all patching up work shall be carried out to the approval of the SO Rep.

(vi)

Cast-in structural inserts, bolts and plates as detailed in the Drawings.

Product Delivery, Storage And Handling (Factory) Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, the Contractor shall comply with the following:

BLDG12/S06.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(i)

Precast prestressed concrete plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing, stockpiling, transporting and erection operation only at the lifting or supporting points, or both, as shown in the Drawings or shop Drawings and with approved lifting devices which shall have a minimum safety factor of 3.

(ii)

All transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable equipment and methods and by experienced personnel.

(iii)

All precast prestressed units shall be stored off ground.

(iv)

All precast prestressed units shall be so placed that identification marks can be read.

(v)

Precast prestressed members shall be so stacked that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged.

(vi)

The use of upper member of a stacked tier as storage area for shorter length of precast members or heavy equipment is strictly prohibited.


PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (e)

(CONT'D)

Erection Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, their erection shall comply with the following :

6.8

(i)

Precast members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided for such purposes. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided and they shall have a minimum load factor of 2.0 times the dead load plus construction loads.

(ii)

Members shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved shop drawings. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably levelled out by jacking, loading or any other feasible methods acceptable to the SO Rep.

(iii)

Field welding shall be carried out by qualified welders using equipment and materials compatible to the base materials.

(iv)

Precast prestressed concrete members may be drilled or 'shot', provided no contact is made with the prestressing strands. Any spalling resulting therefrom shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(v)

Final inspection and acceptance of erected precast prestressed concrete members shall be made by the SO Rep to verify conformity with plans and the Specifications.

PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW CORE SLAB SPECIFICATIONS Provide and install precast prestressed hollow core slab as shown in the Drawings. The requirements for precast prestressed hollow core slab shall be the same as those specified for the precast prestressed concrete plank except for the following : (a)

Manufacturing Tolerance Position of void - Vertical Horizontal

(b)

6.9

: :

±3mm ±3mm

Erection (i)

Core plugs shall be inserted before erection.

(ii)

All ends of hollow core slabs shall be seated with approved concreting materials to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF SUPPLY AND ERECTION SCHEDULES Submit respective supply and erection schedules detailing the type and quantity of the precast concrete components to the SO Rep for approval as soon as the Site is handed over to the Contractor. Adhere strictly to the approved respective delivery and erection schedules.

6.10

MATERIALS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS All materials used in the precast concrete works shall be in accordance with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

6.11

STRUCTURAL PRECAST AND CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall apply for all structural precast and cast-in-situ Works.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS

6.12.1

Waterproofing And Sealant Materials For Joints (i)

General Requirements Batch testing of sealant compounds delivered to the Site shall be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any type of sealants if their performance is deemed to be unsatisfactory. The use of membranes and admixtures for grout, mortar or concrete for improving water and weather tightness may be approved by the SO Rep. All sealant materials used at public accessible areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc shall be protected with non-shrink mortar or grout. Liquid membranes, if used, shall have specified minimum thickness and width for water and weather tightness.

(ii)

Performance Of Waterproofing Materials Waterproofing materials for joints shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

(iii)

Application Of Sealant Materials Ensure that joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as to provide continued water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance. Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed to give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these shall conform to all applicable requirements as specified in the Specifications. Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun shall have a nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints. All compound smears, primers, solvents etc used in caulking and sealing work, shall be immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses.

(iv)

Joint Width And Sealant Depth After Installation The joint width shall depend on the dimension of the panels and its coefficient of expansion. The maximum joint widths and maximum expansions for the common sealants shall be :

Type of Sealant

Maximum Joint Width (mm)

Maximum Movement in Tension or Compression (%)

Butyl; Acrylic; One Part Polyurethane; Two Parts Polyurethane; One Part Polysulphide; Two Parts Polysulphide;

20 20 20 20 20 20

±10 ±15 to ±25 ±20 ±25 ±25 ±25

The normal design joint widths shall be 10, 14 or 15 as shown in the Structural Drawings. For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over 13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)



6.12.1

Waterproofing And Sealant Materials For Joints (v)


Sealant Backup Fillers Backup fillers shall be used in joints to control the depth of the sealant, to facilitate tooling of the sealant, and to serve as a bond breaker which prevents the bonding to the back of the joint. Acceptable backup materials shall be those which compress and respond to movements. These include the rod type of sponge materials such as foamed polyethylene, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber. The backup materials shall also be compatible and nonstaining to the selected sealants.

(vi)

Joint Preparation Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.

6.12.2

Water And Weather Tightness Test The joints in the superstructure shall be subjected to tests for water and weather-tightness. Internal floors shall be tested prior to any tiling work. Testing shall be conducted only when all pipes, trunking, etc have been installed and the penetrations sealed, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep. (i)

Method and Frequency of Testing Joints shall be tested with the method and frequency as described below: (a)

Structural Roof, Access Balcony Roof And Lift Motor Room Roof Water tightness test shall be carried out on all roofs with precast joints in accordance with Clause 4.32.2 "Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test".

(b)

External Walls For external walls, a continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint corresponding to 600 litres per hour from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m per second and a cone scatter of approximately 60 degrees held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface under test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 2 hours. The hose shall be placed with the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone will cover a vertical and two horizontal joints as shown in the Drawings. For external walls, the following tests shall be conducted for each building block: Building Height Up to 10 stories Up to 20 stories Up to 30 stories Up to 40 stories Up to 50 stories

Frequency of tests 5 tests for vertical joints, 5 tests for horizontal joints 10 tests for vertical joints, 10 tests for horizontal joints 15 tests for vertical joints, 15 tests for horizontal joints 20 tests for vertical joints, 20 tests for horizontal joints 25 tests for vertical joints, 25 tests for horizontal joints

These tests shall be carried out at any location as instructed by the SO Rep. Water shall not seep into any part of the building during the test. For each test which fails, two additional tests shall be carried out at joint locations as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)



6.12.2

(i)

(CONT’D)

Method and Frequency of Testing (Cont'd) (c)

Gable End Walls All gable end walls shall be tested by spraying water from the top of the walls at the topmost floor level for a duration of 2 hours. The hose shall be placed with the nozzle in line with the vertical joint at the top of the walls. Water shall not seep into any part of the building during the test.

(d)

Refuse Chute All refuse chutes shall be tested by spraying water from the top of refuse chutes. The water shall spray vertically downwards on all internal walls for a duration of 1 hour. No seepage of water from the joints shall be permitted during the test.

(e)

Floor Joints Of Precast Slabs Floor joints of concrete slabs using precast prestressed concrete plank and precast prestressed concrete hollow core slab with minimum 50mm in-situ concrete topping need not be tested. Floor joints of precast slabs using either precast prestressed (or non-prestressed) concrete plank or precast prestressed concrete hollow core slab without in-situ concrete topping or with concrete topping thickness less than 50mm shall be tested. The floors of those areas (or dwelling units) to be tested shall be flooded with water to a depth of 25mm for a period of one hour replenishing when necessary. The areas (or dwelling units) shall pass the test if no dampness or seepage from the dwelling units under test occurs in any adjoining areas (of dwelling units ) or common area during the test. Two units (or dwelling units) per floor shall be tested. The locations of these units (or dwelling units) to be tested shall be decided by the SO Rep. For each unit (or dwelling unit) that fails the water test, two additional units (or dwelling units) shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing.

(f)

Kitchen/Bathroom/Toilet Areas (1)

Carry out water test to the following items prior to any tiling work in accordance with the procedure described below : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

`

(2)

All joints between the floor slab and floor traps in the bathroom and kitchen; All joints between the branching off for water closet and floor slab; All floor joints between the precast slabs and walls in bathroom and kitchen; All floor joints between the precast slabs in bathroom and kitchen.

The gratings to floor traps in the bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 25mm depth of water at the highest level of the slab. The amount of water shall be maintained for four hours, replenishing when necessary during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks. Towards the end of this test, the water will be allowed to drain off. During this process there shall be no sign of chokage in the system.

6.12.2

(ii)

Water Test Failure In the event of failure of a test on any joint, the Contractor shall rectify the joint and repeat the test. This procedure shall be repeated until the tests on the joints comply fully with the passing criteria. Furthermore, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any waterproofing materials or joint details that perform unsatisfactorily during water tests at no cost to the Employer. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor be allowed to carry out his own water test without the presence of the SO Rep. All water test (specified or not specified) shall be witnessed and certified by the SO Rep as well as the Contractor's Representative.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


HOMOGENEOUS MODULAR CLINKER TILES Homogeneous modular clinker tiles as external wall/slope finishes shall be cast together with precast concrete components as shown in the Drawings.

6.13.1

Submission And Approval Of Samples Provide samples and patterns of clinker tiles to the SO Rep for approval prior to bulk ordering. Failure to provide the samples and/or patterns may render consignments of clinker tiles already received by the Contractor liable to rejection. Check and ensure that the samples and/or patterns submitted are representative of the clinker tiles to be provided.

6.13.2

Inspection And Rejection The SO Rep shall have the power to inspect, examine, check and test the clinker tiles either on the Site or at any factory, workshop or other place where the clinker tiles are being installed, or stored. The Contractor shall arrange to provide all such facilities and cooperation at his own cost and expense as the SO Rep may require in these respects. All consignments of clinker tiles supplied shall be subject to inspection by the SO Rep. Any clinker tiles which do not comply with the requirements of the Specification and the samples and/or patterns submitted by the Contractor shall be rejected. Under such case, the Contractor shall within a reasonable time to be decided by the SO Rep, replace such rejected clinker tiles with clinker tiles that comply fully with the Specifications. The decision of the Superintending Officer shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. Prior to the certification of Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall replace all damaged clinker tiles.

6.13.3

Quality Assurance Check and ensure that the quality of clinker tiles shall comply with SS 301. Provide all means to protect the clinker tile materials before, during and after installation : (a)

Application Of Cement/Sand Mortar & Clinker Tiles The tiles shall be laid on to the prepared rubber mould with the back pattern of the tile facing up in accordance with the tile pattern layout indicated in the architectural Drawings. The quality of the rubber mould shall be such that it can secure the tiles firmly in place and prevent displacement of the tiles during concreting. Prior to pouring the concrete over the entire arrangement of the tiles, the tiles shall be cleaned of deleterious materials that will affect adversely the bonding strength between the tile and the hardened concrete. The wet concrete to be used shall be mixed with water reducing agent strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The water reducing agent shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its use. Any concreting work carried out prior to approval by the SO Rep shall be rejected.

(b)

Workmanship And Surface Finish Clinker tiles to be used on the external wall faces of the precast concrete components shall be as shown in the Drawings. The colour of the clinker tiles shall be as specified in the Drawings. The clinker tiles shall be free from cracks, crazing, voids, warpage, stones or particles of lime as would affect its safe use and its general appearance. The acceptable texture and uniformity of colour of clinker tiles shall be decided by the SO Rep. When directed by the SO Rep, submit the technical information or reports of clinker tiles to be used.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


HOMOGENEOUS MODULAR CLINKER TILES

6.13.3

Quality Assurance (c)

(CONT’D)

(Cont'd)

Technical Specification Unless otherwise specified, all tests shall be conducted by PSB, SAC-SINGLAS or other approved laboratory in accordance with SS 301. The total number of test specimens required for testing items (i) to (iv) specified below shall be 10. (i)

Dimensional Tolerances Dimensions and their tolerances shall be as follows :

(ii)

Length

:

190mm nominal ±1% tolerance

Width

:

90mm nominal ±1% tolerance

Thickness

:

12mm minimum, the average thickness of each specimen shall not deviate more than ±10% from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.

Straightness Of Sides The maximum deviation from straightness, referred to the length of the side, shall not exceed 0.5%.

(iii)

Rectangularity The maximum deviation from rectangularity of each specimen shall not exceed 1.8% of the nominal dimension.

(iv)

Flatness Of Surface Centre curvature and warpage of the surface shall not exceed 0.5% of the length of the corresponding diagonal. The maximum edge curvature of each specimen shall not exceed 0.5% of the nominal dimension.

(v)

Surface Condition Of Clinker Tiles The products when supplied shall be free from objectional surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes and crazes. The test specimens shall form an area of at least 1 m² with a minimum of 30 tiles.

(vi)

Water Absorption The water absorption capacity on average shall not exceed 3% by weight. Number of test specimens shall be 10.

(vii)

Modulus Of Rupture The average value for modulus of rupture shall be at least 20 N per mm² and minimum single value shall be 17 N per mm². Number of test specimens shall be 7.

(viii)

Colourfastness And Lightfastness The colour of the clinker tiles shall be light-fast. No colour change shall be detectable after exposure to ultra violet radiation for 28 days. Number of test specimens shall be 5.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)


HOMOGENEOUS MODULAR CLINKER TILES

6.13.3

Quality Assurance (c)

(CONT’D)

(Cont'd)

Technical Specification (Cont'd) (ix)

Acid Resistance And Alkali Resistance Macroscopic surface examination shall not reveal any visible change for acid resistance and alkali resistance tests. Number of test specimens shall be 5 for each solution.

(x)

Test For Adhesion Bond Strength Between Clinker Tiles And Concrete The test shall include both shear adhesion strength and tensile adhesion strength. 5 test specimens shall be sampled for each test. Test methods and procedures of shear adhesion strength shall comply with ASTM C482-78 except for preparation of test samples. For preparation of test samples, clinker tiles shall be cut to 100mm x 90mm and placed in the base of the moulds with the back pattern of the tiles facing upwards followed by the pouring of wet concrete of similar concrete mix and water reducing agent to be used for the production of the precast concrete components. The load shall be applied perpendicular to the groove line. The characteristic shear adhesion strength at 7 days shall not be less than 2 N per mm². Tensile adhesive strength shall be conducted by PSB, SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory or other approved laboratory. The mean tensile adhesion strength at 7 days of each specimen shall not be less than 0.4 N per mm².

6.13.4

Submission Of Test Certificates For Approval Submit test certificates by SAC - SINGLAS accredited laboratory to cover the following items : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j)

Dimensional Tolerances Straightness of Sides Rectangularity Flatness of Surface Surface Condition of Clinker Tiles Water Absorption Modulus of Rupture Colourfastness and Lightfastness Acid Resistance and Alkali Resistance Test for Adhesion Bond Strength Between Clinker Tiles and Concrete.

The test certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep prior to bulk ordering. In addition, the Contractor shall send the clinker tiles for testing as and when required by the SO Rep. At the time of receiving clinker tiles from the supplier, the Contractor shall check and satisfy himself that the clinker tiles comply with this Specifications, and, if so requested by the SO Rep, shall submit a certificate issued by the manufacturer that the clinker tiles as supplied in the shipment are of the best quality of its kind. 6.14

PRECAST FERROCEMENT SUNBREAKERS

6.14.1

General Unless otherwise specified, the requirements specified in Clauses 6.1 to 6.6 (inclusive), 6.9 to 6.11 (inclusive) and 6.13 including all sub-clauses under them shall be applicable to this Clause including all sub-clauses under it.

6.14.2

Scope Provide and install precast ferrocement sunbreakers complete with fixing accessories to the locations as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)



6.14.3

Shop Drawings

(CONT’D)

All structural and architectural drawings on this provision shall only serve as a guide. Prepare and submit workshop drawings on all relevant details including :

6.14.4

(a)

Reinforcement detail of sunbreaker panels in elevations and sections.

(b)

Fixing and connection details.

(c)

Necessary steel bolts, hooks or other approved materials required for handling and erection purposes. The size and location of these materials shall be clearly indicated in the details.

Materials (Precast Ferrocement Sunbreakers) (a)

Cement Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement"

(b)

Fine Aggregates Fine aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".

(c)

Water Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".

(d)

Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all subclauses under it. In addition, all welded mesh and steel bar used shall be galvanised in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. 1.5mm diameter at 25mm spacing wire mesh shall be galvanised with zinc coating of 325 g per m² and 250 g per m2 minimum for average coating and local coating shall have minimum proof stress of 300 N per mm².

(e)

Admixtures Admixtures shall be as specified in Clause 4.4 "Admixtures".

6.14.5

Source Of Material The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved by the SO Rep.

6.14.6

Technical Specifications (a)

Mix Design The ferrocement sunbreaker panels shall be cast from a mix design which satisfy the following requirements : (i)

minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2.

(ii)

maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45.

(iii)

air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2,200 kg per m³.

(iv)

28 days average cube strength from three test cubes shall be not less than 40 N per mm².

The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's instruction. Before commencing the manufacture of precast ferrocement sunbreaker, submit a proposed mix design to the SO Rep for approval. BLDG12/S06.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)



6.14.6

Technical Specifications (b)

(Cont’d)

Other Properties (i)

Initial Surface Absorption Test (ISAT) shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. The hardened panel shall have ISAT value less than that stipulated below : Time (min) ISAT Value (ml/m²/s)

(c)

(CONT’D)

10

30

60

0.100

0.055

0.035

(ii)

Carbonation depth of hardened panel at installation shall be less than 3mm.

(iii)

Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover measurement of less than 5mm, but not less than 3mm.

Finishes The panel shall be cast on a steel base mould with the finish surface cast-face down. The finish surface is the external surface of the sunbreaker elevation where the tile and motifs are located.

(d)

Dimensional Tolerances All tolerances shall be as specified in sub-clauses 6.3.5 "Manufacturing Tolerances" and 6.6.4 "Erection Tolerance".

6.14.7

Manufacturing Process The panel shall be cast flat on a steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the top surface shall be steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be galvanised and adequately supported with approved spacers. After setting and demoulding, the panels shall be marked and neatly stored with easy access and visibility to every piece. All panels must be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method, duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing. Prior to commencement of the production, at least one sample of the panels shall be produced, erected and installed at site for the approval of the SO Rep. Make adjustments to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep. Maintain a record of daily work progress on a proper drawing showing where panels of a particular date of manufacture have been installed.

6.14.8

Quality Assurance Works For Precast Ferrocement Sunbreakers For precast ferrocement sunbreakers, the requirements for inspection and testing, sampling rate and passing criteria shall comply with those requirements for Ferrocement Roof Slabs as specified in Section 14 "Concrete Flat Roof" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 6-20

6.15

PRECAST FACADES WITH CAST-IN WINDOW FRAME

6.15.1

Protection Of Cast-In Window Frames The Contractor shall ensure that cast-in window frames are protected from damage before delivery to precast plant. Cast-in window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout, grease, deleterious materials and surface scratch with quality translucent self-adhesive tape of light colour for inspection of window frame quality at precast plant prior to casting, as well as for inspection at site upon the delivery of precast facades. The self-adhesive tape shall be made of durable material that could withstand the weathering. The protective tape shall not stain or stick to the aluminum surface, or leave a sticky surface upon the removal. The Contractor shall ensure that the wrapping with self-adhesive tape is robust to withstand handling during casting, storage and transportation to site. The adhesive tape shall be intact with cast-in window frame along the edges with no visible gaps. The corners of cast-in window frames and intersections of window frame members shall be adequately wrapped with sufficient laps and returns to prevent ingress of concrete grout during casting. All fastening screws, joints and gaps that are in contact with the wet concrete shall be sealed adequately to prevent grout ingress during casting. Cast-in window frames with torn, loose wrappings, and frames with visible gaps at edges that will be in contact with wet concrete shall not be used for casting. The Contractor shall make good or replace the poorly protected window frames at his own costs and expenses.

6.15.2

Quality Control At Window Factory The Contractor shall ensure that adequate quality assurance measures are in place in the production and the assembly of cast-in window frames. The quality assurance checks on surface defects such as dent, scratch and other defects such as dimension out of the manufacturing tolerances, warp, twist, skew, track misalignment, shall be conducted at the window factory before the wrapping up with the protective tape. A label / sticker shall be provided at one location on the internal face of cast-in window frame to indicate the product serial number, window marking (including its orientation such as top, left or right-hand side, if applicable) on each cast-in window frame. This to facilitate down-stream traceability and inspections, and prevent mistake in the placement of window frame in precast production. For sliding window, the Contractor shall provide internal bracing to control the sagging of horizontal aluminum members adjacent to the window opening during handling and precast production process. The cost for measures taken to enhance the window identification, control the alignment of aluminum members during handling and for quality assurance in precast production is deemed to have been included in the tender sum.

6.15.3

Quality Control At Precast Plant

6.15.3.1

Inspection Upon The Delivery Of Cast-In Window Frames The Contractor shall ensure that cast-in window frames delivered to precast plant are of good quality at the point of receiving. The inspections at precast plant shall include, but not limited to inspections on the workmanship of protective wrapping, dimension and surface defects such as dents and scratches.

6.15.3.2

Storage Of Cast-In Window Frames Cast-in window frames shall be stored at a sheltered yard to prevent deterioration of protection system due to weathering. The storage shall be demarcated, barricaded and raised to prevent soiling, contacting with deleterious materials and accidental damage.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)



6.15.3.3

Care And Protection During Casting And Transportation

(CONT’D)

The Contractor shall ensure cast-in window frames are handled with care during the production process. At least an experienced engineer, supervisor and a team of skilled workers shall be assigned for the production of precast facades with cast-in window frame, repair and delivery. Any part of cast-in window frames which is in direct contact with the dummy frames, bracings and stoppers of the mould system, additional protective material shall be provided to prevent any premature damage to the cast-in window frames. Additional protection may be needed to prevent grout leakage at the corners. To avoid excessive staining due to dropping of fresh concrete, protective measure shall be taken to cover the window frames during the casting process. For the transportation from precast plant to site, the Contractor shall ensure adequate measures are provided at the critical contact points between the precast facades and the steel frames on the trailers to prevent damage to the cast-in window frame. Before casting, the Contractor shall exercise due diligence and care in the precast production to ensure that the orientation of cast-in window frame is checked when it is placed on the mould. The position of the cast-in window frame shall also be measured and checked against the approved precast shop drawings before casting. Upon the demoulding of precast facades, the orientation, position of cast-in window frame and the clearance between the aluminum members shall be measured to detect any possible sagging or bulging occurred during the casting. 6.15.3.4

Water-Tightness Test The Contractor shall provide the equipment, labour and material to conduct water-tightness test at the precast plant to ensure there is no water seepage at the interface joint between the cast-in window frame and adjacent concrete. The water-tightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for testing and each point shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The location of test shall be selected by the SO Rep. The velocity of the water at each nozzle shall be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered from each nozzle shall be 600 litres per hour. The nozzle shall be held at a distance 1m away from the joint/interface and pointed towards the joint/interface horizontally. 10% of the precast facades with cast-in window frame shall be tested for the water-tightness at the interface joint. The Contractor shall carry out the water-tightness test as soon as the precast production is commenced to ascertain the initial casting workmanship, as well as the performance of the cast-in window frames. The SO Rep shall decide on the window type or window configuration and the location on window frame to be tested. The SO Rep reserves the right to adjust the percentage of testing depending on the quality and performance cast-in window and the test results.

6.15.3.5

Functional Test For quality assurance, the Contractor shall check the functionality and the performance of cast-in window frames randomly at the early stage of the project. This is to ensure that any inadequacy of the bracing system can be detected early. For sliding windows, the inner frames shall be installed for repeated sliding operations to check for smoothness, alignment and safety in operation. For casement and top-hung windows, the inner frames shall be tested by repeated opening and closing to check for smoothness, alignment and safety.

6.15.4

Inspection And Protection Of Precast Façade With Cast-In Window Frame At Site

6.15.4.1

Inspection Upon Delivery Of Precast Facades With Cast-In Window Frame When precast facades with cast-in window frame are delivered to site, the Contractor shall check the condition of the cast-in window frames before installation.

6.15.4.2

Protection of precast facades with cast-in window frame The precast components with cast-in window frame delivered to site are protected with the translucent self adhesive tape. At site, the Contractor shall provide additional protective material like bubble wrap of minimum thickness of 5mm or any other materials which are equivalent in performance and subject to the approval of SO Rep to further protect the cast-in window frames from impact and abrasive forces.

BLDG12/S06.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 6-22

6.15


(CONT’D)

6.15.5

Submission Of Window Shop Drawings And Delivery Of Cast-In Window Frames To Precast Plant The Contractor shall submit the window shop drawings timely to SO Rep for approval within a reasonable timeframe from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The timeframe for window shop drawing submission shall tie in with the approved master construction programme for the initial delivery schedule of precast components to prevent any delay in the precast supply. The Contractor shall deliver mock-up cast-in window frames to precast plant to facilitate the mould fabrication at the window opening. The timeframe for the delivery of mock up window frames shall be carefully planned to tie in with the initial delivery schedule of precast components to site and tie in with the approved master construction programme. The Contractor is obliged at no extra cost to HDB to provide the mock up frames, make improvements in the protective wrapping including increasing the number of layer if required to enhance grout tightness, and on window frame construction where necessary. The Contractor shall ensure sufficient lead time in the delivery of the cast-in window frames meant for mass precast production, and for building up of the initial component stocks at precast plant to meet the delivery subsequently. The Contractor shall plan the schedule diligently and take note of the expected initial precast components delivery schedule for each block in the project, and tie in with the approved master construction programme.

6.15.6

Mould Design And Fabrication Timeframe The mould supplied by the Contractor shall facilitate the production of precast facades with cast-in window frame. The moulds shall be robust and durable without causing misalignment of track, twisting, skewing and warpage of cast-in window frame during casting and demoulding. The Contractor shall design the bracings and stoppers as part of the mould system. The bracings and stoppers shall be provided adequately at appropriate spacing to prevent misalignment and warping of cast-in window frame during casting. The Contractor shall order and fabricate required moulds diligently to tie in closely with the site progress and the cast-in window frame delivery schedule. Mould fabrication and production planning shall be submitted to the SO Rep as and when requested.

6.15.7

Preparation And Viewing Of Sample Panel The Contractor shall arrange for sample panel with cast-in window frame for SO Rep to assess the quality of the finished product prior to full-scale production. The Contractor shall bear the costs of rectifications, improvement and/or reproduction of sample due to the rejection of sample panel.

6.15.8

Repair Of Damaged Window Frame For repair works involving the removal of concrete at the interface joint between the cast-in window frame and adjacent concrete, the water-tightness test shall be conducted after the repair is completed to ensure the joint is water-tight. The Contractor shall consider the accessibility and the safety aspects when the rectification is required at site and/or precast plant. A method of statement of the repair shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the rectification of defective cast-in window frame at precast plant and/or site is carried out.

Section 7/.....

BLDG12/S06.DOC(22) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 7-1 SECTION 7 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

7.1

GENERAL The following specifications on Prestressed Concrete shall be treated as additional clauses to those required under Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

7.2

CONCRETE MIX Only specially designed concrete mixes complying with the requirements specified in the Drawings shall be used for prestressed concrete work. Submit, for the approval of the SO Rep, details of the concrete mix proposals at least 6 weeks in advance of concreting work so as to allow strength tests from trial mixes to be made. Trial mixes shall be repeated until a satisfactory mix as regard to the cube strength and workability has been achieved. Once the SO Rep has approved the mix, it shall be used for that work and no departure shall be made from it either in properties of materials or in their relative proportions unless authorised by the SO Rep who may require further trial mixes to be made. All sampling and testing of constituent materials, fresh and hardened concrete, shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Singapore or British Standard. If the strength of cube test results representing the prestressed concrete work fails to achieve the required strength, the Contractor shall be subject to charges and shall carry out further tests and/or rectifications to ascertain the in-situ strength of concrete as specified under Clause 4.16, 4.17 and 4.18 including all subclauses under them. Notwithstanding that all tests have been complied with, member which cracks during or after prestressing operations to an extent which in the opinion of the SO Rep renders it unfit for its purpose in the work shall be removed from the work and replaced.

7.3

PRESTRESSING STEEL The prestressing steel, wire or strand used in prestressing tendons shall comply with the requirements of BS 2691, BS 3617, BS 4486, BS 4757 and BS 5896. High tensile steel wires or high tensile steel strands shall be supplied in coils of a sufficiently large diameter so that it shall retain its physical properties and shall be reasonably straight when unwound from the coils. A copy of the Manufacturer's test certificates covering each coil of prestressing steels to be used shall be provided to the SO Rep. If test certificates relating to the material is not available, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of samples. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to carry out further test on the steel of each batch. All such testings shall be carried out by an approved testing authority. All wires or strands shall be cut from certified coils. Keep proper records so as to enable identification of the wires with the coil from which they are cut. The manufacture and assembly of tendons shall be done in accordance with the best quality of workmanship appropriate to the prestressing system being used. Tendons shall be made to the required length plus an allowance, where applicable, at each end for stressing operation. Splicing of strands or wires forming a tendon shall not be permitted. Flame cutting of wire or strand within 80mm of where tendon will be gripped by the anchorage or jacks shall not be permitted. Care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not apply on the anchorage or on the tendon, within 25mm of the anchorage. A durable metal label on which shall be stamped the length of the tendon and the coil number of the wire or strand used, shall be tied to each tendon. Care shall be taken that tendons of any type are not damaged, kinked or bent. Tendons shall be kept free from loose or thick rust, oil, grease, tar, paint, mud, or any other deleterious substances but a thin film of rust will be permitted.



ANCHORAGE DEVICES Anchorage devices shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Each anchorage device shall be capable of transmitting a force not less than the ultimate tensile strength of the tendon without overstressing the concrete. Spiral or other reinforcement specified by the manufacturer as being required for this purpose shall be considered part of the anchorage devices and shall be of the size and dimensions recommended by the Manufacturer for the prestressing system being used. Certificates of origin shall be provided for all anchorage devices. No damaged or defective anchorage devices shall be used. All steel parts shall be protected from corrosion and all threaded parts and fittings shall be protected by wrappings or plugs until used. The anchorage devices shall be kept free from mortar, loose rust, grease, tar, paint, oil, mud or any other coatings.

7.5

SHEATHING All Sheathing shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be of the type suitable for the prestressing system to be used and shall be strong enough for withstanding the placing and compaction of the concrete without suffering damages or deformation. Internal and external diameters of sheathing shall be within the limits specified in the design or approved by the SO Rep. The sheathing and all splices shall be mortar tight. Steel sheathing shall be galvanised or lead coated. The Manufacturer's value for the friction coefficients of the proposed sheathing shall be stated by the Contractor. Enlarged portions of the sheathing at couplings or anchorages shall be of sufficient length to provide for the extension of tendons. Grout holes shall be provided at both ends of the sheathing and shall be at least 10mm diameter. Each of the grouting holes shall be equipped with a plug valve or similar device capable of withstanding a pressure of 1 N per mm² without loss of water, grout or air. Additional vents, with plug valves, shall be provided at suitable points in the sheathing, including high and low points, for the purpose of bleeding air and water to ensure the complete filling of the duct with grout. The number and location of these additional vents shall be as specified in the design. Sheathing for prevention tendons shall consist of plastic tubing or other approved material of a quality, diameter and thickness approved by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall continue through end forms for at least 25mm.

7.6

PLACEMENT OF TENDONS (a)

Post-tensioned Tendons Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, tendons shall be sheathed and placed in position prior to concreting. Where permanent tendons cannot be placed, temporary tendons or other methods approved by the SO Rep shall be used to stiffen the sheathing. Tendons shall be handled with care and shall be pulled through the sheathing in such a manner as to avoid damage or contamination to either the tendon or the sheathing. Sheathing shall be securely fixed at points sufficiently close together to maintain a smooth tendon profile throughout the length of the tendon within a tolerance of 3mm of the position shown. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the sheathing is liable to be damaged or deformed during concreting work, the Contractor shall take additional precautions to maintain the position and shape of the sheathing. Any temporary opening in the sheathing shall be plugged and all joints between sheathing and any other part of the prestressing system shall be effectively sealed to prevent the entry of mortar, dust, water or other deleterious matter. Sheathing shall be neatly fitted at joints without projection or reduction of diameter, and the joints shall be mortar tight. Immediately after the whole of the concrete has been placed, all tendons therein shall be pulled back and forth for about 300mm to ensure that they are perfectly free inside the sheaths. Ducts stiffened by temporary tendons shall be checked by passing through a tendon identical with the permanent tendon.



PLACEMENT OF TENDONS (CONT'D) (a)

Post-tensioned Tendons (Cont'd) Unless otherwise specified, the minimum concrete cover to the outside surface of any sheathing shall be 50mm for beam soffits and 40mm elsewhere. This minimum cover shall be increased by 15mm for members in contact with earth or water or over salt water and by 25mm for members in contact with salt water. Each anchorage device shall be set square to the line of the corresponding prestressing tendon and shall be positioned securely to prevent movement during concreting. The anchorage devices shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Any mortar or concrete which adheres to the bearing or wedging surfaces shall be removed immediately. Provision shall be made for covering anchorages with reinforced concrete after completion of stressing. The minimum cover shall be 50mm over the anchorages and 40mm over the reinforcement.

(b)

Pretensioned Tendons Tendons shall be located as shown on the Drawings and suitable devices shall be provided to ensure that the correct positioning of the tendons is maintained during casting. When tendons are being placed, particular care shall be taken so that the tendons shall not come into contact with the oiled surface of the forms or be otherwise soiled. Any oil, etc which might collect on the tendons shall be removed by cleaning the affected tendons with a petrol-soaked rag or by other approved methods. The anchorages shall be such as to prevent any slip during the casting or curing operations. Unless as shown otherwise in the Drawings, the concrete cover to the surface of any tendon shall not be less than twice the tendon diameter or 25mm whichever is the greater. Such minimum cover shall be increased by 15mm for members situated in earth or water or over salt water.

7.7

CONCRETING Concrete in one precast unit shall be placed in one operation continuously without interruption. The Contractor shall provide such protective cover as and when required to avoid stoppage due to sudden rain. No unit shall be removed from the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure that no damage shall be done to the unit. For post-tensioned construction, where necessary, temporary openings shall be provided in the formwork to enable placing and adequate compaction of concrete, especially around and underneath sheathing and anchorages. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the sheathing. Vibrators shall not come into contact with the sheathing and if the sheathing is damaged during concreting, the whole or a portion of the concrete cast may be rejected by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be cleaned out within half an hour of completion of each concreting operation by blowing oil-free compressed air through the length of the sheathing. The concrete shall be moist cured until the prestress is applied.

7.8

CONCRETE STRENGTH AT TRANSFER No post-tensioning of tendons or the release of pretensioned tendons shall take place until the concrete has attained the minimum strength required as stated in the Drawings or as specified. These requirements shall be ascertained from tests on concrete cubes made and cured under the same conditions as the concrete member. Sufficient cubes shall be made so that if the stipulated strength is not achieved, further cubes will be available for such additional testing as may be required.



TENSIONING EQUIPMENT All tensioning equipment shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. Hydraulic pumps shall be power driven and the power unit shall be so adjusted that the rate of extension of the tendon is within the limits recommended or as directed by the SO Rep. Dynamometers, and each set of equipment comprising pump, jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated as directed by the SO Rep and the true force determined from the calibration. Dynamometers, pressure gauges and scales shall permit force and elongation to be determined within an accuracy of 2%. Pressure gauges shall only be used as a substitute for dynamometers and shall be concentric scale gauges complying with the requirements of BS 1780 which requires gauges to be accurate to within 1% of their full capacity. They shall be selected so as to be used between the 50% and 90% of their full capacity and shall not be less than 200mm in diameter. Where pressure gauges are used, a suitable device shall be fitted so as to protect the gauge against sudden release of pressure. Provision shall also be made by such means as a "tee" connection, for the attachment of a second gauge which shall be attached and used as a check whenever so requested by the SO Rep.

7.10

TENSIONING PRECAUTIONS All tensioning operations shall be carried out in the presence of the SO Rep in accordance with the best practice applicable to the particular prestressed method proposed. The tensioning operation shall be performed only by personnel trained and experienced in this type of work. Care shall be taken during tensioning to ensure the safety of all personnel engaged on the work and of other persons in the vicinity. Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be restrained should they loose their grip on the tendons. No person shall be permitted to stand behind the jacks or close to the line of the tendons while tensioning is in progress. The operation of jacks, the measurements of elongation and associated operations shall be carried out in such a manner and from such positions that the safety of all concerned is ensured. During actual stressing operations warning signs shall be prominently displayed. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, there is danger to the general public or to property, special precautions in the form of substantial barrier shall be required.

7.11

TENSIONING FORCE Unless otherwise specified, the tensioning forces required shall be that shown in the Drawings. The tensioning force applied to any tendon shall be determined by direct measurement of the force and checked by measurement of the elongation of the tendon. The secant modulus determined from test samples or shown on test certificates shall be used when interpreting the measurement of elongation. Allowance shall be made for any anticipated draw-in at the anchorage devices on release of the jack, for elastic shortening of the member and for anticipated losses due to stressing of subsequent tendons. The final forces in each tendon, as measured by the dynamometer, shall be within an accuracy of plus or minus 3% of the values stipulated. If, on completion of tensioning each tendon to the required force, the check measurement of elongation differs from its required value by more than 5%, the SO Rep may direct that some or all of the following steps be taken : (a)

Recalibration of equipment;

(b)

Testing of tendon material to check secant modulus;

(c)

Tendons released and restressed (secant modulus applicable to second stressing to be adopted);

(d)

Lubrication of tendons to reduce friction losses. Only water soluble oils shall be used in ducted systems and these shall be washed out before grouting;

(e)

Where only 1 jack is used previously, the tendon shall be tensioned from both ends using 2 jacks;

(f)

Other methods as directed by the SO Rep.



PRETENSIONING The abutments and casting beds for pretensioning of tendons shall be strong enough to withstand the required total prestressing force with adequate safety. The abutments shall be so constructed as to provide protection at all times against injury or damage caused by slipping occurring in anchorages during or after tensioning. Provisions shall be made for free and adequate movement of the member at points of support in the direction of the expected shortening due to prestress without impairing the rigidity of the forms during casting operations. Where necessary, provision shall be made in the design of the casting bed for the use of external vibrators. In the case where tendons are to be deflected, submit details of the proposed layout for each line of tendons together with values for the portion of the force to be provided by the initial tensioning and for the portion which will be provided by the elongation resulting from subsequent deflection of the tendons. Tensioning shall not commence until the SO Rep has approved the values submitted. Special care shall be taken to apply tensioning force smoothly at an even rate and to determine its value with considerable accuracy. Tendons shall be marked for measurement of elongation and shall also be marked at both the jacking and dead ends of the stressing bed so that any slip may be observed. Should a slip of any of the tendons in a group of tendons tensioned together occur, the tensioning of the whole group shall be released, tendons reset, and the whole group tensioned again. Alternatively, the tensioning of the group of tendons can be completed without the slipped tendon(s) which can be subsequently tensioned. The prestressing force shall be transferred from the jack to the abutment of the stressing bed immediately the required force (or elongation) has been reached and the pressure in the jack shall be relaxed before any other operation commences. Tendons shall be deflected, where shown in the Drawings and the required force maintained, by use of approved fixing devices strong enough to hold the tendons firmly in their proper positions especially during concreting and curing, until the concrete has attained the required strength. In order that the required force is maintained after the tensioned steel has been anchored, an allowance shall be made in assessing the value of the applied force for loss of stress due to yield in the anchorages and for slip when the steel is wedged after tensioning. In long line beds, due consideration shall be given to the friction caused by the varying shape and number of diaphgrams. Prior to concreting, a check shall be made of the accuracy of alignment of forms and of the distance centre to centre bearings, overall length, width, positioning of end blocks, tendons, sheathing and anchorages and their connections, reinforcement, bearings, dowels and any other fittings shown in the Drawings. Concreting of a member shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained. Prior to transfer of the prestressing force from the abutments of the casting bed to the members, all tendons shall be tested for tightness and any loose tendon found shall be reported to the SO Rep who will decide whether the members are acceptable. All tendons shall be marked at each end of every member so as to check the draw-in and any slip of the tendons. The procedure of release shall be continuous and shall be performed in the shortest possible time without interruption. The prestress shall be transferred to the members in such a manner that the tendons are released gradually and, preferably, simultaneously. The method of transferring the prestress and the equipment proposed shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. The SO Rep shall be present at every occasion of releasing tendons. After prestress has been transferred to the members, the tendons between the members shall be severed working along the line from the point or points of release. Every effort shall be made to avoid injury to the concrete.



POST-TENSIONING The process of prestressing each member shall be continuous, the tendons being stressed in the order indicated in the Drawings, and the operation completed without interruption in as short a time as possible. No member shall be left partially prestressed without the permission of the SO Rep unless the Drawings require the member to be prestressed in stages. In general, tensioning shall proceed symmetrically to avoid lateral distortion and development of tension on one side. At no time shall the permissible stresses in concrete and steel be exceeded. Tendon ducts shall be cleaned out by blowing compressed air through them and anchorages shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to commencement of tensioning. The protruding ends of tendons shall be cleaned of any coating, such as rust, mortar, oil or mud which would lessen the grip of wedges of anchorage devices. Tendons shall be checked before tensioning to see that they are free to move inside the duct. Special care shall be taken to set the jacks accurately in the line of the tendon. The force which is applied initially to take up the slack of the tendon shall be sufficient to seat the jack firmly but shall not exceed the amount normally associated with the particular method of post-tensioning. After taking up the slack, the tendon shall, where possible, be accurately marked at both ends and elongations or draw-in measured from these markings. When requested by the SO Rep readings of force and elongation shall be taken at stages during the tensioning of a tendon and plotted to determine the zero error in measuring elongation. Where tendons consist of a number of individual components, each component shall be marked so that any slip may be observed. In the case of slipping of one or more components or tendons of a group tensioned together, the SO Rep may permit a compensating increase in the elongation of the remaining tendons of the group provided that the jacking force does not exceed 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the remaining tendons. In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, the tendon shall be released, replaced if necessary, and restressed. Under no circumstances shall the maximum jacking force exceeds the rated capacity of the jacking equipment used, or 80% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon whichever is less.

7.14

TENSIONING RECORDS All tensioning data shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep for checking and retention : (a)

Pretensioned Tendons The following data relating to the prestressing operation shall be recorded :

(b)

(i)

Identification numbers of dynamometers, gauges, pumps and jacks;

(ii)

Force applied if dynamometer is used; alternatively, pump or jack pressure and area of piston;

(iii)

Elongation remaining after anchoring.

Post-Tensioned Tendons The following data, where applicable, shall be recorded :


(i)

Identification number of each dynamometer, gauge, pump and jack;

(ii)

Identification particulars of tendons;

(iii)

Initial forces (or pressures) when tendons are marked for measurement of elongation;

(iv)

Final forces (or pressure) and elongations obtained on completion of tensioning;

(v)

Elongation remaining after release of jacks;

(vi)

Elongations obtained at intervals during tensioning, together with corresponding forces (or pressures), if and when required by the SO Rep.


GROUTING After post-tensioned tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be pressure-grouted as soon as practicable. The grout mix and the method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved by the SO Rep before grouting is commenced. The pressure at which the grout is to be pumped into the duct shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall not normally exceed 0.7 N per mm². The grout shall preferably be either a neat cement grout with a water to cement ratio not exceeding 0.4 or cement mortar (1:1 3/4 by weight). An approved expanding plasticising admixture shall be used. Grout shall be mixed in a high speed mechanical mixer, for at least 2 minutes, until a uniform colloidal consistency is produced. Mixing by hand shall not be permitted. Pumps shall be capable of continuous operation with little pressure variation and shall have a system for recirculating the grout whilst actual grouting is not in progress. Pumps shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and shall be capable of delivery at pressures up to 1.0 N per mm². All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after each series of operations and more frequently if necessary. Grouting shall not be carried out while the shade temperature exceeds 38°C. All ducts and holes shall be thoroughly flushed out with clean water followed by compressed air. Grout shall be injected into each duct at a speed between 300mm and 600mm per second. A continuously steady flow of grout shall be maintained until the duct is completely filled and pure grout issues from all vents and from the far end and until all entrapped air has been expelled. The vents shall be progressively closed as required to ensure the complete filling of the duct. The grout pressure shall then be held at the required value for at least 1 minute after which the grouting end shall be plugged. All vents and ends shall be kept closed until final setting of the grout has taken place. When directed by the SO Rep, duct openings shall be inspected 2 or 3 days after grouting and topped up if necessary. If serious leaks occur, the grouting shall be stopped, the duct flushed clean with water and the leakage plugged before continuing with grouting. If a blockage occurs, pumping may be quickly transferred to the far end of the duct if there are sufficient vents to ensure that the duct will be filled with grout. Alternatively, ducts may be flushed with clean water to clear the blockage. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete filling of the ducts with grout. If several blockages occur the grout mix may be rejected and a new mix designed. On completion of grouting and after the grout has hardened sufficiently, any vents or grouting tubes which extend to the surfaces of the concrete shall be cut off 25mm below the concrete surface and the recess plugged with concrete. Tendons shall be cut back to give, when recesses are concreted, a minimum of 25mm cover. Wire stubs (if any) may be bent into the recesses. Recesses shall be concreted, or, when shown in the Drawings, shall be filled monolithically when other cast-in-place concrete is placed. Complete records shall be kept on all grouting of ducts and a copy of the records submitted to the SO Rep.

7.16

PRESTRESSED MEMBERS Workmanship displayed in the construction of prestressed members shall be of the highest order and every endeavour shall be made to obtain accuracy of dimensions. The dimensions and shape stated in the Drawings shall be taken to apply to the structure at the time of its completion when under self weight alone. Except where stated otherwise in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, the dimensions and profile of the formwork shall compensate for deformations due to prestress, etc so that the dimensions and profile of the completed structure will conform to the Drawings. Submit details of the magnitude of these deformations and the proposed method to allow for them. Construction of formwork shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained.



PRESTRESSED MEMBERS (CONT'D) For precast members, the date of casting, length of member and the identification number required by the SO Rep shall be marked on every member. When requested by the SO Rep, the word 'TOP' and/or lifting positions shall also be marked on the member. All accepted members shall be clearly identified by marking in the presence of the SO Rep. Members shall not be lifted or handled until fully stressed. At all times, and especially during transportation, members shall be secured in proper positions by means of suitable packing pieces and braces. Members shall not be braced against one another but shall be provided with independent bracing. Members shall be handled, lifted and supported carefully at the positions and in the manner required by the Drawings. Where no method of lifting is shown in the Drawings, submit for the approval of the SO Rep, details of proposals for lifting the members and once approved no other method shall be used during the whole period of construction except with the permission of the SO Rep. Precast members shall be supported on timber bearers or other approved means, over their full width. The ground or space between the bearers supporting the members shall be carefully cleared and levelled so as to prevent the member from being accidentally supported other than on the approved bearers. The bearers themselves shall be supported on firm foundation and, every precaution shall be made to prevent subsidence from occurring. Members shall not be stacked on top of one another except when approved by the SO Rep who shall determine the manner of stacking and the maximum number of layers or height of the stacking. Each layer shall be separated from the next layer by bearers. No precast member which is manufactured outside the Site shall be delivered to the Site without the permission of the SO Rep. The granting of permission shall be dependent on each individual member exhibiting satisfactory workmanship and finish and complying with the tolerance on dimensions and prestressing force. In addition, test loading, if specified, and concrete strength tests of representative members shall satisfy the requirements specified.

Section 8/.....


Bldg Spec Page 8-1 SECTION 8 HOUSEHOLD SHELTER

8.1

SEMI-PRECAST HOUSEHOLD SHELTER The Contract primarily requires the Contractor to construct semi-precast household shelters. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements specified herein in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. (a)

Approved Supplier The precast panels of household shelters hall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted on the Internet (www.eptc.sg) under HDB’s Materials List (ML). The Contractor shall submit the written contractual agreement between himself and his supplier within two weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

(b)

Precast Concrete Works The requirements specified in the clauses and subclauses under Section 6 "Semi-Precast Construction" shall apply for all structural precast Works.

(c)

Manufacturing Of Precast Components The precast component of the household shelters shall be fabricated with proper quality control and shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved Drawings. The door frame for the blast door shall be cast in together with the precast panel. A removable steel bracing frame (Dummy Door) to prevent the door frame from warping shall be used during concreting. The door leaf shall be installed on the Site at a later stage as decided by the SO Rep. In all cases, the blast door frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious materials by wrapping with plastic sheets or other means to provide protection to the door frames. The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the door frame, ventilation sleeve and plate units and openings for electrical services. Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep. No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter. Prior to mass production of the precast panels for the household shelters, the Contractor shall produce at least one sample of each type of precast panel together with the blast door installed for approval by the SO Rep. The approved samples shall be displayed at the factory or on the Site if precast on Site. These approved samples shall be used as references for the minimum standard and quality to be achieved for all the precast panels of the household shelters. The Contractor shall provide remedial work to any precast panel of the household shelters that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross deviation from the specified finish may result in the rejection of the precast panel. The SO Rep shall reject any precast panel of the household shelter including those already delivered to the Site, if it is found that such precast panel does not comply with the Drawings and/or Specifications.



SEMI-PRECAST HOUSEHOLD SHELTER (CONT'D) (d)

Transportation And Site Storage The precast panels of the household shelters shall be delivered to the Site in a proper manner. The Contractor shall ensure that the precast panels are able to withstand any distortion in the shape during lifting, transportation and installation. They shall be handled in such a manner so as to avoid excessive stress or damage. The Contractor shall ensure proper site access and shall supply all necessary tools and equipment for the efficient transportation of the precast panels to the designated location at the Site. The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for the handling of the stored precast panels. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit well-organised storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast panels. No precast panel shall be placed directly on the ground without proper support. They shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.

(e)

Installation The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment such as cranes, temporary staging, etc for the efficient installation of the precast panels. The installation procedure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval and shall be strictly adhered to thereafter. The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the household shelter is constructed properly according to the Drawings and/or Specifications. No hacking of the concrete of precast panels shall be allowed.

8.2

CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS (a)

The requirements specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall apply for all cast-in-situ Works.

(b)

The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the ventilation sleeve and plate units and openings for electrical services where required.

(c)

The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the household shelter is constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and/or Specifications. No hacking of the concrete of household shelters shall be allowed. Concrete unevenness, if required to be made good, shall be ground smooth by using grinders only. Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep. No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter.

8.3

BLAST DOOR (a)

Approved Supplier The household shelter blast doors shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted on the Internet (www.eptc.sg) under HDB’s Materials List (ML). The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, the approved blast door shop drawings and the written contractual agreement between himself and his supplier within two weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.



BLAST DOOR (CONT'D) (b)

Fabrication Of Blast Door The blast doors shall be fabricated according to the details as shown in the approved shop Drawings with good quality and workmanship acceptable to the SO Rep.

(c)

Inspection/Testing Of Blast Doors The Contractor shall allow for the inspection and testing of the blast doors by the SO Rep during the course of fabrication. Blast door shall be selected on the Site by the SO Rep for inspection/testing. The Contractor shall cut them open to check for compliance with the approved shop Drawings and/or Specifications. Water-tightness tests shall be carried out on the door (closed and fully locked with the door frame) to a minimum depth of 25 mm water for a period of 2 hours. Any seepage of water through the door or gasket after the 2 hour period shall be considered a failure.

(d)

Steel Sections For components such as blast door frame, blast door leaf cladding panels and internal frame of the door leaf, uncoated mild steel sheets to ASTM A366 or BS 1449 or other approved standards subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be used. Such components shall be treated with approved Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primer and tested to the requirements stipulated in subclause 18.29.1. For other mild steel sections (such as for small movable parts in the locking mechanism, if any), grade 43A to BS 4360 or other approved standards subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be used. Such other mild steel sections shall be protected from corrosion by a method approved by the SO Rep. Small areas of corrosion protection coating damaged by welding, cutting or bending shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint, or other method approved by the SO Rep.

(e)

Locking Bolts and Shear Pins Locking bolts and shear pins shall be of stainless steel to AISI Type 316.

(f)

Gasket The material for the gasket shall be Neoprene or EPDM rubber and shall meet the requirements of Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber, either grade 2A3 or higher; or grade 2B3 or higher as specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved

(g)

Spray Painting To Blast Door Leaf The blast door leaf which is Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primed shall be spray finished with 2 coats of approved enamel paint. Prior to the application of the enamel paint, the surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from grease, oil or other foreign matter. A full colour range of the enamel paint shall be submitted for selection and approval by the SO Rep.


Bldg Spec Page 8-4

8.3

BLAST DOOR (CONT'D)

(h)

Painting To Blast Door Frame Painting to Blast door frame which is Cathoidc Electro-Deposition (CED) primer shall be painted on the Site with 2 coats of approved enamel paint. Prior to the application of the enamel paint, the surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from grease, oil or other foreign matter. A full colour range of the enamel paint shall be submitted for selection and approval by the SO Rep. The CED primer shall comply with the following requirements:

Performance / Properties


Test Method

Requirement

Adhesion

ASTM D3359

5B

Scratch Resistance

SS 5 : Part F2

Shall withstand scratch test load of 2000g

Pencil Hardness

ASTM 3363

2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film

Dry Film Thickness

SS 5:Part B1

20 microns 5 microns

Resistance to Salt Water Spray

SS 5:Part G1

1000 hrs: <0.1% rusting Blister size no 6 few to no 10 on surface

Resistance to Humidity

SS 5:Part G6

1000 hrs: <0.03% rusting Blister size no 8 few to no 10 on surface


VENTILATION SLEEVE & PLATE UNIT (a)

Fabrication Of The Ventilation Sleeve & Plate Unit The ventilation sleeve and plate units shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted on the Internet (www.eptc.sg) under HDB’s Materials List (ML). The ventilation sleeve & plate units shall be fabricated according to the details as shown in the approved shop Drawings with good quality and workmanship acceptable to the SO Rep. In all cases, the plates shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious materials by wrapping with plastic sheets or by other means.

(b)

Testing Of Ventilation Sleeve & Plate Unit One ventilation sleeve and plate unit shall be selected by the SO Rep for water-tightness test. It shall be carried out by subjecting the inside of the closed sleeve to a minimum depth of 25mm of water for a period of 2 hours. Any seepage of water through the gasket after the 2 hour period shall be considered a failure.

(c)

Gasket The material for the gasket shall be Neoprene or EPDM rubber and shall meet the requirements of Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber, either grade 2A3 or higher; or grade 2B3 or higher as specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved

8.5

SEALING OF ELECTRICAL OPENINGS After the installation of electrical wiring, the Contractor shall provide sealing to the concealed wiring conduits in the household shelter wall to ensure that these are sealed air-tight. The method and type of sealing shall be approved by the SO Rep.

Section 9/.....


Bldg Spec Page 9-1 SECTION 9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK

9.1

SCOPE OF WORK The concrete water tank Works shall include all structural, architectural and other work above reinforced concrete main roof slab level and lift motor room floor slab level and low level concrete suction tanks as shown in the Drawings. These include the following works : (a)

concrete water tanks and the supporting stumps;

(b)

roof top pump room adjacent to concrete water tanks;

(c)

lift motor room irrespective of whether it is connected to or far away from the concrete water tanks;

(d)

fascia walls fencing around the concrete water tanks;

(e)

all roofs for the concrete water tanks, lift motor room, roof top pump room and other roof structures including roof over void decks; and

(f)

low level concrete suction tanks including supporting stumps.

The concrete water tank Works shall include the construction, completion and maintenance of the Works and the provision of labour, materials, Construction Equipment and other items, whether of a temporary or permanent nature, required in and for such construction, completion and maintenance in so far as these are specified in or can be reasonably inferred from the Works. Where in the case precast watertanks are shown in the Drawings, or proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall also comply with all other relevant clauses, subclause and sections of the Specifications.

9.2

WATER-PROOFING MEASURES The construction of the concrete water tanks shall be in accordance with the latest BS 8007. Provide and construct the concrete water tanks adopting closely the following waterproofing measures to ensure the water-tightness of concrete water tanks : (a)

Grade 40 concrete with low water/cement ratio and high workability shall be used. The concrete shall be designed with chloride-free retarding superplasticiser. The finished concrete shall be dense, impermeable and durable.

(b)

No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The water tanks shall be cast in one operation to above the specified highest water level as shown in the Drawings. The rest of the water tanks including the roof shall be cast in a second operation.

(c)

The concrete tanks shall be tested in accordance with BS 8007 for water tightness 28 days after casting.

(d)

After passing the water test, the internal surface of the concrete tanks shall be coated with approved type cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instructions of the SO Rep.



PUB APPROVAL All materials used in the construction and repair of concrete water tanks shall be approved by PUB. Provide samples of the materials and their technical specifications to the PUB for approval well in advance of construction work. Certified copy of the PUB approval letter of the particular type of materials together with other relevant documents, such as PSB test reports, etc shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its incorporation in the work.

9.4

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE The concrete used for the reinforced concrete water tanks shall be all as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall comply with all relevant clauses and subclauses of Section 4 "Structural Concrete".

9.5

FORMWORK SYSTEM (REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK) Unless otherwise specified, formwork shall be designed and constructed in accordance with clause 4.19 "Formwork" and clause 4.22 "Building Accuracy" including all subclauses under them, where appropriate. Formwork can only be removed at least 7 days after concreting the concrete water tanks and the soffit of the tanks be re-propped immediately until 28 days after casting. Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock, disturbance and vibration, without damaging or overloading the finished concrete work or structures, and in a manner approved by the SO Rep.

9.6

CONCRETING All construction joints and concreting procedures for the Reinforced Concrete Water Tank Works shall be approved by the SO Rep. Inform the SO Rep the area of concreting and the location of construction joints and obtain his approval prior to the concreting of concrete tanks. No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The entire concrete tanks up to the soffit of the tank roof slab shall be cast in one operation. The tank roof shall be cast in the second operation. All pipes shall be cast in-situ with the concrete tank in the positions as shown in the Drawings. The following sequence of concreting the concrete water tank within the same day may be accepted by the SO Rep if the Contractor could demonstrate that these will result in a monolithic and watertight structure : (a)

Cast the lowest 500mm of the tank walls with concrete flowing into the tank floor slab;

(b)

Level the tank floor slab to the thickness required; and

(c)

Immediately after initial setting, the rest of the tank walls shall be cast and topped up to the soffit of the tank roof slab.

The initial setting time varies with the workability of the concrete mix and shall be approved by the SO Rep. As soon as the concrete starts to set, the walls shall be immediately topped up to the level required. Any delay in the topping up operation may result in rejection of the concreting Works by the SO Rep. No concreting Works shall be allowed without the presence of the Resident Technical Officer. The concrete shall be highly workable and shall be compacted sufficiently to produce a dense homogeneous mass and filling all voids. The concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance after being placed in position and shall be continuously cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting.



WATERTIGHTNESS TEST The Contractor shall test the concrete water tanks for watertightness in accordance with BS 8007. Cast insitu water tanks shall be tested 28 days after casting and precast water tanks shall be tested 7 days after casting, or on attaining the 28 day concrete strength, whichever is earlier. The tank shall be filled gradually with PUB water up to the overflow level. Starting from full tank, the period of test shall be at least 24 hours, during which the exposed surfaces shall show no sign of leakage and no damp patch. If the tank leaks or shows any sign of dampness, it shall be repaired with approved type of epoxy resin grout or other methods and the tank retested. If the tank fails the second test, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove and recast the tank.

9.8

MORTAR BED FOR TILING After passing the watertightness test, the internal surface of the concrete tank shall be coated with an approved cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instruction of the SO Rep. On the fully cured cementitious waterproof membrane, a mortar bed of about 10mm thickness shall be applied with an approved prepacked mortar mix to receive the tiling. The prepacked mortar shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Tiles shall be laid on this mortar bedding within a week.

9.9

TILING The concrete water tanks shall be tiled internally with approved types of heavy duty ceramic tiles. All ceramic tiles shall be provided and laid to all the requirements as specified in Clause 19.4 "Ceramic Floor Tiles For Non-Residential Units And Common Areas Outside Dwelling Units" including all subclauses under it. Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the maximum water absorption of the ceramic tiles for concrete water tanks shall not exceed 1% and the scratch hardness of such tiles shall not be less than 5 on the Moh scale. The surface and texture of all the ceramic tiles shall be glazed. The surface appearance shall be free from crack, crazing, hairline cracks and bubbles. Tile used shall be 100mm x 200mm x 8mm for rectangular reinforced concrete water tanks; and 50mm x 100mm x 8mm for circular reinforced concrete water tanks; level and regular in size with perfect corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner. The Contractor shall submit an approval letter from PUB and a certified true copy of the test report from PSB or accredited laboratory under SINGLAS for the approval of the SO Rep.

9.10

CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES FOR INLET, OVERFLOW, INTERCONNECTING AND WASHOUT PIPES Provide and install high level concrete water tanks and low level concrete water tanks as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix 100mm diameter stainless steel connecting pipe of minimum 450mm in length and complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and cast in-situ in the concrete wall so that the welded collar is embedded in the middle of the concrete wall. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the concrete wall shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The connecting pipe shall be positioned to give a minimum clearance of 150mm from the external wall surface to the flange and 100mm from the internal wall finished surface to the pipe end. For washout connecting pipe, it shall flush with the internal finished surface.



CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES FOR INLET, OVERFLOW, INTERCONNECTING AND WASHOUT PIPES (CONT'D) Provide and fix for each roof water tank one inlet, one overflow, two interconnecting and one washout connecting pipes as specified in the foregoing requirements. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be accordingly and correspondingly aligned. Roof water tanks with inlet pipes direct from the PUB shall have two overflow pipes per tank. Provide and fix for each suction tank one inlet, two overflow and one washout connecting pipes as shown. Where connecting pipes to the concrete water tanks are to be provided for distribution mains, rising main inlets, overflow pipes, washout pipes and others as shown in the Drawings, they shall be cast in the water tank floor or wall. All inlet connecting pipes receiving water directly from the PUB shall have flanges at both ends. The pipe shall be positioned such that there is a minimum clearance of 100mm from the flanges to the internal wall finished surface and 150mm to the external wall surfaces. Roof tank inlet connecting pipes receiving water directing from PUB shall be provided with stainless steel screwed boss flange conforming to BS 4504 table 16/4 for the installation of equilibrium ball float valves. All stainless steel material used shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with BS 4504. All Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipe (except overflow, warning and bypass pipes) thickness shall be based on Japanese Industrial Standard G3459 1984 Stainless Steel Pipes Schedule No. 20S. Carry out cleaning and commissioning of the water tanks, including the use of chemicals for sterilisation of the water tank and bear all costs and expenses for the commissioning of the water tanks.

9.11

OUTLET CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES AT TANK FLOOR SLAB Provide and fix three outlet connecting pipes with flanges at tank floor slab to roof distribution mains for each roof water tank. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 100mm diameter, minimum 500mm in length and complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipe and cast-in-situ in the water tank floor slab so that the collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the concrete slab shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the roof tank floor slab and the flange shall be 150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of the suction tank floor slab. There are a minimum of two water pumps to be installed for each suction tank. Provide and fix one outlet connecting pipe for each water pump. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 80mm in diameter, minimum 400mm in length complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipes and cast-in-situ in the water tank floor slab so that the collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the concrete slab shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the suction tank floor slab and the flange shall be 150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of the suction tank floor slab. All stainless steel materials shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall conform to BS 4504.



CONNECTING PIPES FOR OVERFLOW WARNING PIPES AND BYPASS PIPE Provide and fix two 28mm diameter, minimum of 500mm long stainless steel pipes, complete with connecting adaptor or flange of 80mm diameter on one end. A collar of 80mm diameter and 9mm thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and cast-in-situ in the concrete tank wall. The connecting pipe shall be protruded to give a minimum clearance of 150mm from the external wall finished surface and 100mm from the internal wall finished surface. All stainless steel materials used shall conform to AISI Grade 316. Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.

9.13

STAINLESS STEEL CONNECTING PIPES Check and take necessary precautions to ensure that the stainless steel connecting pipes are not in contact with the concrete tank reinforced steel bars during concreting. Pipe wall thickness used for Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipes shall conform to JIS G3459-1984 Stainless Steel Pipe Schedule No. 20S. Minimum grade for filler or electrode shall be AISI Type 316L. All welds for stainless steel shall be argon shielded and by TIG or MIG welding. Ensure that all oxides or scales formed on welded surfaces are removed.

9.14

MANHOLE AND MANHOLE COVER Provide access manhole to every roof level tanks and every pump room suction tanks in accordance with the Drawings. The manhole cover shall be complete with locking device and non-duplicable padlock with master key provided in accordance to PUB’s latest requirements. The manhole cover shall be capable of being opened fully in accordance with the Drawings. All manhole covers are to be secured by bolting or fastening with stainless steel brackets in accordance with PUB’s latest requirements. The web link address : www.pub.gov.sg. Contractor shall provide sufficient number of hook wrench or C-tool (for locking or unlocking round nut) to the respective Town Council’s request. The fabricator and installer of stainless steel bracket and suppliers of round nuts and hook wrench shall be from PUB’s latest approved lists.

.

9.15

ELECTRODE ACCESS Provide access opening to every roof water tank for the mounting of three sets of electrodes as shown in the Drawings. One access opening shall also be provided for one set of electrode to every pump room suction tank. Access openings for electrodes shall have 3mm thick stainless steel Grade 316 plate for mounting electrodes. Electrodes for the roof water tank shall be protected from weather by an aluminium box. Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.

9.16

AIR VENT Air vents shall be provided near the top of the wall adjacent to the water tank room where booster pumps are installed. Provide at least two 100mm diameter stainless steel air vents to every tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end and suitably covered by mosquito netting. The mesh size of the netting shall not exceed 0.65mm. All the air vents shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings.



CAT LADDER Provide and fix external aluminium cat ladder in accordance with the Drawings. One UPVC internal cat ladder shall be provided for each tank at the designated manhole and effectively hooked to the stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) hook cast-in-situ to the tank, in accordance with the Drawings.

9.18

EXTERNAL FINISHES Provide external finishes to the external face of the concrete water tank. The finishing materials, their colour, texture, quality and methods of application shall be in accordance with the Drawings and shall be approved by the SO Rep. Any Defect to the external finishes shall be rectified immediately by the Contractor within the Defects Liability Period.

9.19

STERILISATION OF WATER TANK When all work pertaining to the concrete water tank is completed, the tank shall be filled with water for at least 14 days to get rid of all odour, taste, chemicals, cement and other objectional particles. The tank shall then be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and sterilised by the Contractor. The sterilisation of the water tank shall be carried out in accordance with the Code of Practice on Water Service issued by Public Utilities Board [Water Supply (Network) Department] (Singapore Standard CP 48:1989 and its latest amendments). The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological examination and chemical analysis by the Public Utilities Board (PUB), PSB or SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory. Provide the water examination and analysis report (issued by the Water Supply (Network) Department, Public Utilities Board), to the SO Rep and the result of the water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for human consumption, failing which the Contractor shall sterilise the water again until such requirement is met. After satisfactory sterilisation, the manholes to the water tank shall be locked and no other work on the water tank shall be allowed without a written permission from the SO Rep.

Section 10/.....


Bldg Spec Page 10-1 SECTION 10 PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITION

10.1

GENERAL Precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be used on all typical storeys at locations as shown in the Architectural Drawings. The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list of approved suppliers is posted at the following website: www.eptc.sg under HDB’s Materials List (ML). Details of the precast lightweight concrete partition shall comply with the Drawings. Standard fixing and connection details (including those for frames) and guidelines on panelling and layout of partitions as shown in the Standard Structural and Architectural Drawings shall be used. The precast lightweight partition shall be manufactured using lightweight foam concrete.

10.2

MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS The precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be manufactured to satisfy the requirements as specified hereunder.

10.2.1

Technical Specifications (a) (b) (c) (d)

10.2.2

Characteristic compressive strength of 4.5 N per mm² at 28 days. Air dry density of between 1400 kg per m³ and 1800 kg per m³. Dry shrinkage not exceeding 0.09% when tested to SS271. Total water absorption not exceeding 23.5% when tested to SS271.

Materials Materials used in the manufacturing of precast lightweight partition shall comply with Section 4 "Structural Concrete". The foaming agent used for lightweight foam concrete partitions shall comply with the performance requirement of SS EN 934. No foaming agent shall be used unless prior approval has been given by the SO Rep. The test report shall be submitted to the SO Rep as and when requested.

10.2.3

Manufacturing Precast lightweight partition shall be cast using steel moulds in horizontal position, or using steel battery mould in vertical position to conform to the shapes, lines and dimensions of the partitions to be produced. The mould shall be sufficiently rigid to achieve the casting tolerances, shapes and surface finishes as specified: (a)

Casting Tolerance : Height Width Thickness Bowing/Warpage

(b)

: : : :

±5mm; ±3mm; ±3mm; 3mm in 2m along the height; 1mm in 600mm along the width.

Shape The shape and location of the tongues and grooves of the partitions after casting shall be correct and accurate such that the offset between two adjacent panels after installation is within 2mm on both faces of the partitions.



Manufacturing (Cont'd) (c)

Surface Finishes The geometry and arrangement of the steel moulds shall be such that the off-form surfaces of two adjacent panels after installation are in the same plane with compatible interlocking tongues and grooves. The precast lightweight partitions shall be provided with openings for services where required.

10.3

REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO DELIVERY Prior to the delivery of precast lightweight partitions to the Site, ensure that the partitions are manufactured to satisfy the following requirements : (a)

Casting tolerance as specified in subclause 10.2.3 "Manufacturing".

(b)

The surface finish of lightweight partition shall be smooth, free from Defect, excessive voids, visible cracks, chipping-off and unevenness. A smooth surface shall be defined as one with no voids or bug holes greater than 7mm in diameter within a 50mm border around the edges of the panels. For the remaining centre portion, the number of air voids greater than 1.5mm and smaller than 3mm in diameter shall not exceed 20 in any 100mm x100mm square. No void greater than 3mm in diameter shall be allowed. Where the surface finish of the partitions do not comply with the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall provide touching up or other remedial work to smoothen the surface to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, lightweight partition need not be skim-coated in the factory before delivery.

10.4

(c)

The accuracy of the shapes and locations of tongues and grooves of the partitions after casting are verified by two special steel templates. This is to ensure that the offset between any two panels after installation is within 2mm on both faces of partitions.

(d)

No partition is delivered prematurely to the Site before sufficient strength has been gained to withstand stresses due to transportation, handling or erection.

(e)

Provision of adequate supports for partitions to prevent chipping off of panel edges during transportation and handling.

QUALITY OF PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS The identification and date of casting shall be neatly and suitably marked on all partitions, as soon as is practicable after casting. The compressive strength of the lightweight concrete shall be measured by crushing tests on 100mm cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested by the SO Rep in accordance with SS 78. For every 50 m³ or part thereof of concrete used for production, at least 1 sample of 3 cubes shall be made from each batch chosen by the SO Rep, subject to a minimum of 1 sample of 3 cubes for each day of production. The cubes shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer. In addition to the minimum numbers specified above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to make additional test cubes from whichever batch he may choose. All cubes shall be tested at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory. The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all test cubes for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be collected by the SO Rep from site for testing at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory at a regular interval. The SO Rep shall remove crushed cubes from the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory.



QUALITY OF PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE PARTITIONS (CONT'D) The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if, for each sample of the 3 cubes tested at 28 days, none of the strength of the 3 cubes is below the specified characteristic strength of 4.5 N per mm² at 28 days. If the cube test results do not comply with any of the above conditions, the Contractor shall be subjected to charges imposed based on Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities". If the average compressive strength of 3 cubes falls below 3.5 N per mm² at 28 days, the entire affected lightweight concrete partitions shall be rejected. If the partitions are already installed, the Contractor shall remove them and install new partitions of adequate specified compressive strength at no extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller. The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cubes while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.

10.5

PRICING AND CONTRACTUAL ASPECTS Submit the names of the Suppliers and quantities to be supplied by each Supplier, the written contractual agreements with his suppliers and other information as required within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall not change the Suppliers without the written consent of the SO Rep.

10.6

SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION AND TEST REPORTS (PRECAST LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM CONCRETE PARTITIONS) Submit the following details to the SO Rep for approval before the manufacturing of precast lightweight concrete partition : (a)

Names of Suppliers.

(b)

Details of factories including addresses, size of workshops, equipment used and number of trained personnel.

(c)

Production process, curing and storage.

(d)

Mix design including foaming agent and dosage used.

(e)

Test report by PSB or SAC accredited laboratories, on compliance with the technical property requirements specified in subclause 10.2.1 "Technical Specifications" (a) to (d) (inclusive).

(f)

Test reports on compliance with the drying shrinkage and total water absorption requirements in accordance with SS 271. The test reports shall be dated within the validity period of six months prior to the date of submission of such reports to the SO Rep.

(g)

Mix proportions of cement mortar used. Admixture used to prevent shrinkage, efflorescence and cracking of cement mortar.

(h)

Quantity of lightweight partitions for each thickness in square metre.

(i)

Delivery and erection schedules.



DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION

10.7.1

Provision Of Access Provide and maintain reasonable access into and within the Site to allow the transportation and delivery of partitions by the Contractor's suppliers. The suitability of such access shall be decided by the SO Rep.

10.7.2

10.7.3

Erection (a)

Ensure that the workers have been properly trained in the handling and erection of the lightweight partition. Only qualified welders shall be employed for all welding required.

(b)

Before starting erection, check with the SO Rep whether skimming or plastering to the adjourning RC structures is required. If so, erection and alignment of the panels shall allow for this, so that in general, unless otherwise shown or noted in the architectural Drawings, the finished surfaces of the panels shall flush with that of reinforced concrete structures.

(c)

The accurate location of the tongue and groove of each panel shall be such that the offset between adjacent panel is within 2mm on both faces and the width of the resultant joint between any two adjoining panels is 4mm  2mm.

(d)

In general, the permanent connections shall be made as soon as the partitions are erected and aligned. Ensure that the panels are securely braced during erection.

(e)

All vertical joints of the lightweight partition wall shall be sealed with one layer of approved types of Polymer Modified Flexible Cementitious (PMFC) membrane or equivalent approved type of self-adhesive Fibre Mesh Fabric (FMF). The sealing of the vertical joints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's procedures and instructions. The method of application shall be approved by the SO Rep. The PMFC/FMF membrane shall be applied to the vertical joints prior to skim coating of the lightweight partition wall. The sealed joint shall be skimmed over with the skim coating material.

(f)

Where in the case, the partition wall layout does not permit the use of 300mm wide precast lightweight concrete partitions and the SO Rep approves the Contractor's proposal to replace them with solid blocks, notwithstanding the details or notes as shown in the Drawings, there shall be no cost adjustment to the Contract Sum.

Acceptable Final Surface Finish Check and ensure that visible air voids, bug holes and uneven or rough surfaces of the partitions and joints are properly skimmed at the Contractor's cost and expense to achieve an even smooth surface such that painting can be applied directly. All such finishing work at the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

10.8

STORAGE AND PROTECTION At all times the precast lightweight concrete partitions shall be properly stored and protected to prevent warping, bowing, cracking, chipping, staining and other Defect.


Bldg Spec Page 11-1 SECTION 11 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

11.1

CEMENT Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".

11.2

AGGREGATES Fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".

11.3

WATER Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".

11.4

STEEL REINFORCEMENT Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all subclauses under it.

11.5

CONCRETE MIX Unless otherwise specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it or in the Drawings, the grade of concrete in accordance with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it, shall be used for casting all non-structural concrete items in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. It shall be mixed, placed into position, compacted, cured and protected as specified for structural concrete. Precast concrete item shall be finished smooth and even, and shall not be installed into position in the Works until 14 days have elapsed from the date of casting.

11.6

HARDCORE Hardcore shall be hard, clean and dry stones, bricks, concrete or other approved material broken to pieces varying from 50mm to 75mm in size. It shall be laid to the required thickness, blinded with sand or quarry waste, well watered and consolidated with a power rammer or roller to an even surface, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

11.7

APRONS, PATHS AND PAVED AREAS Unless otherwise specified, all fillings under unsuspended ground floor slabs, aprons, paths, paved areas and other areas as indicated shall be 100mm thick hardcore in accordance with Clause 11.6 "Hardcore" laid over well consolidated ground. Unless otherwise specified, paths and paved areas shall be cast with Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric. The reinforcement shall be fixed at 25mm from the top of the surface. Aprons shall be fitted with expansion joints at 3m to 4.5m maximum centres as indicated. Joints along paths and aprons shall be saw-cut when the concrete has an age of at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut shall be at least 20mm. Paths and paved areas shall be finished with a minimum of two passes of power trowel without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete the work before final set. The paths and paved areas shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods.



PAVING SLABS FOR PATHS AND PAVED AREAS When paving slabs are specified, they shall be 600mm x 600mm x 50mm thick concrete slabs of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate obtained from approved manufacturer. Slabs shall be laid on a bed of 75mm consolidated quarry waste and layer of sand at least 25mm thick and all joints shall be grouted and pointed in 1:3 cement mortar. Inform the SO Rep of the proposed suppliers. Samples shall be submitted for approval before bulk ordering. Slabs shall be finished rough or patterned to give non-slip surface.

11.9

CONCRETE SURROUND TO INSPECTION CHAMBERS Leave openings as shown in the structural Drawings in the aprons where manholes are located to ensure a regular pattern and complete the rendering after manhole frames are placed in position. All covers shall be aligned with reference to the building line.

11.10

REINFORCED SURFACE DRAINS Reinforced concrete surface drains shall be constructed, as indicated in the Drawings.

11.11

RAMPS AND STEPS Unless otherwise specified, reinforced concrete ramps and steps shall be Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it, reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric placed at 25mm from the top. The concrete shall be finished with a minimum of 2 passes power trowel to ramps or 2 passes of hard steel trowel to the treads without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to finish the works before final set. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods.

11.12

PEDESTRIAN DRAIN CROSSINGS AND CONCRETE BOLLARDS Drain crossings and reinforced concrete barrier posts shall be constructed to positions, dimensions and details as shown.

11.13

PRECAST CONCRETE JAMB LINING TO WINDOWS Precast concrete jambs and sills of windows where shown shall be 50mm thick, 370mm wide reinforced with No. 10 welded steel fabric cast in 3 separate pieces, each having 2 No. mild steel holdfasts 40mm x 3mm x 305mm girth, one end cast into section, the other end built into bed joints of walls.

11.14

HEELSTONES All door frames shall be fixed in accordance with the Drawings. Heelstones shall be built up with 1:2 cement mortar mix in two or more operations to a height of 100/150mm as shown. It shall be carried out to the same section as the door frames and bonded into walls and bedded in strong cement mortar on floor with surface hacked rough.

11.15

CONCRETE COPING Cast-in-situ concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished in plastering as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Precast concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished smooth and even.



CONCRETE LINTELS Concrete lintels shall be of the sizes and with the reinforcement as shown in the Drawings. Lintels shall have exposed surfaces finished smooth and in line with the surfaces of adjacent walls.

11.17

SCUPPER CHANNELS TO ACCESS BALCONIES AND STAIRCASE LANDINGS Scupper channels shall be formed on the floors of access balconies and staircase landings, and shall be screeded to fall towards waste discharge stacks.

11.18

SLABS OVER CHANNELS 50mm thick precast cover slabs reinforced with No. B5 welded steel fabric shall be provided over channels and cast at random lengths with 100mm x 25mm hand grips at both ends and housed onto rebate sides of channels where shown.

11.19

COOKING SLABS AND PREPARATION TABLES Cooking slabs and preparation tables shall be as specified in Section 29 "Eating House" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

11.20

CONCRETE INFILL AROUND W.C. STOOLING The Contractor shall attend to and backfill with 1:3:6 concrete mix around water closets after installation or form concrete stooling where these are shown and finished as specified in Section 19 "Floor Finishes" including all clause and subclauses under it.

Section 12/.....


Bldg Spec Page 12-1 SECTION 12 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

12.1

MORTAR MIX FOR BLOCK AND BRICKWORKS All solid concrete block and clay brickwork shall be laid and compacted with approved prepacked mortar mix. The prepacked mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Potable water supplied by the PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar.

12.2

SOLID CONCRETE BRICKS OR BLOCKS All solid concrete blocks shall be machine-pressed and pressure vibrated cement sand blocks complying with SS 271:1983. No blocks shall be laid in position until 2 weeks after delivery to the Site.

12.2.1

Laying Of Solid Concrete Blocks The solid concrete blocks shall be bedded with mortar as specified in Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block And Brickworks". The work shall be carried up in a uniform manner with no portion raised more than 300mm above the adjacent portions. The corner shall be well bonded, plumbed and all perpends and quoins kept true and square. Joints shall be of even thickness and shall not exceed 10mm thick. They shall be raked to a depth of 5mm to 10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plastering. The bonding bar system shall be as specified in Clause 12.4 "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding" including all subclauses under it and shall be embedded into the horizontal joints. 90mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be constructed with 290mm/190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks and laid in stretcher bond, reinforced with minimum 64mm x 0.5mm thick expanded metal reinforcement at every third course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall not be more than 200mm above the floor level. Laps of expanded metal reinforcement shall not be less than 100mm. 190mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be laid in English bond and constructed with 190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks.

12.2.2

Plastering The solid concrete blocks shall be plastered as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

12.3

CLAY BRICKS All the clay bricks shall be of modular sizes. They shall be 200mm x 100mm x 100mm and/or 300mm x 100mm x 100mm. Average Work Size Designation 200mm x 100mm x 100mm 300mm x 100mm x 100mm


Length

Width

Depth

187.5mm 287.5mm

88.5mm 88.5mm

88.5mm 88.5mm


CLAY BRICKS (CONT'D)

12.3.1

Laying Of Clay Bricks All bricks shall be well wetted before use and the top of brickwalls where left off shall be well wetted before commencement of laying. Except for facing bricks, all faces of brickwork shall be left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of 5 to 10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster. No four (4) courses of brickwork shall exceed 400mm in height.

12.3.2

Modular Common Clay Bricks Brickwork as shown to be plastered shall be of modular common bricks. Plastering shall be as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All common bricks shall comply with the following requirements : Requirement

Standard

(a) Width of Brick

88.5mm ±3.5mm

(b) Compressive Strength

Minimum 25 N per mm²

(c) Water Absorption Ratio

Not more than 15% by weight

(d) Soluble Salt Content

Not more than 1% by weight

(e) Efflorescence

Slight (Not more than 10% of the brick surface area shall have salt deposit)

The method of testing shall be in accordance with SS 103:1974. Test reports showing compliance with the requirements stipulated in the above table shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the common bricks are delivered to the Site. Tests shall be carried out on common bricks delivered to the Site to ensure compliance.

12.3.3

Facing Clay Bricks Unless otherwise specified, all facing clay brick shall be red facing clay bricks. All internal faces of clay brick walls shall have joints raked off 5 to 10mm to take plastering. External faces shall be raked off, consolidated and pointed with cement mortar mix of 1 part masonry cement to 3 parts of fine sand by volume. Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stain, dust and cement mortar droppings.

12.4

CAVITY WALLS AND BRICK CLADDING (a)

Wall Tie / Bonding Bar System All brick walls and block walls shall be tied to the surface of reinforced concrete walls or columns by a wall tie system. The brick walls and block walls shall also be laterally restrained at both ends by fastening it to reinforced concrete columns with bonding bar system. The wall tie system shall consist of 2 no. of wall ties held in place by lipped frame. The frame shall have a pair of stoppers to allow each wall tie a vertical flexibility of 100mm for brick coursing. The frame and wall tie shall be 2mm and 3mm thick respectively. The fabrication details of the wall tie system shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Where the fabrication details are different from those as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall first obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding any further.



CAVITY WALLS AND BRICK CLADDING (CONT'D) (a)

Wall Tie / Bonding Bar System (Cont'd) The fabrication details of the bonding bar system shall be similar to that of the wall tie system except that the length of the bonding bar shall be 300mm and whereas that for the wall tie shall be 70mm for brick cladding construction and 100mm long for cavity wall construction. All wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be fastened with masonry drive pin to the reinforced concrete column or wall. The masonry drive pin shall be made of stainless steel AISI Grade 304 and shall have a minimum pull-out strength of 1 kN from the concrete. The wall tie system shall be spaced horizontally at 600mm centres to centres and so arranged such that individual wall ties at each horizontally-spaced system are in a staggered manner. The detailed arrangement of the wall tie system for a typical wall panel is shown in the Drawings. Individual wall tie shall be embedded 50 mm into the mortar joints and at every fourth course of the bricks. The wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be hot-dipped galvanised. The coating mass to at least 3 randomly selected points for individual wall tie/bonding bar and at least 3 randomly selected points for lipped frame shall comply with the following: (i)

Wall ties/bonding bars

) ) )

Minimum average coating mass shall be 505g per m² or 70 microns in accordance with BS EN ISO 1460 ; and

(ii)

Lipped frame

(iii)

Minimum coating mass on individual point shall be 395g per m² or the equivalent thickness of 55 microns in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.

The hot-dipped galvanised coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating appearance of any galvanised wall tie system is found otherwise, such wall tie system shall not be used. All galvanised wall tie system shall be stored in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white deposit on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 94% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint. Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least 2 samples of the galvanised wall tie or bonding bar system to be tested by an accredited laboratory to determine the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined using the gravimetric method in accordance with BS EN ISO 1460. Original certificate of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall within 24 hours make available one elcometer on the Site for measuring the thickness of zinc coating. (b)

Cavity Wall Construction The damp proof membrane (hereinafter referred to as "DPM" for the purposes of this clause) shall be extended to 200mm above the floor level as shown in the Drawings. The DPM shall be the type as specified in Clause 12.8 "Damp-Proof Membrane/Course" and shall be laid in continuous stretch to the whole width of the wall. The joints in the facing brickwall shall be completely bedded with mortar (except weep holes). Polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the manufacturer's instructions shall be applied at joints where the brickworks abuts reinforced concrete columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The erection of the facing brickwall shall be carried out first followed by the external plastering to beams and columns. Rake off excess mortar from the inner face as the work proceeds to prevent accumulation of mortar dropping at the base of the cavity. Provide vertical joints without cement mortar as weep holes at 1st and 2nd course of the facing brickwall and spaced at 900mm centres to centres in staggered arrangement. Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stains, dust and cement mortar droppings.



REINFORCEMENT TO SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK AND CLAY BRICKWORK WALLS AND PARTITIONS (a)

Expanded Galvanised Steel Reinforcement 90mm clay brick walls and solid block walls shall be reinforced with minimum 64 x 0.5mm thick expanded galvanised steel reinforcement at every 3rd course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall be 200mm above floor level. Provide a minimum lap of 100mm at reinforcement joints. Embed reinforcement into bed joints of wall and bonding bars. Blocks shall be built with the coursing and bonding as shown in the Drawings and blocks correctly bedded.

(b)

Bonding Bars System The bonding bar system shall be as specified in Clause 12.4 "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding" including all subclauses under it.

12.6

POLYURETHANE SEALANT Where external solid concrete block walls or brickwalls flush with reinforced concrete columns and beams, polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied at the joints between the walls and the columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The depth of sealant shall be 13mm minimum.

12.7

FOAM RUBBER STRIP INFILL Provide and lay close-cell foam rubber strip infill to the top most joints between the internal walls (clay brick, or solid concrete block) and the reinforced concrete beam or roof slab of top-most end corner dwelling units as shown in the Drawings. When the wall panel exceeds 5m in length, the foam rubber strip infill shall be interrupted by a cement mortar of 1 in 3 mix by volume infill for a length of 900mm.

12.8

DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE Provide and lay damp-proof course (hereinafter known as "dpc" for the purposes of this clause) to all walls complying with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m² laid to break joint on a layer of cement and sand mortar laid immediately under the lowest course of blocks at ground floor level or at a level 150mm to 220mm above ground level in brickwalls. Except for bath/wc and kitchen, all other areas including living rooms, bedrooms and household shelters of the first storey residential units shall be provided with damp-proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be laid to the underside of RC ground floor slab. The damp-proof membrane shall comply with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m². The substrate shall be float finished to receive the damp proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be strip bonded onto the substrate with rubberised bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's recommendations. All laps shall be 100mm wide and sealed with bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's instructions. Such damp-proof membrane shall be applied also to the base of shoplets' counter at the first storey as shown in the Drawings. The damp-proof course and damp-proof membrane shall conform to the following : (a)


Base Material (i)

The minimum mass per unit area of the base material shall not be less than 0.34 kg per m².

(ii)

The fibre base shall consist of one or more absorbent sheet of felt made from a mixture of animal and vegetable fibres.


DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE (CONT'D) (b)

12.9

Bituminous Materials And Fillers (i)

The minimum mass per unit area of bitumen shall not be less than (1.6 + ½ excess mass of dpc material) in kg per m².

(ii)

The saturating material shall consist of bitumen having penetration within the range of 60 to 230 (inclusive) at 25°C when tested as described in BS 4691.

(iii)

The coating material shall be oxidised bitumen stabilised by mineral filler and finished with a surfacing material. The mass per unit area of mineral filler and surfacing shall be within (0.9 +  excess mass of dpc material) in kg per m² to (1.5 + ½ of the excess mass of dpc material) in kg per m².

(iv)

When measured as described in BS 4692, the softening point of the finished coating material shall not exceed the softening point of the oxidised bitumen by more than 20°C.

(v)

The mineral filler shall consist of mineral granules or other materials. Not less than 90% by mass of the filler shall pass a 425 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410 and not less than 50% of the mass shall pass a 212 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410.

(vi)

The surfacing material shall consist of natural sand, mineral granules or other material which will prevent adhesion between layers of the finished damp-proof materials in the roll.

OPENINGS FOR LIFT DOORS Leave openings for door to lift well where shown. Build up masonry Works after lift door frames are fixed by the lift contractor and make good the walls. Floor screed at door shall have fall away from lift well as shown in the Drawings.

12.10

MORTICES, HOLES, CHASES, ETC Cut or leave mortices, recesses, holes, chases, grooves, etc. as and when required for bolts, pipes, bearers, outlets, skirtings, etc. Generally make good when necessary in cement mortar to match surrounding surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

12.11

SCAFFOLDING Provide adequate scaffolding as specified in Section 1 "General Specifications" including all clauses and subclauses under it to enable masons to work from the external side of external walls to achieve a high standard of walling and pointing.

12.12

GROOVE LINES TO MASONRY WALLS Form a grove in the mortar between the masonry walls and the reinforced concrete structures where the two surfaces are flush.

12.13

70mm THICK SOLID BLOCK INFILL IN BEDROOMS, LIVING/DINING AND KITCHEN Where shown, 70mm thick solid block infill shall be constructed with 190mm x 90mm x 70mm thick solid concrete blocks approved by the SO Rep. Connection of solid block infill to lightweight concrete panel and to RC column or wall shall be as shown in the Drawings. The solid concrete panel infill shall be finished with two coats of polymer modified mortar to match with the finished surface of lightweight concrete panels.



WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO EXTERNAL FULL HEIGHT FACING BRICK WALLS (a)

General The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external full height facing brick walls to test the water tightness of external wall construction. The external full height facing brick walls shall include full height facing brick walls directly facing the exterior but exclude walls along access balcony and balcony parapet walls.

(b)

Source of Water The water used for filling up of reinforced concrete water tank before the sterilisation shall be used for the water tightness test to the external full height facing brick walls. The Contractor shall only be allowed to sterilise the water tank after completion of the water tightness test to the external full height facing brick walls. PUB potable water shall not be used for the water tightness test except for re-test cases.

(c)

Method of Testing 10% of the units per building block with external full height facing brick walls sampled by the SO Rep shall be tested for water tightness. Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out the water test : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test Procedure of the water test Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate The method to suspend the nozzle

The nozzle of the water jet shall be fixed at a distance of 1800mm to 2000mm away from the surface of the external wall and incline at 30 degrees to the external wall as shown in the Drawings. The capacity of water delivered shall be 300 litres per hour and the duration of testing shall be 2 hours as shown in the Drawings. The nozzle shall be placed in such a way that it covers the entire wall panel. Ensure that the drawing of water from the water tank for testing shall not contaminate the water tank. The wall panel shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at the internal surface of the wall panels or the adjacent areas during the spraying and within half an hour after the completion of the spraying. (d)

Failure Of The Testing In the event the water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall rectify the dampness and/or leakage and carry out a second water tightness test. A further 10% of the units per building block with external full height facing brick walls shall be sampled by the SO Rep for the second water tightness test. In the event the second water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall carry out water tightness test to all external full height facing brick wall panels for the whole building block. The Contractor shall rectify all leakages and repeat the test until all the external full height facing brick walls have passed the test. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any external facing brick wall that perform unsatisfactorily during the water tightness tests.

Section 13/.....


Bldg Spec Page 13-1 SECTION 13 ROOFING

13.1

OVER-RIDING CLAUSE The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

13.2

CONCRETE ROOF FINISH The finished concrete roof shall be kept free from mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects during subsequent work to the roof. The roof shall be inspected by the SO Rep prior to the application of waterproofing system. Should any area of the roof be found unsatisfactory, render it with 1:3 non-shrink cement sand screed and approved bonding agent or other approved method at no extra costs to the Employer.

13.3

METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION SHEET

13.3.1

Profiled Steel Roofing Sheets Where shown in the Drawings, all profiled metal roofing and fascia sheets shall be 0.53mm "Zincalume colourbond Kliplok Hi-ten" or 0.53mm coloured "Speed Deck Hi-ten" or other approved in single lengths for each span. The colour shall be for one side and shall be selected by the SO Rep. Where shown, provide 300mm upturn to roofing at jack roof. The Contractor shall check whether the design for the roof can comply with the Manufacturer's specification before the actual laying of the structure. The metal roof structural plans and fastening details, supported by design calculations, shall be provided by the Contractor's PE. The design shall satisfy the Performance Requirements for its intended use and that include withstanding wind load in accordance with CP3 Chapter V. The Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate of Supervision not later than two weeks after completion of the Works, stating that he has carried out such supervision works and is fully satisfied that the Works have been constructed with such structural plans and fastening details. The accessories such as ridge capping, fascia capping, valley gutter, longitudinal and transverse parapet flashings, cap flashing and corner moulds and others shall be of 0.6mm (24 SWG) "Colourbond" or "Met Roof" or other approved to the shape and profile as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix also the gutter to the shape, material and profile as shown in the Drawings. The metal roofing, fascia sheets, flashings, copings, openings, pipe flashings, gutters and others shall be provided and installed by an approved Specialist who can be an approved manufacturer or the Manufacturer's duly authorised representative. If installed by the latter, the approved manufacturer shall provide instruction as to the manner of assembly or installation of the roofing and shall further be responsible for the work.



Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet Provide and lay vertically to fall one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet over steel purlins. Allow vertical lapping of 50mm minimum. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be secured to ridge and eave purlins by self-drilling fasteners complete with 38mm square metal washers. Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the metal roof to linkway. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite"; or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements : (a)

PSB Product Listing The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.

(b)

Reflectivity The reflectivity shall be : Side 1 (average) : Side 2 (average) :

(c)

90% minimum 90% minimum

Fire Tests The fire tests shall be :

(d)

BS 476 Part 7

:

Class 1

BS 476 Part 6 - Index of Performance - Sub-index

: :

12 maximum 6 maximum

Tear Resistance The tear resistance shall be : Machine Direction : 4000g minimum Transverse Direction : 4000g minimum

The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at intervals of not more than one metre. The markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.



CLAY ROOF TILES AND HEAT INSULATION

13.4.1

Clay Roof Tiles The clay roof tiles shall be the type as shown in the Drawings or as specified in the Supplementary Specification. The colour of the roof tile shall be approved by the SO Rep. (A)

Performance Tests The roofing tiles shall be tested for permeability in accordance with SS 70:1990. The tiles shall be considered as satisfying the test if no water has dripped from the underside of the tile after the 6hour test. The transverse breaking strength determined in the manner described in SS 70:1990 shall not be less than the following : Average Individual

- 900 Newtons - 675 Newtons

The test method for average water absorption percentage of tiles shall be in the manner as described in SS 70:1990. The average and individual water absorption percentage of tiles shall not be more than 8.0 percent and 10.0 percent respectively. (B)

Laying And Fixing Of Tiles The roofing tiles and tile accessories shall be provided and laid by the Manufacturer or by his duly authorised representative in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Submit drawings to the SO Rep to show the details of fixing and fastening tiles to roof. Nails and clips shall be of hot-dip galvanised or of non-ferrous metals. Nails shall be of sufficient length to penetrate into the battens by a minimum of 20mm, but shall not protrude beyond the depth of battens. All tiles shall range straight in courses and vertical edges in line from eave to ridge. Upon completion of all necessary trades, clean down the roof.

(C)

Sealing Of Gaps Gaps which occur through cutting of tiles at valleys shall be filled with bedding mortar. Any other gaps shall be sealed by approved means to effectively seal off the gaps.

(D)

Tile Accessories Provide and lay ridge connecting tiles, lip tiles, ridge tiles, verge tiles, socket tiles, eave tiles, flashing, eave comb, rafter grating, complete set of tile accessories for vent pipes (socket tiles, pipe and cap/lantern) and other tile accessories to roof to form a complete roof system. Lead flashing shall be 14.9 kg per m2 minimum and shall form a watertight joint to the profile of the roofing tile.

13.4.2

Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet Provide and lay horizontally to fall, one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet over rafters. Allow minimum 75mm for lappings. The insulation sheet shall be nailed or stapled to wooden rafters. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite"; or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements.



Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet (Cont'd) Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the clay roof tiles to linkways. (a)

PSB Product Listing The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.

(b)

Reflectivity The reflectivity shall be : Side 1 (average) - 90% minimum Side 2 (average) - 90% minimum

(c)

Fire Tests The fire tests shall be : BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1 BS 476 Part 6  Index of Performance  Sub-index

(d)

- 12 maximum - 6 maximum

Tear Resistance The tear resistance shall be : Machine Direction - 4000g minimum Transverse Direction - 4000g minimum

The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at interval at not more than one metre. The markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.

13.5

SOUND INSULATION MATERIAL Where sound insulation material is shown in the Drawings, the insulation material shall be one layer of 50mm thick, 60 to 80 kg per m3 density rockwool or other approved.

Section 14/.....


Bldg Spec Page 14-1 SECTION 14 CONCRETE FLAT ROOF

14.1

GENERAL The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all roofing Works required under the Contract comprising either one or both of the following systems : (a)

Ferrocement Secondary Roof Slabs;

(b)

Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Panel Roofing.

These roofing Works shall be carried out by an approved roofing specialist. Submit the name of the roofing specialist whom the Contractor intends to engage, to the SO Rep for approval not earlier than five months and not later than two months prior to the commencement of the roofing Works. 14.2

FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (A)

Ferrocement Roof Slabs (a)

Materials - General Standards (i)

Cement Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacturer and shall comply with SS26.

(ii)

Fine Aggregates Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS31. Alternatively, Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) fines of sizes not more than 7mm can be used to replace the natural sand for up to a maximum quantity of 30% by weight. The RCA fines shall comply to SS EN 12620.

(iii)

Water Water used for mixing concrete, washing formwork and curing of concrete shall be potable water supplied by the PUB.

(iv)

Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be welded steel fabric complying with SS32.

(v)

Admixtures Admixtures shall comply with SS320 or BS5075.

(vi)

Solid Block Supporting Stool Concrete block shall comply with SS271.

(b)


Source Of Material (i)

The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved by the SO Rep.

(ii)

The RCA shall be obtained from recycling plants listed in the NEA website


FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D) (A)

Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd) (c)

Design Specifications (i)

Slab Dimension Details of the precast ferrocement slab shall comply with the Drawings. The precast ferrocement slab shall be 900mm ±3mm long x 600mm ±3mm wide x 30mm ±2mm thick. The difference in diagonal lengths of each panel shall not be more than 3mm. Half size panel (450 ±3mm long x 600 ±3mm wide or 900 ±3mm long x 300 ±3mm wide) shall be used where necessary so as to minimise the cutting of panels.

(ii)

Mix Design The precast concrete slab shall be cast from a mix design which complies with the following requirements : (1) minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2 (2) maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45 (3) air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2200 kg per m³ (4) 28 days average cube strength of three cubes not less than 35 N per mm² The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Before commencing the manufacture of precast slabs, submit a proposed mix design to the SO Rep for approval and carry out trial mix if deemed necessary.

. (iii)

Reinforcement The reinforcement shall consist of a layer of square wire mesh 3.25mm (minimum) at 75mm spacing sandwiched between two layers of square wire mesh 1.5mm (minimum) at 25mm spacing. The wires shall be galvanized with a zinc coating weight of 65 g per m² minimum. The wires shall have a minimum proof stress of 300 N per mm².

(iv)

Finishes The slab shall be cast on a steel base plate and the top surface shall be trowelled finish.

(v)

Other Properties (1)

(vi)

For the initial Surface Absorption Test Value (BS1881), the hardened panel shall have ISAT values less than that stipulated below: Time (min)

10

30

60

ISAT Value (ml/m²/s)

0.20

0.15

0.1

(2)

Carbonation depth of hardened panel before installation shall be less than 3mm.

(3)

Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover measurement of less than 3mm.

Solid Block Supporting Stool The shape and size of the solid block for supporting the slabs shall be in accordance with the Drawings.




Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd) (d)

Manufacturing Process The slab shall be cast using steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the top surface shall be trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be adequately supported with approved spacers. After setting and demoulding, the slabs shall be neatly stored with easy access and visibility to every piece. During the first 7 days after casting, the slabs shall be placed on their edge during transportation. All panels shall be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method, duration and facilities prior to the commencement of actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing. Samples of the panels shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of full production, and the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, make adjustment to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.

(e)

Installation Of Secondary Roofing System On areas indicated for secondary roofing, the ferrocement panels shall be laid on top of solid blocks supporting stool in accordance with the Drawings. The ferrocement panels shall be placed with the off-form surface facing up. All gaps at the edges of the secondary roof shall be sealed with 13mm x 13mm x 18 BWG square shape galvanised wire mesh bent to shape. The bent-end (100mm) shall be sandwiched between the slab and support leaving a gap of 10mm above the roof surface. Where vent pipes protrude through the ferrocement slabs, openings shall be provided by carefully sawing the slabs so as not to cause any cracking. Ensure that the ferrocement slabs are not indiscriminately stack on the main reinforced concrete roof slab prior to the commencement of installation of ferrocement slabs. The position for the stacking of the secondary roofing slab shall be approved by the SO Rep. Stacking shall be allowed only at column positions and shall be limited to one pallet per column. The number of pieces per pallet shall not be more than the number of pieces supported by the column as shown in the Drawings. Any Defect in the main roof structure shall be made good as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. All slabs shall be indelibly marked and imprinted with the manufacturer's name before delivery to the Site.

(f)

CATV/Lightning Conductor Crossing Provide 150mm x 150mm (minimum) concrete curb crossing between water tank or lift motor room and reinforced concrete fascia for cable routing as shown in the Drawings.

(g)

Quality Of Concrete Work (i)

Inspection And Testing Provide facilities for the SO Rep to inspect the preparation and concreting Works. On each concreting day, at least one sample shall be taken for the casting of 3 cubes for compressive strength test (size 100 mm cube).




Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd) (g)

Quality Of Concrete Work (Cont'd) (i)

Inspection And Testing (Cont'd) Samples of welded steel fabric shall be taken at the factory for the following tests : (1)

strength testing and bar size measurement (SS32);

(2)

galvanized coating weight (The method of testing shall be in accordance with BS443).

Samples of ferrocement roof slab panels shall be taken at the factory and subject to batch testing at a testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the following aspects: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (ii)

Dimension measurement of panel; Cover measurement after cutting the panel; Density of the panel; Initial surface absorption test (BS1881); Carbonation test after cutting the panel.

Sampling Rate Reinforcement shall be sampled once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall be taken per sampling as one sample. Ferrocement roof slab panels shall be sampled at least once per contract, 3 pieces shall be taken per sampling as one sample.

(iii)

Passing Criteria Tests shall be conducted on one specimen out of the three sampled. If the specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality requirements. If the specimen fails any of the quality requirements, tests shall be conducted on the remaining two specimens. If two or more specimens within a sample fail to meet a specific requirement, the material/product shall be deemed to have failed that specific requirement. If the average result of the three specimens deviates from the required level by 15% or more, the batch of materials/products is deemed to have failed the specified requirements.

(B)

Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in the roof slabs with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade to match with those of the surrounding concrete, after the installation of services by the Contractor and/or other contractors. The Contractor shall also provide polyurethane base liquid applied waterproofing membrane around the service pipes at a radius of 300mm from the centre of the outlet. The application of the waterproofing membrane shall be carried up the pipes at a minimum height of 100mm from the floor surface.



FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D) (B)

Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area (Cont'd) The surface to receive the membrane shall be free from dust, laitance and ground smooth if necessary. The application of the membrane shall comply strictly to the recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer and/or SO Rep. After allowing for adequate curing, lay cement mortar to form a haunch around the pipes sufficiently to cover the waterproofing membrane. Adequate measures shall be provided to protect the membrane from being damaged during the screeding operation. The mortar mix shall be of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The waterproofing membrane shall comply with the technical performance requirements as specified in subclause 19.3.2 "Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane".

14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (A)

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

(B)

The panel roofing shall be executed in the following sequence : • • • •

(C)

Waterproofing Screed, followed by; Waterproofing Membrane, followed by; Insulation Materials, followed by; In-situ Waterproof Cement Panels.

Waterproofing Cement/Sand Screed All roof surfaces to be rendered with the cement/sand screeds shall be brushed clean and well wet before a screed is applied. All screed shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking. The screed shall be of one part cement to three parts sand (1:3) by volume, waterproofed with "Sika No. 1"; or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other approved waterproofing compound and laid to a fall of 25mm to every 3000mm towards the rainwater outlets, scupper drains or other outlets. Where in the case reinforced concrete roof slab is laid to fall, the screeding shall be in even thickness. Mixing of waterproofing compound shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations or instructions. Screeding thickness shall be a minimum of 20mm thick at the lowest point and laid in a workmanlike manner with even fall and finished smooth with wood trowelling. The cement shall be of a brand currently approved by the SO Rep, be fresh when delivered and used in the order of delivery. Any bag of cement containing partly set cement shall be removed from the Site. Cement of different brands shall not be mixed in use. Sand used shall be clean, evenly graded from fine to coarse pit sand, free from loams, silt and other organic matter. Clay sediment shall not exceed 10% by volume.



COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D) (D)

Waterproofing Membrane (a)

Preparation Of Surface Before applying the waterproofing membrane system, the entire screeded surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, free from dust, etc and in visibly dry condition.

(b)

Waterproofing Membrane System The contractor shall use “Shell Flintkote Ultra” water proofing system or waterproofing membranes system as listed in the HDB Materials List. The application of the waterproofing system shall fully comply with the Manufacturer's instructions.

(c)

Roof Details Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall be carried up at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown in the Drawings.

(d)

Bituminous Stains In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by bituminous stains, the Contractor shall remove such stains, make good and re-paint the affected surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

(E)

Insulation Materials The insulation materials shall be 50mm thick insulation boards. The board shall be multicellular board of extruded expanded polystyrene containing a flame retardant additive. It shall have natural skins on both surfaces and shall have the following properties : Density Thermal conductivity Compressive Strength at 10% deflection Water absorption: Capillarity Maximum operating temperature

: : : : : :

35 kg per m3; 0.029 - 0.032 W/mk; 300 kPa; less than 1% by volume; none; 74°C;

The board dimensions shall be 50mm thick ±2.0mm, 600mm wide ±3.0mm and 1250mm long ±6.0mm. The boards shall be laid loose on top of the waterproofing membrane in a staggered pattern. All joints between the boards shall be tightly fitted. Boards that are less than half (½) the width of the length shall not be placed at the edge but to be placed at least one row away from the edge. The whole Works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's/supplier's instructions.


Bldg Spec Page 14-7

14.3

COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D) (F)

In-Situ Waterproof Cement/Sand Panels The Works shall be executed in the following sequence :

(G)

(a)

Lay an overall 38mm thick in-situ waterproof cement and sand (1:3) panel over final layer of waterproofing membrane in alternate bay size 900mm x 900mm each. The cement and sand screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1"; or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other approved waterproofing compound. Waterproofing compound shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed instructions and subject to approval by the SO Rep. Cement and sand panels shall be laid in parallel strips of 900mm x 900mm. Panel surfaces shall be smoothened with steel trowel without adding dry cement and truly levelled to falls indicated as a finished floor surface. Joints between panels shall be "V" shaped 10 mm wide at the top and tapering to 6mm at the bottom. Wood strips shall be used and the completed depth of the joints shall be 16mm leaving the panel 22mm thick below the joint.

(b)

Immediately after setting, the panels shall be covered with hessian bags which shall be kept wet for not less than 3 days to cure thoroughly. Any defective panels shall be replaced by the Contractor.

(c)

After the removal of hessian bags and when the cement panels are cured, the joints shall be filled and grouted with bitumen compound. The bitumen applied shall be a hot-poured rubber-bitumen sealant to BS 2499 Type A1 or Type A2. The finished level shall be clean and the top-most joint shall be levelled with the panel surface to prevent water stagnation.

(d)

Extreme care shall be taken at the building expansion joint and to construct roofing strictly to the details shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep.

Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the Deed Of Warranty For Complete System Of Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing as produced in Appendix A4. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Councils, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A4(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.


Bldg Spec Page 15-1 SECTION 15 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

15.1

TIMBER Unless otherwise specified, all timber delivered to site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 20%. Timber shall be sawn straight, square, free from sap, shakes, waney edges, large loose or dead knots, large bores or termite holes and other objectionable Defect. Timber delivered to site shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all faces and minimum warping. Any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve to be used shall be removed from the site immediately and replaced with new members/components. Any portion of the timber work that warps, develops shakes or other Defect within the Defects Liability Period shall be removed. The defective work shall be replaced and rectified.

15.1.1

Structural Use Of Timber The use of timber for structural purposes shall comply with SS CP7. Timber used shall be Kempas or Keruing or Chengal or Balau, or other approved species of similar strength grade. Timber shall be treated with copper/chrome/arsenic preservatives according to SS 72. As far as possible, holes in timber shall be formed before preservative treatment. Holes and sawn surfaces of treated timber shall be brushed with two coats of creosote or other approved preservatives. Bolts, nuts, screws, nails, plates and steel section used for connecting timber shall be galvanised. Steel sections and plates shall be Grade 43A steel to BS 4360. Bolts and nuts used shall be black bolts to BS 4190. As soon as is practicable, and prior to the commencement of assembly, all structural timber delivered to the Site shall be subject to random sampling for testing by PSB testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS in accordance with SS CP7. One test shall be done per contract. In the event that the test fails, the Contractor shall remove the batch of timber from the Site. Another test shall be done on another batch. If the second test fails, all timber shall be removed. A fresh batch shall then be obtained from another supplier and tested accordingly. The sample shall be tested for moisture content and checked for dimensional requirements. The bending, compression and shear stresses shall also be determined. Preservative penetration and salt content shall be determined in accordance with SS 72. All carpentry work shall be sawn unless otherwise specified. All exposed timber shall be sanded to a smooth finish. Painting where specified shall be in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer.

15.1.2

Joinery Unless otherwise specified, all timber for joinery work shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow or other approved. Timber frames to flush doors, built-in or free standing furniture, walls, partitions, ceilings and others shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow or other approved. All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrot by planning and sand-papering to an approved finish. Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber members indicated in the Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 1.5mm shall be permitted for each wrot face. Take all measurements for joinery work at the building and verify it with the dimensions shown in the Drawings. Where discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken on the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the Works.



PREPARATION OF JOINERY WORK Place order for all joinery and carpentry items required for the work within one month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay owing to his failure to place order in good time. Preparation of joinery work shall commence at the beginning of the contract and shall proceed until all joinery is ready. These shall then be stacked on the Site and protected from weather.

15.3

FRAMING TOGETHER All frames shall be put together with well proportioned and tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged up tight and fixed with 10mm diameter hardwood pins. Leave pins projecting until immediately before fixing in position. Any member that warp, twist, split or develop any other Defect shall be replaced with new ones before wedging up.

15.4

JOINERY WORK All joinery work shall be made in strict accordance with detailed Drawings. Joints shall be formed in a proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery work. No nailing shall be permitted in joints for joinery. Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof.

15.5

PRIME FRAMES All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. The backs of all door and window frames, and other frames in contact with masonry work shall be coated with two coats of "Solignum", "Presotim" or other approved wood preservative. The preservative shall be allowed to be thoroughly dried before fixing the frames. All sawcuts shall be similarly treated.

15.6

FIXING OF TIMBER DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES INTO CONCRETE STRUCTURES Door and window frames shall fit neatly into the masonry openings. All crevices between frames and walls, beams or other masonry shall be filled up with 1:3 cement sand mortar. Heads of window and door frames which abut concrete structure shall be fixed with minimum 2 No. 75mm masonry drive pin "Ramset Nails No. 2330" or other approved to the numbers as shown in the Drawings. The feet of the door frames shall be fixed according to the details. All nails shall be completely embedded in the frames and stopped with an approved sealer.

15.7

FIXING OF DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES TO MASONRY Timber door and window frames shall be secured to masonry walls with 6 No. and 4 No. fishtailed holdfasts as shown in the Drawings. The ms holdfasts shall be 25mm x 3mm thick x 230mm girth, one end turned up and drilled and screwed to frame and the other end tailed and built into the joints of walling.

15.8

FIXING OF TIMBER CILL TO WALL/CONCRETE CILL Where shown, provide and fix minimum 2 No. of 10mm diameter x 75mm long mild steel dowel bar to each timber cill. One end of the bar shall project 25mm into the groove of timber cill and the other end shall be embedded 50mm into the groove of the wall or concrete cills. The grooves shall then be grouted with cement mortar 1:3 mix. For timber cill longer than 600mm in length, the dowel bar shall be fixed at maximum 600mm centres.



TIMBER DOORS Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. Sizes are nominal. The types of timber veneer and decorative inlays for main entrance door, bedroom door and bathroom door shall be approved by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, plywood panels shall be Grade 2 and of moisture resistant quality. The framing for flush door core shall be connected with corrugated metal fasteners or other approved joints for connections. (a)

Surfaces The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.

(b)

Moisture Content At the time of delivery, the moisture content of timber for all timber components shall not be less than 10 percent and not more than 15 percent. However, any difference in the moisture content of timber shall not exceed 3 percentage units.

(c)

Adhesive Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS 2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

15.10

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED SINGLE LEAF SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAY TO FLATS

15.10.1

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

15.10.2

General Where in the case of half-hour solid timber veneered doors with decorative inlay to entrances of flats are shown in the Drawings, provide and install such half-hour fire-rated solid timber veneered doors, mild steel door frames and ironmongery as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and FSSD approval. The dimensions and profiles of the mild steel door frames and door frame fixing shall be as shown in the Drawings. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 45mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame profile. The type and colour of timber veneers and decorative inlays shall to the design pattern and shall be approved by the SO Rep.

15.10.3

Shop Drawings And Sample Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings, PSB test certificates and FSSD approval for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.



Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire Rated Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlay To Flats Where specified, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. (a)

Schedule The ironmongery items shall be : (i)

4 nos.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB; or "Posse" M4L10AB; or “BLIY”N27-FIR-US5; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset.

(iii)

1 no.

240mm x 27mm wide antique brass finish barrel shoot bolt.

(iv)

1 no.


(v)

1 no.

Antique brass finish door viewer : (a) “YTL” 1827AB (b) “BLIY” 1827AB (c) “Accord” E3855 AB or other approved The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that the door viewer shall not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate.

(vi) (b)

1 no.

Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of bronze colour.

Keys For Locksets The lockset shall be provided with 3 sets of keys. These keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.

(c)

Grade Of Stainless Steel Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.

15.10.5

Certificates The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated solid timber veneered door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.10.6

Surfaces The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.10.7

Moisture Content The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".

15.10.8




Re-cycled Wood Door Re-cycled wood doors shall be alternative if proposed for use. All surface material and finish (veneer or laminates), door ironmongery and door accessories as specified shall be applicable unless otherwise stated. The re-cycled wood door shall be of re-cycled wood infill and shall be approved by the SO Rep. Workshop drawings shall be submitted for approval before commencement of installation. Unless otherwise specified, plywood panels shown shall be Grade 2 and of moisture resistant quality. (a)


(b)


The door shall attain the following physical properties: Physical Properties /Performance

Requirements

Density

Minimum 650 kg/m3

Moisture Content

7-9%

Bending Strength

2.2-2.7kg/cm2

Nail Holding strength

Minimum 65N/mm

Accelerated Weathering test:SS5: Part G4

Max 35% Gloss Loss No de-lamination, blistering or other defects

Re-cycled wood door shall have infill of hard wood fibers, manufactured through high pressure and high temperature steaming process. The re-cycled wood shall be “LHT Technical Wood” or equivalent, and shall have acquired the Singapore Environment Council’s Green label.



HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO SWITCH ROOM, PUB SWITCH ROOM, STORE ROOM, PUMP ROOM, REFUSE ROOM, BULKY REFUSE AREA AND STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF

15.11.1


15.11.2

General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switch rooms, PUB switch rooms, store rooms, pump rooms, refuse rooms, bulky refuse areas and staircase accesses to main roof are shown in the Drawings, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.

15.11.3

Shop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.

15.11.4

Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour firerated and approved by the FSSD. (A)

Double Leaf For double leaf doors :


(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

2 no.

Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.

(iii)

1 no.

"Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.

(iv)

1 no.

"Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.

(v)

1 no.

"Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.

(vi)

1 no.

"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.

(vii)

2 no.

Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish.

(viii)

1 no.

Approved stainless steel door selector.


Ironmongery (Cont'd) (B)

Single Leaf For single leaf doors :

(C)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

2 no.

Stainless steel locking eyes (4 mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.

(iii)

1 no.


(iv)

1 no.


(v)

1 no.

Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish.

Doors To Staircase Accesses To Main Roofs For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, in addition to the above-mentioned ironmongery requirements specified, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm stainless steel barrel shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof .

(D)


15.11.5

Certificates The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.11.6


15.11.7




HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS FOR FLATS

15.12.1


15.12.2

General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007.. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and FSSD approval.

15.12.3

Shop Drawings And Sample The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings, PSB test reports, PSB and FSSD approval for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

15.12.4

Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. (A)

Single Leaf For single leaf doors:

(B)

(i) (ii)

4 no. 1 no.

(iii)

1 no.

102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges. "Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of bronze colour.

Double Leaf For double leaf doors:

(C)

(i) (ii)

4 no. 1 no.

(iii) (iv)

1 no. 1 no.

(v)

1 no.

(vi)

2 no.

(vii)

1 no.

102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf. "Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides. Brass rebated parts. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type). 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type). Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of bronze colour. Approved stainless steel door selector.



Bldg Spec Page 15-9

15.12.5

Certificates Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.12.6


15.12.7


15.13

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM

15.13.1

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all subclauses under it shall ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

15.13.2

General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to MDF Rooms and Telecoms Equipment Rooms are shown in the Drawings, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or Class 1B.

15.13.3

Shop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.



HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM (CONT’D)

15.13.4

Ironmongery For Half Hour Fire Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire rated and approved by FSSD. (a)


(b)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by PBTS master key.

(iii)

2 no.


(iv)

1 no.

"Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.

(v)

1no.

"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.

(vi)

1 no.

Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.

(vii)

1 no.

Approved stainless steel selector.


(c)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by PBTS master key.

(iii)

2 no.


(iv)

1 no.

Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.


15.13.5

Certificates The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

BLDG12/S15.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM (CONT’D)

15.13.6


15.13.7


15.13.8

Handover Of MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.

15.14

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE (A)

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

(B)

General Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door frames and ironmongery to protected staircase. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and be listed in PSB PLS Class 1A or Class 1B. Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide.

(C)

Shop Drawings And Sample Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

(D)

Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.

BLDG12/S15.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE (CONT’D) (D)

Ironmongery

(Cont’d)

Schedule Of Ironmongery

(E)

(a)

4 no. Stainless steel door hinges for each door leaf.

(b)

1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish.

(c)

1 no. "Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles. The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm.

(d)

1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate.

(e)

1 no. "Alsecure" ASI/BC002/SS Ball Catch; or “Tiki” ACCORD RC/002 SS Roller Catch; or “YTL” BC002 SS Ball Catch or other approved stainless steel Ball Catch or Roller Catch.

Certificates The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, certificates as documentary proof that the complete system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

15.15

FULL PANEL EXTRUDED PVC SWING DOORS Provide and install extruded PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops, eating houses and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The extruded PVC doors shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall be made of high impact rigid PVC and shall comply with UL94 (Tests for flammability of plastic materials) Class 94 V-O. The colour of the PVC doors shall be selected from the following colour range : (a) BS 18C31 (f) BS 24C33 (b) BS 10B15 (g) BS 00A05 (c) BS 00A01 (h) BS 04B17 (d) BS 08C33 (i) BS 08C31 (e) BS 06D45 (j) BS 14C31 Provide the above colour samples to the SO Rep for selection of colour of PVC doors. Ironmongery to all PVC swing doors shall be as specified in subclause 16.4(F) "PVC Swing Doors".

15.16

NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS TO FLATS, TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES TO SERVICE DUCTS

15.16.1

The non fire-rated solid timber veneered entrance doors with decorative inlays to flats, timber veneered with decorative inlays bedroom doors, timber door with laminate finish to bedroom and bath / wc, timber flush doors to service ducts and timber flush doors with fixed timber louvres to service ducts shall be approved by the SO Rep

BLDG12/S15.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS TO FLATS, TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES TO SERVICE DUCTS (CONT’D)

15.16.2



(b)



Requirements

Density

Minimum 650 kg/m3

Moisture Content

7-9%

Bending Strength

2.2-2.7kg/cm2


Minimum 65N/mm

Accelerated Weathering test:SS5: Part G4

Max 35% Gloss Loss No de-lamination, blistering or other defects


BLDG12/S15.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BEDROOM

15.17.1

General Requirements All bedroom doors to be provided to residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors with 0.8mm thick high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame profile. The Contractor shall provide “wood grain” laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed. The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates shall be “Wilsonart”, “Nevamar”, “Pionite” or other approved.

15.17.2

Installation The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as recommended by the supplier. All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.

15.17.3

Shop Drawings And Samples Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

15.17.4

Surfaces The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.

15.17.5

Moisture Content The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 “Timber Doors”.

15.17.6


15.17.7



(b)


BLDG12/S15.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 15-15

15.17

TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BEDROOM (CONT’D)

15.17.7

Re-cycled Wood Door (Cont’d) The door shall attain the following physical properties: Physical Properties /Performance

Requirements

Density

Minimum 650 kg/m3

Moisture Content

7-9%

Bending Strength

2.2-2.7kg/cm2


Minimum 65N/mm


15.18

TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (FOR 3ROOM, 4-ROOM AND 5-ROOM FLATS)

15.18.1

General Requirements All doors to bath/wc of 3-Room, 4-Room and 5-Room residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors with 0.8mm thick high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame profile. The Contractor shall provide “wood grain” laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed. The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates shall be “Wilsonart”, “Nevamar”, “Pionite” or other approved.

15.18.2

Installation The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as recommended by the supplier. All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.

15.18.3

Shop Drawings and Samples Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

15.18.4

Surfaces The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.

15.18.5

Moisture Content The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 “Timber Doors”.

15.18.6


BLDG12/S15.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


15.18

TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (FOR 3-ROOM, 4ROOM AND 5-ROOM FLATS) (CONT’D)

15.18.7

Ironmongery For Semi-Solid Timber Door with Laminate Finish The ironmongery items for each door leaf of laminated semi-solid timber doors shall be:

15.18.8

(a)

3 nos.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws;

(b)

1 no.

“Posse” J4LA630-AB or “YTL” LH630AB or “Accord” J4LA630-AB or “BLIY” LH630AB or other approved antique brass finish lever handle lockset with emergency release on the outside and thumb turn on the inside and solid brass lever handles on both sides.

Rubber Stopper Provide and fix 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every bath/wc against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall tiles. Fix the rubber stopper with stainless steel screw and raw plug.

15.18.9



(b)



Requirements

Density

Minimum 650 kg/m3

Moisture Content

7-9%

Bending Strength

2.2-2.7kg/cm2


Minimum 65N/mm

Wet and Dry cycle test

No de-lamination, blistering or other defects


BLDG12/S15.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)


15.19

TREATMENT OF ROOF TIMBER All roof timber shall be treated with "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative applied with brush in two coats. Timber may also be treated with approved pressurised process.

15.20

FIXING OF TIMBER WALL PLATE Wall plates shall be fixed with 13mm diameter bolts cast 100mm into RC beams spaced at maximum 1.5m centres.

15.21

CEILING Where shown ceiling material to dwelling units shall be of approved 1200mm x 2400mm x 12mm thick non-combustible gypsum board. Boards shall be fixed to ceiling joists and noggings with 38mm galvanised steel clout nails at maximum 150mm centre at all edges and intermediate fixing (along the centre of the board) of galvanised steel clout nails shall be of maximum 300mm centres. Joints between boards shall be covered with 38mm x 15mm nominal, moulded wood fillets at edge of wall and open joint at intermediate joint.

15.22

COMPACT LAMINATE PANEL DOOR AND TIMBER DOOR FRAME FOR SERVICE CLOSET Provide and fix compact laminate panel door and door frames to service closet as shown in the Drawings. The door panel shall be 12mm thick white or light colour compact laminate panel. For each door panel, provide and fix approved nickel plated cabinet spring hinges (self closing) and approved cabinet door knobs as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, door frame shall be finished with a minimum two coats of enamel paint to match the colour of panel door.

15.23

PROTECTION OF THE TIMBER DOORS The factory varnished doors shall be covered by protection materials at the factory before delivered to the Site. The protection materials shall be adequate to cushion the door surface against impact or knocking during transportation and installation and to prevent staining. It shall not be removed, unless instructed by the SO Rep, till the flats are fully completed. The protection details shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The cushioning material for the door surface could be cardboard, bubblefoam or other suitable materials of adequate thickness. The materials used, including the adhesion tape, shall not cause staining to the doors in wet and dry conditions. The design of the protection shall allow the protection material to remain intact during and after the installation of the lock set and hinges at Site.

15.24

STORAGE OF DOORS The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per floor for the proper storage of the main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath / wc doors. The storage areas shall be kept in a dry condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over inspection, unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just prior to their installations.

Section 16/.....

BLDG12/S15.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 16-1 SECTION 16 IRONMONGERY

16.1

GENERAL Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the requirements specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The brand names specified in the Schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.

16.2

FIXING All ironmongery shall be fixed with stainless steel screws, screw driven and countersunked to form a sound connection. Screws shall not be hammered into position. If screws are found to be hammered in, the whole fixture shall be taken down, and refixed in accordance with the Specifications.

16.3

GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.

16.4

IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC Unless specified otherwise the following is the Schedule of Ironmongery for flats, shops, eating houses, kiosks and services rooms : (A)

Half-Hour Fire-Rated Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlay To Flats Refer to Clause 15.10 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlay To Flats" including all subclauses under it.

(B)

Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlays To Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors) Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for non fire-rated entrance door shall be : (i)

4 no.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or “BLIY”N27-FIR-US5 or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset.

(iii)

1 no.


(iv)

1 no.


(v)

1 no.

Antique brass finish door viewer : (a) “YTL” 1827AB (b) “BLIY” 1827AB (c) “Accord” E3855 AB or other approved

.

The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that the door viewer shall not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate.



IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (B)

Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlays To Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors) (Cont'd) (vi)

1 no.

Solid brass magnetic door holder : (a) "YTL" DH-027; or (b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or (c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or (d) “Forte” H6DH75ES (e) other approved.

The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in antique brass finish. (C)

Timber Veneered Bedroom Doors With Decorative Inlays Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for each door leaf of timber veneered doors with decorative inlays shall be : (i)

3 no.

102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws

(ii)

1 no.

“Posse” J4LA600-AB or “YTL” LH600AB or “Accord” J4LA600-AB or “BLIY” LH610AB or other approved antique brass finish lever handle lockset with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on both sides. The finish shall be in antique brass.

(iii)

1 no.

Solid brass magnetic door holder : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

"YTL" DH-027; or "Accord" DH-027AB; or "Nikon" DH-027AB; or “Forte” H6DH75ES or other approved

The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be in antique brass finish. (D)

PVC Swing Doors For each door leaf of PVC swing doors shown with mild steel door frame : (i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges

(ii)

1 no.

Privacy knobset with emergency release : (a) "Goal" US 4E; or (b) "Accord" C 130SS; or (c) "Tesa" 2503 CM; or (d) "Lucky" Model 1030; or (e) "Posse" 130-SS; or other approved

For each door leaf of PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops and eating houses shown without door frame :


(i)

2 no.

2.64mm thick (±0.14mm) 5052 aluminium alloy hinge and cotter pin 0.8mm thick x 25mm long nylon bush.

(ii)

1 no.

80mm brass cabin hook and eye.


IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (E)

Swing Door To Service Balcony And Courtyard Provide and fix to each door leaf of swing door to service balcony and courtyard, the following ironmongery :

(F)

(i)

2 no.

122mm x 96mm x 3mm thick or 3 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges in black or bronze colour finish. Tolerance for thickness of stainless steel hinges shall be ±0.2mm.

(ii)

1 no.

"Faultless" C8903 or "Lucky" Model 1711 or "Posse" C111AZ or other approved double cylinder cylindrical lockset with key both sides. The lockset shall be in bronze colour finish.

Door Stopper To Bath/W.C., Service Balcony And Courtyard Provide and fix a 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every bath / w.c. against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall tile. Fixing shall be with 25mm stainless steel or non corrosive screw and rawl plug. Provide and fix similar 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper for swing door to service balcony and to the wall surface of courtyard.

(G)

Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances Refer to Clause 18.24 "Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances".

(H)

Rear Door Of Shops/Eating Houses For each door leaf of rear doors of shops/eating houses : (i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges

(ii)

1 no.

Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset : (a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (c) “Accord” 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (d) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles; or other approved.

(I)

(iii)

1 no.

90mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt.

(iv)

1 no.

240mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt.

(v)

1 no.

100mm stainless steel hook and eye.

Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surfaced Finished Composite Doors To Switch Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area, And Staircase Access To Main Roof Refer to Clause 15.11 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Switch Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area And Staircase Access To Main Roof" including all subclauses under it.



IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (J)

Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To PUB Switch Room, Switch Room, Pump Room, Store Room And Bulky Refuse Area For doors (non-fire rated) to PUB switch rooms, switch rooms, pump rooms, store rooms and bulky refuse areas, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule : (a)

Double Leaf For double leaf :

(b)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ±0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

2 no.


(iii)

1 no.


(iv)

1 no.


(v)

1 no.

"Nikon" 225mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.

(vi)

1 no.

"Nikon 150mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.

Single Leaf For single leaf :

(K)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ±0.2mm.

(ii)

2 no.


(iii)

1 no.


(iv)

1 no.


Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Non-Fire Rated) For doors (non-fire rated) to MDF rooms and Telecoms Equipment rooms, provide and fix : (a)



(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8 mm ± 0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

2 no.

240mm x 27mm width AISI grade 304 stainless steel high barrel shoot bolt.

(iii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by PBTS master key.


IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (K)

(a)

Double Leaf(Cont'd) (iv)

(b)

2 no.


Single Leaf For single leaf doors : (i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8 mm ± 0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated by PBTS master key.

(iii)

2 no.


The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys. (L)

Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Service Ducts For Flats Refer to Clause 15.12 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Service Ducts For Flats" including all subclauses under it.

(M)

Ironmongery For Non-Fire Rated Doors To Service Ducts For Flats For non-fire rated doors to service ducts for flats, provide and fix all ironmongery in accordance with the following : (a)


(b)

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ±0.2mm.

(ii)

1 no.

"Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides



(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ±0.2mm for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no.

"Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both sides.

(iii)

1 no.

Brass rebated parts.

(iv)

1 no.

200 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).

(v)

1 no.

300 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).


IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (N)

Refuse Chute Aluminium Inspection Cover For each door leaf of refuse chute aluminium inspection covers :

(O)

(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

Stout hasp and staple of approved design.

(iii)

1 no.

Padlock "Union" 3104-50mm brass or "Yale" 110-30 or "Abloy" PL 220 shackle or other approved; with master key.

Access Trap Door To Roof For each door leaf of access trap doors to roofs :

(P)

(i)

1 no.

Stout hasp and staple.

(ii)

1 no.

Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or other approved.

Doors To Electrical Substation For doors to electrical substations, refer to the Drawings.

(Q)

Doors To Toilet Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For each door leaf of toilet doors of utilities centres/dustbin compounds :

(R)

(i)

3 no.


(ii)

1 no.

Private knobset with emergency release : (a) “Accord” C130; or (b) "Goal" US 4E; or (c) "Tesa" 2503cm; or (d) "Lucky" Model No. 1030; or (e) "Posse" 130; or other approved

(iii)

1 no.

25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the wall surface against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall tile.

Doors To Store Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For each door leaf of doors of stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds : (i)

4 no.


(ii)

1 no.

5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset : (a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle; or (c) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles; or (d) “Accord” 0706PZ/1406/1591SS" with stainless steel or brass chrome plated handles; or other approved.



IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (S)

Doors To Fuel Store of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For doors to fuel stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds : (a)

Single Leaf Door Ironmongery shall be similar to sub-clause 16.4(S) "Doors To Store Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound".

(b)

Double Leaf Door (i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges for each door.

(ii)

1 no.

Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset : (a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles; or (b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle; or (c) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles; (d) “Accord” 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with stainless steel or brass chrome plated handles; or other approved.

(iii) (T)

2 no.

240mm x 27mm wide stainless steel barrel shoot bolt.

Trap Door To Roof Of Booster Pump Room For each door leaf of trap doors to roofs of booster pump rooms :

(U)

(i)

1 no.

Stout hasp and staple.

(ii)

1 no.

Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or other approved.

Louvred Door To Staircase Access To Main Roof For each door leaf of louvred doors to staircase accesses to main roofs :

(V)

(i)

3 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel AISI grade 304 butt hinges, thickness 1.7mm ±0.2mm

(ii)

1 no.

Passage Knob Latchset : (a) “Accord” 182; or (b) "Goal" US 1E; or (c) "Lucky" Model 1082; or (d) "Tesa" 2505CM; or (e) "Posse" 182-SS; or other approved.

Escape Door At Consumer Switch Room (Where The Length Of Switchroom Exceeds 6.5m) Where escape door at the consumer switchroom is shown in the Drawings, provide and fix the ironmongery as follows : For each door leaf :


(i)

4 no.

102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel AISI grade 304 butt hinges.

(ii)

1 no.

"Accord 376"; or other approved single panic bolt. The panic bolt shall be of aluminium die cast body with extruded aluminium guides, steel tube shoots and cross bars and shall be in silver colour finish.


IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D) (W)

Ironmongery For Doors To Lift Machine Rooms For doors to lift machine rooms, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the followlng schedule :

16.5

(i)

4 no.

100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ± 0.2mm

(ii)

1no.

"Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or YTL-N28-FIR-AT-US32D or “BLIY” N-27-FIR US32D or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with stainless steel lever handles on rose or on back plate on both sides.. It shall comply with CP2:2000. The door shall be openable from the outside only by the use of a key and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room.

(iii)

1no.

"Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or "Accord" 93 or "YTL" 800 or "Union" or other approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action.

KEYS FOR LOCKSETS Unless otherwise specified, 3 sets of keys shall be provided for each lockset provided and installed. These keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.

16.6

LOCKSETS TO PUMP ROOM, STORE ROOM (FIRST STOREY), BULKY REFUSE AREA, REFUSE ROOM, SWITCH ROOM, LIFT MOTOR ROOM, STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF The locksets to pump rooms, store rooms (first storey), bulky refuse areas, refuse rooms, switch rooms, lift motor rooms and staircase accesses to main roofs shall be provided under the master key and keyaliked system.

16.7

MASTER KEY FOR PUB Padlocks and locks provided to the doors of all rooms which the PUB and/or PowerGrid and/or SPSL need access into shall be under one of the following master key series :

16.8

(a)

"Abloy"

-

MK911047; or

(b)

"Union"

-

G1HBG; or

(c)

"Yale"

MK48; or other approved

DOOR STOPPER TO HOUSEHOLD SHELTER Provide and fix one number 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper for every household shelter. The stopper shall be fixed to the wall surface of household shelter against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door handle from damaging the wall surface. Fixing shall be with 25mm stainless steel or non corrosive screw and raw plug.


Bldg Spec Page 16-9

16.9

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCKSET

The Lockset for the flats shall comply with the following performance requirements when subjected to the specified laboratory testing.

Door Type

Main entrance / Bedroom / Bathroom

Properties / Tests

Salt spray test for 96 hours (coating)

ASTM B117

Less than 0.1% corrosion Blister size no. 6, few to no. 10 on surface

Humidity test fro 240 hours (coating)

ASTM D2247

Less than 0.03% corrosion Blister size no. 8, few to no. 10 on surface

Cross-cut adhesion (coating)

ASTM D3359

5B

Chemical resistance for 12 hours (coating)

0.01M HCL ASTM D1308, spot method (open)

No colour change and no blistering Must be engraved and visible

Brand name

Main Entrance Door

Bathroom Door

Requirements

Standard / Test Method

Deadbolt endurance test 100,000 cycles

HDB method (by operating thumb turn)

Deadbolt shall not be damaged or inoperable after test.

Cyclic endurance test on lock lever handle/latch 300,000 cycles

HDB method (by operating lever handle)

Latch shall not be jammed, damaged, or inoperable after test. Lever handle shall not sag after test

Cyclic endurance test on lock lever handle/latch 150,000 cycles

HDB method (by operating lever handle)

Latch shall not be jammed, damaged, or inoperable after test.

Section 17/.....


Bldg Spec Page 17-1 SECTION 17 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

17.1

STRUCTURAL STEEL Grade 43A Steel (Mild Steel) to BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113 and BS EN 10210 (Part 1) shall be used for all structural members unless otherwise stated. The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and tolerance of all rolled shape, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washers, studs, welds and electrodes used and their design, installation and applications shall conform to the requirements of the latest BS 5950 or other relevant British and/or Singapore Standards. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings, hot finished structural steel sections shall be used. All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and shall be approved by the SO Rep. Defective, substandard or undersized members shall be rejected.

17.2

QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS Only qualified welders shall be allowed to perform welding work for structural steelworks. Provide the SO Rep with the names of the welders to be employed on the steelwork, together with certification that each of these welders has passed qualification tests conducted by competent authorities using Welder Procedures covered in BS 4871 or their equivalent. Welders shall have passed the qualification test within the preceding 12-month period. If required by the SO Rep, submit test samples made by the welders to be employed. Arrange for any welder to re-take the test at the Contractor's own costs and expenses when, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. Recertification of the welder shall be made to the SO Rep only after the welder has taken and passed the required test. The SO Rep may require welded joints to be tested with radiographic or other suitable methods at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Joints with defective welds shall be rejected. Should any two weld positions from the work of any welder show defective welds, such welder shall be permanently removed from the work.

17.3

FABRICATION Check all dimensions in the Drawings before fabrication and any discrepancy shall be reported to the SO Rep. Steelwork shall be fabricated to the required details as shown in the Drawings with sound workmanship acceptable by the SO Rep. All steel members shall be cut to exact lengths and with ends finished true and square so as to provide a good bed or joint. Structural steelwork shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible and shall be performed by qualified mechanics or welders skilled in the type of work required. Shearing, chipping, punching and welding of members shall be done carefully and accurately in accordance with the Drawings. All burrs and shavings produced by the drilling or reaming operation shall be removed. Stiffeners shall be fitted neatly and tightly against flanges with ends milled or ground to secure an even and full bearing against the flange angles. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with the flanges. Bearing surface shall be planed to true bed and abutting surfaces be closely fitted to ensure full bearing and close contact between assembled members. Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed finished surfaces shall be straight and smooth. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates, precisely cut, drilled or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be cleaned of burrs or rough edges. Holes for bolts shall not exceed the external diameter of bolts by more than 1.5mm and shall be well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in position. Oversized or misaligned bolt holes shall be rejected.



STEELWORK DELIVERED TO SITE Members delivered to site shall be straight, free from warping, twisting, distortion and accidental damages. Defective and substandard members shall be rejected and removed from the Site. All parts of steelwork shall be distinctly marked according to the marking as shown in the Drawings. Care shall be taken at all times in unloading, handling, stacking and storing of steelwork to avoid bending, twisting or otherwise distorting the steel members.

17.5

ERECTION PROCEDURE The method and sequence of erection of structural steelwork shall be duly approved by the SO Rep. The presence of any temporary materials, falsework, braces, etc, required to ensure stability and safety of structures shall be included in the proposed erection and shall be subsequently provided during erection.

17.6

FIELD INSTALLATION Field installation shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Shop fabricated members subjected to possible damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent distortions or other damages. After assembly, the various members forming part of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. Splicing of members shall be permitted only where indicated in the Drawings. Fastening of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into close contact. Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled and re-primed where exposed. Drift pins may be used only to bring together the structural parts and shall not be used in such a manner as to distort or damage the metal. Member installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure of concrete. Bracing shall be checked and maintained during concreting operation. The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors shall be strictly prohibited under any circumstance.

17.7

ERECTION Provide for all tools, machinery, cranage, equipment, falsework, temporary braces and everything necessary for the proper erection of the steelwork. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the work and the workers. Assembled frames or structures shall be neatly and carefully hoisted into position, securely and sufficiently bolted or tack-welded and temporarily braced as required so as to make adequate provision for all erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment and its operation. Bracing members, either temporary or permanent, shall be provided as required as soon as practicable and left in place as long as they are required for safety and stability. No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, welded or permanently connected until the whole or a major section of the steelwork is erected, checked for alignment, level, plumb and correctness and approved by the SO Rep. Permanent connection shall be carried out and completed strictly in accordance with the Drawings as soon as practicable after the approval of the SO Rep, with due care being taken not to interfere with the existing steelwork in any way.



ERECTION (CONT’D) Safe working platform and accesses shall be provided for erection, welding, bolting and inspection purposes. The HDB's Safety Unit shall be consulted on the safety features of the platform. Care shall be taken to remove any temporary braces, erection clips, etc to avoid any unsightliness upon removal. All tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal and smoothened by grinding. All tubular members shall be sealed with cover plate to prevent access of moisture to the inside of the members. Immediately upon erection, all abraded surfaces previously shop-primed shall be touched up with approved priming paint. Erection of roofing materials, if any, can only be proceeded when all steelwork for a block is completed and sag rod, if any, is effectively installed in purlins and rigidly tied back to the apex of the roof.

17.8

STANCHION BASES Stanchion bases and bearing plates as provided under columns, beams and girders or resting walls or footing shall be fabricated, installed and set accurately to the required level alignment with full bearing contact on support in accordance with the Drawings. Hold down bolts shall be cast together with reinforced concrete support. They shall be correctly placed and firmly held in position by template and accurately checked for level, alignment and centering before concreting. The bolts shall be protected to ensure that they are not subsequently bent, distorted or tampered with. Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on levelling screws, steel wedges or shims to correct elevations. After the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plates shall be set accurately using approved type of high-strength non-shrink grout in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Surface to receive grout shall be cleaned and moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed. Exposed surfaces of grout shall be moist cured for 7 days. Wedges and shims shall be cut-off, flush with edge of column base and bearing plates and shall be left in place.

17.9

BOLTING All structural bolts as shown in the Drawings prefixed with the letter 'M' for metric series shall conform with the following British Standards : Type of Bolt Black Bolt High Strength Bolt High Strength Friction Grip Bolt

Abbreviation Black HS HSFG

Standards BS 4190 BS 3692 BS 4604

Nuts and washers of the quality and strength compatible to the type of bolts specified shall be used. All joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, dust, grease, paint and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the members. All HSFG Bolts shall be installed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. All bolts shall be well screwed tight with at least one clear thread projecting beyond the nut when tightened up. Care shall be taken in getting the nut as tight as possible without stripping the thread. If after tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer shall be discarded. Where another face of the bolted parts has a slope, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to compensate for lack of parallelism. Bolts and nuts in a group of bolts shall be tightened in a staggered sequence from center outwards. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any interposed compressible material.



WELDING Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS 5135 and by qualified welders to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or specified. Electrodes shall be of approved type complying with BS 639 and shall be kept in a dry store in unbroken packets. Surface and edge of metal to be welded shall be accurately prepared in accordance with BS 5135 and shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material that would prevent proper welding or produce objectional fumes while welding is being done. All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the welding term and symbols shown in the Drawings and conform with BS 499. For unspecified welding, butt weld shall be full penetration weld with size equal to the thickness of the members to be butt joined and fillet weld shall be 6mm fillet weld all around the member. Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable. The effective throat thickness of fillet weld shall not be less than those specified in the Drawings and all weld terminating at the ends or sides of members shall be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not less than twice the size of the weld. Butt weld shall have correct weld preparation for the particular type of weld. The finished butt weld shall be proud of the surface of the parent material by an amount not exceeding 10% of the throat thickness of the weld and subsequently dressed off by grinding. Fillet and butt welds shall be made with such a number of passes as may be necessary to ensure sound thoroughly fused joints and with each deposit not exceeding 3mm of weld for each pass. Preceding layers shall be thoroughly cleaned, wire-brushed to remove scale, slag before succeeding layers are placed. Welds exposed in finished work shall be ground, dressed smooth and flush with adjacent surface. Welding work shall be carried out on a flat position whenever practicable. In assembling and jointing parts of a structure, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to minimize shrinkage stresses and needless distortion.

17.11

PAINTING (STRUCTURAL STEELWORK) All steel area to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped, wire-brushed, free from dust, rust and scale and shall be primed with a coat of lead and chromate free primer before erection, except for galvanised steel area. All galvanised steel area to be painted shall first be given one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer, then primed with one coat of lead and chromate free primer of approved quality before erection. Where surface treatment is specified in the Drawings, blast clean the surface to BS4232, application of one coat of zinc-rich epoxy primer to the Manufacturer's specification within 4 hours of blast cleaning and two coats of Zinc Phosphate Priming Paint, one coat in the Workshop and one coat on the Site, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Submit details of surface treatment to the SO Rep at least two weeks before blast cleaning. Steel members to be encased in concrete, connecting surfaces using HSFG Bolts and areas to be welded shall be free from scale, dust, grease and shall not be painted. After completion of erection, the steelwork shall be painted with at least one undercoat and one finishing coat of the types and colours approved by the SO Rep.



PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS Galvanised structural steel members and components as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanised to BS EN ISO1461. The Contractor shall obtain galvanising treatment service for structural steel members and components only from those Approved Galvanisers Listed in HDB Materials List. The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table D.1 of BS EN ISO1461. For steel with diameter of 6mm and above, the mean coating (minimum) mass shall be 610g per m2 and the local coating (minimum) mass shall be 505g per m2. For steel between 1mm and 5mm thick, the coating mass shall be complied with the following coating minimum masses. Average Coating Mass g per m2 (minimum)

Minimum Permissible Value (g per m2)

6mm thick and over

610

505

Under 6mm but not less than 3mm

505

395

Under 3mm but not less than 1.5mm

395

325

Under 3mm

325

250

Thickness Of Steel

The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating on the galvanised steel member does not comply with the requirements as specified, the galvanised steel member shall be rejected. Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised members and components in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint. Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised steel member or component to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined by the stripping test in accordance with BS EN ISO1461. Certificates of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep. All structural steelworks and materials are subjected to inspection and testing by the SO Rep in shop and field. The number and frequency of tests shall be determined by the SO Rep and at least 10% of the welded joints shall be tested. However, such test and inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for furnishing satisfactory materials and work. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject steel materials and/or workmanship which do not conform with the Specifications. The acceptance of the SO Rep of any materials and work shall not prevent their rejection later if Defect are discovered. The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities and bear all costs and expenses of everything necessary for the SO Rep to inspect and test any part of the steelwork and measurement of stresses and deflection, if required. Any work shown to be defective shall be removed or rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the acceptance by the SO Rep of the rectified work, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the soundness of the structure arising out of poor workmanship and defective work. The testing and inspection of welding shall conform to the following British Standards : Type of Test Magnetic particle flaw detection test Penetrant flaw detection test Ultrasonic examinations Radiographic examinations

Standard BS 6072 BS 6443 BS 3923 BS 2600, BS2910

All required tests of structural steelworks and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.



STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN Where the Contractor is required to design for the structural steel Works, the contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) to design and supervise such Works. The Contractor shall ensure that his PE engaged consider and comply with the plan submission and minimum design requirements.

17.13.1

Plan Submission The contractor shall ensure his PE comply with the following :

17.13.2

(a)

submit a complete design calculations and structural plans of his PE to HDB, Technical Management (C&S) Unit for clearance.

(b)

apply the permit to carry out Works prior to commencement of the affected Works.

(c)

Upon completion of the building work, submit a set of as-built tracing and digital in pdf or other approved format.

Technical Requirements Should any external claddings/features inclusive of those at and above roof level be supported by the main building structures, the submission shall be accompanied with a letter from the relevant Qualified Person (QP) of the main building structures that certify adequacy of the the building structures to support external claddings/features designed by the contractor's PE. In addition to comply with the required building code and standard, the design for all steel works shall meet the following minimum requirements : (a)

the gauge thickness of purlins shall not be less than 3mm.

(b)

the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 4mm for steel structures at lower than 4 -storey.

(c)

the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 6mm or greater for steel structures at 4-strorey and higher.

(d)

Hold down bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanised, electroplated or of stainless steel grade 316 satisfying acceptable standard and code of practice.

(e)

Use open steel section, wherever possible, to facilitate direct connection of cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels onto this steel section.

(f)

Should the steel hollow section be used, there shall be no drilling through it for connection of cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels. Necessary steel connecting plates or cleat angles shall be used and welded up to steel hollow sections for securing the cladding, roofing sheet and other metal panels.

Section 18/.....


Bldg Spec Page 18-1 SECTION 18 METALWORK

18.1

GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL Unless as specified otherwise, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.

18.2

NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM Unless specified otherwise all aluminium shall be natural anodised and the anodic coating shall be minimum 15 microns.

18.3

BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING

18.3.1

General Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings. Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and others as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).

18.3.2

Performance The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to ensure compliance with SS 212:2007.

18.3.3

Material (a)

Aluminium Alloy All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy 6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS 212:2007.

(b)

Accessories All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN 10088. All screws (except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel friction hinges shall be approved stainless steel screws precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the Drawings.

(c)

Rollers, Guides And Stoppers Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and the colour of exposed parts shall be black or bronze or other approved matching colour.

(d)

Joints & Gaskets All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212:2007.. Gaskets shall be neoprene or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).



BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING (CONT'D)

18.3.3

Material (Cont'd) (e)

Safety Device Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from jumping track and shall be in black or bronze colour or other approved matching colour. Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of safety lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function. The dimension tolerance for gap between the safety device and sliding panel shall comply with SS 212:2007. The sliding window shall pass the Jumping Track Test specified in SS 212:2007.

(f)

Weather Strip All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).

(g)

Hardware For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or 316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of stainless steel type 304 (minimum). All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in black or other approved matching colour. (i)

Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements:

(ii)

(a)

Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm;

(b)

Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.

Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 shall comply with the following requirements:


(a)

Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-in shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.

(b)

Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement: The operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.



18.3.3

Material (Cont'd) (g)

Hardware (Cont'd) (iii)

Requirements of improved stainless steel friction stays (with four screws) The stainless steel friction stays shall comply with the following requirements :

Resistant to obstructed stay track Strength of maximum opening stop Resistance to accidental loading

Endurance of Fastener

18.3.4

Test 300N for 5 second

Requirements No visible damage to window

Destruction Test

Arm bent at 40 kg (392N) minimum

200N for 5 second

Shall be operable after test

Destruction Test

Stay track permanent deformed at 65 kg (638N) minimum

1000N for 1 min

Window shall support the specified loading

Destruction Test

Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N) minimum Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N) minimum

50,000 cycles (sash > 600mm width or > 0.45 m2) 100,000 cycles (sash ≤ 600mm 2 width or ≤ 0.45 m )

Shall pass tests on - ease of fastener operation ; and - ease of movement of sash, after specified cycles (no adjustment throughout the test)

Finishes The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following : (a)

Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987.

(b)

Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.

The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits. 18.3.5

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.3.6

Storage And Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.




18.3.7

Installation (a)

Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and top hung shall be as shown in the Drawings. Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Detailing All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions. Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed. Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of a safety lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function. Window frames shall be fabricated to tolerances as shown below : 1 2 3 4 5

(c)

Length Straightness Angles Sides Squareness (Diagonals D1-D2)

+/- 1.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm +/- 2o +/- 1 mm +/- 4 mm

Cement Mortar Infill The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to installation of window frame. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before installation of window frame. Gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall shall be filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency. Approved backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant

(d)

Application of Sealant Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides and instructions. All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant applicators. Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion




18.3.8

Glazing (a)

Glass All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing panel of casement and top hung can be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass supplied shall comply with BS 952. All glass shall be relatively distortion-free. Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm ±0.2mm green tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75. Glazing panel to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6 mm ±0.2mm clear float glass. Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm ±0.2mm. All glazing panel shall meet dimensional tolerances as shown below : 1 2 3

(b)

Height Width Straightness of edge

+/- 2 mm +/- 2 mm +/- 1 mm

Glazing Accessories All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

(c)

Protection Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after installation.

(d)

Replacements In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the SO Rep.

(e)

Fixing Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the edges.

(f)

Cleaning Up Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and replace all damaged glass.

(g)

Concealed Slide Bolt Concealed Slide Bolt to be provided, where applicable, for all aluminium casement window.




18.3.9

Performance Requirements For Sealant All sealant for use between the aluminium window and wall/beam/column shall be approved by SO Rep. It shall be polyurethane based complying with the following requirements:


Performance / Properties

Test Method

Requirement - ASTM C 920

Staining and Color change

ASTM C510

No visible staining on white cement mortar base

Extrusion Rate

ASTM C1183

>10 ml/min

Rheological Properties

ASTM C639

Vertical displacement <4.8mm Horizontal displacement: No deformation

Indentation Hardness

ASTM C661

15 to 50

Tack-Free time

ASTM C679

No transfer of sealant to PE film (72 hrs)

Adhesion and Cohesion under Cyclic movement

ASTM C719

Total loss in bond and adhesion<9 sq cm

Effects of Heat Aging

ASTM1246

Loss in weight<10% No cracking and chalking

Effects of Accelerated Weathering

ASTM 793

No cracks (250hrs UV light)

Adhesion-in-Peel

ASTM C794

Peel strength>22.2N Bond loss<25% (for aluminium and mortar/concrete substrates)

Material Identification

ASTM E1252

Verification of base material


BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAMED ADJUSTABLE LOUVRE WINDOWS WITH POLYPROPYLENE GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS

18.4.1

General Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed adjustable louvre window and glazing complete with polypropylene glass holders/blade clips and all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.

18.4.2

Performance Adjustable louvre window shall meet the following performance requirements : (A)

Unlocking Test (SS 215:1979) (i)

Before Accelerated Wear Test The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less than 30 N and not more than 70 N.

(ii)

After Accelerated Wear Test The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less than 5 N.

(B)

Accelerated Wear Test (SS 215:1979) After the testing, the window mechanism shall show no sign of buckling, warping, jamming, wear and crack which could impair the effective operation of the window and the mechanism can still be operated and locked in the closed position.

(C)

Weathering In Laboratory Apparatus (DIN EN ISO 4892-2) The polypropylene clips shall show no visual change after 750 hours.

(D)

Salt Spray Test (ASTM B117 - 90) Moderate amount of black patches and white deposits on the control mechanism after 750 hours.

18.4.3

Material (a)

Aluminium Alloy All aluminium structural members shall be made of aluminium alloy 6063TF, 6063TE or 6063T5 complying with BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020

(b)

Accessories All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of the windows shall be made from aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel, mild steel treated to give corrosion resistant properties complying with SS212:1988. All screws, bolts and other accessories which are exposed shall be of approved matching colour.

(c)

Glass Holders/Blade Clips Glass holders/blade clips shall be injection moulded from ultra-violet radiation stabilised polypropylene of Shell HMA 6100 + Pentax uVS LDR 3%; or other approved. The colour of the holders/clips shall be black and shall be matt finish. The glass holders/blade clips shall be designed such as to readily accept 152mm wide and 6mm thick blades. The holders shall be designed to hold the glass firmly without the use of putty and in such a manner as to prevent the removal of the glass from the outside of the closed window. The glass holders/blade clips and drive mechanism shall be of a one piece moulding.



BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAMED ADJUSTABLE LOUVRE WINDOWS WITH POLYPROPYLENE GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS (CONT'D)

18.4.3

Material (Cont'd) (d)

Mullion The mullion shall contain an enclosed slot to accept the control handle.

(e)

Control Mechanism Control mechanism shall be produced from stainless steel AISI grade 304 or aluminium. The control mechanism shall be designed such as to provide a positive snap lock and that all components shall be easily replaced in case of failure.

(f)

Control Handle And Cap The control handle shall be produced from 6063 T5 grade aluminium of a minimum thickness of 2.5mm. The control handle shall be encapsulated by an injection moulded protective cap complete with an easy to operate tab. The control handle and cap when in the closed position shall be flushed with the outer frame. The control handle shall be powder-coated finished and in approved matching colour.

(g)

Fixing Fixing screws shall be concealed when the louvre blade clips are in the fully closed position.

(h)

Joints And Gaskets All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber.

(i)

Weather Strip All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or plasticized PVC.

18.4.4



(b)

Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.


Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised aluminium adjustable louvre windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.




18.4.6

Storage & Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.

18.4.7

Installation (a)

Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections The design and profile of the bronze anodised aluminium framed adjustable louvre windows shall be similar to those as shown in the Drawings. Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Detailing All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions. Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.

(c)

Cement Mortar Infill The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to the installation of window frames. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before installation of window frame. Any gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall shall be filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency. Approved backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant

(d)

Application of Sealant Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of approved sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides and instructions. All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant applicators. Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion.

18.4.8

Glazing (a)

Glass Unless otherwise specified, glazing panel of adjustable louvre windows shall be 6mm ±0.3mm green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75. Glazing panel to adjustable louvre windows between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm ±0.3mm clear float glass.

(b)





18.4.8

Glazing (c)


(d)


(e)


(f)


18.4.9

Performance Requirements For Sealant All sealant for use between the aluminium window and wall/beam/column shall be approved by SO Rep. It shall be polyurethane based complying with the following requirements: Performance / Properties

Test Method

Requirement - ASTM C 920

Staining and Color change

ASTM C510

No visible staining on white cement mortar base

Extrusion Rate

ASTM C1183

>10 ml/min

Rheological Properties

ASTM C639

Vertical displacement <4.8mm Horizontal displacement: No deformation

Indentation Hardness

ASTM C661

15 to 50

Tack-Free time

ASTM C679

No transfer of sealant to PE film (72 hrs)

Adhesion and Cohesion under Cyclic movement

ASTM C719

Total loss in bond and adhesion<9 sq cm

Effects of Heat Aging

ASTM1246

Loss in weight<10% No cracking and chalking

Effects of Accelerated Weathering

ASTM 793

No cracks (250hrs UV light)

Adhesion-in-Peel

ASTM C794

Peel strength>22.2N Bond loss<25% (for aluminium and mortar/concrete substrates)

Material Identification

ASTM E1252

Verification of base material

BLDG12/S18.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983 and its latest amendments.

18.5.1

Main Material All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.

18.5.2

Surface Finish The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated to comply with BS 3987 to provide an anodic coating of 25 microns.

18.5.3

Fastenings And Fixings All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS 268-1983. All screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.

18.5.4

Hardware Hardware such as locksets, guide, roller etc including its fixing shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983. The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without removing the outer frame from the structure. Locksets and guide shall be in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour. Safety devices shall be provided to prevent the door panels from jumping track and the colour shall be black or bronze or other approved matching colour. Unless specified otherwise, the lockset shall be openable by key from the outside and lockable by an open and shut control from the inside. The lockset shall be incorporated into the thickness of the door jamb of the slider and secured by means of stainless steel screws. For sliding door to private balcony not link to the main entrance door, the lockset shall be lockable by an open and shut control from the inside. Lockset shall be finished in black or bronze in colour or other approved matching colour.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS (CONT'D)

18.5.5

Joint Sealing Materials Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.

18.5.6

Weather Stripping Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.

18.5.7

Glazing All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. The glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall be 6mm ±0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75. Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.

18.5.8

Performance Tests When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for performance tests as required in SS 268:1983 and the following tests shall be carried out by PSB testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS : (a)

Roller (bearing device) - accelerated test of minimum 50,000 operations.

(b)

Anodic coating (25 microns) or Composite coating (aluminium 9 microns anodic coating and 7 microns for the liquid organic coating)

18.5.9

) ) ) under copper accelerated acetic acid salt ) spray (CASS) test for 8 hours to achieve ) a rating of 8. ) )

Workshop Drawings Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation. When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS (CONT'D)

18.5.10

Construction And Installation The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.

18.5.11

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The installed door shall be protected against damaged by agents such as contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.5.12

Cement Mortar Infill Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.

18.6

BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium swing doors complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.

18.6.1

Main Material All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.

18.6.2

Surface Finish The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated and finished by one of the following :

18.6.3

(a)

Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987

(b)

Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except the minimum thickness of coatings shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.

Fastenings And Fixings All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS268-1983. All screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.

18.6.4

Hardware The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without removing the outer frame from the structure.

18.6.5

Joint Sealing Materials Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.

18.6.6

Weather Stripping Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS

18.6.7

Glazing

(CONT'D)

All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. Unless otherwise specified, the glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall be 6mm ±0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75. The glazing panel to swing door between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm ±0.3mm thick clear float glass. Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials. 18.6.8

Workshop Drawings Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation. When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.

18.6.9

Construction And Installation The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.

18.6.10

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The installed door shall be protected against damaged by agents such as contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.6.11

Cement Mortar Infill Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.

18.7

POLYESTER POWDER COATING ON ALUMINIUM

18.7.1

Where polyester powder coating on aluminium are required, the polyester powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating "Oxyplast APR" or "Tiger Drylac U Series 58" or other approved. The powder coating shall comply with all the requirements as specified in these clause and subclauses. Unless otherwise specified, all test procedures shall be in accordance with AAMA 2604-98 "Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions And Panels". The powder coating shall be applied by approved applicator. (A)

General Requirements (i)

Surfaces Coatings shall be visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections in the dry film state on the exposed surfaces when observed at a distance of ten (10) feet (120 inches) from the metal surface and inspected at an angle of 90 degrees to the surface.

(ii)

Thickness The total dry film thickness on each significant surface of the coating on each piece shall be 60µm - 100µm.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


POLYESTER POWDER COATING ON ALUMINIUM (CONT'D)

18.7.1

(A)

General Requirements (Cont'd) (iii)

Minor Scratches And Blemishes Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repairable with the coating manufacturer's recommended product or system. Such repair shall match the original finish when tested as outlined in the subclause "Dry Adhesion" specified hereunder. After application, allow the repair coating to dry for at least 72 hours at 65-80 degrees F before conducting the film adhesion test. The size and number of touch-up repairs shall be kept to a minimum.

(B)

Test Specimens Test specimens shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of the production coated aluminium. A sufficient number of specimens on which to conduct instrument measurements with flat coated surfaces of at least 6" long and 3" wide, shall be submitted to the test laboratory.

(C)

Metal Preparation And Pre-Treatment A multi-stage cleaning and pre-treatment system shall be required to remove organic and inorganic surface soils, remove residual oxides, and to apply a chemical conversion coating to which organic coatings will firmly adhere. The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminium extrusions and panelling shall conform with ASTM D 1730, Type B, Method 5 or Method 7. The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum of 30 mg. per sq. ft. on the exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B 449, Section 6, Class 1. Processing shall conform with that specified in ASTM B 449, Section 5.

(D)

Colour Uniformity Colour uniformity shall be consistent with the colour range as established between the approved source and the applicator.

(E)

Specular Gloss Gloss values shall be within ±5 units of the manufacturer's specification. The Standard gloss range reference values are : Gloss Colours High Medium Low

(F)

Dry Film Hardness No rupture of film per ASTM D 3363.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Specular Gloss Value 80 - Over 20 - 79 19 or less



18.7.1

(G)

Film Adhesion (i)

Dry Adhesion No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering anywhere on the test specimen

(ii)

Wet Adhesion No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering anywhere on the wet test specimen.

(iii)

Boiling Water Adhesion No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering anywhere on the wet test specimen.

(H)

Impact Resistance No removal of film to substrate.

(I)

Abrasion Resistance Using the falling sand test method ASTM D 968, the Abrasion Coefficient Value of the coating shall be 20 minimum.

(J)

Chemical Resistance (i)

Muriatic Acid Resistance (15 Minute Spot Test) No blistering and no visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.

(ii)

Mortar Resistance (24 Hour Pat Test) Mortar shall dislodge easily from the painted surface, and any residue shall be removable with a damp cloth. Any lime residue should be easily removed with the 10% muriatic acid solution described in the Clause "Muriatic Acid Resistance" of AAMA 2604-98. There shall be no loss of film adhesion or visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.

(iii)

Nitric Acid Resistance Not more than 5 Delta E Units(Hunter) of colour change, calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244, when comparing measurements on the acid-exposed painted surface and the unexposed surface.

(iv)

Detergent Resistance No loss of adhesion of the film to the metal. No blistering and no significant visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)



18.7.1

(K)

Corrosion Resistance (i)

Humidity Resistance (For 3,000 Hours At 100 Degrees F And 100% RH With Cabinet Operated In Accordance With ASTM D 2247 or ASTM D 4585) Formation of blisters not to exceed "Few" blisters Size No. 8, as shown in Figure 4, ASTM D 714.

(ii)

Salt Spray Resistance(3,000 Hours According To ASTM B 117 Using 5% Salt Solution) Minimum rating of 7 on scribe or cut edges, and a minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field.

(L)

Weathering The coating shall maintain its film integrity and as a minimum meet the colour retention, chalk resistance, gloss retention and erosion resistance properties specified hereunder. The SO Rep shall request data relative to the long term durability of the colour/colours selected. (i)

Test Site And Duration Test sites for on-fence testing are acceptable as follows : Florida exposure South of latitude 27 degrees North at a 45 degree angle facing South for five years.

(ii)

Colour Retention Maximum of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) Colour change as calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244-85, Section 6.3 after the exposure test as per foregoing subclause "Test Site and Duration".

(iii)

Chalk Resistance Chalking shall be no more than that represented by a No. 8 rating based on ASTM D 659 after test site exposure.

(iv)

Gloss Retention Gloss retention shall be a minimum of 50% after the exposure test.

(v)

Resistance To Erosion Less than 10 percent film loss after the exposure test expressed as a percent loss of total film.

(M)

QUV A340 (ASTM G53, 3000 Hours - 8 Hours UV, 4 Hours Condensation) (i)

Gloss Retention 70 - 100%

(ii)

Colour Retention Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)



18.7.1

(N)

QUV B313 (336 Hours - 8 Hours UV At 60 Degrees C, 4 Hours Condensation At 50 Degrees C) (i)

Gloss Retention 80 - 100 %

(ii)

Colour Retention Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.

18.7.2

Appearance The powder coating on the significant surface shall not have any scratches through to the base metal. It shall be of even colour and gloss with good coverage. It shall not have Defect such as excessive roughness, flow lines, bubbles, inclusions, craters, blisters, dull spots, pin holes, scratches or any other unacceptable flaws. The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.

18.7.3

Colour The finishing colour of the powder coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek approval from the SO Rep on the colour selection prior to the application of the powder coating.

18.7.4

Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All powder coated aluminium letter boxes shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete letter boxes installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.7.5

Storage And Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of them at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.

18.8

ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER Provide and install aluminium roller shutters to shop fronts, eating houses and other premises as shown in the Drawings. Aluminium roller shutter shall be of pole operated aluminium slates complete with channel guide, angle bolts, lock, removable mullion roller casing and all other necessary components. For individual shop unit or eating house, same lockset (with master key) shall be provided to all aluminium roller shutters. Slates shall be made from aluminium alloy extruded sections. Thickness of aluminium slates shall be 1.6mm thick (S.W.G. 16) and anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum. The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation. When required, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SAFETY FEATURE TO PREVENT FALLING WINDOW LEAF FOR ALUMINIUM CASEMENT AND TOP HUNG WINDOW The Contractor shall incorporate the safety features (patent application no. 9905170-8) to all the new aluminium casement and top hung windows to be installed in the Works. The safety features shall ensure that the window leaf will not be detached from the outer frame or friction stay accidentally even if all the fasteners at the friction stay fail. The safety feature shall include: (a)

Incorporation of aluminium rails to the outer frame of the window to allow the friction stay to clip onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners. The friction stays shall have features that allowed them to be detach from the outer frame to facilitate the replacement of window leaves.

(b)

Incorporation of aluminium rails to the inner frame of the window (window leaf) for the arm of the friction stay to slot in between. The friction stay shall hold onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the aluminium casement and top hung windows incorporating details of the safety features for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall fabricate samples of the casement and top hung windows and demonstrate the function of the safety features to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the windows. The Contractor shall also ensure that their window manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design. A copy of the licensing agreement between the window manufacturer and the patent owner shall be submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings. 18.10

ALUMINIUM BI-FOLD SLIDING DOOR Provide and install bronze anodised aluminium frame bi-fold sliding door as shown in drawings. Aluminium extrusion shall be grade 6063 –T4, T5, or T6. Door shall be complete with concealed heavy duty pivot and roller devices. Provide flush thumb turn to operate concealed latch set. Thumb turn to match colour of door frame. Provide one stainless steel flush shoot bolt, concealed handle on door leaf housing pivot. Provide dust at base of door. No gap shall be visible between the two leafs in close position. Frames of door to be fixed to beam / walls by galvanized steel brackets. All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all accessories used shall be stainless steel. Glazing shall be 8.38mm thick laminated glass, tinted to match adjacent aluminium windows.

18.11

NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND ALUMINIUM INSPECTION COVER Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium inspection cover to the refuse chute on the roof top in accordance with the details inclusive with the relevant components. The aluminium cover shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns. The rockwool insulation material shall be of density 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance) and thickness of 38mm rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m². The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. When required, complete sample of inspection cover shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All inspection cover and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and recommendations.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)


BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM LOUVRED VENTS Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary components to pump room and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium louvred blades shall be of 2.3mm thick minimum and shall be of aluminium alloys to BS 1470 or ASTM B209. The aluminium vent including the aluminium louvred blades shall be anodised to a bronze finish and the anodic coating shall be 25 microns.

18.13

THREE-WAY NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS Supply and fix three-way natural anodised aluminium letter boxes to locations as shown in the Drawings. These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance shall be ±10%. The anodic coating shall be not less than 25 microns for the extruded aluminium section and not less than 15 microns for the aluminium sheets. Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall be provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to the two letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for “For Returned Mail Only”. The location of the “For Returned Mail Only” letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings. The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and painted on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The actual block number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The phrase "For Returned Mail Only" shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. Submit complete set of workshop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep. The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with the numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three keys shall be provided for each individual letter box. The two master doors shall be provided with different key-aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep. Three master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for Singapore Post shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post on Substantial Completion of the Works.

18.14

NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO MAIN ROOF Where shown, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium trap door to main roof in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium trap door shall complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns. The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance) and its thickness shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m². The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, ms guides and approved padlock, hasps and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of fixing all as shown in the Drawings. When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and recommendations.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)


NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO ROOF OF BOOSTER PUMP ROOM The aluminium trap door shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channel frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns. The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance) and its thickness shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m². The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, ms guides and approved padlock, hasps and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of fixing all as shown in the Drawings. When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep. All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and recommendations.

18.16

WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT/INTERFACE BETWEEN EXTERNAL ALUMINIUM WINDOW AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL a)

General The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external joint/interface between the external aluminium window and the adjacent structural member or in-full non-structural wall. The external joints/interfaces shall refer to those directly facing the exterior. However, those along the access balcony shall be excluded.

b)

Sample size and Method of Testing SO Rep shall sample half height windows in 10% of the units per building block for testing. One half-height window shall be tested in each selected unit. For building block with three-quarter height or full-height windows, the SO Rep shall sample 25% of the total number of the windows for testing. Watertightness shall be conducted at the following stages of work: Stage of work Within 3 months before the handing over inspection Within 1 month before the handing over inspection

Percentage of watertightness test Three-quarter height or Half height windows Full height windows 5%

15%

5%

10%

The watertightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for testing and each point shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The velocity of the water at the nozzle shall be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered shall be 600 litres per hour. The duration of the testing for each window shall be 80 minutes. The nozzle shall be held at a distance of 1m away from the joint/interface and pointed towards the joint/interface horizontally. Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying out the watertightness test: (i) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test (ii) Procedure of the water test; (iii) Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate and velocity at the nozzle; (iv) The method to suspend the nozzle In the case where sunbreakers come into the way, the nozzle outlet shall be brought in between the sunbreakers and the external window and pointed towards the joint/interface.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)


WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT/INTERFACE BETWEEN EXTERNAL ALUMINIUM WINDOW AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL (CONT’D) b)

Sample size and Method of Testing (Cont’d) The joint/interface shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears at the internal side of the joint/interface or internal side of any part of the building, during spraying and within half an hour after the completion of the spraying.

c)

Failure of the Testing In the event that any joint/interface fails the watertightness test, the Contractor shall investigate the causes of failure and seek the approval of the SO Rep on the rectification method. For each window watertightness test failure, the Contractor shall carry out re-test at the failed location and the SO Rep shall sample another window from the same building block for testing. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any aluminium window installation that perform unsatisfactorily during the water-tightness tests.

18.17

RESERVED

18.18

CLOTHES DRYING RACK

18.18.1

External Clothes Drying Rack Provide and fix stainless steel clothes drying racks extrusion together with 3 nos. of fixed stainless steel poles, stainless steel bended sections and other necessary components as shown in the Drawings. The whole rack shall be securely fixed into the structure. All stainless steel poles, stainless steel racks extrusion, stainless steel plates and stainless bended sections shall be Grade 316 stainless steel with polished finish as shown in the Drawings. The outer diameter of the poles shall be 25mm and the thickness shall be 2mm. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish under factory quality control condition. The weld and adjoining area affected by heat shall be chemically treated with approved acid and polished to prevent rusting. Details of material are as follow : (a) Stainless steel frame/support : 50mm x 50mm x 3mm thick (horizontal stainless steel rectangular hollow section) and 40mm x 40mm x 3mm thick (vertical stainless steel rectangular bended section), 3mm thick stainless steel clothes rack extrusion, 6 mm thick stainless steel base plate and stainless steel reinforcement plate. (b) Stainless steel poles : Approximate 2100mm length stainless steel pipes between supports or as shown in the Drawings. (c) End cap to pole : 1.5mm thick stainless steel sheet welded to stainless steel poles. (d) Expansion stainless steel anchor bolts : “Hilti” or “Ramset” or other approved M10 x 90 with setting indicator. All design of stainless steel structures shall comply with BS 1449. The stainless steel welding connection shall be designed to BS EN 1011-3:2000. The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Fixing details shall comply with the Drawings as shown.The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing the method of fixing, the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories, complete with PE endorsement and design calculations (where fixing details deviate from Drawings) to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation. The rack shall be well protected against moisture, cement and plaster splashes during construction. The completed work shall be clean and free from dust and stain.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(22) Sal(151211) (DPD)


CLOTHES DRYING RACK (CONT’D)

18.18.2

Internal Retractable Clothes Drying Rack Provide and fix retractable clothes drying rack together with necessary components as shown in drawings. Wall mounted rack shall be securely fixed at a height of 1600mm above the floor level to the wall of the kitchen or service yard to every flat or as directed by SO Rep. The number and length of poles are as shown in drawings. Details of components for two types of racks are as shown below. Component

Rack (Wall mounted)

Rack (Ceiling mounted)

Pole

Natural anodized Aluminium grade 5052 Stainless steel AISI grade 304

Bracket

Powder coated Aluminium grade 5052

Link

Hollow section Stainless steel AISI grade 304

Fastener

Stainless steel anchor bolts

Other fixing devices

Stainless washers.

Endurance

Rack retraction operation-20,000 cycles-No sign of damage or failure

steel

wing

nuts,

nylon

Heavy duty gear device, stainless steel wire rope with plastic insulation, and nylon belt.

The stainless steel welding connection shall be designed to BS EN 1011-3:2000. Details shown in Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing method of fixing, detailed sections, plans and other relevant details together with PE endorsement and design calculations to SO Rep for approval prior to its fabrication. The rack shall be well protected against moisture, cement and plaster splashes and other materials during construction. The completed work shall be clean and free from stains. 18.19

HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL RAILING TO PARAPETS All galvanised steel railing to parapets of access balconies shall be constructed as shown in the Drawings. Galvanised steel railing shall be round hollow section of dimensions and thickness as shown in the Drawings. The tolerance for the dimensions and thickness shall be ±0.5% and ±10% respectively. All galvanised steel railing shall be fully welded to galvanised steel flat support fixed securely into the structure as detailed in the Drawings. The dimensions and thickness of flat support shall be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.20

RESERVED

BLDG12/S18.DOC(23) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FOOT-OPERATED STAINLESS STEEL REFUSE HOPPERS FOR CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE Provide and fix approved foot-operated stainless steel refuse chute hoppers to openings of centralised refuse chute walls as shown in the Drawings. The refuse chute hopper shall be constructed of stainless steel of grade 304. The surface shall be of hairline finish. All joints shall be welded in full and no spot welding shall be used for the Works. All welds shall be smoothly and securely finished. The thickness of stainless steel shall be as shown in the Drawings. Details of the foot-operating mechanism and foot pedal shall serve as a guide only. Before installing, provide shop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep. The hopper door shall be able to open when a load of 3.5 kg is placed on the pedal.

18.22

STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG

18.22.1

General Provide and install stainless steel eyes with nylon anchors to parapets of access balconies, private balconies and living rooms of residential building blocks as shown below or to any other locations as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Stainless steel eyes shall be of AISI grade 304 stainless steel. Description

18.22.2

Eye-Anchors

Location To Be Installed

(1) Flats along access balcony.

1 pair per unit

Access balcony parapet/coping

(2) Flats with private balcony

1 pair per unit

Private balcony parapet/coping

(3) Flats not along access balcony and without private balcony (eg. corridor end, stairs, etc)

1 pair per unit

Living room window wall

(4) Executive Maisonette/Apartment

1 pair per unit

Private balcony parapet/coping

Quality Of Materials The nylon anchors shall be "Fisher S6-8", "Hilti HUD6-8", "Ramset DNP6-8", "Rawlplug M6-8"; or other approved.

18.22.3

Dimensional Requirements Eye-anchors shall conform with the following requirements : Thickness of stainless steel Internal diameter of eye Length of screw Length of screw shank

= = = =

5mm diameter ±0.5mm 15mm ±1mm 30mm ±2mm 32mm ±2mm

Size of drill bead and depth of drilling for the anchors shall comply strictly with the Manufacturer's/Suppliers written recommendations. 18.22.4

Samples And Verification Of Positions For Fixing Samples of eyes and anchors shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the carrying out of the work. Before drilling is carried out, verify with the SO Rep and obtain his approval on the locations and positions for the installation of eye-anchors.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(24) Sal(151211) (DPD)


STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG

18.22.5

Installation

(CONT’D)

Extreme care shall be exercised during installation to ensure that the parapets, copings, cills, etc. are not damaged or cracked which may cause water seepage or other Defect. The Contractor shall make good, repair or replace the damaged items at his own cost and expense to the full satisfaction of the SO Rep. All over-drillings, wrong drillings and defective work shall be rectified by an approved method. Notwithstanding the approval granted for the method of rectification, the Contractor shall be liable for making good the defective Works. After drilling, all cleaning of holes and preparation of surfaces for the insertion of nylon anchors shall strictly comply with the Manufacturers'/Suppliers' written recommendations. All fixing shall be accurately plumbed and aligned vertically and horizontally. The eye-screws together with the nylon anchors shall be applied with approved epoxy resin before screwing into positions. Ensure that all eye-anchors are fixed securely into the substrate to ensure a strong and firm grip. The completed fixture shall be clean and free of stains and rusts or other undesirable materials. The approved epoxy resin shall be one of the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) 18.23

Araldite Injection System IS 650 or CI xh 160AB; SBD EPIK; Concretin IHL; Conbextra EPLV; Chemi-EPIS; Sho-bond BICS; Febset Grout No. 6 or Non-Flow; or other approved.

STAINLESS STEEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE FOR CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE Provide and fix 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel directional signage for centralised refuse chute to each storey of residential building block. The size of the signage shall be as shown in the Drawings. The exact positions shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep. The stainless steel shall be of AISI Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of signage shall be by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes. All graphics and letterings shall be engraved and painted with the colour as indicated in the Drawings.

18.24

WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES Provide and fix wrought iron steel gates to all entrance doors of flats. The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings. The gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit the entrance door frames and be obtained from approved manufacturers. All welding and joints shall be neat and finished smooth. The gates shall have leaf opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The particular type of wrought iron steel gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as shown in the Drawings. All rivets shall be finished with matching colour to the gate. Provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(25) Sal(151211) (DPD)


WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES

(CONT’D)

Preparation All welded joints shall be made smooth. Remove rust mechanically from the surface of wrought iron. Clean the surface to remove oil, grease and dirt. Painting The Contractor shall seek the SO Rep approval on the painting system for the wrought iron steel gate. The Contractor shall submit a range of colours for the SO Rep approval. The colour and finishing of the gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The painting system shall be: (i) (ii) (iii)

One coat of CED primer; One coat of acrylic based or PU based finishing paint with special effects and antique appearance; One final coat of clear acrylic based or PU based lacquer.

Steel Property and Coating Requirements Steel and surface coating shall comply with the following requirements:

No

Performance Standard

Test

Requirements

1.

Tensile strength of steel

Reduced section tensile test

Min 402 N/mm2

2.

Chemical composition of steel

Spark Emission Spectrometry

Phosphorus, P - 0.050% max. Sulphur, S - 0.050% max.

3.

Adhesion

ASTM D 3359

5B

4

Scratch Resistance

SS 5 : Part F2

5

Pencil Hardness

ASTM 3363

6

Dry Film Thickness

SS 5 : Part B1 : Method No. 5

20 microns + 5 microns

7

Resistance to Continuous Salt Spray

SS 5 : Part G1

1000 hours : Less than 0.1% rusting; -Blister size no. 6 few to no.10 on surface.

8

Resistance to Humidity under Condensation Conditions (Cyclic Condensation)

SS 5 : Part G6

1000 hours : - Less than 0.03% rusting; - Blister size no.8 few to no.10 on surface.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(26) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Shall withstand a scratch test load of 2000g 2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film


18.25

FAN HOOKS Cast fan hooks into positions as shown; bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceilings of shops, eating houses or other premises as shown in the Drawings.

18.26

NUMERAL ESTATE BLOCK NUMBER SIGNAGE For each building block, including multi-storey carpark/garage block and precinct pavilion, provide and fix two numbers of numeral estate block number signages. The locations of the signage shall be decided by the SO Rep. The actual block number shall be made known later. The signage shall be made of aluminium and shall be finished with bronze anodic coating to a minimum of 15 microns. Submit a sample of the signage to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.

18.27

CAT LADDER TO MAIN ROOF Provide and fix to every access door to roof, aluminium retractable cat ladders and aluminium handrails, aluminium cage enclosures and the hand holds above roof slabs as detailed in the Drawings. Hollow blocks to which aluminium rungs are anchored shall be filled solid with cement mortar. Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix barricade to the front of lift motor room entrance which is close to the roof edge.

18.28

PROFILED STEEL ROOFING SHEETS Where shown, the profiled steel roofing sheets shall be as specified in Section 13 "Roofing" including all clause and subclauses under it.

18.29

MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME

18.29.1

Material Requirements Where shown, the mild steel door frame shall be 1.6mm thick and the overall dimension shall have a tolerance of ±1.0mm to the profile as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to brick/block walls shall be secured by mild steel fishtailed holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel fishtailed holdfast to the number and dimension as shown in the Drawings to each side of the frame. Fixing frame to RC shall be by mild steel bracket with CED primer or galvanised steel bracket with masonry drive pin on both sides all as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to lightweight concrete partition shall be secured by 3 no. of mild steel holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel holdfast to each side of the frame. The holdfast shall be welded to the partition reinforcement bar.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(27) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME

18.29.1

Material Requirements

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

Approved Cathodic Electrodeposition Primer to mild steel door frames shall be applied in the mill/ plant/factory and shall comply with the requirements shown below : Test

18.29.2

Results

Adhesion Test ASTM D 3359-02a

5B

Scratch Resistance Test SS5:Part F2:03

The coating shall withstand a scratch test load of 2000g

Pencil Hardness Test ASTM 3363-00a

2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film

Dry Film Thickness (measured by Elcometer 300 Coating Thickness Gauge) SS5:Part B1:03 Method No. 6

20 microns ±5 microns

Resistance to Continuous Salt Spray SS5:Part G1:03

Tested for a period of 1,000 hours: - less than 0.1% rusting - blister size no. 6, few to no. 10 on surface

Resistance to Humidity under Condensation Condition (Continuous condensation) SS5:Part G6:03

Tested for a period of 1,000 hours: - less than 0.03% rusting - blister size no. 8, few to no. 10 on surface

Installation Requirements The Contractor shall install the metal door frames to good verticality within a tolerance of 3mm. Measurement of the verticality for all the metal door frames shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the installation of door leaf. Door frames installed without good alignment and verticality shall be rejected. The grouting of the joints between the door frame and the adjacent structure shall be carried out under one separate operation. Before grouting, the door frame shall be checked for its verticality and proper bracing. It is preferred that the door frame be installed after the block work.

18.29.3

Temporary PVC Clip Protection System For Mild Steel Door Frame Prior to spray painting of ceiling and walls in the flat, mild steel door frame in the flat shall be protected with PVC trunking protection system. The trunking shall fit the size of door frame. The whole length of mild steel door frame shall be protected to minimise staining of door frame during spray painting of wall and ceiling. The trunking shall be removed after the satisfactory completion of spray painting.

18.30

HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS TO STAIRCASE Provide and install galvanised steel railings to staircase as shown in the Drawings. The galvanised steel hollow section handrails, balusters, hollow section supports and flat bottom rails shall be to the dimensions and sizes as shown. The galvanised steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into the structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish. Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(28) Sal(151211) (DPD)


HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Every batches of galvanised gratings delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by a certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm/company at which they are galvanised. For the purposes of this clause only the term "gratings" shall be deemed to include the frames and their miscellaneous components. Submit details of the galvanising treatment to the SO Rep for approval. Thoroughly remove all welding slags from the gratings prior to galvanising them. Any welding slags found remaining on galvanised gratings shall be rejected. Such rejected galvanised gratings shall be removed from the Site immediately. The galvanised gratings shall be tested for the zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a PSB accredited laboratory using magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices. Send all selected gratings for testing within one week of their delivery to the Site before their installation. 2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three number of gratings shall be selected for testing. The zinc mass coating to be tested shall be carried out at regular points on the surfaces of the steel angles and flats. The total no. of points tested for each grating shall be not less than 32. The results of the test at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the average zinc coating weight of that grating. The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass: Average Coating Mass 2 (g per m )

Minimum Permissible Value (g per m2)

6mm thick and over

610

505

3mm to 6mm

505

395

1.5mm to 3mm

395

325

Under 1.5mm

325

250

Thickness Of Steel

Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows:

18.32

(a)

The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor for any grating where the zinc coating mass is less than the average coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value as specified.

(b)

The batch of galvanised gratings from which any one of the representative samples fails to achieve the minimum permissible value as specified shall be rejected. In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his right under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor for each such failure. The rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.

METAL GRILLE TO COURTYARD, STAIRCASE AND END ACCESS BALCONY Provide and fix metal grille to courtyard (1st storey dwelling unit), to match with the front metal grille gate and for staircase and end access balcony to the size and profile all as shown in the Drawings.

18.33

TEMPORARY BARRICADE MILD STEEL GATE Where shown, provide and fix temporary barricade ms gate at first storey level to each and every staircase. The profile, sizes, pattern etc shall be as shown in the Drawings. Fix temporary barricade as and when required and instructed by the SO Rep. Remove such temporary barricades when required by the SO Rep and to make good all Defect arising thereof. Paint gate as specified in Section 23 - "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(29) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MILD STEEL RAILINGS TO STAIRCASES Provide and install mild steel railings to staircases as shown in the Drawings. The mild steel hollow section handrail, balusters, hollow section support and flat bottom rail shall be to the dimensions and sizes as shown. The mild steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into the structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and all welding shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish.

18.35

DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARDS AND STOREY INDICATOR PLATES Provide and fix directional signboards and storey indicator plates to sizes and at locations as shown in the Drawings. The directional signboards and storey indicator plates shall be made of 2mm thick aluminium alloy sheets or plates conforming to BS EN 485, 515, 573 or ASTM B209 and finished with 15 microns thick anodic coating. The fixing of these items shall be carried out with stainless steel screws with nylon plugs. Unless otherwise specified, the letterings and numberings shall be engraved and painted in black.

18.36

MOTORISED ROLLER SHUTTER TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHAMBER

18.36.1

Scope Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts, bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to centralised refuse chamber.

18.36.2

Material The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.5mm thick (minimum) zincalume steel curtain permanently lockseamed to form a continuous curtain or 0.8mm thick (minimum) galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural anodised aluminium curtain interlocking slats with end clips to secure laterally. The guide rails of the roller shutter shall be made of aluminium. Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material as the curtain to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with chain for manual operation. Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.

18.36.3

Coating Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Galvanised steel and zincalume steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colourbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.

18.36.4

Power Supply And Operating System Tap power supply for the motor and all control devices of the motorised roller shutter from a 10 Ampere TPN isolator in the centralised refuse chamber. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the motor. Provide a built-in-auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall automatically stop and reverse when it is obstructed during the closing operation. Either limit switch or motor overload device shall be used for the activation of the stop and reverse action. Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof plastic control box and mount it inside a recess opening (325mm height x 225mm width x 160mm depth) located outside and on the right hand side of the centralised refuse chute chamber viewing from the front. Provide the control box with "Camlock" model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key No. 01/3S/N65; or other approved. The control box shall contain "Up", "Down" and "Stop" buttons and one lever override control to switch from electrical to manual operation. Indicating arrows pointing upwards and downwards shall be marked on the "Up" and "Down" buttons. The motorised roller shutter shall stop automatically after the end of the opening or closing operation. The "Down" button shall be incorporated with a delay timer to enable the motorised roller shutter to commence closing after a preset time upon activation of the "Down" button. The setting range of the timer shall be from 0 to 3 minutes. Set the timer at the 1 minute value.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(30) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MOTORISED ROLLER SHUTTER TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHAMBER

18.36.4

Power Supply And Operating System

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

A second lever override control shall be provided within the centralised refuse chamber. When activated, all lever override controls shall enable the roller shutter to be lifted up (minimum 1.5m height) manually from the outside as well as from the inside. The outside control shall enable entry to the refuse chamber in case of electrical breakdown or other emergency. The operator shall then be able to roll up the shutter using the chain provided within the chamber. 18.36.5

Workshop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans, relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to ordering the system.

18.37

CONTRACT SIGNBOARD Provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard shall not be smaller than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of the proposed contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract signboard at the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within one month from the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of the SO Rep.

18.38

STAINLESS STEEL PLAQUE AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY Provide and fix one number 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel plaque to first storey lift lobby of size as shown in the Drawings. The exact position shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep. The stainless steel shall be of AISI Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of the plaque shall be by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes. All letterings and numberings shall be engraved and painted in black. HDB symbol (logo) shall be engraved and painted in red. Regardless of the number of building block in the Contract, only one number stainless steel plaque shall be provided.

18.39

HOUSE NUMBER (a)

For Flat Provide and fix wrought iron house number to each and every unit of flats. The house number shall be fixed on to wrought iron steel plate by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The wrought iron steel plate shall be painted in a colour matching the wrought iron steel gate. The painting of wrought iron house number shall similar to the wrought iron steel gates. The colour of the house number shall be approved by the SO Rep and the house number shall be clearly visible. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.

(b)

For Shops And Other Premises Unless otherwise specified, provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium or powder coated aluminium house number to each and every unit of shops and other premises. The house number shall be fixed by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The anodic coating to aluminium shall be 15 microns minimum. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.

18.40

SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE ROOMS Provide and fix sign plates to all services rooms as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the sign plates shall be fixed on the doors. The thickness of sign plates shall be as shown in the Drawings. The "Danger" sign plates shall be fixed onto door leaf and shall not block the ventilation louvres. The letterings shall be engraved in red. The "No Smoking" sign plates shall be provided for all switchrooms, PUB switchrooms and lift machine rooms.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(31) Sal(151211) (DPD)


18.41

SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE DUCTS Provide and fix sign plates to service ducts as shown in the Drawings. The sign plates shall be fixed at position as shown in the Drawings.

18.42

LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE FOR TYPICAL UPPER STOREY Provide and fix lift notice signages to the walls of every lift landing from the second storey to the top most storey. The position of the signages shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder coated aluminium sheet cut outs with sign face of acrylic sheet as shown. The acrylic sheet shall be reverse silkscreen graphics. The floor number indication shall be 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. The wordings on the aluminium sheet shall be silkscreen printed and the colour shall be approved by the SO Rep. Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. The signages shall have an additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign hall be mounted onto the wall as shown in the Drawings. Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.43

LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE BOARD AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY Provide and fix lift notice signage and notice board to the wall at the first storey lift lobby. The position shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder coated aluminium sheet. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The block number indication shall be of 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. It shall be attached with a notice board with an openable door panel. The hinges for the doors shall be concealed. The sign face of the notice board shall be polycarbonate panel with reverse silkscreen graphics and letterings. Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. Hardwood frame with softboard covered with fine felt of approved colour shall be fitted in the notice board. The notice board shall be provided with light tube for illumination. The signages shall have additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign shall be mounted onto the walls as shown in the Drawings. The details shown shall serve as a guide. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice plate, notice board and casing. Provide shop drawings to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation of the plate. Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice signages and notice boards. Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(32) Sal(151211) (DPD)


PRECINCT DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARD The Contractor shall provide and fix precinct directional signboard to the details as shown in the Drawings. The locations and number of precinct directional signboards shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the extruded aluminium frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out compartment with A2 size panel map sign face using acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. The bottom of the signage shall be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminaries for illumination. The whole signboard shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings. The precinct layout shall be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.45

SIGNBOARD FOR BLOCK ENTRANCE Provide and fix one number of signboard for the block entrance to the details as shown in the Drawings for each building block. The signboard shall be located at the position as decided by the SO Rep. The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the aluminium frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets with washers and screws as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out text mounted with 3-dimensionmal injection moulded lettering/number. The signboard shall be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminaries for illumination. The whole signboard shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables. ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.46

ILLUMINATED DIRECTIONAL SIGNANGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK Provide and fix one number of illuminated directional signage for estate block per ingress as shown in the Drawings. The signage shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The sign face shall be polycarbonate with text using transparent vinyl sticker reverse paste. The thickness of the aluminium frame and polycarbonate shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to the signages as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter powder coated aluminium support in ribbed detail and interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(33) Sal(151211) (DPD)


DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK Provide and fix directional signages for estate blocks as shown in the Drawings. The locations and the number of directional signages for estate blocks shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using polycarbonate with text front sticker paste using reflective stickers. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and polycarbonate shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to the signages as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter powder coated aluminium pole interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. A panel to house the layout map shall be provided as shown. The panel shall be powder coated aluminium sheet of the thickness as shown with sign face of acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. It shall be mounted to the powder coated aluminium support interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations. The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause 18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO Rep.

18.48

FASTENING DEVICES FOR ALL EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES AND ATTACHMENTS SUCH AS FLUOROCARBON COATED ALUMINIUM SUNBREAKERS, LOUVRES & PANEL For all external building features and attachments like aluminium sunbreakers, cladding , clothes drying racks, roof features; and metal railings/parapets exposed to the weather like those along common access and private balconies . The screws, bolts and nuts, rivets, brackets and other fastening devices shall be of stainless steel. The finished stainless steel rivets shall have a combined large circular flat disc and dome-shaped head after formation. The design and use of the stainless steel rivets shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. In the situation where the fastening devices like bolts and nuts are to be embedded in concrete or approved structural grout, approved galvanised bolts and nuts and other approved galvanised fastening devices can be used. The requirements in this clause shall take precedence over those specified in other clauses on external building features and attachments and roof features, on the use of screws, bolts and nuts, rivets and brackets and other fastening devices.

18.49

HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL RAILING TO AIR CONDITIONER LEDGE Provide and install hot dipped galvanised steel railings to air conditioner ledge as shown in the Drawings. The galvanised steel section handrail and support shall be to the dimensions and sizes as shown. The galvanised steel support shall be securely fixed into the structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish. The galvanised railing shall be zinc coated by hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with Clause 18.31 “Hot Dipped Galvanised Gratings”. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing the method of fixing, the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories, complete with PE endorsement and design calculations (where fixing details deviate from Drawings) to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation. Galvanised steel surfaces shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(34) Sal(151211) (DPD)


INTERNAL ALUMINIUM CLOTHES DRYING SLOT-RACKS Provide and fix natural anodized aluminium clothes drying slot-racks together with the necessary components as shown in the Drawings. A pair of aluminium clothes drying slot-racks shall be fixed to the ceiling of kitchen or service yard with “Hilti” M8H-10/37P8 stud or other approved for all the flats. Aluminium section and components shall be finished with natural anodic coating to minimum thickness of 15 microns. Samples of aluminium clothes drying rack shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation.

18.51

NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING

18.51.1

General Provide and fix natural anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings. Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and others as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).

18.51.2

Performance The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to ensure compliance with SS212:2007.

18.51.3

Material (a) Aluminium Alloy All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy 6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS212:2007. (b) Accessories All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication of the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN 10088. All screws (except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel friction hinges shall be approved stainless steel screws precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the Drawings. (c) Rollers, Guides And Stoppers Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and the colour of exposed parts shall be approved matching colour. (d) Joints & Gaskets All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212:2007. Gaskets shall be neoprene or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM). (e) Safety Device Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from jumping track and shall be in approved matching colour.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(35) Sal(151211) (DPD)



18.51.3

Material

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

(e) Safety Device Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of safety lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function. The dimension tolerance for gap between the safety device and sliding panel shall comply with SS 212:2007. The sliding window shall pass the Jumping Track Test specified in SS 212:2007. (f)

Weather Strip All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).

(g) Hardware For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or 316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of stainless steel type 304 (minimum). All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in approved matching colour. (i)

Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements: (a) (b)

(ii)

Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm; Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.

Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 shall comply with the following requirements:

(iii)

(a)

Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-in shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.

(b)

Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement: The operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.

Requirements of improved stainless steel friction stays (with four screws) The stainless steel friction stays shall comply with the following requirements :

Resistant to obstructed stay track Strength of maximum opening stop

Test 300N for 5 second

Passed

Destruction Test

Arm beng at 40 kg (392N) minimum

200N for 5 second

Passed

Destruction Test

Stay track permanent deformed at 65 kg (638N) minimum

1000N for 1 min Resistance to accidental loading

Endurance of Fastener

BLDG12/S18.DOC(36) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Destruction Test

Requirements

Passed Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N) minimum Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N) minimum

50,000 cycles 100,000 cycles

Passed (no adjustment throughout the test) Passed (no adjustment throughout the test)


NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING (CONT'D)

18.51.4



(b)

Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.


Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage All natural anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

18.51.6

Storage And Protection Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.

18.51.7

Installation (a)

Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and top hung shall be as shown in the Drawings. Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Detailing All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions. Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed. Window Frame Fabrication tolerances : 1 2 3 4 5

(c)

Length Straightness Accuracy of angles Accuracy of sides Squareness (Diagonals D1-D2)

+/- 1.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm +/- 2o +/- 1 mm +/- 4 mm

Application of Sealant Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's guides and instructions. All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant applicators. Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other contaminants that may affect adhesion.

BLDG12/S18.DOC(37) Sal(151211) (DPD)



18.51.8

Glazing (a)

(CONT’D)

Glass All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing of casement and top hung can be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass shall be relatively distortion-free. All glass except laminated glass supplied shall comply with BS 952. Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm ±0.2mm green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75. Glazing to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6 mm ±0.2 mm clear float glass. Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm ±0.2mm. Glass panel tolerances : 1 2 3

(b)

Height Width Straightness of edge

+/- 2 mm +/- 2 mm +/- 1 mm

Laminated Glass Laminated glass supplied shall comply with SS 341 : 2001. The PVB interlayer for laminated glass shall be from Solutia (Saflex RA41 or Saflex RB41) or Dupont (Butacite B52) or other approved. The manufacturer’s logo shall be printed on the laminated glass.

(c)


(d)


(e)


(f)


(g)


Section 19/.....

BLDG12/S18.DOC(38) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 19-1 SECTION 19 FLOOR FINISHES

19.1

NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SCREED

19.1.1

Cement Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".

19.1.2

Aggregate Aggregate shall comply with SS 31:1984. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm.

19.1.3

Preparation Of Surfaces All surfaces to be screeded shall be clean and damp but not wet before commencement of screeding work.

19.1.4

Locations Non-structural concrete screed shall be of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum size aggregate. It shall be laid to floor surfaces in locations specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings. The screed shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains and to finish to a surface directed by the SO Rep.

19.1.5

Thickness The minimum thickness of screed shall be 15mm for staircase half-landings and 25mm elsewhere or as shown in the Drawings.

19.1.6

Finishing And Curing All concrete screeds shall be finished with a minimum of two passes power trowel. The finishing shall be done without any sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water to the surface of the screed. Ensure that the crew of the finishing team is sufficient to complete the job before final set of the concrete screed. The concrete screed shall be moist cured immediately for seven days or with approved curing compound or other approved methods. For areas that are not accessible for power trowelling, the screed shall be finished with hand steel trowelling.

19.1.7

Reference Panel And Sample Panel A "Reference Panel" shall be designated by the SO Rep reflecting the current standard of the industry which is expected of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make himself available to view the designated reference sample and establish a common understanding of the required standard. At the commencement of screeding work, at least one "Sample Panel" shall be laid to the standard of the Reference Panel. The Sample Panel shall be approved by the SO Rep and all remaining screeding shall be carried out to the minimum standard of the approved Sample Panel. Sub-standard Works shall be rejected and replaced to the established standard.



CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING

19.2.1

Pre-Packed Mortar Screed Factory pre-packed dry-mixed screed shall be used for all floor screeding or floor tiling with cement and sand mortar. Approved pre-packed waterproof screed (dry mix of cement and sand with powder waterproofing additive) shall be used for areas where waterproof screed is specified. For mortar screeding to other floor areas, which do not require waterproofing, approved pre-packed floor screed shall be used. The pre-packed floor screed and waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount of water as specified by the manufacturer. The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproofing screed shall comply with the following performance requirements when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Prepacked Waterproofing Screed S/No

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Requirement

1

Average compressive strength

ASTM C 109 : 2001

 25 N per mm  40 N per mm2

2

Water penetration under 0.2/kgf/cm2

HDB Method (DIN 1084:Pt 5)

 5mm at 28 days

3

Shrinkage

Coutinho Ring

No crack

4

Flow

ASTM C 109 : 2001

80% -120%

5

Water absorption

ASTM C 413 : 2001

< 5%

6

Flexural strength

ASTM C 348 : 1997

> 2 N per mm2

7

Water Retentivity Stiffening time a) 1.0 N/ mm2 b) 2.0 N/ mm2

BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988

> 90%

BS EN 1015 –9 : 1999 (Method A)

a)  360 mins b)  420 mins

Volume change

ASTM C 827 : 2001

Shrinkage value of not more than 1%

2

8

9

Prepacked Floor Screed S/No

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Requirement

1

Average compressive strength

ASTM C 109 : 2001

2

Shrinkage

Coutinho Ring

 25 N per mm  40 N per mm2 No crack

3

Flow

ASTM C 109 : 2001

80% -120%

4

Water absorption

ASTM C 413 : 2001

< 5%

5

Flexural strength

ASTM C 348 : 1997

> 2 N per mm2

6

Water Retentivity Stiffening time a) 1.0 N/ mm2 b) 2.0 N/ mm2

BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988

> 90%

BS EN 1015 –9 : 1999 (Method A)

a)  360 mins b)  420 mins

Volume change

ASTM C 827 : 2001

Shrinkage value of not more than 1%

2

7 8

For screeding of large areas, ready-mix screed may be proposed, subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Contractor shall submit the mix design to obtain the SO Rep’s approval. Trial mix shall be conducted to verify the mix in meeting the performance requirements.



CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING (CONT’D)

19.2.2

Preparation Of Surfaces Before screeding, prepare the concrete surfaces by cleaning and damping slightly. Freshly laid screed, where exposed to direct sunlight shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking.

19.2.3

Locations (Prepacked Screed/Rendering) Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule Of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings. Except for rendering to treads and risers of stairs, the rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains, and finished to a level directed by the SO Rep. Pre-packed screed to treads of stairs shall be laid level and finished to a consistent fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The minimum thickness of the screed shall be 15mm or as shown in the Drawings. Where waterproof membrane is applied around the pipes and water outlets, pre-packed waterproof screed shall be laid to cover the waterproof membrane, as shown in the Drawings.

19.2.4

Water Test To Internal Floor Slab Water test shall be conducted to check the watertightness of the Bath/WC floor and the floor area surrounding the pipes and water outlet in the kitchen and balcony. In conducting the water test, the floor water outlet shall be blocked off temporarily with a polythene sheet or by other suitable means and the floor shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 10mm for 24 hours. For water testing the area surrounding the pipes or water outlets in the kitchen and balcony where floor tile is not provided, temporary blocking shall be provided to confine water around the pipes or water outlets. The water blocking detail shall be effective to maintain the water for the entire period of testing, for the test result to be accepted. The underside of the floor slab and the base of the adjacent walls, the discharge pipe, the pipe joints, the pipe cleaning eyes shall be checked for signs of seepage and leakage, within half an hour after the test period. Water test shall be conducted at the Bath/WC floor and the pipe surround and water outlet in the kitchen and balcony at the following stages of work :

Stage Of Work

Frequency Of Water Test

Within one month after the application of the waterproof membrane and the protective screed

All units

Within one month before handing over inspection

All units

In the event that any seepage or leakage occurs, the Contractor shall be required to rectify the defective Works as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. After the rectification, the same water test procedure shall be repeated. 19.2.5

Rendering To Lift Pit Approved pre-packed mortar shall be used to render the lift pit. Unless otherwise shown, the rendering shall be of an average thickness of 18mm.




19.2.6

Schedule Of Screed/Rendering Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in the Schedule below and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings :

Accommodation

3-Room and/or 4-Room and/or 5-Room

Location Kitchen

*

Bath/WC Service Yard

* *

Bedroom

Prepacked Screed

Grade 25 Concrete Screed

*

Household Shelter

*

Required only where floor finishes are specified for these locations.

* Concrete screed shall be used where no floor tiling is specified

*

Lift Lobby

*

Utility

*

Pump Room, Switch Room & MDF Room

*

Public Staircase Landing

*

Access Corridor & Void Deck

*

Risers & Treads Of Public Staircase

*

Room & Display Area Kitchen

Concrete screed shall be used where no floor tiling is specified No rendering is required for precast staircase

* *

Waterproof screed shall be used where the shop is at the 2nd storey & above

Shop Bath/WC

*

Service Yard *Denotes the specified screed/rendering.


Remarks

*

Living /Dining

Wash Area Next To Refuse Chute Chamber Wash Area

All Residential Block Common Areas

Prepacked Waterproof Screed

*



19.2.6

Schedule Of Screed/Rendering (Cont'd)

Accommodation

Market produce Lock-Up Shop

Wet Market

Eating House

Restaurant

Location

Prepacked Waterproof Screed

Prepacked Screed

Display Area

*

Preparation Area

*

Toilet

*

Toilet

*

Bin Area

*

Switch Room Refreshment Area Stall (Preparation & Serving Area) Toilet/Bath/WC

Grade 25 Concrete Screed

Remarks

Waterproof screed shall be used where the shop is at the 2nd storey & above Waterproof screed shall be used where the wet market is at the 2nd storey & above *

* * *

Wash Area

*

Bin Area

*

Room & Store

*

Kitchen & Toilet

*

Service Area

*

Waterproof screed shall be used where the eating house is at the 2nd storey & above

Waterproof screed shall be used where the restaurant is at the 2nd storey & above

*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.

19.3

WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT BATHROOM/TOILET, KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD

19.3.1

Scope Of Work The Contractor shall provide and lay a liquid-applied flexible non-cementitious (water-based) waterproof membrane or other approved flexible water-based waterproofing membrane to bathroom/toilet, kitchen and service yard. The waterproof membrane shall be applied over the entire floor of the bathroom/toilet with an upturn onto the pipes, door kerb and walls. The upturn shall be of minimum 50mm onto the pipes and minimum 200mm onto the walls. The upturn onto kerb shall be as shown in the Drawings. In the kitchen and service yard, the waterproofing membrane shall be applied around the floor water outlets. Application shall be limited to a radius of 400mm from the centre of the outlet unless otherwise specified.



WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT BATHROOM/TOILET, KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD (CONT'D)

19.3.2

Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane The flexible non-cementitious (water-based) waterproof membrane or other approved water-based waterproofing membrane shall comply with the following performance/product specifications when subjected to the specified laboratory testing: Characteristics/Properties 1) Verification of base polymer

2) Volatile content

Testing Method FTIR, DTA and TGA

TGA

Specifications Polymer which undergoes hydrolysis should not be used

< 50%

3) Resistance to water penetration 0.2 Kg/cm² for 12 hrs (3 specimens are to be cured for 3 days) Observe : Depth of penetration (mm)

DIN 1048, Pt 5: 1991 Depth of penetration should be 0 (HDB METHOD)

4) Adhesion to substrate (after 3-day cure) (N/mm2 ) condition as at cast water immersion

ASTM D4541:93

 0.2 N/mm2

5) Tensile strength (N/mm²) after 3-day cure - Before aging - After aging at 50oC, 14 days - Change in tensile strength (%) After immersion in the following chemicals for 72 hrs. at room temp: a) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl Change in tensile strength (%) b) 1.25% (v/v) NH4OH Change in tensile strength (%) c) 3.70% (v/v) HCl Change in tensile strength (%)

ASTM D412 : 98a

 1.2 N/mm2

6) Elongation at Break (%) after 3-day cure - Before Aging - After Aging at 50oC, 14 days

ASTM D412 : 98a

-


Change in Tensile Strength (%) After immersion in the following chemicals for 72hrs at room temp: a) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl Change in Elongation at break (%) b) 1.25%(v/v) NH4OH Change in Elongation at break (%) c) 3.7% (v/v) HCl Change in Elongation at break (%)

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

Value  1.0 N/mm2 & -ve change  20% no limit for +ve change

 150%

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

Value 120 % and -ve change  20% no limit for +ve change


WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT BATHROOM/TOILET, KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD (CONT'D)

19.3.2

Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane (Cont'd) Characteristics/Properties

Testing Method

Specifications

7) Crack Bridging

ASTM C836 : 95

a) b)

8) Hardness (after 2- hour cure) (Shore A)

ASTM D2240 : 95

 30

9) Set to touch dry testing

ASTM D1640 : 89

Should touch dry within 60 min.

Notes:

No cracking at 2mm width No cracks after 10 cycles of stretching and closing to a width of 1mm.

1.

The concrete test block for the application of membrane under ASTM 412 (98a) and 2 ASTM C836 (95) shall have a compressive strength of 40 5N per mm .

2.

The thickness of the membrane applied for the testing shall be equal to or less than the recommended thickness. It shall not deviate more than 0.2mm from the recommended thickness.

Where the waterproofing membrane span across any joint which is likely to crack, the waterproofing membrane shall be reinforced. To ensure compatibility with the waterproofing membrane, the reinforcement shall form an integral part of the proprietary system for the flexible water-based waterproofing membrane. 19.3.3

Application And Preparation Of Surface The surface receiving the membrane shall be flat and even. For the surface of floor slab to be applied with the membrane, the Contractor shall trowel the concrete to a level and smooth surface during casting. Where concrete or brickwall surface receiving the membrane is rough and uneven, the Contractor shall be required to level the surface with rendering. 45 degree mortar fillet with about 10mm leg length shall be formed to the edge between the floor and wall or pipe. Prior to the application of the waterproofing membrane, the surface shall be prepared to be free of dust and laitance, and wetted to damp without any surface water. The Contractor shall apply the waterproofing membrane in two coats. The waterproof membrane if packed in a two-part system shall be mechanically mixed with a proper mixer. The method of application and the curing time between the two coats shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and/or recommendations. The Contractor shall provide measuring gauges for site checking of the wet film thickness of the membrane at the time of application.



CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (COMMON AREAS AND NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS)

19.4.1

General (a)

Location and Extent Provide and lay structure/texture, glazed and unglazed ceramic floor tiles to common areas, nonresidential units and to any locations specified in the subclause “Schedule of Ceramic Floor Tiles” hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix 400mm x 80mm x 8mm thick or other approved matching glazed skirting tiles to access balcony, columns and walls at the void deck. The skirting tile shall be round-edged at one of the length. The Contractor shall submit a full range of colour glazed skirting tiles for the approval of the SO Rep.

(b)

Inconsistent Sizes In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all subclauses under it, the tiles shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups.

19.4.2

Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.

19.4.3

Testing Requirements (a)

Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 unless otherwise stated.

(b)

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.

19.4.4

Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with Table A unless otherwise stated : Table A : Requirements Compliance


Type of tile

SS 483 : 2000

(a)

Structure/Texture Tile

Annex G

(b)

Glazed Tile

Annex J

(c)

Unglazed Tile

Annex H



19.4.4

Technical Specifications (Cont’d) (a)

(CONT’D)

Dimensions The dimensions shall be as follows : Nominal Length

Nominal Width

Nominal Thickness


300mm

300mm

9mm

Glazed Tile

200mm

200mm

8mm

Unglazed Tile

200mm

200mm

8mm

The dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance to the following :

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(b)

Structure/ Texture Tile

Glazed Tile

Length The deviation, in %, of the average length of each tile from the average length of 10 test specimens.

Not more than 0.6%



Width The deviation, in %, of the average width of each tile from the average width of 10 test specimens.




Thickness The deviation, in %, of the average thickness of each tile from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.

Not more than 5%

Not more than 5%

Not more than 5%

Unglazed Tile

Surface Quality The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions, flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.

(c)

Physical Properties

Water Absorption Percent by mass



Glazed Tile

Unglazed Tile

Max of 0.5%

Max of 6 %

Max of 1%



19.4.4

Technical Specifications (Cont’d) (d)

(CONT’D)

Chemical Properties (i)

Staining Test

:

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard cleaning agent. Performance Criteria The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by cleaning solution.

(ii)

Slip Resistance

:

The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. Performance Criteria The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of X.

(iii)

Reverse Staining Test (for Glazed Tile only)

:

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : (a)

Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.

(b)

Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.

(c)

With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, “pond” the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total “ponding” duration of 30 minutes.

(d)

Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of methylene blue per litre.

(e)

Performance Criteria The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top or glazed surfaces.

(iv)

BLDG12/S19.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

In-Situ Slip Resistance Test

:

The contractor shall carry out two in-situ slip resistance tests on floor tiles that have been laid at the common areas. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method, in accordance with SS 485: 2001. Each test cover measurements over five different points. The locations chosen for the two tests shall be at high pedestrian traffic area, selected by SO Rep.


19.4


(e)

(CONT’D)

Slip Resistance Requirements For Outdoor Areas And Pedestrian Ramp Floor Finishes (i)

For Outdoor Areas The slip resistance requirement for outdoor floor finishes shall be Classification X. The slip resistance test shall be conducted under wet condition using a pendulum friction test method in accordance with SS 485:2001.

(ii)

For Pedestrian Ramp The slip resistance requirement for pedestrian ramp floor finishes shall be Classification W. The slip resistance test shall be conducted under wet condition using a pendulum friction test method in accordance with SS 485:2001.

19.4.5

Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as tabulated in the Schedule below including any other areas not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings. Accommodation

Location

Structured / Textured tiles

Wash Area

*

Upper Floor Lift Lobby

*

Ground Floor Lift Lobby

*

Access Balcony

*

Void Deck

*

Utility Room At Ground Floor Lift Lobby

*

Toilet Adjoining Utility Room

Eating House

Shoplet, Lock-Up Shop Market Produce Shop, Market Produce, Lock-Up Shop

Mini-Market

Restaurant

*

Stall (Preparation And Serving Area)

*

Refreshment Area

*

Toilet/Bath/W.C

*

Bin Area

*

Preparation Slab

*

Wash Area

*

Toilet/Bath/W.C

*

Display Area

*

Bin Area

*

Preparation Area

*

Toilet

*

Toilet

*

Bin Area

*

Floor

*

Toilet

* *Denotes the specified tile

BLDG12/S19.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Glazed tiles

*

Refuse Chute Chamber

Common Areas

Unglazed tiles



19.4.6

Laying of Floor Tiles

(CONT’D)

The lift lobby, wash area, void deck and access balcony including the scupper drains shall be tiled. The structured/textured ceramic floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards water outlets. Movement joints shall be provided at appropriate locations and approved by the SO Rep. Movement joints shall be provided at not more than 6m centres. UPVC expansion/movement joints shall be used and its colour shall match the floor tiles and approved by the SO Rep. Provide complete set of workshop drawings showing the laying pattern of floor tiles and/or wall tiles of void deck, lift lobbies and access balconies, wash areas and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles and/or wall tiles. 19.5

CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (KITCHEN, HOUSEHOLD SHELTER, SERVICE YARD, BATH/WC AND WC)

19.5.1

General (a)

Location and Extent Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to kitchen, household shelter, service yard, bath/wc, wc and to any locations specified in the subclause "Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles To Kitchen, Household Shelter, Service Yard, Bath/WC And WC" hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.

(b)

Inconsistent Sizes The tiles shall be sorted out at the factory into two size groups with each size group having the size range of 1 mm. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size group. There shall be clear indication of the size group in the tile boxes. This is required even if the sizes are within the dimensional tolerance allowed for the production variations spelt out in the subclause “Technical Specifications” specified hereunder.

19.5.2

Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it. The colour of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified in the schedule of the said subclause shall be BLUE and/or PINK and/or BEIGE and/or GREY. Provide samples of ceramic floor tiles with the colour range as specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.

19.5.3


Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated.

(b)


BLDG12/S19.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 19-13 19.5 19.5.4

CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (KITCHEN, HOUSEHOLD SHELTER, SERVICE YARD, BATH/WC AND WC) (CONT’D) Technical Specifications

(Cont’d)

Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated : (a)

Dimensions The dimensions shall be as follows : Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness

: : :

300mm 300mm 8-9mm

and/or Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness

: 200mm : 200mm : 7-8mm

and/or as directed by the SO Rep The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows :

(b)

(i) Length

:

Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than  1mm from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii) Width

:

Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than  1mm from the average width of 10 test specimens.

(iii) Thickness

:

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than  5% from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.


(c)

(d)

Physical Properties (i) Water Absorption

:

Shall be a maximum of 6%

(ii) Modulus Of Rupture

:

Minimum average strength shall not be less than 22 N per sq.mm.

(iii) Breaking Strength

:

Not less than 1000 N

(iv) Colour Tone

:

The colour tone of the tiles shall be consistent. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject tiles that show colour tone variation including such tiles that have already been laid.

:

The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :

Chemical Properties (i) Staining Test

Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard cleaning agent. Performance Criteria Location Methylene Blue Kitchen Class 1 Bath/WC Class 2 Where : BLDG12/S19.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Potassium Permanganate Class 2 Class 2

Class 1 = Stain removed by water; Class 2 = Stain removed by cleaning agent.


CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (KITCHEN, HOUSEHOLD SHELTER, SERVICE YARD, BATH/WC AND WC) (CONT’D)

19.5.4

Technical Specifications (d)

(Cont’d)

Chemical Properties (Cont’d)

(ii) Slip Resistance (for Bath/WC only)

:

Slip resistant properties shall be required and test carried out for ceramic floor tiles to bath/WC. The slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of X. The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4.

(iii) Slip Resistance (for kitchen and service yard)

The slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a classification of Y The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4.

(iv) Resistance to Household Chemicals

Minimum GB

(v) Reverse Staining Test

:



(b)


(c)


(d)


(e)


BLDG12/S19.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (KITCHEN, HOUSEHOLD SHELTER, SERVICE YARD, BATH/WC AND WC) (CONT’D)

19.5.5

Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles To Kitchen, Household Shelter, Service Yard, Bath/WC And WC

19.5.5.1

Provide and lay glazed ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Schedule below and including any other locations not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings.

Accommodation

SA and/or 2-Room

3-Room and/or 4-Room and/or 5-Room

19.5.5.2

Location

Glazed ceramic tiles 200mm x 200mm x 8mm (Nominal Size)

Ramp at Main Entrance / Bathroom/ WC Kitchen Bath/WC * Household Shelter With Door Facing kitchen Ramp at Main Entrance / Service Yard / Bathroom / WC Kitchen Bath/WC * Service Yard Household Shelter With Door Facing kitchen *Denotes the specified tile

Glazed ceramic tiles 300mm x 300mm x 9mm (Nominal Size)

Structured / Textured Tiles *

* * * * * *

Ceramic Tile Skirting to Service Yard Supply and lay 300mm x 80mm x 8mm thick matching glazed ceramic tile skirting to the service yard. The tile skirting shall match with the floor finish and shall be approved by the SO Rep.

19.6

POLISHED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES FOR LIVING ROOMS, BEDROOMS HOUSEHOLD SHELTERS WITH DOOR FACING LIVING ROOM AND DINING ROOMS

19.6.1

General (a)

Location For Laying Polished Porcelain Tiles Provide and lay rectified polished porcelain floor tiles to living rooms, bedrooms, household shelters with door facing living room, dining room and to any other locations shown in the Drawings. The polished porcelain floor tiles shall be *Brand X or *Brand Y or *Brand Z (*consultant shall specify the brand of the tiles approved by HDB) or any other approved equivalent subject to the approval of the SO’s Rep. Not withstanding the SO’s Rep’s selection, the Contractor shall ensure full compliance to all the technical requirements under this sub-clause. The Contractor shall produce test reports from accredited testing laboratory to show compliance with the specified requirements. The test reports shall be submitted to SO’s Rep before commencement of the sample unit.

(b)

Sorting of Floor Tiles In the event that the polished porcelain floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all sub clauses under it, the tiles shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups.

19.6.2

Approved Polished Porcelain Floor Tiles The type of polished porcelain floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all sub clauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the polished porcelain floor tiles as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made.

BLDG12/S19.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


19.6

POLISHED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES FOR LIVING ROOMS, BEDROOMS HOUSEHOLD (CONT’D) SHELTERS WITH DOOR FACING LIVING ROOM AND DINING ROOMS

19.6.3


Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with ISO 13006 :1998(E) ( Annex G) unless otherwise specified.

(b)

Test Certificates And Compliance Requirements Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.

19.6.4

Technical Specifications The polished porcelain tile shall be rectified with the edges trimmed to achieve precise dimension for its length and width. Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be in accordance with the following: (a)

Dimensions The dimensions shall be as follows : Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness

: : :

600 mm 600 mm 10 mm

The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows :

(b)

(i) Length

:

Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than  0.6mm from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii) Width

:

Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than  0.6mm from the average length of 10 test specimens

(iii) Thickness

:

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than  1.0mm from the average thickness of 10 test specimens. The average thickness of each tile shall not be less than 10mm.

(iv) Straightness Of Sides

:

Maximum deviation of each tile shall not exceed  0.6mm of the work size and chamfer edge of 0.5mm.

(v) Rectangularity

:

Maximum deviation of each tile shall not exceed  0.6mm of the work size.

(vi) Flatness of Surface

:

Maximum centre curvature of each tile shall not exceed 0.8mm of the length of the corresponding diagonal calculated from the work size. The maximum edge curvature of each tile shall not exceed 0.8mm of the work size. The maximum warpage of each tile shall not exceed 0.8mm of the length of the corresponding diagonal calculated from the work size.


BLDG12/S19.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)



19.6.4

Technical Specifications (Cont'd) (c)

(d)

BLDG12/S19.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Physical properties (i)

Water Absorption

:

Shall be a maximum of 0.1%

(ii)

Modulus Of Rupture

:

Minimum average strength shall not be less than 35 N per mm2.

(iii)

Breaking Strength

:

Not less than 1300 N

(iv)

Colour Tone

:

The colour tone of the tiles shall be consistent. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject tiles that show colour tone variation including such tiles that have already been laid.

The staining test method shall be in accordance with ISO 10545-14 : 1985 and the stain resistance shall be of Class 5 Minimum when subject to the staining agent, Green Test Paste and Olive Oil.

Chemical properties (i)

Staining Test

:

(ii)

Resistance to Household Chemicals

:

Minimum GB

(iii)

Slip Resistance

:

The Slip Resistance Test method shall be in accordance with SS 485:2001. The test shall be conducted under dry condition using dry floor friction test with a coefficient of friction of minimum 0.4.



19.6.5

Laying Of Floor Tiles The laying of floor tiles shall be in accordance with clause 19.7 “Laying of Ceramic Floor Tiles” including all sub-clauses under it.

19.6.6

Timber Skirting Supply and lay 1200mm long x 95mm x 12mm thick timber skirting to living, dining areas and to any other locations where glazed porcelain ceramic floor tiles are laid. The timber skirting shall be “Teak” or “Nyatoh” or other approved hardwood. A sample of the timber skirting shall be submitted for the SO Rep approval. Skirting shall be sanded smooth and varnished with 2 coats before being delivered to the Site for installation. Nail holes shall be properly patched up prior to the application of final varnishing coat. Timber skirting need not be provided for floor finishes to internal of household shelters.

19.6.7

Schedule Of Polished Porcelain Floor Tiles To Living Room, Bedroom and Household Shelter with Door Facing Living/Dining Room Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Schedule below and including any other locations not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings.

Accommodation 2-Room and/or 3-Room and/or 4-Room and/or 5-Room

Location

Polished Porcelain Tiles 600mm x 600mm x 10mm (Nominal Size)

Living Rooms / Dining Rooms

*

Bedrooms/

*

*Denotes the specified tile

BLDG12/S19.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)


19.7

LAYING OF CERAMIC FLOOR TILES

19.7.1

Workshop Drawings Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be laid with its joints to coincide with the joints of wall tiles. Provide complete sets of unit floor plans showing the laying sequence of living floor tiles to ensure that freshly laid tiles are not step upon before the tile adhesive is fully set. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles.

19.7.2

Pre-Packed Mortar Screed Approved pre-packed screed and waterproof screed shall be used for all floor screeding required or floor tiling, as shown in the schedule for rendering/screeding in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering". The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount of water as specified by the manufacturer. The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the performance specified in Clause 19.2.1 “Pre-Packed Mortar Screed”. The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the following performance when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :

19.7.3

Workmanship Lay ceramic floor tiles with tile joints coinciding with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep. The tiles shall be laid to form an even and flat finished surface, with consistent joint width. Where there is a water outlet, the floor tiles shall be laid evenly towards the water outlet. Tile spacers shall be used for laying of floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers shall be fully inserted into the bedding to ensure that there is no abut joints between the floor tiles, and to achieve the following joint width :

S/No

Floor Tile

Joint Width

1

Living Room /Dining Room/Bedroom

1.5mm to 2mm

2

Kitchen

2mm to 3mm

Contaminants from the tile back shall be removed prior to the application of tile adhesive. Due care shall be taken by Contractor to ensure that the floor tiles are not step upon before the tile adhesive is fully set. Each tile shall be fully bonded to the floor rendering without hollow sound upon tapping.

BLDG12/S19.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)


19.7


19.7.4

Storage and Protection

(CONT’D)

All tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage and chipping. They shall be stored in their original packaging in a clean, dry area to avoid damage and contamination. The Contractor shall provide temporary polyethylene sheet or other protective material approved by SO Rep to cover the whole finished floor to protect it against damage or staining by cement and plaster splashing or dropping and all other subsequent trades. The protective material shall be sufficiently thick, impermeable to water and non-staining in wet and dry conditions. It shall also be tough so that it cannot be torn or punctured easily at site. The protective material shall be provided immediately during and after laying of tiles. Prior to laying of the protective material, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the finished floor and ensure that the tiling is completed with the workmanship to the SO Rep satisfaction. All tiled areas shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying of the protective material. The Contractor shall be required to carry out regular maintenance to ensure that the protection is firmly in place and in serviceable condition at all times. The protective material shall not be removed until such time that all other works have been completed and the building is ready for handover. 19.7.5

Inspection Prior to the commencement of tiling Works, carefully inspect the installed Works of all other trades and verify that all such Works are complete up to the point that tiling can properly commence.

19.7.6

Mortar Bed (i)

Waterproofing System To Bath/WC And Kitchen After the waterproof membrane is applied to the floor and is cured sufficiently, prepacked waterproof screed of minimum 10mm shall be laid to the membrane as protection layer against damage from other trades. Before floor tiling, the surface shall be swept clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay prepacked waterproof screed to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the water outlet as specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be cured for at least 3 days before laying the tiles.

(ii)

Floor Tiling At Areas Without Waterproofing Prepare the concrete surface to be clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay prepacked mortar mix to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the water outlet where specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be allowed to cure for at least 3 days before laying the tiles.

BLDG12/S19.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)


19.7


19.7.7

Tile Adhesive

(CONT’D)

The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works. The tile adhesive delivered to site shall have the batch number, manufacturer and expiry date clearly indicated in the packing. The Contractor shall submit documentation to show that all the tilers involved in the project are properly trained in the mixing, handling and application of tile adhesive. The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of floor tile screed then notch-trowelled to a finishes thickness not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed 1m2 in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile, taking care to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position within the specified ‘open time’ and be tapped firmly into position to ensure that each tile is made fully contact over the whole area. The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements : S/N 1

2

19.7.8

Characteristics Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength (After Water Immersion)

Test Method EN 1348 : 2007 EN 1348 : 2007

3

Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength (After Heat Aging)

EN 1348 : 2007

4

Open Time

EN 1346 : 2007 (using tile as specified in EN 1346)

5

Deformity

EN 12002 : 2002

Performance Criteria 7 days => 0.3 N/mm2 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2 At 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2 Circulating oven : 70 + - 2 degree C for 14 days => 0.5 N/mm2 after not less than 30 mins After 28 days storage under standard conditions 2.5mm (minimum)

Grouting To Tile Joints Approved tile grouts shall be used to fill the joints between floor tiles. They shall be used in all floor tiling Works to residential units and common areas except for water tanks. The grouts shall have good working characteristics, low shrinkage and good adhesion to the sides of the joints. They shall be suited for the width of the joints and intended use of the tiling application. The Contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works. The Contractor shall submit samples of the grouts to the SO Rep for selection of colours to match the tiling Works.

BLDG12/S19.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)



19.7.8.1

Material

(CONT’D)

The proprietary grouts shall be modified by the inclusion of various polymer additives. They shall be easy to prepare, apply and clean up at the Site. A sample for each type of grouts shall be taken at the Site and tested at an accredited laboratory according to the following requirements : Tile grout for joint width up to 4mm S/N

Characteristics

Test Method

Performance Criteria

1

Shrinkage

EN 12808-4

 2 mm/m

2

Water absorption

EN 12808-5

 2g (after 30 min)  5g (after 240 min)

3

Compressive strength (After dry storage)

EN 12808-3

4

Abrasion resistance

EN 12808-2

5

Flexural strength (After dry storage)

EN 12808-3

15 N per mm² minimum 35 N per mm² maximum  2000 mm3  3.5N per mm²

Tile grout for joint width above 4mm S/N

Characteristics

Test Method

Performance Criteria

1

Shrinkage

EN 12808-4

 2 mm/m

2

Water absorption

EN 12808-5

 2g (after 30 min)  5g (after 240 min)

3

Compressive strength (After dry storage)

EN 12808-3

15 N per mm² minimum 35 N per mm² maximum

4

Abrasion resistance

EN 12808-2

 1000 mm3

5

Flexural strength (After dry storage)

EN 12808-3

 3.5N per mm²

The grouts shall be light-fast and colour-fast. Their colours shall not fade or show inconsistent tones for the whole tiling Works.

BLDG12/S19.DOC(22) Sal(151211) (DPD)



19.7.8

Grouting To Tile Joints

19.7.8.2

Application

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

The proprietary grouts shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The potential risk of staining shall be verified by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. Coloured grouts shall be cleaned off promptly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions as it may be difficult to remove them from matt glazed tiles, tiles with textured surfaces and some unglazed tiles. The grouting shall be provided in accordance with the following : (i)

The grouting shall commence within 7 days upon completion of tile fixing;

(ii)

Ensure that all building dust and debris are removed from the open joints;

(iii)

Mechanically mix the grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions;

(iv)

Spread the grout with a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel, working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled;

(v)

Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel and a damp, but not wet, cloth;

(vi)

Tool the joints with a piece of wood or other material of suitable size and shape;

(vii)

After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry cloth.

All grout joints shall be uniformly finished. Cushion edge tiles shall be finished evenly to the depth of the cushion.

19.7.9

Other Materials Any other material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper laying of the ceramic floor tiles shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense, but subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

19.7.10

Cleaning Up Upon completion of grouting, thoroughly clean all the exposed surfaces of the ceramic tiles. The tiles shall thoroughly be cleaned before the handing over. The Contractor shall use tile-cleaning agents to clean all finished surfaces. The tile cleaner shall be an effective blend of penetrants which could instantly penetrate deep into mortar and scale on tiles surface and remove the mortar completely. The tile cleaner shall be safe to use and does not harm or burn the skin. The tile cleaner shall be prepared and used according to the manufacturer's instructions.

19.7.11

Damage And Replacement In the event of any damage to the ceramic tiles and accessories, the Contractor shall immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

BLDG12/S19.DOC(23) Sal(151211) (DPD)



19.7.12

Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength

(CONT’D)

The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on floor tiles according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm². In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm². The first test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of floor tiling Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.

19.20

FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF FINISHES Unless otherwise specified the finished floor level at junctions between different types of finishes must be flushed.

19.20.1

Dividing Strips To provide and fix minimum 10X3mm thick stainless steel or brass strips insert to joints where there is a change in materials, change in pattern, interfaced joint between living room tiles and kitchen tiles, and wherever it is indicated on the drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. The stainless steel strips insert is to be embedded in cement mortar and finished flush with finished floor level.

Section 20/.....

BLDG12/S19.DOC(24) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 20-1 SECTION 20 WALL FINISHES

20.1

APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS

20.1.1

Mortar Mix For Plastering Works The Contractor shall use premixed mortar system or prepacked mortar listed in HDB’s Materials List for all plastering works on brick walls, solid block walls and RC surfaces. Plastering of RC surfaces shall be restricted to internal surfaces only. The premixed mortar system shall be a fully automated system that stores, conveys and mixes mortar for instant application. The prepacked mortar shall be in bag form and shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The Contractor shall submit a work method statement to the SO Rep for approval. The premixed mortar system or prepacked mortar shall be formulated with at least 0.80% of pure polymer by mass. The premixed mortar system or prepacked mortar shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Prepacked Mortar Mix S/No

Type of Evaluation

Testing Method

Tensile Adhesion Strength

Tensile adhesion strength test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested.

Shear Adhesion Strength

Shear adhesion test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Six spots on the sample slab shall be tested.

3

Average Shrinkage

ASTM C 531 – 2000

4

Compressive Strength – 28 days

5

Consistence Retentivity

6

Water Retentivity

7

Setting Time

8

9

1

2

Requirement Average strength 2 > 0.75 N per mm Individual strength 2 > 0.60 N per mm Average strength 2 > 1.00 N/mm Individual strength 2 > 0.70 N/mm < 0.10% 12 - 20 N/mm

2

BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 > 65% > 95%

BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998

> 240 mins  360 mins

Polymer Content

Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA

0.80% min. by mass

Product Identification Analysis

Fourier Transformed Infrared Spectrophotometric Analysis

The chemical blueprint shall match the record of the approved product

Initial set

< 500 mins

Final set

HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the prepacked mortar for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.64%, i.e. 80% of the specified content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance for test accuracy. Prepacked mortar with pure polymer content less than 0.64% shall be removed from HDB's Materials List. The Contractor shall remove all unused prepacked mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required to use only those prepacked mortar listed in HDB’s Materials List and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the prepacked mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content. BLDG12/S20.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)



20.1.2

Skimming Materials

(CONT’D)

The Contractor shall use prepacked external skim coat listed in HDB’s Materials List for skimming works on external RC surface. The skimming works on other areas shall use prepacked internal skim coat listed in HDB’s Materials List. The prepacked skimming materials shall be mechanically mixed with the amount of water as specified by the manufacturer. The prepacked internal skimmed coat shall be formulated with at least 1.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Prepacked Internal Skim Coat

S/No

1

Type of Evaluation

Tensile Adhesion Strength Test

Testing Method

Requirement

Tensile adhesion strength test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested.

Individual strength 2 > 0.60 N per mm

Average strength 2 > 0.80 N per mm

2

Average Shrinkage

ASTM C 531 – 2000

< 0.10%

3


BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

7 - 12 N/mm

4

Water Retentivity

BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

> 95%

5

Setting Time

BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998

> 240 mins  360 mins

i)

Initial set

2

< 500 mins

ii) Final set 6

Polymer Content


1.0% min. by mass

7




The prepacked external skim coat shall be formulated with at least 2.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing : Prepacked External Skim Coat S/No

1

2

Tensile Adhesion Strength Test

Tensile adhesion strength tests after accelerated weathering for 100 cycles* of alternate heating and cooling.

3

Average Shrinkage

4


5

Water Retentivity

6


Type of Evaluation

Setting Time

i)

Initial set

Testing Method Tensile adhesion strength test according to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded ambient condition. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested. Tensile adhesion strength tests after accelerated weathering for 100 cycles* of alternate heating and cooling. Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be tested. * Each cycle consist of 4 hours of heating by UVA 340 lamps at 60C and then 10 minutes of intermittent water spray to produce a thermal shock. ASTM C 531 – 2000 BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

Requirement Average strength 2 > 0.80 N per mm Individual strength 2 > 0.60 N per mm

Loss of strength < 15% (compared to 14-day strength under normal condition)

< 0.10% 7 - 12 N/mm

2

> 95% BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998

> 240 mins  360 mins < 500 mins

ii) Final set

7

Polymer Content


2.0% min. by mass

8




Bldg Spec Page 20-3

20.1


20.1.2

Skimming Materials

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the prepacked internal and external skim coat for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.80% for prepacked internal skim coat and 1.60% for external skim coat, i.e. 80% of the specified content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance for test accuracy. Prepacked internal skim coat with pure polymer content less than 0.80% or external skim coat with pure polymer content less than 1.60% shall be removed from HDB's Materials List. The Contractor shall remove all unused prepacked internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required to use only those prepacked internal or external skim coat listed in HDB's Materials List and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the prepacked internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content.

20.2

CONTROL OF PLASTER THICKNESS ON RC SURFACE The overall thickness of plastering on RC surface shall not exceed 18mm. If the structural Works are constructed with good alignment and surface condition, application of a thinner coat of plaster or skimming is acceptable. The finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and shape.

20.3

PLASTERING TO RC SURFACE The RC surface shall be cleaned, using high-pressure water jet, such that the surface are free of dust, residue form oil and organic growth prior to the application of the plaster. The Contractor shall allow the Resident Technical Officer to check the background preparation before plastering. The prepacked mortar mix can be applied to the RC surface without spatterdash. The first coat of the plaster to the RC surface shall be of a thickness between 5 to 8mm and shall be pressed hard onto the surface during application. For better bonding of the second coat, the first coat shall be lightly scratched and allowed to cure for at least 12 hours before the application of the second coat.

20.4

ADHESION STRENGTH OF PLASTER ON RC SURFACE The Contractor shall conduct site pull-out tests on plasters applied on concrete surface according to Schedule of Materials Tests. The first test at each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of plastering Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots to be conducted within 14 to 28 days after plastering. The test spots shall be cored to a diameter of 50mm for the pull-out test. The average tensile pull-out strength of the five spots shall achieve a minimum value of 0.50 N per mm2. However, no individual strength shall fall below 0.40 N per mm2.



SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS The surface of all reinforced concrete members forming part of the external facade shall be constructed to good alignment and verticality such that no plastering is required to provide a good aesthetic appearance. Where there are minor surface unevenness or blemishes, the RC surface shall be skim-coated with approved external skimming materials. The skimming can be applied in one or two coats up to a total thickness not exceeding 6mm. This requirement shall be applicable to external RC members of all storeys, including the ground floor void deck structures.

20.5.1

Workmanship Of RC Works The verticality of the peripheral RC members and internal RC members shall comply with the following tolerance, in accordance to Grade II tolerance of SS CP 23. Allowable variation From The Plumb Type Of RC Members/Surfaces Within Each Floor

For Any Continuous Height Of 10 Storeys

Exposed continuous column corners or other conspicuous lines (External)

10mm

20mm

Corner or surface of columns and walls etc with continuity broken by beams or nibs or other protusions (External)

10mm

40mm

Column and Wall (Internal)

10mm

NA

The maximum allowable variation from the plumb for the entire building height shall be 40mm. The horizontality, alignment and evenness of the ceiling, slab and beam shall comply with the following tolerance : Type Of RC Members/Surfaces

Allowable variation from horizontality /alignment

Allowable variation for evenness of surface

Beam

10mm

NA

Ceiling

Lesser of 3mm per 1.0m or 20mm

NA

Slab

NA

±10mm from structural floor level

To achieve the required structural workmanship, the Contractor shall be required to : a)

regularly check and maintain their formwork to be in a good and acceptable condition;

b)

ensure proper and adequate bracing and strutting;

c)

conduct thorough checking of plumb and alignment before casting.



SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS (CONT’D)

20.5.2

Measurement Of RC Works At least fourteen(14) days before commencement of Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the measurement plan and survey methods. The areas of the Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods shall, inter alia, include the following : (a)

Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block

(b)

Verticality and alignment of columns

(c)

Verticality of walls

(d)

Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs

The Contractor shall engage a competent person to carry out measurements of the plumb and alignment of all external & internal columns, external and internal walls and external corners of the building blocks. This measurement shall be carried out for every storey, including the first storey. The Contractor shall be required to use a precision laser plummet capable of shooting a vertical laser beam for up to 100mm in range and at an accuracy of at least 5 seconds; and a precision multidirectional laser marker capable of beaming right angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy of at least 3mm at 10m horizontal and vertical distances. Proper records of the RC verticality measurements shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one month after casting of the RC members or any other period as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall highlight in their report all deviations that exceed the tolerance. Upon completion of the finishing work, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block. Proper records of all measurements made on the various areas of Works shall be kept by the Contractor. The Contractor shall when directed by the SO Rep submit the records of measurements made in respect of every building block before seeking his approval to proceed with the next stage of the Works

20.5.3

Rectification Of Misalignment And Surface Defects The Contractor shall carry out structural rectification to the external RC members with poor alignment and plumb, poor construction joint, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The structural rectification of such Defect shall commence not later than two months after casting. The Contractor shall rectify minor bulging or depression on the RC surface, which does not affect the reinforcement cover, with the following method : (a)

trim and roughen the surface,

(b)

clean the surface with pressure jetting

(c)

apply approve bonding agent to the surface

(d)

patch the areas with approved polymer modified mortar.

For serious structural Defect or misalignment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a PE proposal for the rectification work subject to the approval of the SO Rep. 20.5.4

Application Of External Skimming Skimming shall not commence until the surface has been properly prepared and cleaned with water jet. The Contractor shall allow for the inspection of the surface preparation prior to the skimming application. Upon completion of the skimming Works, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building blocks. All measurement data shall be submitted to the SO Rep.



SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS (CONT’D)

20.5.5

Testing Of External Skimming The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on the external skimming at each building block according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of skimming with age between 14 to 28 days. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 spots, of 50mm cored diameter each, shall exceed 0.50 N per mm2. In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each spot shall not be less than 0.40 N per mm2. The first test at each building block shall be conducted in the initial stage of skimming Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.

20.6

CONTROL OF PLASTERERS The Contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good workmanship for plastering and skimming Works. They shall possess Skills Evaluation Certificate on plastering works from local institutions. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work. These workers are also required to wear identification pass upon approval by the SO Rep. The pass shall be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the Site, by their colour, size or pattern.

20.7

ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING AND SKIM COAT (WITHIN FLATS) All arrises, internal angles, etc. shall be straight plumbed. All internal angles and external angles shall be formed with proprietary PVC plaster angle beads to the SO Rep. approval. Internal angles and external angles shall include the interface of ceilings, walls and beams etc. Square PVC angle beads shall have a face flange minimum 20mm wide that subtends a 90 degrees angle and shall have a short reveal of 2 mm on the front edge for the finishing skim coat. The face flange shall be perforated and its surface tooth formed to hold and receive the plaster and skim coat. The entire length of the PVC angle beads shall be clean and straight, any damaged or used beads shall not be recycled. Samples of the PVC angle beads shall be submitted to the SO Rep. for approval prior to ordering and commencement of skim coat or plastering work on site. An approved sample of the PVC angle beads shall be displayed in the material sample room.

20.8

MAKING GOOD All making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges undercut to form dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. Cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other Defect and clean the whole of the work on completion.

20.9

PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER No partially or wholly set plaster shall be allowed to be used or remixed.

20.10

DRIPS AND GROOVE Drips and grooves shall be formed to give a clean clear and straight surface free from loose sandy mortar.



LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES

20.11.1

Wall Tiling Method The Contractor shall carry out wall tiling according to the following procedure : (a)

Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect the bonding of rendering. The background shall be washed using water jet.

(b)

Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to achieve a flat and even surface. The background shall be first dampened to prevent excessive absorption of water from the rendering before its placing. The rendering shall be increased to a finished thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of water piping.

(c)

Allow the rendering to set for at least 12 hours.

(d)

Apply a layer of bedding mortar onto the rendered substrate and spread another layer as thin as possible on the full back of the tiles before placing tiles in position. The keys, frogs or depressions at the back of the tile shall be completely filled with mortar before fixing.

(e)

Place each tile and tap it firmly into position to ensure that each tile makes contact over its whole area. Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to the commencement of the tiling works.

(f)

Adjust the position of any tile within 5 minutes of fixing. The grouting to the tile joints shall commence within 7 days after fixing the wall tiles. Dust or foreign materials shall be removed from the joints. The grout shall be wet mixed mechanically before application. It shall be spread with a grout spreader (rubber squeegee or grout trowel), working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled. Excess grout shall be removed with the aid of a spreader and a damp (not) wet cloth. After the grout has stiffened slightly, tool the grout with a piece of wood or other suitable tool to a consistent depth and shape. After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry cloth.

20.11.2

Prepacked Mortar For Mortar Bed The Contractor shall use approved pre-packed mortar mix for rendering to concrete surface and block walls to receive the wall tiles. Potable water supplied by PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar. The pre-packed mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The pre-packed mortar mix shall comply with the following performance requirements, as stated in clause 20.1.1 when subjected to the specified laboratory testing.

20.11.3

Tile Adhesive The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling works. The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of rendered wall and then notch-trowelled to a finishes thickness not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed 1m2. in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position and be tapped firmly to ensure its full contact with the adhesive. The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements specified in Clause 19.7.7 “Tile Adhesive”.



LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES

20.11.4

Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength

(CONT’D)

The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm². In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm². The first test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of wall tiling Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively. 20.12

COLOUR GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS

20.12.1

General Provide and lay colour glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause “Schedule Of Colour Glazed Wall Tiles “ hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.

20.12.2

Approved Colour Glazed Wall Tiles The type of colour glazed wall tiles provided by the Contractor to locations specified in the sub-clause "Schedule Of Colour Glazed Wall Tiles" hereunder shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of colour glazed wall tiles and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all colour glazed wall tiles comply with the requirements specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it. The colour of glazed wall tiles for such locations as specified in the schedule of the said subclause shall be BLUE and/or PINK and/or BEIGE and/or GREY. Provide samples of colour glazed wall tiles with the colour range as specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.

20.12.3


Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated.

(b)




COLOUR GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS (CONT’D)

20.12.4

Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with SS 483 : 2000 (Annex L) unless otherwise stated : (a)

Dimensions Nominal Length Nomianal Width Thickness

: : :

200mm 200mm 7mm

: : :

250mm 200mm 7mm

: : :

300mm 200mm 7mm

: : :

300mm 300mm 7mm

or Nominal Length Nomianal Width Thickness or Nominal Length Nomianal Width Thickness or Nominal Length Nomianal Width Thickness


(b)

(i)

Length

:

Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than 0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii)

Width

:

Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than 0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(iii)

Thickness

:

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.


(c)

Physical Properties The water absorption shall be a maximum of 18%.



COLOUR GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS (CONT’D)

20.12.4

Technical Specifications (Cont’d) (d)


Staining Test The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L), to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard cleaning agent. Performance Criteria The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by cleaning solution.

(ii)

Reverse Staining Test The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows : (a)


(b)


(c)


(d)



20.12.5

Schedule Of Colour Glazed Wall Tiles Provide and lay colour glazed wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not specified but as shown in the Drawings. Accommodation 3-Room, 4-Room, 5-Room

BLDG12/S20.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Location ) ) ) )

Kitchen Kitchen/Dining Bath/WC WC


20.13

LISTELLO TILE TO BATH/WC OF DWELLING UNITS Where required under the Contract, provide and lay one course of matching Listello tiles to all bath/wc of residential units including other areas as shown in the Drawings. The type of Listello tiles provided by the Contractor shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.

20.14

CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS)

20.14.1

General Provide and lay first quality, first choice wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause “Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles “ hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.

20.14.2


Test Samples And Methods All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated.

(b)


20.14.3

Technical Specifications Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :(a)

Dimensions Nominal Length Nominal Width Thickness

: 200mm : 200mm : 8mm


BLDG12/S20.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(i)

Length

:

Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than  0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(ii)

Width

:

Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than  0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.

(iii)

Thickness

:

Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than  5% from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.



20.14.3

Technical Specifications (Cont’d) (b)

(CONT’D)


(c)

Physical Properties The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6%

(d)


Colour Fastness And Light-Fastness

:

The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.

(ii)

Reserve Staining Test

:



(b)


(c)


(d)


(e)


20.14.4

Colours, Patterns And Textures Provide a full range of colours, patterns and textures of wall tiles for the SO Rep to select from. The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made for difference in colour pattern and texture within each category of tiles.

20.14.5

Accessories Provide and lay all accessories in matching size and colour to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S20.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)



20.14.6

Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles

(CONT’D)

Provide and lay glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not specified but as shown in the Drawings. Accommodation

All Housing Blocks

Eating House

Lock-Up Shop, Shop, Market Produce Lock-Up Shop

Mini-Market Restaurant (Family) Market Produce Shop 20.14.7

Location Walls at upper floor lift lobbies Walls at centralised Refuse chute hopper Wash areas at void deck Refuse Chute Chambers Walls in toilet adjoining Utility Room at ground floor lift lobby Refreshment Areas Stalls Toilets/Bath/WC Bin Areas Wash Areas Bath/WC Display Areas Preparation Areas Bin Areas Walls and Columns Toilets Bin Areas Toilets Display Area WC

Tile Spacers

Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles and floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the tiling works. 20.15

POLISHED HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILES Provide and lay 300mm x 300mm x 9mm (Nominal Size) polished homogeneous wall tiles to locations as specified below : Accommodation All Housing Blocks

Location Walls of ground floor lift lobbies. Wall enclosures at letter box including low walls defining the ground floor lift lobby.

Provide full range of colours and texture of polished homogeneous wall tiles for the SO Rep to make a selection. The SO Rep shall have absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made for differences in colour and texture.

20.16

WORKSHOP DRAWINGS Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work are indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be laid with tile joints that coincide with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep. Section 21/.....

BLDG12/S20.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 21-1 SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLING INSTALLATIONS

21.1

WORK BY LICENSED ELECTRICIAN All electrical installation Works shall be carried out by a Licensed Electrician (LE) respectively and shall comply with all current Codes-of-Practice, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant Authorities.

21.2

Reserved

21.3

OPENINGS/RECESSES FOR METAL TRUNKINGS Further to Clause 4.21 "Openings And Recesses" and subclause 1.1.27 "Contractor's Work In Connection With Subsidiary Contracts", ensure that all these openings are flushed with the ceilings and align with each other and with the building lines. Ensure that the recesses are continuous and on the same plane from floor to floor.

21.4

METAL TRUNKING FOR TELEPHONE AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE SYSTEMS Metal trunking shall be complete with slotted brackets for the fixing of telephone and broadband coaxial cables inside the trunking. Slotted brackets shall be welded to the base of the trunking and shall be three numbers per floor or to the requirements of the Relevant Authorities. Where there are no lead-in pipes to link riser ducts to MDF or TER, the contractor shall provide horizontal metal trunkings. The size of metal trunking to be used shall be in accordance to the latest Code of Practice for Info-Communications Development Facilities (COPIF) in Building issued by InfoCommunications Development Authority (IDA) or as shown in the drawing. Any discrepancy in the drawings with COPIF shall be brought up to the SO Rep for decision. The horizontal metal trunking shall be complete with slotted brackets for the fixing of telephone and broadband coaxial cables inside the trunking. Slotted brackets shall be welded to the base of the horizontal trunking and shall be spaced not more than 300mm centres. The horizontal metal trunking shall have provisions for cabling from lead-in risers to riser ducts with no lead-in pipes and to the requirements of the Relevant Authorities. The horizontal metal trunking shall also be provided to link riser ducts to the MDF or TER for broadband coaxial cabling where required by relevant Authorities. The thickness of mild steel sheet used in the fabrication of trunking shall not be less than those specified hereunder : Nominal Thickness Of Mild Steel Sheet Thickness Of Body Material

Thickness Of Cover Material

1.6mm

1.4mm

Construct metal trunking to the details as shown in the Drawings. All metal trunkings shall have removable covers extending over the entire lengths as shown in the Drawings. The covers shall be fixed to the trunking by means of brass screws or stainless steel or steel screws protected with a finish of zinc coating against corrosion. All welded parts shall be smoothened. All surfaces of the metal trunkings shall be painted with two coats of approved anti-rust undercoat and two finishing coats giving an overall coating thickness of not less than 45 microns. Alternatively, oven-bake powder coating will also be accepted. The colour of the finishing coats shall be Off White to BS 10B15. Each metal trunking shall be protected during delivery and during installation from scratches to the painted surfaces. Submit samples of metal trunkings to the SO Rep for approval before commencing installation. The samples shall be checked to conform to dimensions, material quality, colour and finishing requirements. Approved samples shall be retained as basis of delivery and shall be considered as part of delivery. Unless specified otherwise, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with and necessary for the complete installation, together with all the work involved shall be provided. BLDG12/S21.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF) ROOM, TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM (TER) FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE INSTALLATION AND TELECOMMUNICATION RISERS All UPVC (SS 272) lead-in pipes to MDF room, Telecom Equipment Room and Telecommunication risers shall be encased in concrete as shown in the Drawings. All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall comply with the COPIF requirements. All bent pipes, straight pipes and trunkings shall be installed as shown in the Drawings. The number of lead-in pipes to MDF room, TER and Telecommunication riser ducts shall comply with COPIF requirements and/or as shown in the drawings. All pipes terminating inside the Telecommunication riser shall flushed against the wall and rise up to a minimum height of 1.0m.

21.6

AUTHORITIES REQUIRMENTS All provision and installation for telecommunication and broadband coaxial cabling systems shall comply with all statutory rules, regulations and Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building (COPIF) issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of Singapore (IDA).

21.7

FACILITY FOR NEXT GENERATION NATIONAL BROADBAND NETWORK (NGNBN) The contractor shall provide the facility to support the NGNBN in accordance to the latest Code of Practice for Info-Communication Facilities (COPIF) in Building issued by Info-Communication Development Authority (IDA) or as shown in the tender drawing. Any discrepancy in the drawings with the COPIF shall be brought up to the SO Rep for decision.

Section 22/.....


Bldg Spec Page 22-1 SECTION 22 GLAZING

22.1

FIXED AND ADJUSTABLE GLASS LOUVRED VENTS Unless otherwise specified, glass louvre used externally shall be obscured wired rough cast glass of thickness 6mm 0.3mm and housed at least 10mm at each end. Glass blades shall not have clearance at each end exceeding 3mm. All exposed edges of the glass louvre shall be ground mechanically to a consistent smooth finish.

22.2

CLEANING GLASS On completion, clean all glass inside and outside, replace all cracked, broken or defective glass and leave the whole Works in good condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.


Bldg Spec Page 23-1 SECTION 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING

23.1

GENERAL

23.1.1

Paint The paints used shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be approved by the SO Rep. All paint shall be delivered to the Site in their original containers and the containers shall not have been opened before. Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards shown below and their latest amendments : Standard SS7:1998 SS34:1998 SS37:1998 SS38:1998 SS150:1998 SS345:1990 SS494:2001

Type of Paint "Gloss Enamel Finishing" "Undercoat for Gloss Enamel" "Aluminium Paint" "Aluminium Wood Primer (Leafing and Non-Leafing)" "Emulsion Paint" "Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint for Decorative Purposes" "Lead and Chromate-free Primer"

Before the commencement of any painting work, provide and submit colour charts of approved paint to the SO Rep for the selection of colour scheme. All water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall comply with SS 345:1990. All enamel paint shall be synthetic enamel paint unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.

23.1.2

Mixing Of Paint During the progress of work, the SO Rep may at his discretion obtain samples of paint being used on site for testing. Should paint used in this Contract be found to be adulterated or over-diluted, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In addition, all such paint shall be removed from the Site and replace the same with paints that meet the prescribed standards. All work executed with paint which fails to meet the prescribed standards shall be burnt off or otherwise removed and the work shall be re-executed at the Contractor's own cost and expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

23.1.3

Workmanship Unless otherwise specified, all paints shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same brand and from the same manufacturer. Where available, undercoats shall be of different shades to correspond with the shade of the finishing coat. Provide sample panels of paintwork showing the shade of the respective coats. All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to the commencement of the painting work. After the completion of each coat of painting work, the SO Rep shall be notified before the application of the next coat.



EXTERNAL PAINTING

23.2.1

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

23.2.2

Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (a)

Type And Location The water based algae resistant paint shall comply with SS345:1990 and shall be PSB Marked. Unless otherwise specified, all colours of paint to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep. and to comply with BS 4800:1972 "Paint Colour for Building Purposes". Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of all exterior surfaces of the external walls which are subject to weathering including walls, ceilings and other surfaces of the ground floor void decks shall be finished with one coat of water based sealer and two coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint. Sealer coat and two coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall not be diluted. The whole paint system shall be obtained from the same paint manufacturer. Allow for different colour tones for all undercoats to distinguish the different coatings. Should the finished paintwork be found to be unsatisfactory, ie. brushy work, unevenness in applications, original stains, etc., repaint the same with additional coat or coats to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. External painting to parapet walls, refuse chutes, columns and beams shall cover up to and including returned surfaces. External painting to exterior surfaces of external walls shall cover up to and including returned surfaces stopping at a convenient point to be directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

External Painting To Electrical Sub-Station/Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound For electrical sub-station/utilities centre/dustbin compound, the external painting works shall be executed with three coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint.

(c)

Touch-Up Coat Painted surfaces which have to be overcoated by touch-up work should not be confined to the affected spots only. The whole panel of the wall or area affected by touch-up shall be repainted to match the colour tone of the finished coat.

(d)

Painting Of Sample Units At the appropriate time prepare the exterior of one or more typical flat unit for each type of flats to receive the paint and inform the SO Rep to select his colour scheme. Paint the sample units, changing colours as directed, until the SO Rep is satisfied with the workmanship and/or colour scheme.



EXTERNAL PAINTING (CONT'D)

23.2.2

Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (Cont'd) (e)

Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A5(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.

23.2.3

Acrylic Emulsion Paints Unless otherwise specified, all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces, except those subjected directly to weathering as mentioned earlier, shall be painted with one coat of water based sealer and two subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. Sealer coat and two coats of acrylic emulsion paint shall not be diluted. The whole paint system shall be obtained from the same paint manufacturer. External surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint shall include all surfaces except those within the enclosing walls of the dwelling units, switch rooms, motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank compartment and other enclosed spaces. However, walls and ceilings of the private balcony and/or service balcony of dwelling units and common access corridors shall be considered as external surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint. Technical specification for the water-based sealer:

Test Method

Properties/ Performance

Requirement

1

Colour

-

White or light grey

2

Non-volatile matter

SS 5 :Part B2

3

Through-dry time

ISO 9117 75±10µm wet film thickness

Min 35% by weight of paint Max 4 hours

4

Opacity (contract ratio)

SS 5:Part E2

Min 70%

5

Lead content

SS 5:Part C6

Max 0.01%by weight of dried paint film

6

Coating adhesion

ASTM D3359 Method A (X-cut) One coat of sealer of 75±10µm wet film thickness and two coats of SS 345 paint at 75±10µm wet film thickness per coat on grade 40 concrete

Coating shall achieve a rating of at least 4A



EXTERNAL PAINTING (CONT'D)

23.2.3

Acrylic Emulsion Paints (Cont'd) Technical specification for the water-based sealer: (Cont'd)

7

23.3

Properties/ Performance Alkaline resistance

Test Method

Requirement

SS 5: Part G2 0.1 M NaOH solution for 1 hour

Coating shall show no blistering, wrinkling or lifting when examined immediately, and after 30 minutes recovery

8

Water permeability, 14 days

SS 500 Appendix B 75±10µm wet film thickness

Coating shall display no yellowing, blistering, sweating or disintegration of paint

9

Water immersion resistance, 500 hours

ISO 2812-2 One coat of sealer of 75±10µm wet film thickness and two coats of SS 345 paint at 75±10µm wet film thickness per coat on cement panel. Remaining surface coated with epoxy paint.

Coating shall show no blistering, wrinkling or lifting

PAINTING OF INTERNAL SURFACES (a)

Internal Surfaces Of Dwelling Units Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls and ceilings of dwelling units shall be painted with two coats of approved white emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second coat shall not be diluted. The method of painting for these two coats, with the exception of the two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and kitchens, shall be by means of an appropriate portable airless spraying equipment as approved by the SO Rep. No compressed air shall be used to assist the spraying. The two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and kitchens may be painted by using rollers.

(b)

Other Internal Surfaces Unless otherwise specified, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls and ceilings of shops, shoplets, eating houses, living quarters, switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank compartments, stores, MDF rooms, electrical substations and areas other than dwelling units shall be painted with three coats of approved emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second and third coats shall not be diluted.

(c)


The emulsion paint shall be of those qualities approved by the SO Rep.


PAINTING OF WOODWORK

23.4.1

Preparation All joinery and finished woodwork shall be properly cleaned down, knotted, stopped, sand-papered smooth and primed. Two coats of wood preservative shall be applied to the back of doors frames and window frames and other woodwork abutting masonry work. The wood preservative shall be "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved.

23.4.2

Painting Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of all woodwork shall be prepared and painted with one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.

23.4.3

Wood Varnish To Main Entrance Doors Varnish coatings on fire-rated and non fire-rated main entrance doors shall be finished off-site under a factory environment with a minimum of three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved finish. The varnish finish shall be approved by the SO Rep. The door with completed varnish shall comply with the requirements as follow :

23.4.4

Performance Accelerated Weathering :SS5: Part G4

Requirements Max 35% Gloss Loss

(400 hours)

No de-lamination, blistering or other defects

Surface Preparation All pin holes and recesses on the main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be filled and stopped with putty. The door surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means and cleaned prior to the application of wood varnish.

23.4.5

Wood Varnish The main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be finished off-site under a factory environment with a minimum of three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved finish. The varnish shall be approved by the SO Rep. The varnish shall comply with the requirements as specified hereunder :

Substrate

Application Method/Film Thickness

SS 5 Part B4:1987

NA

NA

b) Keeping qualities

SS 5 Part B6:1987

NA

NA

c) Fineness of grind

SS 5 Part B13:1987

NA

NA

d) Dry film thickness

SS 5 Part B1:1985 (Method 5)

Test Varnish Only a) Condition in container


Test Method

Burnished tinplate

3 coats by brush

Requirements

No coagulation, precipitation, or separation of components, free from foreign particles ; No coagulation, precipitation, or separation of components, free from foreign particles ; Maximum 30 microns ; Minimum 50 microns ;


Wood Varnish (Cont’d)

Test

Test Method

Substrate

Application Method/Film Thickness

Requirements

Varnish Only (Cont’d) e) Surface drying time

SS 5 Part D2:1985

Burnished tinplate

Metered bar/ wft 50 microns

2 hrs maximum;

f)

ISO 9117:1990

Burnished tinplate


6 hrs maximum;

g) Gloss at 60 deg.

SS 5 Part E1:1985

Glass plate


25 - 50 gloss units;

h) Flash point

SS Part B15:1987

i)

Washability

SS 5 Part F5:1992

Burnished Glass


3000 cycles with no wear-off

j)

Scratch Resistance

SS 5 Part F2:1988

Burnished tinplate

Metered bar/ dft 25 microns

Minimum 1000g

k) Accelerated weathering (500 hrs dry cycle)

SS 5 Part G4:1992

Burnished tinplate

Metered bar/ dft 25 microns

Maximum gloss loss 30%

l)

SS 150 Appendix C

NA

NA

No growth

Through dry time

Mildew resistance

23.4.6

Reserved

23.4.7

Reserved


NA

NA

23C minimum


PAINTING OF FERROUS METAL WORK

23.5.1

Preparation Of Surface Remove all dust, rust, scale, grease and oil before painting.

23.5.2

Painting Unless otherwise specified, paint all exposed metal surfaces with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. Primer to mild steel door frame shall be approved cathodic electrodeposition primer. Unless otherwise specified, paint all metal surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry work, etc, except for concrete reinforcement, with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer. Paint stainless steel, brass and aluminium Works only if specified.

23.6

PAINTING OF PIPES Allow for the painting of all sanitary, water and gas installation pipes, rainwater downpipes, balcony waste discharge stacks and all services pipes including water supply pipes (except for stainless steel pipes and pipes in the water tank compartment). Unless specified otherwise, the colour shall match with the general background colour tone of the building to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Paint pipes and trunking as specified hereunder and including other types of pipes and trunking not so specified but as shown in the Drawings. Type Of Pipe / Trunking

Paint Coat Required

UPVC pipes and fittings

Two coats of enamel paint unless specified otherwise. However, those within trunking, stacks/ceiling and service ducts need not be painted)

UPVC trunking for electrical wiring, water and gas pipes outside residential units

Two coats of acrylic emulsion paint to match the general background colour tone. However, those within service ducts need not be painted

Galvanised steel pipes and fittings

First coat Second coat Third coat Fourth coat

Ductile iron pipes and fittings including supports

Two coats of lead and chromate-free primer followed by two coats of enamel paint.

Ductile iron pipes and fittings for water distribution mains including supports on roof level

Two coats of approved ceramic insulation coating.

Copper gas pipes including fittings

Two coats of white enamel paint or other colour to match the background as instructed by the SO Rep.

Stainless steel, copper and brass pipes

No painting required unless specified otherwise.


-

one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer; one coat of lead and chromate-free primer; one coat of undercoat for enamel paint; one finishing coat of enamel paint.


PAINTING TO EXTERNAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SLOPING ROOF OF CENTRAL REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER The external reinforced concrete sloping roof of the central refuse chute chamber shall be painted with water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including all subclauses under it.

23.8

DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT The Contractor shall ensure that all spent paint and waste water from the washing of paint brushes/instruments are properly disposed off. The disposal of spent paint and waste water/waste solvent shall be in accordance with MEWR guidelines. The Contractor shall provide the necessary 220-litre drums and engage a licensed industrial toxic waste collector to collect the drums for proper disposal. The Contractor shall put up a consignment note to the Pollution Control Department.

23.8.1

Solvent Based Enamel Paint All spent paint and waste solvent (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There shall be no discharge of spent paint and/or waste solvent/waste water (generated from washing) into the sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported safely for proper disposal by the licensed industrial toxic waste collector. The drums shall be properly labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage. The drums shall be covered to prevent fire hazard and smell nuisance.

23.8.2

Water Based Emulsion Paint All spent paint and waste water (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There shall be no discharge of the spent paint and/or waste water (generated from washing) into the sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported safely for proper disposal by the licensed toxic industrial waste collector. The drums shall be properly labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage.

23.9

SCAFFOLDING Provide and erect scaffolding over all faces of the building blocks for the application of paint. Scaffolding shall not be removed until the painted surfaces are inspected by the SO Rep and until the test results of the paint samples taken out for testing are known.

23.10

CLEARING UP ON COMPLETION All areas stained by paint including but not limited to floors, staircases, aprons and public areas and drains shall be thoroughly washed and removed upon completion of the Works before handing over to the Employer. All debris and superfluous materials shall be cleared away.

Section 24/.....


Bldg Spec Page 24-1 SECTION 24 UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION CABLE, TELECOMMUNICATION AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE

24.1

LOW TENSION RETICULATION PIPE SYSTEM The Contractor shall provide and install underground pipe system for Low Tension (LT) reticulation cables as shown in the Drawings.

24.1.1

Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes

24.1.1.1

Materials All UPVC pipes shall be Class B in accordance with SS 141:1976. The material from which the pipe is produced shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) to which shall be added suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes. These additives shall not constitute a toxic hazard and shall not impair its chemical and physical properties. The UPVC pipes shall be grey in colour and shall have a socket at one end. The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be clearly cut and square with the axis of the pipe.

24.1.1.2

Dimensions The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and plug shall be as shown in the Drawings for underground piping system.

24.1.2

Pipe Installation (a)

General The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. In case a straight run is not possible the radius of curvature shall be determined on the Site by the SO Rep.

(b)

Gradient Of UPVC Pipes Under-Crossing Other Services Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings or directed by the SO Rep on the Site, the gradient of UPVC pipes under-crossing other services shall be : Pipe Size 155mm

(c)

Gradient 1:12

Preparation Of Bottom Of Trench A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with granite dust shall be provided to areas that have muddy, clay or soft soil. The hardcore shall consist essentially of crusher run/stones blinded with sufficient blinding material to aid consolidation.

(d)

Flared-Mouth Pipes Flared-mouth pipes shall be used for entry into draw pit or for pipes which terminate directly in the ground. All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of earth or cement.



Pipe Installation (Cont'd) (e)

Construction Method The first layer of concrete with A6 welded steel mesh shall be placed to the required thickness on the prepared trench bottom. The bottom layer of pipes shall be laid using spacers at 1.5m intervals to maintain the spacing between pipes. Ensure that a minimum gap sufficient for the specified concrete thickness remains between the outside of pipes and the side of trench or trench shuttering where used. The next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer of pipes are laid. The final layer of concrete shall be reinforced with A6 welded steel mesh. The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is placed, shall be properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe. The final layer of the concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled. PVC cover plates shall be anchored on the final layer of concrete. Ready mixed concrete shall be used. However, if the concrete required is less than 2 m3, hand mix concrete is allowed. Mechanical vibrator shall be used to ensure that the gaps between pipes are filled with concrete.

(f)

Rapid Hardening Cement When pipes are laid in conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out immediately, an approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be used with the concrete.

(g)

Nylon Ropes in Pipes A nylon/polyethylene rope (minimum diameter 7mm) acceptable by the SO Rep shall be provided in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing.

(h)

Protection of Cables During the boring of pipe entries into existing structures, or during the demolition and rebuilding of the joint hole, the Contractor shall take such measures as directed by the SO Rep to protect the cables. Such measures may include the following :

(i)

(i)

Any movement of existing cable shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep.

(ii)

Cables shall be protected against mechanical damage at pipe entries and inside joint hole by packing them with sandbags to act as a cushion when any movement occurs.

Pipe Testing On completion of pipe laying (including compaction and backfilling) between any two joint holes or more, a cylindrical brush and a mandrel as shown in the Drawings shall be passed through each pipe in both directions to test the pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have entered. The cylindrical brush and mandrel shall be supplied by the Contractor. The mandrel shall follow the brush to minimise possible scouring or breaking of the pipes. The testing shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep before the section of pipes are accepted.



PVC Cover Plates

24.1.3.1

Materials All cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0 m. Each cover plate shall be nominal 172.4mm in width and 2.0mm in thickness. The length and breadth may have a tolerance of 5 mm. The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistance polyvinyl chloride without plasticizer (UPVC). Use of regenerated PVC, or Polyethylene or PP is strictly forbidden. Each cable cover plate shall be linked to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain. The colour of the plate shall be black in accordance with BS 381c colour code and shall remain permanent and non-fading. The materials and the colour of the cable cover plates shall be resistant to chemical influences likely to be encountered when buried in the ground. The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards or their equivalent :

(a) (b) (c) (d) 24.1.3.2

Description Impact Test Tensile Strength Vicat Softening Temperature Accelerated Ageing

Standard Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard) Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard) ASTM D1525 ASTM D3045

Requirements The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties : (a)

Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength shall not have more than 3 cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). The drop hammer shall not penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens from the same lot. Should the specimens tested in the second series of tests also fail to meet the requirements, the whole test is deemed to have failed.

(b)

The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.

(c)

The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72°C (Rate A at 50°C 5°C per hour).

(d)

The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70°C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be less than 25% of the original value.

The cable cover plates shall be type tested by PSB or an SAC accredited laboratory in accordance with the above requirements. 24.1.3.3

Installation of UPVC Cable Cover Plates The cable cover plates shall be laid end to end directly over the pipes as shown in the Drawings. Ensure that the cable cover plates are properly secured together.

24.1.4

Markers For Draw Pit On completion (including backfilling, compacting and turfing) of the draw pits which are not located within the road, approved markers as shown in the Drawings shall be installed to indicate the corners of the draw pit. For draw pits which are located within the road, such markers need not be provided.



Backfilling For Underground Pipe System All trenches excavated for the provision of underground pipe system for Low Tension (LT) reticulation cables shall be backfilled as follows :

24.1.6

(a)

For trenches which are located within the road, backfill from the completed pipe level to the subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust.

(b)

For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the Contract with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.

Energisation Of Electrical Sub-Station By PowerGrid The Contractor shall expedite and complete all underground pipe system work timely to facilitate the laying of all necessary reticulation cables by PowerGrid or other utilities Services Provider within the Site boundary. The electrical sub-station is targeted to be energised by the Services Provider at least 12 weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of the first building block in the Works or otherwise advised by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall incorporate such work arrangement requirements in the programme for the Works or revised programme for the Works, submitted under the Contract. All costs and expenses incurred for complying with the provisions of this subclause shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.

24.2

TELECOMMUNICATION PIPE AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE SYSTEM The Contractor shall provide and install underground pipe system for telecommunication and Broadband coaxial cables as shown in the tender Drawings. The installation of Telecommunication and Broadband Coaxial Cable Pipe System shall comply with all statutory rules and regulations, and in accordance to the latest Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Buildings (COPIF).

24.2.1

Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes

24.2.1.1

Materials All UPVC pipes shall comply with all requirements as specified in SS.272; 1983 The material to produce the pipes shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC). When joining pipes, suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes shall be used. These additives shall not constitute a toxic hazard to the environment and shall not change in its chemical and physical properties. The UPVC pipes shall not be darker than the grey colour and shall have a socket at one end. Each length of pipe shall be clearly, indelibly and continuously marked at intervals of not more than 1.0m using a distinctive colour with the description of Manufacturer’s identification/110mm UPVC pipe/Date/Month/Year/SS272. The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be clearly cut and square with the axis of the pipe.



110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Installation

24.2.2.1

Dimensions Of 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and coupling for the underground piping system shall be as shown hereunder :

Item

Pipe

Coupling

24.2.2.2

Length

Max Wall Thickness

Min Wall Thickness

Max External Diameter

Min External Diameter

Internal Diameter at the Edges

Internal Diameter at the Center

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

6000+50 -0

3.6

3.2

110.4

110

-

-

180 ±2

3.6

3.2

-

-

110.5+0.2 -0

110+0 - 0.2

General (a)

All pipelines are to over-cross sewer lines.

(b)

The crowns of all pipelines are to be laid at least 600mm below the invert level of Civil Engineering drains.

(c)

No pipe is to be cast in the base or wall of the drains.

(d)

The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. Where a straight run is not possible, the radius of curvature shall be determined by the SO Rep.

(e)

All rectification Works instructed by the SO Rep to meet all requirements shall be carried out at the Contractor’s cost and expense.

(f)

The following items shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification of tests conducted on the Manholes and Pipelines : (i) (ii) (iii)

Completion Certificate Summary of Manhole and Pipeline Length Pipe Testing Report/Manhole Survey Record

The Contractor shall assist the SO Rep in all verification work to ensure all tests are properly conducted. The Contractor shall perform more tests if the SO Rep deemed necessary all at the Contractor's cost and expense. (g)

24.2.2.3

Upon completion of the pipe laying works, the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings of the project site to the SO Rep, in addition to the items listed in subclause 24.2.2.2(f) above.

Gradient Of UPVC Pipes Under-Crossing Other Services Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings or directed by the SO Rep on the Site, the gradient of UPVC pipes under-crossing other services shall be : Pipe Size 110mm


Gradient 1: 6


110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Installation (Cont’d)

24.2.2.4

Preparation Of Bottom Trench The trench shall be excavated to the required width and depth; the bottom of the trench shall be free from stone, levelled and well punned. The pipe shall be laid at the depth specified to the details shown in the COPIF unless otherwise specified. A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with granite dust shall be provided to areas that have muddy, clay or soft soil. The hardcore shall consist essentially of crusher run/stones blinded with sufficient blinding material to aid consolidation.

24.2.2.5

Flare-Mouth Pipes And Coupling Flare-Mouth UPVC pipes shall be used for entry into manhole wall unless otherwise specified. The outer surface of the pipe shall be roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of solvent cement applied for its length in the manhole wall. All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of earth or cement.

24.2.2.6

Construction Method (a)

Where UPVC of less than 16-Ways are to be laid, they shall be encased in Grade 20 concrete to a minimum thickness of 50mm as shown to the details in the COPIF.

(b)

Where UPVC are to be laid in multiple formation, polypropylene spacers shall be used at a maximum spacing of 1.5m apart to allow clearance between adjacent pipes.

(c)

The starting end of the pipe shall be blanked off with a board or boards to prevent foreign objects from entering the pipes. When joining multiple pipes, all pipe ends and the interior of the collar shall be thoroughly cleaned with a dry rag followed by a liberal coating of solvent cement. The collar shall then be pushed into the first pipe by hand. A suitable wooden batten is then placed across the remote end of the collar and tapped with a hammer until it is engaged midway. The next length of pipe shall then be engaged to the collar and similarly tapped until fully engaged.

(d)

The first layer of concrete shall be placed to the required thickness on the prepared trench bottom. The bottom layer of the pipes shall then be laid (using the spacer to maintain the spacing between pipes where applicable) such that a minimum gap, sufficient for the specified concrete thickness, remains between the outside pipes and the side of the trench or trench shuttering where used. The next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer of pipes are laid. This process shall be continued until the final layer of concrete is laid to the specified thickness. The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is placed, shall be properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe. Where ready mix concrete is used, the placing of concrete up to three layers of pipe in a single batch is allowed, provided 12mm size diameter vibrators are used to consolidate the concrete filling the spaces between the pipes. For pipeline encased with 100mm thick concrete, each batch shall be well compacted and worked around the pipe and vibrated using a vibrator. The space between the pipes shall be properly tamped with a 12mm diameter rod to ensure that the concrete is properly filled. The final layer of concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled.

(e)

When pipes are laid under conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out immediately, approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be used with the concrete.

(f)

All spaces alongside the pipe shall be filled with stone free earth and hand punned to a compacted thickness of not less than 100mm above the top of the pipe barrel.

(g)

Where the pipe is recessed into the wall of the manhole, the outside surface of the pipe shall be roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of solvent cement applied for its length in the manhole wall.

(h)

Pipes shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.2m below the final ground level or as otherwise directed.



110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Installation (Cont'd)

24.2.2.6

Construction Method (Cont'd)

24.2.3

(i)

Pipes shall be in straight run. When bending is unavoidable, the bend shall be gradual and smooth. No ‘S’ bend is allowed.

(j)

A 90 degree upturn when changing from a horizontal to a vertical plane shall be done with approved type factory made bend pipe. The pipe shall be clipped and flushed against the wall and shall rise to a height of 1.0m above ground level unless otherwise directed.

(k)

A nylon/polyethylene rope shall be provided in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing and this shall be drawn in together with the proposed cable. The rope shall be of 4-core or multistrand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in coil of 200m. In all lead-in pipes, the rope shall extend to the first manhole to allow pulling of cables in the manhole.

Standard Manholes (a)

The details of the standard manholes are shown in the COPIF. The presence of unforeseen obstructions in the ground, or adverse ground conditions, may necessitate the construction of a type other than that specified, or a modification of one or more of the dimensions stipulated in the COPIF. The SO Rep shall advise the Contractor of any modifications required. The Contractor shall not carry out any modification without the approval of the SO Rep.

(b)

Before any concrete is placed : (i)

The bottom of the excavation must be properly levelled and consolidated.

(ii)

The bottom shall be kept dry by providing a sump hole as shown in the COPIF to accommodate a water pump, and a layer of 150mm thick hardcore material shall be provided where necessary.

(c)

Pipes shall be cast in situ as construction of manhole proceeds. Pipe ends shall be trimmed and entries made clear of raw edges which may damage cables, if flared mouth pipe is not used.

(d)

Pipes shall enter the manholes in the manner as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipes shall enter the manholes at such depths as to ensure a minimum clearance of 350mm from the roof and base and 150mm from the walls at the sides unless otherwise specified.

350mm 150mm

150mm 350mm

(e)


Rawl plugs, channel brackets and anchor irons and earth rods shall be fixed in the manhole as shown in the COPIF or in such other positions as determined by the SO Rep.


Standard Manholes (Cont'd) (f)

Manholes shall be constructed at a depth to allow a 230mm thick grade 30 concrete shaft wall with the following height (measured from the roof to the top of the cover) as shown : Manhole Code JX 2 MX 1 and MX 2 MX 3 and MX 4

Height (mm) 250 shown in the details in the COPIF 400 shown in the details in the COPIF 1200mm with single layer of steel fabric reinforcement shown in the details in the COPIF

Where X = C denotes that heavy-duty manhole frame and cover shall be used. Where X = F denotes that medium duty manhole frame and cover shall be used. Concrete for filling the recess of the frame and cover shall be of grade 30 concrete and shall be flushed with the top of the cover. For heavy duty without frame and cover, the concrete shall be filled up to the ribs without covering the ribs.

24.2.4

(g)

Manhole walls shall be fair faced and not rendered. All projections shall be removed and cavities filled with cement mortar. The walls shall not be coated with cement or cement sand wash.

(h)

The floor shall be given a 20mm rendering of cement mortar with a fall towards the sumphole from all directions.

(i)

Only approved formwork shall be used in manhole construction.

(j)

Manholes or other structures shall be located outside the Drainage Reserve and at a minimum clear distance of 1m from the wall of an existing culvert, or 2.5m from the boundaries of the Drainage Reserve.

(k)

Manholes should be located within the turfed area where feasible. The top level of the manholes should match the final road level or the surrounding ground level as decided by the SO Rep.

(l)

The position of the manholes and pipelines should not conflict with the drains, sewer lines, sewer manholes, electrical pipelines and draw pits.

(m)

Completed manholes shall be pumped clear of water and made ready for the SO Rep to inspect.

Manhole Frame & Cover (a)

Manhole frame and cover shall be obtained from suppliers who have obtained certifications from the PSB or other accredited product certification bodies that these items comply with SS 30 Grade A1 or Grade B for heavy duty or medium duty respectively. The manhole cover shall not bear the name of any licensees.

(b)

Medium duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within turf or footpath areas.

(c)

Heavy-duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within carriageway or car park.

(d)

Voids in the frame and cover of heavy-duty type are to be filled with grade 30 concrete, well tamped, levelled off, and cured before use.

(e)

The manhole frame and cover shall be placed on top of manhole shaft, with a minimum width of 150mm and a minimum depth of 150mm and grade 30 concrete haunching all round the frame. The frame and cover shall be fixed in such a manner as to be level with the surrounding area.

(f)

Manhole covers near to building edges or road edges shall be aligned with these edges.



Pipe, Manhole And Trench Testing Upon completion of pipe laying works, the Contractor shall make arrangements with Public Telecommunication Licensees (PTL) / Telecommunication System Licensees (TSL) through the Telecommunication Facility Co-ordination Committee (TFCC) to have the pipe tested in accordance with the following procedures.

24.2.5.1

24.2.5.2

Pipe Testing Of 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Between Manholes (a)

On completion of the pipe laying (including compaction of the backfill) between any two manholes or sites thereof, a cylindrical brush and standard Mandrel (see details in the COPIF) or a Quad No.5 cable of minimum 2m length shall be passed through each bore in both directions to test the pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have entered. The Contractor shall provide the test mandrel and brush. The mandrel shall follow the brush to minimize possible scouring or breaking of the pipe. The testing shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep before the section of pipes is accepted.

(b)

When the building of manhole(s) is/are deferred until after the completion of a section of pipe included in the Works, the last 2m of each bore shall be tested. The SO Rep shall first make a visual check with the aid of a torchlight or similar means of illumination. Any foreign matter shall be removed from the pipe.

(c)

The Contractor shall test and install draw-wires or nylon ropes in all newly laid pipes including one way pipe. (nylon/polyethylene rope of 4-core or multi-strand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in coil of 200m).

(d)

Testing of encasement of the pipe shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep.

Manhole Testing (a)

Cube Test When instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall furnish the required numbers of 100mm cubes of concrete for manhole construction to be prepared and tested for its compressive strength in accordance with SS 78:1972. A minimum of one such test shall be conducted per ten manholes. The minimum works cube strength of concrete shall be as shown hereunder :

(b)

Grade 20

-

14N per mm2 after 7 days 20N per mm2 after 28 days

Grade 30

-

20N per mm2 after 7 days 30N per mm2 after 28 days

Core Test After the concrete has hardened, the SO Rep may at his discretion, instruct the Contractor to drill sample(s) of concrete from manhole walls or floors or roofs and send such sample(s) for core test in accordance with BS 1881 all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

24.2.5.3

Water Proofing The Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that after the completion of pipe laying and manhole construction, there shall be no leakage such as seeping, dripping or flowing of water through manhole walls, roof, floor and pipe entries.



Pipe, Manhole And Trench Testing (Cont'd)

24.2.5.4

Testing of Trench The Contractor shall arrange all the necessary equipment and manpower to carry out tests on the constructed trenches on any of the following : (a)

the depth of covering;

(b)

the concrete encasement;

(c)

the trench base construction;

(d)

the compaction test of the backfilling material and the subgrade;

(e)

quality test of backfilling and reinstatement materials;

(f)

the fabric reinforcement.

The Contractor shall rectify Works that are not carried out in accordance with the Specifications. All test results shall be certified by the SO Rep. 24.2.5.5

Backfilling For Underground Pipe System All trenches excavated for the provision of underground pipe system for telecommunication and Broadband coaxial cables shall be backfilled as follows : (a)

For trenches that are located within the road, backfill shall be from the completed pipe level to the subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust. The backfilling shall be properly compacted.

(b)

For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the Contract with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.

Section 25/.....

BLDG12/S24.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 25-1 SECTION 25 CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT

25.1

GENERAL Construct badminton court, sepak takraw court, volley ball court, basket ball court, fitness station, and children's playground, complete with play equipment, play sculpture, sand filling; or concrete base with line markers, table and concrete benches in numbers and to positions as shown in the Drawings. Details and finishes shall be as shown and as specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.

25.2

SETTING OUT Set out outline of playground, courts, fitness station, or position of play equipment and obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding further. Allow for shifting and making adjustment when directed by the SO Rep.

25.3

LEVELS Levels of playground and equipment shall be based on finished ground level adjourning and not necessarily on finished platform level shown on the Drawings. Check on site in all cases to ensure that rainwater collected on these playground can be discharged into nearby drains. Adjust levels where necessary.

25.4

GROUND BASE After removal of the top layer of the soil, the ground shall be well consolidated mechanically before laying hardcore. Consolidate again, filling more hardcore to make up to level. Should ground be soft, obtain the decision of the SO Rep on the necessity for piling work.

25.5

CONCRETE STRUCTURE

25.5.1

Construct concrete structure of Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

25.5.2

Bases of playgrounds shall be hardcore base of an average net thickness of 100mm, consolidated hardcore, blended and topped with 50mm thick crusher run (6-40mm) and compacted to a net thickness of 100mm and to a fall 1:50 or as shown in the Drawings. Provide expansion joints to positions and details as shown.

25.5.3

Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts Where hardcourts and multi-purpose courts are included in the Works, these shall be constructed strictly in accordance with the Drawings. The slab shall be a minimum of 150mm thick reinforced with wire mesh D8 placed 35mm from the top surface. The Grade 30 concrete shall be cast as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Contraction joints shall be introduced into the slab at a spacing of 9500mm or as shown in the Drawings. It shall be formed by a saw-cut after the concrete has aged for at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut shall be at least 40mm. For multi-purpose courts, a 25mm expansion joint shall be formed strictly in accordance with the Drawings at the half-court line.



Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts (Cont'd) The slab shall be finished with 3 passes of power trowel done without sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water onto the surface. The trowelling shall be completed before the concrete set. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete the job. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods. The basketball court stand shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. Concrete footing shall be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. 50mm thick nylon cushion padding shall wrap round the standpost to the height as shown in the Drawings. The backboard shall be 18mm clear acrylic sheet and shall be fixed to the angle support with 6mm diameter stainless steel counter sunk screws and at intervals as shown in the Drawings. All galvanised steel pipes, angles and supports shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with one coat of undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. All court lines shall be painted with polyurethane paint in bright red, orange, blue or white as indicated. Samples of polyurethane paint showing the colour range as specified shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor shall ensure that the steel structure are adequately and effectively protected from lightning strike. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with the Drawings.

25.6

CONCRETE PIPES Concrete pipes shall be of the dimensions as shown in the Drawings & conforming to BS 556.

25.7

PRECAST SLABS Precast slabs around edges of playground shall be 300mm x 300mm x 100mm thick of Grade 30 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and cast in steel moulds. Lay slabs on 1:3 cement mortar bed with 25mm gaps between slabs. Fill these gaps with 5 to 10mm graded granite chippings.

25.8

SUB-SOIL PIPES All sub-soil pipes shall be installed at areas as indicated in the Drawings. All sub-soil pipes shall be of perforated UPVC sub-soil pipes conforming to BS 4962 : 1989 or SS 272 UPVC pipes with perforations as shown in the Drawings. All sub-soil pipes shall be wrapped with approved non-woven geotextile fabric and encased with washed sand as shown in the Drawings. All sub-soil pipes shall be laid in 1:100 gradient (minimum) and with uPVC pipe joint fittings. The maximum length of sub-soil pipe shall be 25m. For perimeter open drains with depth of 400mm and above, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 150mm. Where the depth of the perimeter open drain < 400mm, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 100mm. Under such case, consult with the SO Rep before proceeding. All sub-soil pipes shall be connected to sumps and drains at the outlet. Upon completion of laying of all subsoil pipes, the Contractor shall prepare and submit 3 copies of as-built drawings to the SO Rep. Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven type and approved by SO Rep. The tensile strength of geotextile shall be minimum 7.0kN/m and flow rate shall be 80 -150 litres/sq.m/sec. Submit test report and sample for the approval of SO Rep before installation on the Site.



PLAY EQUIPMENT AND OUTDOOR FITNESS EQUIPMENT

25.9.1

Play Equipment Fabricate all playground equipment as shown and complying with SS 457:2007. Install these equipment in the positions and in accordance with the details as shown in the approved shop drawings. The Contractor shall produce program for submission of shop drawings, and seek SO Rep approval on installation time frame. The Contractor shall provide shop drawings, manufacturer’s component installation drawings, mounting details with PE endorsement and third party certification by International Play Equipment Manufacturer’s Association (IPEMA) or other equivalent as approved by SO Rep to Consultant Qualified Person (QP) for approval. The third party certificate by IPEMA shall indicate the model of the approved play equipment. The Contractor shall follow strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions and procedures for the installation of each play structure designed. The play equipment shall be supervised and inspected by the Contractor and the Consultants QP. The Contractor produce inspection checklist, certificate of supervision and other related records on play equipment upon request during the site audit. Upon handing over the playground including play equipment, the Contractor shall engage the Certified Playground Safety Inspector (CPSI) to inspect and certify the installed play equipment complied with relevant standards. The Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A46, together with the approved drawings, to the SO Rep. The CPSI shall indicate the name and the registration no. on the drawings with the Performance Compliance Certificate.

25.9.2

Outdoor Fitness Equipment Fabricate all outdoor fitness equipment as shown and complying with SS 534:2007. Install this equipment in the positions and in accordance with the details as shown in the approved shop drawings. The Contractor shall produce program for shop drawings, approvals and installation time frame. Contractor and Consultants to strictly follow specialist’s instructions and installation methods and ensure shop drawings include details of fixings and footings. Modification by main contractor and/or specialist to shop drawings shall be re-submitted to Consultants for verification. The installation shall be in accordance with the approved shop drawings and shall be supervised by the Consultants. The finished product shall be inspected by the Contractor, Specialist, sub-contractor and the Consultants EPDM rubber flooring shall be as specified in Clause 25.10 “Cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber Flooring for Children’s Playground”. Upon handing over the fitness equipment, the Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A48 to the SO Rep.

25.10

CAST-IN-SITU EPDM RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND

25.10.1

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

25.10.2

Concrete Base The concrete base shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements with the necessary drainage and falls before laying the cast-in-situ rubber flooring.



25.10.3


(CONT’D)

Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring The wet-pour rubber flooring for the children’s playground consists of a tw0-layer system, comprising of a base mat of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (hereinafter referred to as “SBR” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) rubber granular and a top surface of Ethylene Propylene Dienemonomer (hereinafter referred to as “EPDM” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it). The completed rubber flooring shall be free from Defect, such as blistering, fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, unevenness and discolouration. The performance of the rubber flooring surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001. (a)

Polyurethane Binder The binding agent shall be a solvent free single component Methylene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as “MDI” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) based, moisture curing binder. It shall be Toulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as “TDI” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) free. The binder shall be “Flexilon 1102”; “Stobielast S133/S134”; “Tennek TPB 4811 (2c)”; “Incorez 902/023”; “Poly 8112C”; or other approved, polyurethane binder.

(b)

EPDM Top Layer The EPDM shall be peroxide cured only. The typical physical properties of the peroxide cured EPDM shall be as follows: Hardness (IRHD) Tensile (Mn/m²) Elongation at break (%) Specific Gravity

65 ±5 > 4.2 > 650 1.58 ± 0.03

EPDM pigment synthetic rubber granules (size 1 –4mm) shall be coloured EPDM and must be UV stable. Strand, shave, chipped or shredded rubber is not acceptable in the top layer. A minimum of 10mm thick top layer EPDM rubber surface shall be a seamless surface. The colours and design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its installation. The EPDM shall be “BRG”; ”MRI; or other approved. (c)

Base Layer The base layer shall be a precise combination of black granular rubber SBR (size 4 to 10 mm) mixed with binder. The thickness of the SBR base rubber shall be minimum 65mm thick.

(d)

Thickness The total thickness of the cast-in-situ EPDM rubber flooring shall not be less than 75 mm thick.

25.10.4

Method Of Installation The system shall be laid-in-situ on top of the concrete base and trawled to provide an even, seamless. porous, slip resistance and resilient rubber flooring. (a)

Surface Preparation All surfaces are to be laid to fall and shall be clean and dry before commencement of the Works. The new concrete base shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of seven days prior to the commencement of the rubber flooring.

(b)

SBR Base Rubber SBR base rubber granules shall be thoroughly mixed by mechanical mixer with the polyurethane binder and laid onto the concrete slab. A minimum ratio of 100:12 by weight, between the rubber granules and binder shall be mixed on the Site. The SBR rubber layer shall be minimum 65mm thick . The screed shall be trowelled to form a uniform and seamless layer. A roller is required to roll the surface to maintain an equal density surface throughout.



25.10.4

CAST-IN-SITU EPDM RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND Method Of Installation (c)

(CONT’D)

(Cont'd)

Curing For Base Rubber The surface shall be cured in ambient temperature for a minimum of 12 hours before proceeding to the next layer.

(d)

EPDM A minimum thickness of 10mm EPDM layer is laid on a SBR rubber base. A minimum ratio of 100:18 by weight between the EPDM rubber and binder shall be mixed. The screeding shall be cast-in-situ screeding and hand trowel to maintain a seamless application.

(e)

Curing For EPDM The surface can be walked on only after 18 hours. However, the playground shall only be opened for public usage after 5 days when full curing is achieved. Proper barricade shall be provided during the process of curing.

(f)

Edges The surface edges shall be flush with adjacent areas or tapered to provide a safe and barrier-free transition.

25.10.5

Performance Requirements Where cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber flooring for children's playground is included in the Works, test certificates for the performance requirements specified hereunder shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The performance requirements and test methods for impact absorbing playground surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001. (a)

Resistance To Abrasive Wear The cast-in-situ surfaces shall exhibit the performance specified hereunder : (i) (ii)

(b)

Wear index shall be less than 1.0; Wear ratio (p) shall be not less than 1.0 and not more than 3.0

Slip Resistance The minimum slip resistance measured in any direction of test, under either wet or dry conditions shall not be less 40.

(c)

Resistance To Indentation The residual indentation (r), after 24 hour recovery, shall not be more than 5.0mm. after removal of the load and after allowing for 24 hour recovery, none of the specimens tested shall exhibit any cracking, splitting or perforation around the point at which the load was applied.

(d)

Ease Of Ignition The greatest radius of effects of ignition shall not exceed 35mm and shall thereby be classified as having a “LOW radius of effects of ignition”.

(e)

Critical Fall Height Critical fall height of impact absorbing surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.

Before handing over the playground including playground equipment, contractor is required to conduct impact attenuation test at site to comply with SS 495:2001 and shall submit Performance Compliance Certificate, together with test report attached in the format as shown in Appendix A46, to the SO Rep.



25.10.6


(CONT’D)

Warranty The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring For Children’s Playground as produced in Appendix A6. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A6(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.

25.11

BONDING OF SPRING ROCKERS (PLAYGROUND) All spring rockers in playground shall be electrically bonded to weldmesh in accordance to SS 555. The Contractor shall ensure proper bonding is done.

25.12

EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS Equipotential nettings shall be provided for playground, hardcourt, fitness station with reinforced concrete base in accordance to SS 555 : Part 3 Clause 8.3.3. The Contractor shall ensure electrical continuity of the weldmesh/BRC used to form the equipotential surface and that all metallic poles and elements within the surface are properly bonded to the weldmesh/BRC. The Contractor shall capture all the necesssary photographs to prove that equipotential nettings are provided and equipment and metallic fixtures are bonded. These photographs, with dates shown, shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval and record. In addition, the Consultant's LEW or PE shall submit a certification form (HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET) as produced in Appendix A47 to HDB to confirm equipotential nettings have been provided for the playground/hardcourt / fitness station in accordance to SS 555 upon completion of the work.

Section 26/.....


Bldg Spec Page 26-1 SECTION 26 TREE PLANTING AND TURFING

26.1

PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS

26.1.1

General The work generally includes :

26.1.2

26.1.3

26.1.4

(a)

Preparation of plant bed and tree hole including soil supplements.

(b)

The search, selection, supply, delivery and planting of nursery plants.

(c)

Protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of all plant materials and mulched beds.

Quality Of Workmanship And Materials (a)

All materials shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use on the Site. Materials shall be obtained from approved sources/or suppliers.

(b)

All materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality.

(c)

All plant materials supplied shall be free of pest disease, discolouration and damage. Plants shall be well branched with vigorous shoots. The root system of each plant shall contain a good proportion of fibrous roots.

Inspection (a)

All materials shall be subjected to inspection and approval by the SO Rep.

(b)

Inspection and approval of plants on delivery shall be for quality, size and variety only and shall not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during the planting or at the time of inspection for final acceptance.

Submission (a)

Samples Submit samples of each of the following type of materials to be approved except where specified otherwise : Topsoil Materials for planting mixtures Materials for staking, guying and wrapping Fertilizers

(b)

Request for Substitution If substitutions for the plants listed in the plant schedule are required, submit request for substitution approval in writing within six weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

(c)

Photographs of Plant Material Within six (6) calendar months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, submit two (2) complete sets of photographs of all plant material subject to inspection. All photographs shall be labelled and representative of the plant materials specified.

(d)

Maintenance Reports and Schedule During the Maintenance Period, submit monthly reports describing the work completed for the previous month and the work to be accomplished in the following month.



Horticultural Supervisor The Contractor shall employ a competent, experienced (min 2 years) and qualified horticultural supervisor (minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture or equivalent) to be stationed full time at the Site and for the full duration of the Works required under this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, who shall receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep, and such instructions given to the horticultural supervisor shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.

26.1.6

Notice Of Works The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep at least 24 hours in advance of his intention to commence any of the following operations : setting out; excavation; backfilling; plant delivery and planting.

26.1.7

Topsoil All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20% approved organic matter.

26.1.8

Sub-Soil The clay content of the sub-soil which is the strata found just below the top soil layer shall not be greater than 45%.

26.1.9

Unwashed Sand The unwashed sand shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material.

26.1.10

Soil Conditioner Soil conditioner shall be peat, cocopeat, organic compost, or other approved fibrous organic matters suitable for mixing with soil to make a friable growing medium for plants.

26.1.11

Lightweight Aggregate Lightweight aggregate shall be clean clinker of low-density inert material of vermiculite or volcanic scoria, expanded shale/clay or other porous material weighing not more than 500 kg per m3.

26.1.12

Water-Holding Medium Water-holding medium is an absorbent copolymer water crystal that increase the water-holding capacity of any soil mixture to at least 15 times its own weight.

26.1.13

Setting Out (a)

The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

Any discrepancies between the Drawings and actual conditions on the Site shall be notified to the SO Rep before commencement of the Works. If the Contractor fails to notify the SO Rep on any such discrepancies, all costs and expenses of any adjustment, amendment, resetting and realignment of the setting out shall be borne by the Contractor.

(c)

The location of trees, palms and shrubs shall be laid out and pegged by the Contractor on the Site to be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works. The pegs shall be painted to indicate sizes of holes/pits as follows: Holes / Pit Sizes 0.5m x 0.5m x 0.5m 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m


Colour Indication Yellow Not Painted Red


Setting Out (Cont'd) (d)

26.1.14

The shape, pattern and layout of flower beds shall be demarcated and drawn by the Contractor on the Site. The Site shall be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works.

Hole For Planting Holes for planting shall be decided by the SO Rep. All holes excavated shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before backfilling soil mixture. All excavated and unwanted materials shall be removed from the Site. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for excavating clayish subsoil, broken concrete, rubble or other material when excavating holes for tree planting as no claim for extras shall be entertained for excavation in difficult or hard ground. Holes for planting shall be of the following sizes :

26.1.15

(a)

Minimum 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m deep for planting of tree saplings

(b)

Minimum 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep for the planting of semi-mature (instant and 30-litre bag and above) trees and fruit trees

(c)

Minimum 500mm deep for flower beds or trenches to areas as shown in the Drawings

(d)

Minimum 500mm x 500mm x 500mm deep for planting of shrubs and foliage plants

Soil Mixture for Backfilling (a)

Waterlogged Hole If there is underground water or the hole is waterlogged, necessary action or measure shall be taken to rectify the waterlogged condition

(b)

Soil Mixture All planting holes shall be backfilled with 3:1 topsoil, soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg per m3 of granular fertiliser NPK (15:15:6:4) well mixed to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of filling.

(c)

Soil Mixture For Roof Garden All close bottom planter shall be backfilled with 4:2:2:2 topsoil, unwashed sand, soil conditioner lightweight aggregate and 20g per m3 of water-holding medium and 1 kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4). They shall be well mixed off-site before backfilling into the planter. The finished level of the soil mixture to be flushed with the top of the lower planter wall.

(d)

Soil Mixture Used For Instant Tree All planting holes for transplanted instant trees/palms/shrubs shall be backfilled with only topsoil.

(e)

Soil Mixture For Fruit Trees Similar soil mixture shall be used. The excavated earth shall be used to constructed earth mound averaging 50 mm high and 1750mm wide along the edge of the holes all round.

26.1.16

Purchase Of Trees The Contractor shall purchase the trees/palms/shrubs etc. from his own source.



26.1.18

Plant Protection (a)

All plant materials shall be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery during the lifting, awaiting transportation, unloading and during storage on the Site.

(b)

Any evidence of unsatisfactory protection to roots, stems, branches and leaves will result in the plants being rejected. Unprotected plants shall not be transported during hot weather and all plants shall be kept moist during transportation and storage. No plant shall be left on the Site unplanted for more than two (2) days.

Plant Quality (a)

All trees, palms, shrubs and other plants delivered to the Site shall be of the specified size, free of pests and diseases and undamaged. Plants shall be well branched with bushy foliage.

(b)

All the general conditions of plants delivered to the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and approved by him before planting out onto the Site in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep.

(c)

The SO Rep shall reserve the right to reject undersized, unhealthy, unspecified, damaged, injured, diseased, infested or any other plants not in accordance with the Contract and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep during the entire period including the Maintenance Period and Defects Liability Period of the Contract.

(d)

The Contractor shall immediately remove and replace all rejected plants at his own cost and expense.

(e)

The plant size shall be measured on the day of planting at the Site in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep in writing.

(f)

Plants not complying to the specified sizes shall be rejected and rectified by the Contractor. All associated costs involved including plant material cost shall be charged and deducted from any monies due to the Contractor, if he fails to rectify.

(g)

All trees, palms and shrubs shall possess the natural characteristics and growth habit typical of its variety and species to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(h)

All trees, palms and shrubs where required under the Contract shall comply with the descriptions and requirements specified hereunder: "Instant Trees" Instant trees are semi-matured trees especially prepared in advance for transplanting. Instant trees shall have the specified minimum clear and upright straight tree trunk of the specified height and girth with at least 3 branches and a well developed secondary branch system. "Big Saplings" Big saplings are medium-sized nursery grown trees having a single straight stem and unbroken leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with an evenly spread and balanced lateral branches and shall be of the specified girth measured at 0.5m from the ground "Saplings" Saplings are small sized nursery grown trees having single straight stem and unbroken leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with evenly and balanced lateral.



Plant Quality (Cont'd) (h) (Cont'd) "Edible Fruit Trees" Edible fruit trees shall be of minimum height of 1.2m or as specified. They shall be marcotted or grafted saplings especially as follows:  Pouteria caimito (Abiu) - Grafted  Persea americana (Avocado) - Grafted  Achras zapota (Chiku) - Marcotted  Durio zibethinus (Durian) - Grafted  Psidium guajava (Guava) - Grafted or Marcotted  Artocarpus heterophyllus (Jackfruit) - Grafted  Eugenia aquea (Jambu Air) - Marcotted  Citrus microcarpa (Lime) - Grafted  Mangifera indica (Mango) - Grafted  Nephelium lappaceum (Rambutan) - Grafted  Annona muricata (Soursop) - Grafted  Averrhoa carambola (Starfruit) - Grafted  Artocarpus incisus (Breadfruit) - Grafted "Single-stemmed Palms" Single stemmed palms shall have a straight trunk of the specified height measured from the root collar. The heads of the palms shall be balanced with at least five fronds and evidenced of one new shoot. "Clustered Palms" Clustered palms are palms which naturally grow as a multi-stemmed clump by sending out suckers. Such palms shall have a minimum of three suckers each and have a specified overall height measured from the root collar. They shall have at least three fronds on each stem and evidence of one new growing shoot per stem. "Shrubs" Shrubs are woody perennials of generally multi-stemmed and bushy habit and shall have a minimum height measured from the ground level to the top of plants as specified. Such shrubs shall be well balanced and bushy with strong developed fibrous root systems, and shall be pruned in advance as required to achieve the specified height tolerances. Branches shall break from the base of the plant just above the root collar, and shall be well furnished with leaves right down to the ground level unless otherwise specified by the SO Rep. All plants shall be grown in containers of suitable dimensions for the species. "Herbaceous Plants" Herbaceous plants are non-woody perennials usually of a clump forming habit. Such plants shall have well-developed main stem or stems with good symmetry, and a healthy root system. Clump of herbaceous plants shall include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots with soil undisturbed by lifting with evidence of growing shoots emerging above the soil level. All herbaceous plants shall be grown in containers unless specified as being produced by an alternate method.



Plant Quality (Cont'd) (h)

Cont'd "Groundcover" Groundcover plants are low growing or prostrate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose habit are to totally cover the soil. All groundcover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal growth in all directions. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves. All plants shall be grown in containers. "Climbers" Climbers are plants whose growth habit are to climb upwards by means of twining stems, tendrils or clinging roots. Such plants shall have at least two leader shoots up to the specified height or length and a vigorous root system. All plants are to be grown in containers.

26.1.19

26.1.20

Planting Techniques (a)

Where trees/palms are planted in turf or shrub areas, plant trees and palms before the turfing or shrub planting operations. Where shrubs are planted in turfed areas, plant the shrubs before the turfing work.

(b)

The Contractor shall handle the plant in such a manner so that the ball of soil surrounding the roots is not broken. The plant should be firmly held by the pot, plaster bags, containers, etc.

(c)

The Contractor shall ensure that trees, palms and shrubs are properly removed from their pots, containers, plaster bags, etc and securely planted in the ground. The Contractor shall straighten the plants whenever directed by the SO Rep.

(d)

All plants shall be planted with their collars levelled with the ground and covered with soil as directed by the SO Rep.

(e)

All plants shall be planted to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to the same soil depth as in the nursery and shall be well watered before removing them from the containers The plants shall be positioned upright and the soil firmed around the roots.

(f)

For large areas, the outer rows are to be set out first to ensure that the correct shape of the bed is established. The remaining plants shall then be evenly distributed to cover the planting area. The SO Rep shall be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants to fill the area required, and an assessment of the laying out adjustments will be directed accordingly.

(g)

The laying out of plants shall be completed and approved before planting into the soil bed can commence.

(h)

Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a trowel or hand spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate the root ball of the plant. The plants shall be placed upright in the planting pockets and make firm into the ground by treading or hand pressure. All plants shall be watered thoroughly immediately after planting.

Tree Support (a)

To Tree Sapling Tree saplings shall be supported immediately as directed after planting. The supporting stakes shall be in 75mm diameter Bintangore pole or other approved material, minimum 3.0m long and driven vertically 1.2m deep into the ground without injuring the rootballs and projecting 250mm above the crown of the sapling. Fasten tree saplings to the supporting stakes by rubber or PVC hose and tie wires. Tying wire shall be No. 20 SWG galvanised wire, threaded through 10mm diameter rubber or plastic hose and be wound around the tree trunk in a single loop. The tree trunk shall be secured at a point just above its branch and also at a point just 500mm above ground level.



Tree Support (Cont'd) (b)

To Semi-Mature/Mature/Instant Tree (Tripod Support) For semi-mature/mature/instant tree, 3 tree stakes of Bintangore poles shall be evenly spaced around the tree to form a tripod system to support the transplanted tree at about two thirds of its height or under the main fork. The tree stakes of Bintangore poles are driven at least 0.5m into the ground at an angle. 2 layers of gunny sack or similar material shall be wound around the tree trunk where it meets the supporters. The meeting point of the supporters are tightened up with galvanised wire to form a sturdy tripod support system. The support system shall be checked monthly and be removed after 6 months when the tree becomes stable.

26.1.21

Tree Guards Provide tree guards to trees planted as specified by the SO Rep. The pattern of the tree guard shall be decided by the SO Rep.

26.1.22

Tree Shade Provide shading to mangosteen, rambutan or other sensitive fruit trees as directed by the SO Rep. Nylon netting or other approved with 60% to 70% shading effect shall be used to cover the top of the tree guard and upper 500mm of its four sides.

26.1.23

Transplanting Existing Trees (Instant Tree) Where required under the Contract, transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follows : (a)

Branch Pruning Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed by the SO Rep. Paint all cuts with fungicidal sealant.

(b)

Rootballs All trees/palms, shrubs to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter ranging from 3.5 to 7.5 times the diameter of the tree trunk measured at 1.0m above ground level or to the size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench about 0.8m deep around the tree at an appropriate distance. All protruding roots shall be cut and painted with a fungicidal sealant. Excavated trees shall be transplanted within the same working day unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.

(c)

Tree Pits To avoid delay, the new pit for the tree transplant shall be ready before the tree is brought to the new location. The pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to allow for incorporation of topsoil beneath the root. The minimum tree pit dimension shall be 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep. All planting holes for instant tree shall be backfilled with good quality approved topsoil to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at the time of filling.

(d)

Lifting And Transporting The tree shall be lifted by motor crane or other lifting machinery of appropriate capacity. Every precaution including rootball securely wrapped by moisten canvass and angle bar frame or other approved materials shall be taken to prevent damage to the rootball during the loading and transporting of the tree to the new location.

(e)


Before unloading a tree into position, the depth and diameter of the rootball shall be measured and adjustment made to the pit. The tree shall be set in the hole, orientated, depth adjusted and planted with minimum delay. The tree shall be planted to its former depth. Backfilling shall then be firmly consolidated to eliminate air pockets under and around the roots. Tripod shall be provided to keep it firmly in position if required.


Tree Pruning Trees with dead, rotten or crossed branches shall be pruned to maintain a clear stem up to the specified height using the methods described below. The pruning operation shall be carried out by an experienced worker with appropriate tools and equipment under the supervision of the Horticultural Supervisor :

26.1.25

(a)

Pruning shall be done with a cut just above and sloping away from an outward facing healthy bud;

(b)

Removal of branches shall be done by cutting flush with the adjoining stem and in such a way that no part of the stem is damaged or torn;

(c)

Ragged edges of barks shall be trimmed with a sharp knife;

(d)

Any cut or wound over 25mm diameter shall be painted with an approved sealant such as "Arbrex" or other approved after trimming; and

(e)

All pruning shall be cleared and removed from the Site after pruning.

Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc Planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc. shall be maintained prior to handing over to the Employer and shall be further maintained for another 6 months from the date the planting is handed over to the Employer by performing and/or providing the following :

26.1.25.1

Watering (a)

Trees 20 litres of water per tree shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

Landscaped Site 10 litre of water per m2 of the landscaped site shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep.

(c)

Method Watering shall be carried out by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun to wet the soil thoroughly.

26.1.25.2

Soil-Loosening (a)

Ornamental Tree Saplings For ornamental tree saplings, the weeding circle shall be loosened to a depth of 75mm using a garden fork.

(b)

Shrub/Foliage/Landscaped Site For shrub/foliage/landscaped site, the weeding area shall be spiked to a depth of 100mm using a garden fork.

26.1.25.3

Weeding (a)

Ornamental Trees For ornamental trees, weed to 1.0m diameter around the sapling tree base using hand trowel or weeding hoe. Weed out an annular band of 50mm around mature or semi-mature tree base using hand trowel or weeding hoe or approved weedicide.



Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd)

26.1.25.3

Weeding (Cont'd) (b)

Fruit Trees For fruit tree saplings, spread 100mm of mulch consisting of dry shredded leaves, grass sword, wood chips, cocopeat or compost over the 1.0m diameter weeding circle. Spray weedicide on the edge of the mulched area (50mm band) using a knapsack sprayer equipped with a "drift-shield". The mulched area shall be weeded monthly. For semi-mature and mature fruit trees, a weeding annular band of 200mm around the tree base shall be maintained by weeding operation.

(c)

Shrub/Foliage (Individually Planted) A weeding circle of 0.5m diameter around individually planted shrub/foliage shall be manually weeded using a hand trowel or weeding hoe.

(d)

Landscaped Site The Landscaped site shall be weeded using a hand trowel or weeding hoe.

(e)

Hedge An annular band of 0.5m diameter around the base of the hedge shall be weeded using a hand trowel or weeding hoe.

26.1.25.4

Fertilising (a)

Ornamental Trees Sapling Fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 375g per ornamental tree sapling within the weeding circle 120mm away from the stem. Semi-Mature/Mature Trees For semi-mature/mature ornamental trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be inserted at a rate of 0.5kg per 250mm girth into holes 300mm deep and at 500mm apart along the dripline.

(b)

Fruit Tree Saplings Less Than 1 Year Old For fruit tree saplings less than 1 year old, fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be placed under the mulch at a rate of 300g per tree, 120mm away from the stem. Saplings/Semi-Mature Trees For fruit tree saplings/semi mature fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 0.5kg per tree within the drip zone away from the stem. Matured Trees (Flowering/Fruiting) For mature (flowering/fruiting) fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted (on level ground) or shall be pocketed (on slope) at 1.0 kg per tree as directed by the SO Rep within the drip zone away from the stem.

(c)

Shrub/Foliage For shrub/foliage, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2, with the weeding circle 100mm away from the stem.




26.1.25.4

Fertilising (Cont'd) (d)

Landscaped Site/Hedge For landscaped site/hedge, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2 as directed by the SO Rep.

(e)

Climber/Creeper For climber/creeper, approved foliar fertilizer shall be sprayed as directed by the SO Rep.

26.1.25.5

Trimming Trees shall be trimmed as directed by the SO Rep including performing and/or providing the following :

26.1.25.6

(a)

Trim and remove all extra leader.

(b)

Trim and remove all side branches from the main trunk measured 3.0m from the ground for trees along footpaths, carparks and roadside.

(c)

Trim and remove all dead, broken, diseased and unwanted branches/shoots.

(d)

Trim and remove all overlapping branches rubbing each other.

(e)

Remove and clear from the Site all trimmed vegetation.

(f)

Paint all cut surfaces exceeding 25.4mm with 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant.

Pest Control (a)

Vegetative Stage Of Trees For vegetative stage of trees, the top and bottom of tree leaves shall be thoroughly sprayed. Respraying shall be done if it rains within 6 hours after spraying. Approved pesticides are : Pesticides Dimethoate Deltamethrin White Summer Oil Abate 1% Sand Granules Benomyl Captan Thiram Terrazole Copper Fungicide (Metalic Copper) Mancozeb Captafol Omite Tenac (sticker)

(b)

40% EC 1.25% EC 80% EC 50% EC 50% UP 80% UP 24% EC 50% 80% WP 39% EC 30% WP

Fruiting Stage Of Fruit Trees For fruiting stage of fruit trees, brown paper or raffia bags shall be used for the control of fruit fly 3 to 4 weeks after flowering for Chiku, Chempedak, Guava, Jackfruit, Jambu Ayer, Mango, Pomelo and Starfruit. Approved brown paper and raffia bags shall be used to bag the fruits as follows : Fruit Chiku; Starfruit Guava; Mango Jambu Ayer; Pomelo Chempedak Jackfruit

Size of Bag 150 x 150mm 150 x 300mm 400 x 400mm 400 x 500mm 500 x 800mm

Material of Bag Brown Paper Brown Paper Brown Paper Brown Paper or Raffia Brown Paper or Raffia

Remove and clear from the Site all rotten fruits on trees or on ground. BLDG12/S26.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)



26.1.25.6

Pest Control (Cont'd) (c)

Shrubs/Foliage Etc For shrubs/foliage etc, immediately spray with approved pesticides after the infestation is spotted. Continue such spraying until the infestation is controlled.

26.1.25.7

Maintenance Planted trees shrubs and ground covers, etc shall be maintained by adjusting tree tie, making good damaged tree guards, adjusting tripod support including providing and/or performing other reasonable work. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc provided under the Contract for a further period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this section including all clauses and subclauses under it) by providing and/or performing the following : Operation

26.1.25.8

26.1.25.9

Frequency

Soil Loosening

Monthly

Weeding

Monthly

Watering Pest Control Fertilising Pruning Adjusting tree ties

Daily Monthly Monthly Monthly Monthly

Damaged/Missing Tree Guards, Supporters, Trees, Shrubs, Ground covers, etc.

To be replaced/repaired as directed by the SO Rep.

) ) and/or to be carried ) out as directed by ) the SO Rep. )

Warning Sign (a)

The Contractor shall display sufficient warning signboards at strategic locations on the Site during the progress of tree pruning/spraying of pesticide works, as directed by the SO Rep.

(b)

The Contractor shall also seal off the Site with red and white plastic tapes as an additional safety precaution during the execution of the Works.

(c)

The signboard shall measure 1000mm long x 600mm wide using aluminium plate with reflective sheeting and reflective wordings "DANGER - TREE PRUNING IN PROGRESS" OR "DANGER PESTICIDE SPRAYING IN PROGRESS". A sample of the signboard shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before using them on the Site.

Working Hours Of Tree Pruning The Contractor shall carry out routine tree pruning/trimming operation within the following hours : Monday to Friday Saturday

: :

7am to 3pm 7am to 12 noon

No routine tree pruning/trimming shall be carried out outside the above hours except otherwise instructed by the SO Rep. 26.1.25.10

Updating Of Landscape Plan The Contractor shall update a landscape plan within one month after final planting and to provide 6 sets of updated landscape plans to the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S26.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TURFING

26.2.1

Site Preparation And Turfing The Contractor shall allow for turfing Works, forming slopes and platforms with even surfaces to the levels as shown in the Drawings. Clear away loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and building debris. Seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing turfing Works.

26.2.1.1

Soil For Site Formation The soil used for backfilling shall be original clean earth and the topmost 600 mm shall be soil with a clay content of not more than 45%.

26.2.1.2

Soil Scarification For Compacted Site The top layer shall be scarified or loosened to 100mm deep for the whole Site and graded to fall towards drains or as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.

26.2.1.3

Site Gradient The Site shall be graded to fall towards drains at a minimum ground gradient of 1 in 70 or as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.

26.2.2

Site Control Tests And Testing Instruments Provide all necessary labour, plant, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments etc. for carrying out all checking and testing of Site Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses to comply with the requirements as specified, in the Contract Sum. No claim for compensation or extras shall be paid for any work carried out by the Contractor in connection with such Works.

26.2.2.1

Number Of Soil Test The number of soil samples shall be 1 per 500 m² subject to a minimum of 3 samples.

26.2.2.2

Percolation Test Procedures for Percolation Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:

26.2.2.3

(a)

Randomly select a spot where the test is to be conducted;

(b)

Dig a hole measuring about 400mm x 400mm x 600mm deep;

(c)

Fill the hole with water up to the top;

(d)

Cover the hole;

(e)

After 24 hours, observe whether or not all the water has drained off. The drainage performance of the soil is acceptable if no water remain in the hole.

Jar Test The procedures for Jar Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:

BLDG12/S26.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)

(a)

Fill a 250 ml measuring cylinder with water up to its two-third level;

(b)

Pour in a teaspoon of washing detergent;

(c)

Shake the contents well;

(d)

Pour in the soil sample until the water level rises to the 250 ml mark;

(e)

Shake the contents well;

(f)

Place the measuring cylinder on a level bench and gently tap until the surface of the sand is level;


Site Control Tests And Testing Instruments (Cont'd)

26.2.2.3

Jar Test (Cont'd) (g)

Take measurement of the sand level;

(h)

After 3 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the silt visible above the sand-silt interface;

(i)

After 24 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the clay visible above the siltclay interface;

(j)

Work out the percentage of clay, silt and sand.

26.2.3

Soil Mixture

26.2.3.1

All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20% approved organic matter.

26.2.3.2

The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg per m3 of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4).

26.2.4

Thickness Of Soil Mixture The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to the turf) at the time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface, followed by the planting of fresh turf.

26.2.5

Turfing Materials Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus) The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.

26.2.6

Planting Turf Sods shall be laid within 24 hours upon delivery, in brick-like patterns. Sods shall be firmly sunken into the ground with their edges in contact but without stretching or overlapping or gap. Water turf immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.

26.2.7

Rolling When the level of the completed turfing Works is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with a garden roller of weight not more than 150 kg or with other approved means. The turfing shall give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out when the turf is established after the second grass cutting.

26.2.8

Temporary Fencing Provide and fix temporary barricade to all turfed areas comprising 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m long Balau timber posts spaced at 2.4m centres with one end driven 450mm into the ground. Corner and end posts shall be strutted by 2 no. of 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m Balau timber post. Run 10mm diameter nylon ropes diagonally and horizontally across the top and bottom of the barricade.

BLDG12/S26.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Maintenance The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, and for a further period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) by providing and/or performing the following :

26.2.10

26.3

(a)

Watering with a volume of 10 litres per m2 daily for the first two weeks after planting and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense;

(b)

Weeding where and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense;

(c)

Replacing dead turf or re-turf bare areas;

(d)

Fertilising before handing over, and on the 3rd and 6th month of the Maintenance Period;

(e)

Cutting grass fortnightly.

Safety Measures For Grass-Cutting Machines (a)

Provide all safety precaution to eliminate danger to the workmen, the general public and the property of others.

(b)

All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed with suitable protective guards of steel or other approved materials to eliminate splinters and flungoff objects from causing damage. Under no circumstances shall the protective guards be removed from machines in operation.

(c)

Hand held open blade rotary machine shall not be allowed to be used without approved guards.

(d)

The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the grass-cutter to stop work.

(e)

Before grass-cutting commences, the public shall be kept at least 10 metres radically away from the grass-cutter and a signboard shall be erected on the Site with the wordings "DANGER KEEP OFF. GRASS CUTTING WORK IS IN PROGRESS".

(f)

The grass-cutting blade shall be securely fixed to the machine. When the machine is in continuous use, regular checks shall be made. The blade shall be kept in good condition. A worn-out blade shall be replaced immediately.

(g)

The bolts and nuts which are fastened to the cutter blade shall be checked before the machines are operated to prevent the blade from flying off.

SUMP Sump for sub-soil drainage shall be constructed to the size and in the position as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG12/S26.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


26.4

USE OF NON-POTABLE WATER The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred in the collection, storage, transportation and use of non-potable water, when directed by the SO Rep, for watering turf, trees and shrubs. Non-potable water can be collected free of charge from the MEWR Sewage Treatment Works. These Sewage Treatment Works are located at : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Ulu Pandan Sewage Treatment Works Kim Chuan Sewage Treatment Works Seletar Sewage Treatment Works Kranji Sewage Treatment Works Bedok Sewage Treatment Works Jurong Sewage Treatment Works

The Contractor shall use water tankers or water-tight tanks mounted on trucks to collect the nonpotable water from any of the above MEWR Sewage Treatment Works. The tank is preferred to have a minimum capacity of 9000 litres. The Contractor must also ensure that unused non-potable water is returned to the Sewage Treatment Works for proper disposal and not discharged into open drains in water catchment areas. The Contractor shall submit detailed particulars of their water tankers or tank mounted trucks to the SO Rep who will then obtain an authorization letter from MEWR for the registered tanker to collect non-potable water. The Contractor shall submit detailed justifications to the SO Rep for not using non-potable water for watering turf, trees and shrubs, after direction has been given by the SO Rep to do so.

Section 27/.....

BLDG12/S26.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 27-1 SECTION 27 MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27.1

GENERAL Construct multi-storey carpark to details as shown in the Drawings. In addition to complying with the requirements in the Specifications, the Contractor shall also be required to comply with the requirement specified in this section including all clauses and subclauses under it.

27.2

WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB/CONCRETE TOPPING AT CARPARK ROOF DECK OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS Water reducing admixture shall be used for the reinforced concrete slab/concrete topping at the roof deck level. The application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Check and ensure that the admixture shall not affect the strength or other properties of the reinforced concrete. The admixture shall comply with SS EN 934 or relevant British Standards and shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.3

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (A)

Over-Riding Clause The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.

(B)

General Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door frames and ironmongery to staircase of multi-storey carpark. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B. Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide.

(C)

Shop Drawings And Sample Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.

(D)

Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.



HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D) (D)

Ironmongery (Cont'd) Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304 . Schedule Of Ironmongery

(E)

(a)

4 no.

Stainless steel hinges.

(b)

1 no.

Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour.

(c)

1 no

Stainless steel pull handles. The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm.

(d)

1 no.

Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate

(e)

1 no.

"Alsecure" ASI/BC002/SS Ball Catch; or “Tiki” ACCORD RC/002 SS Roller Catch; or “YTL” BC002 SS Ball Catch or other approved stainless steel Ball Catch or Roller Catch.

Certificates The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

(F)


(G)


27.4

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO LIFT MACHINE ROOM FOR MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27.4.1


27.4.2

General Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to lift machine room are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the lift machine room complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B.

27.4.3

Shop Drawings And Sample The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings, PSB Product Listing Scheme certificates, PSB test reports, PSB and FSSD approval for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.


Bldg Spec Page 27-3

27.4

HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO LIFT MACHINE ROOM FOR MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)

27.4.4

Ironmongery Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated and approved by FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. Provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule:

27.4.5

(i)

4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.

(ii)

1 no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or “BLIY” N-27-FIR US 32D or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with stainless steel lever handles on rose or on back plate on both sides (shall comply with CP 2:2000, the door shall be opened from the outside only by the use of key and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room).

(iii)

1 no. Brass rebated part.

(iv)

1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).

(v)

1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).

(vi)

1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour.

(vii)

1 no. Approved stainless steel selector.


27.4.6

Certificates Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour firerated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.

27.4.7


27.4.8


27.5

HANDRAILS, PIPE SUPPORTS AND EXPANDED METAL TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK Provide and fix hot dipped galvanized steel handrails and pipe supports as shown in the Drawings. The hot dipped galvanised steel handrails and pipe supports shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 17 "Structural Steelwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Provide and install "Bestal" BMM 3060 or "Emco" SM 3060; or other approved hot dipped galvanised steel expanded metal to parapet. The expanded metal shall be of the following nominal size : SWM LWM Thickness Strand Width


= = = =

42 mm 115 mm 3 mm 6 mm


HANDRAILS, PIPE SUPPORTS AND EXPANDED METAL TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D) All metal strips and screws used for fixing shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel. The details of the expanded metal shall be as shown in the Drawings. The handrails, pipe supports and expanded metal shall be fabricated and assembled in the factory unless otherwise specified. All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used in the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured. All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.6

RAILING, PIPE SUPPORTS AND BALUSTERS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK Provide and fix hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters as shown in the Drawings. The hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in section 17 "Structural Steelwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used for the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured. All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.7

GALVANISED STEEL L-ANGLE TO ALL CORNERS OF COLUMNS AND WALLS Provide and fix galvanised steel L-angle and mild steel flat to all internal corners of columns and walls (next to driveways and ramps including 500mm walls) to the dimensions and details as shown in the Drawings. The L-Angle shall be flushed against the finished surfaces of walls or columns. Paint galvanised steel angles with two coats of luminous paint approved by the Land Transport Authority. The colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.8

SIGNBOARDS All signboards and letterings shall be as shown in the Drawings. These shall be installed at positions as decided by the SO Rep or as stated in the Drawings.

27.9

TRAFFIC SIGNS Traffic signs shall be of retro-reflective material and of brightness as approved by the Land Transport Authority. Letterings, plates and details shall be as shown in the Drawings. Galvanised steel pipes specified in the Drawings shall comply with SS17. Samples of the traffic signs shall be approved by the SO Rep.

27.10

PAINTING (A)

External Painting And Warranty Paint all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including all subclauses under it. The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the work on the same terms and conditions as stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5 and/or A5(TC) as decided by the SO Rep.



PAINTING (CONT'D) (B)

Internal Painting Paint all internal plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with one priming coat and two subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted.

(C)

Painting Of Sample Prior to the commencement of the painting work, submit the colour chart of approved paint to the SO Rep for selection of colour scheme. The Contractor shall then paint one or more panels of the multi-storey carpark parapets for the approval of the SO Rep.

27.11

TRAFFIC LINES, ARROWS AND DIRECTIONAL ARROWS ON FLOORS Unless otherwise specified, all traffic lines, arrows and directional arrows on floors shall be of reflectorised thermoplastic road marking as approved by the Land Transport Authority. The thermoplastic material shall comply with SS 498:Part 1:2002 "Specifications for Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials". The reflectorised thermoplastic road marking shall be provided strictly in accordance with the supplier's instructions. Samples shall be approved by the SO Rep before full implementation.

27.12

CAR PARKING BAYS Paint white lines, red lines, numbers and letterings of the parking bays as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, the paint shall be quick drying chlorinated rubber based and shall comply with the requirements specified in SS221 2002 ""Specification for Road Marking Paint".

27.13

FORMWORK TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARK In addition to complying with the requirements specified in Clause 4.19 "Formwork" including all subclauses under it, the Contractor shall also comply with the following requirements for formwork to MultiStorey Carpark/Garage : (a)

Propping to the slabs and beams at the lower floor deck shall not be removed until the slabs and beams of the upper floor deck have been cast for 3 days.

(b)

The Contractor shall check and ensure that propping to the slabs and beams is adequate at all times.


Bldg Spec Page 27-6

27.14

WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT PLANTER BOXES AT TYPICAL DECK OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK

27.14.1

Scope of Work The Contractor shall provide and lay liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based) Waterproof Membrane, as listed in HDB’s Materials List or other approved Flexible Water-Based Waterproof Membrane to all the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes. All the surfaces shall be examined for defects, and the waterproofing treatment shall be applied on sound concrete.

27.14.2

Preparation Work Concrete surfaces shall be clean from all scale, laitance, loose material, mould oil, curing agents, cracks and honeycombs. The structure shall be ponded prior to the waterproofing treatment to allow identification and rectification of cracks and honeycombs by grouting.

27.14.3

Application The liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based) Waterproof Membrane shall be applied in three coats to obtain a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5mm. The subsequent coats shall only be applied after the first coat has dried.

27.14.4

Testing and Checking After completion of the waterproofing work but prior to the laying of screed or other infill material, the planter boxes shall be tested for water-tightness by ponding by plugging all outlets; and flooding it, with clean water, to the full height of the planter box. There shall be no leakage after a flooding period of at least 48 hours. In areas where leaks are observed during test periods, such areas shall be recoated with the application of additional membrane material. Recoated areas shall be re-tested and further re-coated until such recoated areas pass the water test.

27.14.5

Protection Immediately after the approval by the SO Rep of water test, the Contractor shall apply a skim coat to all the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes to prevent damages to the waterproofing membrane.


Bldg Spec Page 28-1 SECTION 28 ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION/UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND

28.1

ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION

28.1.1

General Electrical Substation shall be deemed to include Electrical Substation, Ring Main Substation, Transformer Room, Generator Room, Tank Storage Room and all other utility rooms for electricity transmission, whether located separately or within a building block. Where metal roofing is used, it shall be as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet" including all subclauses under it.

28.1.2

Construction Time Commence work immediately when site is handed over and shall complete the electrical substation including fencing as shown, not later than the Expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the Contract. Where no such date is stipulated, the substation including fencing shall be completed not later than six calendar months before the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest phase of the contract or the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest dwelling block if the Works is to be completed as a single phase.

28.1.3

Cable Room of Electrical Substation Where shown in the Drawings, the cable room shall be cast in waterproof concrete with precaution taken to render it watertight. In the case where the water table is high, provide drainage for the cable room after consulting with the SO Rep.

28.1.4

Cable Ducts Provide and lay 155mm UPVC pipes in numbers, positions and lengths as shown and encased all round with mass concrete to serve as cable ducts. All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C type complying with the requirement of SS 141 or other approved by PowerGrid. Both ends of the UPVC pipes shall be sealed with removable water-tight plugs. The cable ducts shall be extended at least 600mm beyond the apron and adjacent drain. Prior to the laying of ducts, check the ground conditions and should the ground be soft, inform the SO Rep who shall decide whether piling is required or not.

28.1.5

Cable Trenches, Drains And Switch Gear Floor Openings Cable trenches, drains and switch gear floor openings shall be provided with removable heavy duty A1 chequer plates or heavy duty GS gratings as shown in the Drawings capable of supporting a minimum load of 100 kg. Depth of trenches shall be as shown in the Drawings. After the completion of cable installation by PowerGrid, all entries shall be sealed and water tight to the requirements of PowerGrid. Sand or granite chips shall be provided to fill cable trenches.

28.1.6

Concrete Paved Areas Surrounding concrete paved area within fence shall be 75mm thick 1:2:4 concrete reinforced with 1 layer No. A6 welded steel fabric on 100mm consolidated hardcore.



Reinforced Concrete Drain And Crossing Construct length of surface drain in reinforced concrete to details as shown. Precast concrete drain covers shall be 75mm thick reinforced with 2 layers No. A6 welded steel fabric or approved reinforcement with main reinforcement spanning across drain.

28.1.8

Hollow Glass Blocks Build hollow glass block panels shown in the Drawings and in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions. The size of the glass block shall be 150mm x 150mm x 100mm and approved by the SO Rep. Fix 'EXMET' 60mm No. 20 or other approved reinforcing strip at every second course. Carry reinforcements into brickwork or leave dowel bars of 4mm galvanised wire in reinforced concrete structure to lap with reinforcement. Mortar shall be in accordance with Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block And Brickworks" and pointed with white Portland Cement. Paint openings around panel with bitumen before laying glass blocks.

28.1.9

Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Electrical Substation Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium vent together with all necessary components to all electrical substations as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be extruded with the minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating

28.1.10

Finishing To Internal Floors, Landings And Steps All internal floors except basement landing, steps and transformer plinth shall be provided with 50mm thick cement rendering including a smooth 20mm thick granolithic finish of 1 part cement, 1 part fine granite chippings and 1 part sand with the addition of approved hardener all mixed in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed instructions. All walls and columns shall be provided with minimum 18mm cement plastering.

28.1.11

Time For Rendering Allow for carrying out rendering after PowerGrid has installed their floor frames, switch gears and equipment which may be some time after the sub-station is handed over to PowerGrid after the Date of Substantial Completion for the sub-station. The PowerGrid Engineer-in-charge shall be notified prior to final rendering of the switch room floor.

28.1.12

Finish To Flat Roof Lay screed to flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 60 of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved waterproofing compound to the Manufacturer's printed instructions. Screed shall be minimum 18mm thick.

28.1.13

Painting External And Internal Walls And Ceiling Paint all vents, fascias, columns and beams, skimmed and plastered surfaces as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

28.1.14

Final Coat Painting And Touching Up Allow for waiting until PowerGrid has installed sub-station equipment before applying final coat of painting and touching up. This work may not be carried out within the Time for Completion of this part of the Works.



Electrical Installation (A)

General Provide and install electrical installation and fittings shown including earthing systems for the electrical installation. Installation shall be carried out by a licensed electrician to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and complying with the requirements of PowerGrid. All wiring shall run in galvanised steel exposed conduits (not smaller than 20mm diameter) with spacer bar saddles and bases to BS EN ISO 1461.

(B)

Application For Testing The installation shall be tested/verified by and to the requirements of HDB's Plan Approval (M&E/Testing ) Unit and approved by the SO Rep before handing over to PowerGrid. For all tests, at least seven (7) working days advance notice shall be given to the SO Rep.

(C)

Retesting Any omissions or Defect or faults detected during the day of testing shall be rectified and the Contractor shall arrange for re-testing within three working days from the date of the last test.

28.1.16

Ironmongery All ironmongery shall be as shown in the Drawings.

28.1.17

Fence And Gate Where shown in the Drawings, fencing shall be carried out in accordance with Section 12 "Brickwork And Blockwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it. The gates shall be hung on clay brick piers and run on rollers over rails all as shown in the Drawings. Chainlink perimeter fencing shall be of the PVC. covered type (green or grey) wire mesh. The base support of the fencing shall be embedded in 150mm concrete kerb. Ironmongery to gate shall be as shown in the Drawings.

28.1.18

Painting Fence And Gate Paint all metal work and gate as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

28.1.19

Catch For Trap Door In Switch Room Floor Provide and fix brass hook and eye for trap door.

28.1.20

Cat Ladder And Handle Provide and fix mild steel cat ladder and handrail as shown.

28.1.21

Hot Dipped Galvanised Steel Handrail (Electrical Sub-station) Provide and fix hot dipped galvanised steel pipe handrail to locations as shown in the Drawings. Dimensions of hot dipped galvanised steel handrail, pipe supports and balusters shall be as shown in the Drawings. All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used for the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured. All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.



Doors To Electrical Substation (A)

Extruded Anodised Aluminium Doors Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors with anodic coating not less than 25 micron (including all components, shoot bolt etc) as shown and in accordance with the detailed Drawings.

(B)

Acoustic Doors To Generator Rooms Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors infilled with 38mm thick rockwool insulation material of density 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance). The noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.76 within the sound range of 180-2800 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O. Where rockwool is shown in the Drawings, the rockwool shall be of "Bradford Rockwool, FibertexR60"; or other approved. Doors (including all components, shoot bolt etc) shall be of natural anodised aluminium of anodic coating not less than 25 micron and constructed to resist any water penetration into the cavity of the door. Provide and fix heavy duty door hinges capable of bearing 80 kg of load per leaf. The Drawings shown shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation.

28.2

UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND

28.2.1

General Construct Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound to details as shown in the Drawings unless specified otherwise. Timber benches, shelves, notice board, lockers, etc., shall be provided and fixed to locations all as shown in the Drawings.

28.2.2

Floor Slab The floor slab shall be cast in Grade 40 structural concrete. Compliance criteria and specifications shall follow Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it. The slab shall be finished with a minimum 3 passes of a power trowel strictly without sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water. Provide a sufficient team of workmen to finish the work before final set. The slab shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other approved methods. The surface shall be hardened with approved liquid hardeners strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instruction. The liquid hardeners shall have zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its active ingredients. The scupper drain shall be finished with rendering of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets. The rendered surface shall then be finished with two coats of liquid hardeners (with zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its active ingredients).

28.2.3

Finish To Reinforced Concrete Flat Roof Provide and lay screed of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved water-proofing compound to the Manufacturer's instructions to reinforced concrete flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 180. Screed shall be of a minimum of 18mm thick.



Roller Shutter To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (i)

Motorised Roller Shutter For Door Height Four (4) Metres And Above Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts, bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height 4 metres and above unless otherwise specified : (a)

Material The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain. Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved for manual operation. Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.

(b)

Coating Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.

(c)

Power Supply And Operation System Tap the power supply for the motor from a 10 Amperes TPN isolator in the utilities centre/dustbin compound. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the motor. Provide a built-in auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall automatically stop when it is obstructed during the closing operation. Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof control box and mount it outside at 1.6m measured from the floor to the base of the control box and on the right hand side of the utilities centre/dustbin compound viewing from the front. Provide the control box with Camlock model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key no. 01/3S/N65; or other approved. The control box shall contain "Up", "Down", and "Stop" buttons. Indicating arrows pointing upwards and downwards shall be marked indelibly beside the "Up" and "Down" buttons. The motorised roller shutter shall stop immediately after the end of "Up" or "Down" operation.

(d)

Workshop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the ordering of the system.

(ii)

Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres Provide and install zincalume steel or galvanised steel or natural anodised aluminium roller shutter complete with channel guides, angle bolts, bottom rails and other necessary components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height below four (4) metres unless otherwise specified. (a)

Material The roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain. Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around the drum assembly. The drum assembly shall consist of suitably graded oiltempered torsion springs secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering plastics. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved for manual operation.



Roller Shutter To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound (Cont'd) (ii)

Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres (Cont’d) (a)

Material (Cont’d) Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge treatment to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation. Locking device with master key shall be provided at waist level.

(b)

Coating Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel and galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.

(c)

Operation System The shutter shall be hand chain operated. The raising and closing of the shutter shall be 250mm minimum per metre chain-pull.

(d)

Workshop Drawings The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the ordering of the system.

28.2.5

Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound Provide and install bronzed anodised extruded aluminium vents together with all necessary components as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be extruded with the minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating.

28.2.6

Ceramic Floor Tiles Provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm thick glazed ceramic floor tile to wash area and toilet all as shown in the Drawings. The qualities shall be as specified in Clause 19.4 “Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common Areas and Non-Residential Units)”

28.2.7

Key Boards Provide and install one 1200mm x 1200mm keyboard consisting of Kapor frame, plywood backing, plywood door panel all as shown in the Drawings for every block of Utilities Centre. Provide angle hooks for keys fixed 75mm centres both ways and 2 no. brass hangers to each board. Paint woodwork according to Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it).


Bldg Spec Page 29-1 SECTION 29 EATING HOUSE

29.1

FLOOR FINISHES Except for the "Store" and "room" the whole floor of Eating houses shall be finished in ceramic tiles as specified in sub-clause 19.4.5 "Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles". Tiles shall continue up doorways to abut external floor rendering. The colour and pattern of the tiles shall be approved by the SO Rep. The quality and laying of the tiles shall be as specified in Clause 19.4 "Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common Areas and Non-Residential Units) " and Clause 19.7 “Laying Of Ceramic Floor Tiles” including all subclauses under them.

29.2

CERAMIC TILE WALL (EATING HOUSES) Except for the "store" and "room", all internal surfaces of walls and columns in the refreshment area and stalls of eating houses shall be finished with 200mm x 200mm x 8mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to a height of 2100mm above reinforced concrete floor level. Where shown in the Drawings, provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to a height of 600mm above the stainless steel sink and draining board or to the window cill height if the sink and draining board is located along the window. Provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to kitchen, toilets/bath/wc, bin area and wash area. The height of glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be as shown in the Drawings. All glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be of the quality as specified in Clause 20.13 "Ceramic Wall Tiles (NonResidential Units and Common Areas)" including all subclauses under it.

29.3

BRICK/BLOCKWORK AND PLASTERING Construct walls as shown in the Drawings and as specified in Section 12 "Brickwork And Blockwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Plastering where shown shall be as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

29.4

PAINTING Painting shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

29.5

DOORS AND IRONMONGERY Doors to eating houses shall be as shown in the Drawings, complete with ironmongery as specified in Section 16 "Ironmongery" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

29.5.1

Timber Doors All timber doors where shown in the Drawings shall be constructed as specified in Section 15 "Carpentry And Joinery" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Sizes are nominal. Plywood panels shall be of grade 2 moisture resistant quality.

29.5.2

PVC Doors Extruded PVC doors to common water closets and bathroom shall be as specified in Clause 15.15 "Full Panel Extruded PVC Swing Doors". Except for bath/w.c. in room and main entrance door to toilets, each common w.c. door shall be fixed with a pair of aluminium alloy eyes for hanging on to mild steel hooks and rides built into masonry. Provide and fix plastic male and female toilet signs with thickness and sizes all as shown in the Drawings.



PREPARATION TABLES Construct preparation tables in Grade 25 and 100mm thick in-situ concrete slabs reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric supported on 90mm thick solid concrete block wall finished with 200mm x 200mm x 8mm (nominal size) thick ceramic tiles with mosaic cove tiles for returned edges all as shown in the Drawings.

29.7

COOKING SLABS Where shown, cooking slabs shall be constructed and finished as specified in Clause 29.6 "Preparation Tables".

29.8

FAN HOOKS Cast fan hooks into positions as shown, bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceiling of eating houses.

29.9

EXHAUST FAN OPENING Provide opening for exhaust fans in positions shown and trim with Kapor frame rebate and bead. Fill with 12mm thick calcium silicate boards. Paint frame and panel as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

29.10

EXTRACTOR FANS AND DUCTS Extractor fans and ducts are not included in this Contract unless as specified otherwise.

29.11

ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install aluminium roller shutters to eating houses as specified in Clause 18.8 "Aluminium Roller Shutter".

29.12

ALUMINIUM CASING TO DISCHARGE STACKS/PIPES AND ALUMINIUM SHEET COVERING Where shown in the Drawings, the aluminium casing to discharge stacks/pipes enclosure and aluminium sheet covering shall be constructed with 50mm x 25mm x 1.2mm thick aluminium frame and lined with 1.2mm thick (18 SWG) natural anodised aluminium sheet. The anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum. Access panels shall be provided as shown in the Drawings and at the positions of the cleaning eyes.

29.13

ADJUSTABLE AND FIXED GLASS LOUVRES Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install bronze anodised aluminium frame adjustable and fixed glass louvres. The anodic coating shall be 25 microns minimum. Glazing shall be in accordance with Section 22 "Glazing" including all clauses under it.

29.14

PLYWOOD SHELVES Where shown, the 19mm thick plywood shelves to store shall be supported by 31mm x 31mm x 1.2mm thick mild steel hollow sections.



METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION Where shown in the Drawings, the metal roofing and the insulation shall be provided and laid as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet" including all subclauses under it.

29.16

SUSPENDED CEILING Provide and fix 1200mm x 600mm x 16mm thick non-combustible mineral fibre board to stalls with aluminium T section and be supported by 14 SWG galvanised steel hanger wire all as shown in the Drawings. Each panel shall be reinforced with 2 no. of spline glued to the back of the board.

Section 30/.....


Bldg Spec Page 30-1 SECTION 30 MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)

30.1

GROUND FLOOR FACILITIES Provide and fix the facilities (eg. table tennis table, kiosks, tables, benches etc.) at 1st storey all as shown in the Drawings. Painting to timber and metal work shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

Section 31/.....


Bldg Spec Page 31-1 SECTION 31 FABRICATION AND PROVISION OF REFUSE BINS, LITTER BINS, BULK CONTAINERS AND TROLLEYS

31.1

SCOPE OF WORKS The scope of work in this Contract comprises: (i)

Fabrication and delivery of 250-litre refuse bins;

(ii)

Fabrication and delivery of post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bins (including installation);

(iii)

Fabrication and delivery of six-bin trolleys, 0.7 cubic metre rectangular bulk refuse containers model "E" and bulk containers frame model "EF"; and

The required no. of bins and frames shall be as specified in the table below: Facility 0.7 cubic metre Bulk Container Utility Centre Refuse Room Bulky Refuse Room where there are ground floor units Every 3 blocks Every deck for MSCP Every 80 parking lots for Surface Car Park

31.2

Items

Frame for Bulk Container 250-litre Refuse Bin 250-litre Refuse Bin Six-Bin Trolley Wall Mounted Litter Bin Post Mounted Litter Bin

Quantity Required Per Facility 1 1 2 2 1 2 1

GOODS (a)

In the specifications, the expression "the Goods" shall unless the context otherwise requires, means the six-bin trolley and the 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E", bulk container frame model "EF", the 250-litre refuse bins and the post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bins.

(b)

Every six-bin trolley, 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E" and bulk container frame model "EF" accepted by the Superintending Officer's Representative shall be assigned a serial number. The Contractor will be notified on the beginning serial number of the respective type of goods within a reasonable period and the subsequent serial number shall then be assigned by the Contractor on the same format and set at one unit increment. Each serial number shall be engraved at the spot directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative and of a size approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

(c)

All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, if any components are not available in metric units its equivalent in imperial units may be used subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative and such a substitution will not constitute a variation to the Contract.



POST / WALL MOUNTED POLYETHYLENE LITTER BIN

31.3.1

Dimensional Details Each post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bin shall be provided complete with separate hood, ash-tray, aluminium inner liner, bin body and mounting brackets. (a)

Bin body and hood The bin body and hood shall be designed and manufactured to withstand strong sunlight and extremes in temperature without fading or cracking. (i)

Material Linear medium density or high density polyethylene. No rework material shall be used. The density of the material shall be within the range of 0.935 to 0.965 g/cm3. The melt index of the material shall be within the range of 1.0 to 8.0 g/10 min. The bin shall be opaque and have the feature of being impact - resistant and ultra-violet stabilised such that it can withstand continuous use under long hours of strong direct sunlight without any adverse change to its physical and mechanical properties and performance.

(ii)

Capacity 25 - 40 litres (without hood)

(iii) Height 450 - 550 mm (without hood) (iv) Width 360 - 450 mm (bin body) (v)

Depth 240 - 350 mm (bin body)

(vi) Thickness 2.8 mm (minimum) and meeting all other Specifications (vii) Ash-Tray 120 mm diameter x 60 mm height x 0.8 mm thick reflective finished stainless steel of AISI Grade 304 with 3 Nos of 5 mm diameter equally spaced holes at base and 175 mm x 95mm stubbing plate (Optional). The ash-tray shall be securely fixed to the top of the hood and shall not affect the aesthetics of the bin adversely. The hood should be firmly fitted to the bin body but also allows for easy emptying of the contents from the bin as and when necessary. The hood should only have one side opening with a minimum breadth of 110mm and minimum length of 200mm, and shall be fastened to the bin body by a 400mm long stainless steel chain or other method of fastening which is to be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

(b)

Aluminium liner (i)

The liner shall not be less than 0.8mm thick

(ii)

The liner should fit the inner part of the bin with room for easy fitting

(iii) The liner shall have a fitted handle for lifting (iv) The liner shall be detachable (v)


All corners of liners shall be rounded

Bldg Spec Page 31-3

31.3

POST / WALL MOUNTED POLYETHYLENE LITTER BIN (CONT’D)

31.3.1

Dimensional Details (Cont’d) (c)

Bracket (i)

Material

:

26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised bracket bent to shape and size as shown in Appendix A49 Drawing No. CMU-LB-01, and secured with galvanised bolts and nuts.

(ii)

Strength :

The bracket should be able to support the bin body with a full load of up to 15 kg.

(iii) Paint

31.3.2

31.3.3

:

The bracket shall come with a coat of approved red lead primer to surfaces of bracket, nuts and bolts etc and two coats of good quality aluminium paint.

Design (a)

The internal form and surface of the bin shall be such that it will not trap the contents.

(b)

There shall be no sharp edges anywhere on the bin.

(c)

The internal and external surfaces shall be smooth and non porous, free from cracks, splits, dents, distortion, blisters, voids, air bubbles and other surface blemishes or defects.

(d)

It shall be substantially uniform in colour. The Contractor shall make available 2 choices of colour, the hues of which shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

(e)

The litter bin shall be sufficiently stiff such that its shape and form is maintained when subject to continuous use over a long period of time.

(f)

Six (6) numbers of 10 mm diameter holes are to be provided at the base of the post mounted litter bin to drain off rainwater.

Installation The Contractor shall install the post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bin in the manner specified in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49) at locations designated/ instructed by the SO Rep. The polyethylene litter bin shall be installed in the following manner: (a)

Wall Mounting 26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised brackets bent to shape and size as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49), are clamped to the bin with bolts and nuts. Wall plug or ramset bolt shall be used for mounting the bin to wall.

(b)

Post Mounting 26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised brackets bent to shape and size as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49), are clamped to the bin with bolts and nuts. Hose clips shall be used for mounting the bin to post.

(c)

The Contractor shall ensure that the mounting of the brackets for post mounted bin shall not obstruct the lamp posts terminal box cover to facilitate maintenance when required.

(d)

The Contractor shall ensure the mounting would keep the bin upright and minimise any strain on the bin body.

The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for the cost to remove and cart away the existing brackets and bins during the replacement with new bins. For new installation of bins, there shall be no cost adjustment to the contract price.


Bldg Spec Page 31-4

31.4

LOGO The Litterman logo shall be hot foiled stamped on the outer face of the litter bin body.

31.5

250-LITRE LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REFUSE BIN

31.5.1

Materials The refuse bins shall be manufactured from formulated and compounded linear low-density polyethylene for use with normal household refuse except hot ashes. No rework material shall be used. The density of the material shall be within the range of 0.926 to 0.940 g/cm3. The melt index of the material shall be within the range of not less than 1.0 to 8.0 g/10 min. The carbon black content shall not be less than 0.5% and shall provide optimum protection against ultraviolet light degradation. The finely divided carbon black shall have mean particle sizes of less than 25nm and shall be well dispersed. The carbon black shall be melt-compounded. No dry blending of carbon black is permitted.

31.5.2

Dimensional Details Of 250-Litre Refuse Bin Dimensional Specification

Unit

Bin Sizes

Overall Height

(mm)

740

Overall Width

(mm)

700

Overall Length

(mm)

700

Tolerance

(mm)

 10

(Litres)

250

(kg)

9.0

Minimum Wall Thickness

(mm)

4.0

Minimum Base Thickness

(mm)

6.0

Minimum Capacity Minimum Weight (Excluding Handles)

31.5.3

Design (a)

Body The refuse bin shall be designed such that its internal form and surface will not trap refuse when it is being emptied as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49). The internal and external surfaces of the refuse bin shall be smooth and reasonably free from surface blemishes and contamination, air bubbles, blisters and voids, and shall be substantially uniform in colour. The refuse bin shall have no sharp edges and shall be moderately stiff such that its shape and form is maintained when subject to continuous use over a long period of time.

(b)

Base The base of the refuse bin shall be designed to withstand regular dragging during refuse collection time. It shall also be designed to withstand impact from falling refuse. When tested in accordance with the method described in Clause 31.5.4, there shall be no visible weakening and no permanent distortion or splitting to the base or main body of the refuse bin. Eight holes of 10mm diameter shall be provided at the base to allow sullage water to drain out. The holes shall be located such that they will not affect the physical properties or performance of the bin in any way.


Bldg Spec Page 31-5

31.5


31.5.3

Design (c)

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

Handles for Refuse Bins Each refuse bin shall be fitted diametrically opposite with two solid cylindrical drop handles, situated above the centre of gravity of the empty bin. Each handle shall be shaped so as to give a hand hold. The handle shall be 95 mm long and have a diameter of at least 9 mm. It shall be made of metal and protected against corrosion. Each handle shall be fitted to the wall of the refuse bin with four bolts such that the wall of the bin is sandwiched between the front and back plates. The back plate shall be of 3 mm minimum thickness in one piece and shall measure not less than 60 mm x 120 mm. The front plate shall be of 2 mm minimum thickness in one piece and shall measure not less than 60 mm x 120 mm incorporating an approved design for housing the drop handles of the refuse bin. The front, back plates and bolts and nuts shall be galvanised and protected against corrosion. When tested in accordance with the method described in Clause 31.5.4, there shall be no visible weakening of the attachments and no permanent distortion or splitting to the main body of the refuse bin. The refuse bin shall also be designed with two recessed finger grip positioned vertically below the drop handles. The recessed finger grip is approximately 130 mm from the base of the bin. It shall be shaped so that there are no sharp corners or edges.

31.5.4

Tests The following two tests shall be carried out on samples randomly selected from a batch delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall have the test rig(s) and test loads available for the tests. He shall perform the tests in the presence of the as and when directed by the SO Rep. If a sample fails any of the tests, all the refuse bins in that batch delivered to the Site shall be rejected. The rejected bins shall be removed from the Site immediately. The Contractor shall ensure that no rejected bin is delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall also ensure that the batch number of the rejected bins is not used again. Te required tests shall be as specified below: (a)

Test for Strength of Handles The refuse bin shall be filled with the appropriate test load of 65 kg. Put the loop (refer to the Drawings as shown in Appendix A49) through the handle that is to be tested and on to the cross bar of the test rig. The filled bin is raised using an inelastic rope and a quick-release hook attached to the handle that is being tested such that there is 300 mm slack on the loop as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49). After the filled bin has come to rest, the quick-release hook is disengaged allowing the filled bin to fall freely. At all times, the filled bin must not come into contact with the ground. The procedure is repeated for the other handle. Test Load A test load of 65 kg shall be used for the handle test. Pass Criteria There shall be no visible weakening of the attachments and no permanent distortion or splitting to the main body of the refuse bin.




31.5.4

Tests (b)

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d) Test for Impact Strength of the Base The base of the bin shall be placed on a flat concrete surface. A test load of 65 kg shall be raised to a height of 2 m above the centre of the bin and allowed to fall freely on the base of the bin. Repeat the test two more times. The test load shall consist of free flowing solid material contained in a test bag of diameter 25cm with a hemispherical bottom as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49). Pass Criteria There shall be no visible weakening and no permanent distortion or splitting to the base or main body of the refuse bin.

31.6

EMBOSSING ON BINS The date of production (month and year) and batch number (in running order) shall be embossed on one face of the refuse bin as shown in Appendix A49 Drawing No. CMU-RB-01. Each letter or number shall be 25 mm by 20 mm.

31.7

SIX-BIN TROLLEY

31.7.1

Design and Detailing The Drawings show the design and detailing of the six-bin trolley and the Contractor shall conform to the dimension, capacity and design of the six-bin trolley as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49).

31.7.2

Welding All weldings must be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. No spot welding shall be used for completion of the Works. The welding edges shall be smoothly and securely finished. If in the opinion of the SO Rep that certain portion of the weld should be reinforced, the Contractor shall execute and complete the work as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses.

31.7.3

Wheel (a)

The six-bin trolley shall be supported by two (2) numbers of 280mm diameter solid-tyre wheels at the sides and one (1) number of 180mm diameter swivel castor wheel at the front as indicated in the Drawing (as shown in Appendix A49). Each wheel shall have a minimum load carrying capacity of 200kg.

(b)

The types and models of wheel to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative.

(c)

All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used to secure the wheels in position must be galvanised steel. Should any of these be found rusty within the warranty period, the Contractor should replace it at his own cost.

(d)

The types and models of wheel shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative. The tenderer shall attach all relevant technical details and catalogues of the types of wheel to be used in his tender.



0.7 CUBIC METRE BULK REFUSE CONTAINER MODEL "E" AND BULK CONTAINER FRAME MODEL "EF"

31.8.1

Design and Detailing The Drawings show the design and details of the container and frame and the Contractor shall conform to the dimension, capacity and design of the container and frame as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49) or any drawings from time to time issued or approved in writing by the SO Rep.

31.8.2

Welding All weldings must be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. No spot welding shall be used for completion of the Works. The welding edges shall be smoothly & securely finished. If in the opinion of the Superintending Officer's Representative that certain portion of the weld should be reinforced, the Contractor shall execute and complete the work as instructed by the Superintending Officer's Representative at his own costs and expenses.

31.8.3

Wheel (a)

The 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E" shall be fitted with four (4) Numbers of 180mm diameter swivel castor wheels, two of which shall have foot lever brakes. Every castor wheel shall be welded to a thick packing plate as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49) or be fitted to the 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container using galvanised steel nuts, bolts and washers approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. The minimum load capacity of each wheel shall not be less than 170 kg.

(b)

The bulk container frame model "EF" shall be fitted with five (5) Numbers of 100mm diameter swivel castor wheels, three with a minimum load capacity of 180 kg and two of 70 kg. Every castor wheel shall be bolted securely to the frame.

(c)

The types and models of wheel to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative.

(d)

All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used to secure the wheels in position must be of galvanised steel. Should any of these be found rusty within the warranty period, the Contractor should replace it at his own cost.

(e)

The types and models of wheel shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative. The offeror shall attach all relevant technical details and catalogues of the types of wheel to be used in his offer.

31.9

PAINTING OF GOODS

31.9.1

General (a)

All painting shall be done in accordance with the relevant Singapore Standard, British Standard and Codes of Practice and shall be suitable for tropical climate. No painting shall be carried out during damp or inclement weather.

(b)

The minimum drying or curing time in between coats and the method of application of primer and paint shall be in accordance to the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the particular paint being applied. In the case of two-part paint, the mixing ratio shall likewise be according to the manufacturer's recommendation.

(c)

Each coat of paint shall be of a different colour from the preceding coat. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the paint system for the Superintending Officer Representative's approval within 10 days from the date stated in the Letter of Acceptance of Tender. The colour of the finishing coat shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.

(d)

In the event that paint used is found or suspected to be adulterated or unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall bear the costs of tests carried out to validate such findings.

(e)

The Contractor shall submit the paint manufacturer's technical specifications, product data sheet and application instructions together with the tender otherwise the tender may be rejected.



PAINTING OF GOODS

31.9.2

Six-bin Trolley (a)

(CONT’D)

Surface Preparation Before carrying out the painting, the six-bin trolley shall be pre-treated by degreasing and followed by blast-cleaning to a quality agreed by the Superintending Officer's Representative. Application of coating shall be carried out immediately after the said trolley has been thoroughly cleaned.

(b)

Paint System Painting of the six-bin trolley shall consist of one coat of self-cured inorganic zinc-rich primer of at least 50 microns and top coated with two coats of bituminous paint of film thickness 30 microns, measured when the paint is completely dry.

31.9.3

Bulk Container Frame Model "EF" (a)

Surface Preparation All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and other contamination and foreign matters. All welded areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be ground. All loose rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed by power tool cleaning. The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned, free from all dirt, rust scales and loose millscales before applying the following paint system.

(b)

Paint System The bulk container frame model `EF' shall be painted with 1 full coat surface tolerant high build epoxy primer of 120 microns dry film thickness within four hours of cleaning and in any case before any visible rusting or contamination of the surface occurs, provided that all other conditions for painting to proceed are met. One full coat polyamide-cured high build epoxy mastic of 100 microns dry film thickness shall then be painted over the priming coat.

31.9.4

0.7 Cubic Metre Bulk Refuse Container Model "E" (a)

Surface Preparation All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust, zinc salts, and other contaminants and foreign matters. All welded areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be ground. All damaged and defective steel surfaces shall be cleaned with power tool. The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned before applying the following paint system.

(b)

Paint System The bulk refuse container Model "E" shall be painted with one touch up coat surface tolerant high build epoxy primer of 100 microns dry film thickness to all damaged and defective steel areas and one full coat phosphoric acid based wash coat on steel surfaces within four (4) hours of cleaning and in any case before any visible rusting or contamination of the surface occurs, provided that all other conditions for painting to proceed are met. One full coat polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide of 100 microns dry film thickness and one full coat polyamide-cured high build epoxy mastic coat of 100 microns dry film thickness shall then be painted over the priming coat.



PAINTING OF GOODS

31.9.5

Coating to 0.7 Cubic Metre Bulk Refuse Container Model "E" and Bulk Container Frame Model "EF" (a)

(CONT’D)

Surface Tolerant High Build Epoxy Primer It shall be a two-component epoxy aromatic amine-cured coating containing at least 80% volume solids and aluminium paste pigmentation. It shall have good chemical and solvent resistance and a long overcoating time of up to six (6) months. The high film thickness shall be achievable by brush application.

(b)

High Build Epoxy Mastic It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing at least 60% volume solids and chemical and weather resistant pigments. It shall have excellent chemical and solvent resistance.

(c)

Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide Primer It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing at least 65% volume solids and micaceous iron oxide. It shall have excellent durability, toughness and abrasion resistance. Its maximum overcoating time shall not be less than six (6) months.

(d)

Etch Solution For Galvanised Surfaces It shall be a phosphoric acid based wash coat of pale blue colour designed for use over new or untreated galvanised surfaces so as to provide good adhesion for subsequently applied paint. During application, the surface shall blacken with an even appearance. The maximum overcoating time shall not be less than two (2) days.

31.10

SUBMISSION OF SAMPLES The Contractor shall deliver the following samples for the quotation evaluation:(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

One number of 250-litre low density polyethylene refuse bins One number of post/wall mounted litter bin completed with mounting brackets One number of six-bin trolley One number of 0.7 cubic metre refuse bulk container model "E"; and One number of metal bulk container frame Model "EF"

Section 32/.....


Bldg Spec Page 32-1

SECTION 32 RESERVED

SECTION 33 RESERVED

SECTION 34 RESERVED

SECTION 35 RESERVED

Section 36/.....

BLDG12/S3235.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 36-1 SECTION 36 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER, GAS AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

36.1

WORKS BY REGISTERED PLUMBER AND LICENSED WATER SERVICE PLUMBER It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works. All sanitary, water and gas installation Works shall be carried out by a Registered Plumber(LP) registered under the Singapore Plumbing Society(SPS), and Licensed Water Service Plumber (LWSP) and Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) respectively and shall comply with all current Code-of-Practices, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant Authorities.

36.2

SANITARY AND WATER SUPPLY Sanitary and water installation, drain lines, inspection chambers, waste sumps and water supply services shall be provided by the Contractor unless specified otherwise. Allow for leaving holes for pipes and traps as shown in the Structural Drawings.

36.2.1

TIMBER MOCK-UPS Within three months after the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect timber mock-up for toilet, kitchen, air-con ledge and service yard on site for inspection and approval of the SO rep. These timber mock ups shall have the provision of all sanitary pipes and fixtures position, marking of water supply pipes layout, power points and switches locations, electrical water heater socket locations and provision of UPVC entry pipe for water supply using gas water heater. Actual UPVC sanitary pipes, wash basin and pedestal pan; and mock-up of ceiling duct, doors, vanity top (if any) and clothes drying racks shall be installed with respect to the architectural and structural. Markings of beams, columns, wall tiles, floor tiles, window layout shall also be shown. One timber mock up is required for each flat type. All costs and expenses incurred for the erection of the timber mock up and subsequent removal of these mock up shall be deemed to be included in the Contract by the Contractor. The timber mock-ups must be built accurately to facilitate resolution of the following common issues: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

36.3

floor waste/trap not obstructed by structural beam; lighting points not obstructed by ceiling-mounted clothes drying rack; use of external clothes drying rack not hindered by air-con ledge; sufficient clearance for access to the air-con ledge for installation and maintenance of the air-con compressors; toilet vent and other fittings do not obstruct future installation of shower screen; and any other practical considerations.

WATER CONNECTION UNDER APRON Allow for the Public Utilities Board's water connection under the concrete apron or the first storey slab within the building to be completed before concreting the apron and the floor slab.

36.4

GAS PIPE THROUGH RC BEAM Provide and install UPVC pipe sleeves through RC beam as shown in the Drawings for the provision of gas pipes. In the event that the gas pipe is not to be installed, the UPVC sleeves shall be capped with UPVC capping all as shown in the Drawings.



CERTIFICATE FROM WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB Apply in writing to Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for final inspection of the sanitary installation and obtain the final approval before the Expiry of the Time for Completion. On completion of the whole of the installation Works, obtain a Certificate from Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB certifying that the work has been carried out complying fully with their Regulations and Requirements before the Final Payment can be released. Failure by the Contractor to apply for such inspection on time, shall render him liable for damages or loss suffered by the Employer due to the delay in approving the sanitary installation by PUB, arising out of or in connection with the Contractor's failure to apply for such inspection on time. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.

36.6

INSPECT DRAWINGS AND MAKE ALLOWANCE Examine carefully all Drawings, including the Civil and Structural Drawings and ascertain all probable obstructions such as pile caps, foundations, beams footings, etc. which may necessitate diversions of drain lines, inspection chamber positions and other fittings, from the lines and positions shown in the Drawings. Allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising from necessary additional lengths of drain pipes, bends, etc which are required to cater for such adjustments in alignment and running of drain lines, inspection chambers, other fittings, etc. No claims for extras shall be entertained by the SO Rep for non-compliance or misinterpretation of this Clause by the Contractor.

36.7

DIAMETER OF PIPES Unless otherwise stated, the sizes of copper, stainless steel, ductile iron and UPVC pipes shall mean their nominal sizes.

36.8

CONTRACTOR TO GIVE NOTICES AND SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL Submit all necessary application forms, drawings and give all notices required in connection with the Works. Submit sanitary drawings, water service drawings and gas installation drawings with application forms to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB; and City Gas respectively for approval not later than 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. A copy of the application shall be sent to the SO Rep for information.

36.9

EXCAVATE TRENCHES AND REMOVE EXCESS EARTH Excavate all trenches and pits for drain-lines and inspection chambers as shown. The soil condition shall be inspected by the SO Rep. After drain-lines have been tested and approved by the SO Rep, backfill the soil, properly consolidated to original levels and cart away surplus earth promptly and in any case not later than 7 days from the date of instruction by the SO Rep. Where the ground is soft, provide hardcore, bakau piling etc to drain-lines, inspection chambers/waste sumps and unless specified in the Contract, such works shall be treated as a variation under the Contract.



WORK THROUGH CONCRETE STRUCTURE Every care shall be taken in drilling, coring holes through concrete structure so as not to disrupt the concrete and steel. Care shall also be taken in enlarging holes to the diameters and positions as required without damaging the surrounding area. Seek approval from the SO Rep before carrying out such Works. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, concrete structure has been affected or unnecessarily disrupted or damaged, reinstate at the contractor's own and expense the affected parts of structure to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

36.11

DRILLING OR CORING ON FINISHED AREAS Where drilling or coring of holes are to be carried out on areas where tiles, or other types of finishing had been completed, take all precaution and care to ensure that damage is minimised. In the event of any damage, make good the damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

36.12

RESERVED

36.13

PATCHING UP Patch up hacked portions and drilled holes of structure with non-shrink cementitious grout of a similar or higher grade than the surrounding concrete, after installation of the services by the contractor or other contractors and with workmanship at least equal to that of the surrounding parts. Where pipes penetrate floor or roof slab, brush away loose particles on concrete and pipe. Brush on one coat neat, thick cement grout immediately before patching. Any leakages through such patching shall be made good by the Contractor. All patching up work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

36.14

TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION Test the whole sanitary and water installation as specified hereunder.

36.14.1

Water Test As soon as PUB water supply is available, carry out water test to the following items, in accordance with the procedure described below and complete the water test, including making good all Defect, within 10 days from the date PUB water supply is available : (a) (b) (c) (d)


Water supply pipe; Direct supply pipe; Joints between floor slab and floor trap in bathrooms and kitchens and joints between branching-off for WCs and floor slab; Water pumping Plant.


TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION

36.14.2

Procedure Of Water Test

(CONT’D)

36.14.2.1 Water Supply Pipe Test all water supply pipes for leaks. 36.14.2.2 Direct Supply Pipe Where required, apply to PUB and pay all fees for installing meters to the lower floors with direct water supply for the purpose of testing for leaks in the pipe. 36.14.2.3 Floor Traps The gratings to the floor traps in bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 10mm depth of water above the gratings. The amount of water shall be maintained for about 2 hours, replenished when necessary, during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks. Towards the end of this test, the water shall be allowed to drain off. During this process there shall be no sign of chokage and leakage in the system. The water test shall be carried out 3 days after the laying of floor finishes. 36.14.2.4 Water Pumping Plant Arrange with the SO Rep for test on the whole pumping Plant including transfer pump and booster pump for signs of leak and proper performance of the pumps. Rectify all the Defect found during the inspection immediately so that a re-inspection can be carried out. Arrange for the test to be carried out not later than four weeks before the buildings are handed over to the Employer. Provide electricity for operating the pumps, provide temporary piping, connections, fittings and accessories necessary for the test to be carried out.

36.14.3

Hydrostatic Test Of Underground Mains Arrange for hydrostatic test of all underground ductile iron pipes after PUB bulk meter according to CP 48. After laying, jointing and anchoring of the main and before any backfilling or concreting, charge the piping system slowly and carefully with potable water so that all air is expelled. Test the mains under pressure. Before testing the main, fit all open ends of the main with blank flange and secure them with struts or otherwise to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. Apply a test pressure of 125m head or the maximum working pressure plus 50% whichever is the greater, by means of manually operated test pump or by power-driven test pump. Maintain the test pressure by the pump for 1 hour and check the main for any leakage. General leakage shall not exceed 2 litres per cm of pipe diameter per km of pipe per 100m head per 24 hours. Notwithstanding the above, rectify all visual leaks detected.

36.14.4

Sterilisation Of Underground Water Distribution Mains Sterilisation of underground distribution water mains shall be carried out in accordance with CP 48 "Code of Practice for Water Services" and to the requirements of PUB. The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological and chemical testing by a PSB or SAC accredited laboratory. Two days after taking such samples, flush the underground distribution mains and further water samples shall be taken for testing as described in the foregoing requirements. Provide the water examination and analysis report to the SO Rep and the result of water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for human consumption. The underground distribution mains shall only be commissioned after two consecutive tests are satisfactory, otherwise the sterilisation procedure shall be repeated until such requirements are met.



WATER FITTINGS

36.15.1

General Requirements All water fittings shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS:CP 48.

36.15.2

Marking Of Information All water fittings shall be legibly marked with the following : (a) (b) (c) (d)

36.15.3

Manufacturer's identification mark, either on the body or plate; Marking of appropriate national standards, eg. BS EN 545:1995; Nominal size and direction of flow; Colour codes for hot and cold water supply.

Non-Metallic Material All non-metallic material in contact with water shall comply with SS 375:2001 and valves with non-metallic seat washers shall also comply with BS 3457:1973.

36.15.4

Metallic Material All metallic material in contact with water shall comply with the test on "Extraction of Metals - App H" of AS/NZS 4020:1999.

36.15.5

Copper Alloy Water Fittings All copper alloy water fittings shall be of gunmetal, or bronze or DZR brass materials only. Gunmetal or bronze water fittings shall comply with BS EN1982:1999. Water fittings of the Dezincification Resistant (DZR) type shall comply with the tests on "Composition" and "Resistance to dezincification" of BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR".

36.15.6

Water Fittings With Elastomeric Seals All water fittings with elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipeline shall comply with SS 270:1996.

36.16

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE All structural concrete shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.

36.17

RESERVED



AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR CONCEALED WATER PIPES, EXPOSED GAS PIPE INSIDE UNIT AND ALL OTHER MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all water and gas pipe routes, legends and all other related mechanical works (Sanitary/Water/Gas Installations) based on actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings.

36.19

SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES) AT BUILDING ROOFTOP The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M & E service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of the service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat arrangement to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical and statutory requirements. The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval before installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner, and the access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not obstructed by service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be supervised and coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the contractor is to provide chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the Drawings. The platform shall be installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such a way as not to pose danger to the maintenance workmen.

36.20

AIR-CON PIPE SLEEVE Provide and install UPVC pipe sleeves in RC wall next to air-con ledge. The pipe sleeve shall be complete with end cap on both sides. The drawing on pipe sleeve shall serve as a guide. The actual profile and fastenings of pipe sleeve shall be to manufacturer’s details. Contractor shall submit drawings and sample of pipe sleeve to SO Rep for approval.


Bldg Spec Page 37-1 SECTION 37 SANITARY INSTALLATION

37.1

SCHEDULE OF UPVC PIPES FOR FITTINGS FOR SANITARY INSTALLATION Unless specified otherwise, all UPVC pipes and fittings provided for sanitary installations shall be in accordance with the following schedule :

Sanitary Installation (Including Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe System)

Types Of Pipe/Fitting ( SS : Singapore Standard ) SS 213

SS 141 Class D

Underground Sanitary Drainage System-Main/Branch Drain Lines Above Ground Sanitary Plumbing System (Soil/Waste to I/C) : (a) All except Void Decks

(b) Void decks - Discharge stacks - Discharge pipes & fittings

Remarks

SS 272 *

*

Anti-Mosquitoes Devices, Socket Sleeves and Pipe Skirtings to be used. SS 213/SS 141 Adaptor to be used.

* *

Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe System (RWDP) : (a) 200 diameter pipes for RWDP system

* (White)

(b) Underground pipes/fittings for 200 diameter pipes (RWDP) (c) Above ground pipes/fittings connected to 200 diameter RWDP system

Roof Outlet to be used. Rectangular Section Fittings to be used.

*

(d) 50, 80, 100 & 150 diameter waste discharge (balcony, lift lobby, etc) pipes/fittings : i. Above ground except void decks and MSCPs ii. Void decks and MSCPs - Down pipes - Discharge pipes/fittings - Underground pipes/fittings

* SS 213/SS141 Adaptor to be used.

* * *

*Denotes the specified pipes/fittings.

37.2

MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES Unless otherwise stated, all pipes for main and branch lines shall be UPVC conforming to SS 272 and free from breakage, distortions or cracks and of sizes specified in Clause 37.6 "Drain Sizes". All drain-lines shall be laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the Drawings unless otherwise stated.



MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES (CONT'D) All drain-lines under roads and carparks shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 598 and laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the Drawings unless otherwise stated. Jointing of pipes of different materials in branch drain- lines or in the continuous length of main drain-lines in between two inspection chambers shall not be allowed unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. The section of main drain lines under roads and carparks shall be constructed under the supervision of the SO Rep and the Contractor shall arrange for the inspection by and approval of the SO Rep before covering up. All drain lines in basement carparks shall be of ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 598 and approved by the SO Rep. Where individual connections of discharge stacks to the inspection chamber are impracticable, a common pipe of adequate size to serve the main discharge stack and a common pipe to serve the secondary discharge stack may be provided to suit the connection to the inspection chamber subject to approval of the relevant authorities. All drain-lines for eating establishments such as eating houses, restaurants, food stalls, etc shall be constructed with cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598 . The floor traps for the eating establishments shall be of stoneware type or cast iron. The trenches for main and branch drain-lines shall be backfilled with quarry dust and finished as shown in the Drawings.

37.3

GRADIENT FOR DRAIN-LINES Unless otherwise stated or approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, the gradient of drain-lines shall be as follows : (a)

Branch Drain-Lines Diameter of Branch Drain-Lines

(b)

UPVC

Ductile Iron

Maximum Gradient Upstream at Back Drop Tumbling Bay

110mm

110mm

-

1 in 20 to 1 in 60

160mm

150mm

1 in 70

1 in 30 to 1 in 90

Allowable Gradient in other cases

Main Drain-Lines Diameter of Main Drain-Lines

37.4

Allowable Gradient in other cases

UPVC

Ductile Iron

Maximum Gradient Upstream of Back Drop/Tumbling Bay

160mm

150mm

1 in 70

1 in 30 to 1 in 90

250mm

250mm

1 in 90

1 in 49 to 1 in 150

JOINTS FOR DRAIN-LINE PIPES Only flexible jointed pipes shall be used for drain line pipes.

37.5

JUNCTIONS IN DRAINS All junctions between drains shall be of curved junctions or obtuse angled junctions made at sides of pipes.

37.6

DRAIN SIZES All drain branches from building to inspection chamber shall be 160mm diameter pipes or as shown in Drawings. Main drain-lines shall be 160mm diameter UPVC pipes to SS 272:1983 unless specified otherwise.



WATER TEST FOR DRAIN-LINES Water test all drainlines before they are surrounded and covered. Drainlines shall be perfectly watertight and it is essential that every length of pipes be tested when completed with water before haunchings and backfilling. For water test, the drainline shall be subjected to a pressure of 1.2 metre head of water and such pressure shall be maintained for half an hour without leakage in excess of 1.0 litre for each length of drainline between the inspection chambers. The fact that the pipes have been tested shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to locate any leak and make good the section, including re-excavation, timbering, backfilling and making good.

37.8

BEDDING AND HAUNCHING TO BRANCH AND MAIN DRAIN-LINE The pipes which have been tested and found satisfactory shall be bedded and haunched with grade 30 concrete to details as shown in Drawings. Provide break joints at pipe joints not greater than 6m intervals and at the first pipe joint next to inspection chamber, all to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Carry out all Works in accordance with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.

37.9

BREAKING UP ROADS AND CARPARKS FOR LAYING OF DRAIN-LINES The Contractor shall provide for breaking up roads and carparks for laying of drain-lines etc. and reinstatement of damages all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

37.10

INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND DRAIN LINES

37.10.1

General Requirements The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all Sanitary Works required under the Contract comprising either one or both of the following systems : (a) (b)

37.10.2

suspended from building and / or ; supported on piling

Suspended From The Buildings Where the Inspection Chambers and main drain lines are required to be suspended from the building, it shall be constructed according to the details as shown in the Drawings.

37.10.3

Supported On Piling Where piles are required to support the Inspection Chambers and drain-lines as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required and allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred on the piling work. The contractor shall plan and incorporate the duration required for the piling work into the Programme for the Works or revised Programme, if any, for the submission to the SO Rep for approval, as required under the contract. In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil Investigation Report available from the Employer. However, the Contractor shall note that the Soil Investigation Report does not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall also take note that all the information in the Soil Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable for the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall at his own cost, ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses whatsoever arising from and/or out of an inaccuracy, inadequacy or incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.



Supported On Piling (Cont'd) Notwithstanding the pile penetration lengths ascertained by the Contractor, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum for any difference in pile penetration lengths between those actually provided at the Site and those ascertained by the Contractor. However, if for whatever causes any pile cannot be driven into the ground or is not provided at all, omission by way of variation to the Contract shall be effected. For the purpose of computing the value of such omission, the penetration length of each pile shall be deemed to be 8.0m.

37.10.4

Requirements For Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles To Inspection Chambers And Drain Lines Where precast reinforced concrete piles to inspection chambers and drainlines are included in the Works, the piles provided shall be in accordance with Clause 2.2 "Precast Reinforced Concrete Piling Works".

37.10.5

Inspection Chamber Construct inspection chambers to details and positions as shown in the Drawings. All inspection chambers/manhole covers and frames shall comply with the general requirement of SS 30. Heavy duty cast iron frames and covers (Grade A) shall be used in driveways and carparks and other areas as shown in the Drawings. Form open branch/main channels in inspection chambers with half-round vitrified clay purposed made or cut channels with benching haunched up to the walls of inspection chambers in granolithic concrete 1:1:1 mix and trowel to smooth finish to fall towards the channel. The first inspection chamber of the drainage system shall have a minimum depth of 1070mm from surface level to invert level unless otherwise specified. Construct all walls and slabs of inspection chambers with grade 30 reinforced concrete as shown in the Drawings and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Plaster the internal walls with approximately 13mm thick 1:2 cement mortar and trowel to a smooth finish. Connect the invert of the branch drain-line entering the inspection chamber above the horizontal diameter of the main channels. Grade C Light Duty covers shall be complete with stainless steel handles as shown in the Drawings and approved by the SO Rep.

37.11

CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS All sanitary stacks shall be fully housed within masonry ducts/pre-cast concrete (stack ducts). Leakage tests to all sanitary stacks, discharge pipes and fittings shall be completed before they are fully concealed in the stack ducts and ceiling ducts. All sanitary pipes and fittings at the ceiling shall be fully concealed by ceiling duct of 9mm thick calcium silicate boards, fixed on galvanised steel angle frames as shown in the Drawings. All screws including anchor bolts shall be of AISI grade 304 stainless steel. Board joints shall be taped with paper tape and gypsum compound used to fill screw holes and board joints on the calcium silicate, and this shall be sanded smooth and not visible after painting. The completed boards shall be finished with base coating and 2 layers of emulsion paint. Lighting diffusers shall be 15mm x 15mm x 10mm thick egg crate white plastic type in powder coated aluminium frames. Detailed workshop drawings showing the type of boards and fixing methods, including access panels and lighting diffusers, shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations The calcium silicate boards shall comply with the following physical properties : Physical Properties Dry density Weight Flexural strength across grain Flexural strength along grain Moisture movement from normal to saturated Nominal moisture content-in situ Thermal conductivity Alkalinity

Requirements 910 kg per m3, ±10% 9.5 kg per m2, ±15% 10 MN per m2 6 MN per m2 0.15% 3 to 5% 0.161 W/mk 7 to 10 pH value

The Contractor shall submit a test report showing compliance with the requirements of the physical properties specified to the SO Rep for evaluation. BLDG12/S37.DOC(4) Sal(151211) (DPD)


UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND)

37.12.1

Material

37.12.1.1

General All unplasticized PVC pipes, fittings and accessories for soil, waste and vent application above ground shall comply with the requirements of SS 213 and its latest amendments. However, UPVC soil and waste stack in the void deck/play area shall be UPVC pipes to the requirements of SS 141 and as shown in the Drawings. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth, and reasonably free from grooving and other Defect that would impair their performance in service. Provide pipe in standard lengths of 6m + 50mm - 0mm. The pipe shall be provided with ends within ±2 degrees of being normal to the main axis of the pipe, free from chips, rough edges and with sharp edges removed.

37.12.1.2

Dimensions Of Soil, Waste And Vent Pipes To SS 213 Outside Diameter Nominal Size

Wall Thickness Mean Diameter De Minimum

32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

36.2 42.8 55.7 68.7 82.3 110.0 140.0 160.0

Note :

37.12.1.3

Maximum 36.5 43.1 56.0 69.1 82.7 110.4 140.4 160.5

Incl Ovality D Minimum 36.1 42.7 55.5 68.5 82.1 109.6 139.5 159.5

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

2.1 2.3 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.2 3.7 4.0

36.6 43.2 56.2 69.3 83.0 110.8 140.4 161.1

(i) De = mean outside diameter (ii) D = any measured diameter

Minimum Socket Dimension To SS 213 The minimum socket dimension for 3m length UPVC pipe shall be as follows :


Nominal pipe size in mm

Minimum socket dimension in mm

32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

19 21 23 25 29 34 42 45

2.4 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.6 4.2 4.5


Material (Cont'd)

37.12.1.4

Dimension And Colour Of The Waste And Soil Stack To SS 141 Class D Wall Thickness Nominal Size

Average Outside Diameter

Average Value

Individual Value

Minimum

Maximum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

80 100 155

88.7 114.1 168.0

89.1 114.5 168.5

5.3 6.8 9.9

4.6 6.0 8.8

5.3 6.9 10.2

All pipes shall be indelibly marked and imprinted longitudinally at interval of not greater than 3m. The markings shall show the following : (a) (b) (c)

Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark. the nominal size. SS 141:1976 Class `D'

The marking of the pipe shall be in accordance with SS 141. 37.12.1.5

Adaptor To Couple The Fitting (To SS 213) And UPVC Pipes (To SS 141) An adaptor shall be used to couple the fitting to SS 213 and its latest amendment (Single junction/single junction with inspection eye) and UPVC pipe to SS 141 to be installed at the void deck. The shape of the adaptor shall comply with the design as shown in the Drawings. The strength, dimensional tolerance and thickness of the adaptor shall comply with the standards and specifications laid down in SS 213 (except that the dimensional tolerance for the socket of the adaptor shall comply with SS 174). Obtain prior approval from the SO Rep before use. Random samples may be chosen for testing at a SAC accredited laboratory.

37.12.1.6

Swept Junction Fitting Use only swept junction fittings (single or double cross junction) with 50mm minimum root radius in all sanitary installation unless otherwise stated.

37.12.2

Installation

37.12.2.1

General All soil, waste and vent pipes used shall be unplasticized PVC pipes complying with SS 213 or SS 141 and all tests as required by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. All jointing and fixing requirements shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide main discharge stack of 150mm diameter and secondary discharge stack of 100mm diameter as shown in the Drawings. Install double 45 degree bends to SS 272 at the base of the discharge stacks in accordance with the Drawings. Install cross ventilating pipes to the required size between the main and the secondary discharge stack at the specified locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings or required by PUB, anti-syphonage pipes connecting the appliances to the discharge stack are not necessary.

37.12.2.2

Inspection Openings, Connectors And Fittings All inspection openings shall be screw and washer type with proper adaptors where necessary.



Installation (Cont'd)

37.12.2.3

Floor Traps Unless as required otherwise, fit all floor traps with 150mm square body, circular hinged UPVC gratings with frames having a 30mm deep collar protruding below to fit into the opening of the floor traps. The gratings shall comply with SS 213 and complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by NEA. The gratings for floor traps shall be fixed at 5mm below the graded floor level and as shown in the Drawings.

37.12.2.4

Method Of Fixing The method of fixing UPVC pipes shall be as follows : (a)

All pipes shall be cut square with the edge chamfered 15 degrees using approved pipe cutting tools prior to its installation. The pipe cutting tool shall be able to produce square cut and 15 degree chamfer in one continuous operation. The pipe cutting tools shall be portable and able to cut pipes of all sizes.

(b)

Clean the pipe ends and sockets in pipes or fittings with cleaning fluid or methylated spirit and allow them to dry.

(c)

Mark the pipes and fittings with a marker at a distance to the depth of the socket in the fittings or to the depth of the socket formed in pipes.

(d)

Coat all pipe ends and the internal faces of sockets fully with solvent cement and insert the pipe into the socket immediately. The socket edge of the fittings must touch the marking at the pipes. Remove surplus solvent cement from the socket using a dry cloth.

(e)

After jointing, hold the joint firmly for a period of 30 seconds and do not disturb it for at least 5 minutes.

(f)

All joints shall be jointed with sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In situations where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling or an adaptor shall be used.

(g)

No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes.

(h)

The type of solvent used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

For the jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials, the bonding agent used shall be those recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the SO Rep. Carry out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. 37.12.2.5

Solvent Cement For Jointing UPVC Pipes And Fittings Solvent cement used for jointing UPVC pipes and fittings shall be approved by the SO Rep and comply with BS 4346:Part 3. The solvent cement shall be in light approved colour to enable visual inspection. The Contractor shall submit a test report of the solvent cement to be used on the Site, for approval by the SO Rep before the commencement of the sanitary and water installation Works. The tests shall be carried out by an SAC accredited testing laboratory and shall include : (a)

Shear Strength;

(b)

Film Properties;

(c)

Long-term Hydrostatic Pressure.




37.12.2.6

W.C. Joint Place rubber seal over the spigot of the w.c. outlet with the open and facing towards the pan. Lubricate the outer surface of the seal and insert pan spigot complete with seal into connector socket. Snap plastic cover over rim of connector socket. Use pan collar connectors in cases where P-traps are utilised. Apply silicone sealant to groove and recess at pan collar and cover to prevent stagnation of water at groove and recess.

37.12.2.7

Fixing Of Bosses Use bosses for jointing waste and vent pipe into the soil stack. Use bosses for jointing of waste pipe from basin or kitchen sink to the hopper of floor waste or floor trap. Cut the appropriate sized hole in the position required using special hole cutters such as mechanised drill which is attached to a circular hole-saw by a mandrill. Apply solvent weld cement and clean mating surfaces of the boss and pipe. Insert the inner portion of the boss from inside the pipe with the outer portion located. Apply and tighten the toggle clamp and leave it in position for fifteen minutes. When fixing into the stack, ensure that the 92½ degree marks on both parts are upper-most. Ensure that the angles marked on the inner and outer portions of the boss coincide and that the boss is assembled in the correct sequence to give an angle of fall to the stack pipe.

37.12.2.8

Access Doors Access doors may be fitted to pipe or straight portion of branches. Mark positions of holes with template and cut the holes with a fine tooth keyhole saw. Clean the edges of the hole before inserting the access door. The inner portion of the access door shall be set in the hole to locate the unit before it is tightened into position.

37.12.2.9

Weathering Where pipes penetrate through either flat or sloping roofs, the normal type of approved weathering material shall be used. Where necessary, fix an approved weathering apron in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as shown in the Drawings.

37.12.2.10

UPVC Vent Cowl Clean the mating surfaces of the pipe fitting before assembling the unit in accordance with normal solvent weld cement procedure.

37.12.2.11

Provision For Thermal Movement In cases where the piping is likely to be subjected to any large variations in temperature and to prevent the slightest movement, use a seal/sleeve ring joint between fixed joints.

37.12.2.12

Support Distances Of UPVC Pipe Lines Horizontal pipes which exceed 1400mm in length shall be supported with PVC coated mild steel hangers. Vertical pipes passing from floor to floor shall be supported with PP collars attached to the pipes as shown in the Drawings. The spacing of the hangers and collars shall not exceed 1400mm for horizontal pipes and 1800mm for vertical pipes.




37.12.2.13

Bonding Keys To Concrete Slab Provide bonding keys to concrete floor slab where UPVC pipes go through. Roughen the whole surface of the UPVC pipe which is in contact with the floor slab to form keys. Apply thin coat of solvent cement and sprinkle fine sand to the whole area of the roughened surface before the solvent cement sets. Use solvent welded cement method for all jointing assemblies. Carry out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Use UPVC pipes to SS 213 where the stacks continue above roof level. Use UPVC pipes to SS 141 where the stacks continue below the ceiling of the open 1st storey.

37.12.3

UPVC Pipes And Fittings For UPVC Sanitary System - Connection and Inspection System The Contractor shall incorporate the easy check double locking system or other connection system to the UPVC sanitary system to ensure that the UPVC pipes and fittings are fully overlapped to minimise leakage at the joints. The Contractor shall arrange for the inspection of all the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings after the installation of the completed system to prove that all the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings are fully overlapped. The pipe joint system shall include: (a)

The connection of the pipes and fittings in such a way that the soil and waste will flow smoothly from the outlet to the fittings, through the horizontal branches and vertical stacks to the main line. The system shall not allow any possibility of back flow, and stagnation of fluid at the joints due to insufficient overlapping of UPVC pipes and fittings.

(b)

The overlapped portion at the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings shall be exposed and can be inspected visually after the installation of the system. The Contractor shall ensure that full overlap between UPVC pipes and fittings is achieved. In the event that the UPVC pipes and fittings are not overlapped sufficiently, the Contractor shall dismantle the affected portion of the system and re-installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(c)

Big access openings shall be provided (at least 75 mm diameter) to the fittings (including tees, cross tees and elbows) to facilitate the easy clearance of the chokage. The access opening shall be capped with UPVC screw cap with proper rubber seal and PP insert to ensure water and air tightness at all time.

The Contractor shall submit a full set of shop drawings, samples and mini-mock up, including sectional view to demonstrate the above requirements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the UPVC sanitary system on the Site. The Contractor shall also ensure that their UPVC fitting manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design. The contractor may propose alternative connection system in lieu of the patented design.

37.13

UPVC DOUBLE 45° BEND Provide and fix 150mm diameter UPVC double 45 degree bends to SS 272 encased in 150mm thick grade 30 concrete and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved at the base of each discharge stack below ground level. If the discharge stack is of 100mm diameter, use a 150mm x 100mm UPVC taper piece to SS 213 at above the ground level to connect the 100mm diameter stack to the 150mm single junction fitting with inspection eye to SS 213. Provide single junction fitting with inspection eye to discharge stack at 150mm above the finished ground floor level. Secure screw down cap of the inspection eye of the single junction fitting with 2 no. of brass screws.



UPVC GULLIES AND UPVC FLOOR WASTES/TRAPS WITH UPVC GRATING TO ALL GROUND FLOOR FACILITIES INCLUDING LINK BUILDING AND MSCP Where the ground floor wastes discharge into floor trap or apron gully at the ground floor as shown in the Drawings, the gullies shall be 100mm diameter UPVC fitting with 150mm square UPVC grating and set on and encased in concrete of minimum 150mm thick and connected to drains discharging into inspection chambers. The gratings for floor wastes/traps and gully traps shall be of approved UPVC 150mm square top body with screw-in round grating cover and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB; HDB; and complying with SS 213. The grating over floor trap and gully trap shall be complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by the NEA.

37.15

GULLY AND DEEP SEAL TRAP All floor traps to upper floors shall be deep seal traps minimum 100mm diameter with 75mm deep seal all to SS 213 and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. No gully or floor traps shall be deeper than 600mm from the top of grating.

37.16

RESERVED

37.17

RESERVED

37.18

RESERVED

37.19

WATER SUPPLY PIPE AND WASTE OUTLETS FOR SINK The Contractor shall fix and terminate the water supply pipe to sink and provide the waste outlets for sink at positions and to details all as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN

37.20.1

Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin Provide and install the following :

Low Capacity WC Suite Accommodation Type

5 Room

3-Room and/or 4Room

Integral Culture Marble Basin & Top

Vitreous China Wash Basin

Colour as chosen by the Architect #

White or other colour basin & pedestal as chosen by the Architect #

Location White or other colour as chosen by the Architect# Common Bathroom/W C Attached Bathroom/W C Common Bathroom/W C Attached Bathroom/W C

*

Rectangular Shaped Vitreous China Wash Basin (+) White or other colour basin as chosen by the Architect #

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*Denotes the specified type. # The colour shall be decided by the Architect . The Contractor shall provide the colour range specified for selection and approval by the Architect . (+) Alternative choice of rectangular shaped vitreous china wash basin shall be decided by the Architect. The WC suite and wash basin and pedestal shall be of the same brand and approved as a set by the HDB.

37.20.2

Vitreous China Wash Basin And Pedestal (A)

Vitreous China Wash Basin And Pedestal Provide and install wash basin and pedestal as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin". The wash basin and pedestal shall be approved 500mm x 400mm vitreous china (with non-corrosive wall bracket fixings), complying with SS 42, complete with 15mm chrome plated brass mixer tap and handle conforming to requirements in Clause 37.20.5 “Single Lever Basin Mixer and Accessories”, brackets, 1.2mm thick (min.) chrome plated brass pop-up waste assembly and 32mm approved UPVC bottle trap with all necessary washers, seals and nuts. The colour of the wash basin and pedestal (if applicable) shall be decided by the SO Rep as specified in the foregoing subclause. The mixer tap shall be completed with the necessary nut and two rubber washers. Fix and secure the mixer tap firmly on the wash basin. Unless specified otherwise, the waste pipe shall be 40mm diameter UPVC pipe.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


37.20.2

Vitreous China Wash Basin And Pedestal (Cont'd)

(B)

Rectangular Shaped Vitreous China Wash Basin (+) Provide and install rectangular shaped wash basin as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin". The wash basin shall be Rigel LH4394 (540mm x 405mm) or Rigel LH/LS8025 (505mm x 460mm) or Saniton Aronia SB114 (560mm x 480mm) or Velin 4016 (590mm x 460mm) or Velin CB1139 (435mm x 365mm) or other approved rectangular shaped vitreous china wash basin (with non-corrosive wall bracket fixings), complying with SS 42, complete with 15mm chrome plated brass mixer tap and handle conforming to requirements in Clause 37.20.5 “Single Lever Basin Mixer and Accessories”, brackets, 1.2mm thick (min.) chrome plated brass pop-up waste assembly and 32mm approved UPVC bottle trap with all necessary washers, seals and nuts. The colour of the wash basin shall be decided by the SO Rep as specified in the foregoing subclause. The mixer tap shall be completed with the necessary nut and two rubber washers. Fix and secure the mixer tap firmly on the wash basin. Unless specified otherwise, the waste pipe shall be 40mm diameter UPVC pipe.

37.20.3

Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top

(A)

Scope Of Work Provide and install integral cultured marble basin with monolithic top to bathrooms as specified in the subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and in accordance with the dimensions as shown in the Drawings.

(B)

Material And Product The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be of solid, non-porous, homogeneous polymeric material, either of polyester or acrylic base. It shall be of 19mm thick, complete with 75mm backsplash, 200mm front apron, and with 3 galvanised steel supporting brackets as shown. The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be in gloss finish. Bonding material and sanitary sealants of approved matching colour shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be obtained from manufacturers approved by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top (Cont'd)

(C)

Physical Properties The integral cultured marble basin and top shall comply with the following requirements : Characteristics 1.

Workmanship and Finish

Shall be free from cracks, crazing, pinholes, porosity, blisters, chipped areas or moulding defects.

2.

Impact Resistance

Shall not show cracks in the gel coat.

3.

Barcol Hardness

40 unit

4.

Oven Test for Cracking and Crazing

After oven test at 74ºC ±2ºC for 10 days, shall not show evidence of cracking or crazing.

5.

Water Absorption

Shall not absorb water in excess of 0.58% in 24 hours.

6.

Gel Coat (if applicable)

Shall not be less than 0.37mm or more than 0.87mm in thickness.

7A. Stain Resistance to : (a) Coffee (b) Tea (c) Detergent (d) Acetone (e) Olive oil (f) Lipstick (g) Fly spray (h) Ink, washable (i) Urea (6%) (j) Alcohol (k) Iodine (1%) (l) Shoe polish (m) Vinegar

(D)

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO PS 18-66) Requirements

) ) ) ) ) ) ) Shall be such that it will withstand all reagents. ) ) ) ) ) )

7B. Cigarette test

All stain shall be removed without sanding through the gel coat. If sanding is required, not more than 0.37mm of the gel coat shall be removed.

8.

Washability

Shall withstand 40,000 cycles in the scrub test (only slight brush marks are allowable).

9.

Drain fitting connections

Shall withstand the test with no visible damage.

Test Certificate And Compliance Requirements The Contractor shall submit test certificates by PSB or accredited laboratories in relation to the physical properties of the integral cultured marble basin and top. The tests shall be in accordance with the relevant IAPMO PS 18-66 test methods conducted by PSB or accredited laboratories.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Coloured Low Capacity WC Suite (A)

Scope Provide and install close-coupled low capacity WC suite to all the common and attached bathrooms of all flat types as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and other locations as shown. The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern, internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances", Singapore Standards SS 378 - Specification for Vitreous China WC pans for use with low capacity WC flushing cisterns up to 4.5 L max, and SS 379 - Specification for Low Capacity Flushing Cistern up to 4.5 L max. Close-coupled low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume of 3.5 litres to 4.0 litres per single action flush with S-trap or P-trap outlet as shown in the Drawings. The rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16:1985 "WC Seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The coloured plastic seat and cover shall match the profile of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no visible WC trap profile. A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.

(B)

Installation Fix the close coupled low capacity WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers, hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system. Fix the WC onto the floor using 4 no. of the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in accordance with the correct method.

37.20.5

Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories All basins shall be complete with 15mm dia (nominal); chrome plated: ceramic disc cartridge operated; a single lever mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin. The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall be 25mm minimum. The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side. The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass. The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For any part of mixer that made of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr. The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury. The mixer tap shall comply with BS EN 817 and approved by the SO Rep. The mixer shall pass the PUB stipulated tests in BS EN 817. Bottle trap shall be approved by the SO Rep and connected to a 40mm diameter UPVC waste pipe discharging into a floor trap as shown.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories (Cont'd) The tap fittings shall be properly cleaned and wrapped immediately after the installation. The protective materials shall be durable and the method of protection shall remain intact till the units are handover.

37.20.6

Sealant Silicone sealant shall be used to seal up all gaps between sanitary wares (including cultured marble basin/top ) and tiled surface. The approved sealant shall be of one-component system, non-sag, class 25 in accordance with ASTM C920-01, and able to be applied without a primer. In addition it shall also meet the following technical requirements: S/N

Characteristics/ Properties

1

Fungal Resistance Test

Test Method ISO 846:1997 (Method B)

Chemical Resistance Test: a)

Household bleach

a)

Concentrated sodium hypochlorite solution - ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot covered)

b)

Urea

b)

Urea, 6.0% (Urine) - ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot covered)

2

3

Tack Free Time (hrs)

ASTM C679-87 (1997)

Requirements No growth ) ) )Surface shall be )unaffected after 16 )hours of spot )covered test ) ) )  4hrs

The Contractor shall submit the brand/range of silicone sealant and proposed method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. The Contractor shall also submit samples of the sealant to the SO Rep for selection of colour to match the sanitary Works 37.20.7

Dual-Flush Low Capacity WC Suite (A)

Technical Requirements Unless otherwise stated, all WC suite shall be dual flush low capacity type. The complete system of the close-coupled dual-flush low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern, internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances", Singapore Standards SS 378 - Specification for Vitreous China WC cisterns, and SS 379 - Specification for Low Capacity Flushing Pans for use with low capacity WC flushing pans up to 4.5L max. It shall be certified to be rated in the PUB’s “Water Efficiency Labeling Scheme” (WELS). The dual-flush low capacity WC shall enable a full flushing actuation and a reduced flushing actuation. The full flush of the dual-flush low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume of not exceeding 4.5 litres per single action flush. The full flushing performance shall comply fully with the SS 378 and SS 379. The flushing fitting within the cistern shall be set to 4.2 litres. The endurance test for the WC shall be of 100,000 flushing cycles.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


DUAL-FLUSH LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE (A)

Technical Requirements

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

The reduced flushing actuation shall comply with the following performance requirements:

Performance

Test

Criteria

Volume of water Discharged per reduced flush

SS 378 Appendix I

The cistern shall discharge a volume of water not more than 3 litres.

Endurance of flushing fitting

SS 378 Appendix J

The cistern shall not leak or show signs of defect, damage after 100,000 flushing cycles.

Discharge of colored water

Dilution test with aniline blue solution

No visible traces of colored water remaining in water seal

Loading on operating mechanism

SS 378 Appendix G

Shall not distort, and parts shall not become detached or inoperative.

Paper discharge

4 no of twin-ply toilet papers of 15,000mm² and of 40 g/m²

The toilet papers shall be fully discharged in at least 2 out of 3 tests.

The buttons for the actuation of the full and reduced flushing shall be clearly marked to be easily distinguishable by users. The rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16:1985 "WC Seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The colored plastic seat and cover shall match the profile of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no visible WC trap profile. A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape. (B)

Installation Fix the close coupled WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers, hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system. Fix the WC onto the floor using the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in accordance with the correct method.

BLDG12/S37.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)


BATH / SHOWER MIXER AND SHOWER-SET ASSEMBLY The bath / shower mixer shall be 15mm dia (nominal) chrome plated; ceramic disc cartridge operated; single lever mixer tap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured. The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side. The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass. The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For any part of mixer that made of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr. The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury. The mixer tap shall comply with BS EN 817 and approved by the SO Rep. The mixer shall pass the PUB stipulated tests in BS EN 817. Shower-set shall be complete with adjustable jet handset type of shower head, flexible hose, and sliding bar, all in chrome finish. Flexible hose shall be of length 1.5m and of stainless steel or chromed brass. An adjustable shower head holder shall be provided on the sliding bar. Shower-sets provided shall also comply with the following requirements:

Characteristic / Properties

Requirements: BS 6340 Part 4-Specification for shower heads and related equipment Clause 9.2-Service condition 2A,

Nickel and Chromium plating on shower head and related equipment

Classification PL/Ni 8b Cr r (8 micron min Full-bright Nickel and 0.3 micron min Regular Chromium)

Spray Trajectories

Clause 13.1

Tensile Load test for Flexible Hose

Clause 14.1

BLDG12/S37.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)


COLOURED UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/WASTE OUTLET FOR BATH/WC, KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD All UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC, Kitchen and service yard with floor tiles shall be coloured gratings. The colour shall be one of the four basic colours, ie. Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the anti-mosquito device need not be in colour.

37.22

BIB TAP AND DRAINAGE OUTLET FOR WASHING MACHINE Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose union bib tap with cross-head handle at the kitchen. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the SO Rep. 50mm diameter outlet for washing machine shall be finished with UPVC adaptor and screw-down cap as shown in the Drawings.

37.23

LAY SEWER TO CONNECT TO MINOR SEWER AND SEWER CONNECTION Lay the last length of main drain-line to join the inspection chamber to the minor manhole connection pipe provided by the Employer's civil engineering contractor or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. Allow for the connection to be carried out at a later stage. The connection shall be done under the supervision of the SO Rep or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Where in the case pipe joints are not provided, the Contractor shall provide the necessary connections by other methods approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. The last length of the main drain-line from the inspection chamber to such minor manhole shall be of vitrified clay pipe all as shown in the Drawings and to the approval of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Backfill with quarry dust and finished as shown. Apply to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for the connection and bear all costs and expenses including the necessary fees.

37.24

RAINWATER DOWNPIPE (RWDP) SYSTEM The rainwater downpipe system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings, all as shown in the Drawings and approved by the SO Rep. Unless specified otherwise, all rainwater downpipes above ground slab level shall be 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipes. The rainwater downpipe system shall be complete with downpipes, branch pipes, roof and balcony outlets with gratings, couplings, pipe brackets, swept tee junctions, access pipes, adaptors, rectangular section bends, underground pipes and Y-branch fittings. The 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipe shall comply with the requirements of SS 272:83 as shown below : Measurements/Tests a) Dimensions

SS 272:83 Requirements Outside Diameter Mean-minimum 200.0, maximum 200.6; Ovality-minimum 196.3, maximum 204.3; Wall Thickness minimum 4.9, maximum 6.0.

b) Opacity

Not exceeding 0.2 per cent of visible light.

c) Hydrostatic Pressure

No sign of leakage or any Defect at 70 kPa.

The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".

BLDG12/S37.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)


WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE FROM BALCONIES, SERVICE YARDS, LANDINGS, LIFT LOBBIES AND MSCP DECKS As shown in the Drawings, waste and rainwater discharge from the access balconies, private balconies, service yards, landings, lift lobbies at the second storey and above, and all multi-storey carpark/garage decks shall be connected to the rainwater downpipe system or to waste downpipes discharging into surface drains. All branch pipes and fittings used in the connections shall be of UPVC and comply with SS 213. The discharge outlets shall be square base, screw-in domical grating type as shown in the Drawings. All 80mm, 100mm and 150mm nominal diameter outlets for the private balconies/service yards shall have an adjustable square base of minimum 40mm adjustment. All 50mm nominal diameter outlets for private balconies shall have flat screw-in gratings. The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".

37.26

WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE AT GROUND FLOOR Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, all ground floor surfaces of void decks, play areas, multi-storey carparks/garages, link buildings, linkways, etc, shall be graded to drain waste water and rainwater into surface drains.

37.27

PAINTING Except for sanitary pipes and water supply pipes, all other ferrous metal surfaces of work installed by the Contractor (eg. mild steel brackets and others) shall be painted with 1 coat of approved primer and 2 coats of gloss enamel paint. All paint used shall be of those quality controlled by PSB and approved by the SO Rep. Allow for numbering to be painted to all sanitary pipes and water supply pipes at void deck.

37.28

MODULAR BRICKS Where clay bricks are shown in the Drawings, the bricks shall be of modular bricks. The common and facing clay bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm and 290mm x 90mm x 90mm.

37.29

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE RAIL (FOR HANDICAP) Provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets as shown in the Drawings. The stainless steel shall be of AISI Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the Drawings. The end of the pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with stainless steel capping of the same grade all to the details as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be rigid and secured tightly into the walls.

37.30

CONNECTING TUBE TO PILLAR TAPS AND CISTERNS The connecting tube shall be flexible stainless steel tube 15mm diameter and complete with UPVC adaptor coupling where necessary.

37.31

50MM DIAMETER WASTE OUTLET AT ATTACHED BATHROOM Waste discharge outlet for the 50mm diameter pipe at attached bathroom shall be UPVC screw-in flat grating with square base as shown in the Drawings.

Section 38/.....

BLDG12/S37.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 38-1 SECTION 38 WATER INSTALLATION

38.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENT All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep reserves the right to carry out test on materials on the Site as and when required. The test shall be conducted at an SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.

38.2

WATER SUPPLY PIPES

38.2.1

Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings For Water Supply All ductile iron pipes and fittings for water installation shall comply with BS EN 545 and ductile iron flanges type PN16 shall comply with BS EN 545. The pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS EN 545.

38.2.2

Stainless Steel Water Pipes Provide and fix stainless steel water supply pipes to areas as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and to the requirements of BS EN 10312:02. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. Support pipes with stainless steel supporting clips or as shown in the Drawings. Use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply unless otherwise specified. The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy or stainless steel press fitting joints. Compression fittings of copper alloy shall conform with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 . Stainless steel press fitting joints shall conform with Japanese Waterworks Association (JWWA) G116 "Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings For Water Works". All fittings shall conform with all PUB latest requirements. Fittings of 15mm size and longer shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark. Support pipes with supporting stainless steel clips and hangers. The maximum spacing for horizontal and vertical support shall be as follows : Nominal Size

Maximum Horizontal Support Spacing

Maximum Vertical Support Spacing

(mm)

(mm)

(mm)

1000 1000 1200 1200

1200 1200 1800 1800

15 20 to 28 35 to 42 54 and above

Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly. If necessary, the compression joint shall be adequately supported with brackets on both sides to avoid any dislocation.



CONTRACTOR'S WORK COMMENCES FROM PUBLIC UTILITIES BOARD MAIN PUB will provide and lay water main up to the bulk meter for direct and indirect supply or individual meter points for direct supply as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor's Works shall commence from these points.

38.4

BULK METER POSITIONS The exact position of bulk meter, where not fixed by existing mains shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB before fixing. Otherwise the Contractor shall make good to the proper position determined by the SO Rep.

38.5

WATER METER POSITIONS Provide and install live meter connections to all flats and remove the connections at the time when PUB install the water meters to all flats. The Contractor shall also provide label/tag of unit numbers where one service duct serves more than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature, with the dwelling unit number clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping.

38.6

BRASS STOPCOCKS, STOP VALVES, GATE VALVES AND COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY GATE VALVE Provide and fix to every branch service pipe or main supply pipe, one stop valve to SS 75:Pt 2 or gate valve to BS 5163. Provide valve with a detachable crutch head. Where ball stop valves and stopcocks are along public corridors or public access balconies, the upper end of projecting shank of valves shall be tilted to an angle of 15 degrees towards the wall where such pipes are tee off from direct up-riser pipes or indirect down supply pipes. The installation shall comply with PUB regulations. Install copper and copper alloy gate valve to BS 5154 at the down supply pipe on the roof top. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and deliver them to the Branch Office or Town Council.

38.7

DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS Run 100mm diameter underground ductile iron distribution main and 80mm ductile iron sub-main complying with BS EN 545 as shown in the Drawings. From this main, run direct riser of size shown in the following schedule, each serving only 2 units on each floor unless otherwise shown.



DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS (CONT'D) Schedule of Common Direct Riser and Tee Off Pipes For 3, 4 and 5-Room Flats (To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02) (a)

Storey No. Served by Common Riser

Block without Void Deck 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

1st

1st

1st to 2nd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

1st to 3rd

*Tee Off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

2nd

3rd

4th

4th

4th

4th

4th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

5th

5th

5th to 6th

5th to 7th

*Tee off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

6th

7th

8th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

(b) Storey No. Served by Common Riser

Block with Void Deck 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

2nd

2nd

2nd to 3rd

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

2nd to 4th

*Tee Off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

3rd

4rd

5th

5th

5th

5th

5th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

28mm

Size of Riser

54mm

54mm

54mm

54mm

No. of Storey

6th

6th

6th to 7th

6th to 8th

*Tee off Size

22mm

22mm

22mm

22mm

No. of Storey

7th

8th

9th

*Tee Off Size

28mm

28mm

28mm

* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied through up to the junction of the last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.



HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS Hot and cold water supply pipes and fittings shall be provided within the residential units. The Contractor shall submit the proposed work methods for the installation of concealed water pipes including information/details of the suppliers and type of materials used for the approval of SO Rep. All water pipes within the residential units shall be of copper pipes to BS EN 1057-R250, approved by the SO Rep. All pipes shall be chased (embedded) in walls, columns and beams. No pipe shall be exposed within the residential units. Copper brackets shall be used for securing the water pipes. The spacing between copper brackets on the horizontal and vertical pipe run shall not be more than 1m centre-tocentre. In addition, copper brackets shall also be installed immediately before and after each bend. Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly. The nominal size of the water pipes shall be of nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to 15mm nominal outside diameter with 1.0mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings. For forming of vertical and horizontal recesses in residential units, no hacking is allowed. The contractor shall use modular shaped solid block to form all horizontal and vertical recesses for the water supply pipes. All fittings required for joints (tees, elbows, etc) on the pipes shall be of an approved press-fit coupling system fittings complying with BS EN 1254 Part 2. Bending of copper pipes is not allowed. Joining of fittings to pipes shall be by press-fit coupling system. Before joining, clean the external surface of the copper pipes and the internal surface of the fittings. The press-fit coupling system shall be carried out by means of an approved propriety mechanical clamping jaw to crimp an approved proprietary copper fitting to a standard EN 1057-R250 copper pipe. The press-fit fitting shall consist of an ethylene-propylenediene(EPDM) “O” ring seal. The press-fit fittings/system shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service installations shall conform to the Public Utilities ( Water Supply ) Regulations and SS : CP 48. The system shall not require proprietary tap fittings/valves and other related accessories. The Contractor shall submit all taps, mixers, and accessories for the approval of the SO Rep. The press-fit system shall be able to withstand a working pressure of 16 bar and a working temperature range of above freezing point to 110 °C. The system shall provide a fail-safe indicator to identify improper assembly. The system shall be suitable for embedment in walls, columns and beams. All pipe works shall be installed and tested to BS EN 1254 Part 2. Taps, mixers and other accessories are not installed during the test. The entire pipe works shall show no sign of defect or leakage for the duration of the test. The test requirements for leak-tightness under hydrostatic pressure test shall be 24 bars at ambient temperature. The pressure shall be applied gradually and maintained for a minimum period of 15 minutes at ambient temperature. This test shall be carried out to every dwelling unit and witnessed by the SO Rep. The pressure gauge used for the testing shall be calibrated by an SAC accredited laboratory. All water pipes including all pipe fittings (tees, elbows, etc) shall be left exposed for inspection for leakage during testing before concealment of the pipes and fittings shall be carried out. A cold water pipe shall be tee-off from the distribution pipe to the designated heater position. Hot water pipes shall be provided from the heater position to all basin and both bath mixers position. A pressure relief drain-off pipe shall also be provided for discharging to the floor trap. The cold water inlets and hot water outlets shall all be terminated with U pipes projected at 80mm away from the wall. The drain-off pipe shall be terminated with compression fitting with capping at 50mm away from the wall. All the 3 termination points shall be fixed with 30mm x 20mm aluminium tags, with engraved markings of "cold water inlet", "hot water outlet" and drain-off" respectively. Light duty coloured masking tapes of 10mm width, shall be fixed on the wall surfaces of all the pipe routing lines concealed behind walls, columns and beams. Red for hot water pipes, blue for cold water pipes and black for drain-off pipe. No wall finish shall be damaged by the removal of the tapes. For each basin, 15mm diameter isolating ball stopvalves shall be fixed below the tap mixer, connecting to the hot and cold water inlet. A 15 mm diameter isolating ball stopvalves shall also be fixed at the provision of cold water inlet for kitchen sink connection where specified (eg. Studio Apartment type of flat).



HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS (CONT'D) A bath mixer complete with adjustable jet shower head, sliding bar, 1.5m flexible hose (all in chrome finish), and a basin mixer, approved by the PUB and the SO Rep, shall be provided within each Bath/WC.

38.9

REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

38.9.1

Flushing Pipes From Ground Level Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have its own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter stainless steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head located outside at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant complying to BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR". The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of the chute and perforated with 5mm ±1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.

38.9.2

Flushing Pipes To Refuse Chutes From Distribution Mains At Roof-Top (For Block With Centralised Refuse Chute)

38.9.2.1

Pipe & Fittings For flushing pipes to centralised refuse chutes from distribution mains at roof-top, the 42mm diameter stainless steel supply pipes shall be teed off from the distribution main at the roof top as specified in Clause 38.10 "Indirect Supply From Roof Tanks". One such pipe shall supply only one chute. Provide each supply pipe with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve and a 40mm solenoid valve. The layout and arrangement shall be as shown in the Drawings for flushing chutes. The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of the chute and perforated with 5mm ±1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.

38.9.2.2

Solenoid Valve The approved 40mm solenoid valve shall be electrically operated, two-way, normally closed and capable of operating at zero differential pressure. The supply voltage shall be 230 V ±10% at 50 Hz. The coil shall be epoxy or plastic encapsulated, of at least class F insulation, and capable of 100% continuous duty. The enclosure protection shall be at least IP65 (according to BS 5490) and suitable for conduit connection. The enclosure shall incorporate earthing terminal and terminal block for easy maintenance. The pipe threads shall comply with BS 21. The operating pressure range shall be 0 to 4 bars. The valve body shall be of brass, bronze or other approved metal. Parts in contact with water shall be of stainless steel, brass, bronze or other approved material. All brass components shall be dezincificationresistant complying with BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR" The Contractor's proposed solenoid valve shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse chute flushing systems. Submit technical information of the solenoid valve and other information, as provided in APPENDIX A14, to the SO Rep for approval. Where the pressure of water leading to the solenoid valves exceeds 4 bars, such as in some staggered blocks, provide and install appropriate pressure reducing valves subject to the approval of the SO Rep.




(CONT’D)

38.9.2

Flushing Pipes To Refuse Chutes From Distribution Mains At Roof-Top (For Block With Centralised Refuse Chute) (Cont’d)

38.9.2.3

Control Board The design of control board shall follow the Drawings approved by the SO Rep. The control board shall contain the following : 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.

Relay to control the solenoid valve for refuse chute flushing MCB unit for control circuit and solenoid valve 30 minute timer Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel

The front panel shall have : 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.

Red indicator light to show the flushing is on Green indicator light to show the power supply is on Red emergency stop push button Green push button to start the flushing Key lock to be approved by the SO Rep.

The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 54 (according to BS 5490). The box shall be made of 1.5mm thick mild steel sheet, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-baked paint. The control board shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber next to the consumer unit. The chosen location shall be approved by the SO Rep. 38.9.2.4

Electrical Wiring The power supply to the system shall be from the consumer unit inside the refuse chamber. Cables and electrical wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 and they shall be carried in their own conduits. The cables connecting the solenoid valve to the control switch shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal cross-sectional area. The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit, (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level. The conduits to the solenoid valves shall run along the piping and be properly supported. All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. Earth the conduits with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in PSB Code of Practice CP 5. Earth all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

38.9.3

Inspection During Progress Of Work Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the refuse chute flushing system for inspection by the SO Rep.

38.9.4

Testing Of Installation One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing of the performance and installation of the refuse chute flushing system. All Defect notified during inspection shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep. Take all necessary precautions to prevent any collection of water inside the Refuse Handling Plant during any testing which involves the flushing of refuse chute.


Bldg Spec Page 38-7

38.9


38.9.5

Testing For Leakages

(CONT’D)

Carry out leakage test to the following items : (a) (b) (c)

joints between floor slab; joints between branch off pipes; and all the water pipes installed.

Complete the tests, including making good of all Defect within 14 days from the date of Substantial Completion for each building block.

38.10

INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS Where supply is from roof storage tanks, run 100mm diameter ductile iron distribution mains complying with BS EN 545 with cement lining internally on roof to beyond the last down supply pipes. From these mains, run down supply pipes of sizes shown in the schedule, "Schedule Of Down Supply Pipes And Tee Off Pipes For 3, 4, 5-Room Flats", each serving only 2 units on each floor unless otherwise shown. Pipe joints, fittings and special tee for ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level shall be of the flanged type. The use of special tee shall be approved by the SO Rep.



INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)

Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats (To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02) Where Tank Supply No. of Storey Below Roof Size of Down Feed Pipe No. of Storey Below Roof * Tee Off Size No. of Storey Below Roof * Tee Off Size

Size of Down Feed Pipe No. of Storey Below Roof * Tee Off Size

1-Storey

2-Storey

3-Storey

4-Storey

5-Storey

6-Storey

7-Storey

8-Storey

9-Storey

42mm 1st 28mm

42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm

42mm 1st to 2nd 28mm 3rd 22mm







42mm 3rd to 4th 22mm







42mm 6th to 9th 22mm



* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat units as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings. Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.




Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats (To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02) Where Tank Supply No. of Storey Below Roof

10-Storey

11-Storey

12-Storey

13-Storey

14-Storey

15-Storey

16-Storey

17-Storey


































* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings. Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.





18-Storey

19-Storey

20-Storey

21-Storey

22-Storey

23-Storey

24-Storey

25-Storey






































42mm 16th to 21st 22mm

42mm 17th to 22nd 22mm

42mm 18th to 23rd 22mm





BLDG12/S38.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)




26-Storey

27-Storey

28-Storey

29-Storey

30-Storey




























42mm 17th to 22nd 22mm




42mm 22nd to 26th 22mm

42mm 22nd to 27th 22mm





BLDG12/S38.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)




31-Storey

32-Storey

33-Storey

34-Storey

35-Storey









































BLDG12/S38.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)




36-Storey

37-Storey

38-Storey

39-Storey

40-Storey







































42mm 31st to 37th 22mm





BLDG12/S38.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


RESERVED

38.12

SILT TRAP AT FOOT OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES Every down supply pipe shall extend at least 250mm below the last tee-off to form a silt trap fitted with a plug to facilitate cleaning. Provide gate valve with detachable crutch head just before the silt trap.

38.13

PIPEWORKS TO THE STAINLESS STEEL FLANGES AT THE CONCRETE WATER TANKS The fixing of pipes, valves and fittings, including bolts, nuts and gaskets, to the stainless steel flanges of the connecting pipes shall be fixed by the Contractor. Use only stainless steel bolts and nuts. All stainless steel material shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with BS 4504. Allow for all pipeworks cost and water for sanitary and water installation leakage test.

38.14

PIPING TO HIGH LEVEL TANKS Provide and install piping to high level water tanks as follows :

38.14.1

Rising Mains Install 100mm ductile iron pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally from bulk meters or low level suction tanks at ground level to high level water tank whichever is applicable. The rising mains shall be connected to a 100mm ball float valve with a 100mm gate valve at inlet. Floats shall be of copper and approved type.

38.14.2

Distribution Outlet Mains Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipes on precast concrete block 450mm high and 150mm thick of 1:3:6 mix concrete, embedded onto 150mm high concrete base by mortar at intervals of not exceeding 2700mm all as shown in the Drawings. Provide supports at every fitting or bend. Mains shall extend past the last branching-off of down supply pipe and shall be encased by reinforced concrete end-thrust supports as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix ductile iron short pipe 450mm in length with 180mm diameter ductile iron collar 20mm thick, welded at middle section of the short pipe. Provide approved flange adaptors along the distribution pipe before each thrust support. All ductile iron pipe joints, flange adaptor, fittings and special tees shall be of the flanged type in compliance with BS EN 545 type PN 16.

38.14.3

Interconnecting Pipe Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement linings installed between tanks as shown in the Drawings with 100mm gate valve. The invert level of the connecting pipe shall be 400mm above the internal base of the water tank unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. Pipe joints, fittings and special tees shall be of the flanged type ductile iron. Flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.

38.14.4

Overflow Pipes 100mm diameter ductile iron overflow pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining or one size bigger than the diameter of the inlet rising main pipe as shown in the Drawings to each tank compartment shall be connected to washout pipe. Provide an additional 28mm diameter stainless steel overflow warning pipe for each roof storage tank and discharging off roof edge at its nearest point preferably at the kitchen side. The pipe shall project 300mm from eaves of roof as shown in the Drawings. Cover open end of pipes with mosquito screen.

BLDG12/S38.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Tank Washout Pipes Install 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipes complying to BS EN 545 with cement lining before the gate valve from tanks to roof level as shown in the Drawings. The pipes shall discharge direct into roof rain water gutter and properly drained off through rain water downpipes.

38.14.6

Stop Valves, Sluice/Gate Valves, Copper And Copper Alloy Gate Valves Provide and install all necessary stop valves to SS 75:Pt 2, gate valves to BS 5163, Copper and Copper Alloy Gate Valves to BS 5154 and other fittings required to comply with the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB, regardless of whether such items have been specifically mentioned or not. The wedge of the gate valves (BS 5163) used shall be of rubber bonded gate. Coat the internal surface of valve body with approved material. The spindles of the gate valves shall be of stainless steel or high tensile bronze or other approved type.

38.14.7

Raised Pipes Install raised pipes to raise and support all horizontal pipes above concrete roof as stated in subclause 38.14.2 "Distribution Outlet Mains" to a level of not less than 330mm to clear precast secondary roofing slabs.

38.15

BIB TAP AND STOPCOCK/STOPVALVE Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter brass bib taps conforming with BS 5412 and BS 3457; and 15mm and 25mm diameter stopcocks/stopvalves conforming with SS 75:Part 2 and BS 3457. Such bib taps, stopcocks and stopvalves shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. Bib taps shall be chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass operating handles. UPVC tee and cap for fixing bib tap as shown in the Drawings shall conform with SS 174. Fix the cap to the wall by "Ramset ED 655" or other approved.

38.16

TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS Taps located at the staircase landings, access balconies, refuse hopper areas and wash areas shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated hose union bib tap with removable handle, as shown in the Drawings. The tap shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. The handles shall be handed over to the Employer or the relevant Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon handing over of the building blocks.

38.17

WATER SERVICES TO UTILITIES CENTRE Run 25mm diameter UPVC pipe from water meter point to the utilities centre. Water pipes inside the buildings shall be 20mm diameter up to bib taps. Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action bib tap over lavatory basin and 15mm isolating ball stop valve to W.C. cisterns. Bib tap and ball stop valve shall be of brass high pressure screw down type. Provide similar 15mm bib tap with screw on connecting nozzle for the utilities centre.

38.18

WATER SERVICES TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER Provide and install stainless steel water pipe and stainless steel down supply pipes to the sizes and locations as shown in the Drawings. The stainless steel pipes shall be approved by the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. Provide and fix brass caps to stainless steel water pipes. Provide and fix approved 15mm bib tap with screw on connecting nozzle and approved isolating ball stop valve at positions all as shown in the Drawings.

BLDG12/S38.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FIXING FITTINGS BEFORE HANDING OVER When required, provide and fix taps, stop valves and other removable fittings immediately before all the building blocks are handed over to the Employer.

38.20

BRASS WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE Provide and fix PUB approved bronze or brass water pressure reducing valves (NF E29-170) to down feed pipes where the pressures are more than 35m hydrostatic head, all to be in accordance with the requirements of Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. The Contractor shall remove the pressure gauge of the pressure reducing valve and install a plug after testing.

38.21

RESERVED

38.22

RESERVED

38.23

TAP FITTINGS REQUIREMENT All taps shall conform to the following standards and technical requirements: Cold Water Tap (a)

Mechanical; water tightness, pressure resistance; hydraulic; and backflow prevention characteristics to- BS 5412;

(b)

Corrosion resistance performance to- BS EN 248;

(c)

All non-metallic material component in contact with water- to SS 375;

(d)

All metallic material in contact with water to- AS/NZS 4020 “Extraction of Metals - Appendix H";

(e)

The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For part that is of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr; and

(f)

Certified under PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS)

Mixer (Hot And Cold Water Tap) (a)

Mechanical; leak-tightness; hydraulic; torsion resistance and backflow prevention characteristics toBS EN 817 ;

(b)

Corrosion resistance performance to- BS EN 248;

(c)

All non-metallic material component in contact with water- to SS 375;

(d)

All metallic material in contact with water to- AS/NZS 4020 “Extraction of Metals - Appendix H";

(e)

The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For part that is of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr; and

(f)

Certified under PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS)

The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and / or with character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side. Section 39/..... BLDG12/S38.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 39-1 SECTION 39 GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

39.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENT The gas pipe installation Works shall refer to the gas pipes after the CityGas Ltd Service Valve (SV) and which includes buried service pipes, horizontal service pipes, risers and internal gas pipes. The gas pipe installation work shall be suitable for City Gas Ltd manufactured gas as specified in CP51 Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation and shall be carried out by a Consultant’s Licensed Gas Service Worker (hereinafter referred to as the "LGSW" for the purposes of this Section including all clauses and sub-clauses under it) and shall comply with City Gas Ltd requirements.

39.2

CODE OF PRACTICE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall ensure that the Works are carried out in accordance with the following requirements:

39.3

(i)

Public Utilities Act (Chapter 261)

(ii)

Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations

(iii)

Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, ie. CP51 including any amendments,

(iv)

City Gas Ltd Procedures and Requirements for gas supply; and

(v)

Any other relevant rules, regulations and requirements by the relevant authority from time to time.

NOTIFICATION FOR COMMENCEMENT OF WORK Before commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Gas Ltd project coordinator and the Consultant for a site meeting. After the site meeting, the Contractor shall notify City Gas Ltd before the Works can be carried out.

39.4

SAMPLE UNITS The Contractor shall put up sample unit for each typical installation for inspection and approval by both the City Gas Ltd Engineer and the Consultant. The Consultant shall submit two sets of drawings of the sample unit to City Gas Ltd before inspection. The Contractor shall only proceed with the whole installation only after the sample unit has been inspected and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer.



APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS PIPE INSTALLATION The Contractor shall ensure that the gas pipe installation complies with the approved plan before submitting an application for final pressure test. The Contractor shall carry out preliminary testing of the completed installation and rectify all Defect before arranging with the City Gas Ltd project co-ordinator for the final pressure test. All preparation for the final pressure test shall be made by the Contractor. The final pressure test shall be conducted by the City Gas Ltd Engineer or his authorised representative. The application for final pressure test (City Gas Ltd Form PH-G2 as produced in Appendix A15) must be accompanied by the following : (i)

Four sets of as-built drawings duly endorsed by Consultant.

(ii)

City Gas Ltd Form PH-G1B as produced in Appendix A16 if necessary.

The same endorsed as-built drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for endorsement. Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd in writing on the approval of the application for the final pressure test of the gas pipe installation through Form PH-GR2 as produced in Appendix A17. A certificate of Final Pressure Test (Form PH-G2A as produced in Appendix A18) shall be prepared by the Contractor and endorsed by City Gas Ltd once the final pressure test is passed. A copy of this certificate shall be submitted to City Gas Ltd by the Contractor. In the event that the installation has failed the final pressure test, the Contractor must resubmit a fresh application for final pressure test. After the gas pipe installation has been tested and passed, the Consultant’s LGSW shall affix all plugs, caps and end-points of the installation with warning labels which read 'Gas Pipe Tested. Do Not Tamper'.

39.6

UNAUTHORISED WORK ON GAS PIPE INSTALLATION After the gas pipe installation has passed its final pressure test, the Contractor shall ensure that no person is allowed to carry out any further work without prior written approval from the City Gas Ltd approving authority. Any further work on the installation, shall render the final pressure test null and void. If any further work has to be carried out, a new application for the work shall be made together with the plans. No person other than an authorised City Gas Ltd employee or authorised City Gas Ltd contractor is permitted to connect any gas pipe installation onto City Gas Ltd gas main.

39.7

APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY After the gas pipe installation has passed the final pressure test and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer, the Contractor shall apply for charge-in/turn-on of gas supply by submitting City Gas Ltd Form PH-G3 as produced in Appendix A19. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the line drawing of the gas pipe installation indicating the location of the service valves, valves, risers, meters and all installation pipes downstream of the meter. The line drawing shall be subjected to the approval of the Consultant.



APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY (CONT'D) The line drawing(s) of the gas pipe installation shall be displayed inside the 1st storey gas riser service duct(s). The line drawing(s) shall be placed and sealed inside an A4 size clear perspex cover and securely mounted with four stainless steel screws onto the inside of the door(s) of the riser service duct(s). Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd on the approval and charge-in/turn-on of gas supply through Form PH-GR3 & PH-GR4 as produced in Appendix A20 and A21 respectively.

39.8

CHARGE-IN OF GAS The Contractor and/or Consultant must be present during the charge-in of gas. The Contractor shall arrange for a proof test and set up all necessary equipment, fittings and vent points for purging and ensure that all necessary safety precautions are taken. After the installation has been confirmed to be sound with the proof test, the installation is then purged and charged-in with manufactured gas. After the charge-in of the gas supply, the Consultant’s LGSW must affix the labels 'Live Gas. Do Not Tamper' to all plugs, caps and other end points of the gas pipe installation.

39.9

USE OF GAS DETECTOR The Contractor shall use a gas detector which measures the volume of gas in air, when necessary. The Consultant’s LGSW is responsible for the accuracy and the use of this instrument in all the Works that is carried out by him.

39.10

PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES All pipes, fittings and valves used in the gas pipe installation shall comply with CP51 and City Gas Ltd requirements. The diameter of all pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their nominal diameter. The diameter of all Polyethylene pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their outer diameter (OD) and based on a Standard Diameter Ratio (SDR) of 11. Unless otherwise specified, copper pipes to BS EN 1057 "Copper and copper alloys - seamless round copper tubes for Water and Gas in sanitary and heating applications" shall be used within the unit for overhead internal gas supply pipe from the meter to the kitchen of individual unit. Fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2: 1998 "Capillary and Compression Tube Fittings for Copper Tubes". The Contractor shall provide a label/tag showing the unit numbers where one service duct serves more than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature, with the dwelling unit numbers clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping. Galvanised steel pipes (heavy) complying with SS17 "Steel Tubes suitable for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" or BS 1387 "Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plain End Steel Tubes Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" shall be used outside the unit for incoming gas supply pipe, gas riser and horizontal supply pipe. The galvanised malleable cast iron pipe fittings shall comply with BS 143 and BS 1256 "Specification For Malleable Cast Iron & Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings". Ductile iron pipes shall be of the flexible bolted gland joint type complying with BS EN 545-Class K9. The gland ring shall be lead tipped nitrile rubber or epichlorhydrin.



PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES (CONT'D) All galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate free primer. All the exposed galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint of a colour to match the background as instructed by the SO Rep. All galvanised steel and copper pipes including fittings inside service ducts, inside false ceiling and other enclosures shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat in Canary Yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309. For buried service pipe at the building footway, Polythene pipe sleeve in Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) pipe shall be used. The uPVC pipe shall conform to JIS 6741 Class AW or SS 141 Class E. All Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of PE80 Polymer and shall be manufactured in accordance with ISO 4437. The Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings shall be of the City Gas Ltd approved types.

39.11

CATEGORIES OF PIPE The pipes to be installed is categorised and located in the areas as detailed below : (a)

Buried Service Pipe

- Pipe connecting to the vertical service pipe and is laid in concrete channels. The pipe shall extend 600mm beyond the footway drain to receive City Gas Ltd connection. The pipe shall be Polyethylene pipe complying to the standards as specified and shall be sized to OD 63mm. The Polyethylene pipes shall be sleeved in Diameter 80 mm uPVC pipes, and both ends of the sleeve shall be stopped with rubber wall grommet. The pipe-end to receive City Gas Ltd Connection shall be fitted with a temporary 50mm SS141 Class E uPVC end cap with the Internal Diameter pre-enlarged (Hot Water treatment) to 63.5mm for close-fit to the Outer Diameter of the Polyethylene Pipe. The pipe-end to join to the riser shall be fitted with a 50mm GI BSP Adaptor X PE 63mm Electrofusion Transition Elbow complying to Gas Business Engineering specifications GBE/PL3 or equivalent. Alternatively, the above-mentioned Service Pipe configuration can be installed by a factory-fitted Above Ground Entry Elbow. It shall be provided with an assembled 4m Polyethylene tail and a 3.6m uPVC sleeve; the elbow is zinc plated and a grey fusion bonded epoxy coated; and the steel nipple is protected by a Polyethylene sleeve and terminates in a male thread. All buried/concealed pipes shall be left exposed for City Gas Ltd inspection, testing and approval before concealment.

(b)

Horizontal Service Pipe - Horizontal pipe runs normally at the ground floor ceiling level and connecting to all vertical risers. The pipe shall be galvanised steel pipe to SS 17 or BS 1387.

(c)

Riser

- Rising pipe from ground/first floor to the top shall be provided with a branch for a meter connection at each floor (a riser supplies gas to either one or two flats per floor depending on the piping layout). The pipe shall be galvanised steel to SS 17 or BS 1387.

(d)

Internal Pipe

- Pipe installed after the City Gas Ltd meter. The pipes shall be copper pipes which complies to BS EN 1057. Brass compression fittings for copper pipes shall comply to BS 864 Part 2.



PIPE CHANNEL Where service pipes have to cross the floor footway before entering the building, such pipes shall be accommodated in channels in the footway. The channel shall be cleared of all debris and shall be dry before the gas pipe is laid. The void space between the pipe and the channel shall be filled with cement mortar. Under no circumstances shall the service pipe be located underneath a ground beam.

39.13

PIPE SUPPORTS/BRACKETS The Contractor shall provide galvanised steel pipe brackets on horizontal run and at the ground floor areas at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipe brackets shall be installed before and after every change of direction of the pipe. The pipe brackets shall also be provided at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) for vertical riser pipes. Every riser pipe shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flange device capable of supporting the total weight of the riser in accordance to CP51. Where the riser passes through a floor, the floor shall be haunched up around the riser or its pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve shall be at least 50mm above the floor level.

39.14

PIPE SLEEVE ON FLOOR Where the gas riser pipes are not enclosed in service ducts, a PVC sleeve with a minimum of 300mm protruding above the floor level shall be provided to accommodate the gas pipe run through the floor slab. The section of the gas pipe within the sleeve shall be wrapped with petrolatum tape and the gap between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed with water-proofed sealant.

39.15

PIPE JOINTING MATERIALS All jointing compounds, jointing pastes, thread sealants and other jointing materials for galvanised steel pipe shall be of the approved type complying with BS 5292. All Polyethylene pipes shall be jointed only by City Gas Ltd approved types of electrofusion fittings. The approved types of Electrofusion Control Units shall operate an output voltage of 39.5 volts. All electrofusion joints shall be carried out by trained workers, certified by the City Gas Ltd Approved Vendors or the Singapore Power Training Institute.

39.16

THREADED JOINTS Galvanised iron pipes of 80mm and below and corresponding fittings shall have taper threads except for connector backnuts to BS 21. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints. Prior to jointing, the threads shall be cleaned of all grease and particles. There shall be a 50% overlap when wrapping threads.

39.17

IDENTIFICATION OF GAS PIPES FOR COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS All gas pipes shall be painted Canary Yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309. In addition, a line diagram shall be provided at a suitable location indicating the position of meters, pipework, and isolation valves.



ENTRY OF GAS PIPE BELOW GROUND LEVEL Direct underground pipe entry into basement shall not be allowed. Gas service pipe shall come up above ground before entering into the building. If entry of underground gas pipes through retaining walls below ground level is necessary, a steel sleeve shall be cast in situ into the retaining wall. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed at both ends with cement mortar or any other suitable sealing material. The gas pipe shall also be of heavy gauge galvanised iron to BS 1387 or SS17-Class C wrapped up with petrolatum tape with a 50% overlap for buried service pipes 80mm and below. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints.

39.19

SOLID SHAFT FOR METER INSTALLATION A solid metal shaft shall be installed at each tee-off of the riser where the gas meter is to be installed as specified in CP51.

39.20

INSTALLATION OF SOLID SPOOL A solid spool shall be installed at the vertical service pipe from the ground in the building during the installation stage. The solid spool of 150mm in length shall be installed 600mm above the ground level. The spool(s) shall be replaced with standard double flanged distant piece(s)/short pipe(s) with Johnson coupling connectors complying to CP 51 or other approved after the gas pipe installation have passed the pressure test and the installation is ready for charge-in.

39.21

BRASS BALL AND PLUG VALVES FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION Brass ball stop valves shall be provided to every riser pipe just before the first "Tee-off" pipe and at the riser tee-off point to every dwelling unit. The ball stop valves shall be suitable for use on City Gas Ltd town gas. The ball stop valves shall have the following :

39.22

(a)

Two female end connections having BSP threads, tapered in accordance with BS 21 "Specification For Pipe Threads For Tubes and Fittings Where Pressure-Tight Joints Are Made on the Threads (Metric Dimensions)".

(b)

Ball and plug valves shall be of the full bore type complying with BS 1552.

GAS PIPE WITHIN THE FALSE CEILING SPACE, BASEMENT AND CONCEALED AREAS Where gas pipe is installed within the false ceiling space, basement and concealed areas (these cases to be specially approved by City Gas Ltd), only steel pipe of heavy gauge complying with BS 3601 or complying with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 5L Grade B shall be used and shall comply with the requirements of CP 51. The pipe shall be welded and full circumferential radiography test shall be carried out on all the welds by an accredited laboratory engaged by the Contractor to verify that all these welded joints are sound. The result of radiography tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep. Stainless steel pipe sleeve, one size larger than that of the gas pipe, shall be provided and exposed by 50mm on both ends of the false ceiling. All threaded joints, gas valves, fittings and controls shall be installed outside the false ceiling space of the building. Where gas pipes pass through air-conditioned areas, it shall be adequately lagged with insulating material to prevent excessive condensation.



MECHANICALLY VENTILATED KITCHEN In a mechanically ventilated kitchen where City Gas Ltd gas is to be used, a solenoid valve shall be installed before the gas meter. This solenoid valve shall automatically shut off the gas supply whenever the ventilation fan is switched off or failed to operate. In the event that the mechanically ventilated kitchen is air-conditioned or linked to an air-conditioned space adjoining the kitchen, a gas detection system, electrically interlock to the solenoid valve and the mechanically ventilated system shall be installed. This is to ensure that if there is a gas leak, the gas supply would be shut off automatically.

39.24

AIR-CONDITIONED AREAS WHERE GAS APPLIANCES ARE INSTALLED In air-conditioned areas where gas appliances are installed, a leak detection system shall be installed to monitor the presence of gas. Leak detector used shall comply with BS EN 50054 and BS EN 50057 or equivalent. The leak detection system shall be connected to a solenoid valve controlling gas supply to the area. The leak detection system may be linked to a monitored alarm system if necessary. All detectors and solenoid valves shall also be explosion proof and shall be certified for use in a hazardous area zone 2 environment as described under SS 254:Part1 or any equivalent standard having a similar classification. The setting for the system to cut-out shall not be more than 20% of the Lower Explosive Limit of manufactured gas (hydrogen).

39.25

PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES Gas pipes shall be tested in accordance with the following procedures as specified in CP 51 : (a)

Cap or plug off all outlets of the system leaving only one opening which shall be fitted with a Tpiece having a gas cock on one end and a manometer (U-gauge)/or a pressure gauge, in the other;

(b)

Pump air in the system through the gas cock on the T-piece until a pressure of 300mm w.g. is registered on the U-gauge and shut the cock;

(c)

If there is no pressure drop after 10 minutes, the installation may be deemed sound;

(d)

For the Polyethylene service or installation pipe after the service valve, the required test pressure is 70 kPa using a 0-200 kPa pressure gauge, and a test duration of 30 minutes;

(e)

If there is no pressure drop after 30 minutes, repeat Point (b) to (c) to complete the testing;

(f)

If there is a fall in pressure at the end of the test, the leak shall be traced with soap solution, rectified and re-tested.

For chokage test, drop a 15mm diameter ball bearing through each riser from the highest point of the riser and ensure that the ball bearing is able to fall vertically all the way through without any obstructions from inside the riser. After the gas pipe installation had been tested and approved by City Gas Ltd, no further work shall be allowed unless written approval is obtained from City Gas Ltd. The Contractor shall arrange with City Gas Ltd for the charging in of gas before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer.



PURGING OF PIPES (a)

Purging of gas must be organised by the Designated Representative and conducted in the presence of the City Gas Ltd Project Coordinator.

(b)

A proof test shall be carried out immediately preceding to charging in of all pipes.

(c)

Steps must be taken to ensure that there is no naked flame or any other source of ignition in the vicinity of the purging areas and the areas are well barricaded with relevant warning signs.

(d)

Vent point consisting of standpipes more than 2m long with flame traps and control valves shall be erected at suitable locations and connected to the appropriate points of the pipework via rubber hoses or other suitable hoses.

(e)

Every vent point shall be supervised by the Licensed Gas Service Worker and vent points are to be located such that vent gas cannot drift into buildings.

(f)

A gas detector shall be used to check the mixture content at the end of the standpipe.

(g)

During the purging process, the valve cover shall be left opened.

(h)

Purging is only completed when 100% discharge of gas at the standpipe is achieved.

(i)

On successful completion of the purging process, the standpipe shall be disconnected from the pipe and the pipe properly plugged off and all valve covers replaced.

(j)

The disturbed joints shall be tested for leakage.

Section 40/.....


Bldg Spec Page 40-1 SECTION 40 EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES, RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES

40.1

EATING ESTABLISHMENT Eating establishment shall include restaurants, eating houses, fast food and family restaurants.

40.1.1

Food Stalls, Kitchen And Wash Area (In Eating House)

40.1.1.1

Sanitary Installation All drain lines connecting floor traps to waste sumps and grease interceptor shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598:1995 and approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Diameter and Type of Drain Line 100mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe 150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe 150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe 150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe

From Floor Trap Waste Sump Waste Sump Grease Interceptor

To Waste Sump Waste Sump Grease Interceptor Inspection Chamber

All soil, waste and vent pipes serving food stalls and kitchen shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipes or as shown in the Drawings. The grease interceptor shall be constructed in accordance with MEWR drawings and requirements. The floor traps shall be of stoneware or vitrified clay type. 40.1.1.2

Water Installation All internal service/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02 and fittings complying with BS 864:Part 2 or BS EN 1254 all in accordance with Section 38 "Water Installation" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes complying with BS EN 1057.

40.1.1.3

Sinks Provide and install sinks to location as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel sink shall be of approved type complying with SS:40:1971. Provide and install to each bowl approved 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 and brass constant flow regulator rated not more than 8 litres per minute all or latest requirements by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB.

40.1.1.4

(a)

Single bowl stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 432mm x 350mm x 150mm deep.

(b)

Single bowl single drainer (left or right) stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1500mm x 500mm x 170mm deep.

(c)

Double bowl double drainer stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1800mm x 500mm x 170mm deep.

Stainless Steel Bowl Trough To Wash Area In Eating House Provide and install stainless steel double bowl trough to locations as shown in the Drawings. The stainless steel double bowl trough shall be of 1.626mm thick and the dimensions shall be 1800mm in length and 600mm in width. The bowl shall be 500mm x 450mm x 300mm deep. The whole trough shall be supported by 42mm diameter tubing with adjustable feet and 25mm diameter cross-rail all as shown in the Drawings.



Staff/Non Public Toilets

40.1.2.1

Sanitary Installation The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all clauses and subclauses under it. (a)

Pedestal WC Pans Use approved white vitreous china close-coupled washdown pedestal w.c. pan with vitreous china flushing cistern conforming to the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The plastic seat and cover with buffers hinging devices shall comply with SS 16:1985, except that plastic material shall not be used for hinging devices. The minimum thickness shall be 4.7mm for the seat and 6mm for the cover respectively.

(b)

Squatting WC Pans All squatting WC pans shall comply with SS378 and SS379 and other relevant standards set by NEA or PUB. In addition, provide a self closing delayed action tap (the flow rate and timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively) in the innermost wall of one of the squatting water closet compartment.

(c)

Urinal Bowls Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with stainless steel pipes, necessary fittings and accessories. High level flushing cisterns shall be vitreous china and shall comply with the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. Provide urinal trap to serve a maximum four bowl urinals and fix at least one flushing cistern for four bowl urinals in series.

40.1.2.2

Water Installation All water installation shall be as specified in Section 38 "Water Installation" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All internal services/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02 and fitting complying with BS 864:Part 2:1983. or BS EN 1254.

40.1.3

Public Toilets

40.1.3.1

Sanitary Installation The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all clauses and subclauses under it, and shall comply with the "Code of Practice on Sanitary Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilets", standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The Contractor shall submit samples for approval before commencement of work. (a)

Pedestal WC Pans Provide and install approved white vitreous china washdown pedestal wc pan with sensor operated flush valve. The rigid (heavy duty) plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging devices shall comply with SS 16:1985. Plastic material shall not be used for the hinging devices.



Public Toilets (Cont'd)

40.1.3.1

Sanitary Installation (Cont'd) (b)

Squatting WC Pans The squatting wc pans shall be of vitreous china complying with SS 379 with sensor operated flush valves. Provide squatting water closet, pans with raised foot rests. When it is technically not feasible to use flush valves, use white vitreous china flushing cistern with stainless steel pull chain. The flush pipe shall be made of stainless steel. A self closing delayed action tap shall be provided in the inner most wall of at least one of the squatting wc pans compartment.

(c)

Urinal Bowls Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with sensor operated flush valve, stainless steel pipes and fittings and accessories.

(d)

Washhand Basins The single supported approved basin shall be 620mm in length and 445mm in width. The approved vanity basin shall be 548mm in length and 396mm in width. Taps to all public washhand basins shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self closing delay action water saving spring tap complying with BS 5412 and standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.

(e)

Soap Dispenser Provide and install stainless steel AISI Grade 304 soap dispenser to every two washhand basin subject to a minimum of one soap dispenser. The sample shall be approved by the SO Rep before the installation. The capacity of soap dispenser shall be one litre minimum.

(f)

Litter Bin Supply one litter bin to each toilet. The bin shall be 230mm diameter (minimum) and 600mm high approved AISI Grade 304 stainless steel bin.

(g)

Toilet Paper Holder Provide and install semi-recessed 150mm x 150mm approved vitreous china toilet paper holder to each wc. The position shall be determined by the SO Rep.

(h)

Automatic Hand-Dryer Blower Provide and install an approved automatic hand dryer complete with electrical installation to each toilet.

40.1.3.2

Water Installation (a)

Service/Distribution Pipes And Fittings All internal service/distribution pipes shall be stainless steel pipes approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and to the requirements of BS EN 10312:02. The fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 and PUB requirements. All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes complying with BS EN 1057:1996.



Public Toilets (Cont'd)

40.1.3.2

Water Installation (Cont'd) (b)

Flush Valves to Public Toilets Unless otherwise stated, provide and install approved sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all water closets and urinals as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines on Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on Sanitary Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilets" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit application and obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to the installation of the flush valves. The flush valve shall be able to operate without sticking, whistling or causing water hammer. For sensor operated flush valves (battery operated), if required by PUB, engage a licensed electrical worker to ensure that the installation of sensor/electronic sensor unit complies with SS CP5 "Wiring of Electrical Equipments of Building" and other relevant regulations or code of practice. Each sensor unit shall only operate one flushing unit for a sanitary appliance. The sensor unit when installed shall not be affected by the operation of adjacent sensor units. The sensor unit's stable sensing area shall be adjusted for an activating distance that is as follows: (a) (b)

600mm for a urinal; and 900mm for a water closet

Flush valves for water closets shall incorporate approved check valves that comply with BS 5154 and approved vacuum breakers that comply with American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standard No. 1001. Every flush valve shall be controlled by an approved stopvalve to SS 75 unless it is provided with an integral shut-off device. All flush valves shall be so adjusted as to give a flush of not less than 2.5 litres and not more than 4.5 litres of water per stall of bowl urinal or not less than 8 litres and not more than 9 litres of water for water closets. Vacuum breaker of the flush valve shall be installed at least 1m above the floor level for squatting wc pan and at least 300mm above the rim of other types of water closet. The water supply pipes shall be sized to give a minimum dynamic pressure of 1.0 bar (or higher depending on the make of flush valve and type of sanitary appliance) at the inlet end of the flush valve. Flush valves shall not be directly connected to the service pipes at a height exceeding 112m reduced level (R.L.). The Licensed Plumber shall check and ensure there is sufficient head and low rate for effective operation of the flush valves. The minimum internal diameter of the flush pipe for water closet shall be 25mm. The concealed (battery operated) sensor-operated flush valves shall be recessed into the wall if the water service pipes are concealed. 40.1.3.3

Stainless Steel Pipe Rail (For Handicap) Provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets in accordance with the "Code on Barrier-free Accessibility in Buildings, 1990" and as shown in the Drawings. The grade of the stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the Drawings. The end of pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with the same grade of stainless steel capping all as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be rigid and secure tightly into the walls.



MARKET FACILITIES Market facilities shall include supermarkets, mini-supermarkets, market produce lock-up shops etc. The requirements for Staff Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1 "Eating Establishment" including all subclauses under it.

40.3

RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES Retail and services facilities shall include shoplets, precinct shops, shops, departmental stores, institutions/schools, Branch Office, Town Council Office and commercial complex. The requirements for Staff/Non-Public Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1 "Eating Establishment" including all subclauses under it.

40.4

MIRRORS Provide and fix 600mm x 600mm (minimum) x 6mm thick approved coppered back mirror in front of each wash hand basin or as shown. Mirrors shall be fixed on timber ground with chrome plated round head screw with capping.

40.5

WASHING TAPS FOR WASH AREAS/BIN CENTRES 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib taps and handles to BS 5412 with tread to fit rubber hose for washing shall be provided to locations as shown. Locking device shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.

40.6

BIB TAP TO BATH/WC IN SHOP'S LIVING QUARTERS Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 with UPVC tee and cap complying with SS 174 all as shown in the Drawings.

40.7

TAP FOR PUBLIC SHOWER Taps to all the public showers shall be self-closing delayed action shower tap. The flow rate and timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 15 seconds respectively.


Bldg Spec Page 41-1 SECTION 41 MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)

41.1

WATER SAVING TAPS FOR PUBLIC WASH HAND BASINS AND SHOWERS

41.1.1

Water Saving Taps For Public Wash Hand Basins Taps to all wash hand basins in staff and public toilets, in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor stadium, training stadium, training hall, bus interchange etc shall be 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action taps complying with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations, SSCP 48: Code of Practice for Water Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.

41.1.2

Water Saving Tap For Public Showers Taps to all the public showers and showers in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor stadium, training hall etc shall be of self-closing delayed action shower taps complying with the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minutes and 15 seconds respectively.

41.2

FLUSH VALVES Unless otherwise stated, provide and install sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all public toilets (water closets and urinals only) as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines on Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on Sanitary, Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilet" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit application and obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to installation of the flush valves.

41.3

SOAP TRAYS Soap trays shall be recessed white vitreous china 150mm x 150mm "Twyfords 3008" or other approved type, one to each shower compartment. Position of soap trays shall be determined by SO Rep.


Bldg Spec Page 42-1 SECTION 42 TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND TELEMONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

42.1

SCOPE OF WORK

42.1.1

Water Transfer Pumping Plants The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of transfer pumping system, based on the data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, switch gears, electrical wiring, control panel and connections and all necessary accessories. Details of proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All Works shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations, SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and other relevant Authorities and Standards.

42.1.2

Telemonitoring System The Works shall include the installation of telemonitoring system as specified in Clause 42.27 "Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System" including all subclauses under it.

42.2

42.3

PUMPROOM - GENERAL (a)

Water supply mains shall be brought into the building at the positions shown.

(b)

A suction (low level) tank shall receive water from the water supply main through an approved 100mm full bore pilot operated float valve. Suction pipes shall then be of individual feed to each pump-set. The pumps shall deliver water through a vertical rising main direct to the storage (high level) tank at the roof of the building.

(c)

The pipework shall incorporate appropriate valves and fittings as specified.

(d)

Floatless level control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks shall be arranged to start and stop the pumps on predetermined water levels in the tanks as specified.

(e)

Pumps (duty and standby) shall be operated by electric motors direct-coupled to them and started by suitable starters in the control panel.

(f)

The whole assembly within the pump room shall be laid out to permit ready access to all components: tanks, pipework, valves, pumps, motors, control panel, floatless level control electrodes and wiring for purposes of maintenance and repair. The control panel and pump sets shall be installed near to the entrance of pump room for this purpose.

APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Submit one set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Letter of Acceptance : (a)

Detailed proposal shall be submitted in the format as produced in Appendix A22 duly filled and signed by the Contractor.

(b)

Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the points of performance.



APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM (CONT'D) (c)

Three sets of fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii)

Piping and pumpset layout in pump room Position of control panel and floatless level control electrodes PUB water incoming pipe Rising main Sizes of all fittings Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings Mounting of pumpsets

Submit to the SO Rep, fully dimensioned final drawings of the above within two weeks after the installation is commissioned by the SO Rep.

42.4

DEVIATIONS FROM APPROVED DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. Seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by the SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way vary or relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to strength, performance or efficiency.

42.5

BUILDING-IN The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.

42.6

PUMPS All pumps shall be of horizontal spindle, single-stage, end suction centrifugal pumps or vertical multi-stage centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency of not less than 55%, driven by electric motors through suitably guarded flexible couplings. The whole unit shall be mounted on a common steel base and secured with galvanised steel plain washers, spring washers and double lock nuts. The pumpset foundation shall be properly grouted on complete installation. Galvanised steel bolts and nuts shall be used for mounting the pumpset. The casing of the end suction centrifugal pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved metal. The casing of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be of stainless steel, bronze or other approved metal. All internal surfaces of the pump (cast iron type) that come into contact with water shall be coated (fusion bonded) with an approved layer of non-toxic epoxy complying with SS 375:2001.The impeller shall be of bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear of the rotating parts. Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. The pump shall be of the approved type and able to deliver the required capacity of water based on the data given in Appendix A22.



DUCTILE IRON PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIAL CASTINGS All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. All pipes, fittings and special castings in the pump room and to the roof tanks shall be ductile iron complying with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545. All pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. The mixture shall be tested according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Pipe joints and fittings along any section shall be of the flanged type, the thickness and drilling of which shall comply with BS EN 545 type PN 16. Thickness of sealing compound between the flanged ends shall be at least 2mm. Galvanised steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be used for the installation. Ductile iron pipes, socket and spigot type complying with BS EN 545 is permissible only for vertical riser except that the joint immediately above roof shall be of flanged joint. All vertical risers shall run inside the buildings along the staircase landing where possible. All pipes which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by cork and sealed on the outer 12mm with approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be supported with built in clips spaced at maximum 2.7m centres. All pipes which pass through walls shall be insulated by neoprene material. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be supported with built in clips spaced at maximum 2.7m centres. For blocks with pumps requiring power more than 20kW, the delivery pipe from the transfer pumps which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by neoprene material of at least 20mm thickness. The pipe in the pump room shall be supported from the floor. Any pipe running outside the pump shall be supported with hangers equipped with neoprene padding. Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows : Size of Delivery Piping 100mm

42.8

Size of Suction Piping 80mm

VALVES An approved 100mm full bore pilot operated float valve shall be fitted directly to the incoming connecting pipe at the suction tank. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 14 bar and shall comply with BS 1212. The dimensions and the flange thickness shall comply with BS 4504. The pilot mechanism of the float operated valve shall be fully covered with acrylic material to prevent mosquito breeding. An approved 100mm globe valve shall be installed before the 100mm full bore float operated valve and at the vertical run of the incoming pipe inside the pump room. Globe valve shall be of the type complying with BS 1010. The valve seat shall be of rubber bonded. The internal surface of the valve body shall be coated with approved material. Gate valves and check valves shall be of the approved type used in high quality water works practice and shall comply with BS 5163 and BS 5153 respectively. The wedge of the gate valves used shall be of rubber bonded gate. The internal surface of valve body shall be coated with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high tensile brass or aluminium bronze or other approved. Gate valves shall have the directional arrow and the words "open" and "shut" cast on and shall be installed near the inlets and outlets of each suction low level tank and storage high level tank. The suction pipe of each pump shall be fitted with an 80mm gate valve followed by an 80mm rubber expansion joint. The delivery pipe shall be fitted with an 80mm rubber expansion joint, a 80mm spring loaded check valve and an 80mm gate valve. The check valve and gate valve shall be separated by a short pipe of 200mm in length. An 80mm to 100mm enlarger shall be provided between the 80mm pipe and 100mm rising main. An approved 100mm non-slam type check valve shall be fitted along the rising main in the pumproom followed by a 100mm gate valve. This check valve shall also be separated from the gate valve by a short pipe of 300mm in length. All 80mm and 100mm check valves shall be of approved non-slam silent spring loaded type (with stainless steel spring).



HIGH PRESSURE AND EXPANSION CONNECTION 80mm rubber expansion joint of approved type shall be used to connect the outlet of the pump and the delivery pipe and shall be flanged at both ends and be able to sustain a working pressure of not less than 16 bar. The rubber expansion joint shall be limited from expanding excessively in axial direction. The delivery pipe shall be supported by at least 2 no. of 50mm galvanised mild steel pipe and be properly secured to the floor or wall for this purpose. An 80mm rubber expansion joint shall be used to connect the suction pipe and the discharge pipe of each pump.

42.10

BENDS All bends used in the pipework shall be of 90 degree long bend flanged at both ends and shall be cement mortar lined internally in accordance with BS EN 545.

42.11

RESERVED

42.12

FLOAT OPERATED VALVE Position a 100mm float operated valve as indicated in the Drawings to allow full flow of water from PUB main.

42.13

POWER SUPPLY Power supply available for electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current.

42.14

MOTORS High efficiency electric motors of approved type shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous maximum rating. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.

42.15

MOTOR STARTERS The starters shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before its installation. The starters shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-buttons or be automatically activated by the control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks. The starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty pumpset shall be activated by normal level floatless control relay unit and the standby pumpset shall be activated by alarm and emergency level floatless control relay unit. The selection of duty or standby pumpsets shall be determined by a manual selector switch. Automatic duty change over relay shall also be provided to alternate standby and duty pumpsets automatically and shall be interconnected to a time setting device to cut off the operation of the pumpset during night time.



MOTOR STARTERS (CONT'D) (a)

Star-Delta Starter (For building blocks below 25-storey) For building blocks below 25-storey, the starters for motors shall be star-delta starters, capable of limiting current to 2½ times the full load current at (a) standstill (starting up the Plant) and at (b) changeover (when the starter automatically changes the connections from Star to Delta winding). Each starter shall have time relay, overload release, no volt release pilot lamp. The operating voltage of the control coil shall be 230V. The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. It shall be so designed such that under 16 operation hours per day, the Mechanical and Electrical Endurance is not less than 50,000 operations. A manufacture's certificate to this effect shall be produced when required.

(b)

Soft Starters (For building blocks with 25-storey & above) For building blocks 25-storey and above, the soft starters shall be designed to operate at 3-phase 400V 50 Hz and shall be suitable for starting/stopping 3-phase induction motor used for water pumping system. The soft starters shall provide soft acceleration during the starting of motor and soft deceleration during the stopping of motor. It shall be able to reset by itself automatically when power supply is resumed after power failure. Built-in fault indication lights shall also be incorporated in the soft starters to indicate the fault conditions The approved soft starters shall consist of three pairs of thyristors with full wave control and shall be designed for continuous operation above 40°C. The soft starters shall also be sized according to the full load current of the motor and shall comply to IEC 947-4-2 or equivalent as approved.

42.16

TIME SWITCH Connect digital time switch of approved type within the electric circuit, wired to control the pumping hours within the preset time. The time switch shall be able to operate on a 24 hour basis with a minimum of 150 hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure.

42.17

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS Floatless level control electrodes mounted on the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks in each building shall be connected directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tanks. These floatless level control electrodes shall be positioned near to the manhole of the tank and be easily accessible for maintenance. The floatless level control electrodes shall be installed on the storage tanks operating at Normal Demand Settings. The floatless level control electrodes shall be arranged to start and stop the pumpset at predetermined high and low levels. A floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank shall be used to provide over-riding control of the storage tank floatless level control relay units such that at a preset low water level in the suction tank, the storage tank floatless level control relay units will not start the pump. The floatless level control relay units shall be interconnected to the motor starters through the pumps' automatic change over relay. Separate floatless level control relay unit shall be installed for the alarm system and shall be set to activate the alarm device and standby pumpset when the water falls below a predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall also activate the alarm device and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level. The floatless level control relay unit shall be of the plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the electrodes.



FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS (CONT'D) Electrodes shall be stainless steel and be provided with adequate electrode separators. The ceiling roses and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "NL" and "EA" respectively. Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable for easy maintenance. Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep them as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power supply wiring. Provide wiring and conduits from the switchboard inside the pump-room to each of these floatless control relay units. All floatless control relay units shall be of the approved type.

42.18

NUMBER OF FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS Provide a total of three number of floatless level control relay units. Where storage tanks are divided into two or more separate tanks, at least two separate tanks shall be installed with floatless level control electrodes.

42.18.1

Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 1 (At Storage Tank Room) Two sets of electrodes for the normal level setting shall be connected so as to activate the starters independently and to activate the alarm and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level. The operating points of both sets of floatless level control electrodes shall be of the same setting.

42.18.2

Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 2 (At Storage Tank Room) Provide two sets of alarm and emergency electrodes to activate the alarm and standby pumpsets in case the water level falls below a predetermined level.

42.18.3

Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 3 (At Pumproom) Provide one set of electrodes for the suction tank to actuate a warning indicating light and override the operation of pumpsets when the water level in the suction tank (low level tank) falls below a predetermined level. Provide one set of electrodes to activate a warning indicating light and alarm when the level in the suction tank rises to a predetermined overflow level.

42.19

CONTROL PANEL Provide and install an approved control panel required to serve the pumproom as shown in the Drawings. Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall be near to the entrance of the pumproom. Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes.



CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D) Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation. The control panel shall contain the following : (a)

1 No. ON/OFF control switch.

(b)

1 No. Automatic/off/Manual Selector rotary switch for Auto and Manual operation as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".

(c)

2 No. Starters as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".

(d)

2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phase MCB unit for each starter.

(e)

2 Sets Manual "START"/"STOP" button switch for the starter with pilot lamps indicating "run" and "trip" as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".

(f)

1 No. Pump selector switch as described in Clause 42.17 "Floatless Level Control Relay Units".

(g)

1 No. Digital Time switch as described in Clause 42.16 "Time Switch".

(h)

1 No. Relay for reset of 'alarm bell' and 'light'.

(i)

1 No. Relay to cut off the warning device and pumpsets during night time.

(j)

1 No. Relay to activate overflow warning device.

(k)

2 No. Relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.

(l)

3 No. Relay to control the pumpsets.

(m)

3 No. Relays for testing of alarm bell and indicating panel lights.

(n)

1 No. Automatic change over relay.

(o)

1 No. Suction tank low level warning indicating panel light.

(p)

3 No. Alarm indicating panel light.

(q)

6 No. MCB (4A) units for control circuits.

(r)

3 No. Phase indicating panel light with MCB (2A) unit.

(s)

1 No. MCB (4A) unit for alarm circuit.

(t)

2 No. Hour-run counters for pumpsets.

(u)

1 No. Ammeter with appropriate scale and current transformer (C/T) if required.

(v)

1 No. Phase Selector Switch for Ammeter.

(w)

1 No. Test push button for alarm bell and indicating panel lights.

The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.



ELECTRICAL WIRING Install the cables from the electrical mains isolator in the pumproom. Internal cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 Phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes. Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The trunking shall be treated with approved anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down. The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB Code of Practice CP 5. Run conduits for the floatless level control relay unit wiring inside the building and along the staircase landing. Provide an inspection joint for every 10 metres run of conduit. Where exposed to rain, the inspection boxes, elbows and tees shall be sealed. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level. All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between motors and junction boxes. All non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

42.21

ALARM AND EMERGENCY DEVICE Alarm device shall be turned on by the alarm and emergency level control relay units at the storage (high level) tank and the level control relay unit at the suction (low level) tank. This alarm device shall be in the form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the pumproom and near the entrance. The bell shall be weather-proof and of heavy duty type. The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep. The alarm bell shall be cut off during night time by the time switch so that only the emergency start warning light on the switchboard panel shall function at night when the water level falls below the 'emergency level'. Provide a re-set button for the alarm and the warning device. The location of the warning device shall be approved by the SO Rep. Provide a shield if the SO Rep deemed necessary all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The design of the shield shall be approved by the SO Rep.



INSTALLATION OF PUMP SETS The water pumpsets shall be properly installed onto the concrete foundation. The 16 mm high tensile steel foundation bolts shall be cast into the concrete to a minimum depth of : (a) (b)

100 mm for motor up to 7.5 KW 150 mm for motor above 7.5 KW

The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pumpsets are installed according to standard procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to approval by the SO Rep. The pumpset nearest to the pump room door shall be legibly marked with permanent lettering and numbering of "P1" and the other "P2", or as directed by the SO Rep. The pumpsets shall be isolated from the foundation by anti-vibration mounting between the base plate and the foundation. Provide mechanical insulators to isolate the pumpset from the floor if the vibration is still substantial. All pumpsets shall be properly aligned and levelled. The pumpsets shall be isolated from the suction and delivery pipes by rubber expansion joints as specified in Clause 42.9 "High Pressure And Expansion Connection". The outlet of the suction pipe shall be set in line with the inlet of the pump and the inlet of the delivery pipes in line with the outlet of the pump. The delivery pipes shall be properly supported and secured by rigid steel supports. Check the location of the switch board. Should this location be not at an optimum position, inform the SO Rep immediately. All bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting the pumpsets shall be of galvanised steel.

42.23

VIBRATION AND NOISE The vibration and noise generated by pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers in the adjacent flats. Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce vibration and sound.

42.24

INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by the SO Rep during progress of the Works.

42.25

STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million part of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.

42.26

TESTING OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the testing of performance and installation of the transfer pumping system. Furnish the data on transfer pumping system as produced in Appendix A23 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer pumping system. All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.



TELEMONITORING SYSTEM FOR TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM

42.27.1

Scope Of Work The installation of the telemonitoring system shall involve the production and installation of the telemonitoring control panel in the transfer-pump room at the ground level and the laying of electrical cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring system in the lift room A at the roof-top. Should there be a second transfer-pump room in the apartment block, provide and install a separate telemonitoring control panel in the second pump room and lay separate electrical cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring system in the lift room B at the roof-top. The Works shall also include the modifications to the control panel(s) of the transfer pumps and the necessary connections between relevant control panels.

42.27.2

Circuit The circuitry shall be as shown in the Drawings. (A)

Inputs The fault signals to be monitored shall be input from the control panel of the transfer pumps. The following inputs are based on negative logic, directly controlling the corresponding source light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this Clause including all subclauses under it). Terminal Nil 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Function System Power on Battery Control Supply Power Failure Red Phase Power Failure Yellow Phase Power Failure Blue Phase Power Failure Spare Emergency and Alarm Start Pump No. 1 Trip Pump No. 2 Trip Roof Tank Overflow Repair Technician's Key Switch On Spare

The following inputs have their related source LED controlled by the processor. Terminal 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

BLDG12/S42.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Function Suction Tank Overflow Suction Tank Low Level Duty Pump Failure Time Switch Control Starter 1 Starter 2 Spare Spare


Circuit (Cont'd) (B)

Outputs The various fault conditions are to be grouped into 7 levels as follows : Source 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 -

Condition System Power on Battery Control Supply Power Failure Red Phase Power Failure Yellow Phase Power Failure Blue Phase Power Failure Spare Emergency and Alarm Start Pump No. 1 Trip Pump No. 2 Trip Roof Tank Overflow Repair Technician's Key Switch On Spare Suction Tank Overflow Suction Tank Low Level Duty Pump Failure Spare Total Failure

Level 5 5 5 5 5 0 6 4 4 3 0 0 1 2 4 0 7

The circuit shall generate three signals indicating the fault level from 0 to 7 in the form of a 3-bit binary code; fault level 7 has the highest priority and fault level 0 is the no-fault condition. Fault level indication is based on the source (not memory) fault condition being on. If more than one fault condition is present, the highest fault level shall be indicated. Whenever the fault level changes, fault level 0 (no fault) shall be indicated for 30 secs before the new fault level is indicated. These three signals shall drive three relays, R1, R2, and R3 in the lift motor room as well as three LED in the control panel. When the repair technician's key switch is on, the corresponding LED, which is directly controlled by the processor, should be on. This signal shall drive a separate relay R4 in the lift motor room. The circuit shall function such that when there is no fault all the relays R1, R2, R3 and R4 are energized. Therefore, a by-pass or override switch shall be provided to keep the four relays energized when the telemonitoring system is to be isolated for maintenance.

42.27.3

The Control Panel Based on the circuit described above, the telemonitoring system control panel shall consist of the following : (1) (2) (3) (4)

Battery Compartment and Battery Logic Board Indicator Board Power Supply Section

and are to be laid out in a cabinet as shown in the Drawings. All items shall be properly secured to the cabinet with means that allow ease of detachment if necessary. The cabinet is to be manufactured from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. It is to provide IP33 protection, according to BS 5490, whilst allowing for sufficient ventilation. The design and construction must give easy access to all parts of the control panel so as to minimize any hindrance to maintenance work. The indicator board shall be mounted such that there is a clear view of the LED and the labels when the cabinet is closed.

BLDG12/S42.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


The Control Panel (Cont'd) The entire door arrangement is to be neat and have the following features : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

a perspex window for viewing the status of the monitored faults; a key lock to secure the control panel; a key switch to register the arrival time of the repair technician; an indicating light for the supply power on, and an indicating LED for the override switch on.

Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall be near to the transfer pump control panel.

42.27.4

Battery The back-up battery shall be of the sealed lead-acid types and shall provide back-up power supply for at least 12 hours.

42.27.5

Printed Circuit Board The layout for the printed circuit boards (hereinafter referred to as "PCB" for the purpose of this clause including sub-clauses under it) shall be as shown in the Drawings. All items used shall be PCB mounted. All connections made between the boards and power supply shall be of the plugged-in type. (a)

The Logic Board The logic board shall contain the plug-in connections for all incoming lines from the control panel of the transfer pump system and outgoing lines to the lift room. There shall be as much separation as possible between the high and low voltage lines in the PCB. The board shall contain a Motorola MC68705P3 microprocessor or other approved. The pin usage of the microprocessor is as follows : Port A

:

Port A is used as the input/output data bus. All 8 lines are connected to the 3 input buffers (74LS244) and the 3 output latches (74LS373).

Port B

:

Port B is used as the outputs and chip select lines. Pin

Function

0 1 2 3 4

Memory Error (0 = on) Flash Output (square wave of 2 Hz) Chip select for Memory LED 9 to 16 Chip select for Memory LED 1 to 8 Chip select for Fault Level LED, Presence of Repair Technician and Source LED 13 to 16 Chip select for Inputs 1 to 8 Chip select for Inputs 9 to 12 and Timer DIP Switches Chip select for Inputs 13 to 20

5 6 7

*Chip Select for Inputs = 0 (1 = Hi-Z) *Chip Select for Outputs = 1 (0 = latched)

BLDG12/S42.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Printed Circuit Board (Cont'd) (a)

The Logic Board (Cont'd) Port C

: Port C is used for miscellaneous function. Pin

Function

0 1 2 3

INPUT : Lamp Test (0 = on) INPUT : Clear Memory (0 = on) OUTPUT : Unused OUTPUT : A square wave of 4 Hz is generated to hold a watchdog timer in a triggered but not time-out state. The timer is used to reset the processor should it ever hang. This square-wave output shall be generated only if the processor is executing the program correctly. Once the processor hangs, this output shall stop, causing the watchdog to reset the processor upon time-out. The resetting process shall not cause any alteration of memory data already present.

In order to prevent corrupted memory data from being taken as correct, a suitable means shall be employed to constantly verify the data in memory and to turn on the "MEMORY ERROR" LED once the data is found to be invalid. A suitable means shall also be employed to ensure that the input data read is valid, thus preventing any spuring data from being used. On the logic board, two push buttons, "CLEAR" and "LAMP TEST", shall be provided. The "LAMP TEST" pushbutton shall cause all processor-controlled LED to turn on when pressed. Normal indication shall resume when the button is released. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is pressed momentarily, all timers above 5-sec duration are caused to time-out. This is to assist in testing and trouble-shooting. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is held down for 2 secs, all the "Memory" fault conditions are cleared, including the "MEMORY ERROR" condition. (b)

The Indicator Board There shall be a green LED, indicating "SYSTEM POWER ON" which is to be directly controlled by the 5-V DC power supply, three yellow LED, indicating the binary "FAULT LEVEL CODE", a green LED, indicating the "PRESENCE OF REPAIR TECHNICIAN", and a red LED, indicating "MEMORY ERROR". There shall also be two red LED for each fault. One of them shall be controlled directly or indirectly by the source and the other solely by the processor. Both LED shall be energized on the occurrence of their corresponding fault. However, once the fault has been rectified, the source LED shall be de-energized whilst the processor-controlled LED shall remain energized until the memory is cleared manually. "SUCTION TANK OVERFLOW" indication must be delayed for 2 seconds. This is to prevent false and/or intermittent indication. "SUCTION TANK LOW LEVEL" indication shall be delayed for the number of minutes set by the "TIMER" DIP switches. The range of this 4-bit timer shall be 0 to 15 minutes. "DUTY PUMP FAILURE" indication shall be on only when the logic condition (Duty Pump Failure Input AND Time Switch Control AND NOT Suction Tank Low Level AND NOT Starter 1 AND NOT Starter 2) is positive. The Suction Tank Low Level condition shall be taken after the preset delay. If no other fault condition is present, the "EMERGENCY AND ALARM START" condition shall be reset when the repair technician is present and for 1 hour after his departure regardless of its input status. Should another fault come on the indication shall revert to normal. This forced reset shall be cancelled 1 hour after the technician's departure. Clear labelling of the faults for each LED shall also be provided on the board.

BLDG12/S42.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Power Supply Section This shall include all items necessary to provide a safe, uninterrupted power supply to the telemonitoring system and for charging the back-up battery.

42.27.7

Electrical Wiring The power supply to the system shall be from the blue phase of the transfer pump system after the isolator. Cables and electrical wiring carrying 230V shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal cross-sectional area and PVC insulated to SS 358. There shall be seven cables, with 23 strands of 0.2mm diameter and PVC insulated, connecting the control panel to the four relays (to be provided by the Contractor) in Lift Room A at the roof-top. Should there be two transfer-pump rooms, the Contractor shall run two sets of cables and conduits. The second set of cables and conduits shall run to Lift Room B at the roof-top. The colour for these seven cables shall be red, orange, pink, black, light blue, purple and green. The locations of the termination of the cables and conduits shall be subjected to the location of the lift telemonitoring system and shall be approved by the SO Rep. All cables and electrical wiring shall be carried in their own conduits. The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits which run from the control panel to the lift room shall be 20mm in diameter. The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high shall be provided to encase the conduits at every floor level. All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. The conduits shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. Where applicable, the number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the PSB Code of Practice CP 5. All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

42.27.8

Design Work All design Works necessary in producing the control panel shall be based on the requirements aforementioned and is subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All designs, including the PCB artworks, resulting thereof shall be the sole property of the Employer. Two sets of the relevant drawings shall be submitted if requested by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

42.27.9

Testing Of Installation The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep one month before the completion of the installation for the testing of the performance and installation of the telemonitoring system. The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A24 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system. All Defect notified shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S42.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD (TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM) The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing and maintenance to the Transfer Pumping System and for providing an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses under it.

42.28.1

Making Good Defects And Leakages During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defect in the Plant and equipment. The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out under this Clause including all sub-clauses under it. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system.

42.28.2

Fortnightly And Monthly Inspection All parts and equipment comprising the complete transfer pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A25. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the fortnightly and monthly inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for fortnightly and monthly inspections upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the pump room after completion of each inspection. Items in the check-list for fortnightly inspection shall include : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n)

General condition of the pumprooms Correct setting of time switch Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Alarm bell and bulb Suction tank electrode and control module Motor running current 80mm check valve 80mm gate valve Alignment of couplings 100mm check valve 100mm gate valve Ball float valve

Items required to be inspected monthly shall include all items required for the fortnightly inspection specified in the foregoing requirements in addition to the following : (o) (p) (q) (r) (s)

BLDG12/S42.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Motor insulation Pump mechanical seal Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable) Contactors and relays Storage tank electrode and control module


Efficient Call-Back Service Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints such as no water supply or triggering of the alarm bell of the Transfer Pumping System shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met. Provide a set of standby pump to keep the transfer pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps are taken back to the workshop for repairs. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c)

respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the fortnightly and monthly inspection of the transfer pumping system;

the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the transfer pumping system or to carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the transfer pumping system due to or arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.

42.29

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defect. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within fourteen days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.


Bldg Spec Page 43-1 SECTION 43 BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

43.1

SCOPE OF WORK The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of booster pumping system, based on the data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, flow sensors, switch gears, electrical wiring, control panels and all necessary accessories. Details of the proposed booster pump installation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All Works shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP 48: Code of Practice for Water Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements

43.2

APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM Submit one set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Letter of Acceptance : (a)

Detailed proposal complete with information as produced in Appendix A26 duly filled and signed by the Contractor.

(b)

Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the point(s) of performance.

The Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by the SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way affect vary or relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to strength, performance, efficiency or other aspect.

43.3

BUILDING-IN The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member supports and attend to the work all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.

43.4

BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS All booster pumps of approved type shall be of vertical in-line centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency, driven by totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) electric motors except otherwise specified in the Specifications. The casing of the pump shall be of stainless steel, bronze or other approved metal. The impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of the stainless steel type and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear of the rotating parts. The shaft seal shall be of the mechanical seal type. Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. The make of the pumps shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep. The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type and with at least Class B insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous maximum rating. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands. The power supply for the electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current. 230 volts single phase motor shall be used as and when directed and approved by the SO Rep. The power of the motor shall not be more than 1 kW.



BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS (CONT'D) Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the booster pumps shall be as follows : No. of Dwelling Unit served by Booster Pump

Specified Flow Rate (l/s)

Pressure Head (m)

Shut-off Head (m)

20 or below Above 20

3 5

9 9

Not less than 12 Not less than 12

The pumpsets shall be marked with permanent letterings "P1" & "P2" respectively.

43.5

PIPE AND FITTINGS All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. All stainless steel pipes, fittings and accessories shall conform to BS 4127:Part 2. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be internally cement lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Test the mixture according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Apply two coats of PUB approved epoxy to the portion where cement lining is not possible. Pipe joints, fittings and special tees, for all ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level shall be ductile iron flanged type. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545. The internal and external surfaces of the stainless steel pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipes shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted. Unless otherwise specified, use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply. The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS 864:Part 2 and all PUB latest requirements. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated by neoprene material. All pipes shall avoid running directly above any bedroom of a dwelling unit. Otherwise, noise/vibration abatement device shall be provided. Support pipes with stainless steel supports and clips or concrete supports. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated and sealed with approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be supported with built in stainless steel/supports and clips spaced at 1m centres. Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows : Size of Suction Piping Size of Discharge Piping Size of By-Pass Piping

-

42mm 42mm 15mm

Connect suction pipe of each pump from the 100mm interconnecting pipe of roof storage tanks and connect the discharge pipe of each pump to the 100mm distribution main which serves the topmost 3 storeys only. No mechanical tee shall be used for connections between suction pipe and interconnecting pipe and between discharge pipe and distribution main. Provide end thrust supports at both ends and bends of 100mm distribution main according to the Drawings. All bolts, nuts and washers used for the ductile iron pipes for installation shall be galvanised steel whilst those for the stainless steel pipes and supports shall be stainless steel of similar grade.

43.6

VALVES Provide suction pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Fit the delivery pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore spring loaded check valve and 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Provide the bypass pipe with a 15mm stop cock. All valves used shall comply with PUB Water Supply Regulations.



LABELLING STICKERS Stick aluminium foil stickers of length 75mm and width 40mm bearing the words "DO NOT OPEN" onto the 100mm gate valves at the draw-out pipes from storage tanks to the 100mm distribution main serving the top-most 3 storeys. The base colour of the aluminium foil stickers shall be in white and the wordings shall be in red. The dimensions of the wordings shall be of height 10mm and width 6mm and the line thickness 1mm. Submit a sample of the stickers to the SO Rep for approval.

43.8

POWER SUPPLY Power supply to the booster pumps and control system at the roof storage (high level) tank room shall be connected from the electrical mains isolator in the roof storage tank room.

43.9

MOTOR SOFT-STARTERS Soft-starters for motors shall be of the type as approved by the SO Rep. The soft-starters shall provide means for the soft-start and soft-stop of the motors automatically. The operating voltage of the soft-starter shall be 230V. Both soft-start time and soft-stop time of the soft-starter shall be set at 3 seconds. Each soft-starter shall be designed to operate intermittently during the 24 hours of operation per day. The soft-starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty and standby booster pumps shall be actuated by flow sensors and floatless level switch. Selection of duty or standby booster pumps shall be determined by a selector switch. Provide automatic duty change over relay to alternate standby and duty booster pumps and it shall be interconnected to a flow sensor to start and stop the operation of the booster pumps according to actual water demand.

43.10

FLOW-SENSORS The flow sensor shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep. A flow sensor shall be installed at the central discharge pipe of the booster pumps. Monitoring head of the sensor shall be of stainless steel. The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 67. The voltage of the flow sensor shall be 24V DC. The flow rate range shall be set to 115mm per seconds (adjustable range : 10mm per second to 2m per second).

43.11

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT Floatless level control electrodes mounted on each storage (high level) tank shall be connected directly to the relay unit mounted inside the control panel. Position the floatless level control electrodes near to the manhole of the tank for easy maintenance. Arrange the floatless level control electrodes to start and stop the pumpset at pre-determined levels. Interconnect the floatless level switch to the motor soft-starters through the pumps' automatic change over relay. The floatless level control relay unit shall be of the plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the electrodes. Provide stainless steel electrodes with adequate electrodes separators. The ceiling roses and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "BP". Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable for maintenance. Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the switch board panel and keep them as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit which contains the power supply wiring. All floatless control relay units shall be of the approved type.



CONTROL PANEL Provide and install approved control panel required to serve the booster pumpsets. Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the roof storage tank room for the wall mounted control panel and shall be near to the booster pumpsets subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The construction shall be such that it allows for ready and easy access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes. Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation. The control panel shall contain the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m)

1 No. Rotary selector switch for Auto selection 1 No. Rotary key selector switch with 3 points selection 2 No. Soft-Starters as specified in the Clause 43.9 "Motor Soft-Starters" 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phases MCB unit for starters 1 No. Delay Timer with 0 to 6 seconds setting 1 No. Timer with 0 to 30 minutes setting 6 No. Relays to control the pumpsets 1 No. Automatic change over relay 5 No. MCB unit for control circuits 3 No. Phase indicating panel light 2 No. Pump "run" indicating panel light 2 No. Pump "trip" indicating panel light 1 No. Low level warning indicating panel light

The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

43.13

ELECTRICAL WIRING Install cables from the electrical mains isolator in roof storage tank room or at other locations. Internal cables and wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, GS conduit (Class 4), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. In the event that the conduit comes in contact with any structural steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes. Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The trunking shall be treated with approved anticorrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.



ELECTRICAL WIRING (CONT'D) The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn shall comply with SS CP 5. Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing equipment of the `Megger' type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Where wiring is to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between the motors and junction boxes. Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.

43.14

INSTALLATION OF BOOSTER PUMPS Install booster pumpsets on the floor/wall and support and secure them with stainless steel or concrete supports along the pipes closed to suction and discharge side of the booster pumpsets. Install pressure gauge of appropriate scales at the discharge pipe of each booster pump. The pressure gauge shall comply with BS1780 for measuring gauge pressure. The pressure gauge shall be marked with the manufacturer's trademark or brand name. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the booster pumps are installed according to standard procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Check the location for the switch board. Inform the SO Rep immediately should this location be not at an optimum position.

43.15

VIBRATION AND NOISE Vibration and noise generated by the pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers immediately below. Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce the vibration and sound.

43.16

STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.

43.17

INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by the SO Rep during of progress of the Works.



TESTING OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing the performance and installation of the booster pumping system. Furnish data on booster pumping system as set out in Appendix A27 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster pumping system. All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.

43.19

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD (BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM) The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing and maintenance to the booster pumping system and for providing an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses under it.

43.19.1

Making Good Defects And Leakages During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and installation, replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by reasons of Defect in the Plant and equipment. The Contractor shall have a Supervisor-in-Charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out under this clause including all sub clauses under it. The Supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of the booster pumping system and the workmen shall also be skillful in the service, maintenance and repair of booster pumping system.

43.19.2

Monthly Inspection Maintain and inspect all parts and equipment comprising the complete booster pumping system strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A28. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. The Contractor shall always arrange for a representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these visits. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a maintenance schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. Items in the Check-list shall include : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)


Flow sensors Soft-starters, relays and control module Power supply selector switch in "On" position Control panel indicating lights Electrodes in storage tanks Motor running current Motor insulation Pump mechanical seal Pressure gauges 40mm check valve and ball stop valves Thrust supports at distribution main


Efficient Call-Back Service Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. Attend to all complaints immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his Maintenance Supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any call-back service can be met. Provide a set of standby pump to keep the booster pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps are taken back to the workshop for repairs. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c)

respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the monthly inspection of the booster pumping system;

the Employer may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the booster pumping system or carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the booster pumping system arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.

43.20

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after the joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. Rectify all outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying complete rectification of Defect. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect in the list within fourteen days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

Section 44/.....


Bldg Spec Page 44-1 SECTION 44 DRY / WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION

44.1

GENERAL It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works. For buildings under construction, dry/wet rising mains shall be provided according to the requirements of the FSSD. The Contractor shall work closely with the SO Rep to ensure that all requirements for the provision of rising mains are complied with during the construction stage. All rising mains (dry and wet) shall be installed progressively as the building gains height and made operational for all storeys (except the uppermost three storeys) as soon as the uppermost completed storey reaches habitable height of 24m. Dry rising mains if used in lieu of wet rising mains in the initial stage shall be converted to wet rising mains when the uppermost completed storey reaches habitable height of 60m. All breeching inlets, landing valves, water tanks and pumps where required shall be provided and made readily operational. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from FSSD, SO Rep, and/or officers from HDB (Technical Department) to carry out any inspection and testing during the construction and completion stages. Charges shall be imposed on the Contractor under the “Nuisance and Irregularities” clause for any non-compliance with the FSSD’s requirements detected during site inspection by FSSD, SO Rep and/or HDB (Technical Department). The Contractor is also subject to action taken by FSSD under the relevant Act/Regulations. The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered under BCA registration head of ME06 (Fire Prevention & Protection System) for the Works. The Contractor shall test and commission the works to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, FSSD and/or the appointed RI. Upon the final completion of the works, the Contractor shall prepare all necessary test reports & certificates to be endorsed by the SO Rep and submitted to HDB (Technical Department). HDB (Technical Department) reserves the right to audit the completed works and the Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for the inspection when requested.

44.2.1

Scope Of Work (a)

Dry rising main shall be installed in building where any floor is at a height beyond 10m and not exceeding 60m above the ground level. The dry rising main shall be complete with landing valve at every storey, breeching inlet and breeching inlet cabinet (where applicable). The minimum nominal bore of a dry rising main shall be :

(b)

(i)

100mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main does not exceed 45m in height. The rising main shall be complete with 2 way breeching inlet.

(ii)

150mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main exceed 45m in height. The rising main shall be complete with 4 way breeching inlet.

For building which is more than 60m, wet rising main shall be provided according to SS CP 29 and the requirements as shown in the Drawings. Fire intercom system shall be provided between the pump rooms of the transfer pumps and the fire pumps. The Contractor shall provide all technical data as shown in Appendix A29.


Bldg Spec Page 44-2

44.2.2

Rules And Regulations Ensure that the installation of dry/wet rising main system is in accordance with the latest requirements of the following : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Building Control Act and the Regulations made thereunder; Public Utilities Act, and the Regulations made thereunder; Professional Engineers Act; Fire Safety Act; SS CP 29; Any other relevant rules, regulations and by-laws.

In cases of discrepancies between the various standards, the local standards shall prevail. 44.2.3

Material Material, appliances and components shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Singapore Standards, British Standards or their equivalent. Particular items shall comply with the following requirements or their equivalent : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)

44.2.4

Ball Valves Boxes for landing valves Breeching inlets Landing valves Pipes Pipe fittings Pipe and valve flanges Pressure gauges Gate valves Starting switches (automatic) Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols

BS 1212 : Part 1, 2 or 3 BS 5041 : Part 4, 5 BS 5041 : Part 3 BS 5041 : Part 1, 2 BS 1387, ASTM A120 BS 1740 BS 10 or BS 4504 BS 1780 BS 5163 BS 587 BS 5499 : Part 1

Quality Of Goods And Materials The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the relevant Authorities and shall also comply with the relevant Code of Practice as stipulated. All materials used shall be of the approved type unless otherwise specified. Where products are manufactured under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not be necessary unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep shall be consulted when in doubt. Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.

44.2.5

Approval/Submission Of Drawings And Details During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all wet and dry riser routes, legends and all other related mechanical works based on actual site installations for the production of asbuilt drawings.

44.2.6

Installation (a)

Seek approval from the SO Rep before any hacking work is to be done.

(b)

For rising main pipe and down-comer (fire fighting) through the floor slabs, provide concrete curb around the rising main pipe. The concrete curb shall be 100mm high and surrounding the pipe. Casting of the concrete curb shall be done together with re-casting of concrete slab as one single operation. The concrete curb and slab shall be water tight.

(c)

The Works shall include hacking, coring, drilling etc, as well as re-casting the concrete slab. The Contractor shall provide and cast water-proof concrete slab of not lesser strength than the original slab.



Damage To Existing Roof Structures And Roofing System For Works to existing building blocks, the Contractor shall liaise with the relevant Branch Office or Town Council for a joint inspection together with the SO Rep to determine the existing roof condition before the commencement of the Works. All defects noted shall be recorded in writing and verified by the parties concerned before the commencement of the Works. Upon the Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing system, to replace any broken or cracked secondary roof slab and carry out all the repairs and reinstatement Works to the damaged waterproofing membrane and roof structure. During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall, upon verbal or written notification by the SO Rep, engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing system, to repair immediately any leakage in the roof caused by the Contractor.

44.3.1

Pipeworks & Fittings (a)

General Pipework for dry/wet rising mains shall be galvanised steel conforming to BS 1387 or ASTM A120 and BS 1740. Tubes/pipes and fittings used shall be suitable for pressures up to 21 bars. Mill certificates shall be produced on request to countercheck with the heat numbers of tubes/pipes at the Site. All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the pipes connected. Elbows shall be used, where practicable, in preference to bends; square elbows shall not be permitted. Valves used shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. Valves used shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. All fittings/valves used shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system working pressure. All valves shall be kept securely strapped with padlock. All underground pipework shall be of ductile iron cement lined or other approved material. Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to ensure venting and draining. The clearance between pipework and wall and any other fixtures shall be as shown in the construction detail of service duct for dry/wet rising main. Joints shall not be embedded in any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be embedded in the structure of floors. Where pipework passes through walls, sleeves shall be provided. Sleeves shall be of the same metal as the pipe. The space between pipework and sleeve shall be plugged with an approved sealant. All entry and exit holes to or from a building for pipework shall be sealed and plugged. The sealant shall be mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through a large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not lesser than 6mm thick shall be built into the wall of the hole or duct; the service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate and the space between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged.

(b)

Pipe Joints All piping shall be installed by means of flanged fittings, mechanical pipe couplings or other approved means. Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. Flanged joints shall be made with flat ring gaskets suitable for the pressure and temperature and extending to the inside of the bolt circles. Mechanical pipe couplings shall be self-centring and engage and lock in place the grooved or shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps shall consist of two or more metal castings holding in place a composition water sealing gasket so designed that the internal water pressure increases the watertightness of the seal. The coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two or more heat treated carbon steel bolts and nuts. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's latest specifications. The entire coupling installation shall be in accordance with the latest manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination of fittings, gaskets and grooves.


Bldg Spec Page 44-4

44.3.1

Pipeworks & Fittings (Cont’d) (b)

Pipe Joints (Cont’d) Couplings and fittings used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29.

(c)

Pipe Supports Typical pipework hangers for the dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system shall be as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipework on main load bearing members of the structure. The method of support shall be done according to the practice in the industry subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Rising main support shall be located at every storey. Horizontal pipe runs shall be provided with hangers spaced at a maximum distance of 4m.

(d)

Painting Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted in accordance with the provisions of Section 23. All pipework shall be stencilled with directional arrows of minimum 200 x 30mm in size. A sample showing the pipework painting and welded flange shall be provided to the SO Rep for approval.

44.3.2

Breeching Inlet Provide inlets with instantaneous male couplings for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose to each rising main with a two-way breeching inlet for a 100mm, or 4 way breeching inlet for a 150mm diameter rising main, at a level of about 760mm above ground level. Each breeching inlet shall conform with the requirements of BS 5041:Part 3. Enclose all inlets in a rust-proof steel inlet box with glass front. Position the inlet box with its lower edge between 400mm and 600mm above ground level. The position of inlets shall be indicated on inlet box using appropriate signs in accordance with BS 5499: Part 1 and using a letter height of at least 50mm. Inlets shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains. The inlet box shall be installed with key lock. Where more than 1 stack are provided for the rising main, the labelling of the rising main shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide all pipework of rising main that falls below inlet box level with an additional 25mm drain valve at the lowest point of the pipework, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length of flexible tubing (fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the valve) to conduct water from the valve to a suitable drain. Where such a low level drain is fitted, provide a permanent notice in 25mm (minimum) block letters of a suitable colour on a contrasting background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading 'DRY RISING MAIN - DRAIN VALVE' or 'WET RISING MAIN -DRAIN VALVE'. Provide another permanent notice in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates mentioned in BS 5041: Part 5, reading 'LOW LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN .........' (state location of the valve). The low level drain valve shall be kept securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.

44.3.3

Landing Valve Provide landing valve with an instantaneous female coupling for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose for each rising main as shown in the Drawings. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove items vulnerable to be stolen such as handwheel, blank caps, chain, etc from the landing valves which have already been installed. The Contractor shall deliver these items for storage at a place to be decided by the SO Rep. No claim for such Works shall be allowed as all costs and expenses for such work are deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. The Superintending Officer's decision on which items are considered vulnerable to be stolen shall be final binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The landing valve shall be kept securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.


Bldg Spec Page 44-5

44.3.3

Landing Valve (Cont’d) (a)

Location Provide landing valves at a height with its lowest point between 760mm and 1m above the floor level.

(b)

Recesses And Enclosures For Landing Valves Enclose landing valves for rising mains within a duct as shown in the Drawings. Where a landing valve is in an open recess, duct or alcove, and where a landing valve of a rising main is enclosed in a box, the opening giving access to the landing valve shall not be lesser than 150mm clearance on both sides and not lesser than 230mm below the centre line of the outlet of the landing valve and not lesser than 250mm clearance above the handwheel. The depth of the opening shall not be greater than is necessary, and the front edge of the female coupling of the landing valve shall not be more than 75mm behind the face of the door. Allow adequate space around the valve to permit easy maintenance and testing. Signplate in block letters of height not less than 50mm with the words 'DRY RISING MAIN OUTLET', 'WET RISING MAIN OUTLET' or `DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) OUTLET' for the respective rising mains shall be mounted on the door. Landing valves shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet rising mains and downcomers (fire fighting).

(c)

Anti-Theft Device Landing valves are to be equipped with means to prevent easy removal of the ear knobs and the plastic covers. Such measures shall be in the form of a 3mm thick brass cap duct cover & a 3mm x 220mm carbon steel chain. The brass cap shall be tightly fit into the ear knob to prevent easy access to the bolt & nut securing the ear knob. The cover shall be secured to the landing valve by the carbon steel chain. The SO Representative reserves the right to request a sample for approval purpose.

44.3.4

Automatic Air Release Valve For Rising Mains A suitable automatic air release valve shall be provided at the highest point in each rising main to permit air in the pipe to discharge to atmosphere when water is pumped in at ground level. The automatic air release valve shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats and guides, and non-corrodible valves and seats.

44.3.5

Electrical Earthing Of Rising Mains Rising mains shall be electrically earthed as shown in the Drawings. Joints which do not provide electrical continuity shall be bonded. All the rising mains that are situated in the vicinity of any lightning conductor, shall be bonded to the lightning conductor in accordance with the requirements of the code on lightning protection.

44.3.6

Drain Valves Provide each breeching inlet with a drain valve in the form of a 25mm gate valve complying with the requirements of BS 5154, rating PN 16. For ease of attaching a drain hose, the drain valve outlet shall be positioned so that it faces in the same direction as, and is at a lower level than, the inlet connections to the breeching inlet. The outlet of the drain valve shall have 25mm male threads complying with the requirements of BS 21, and shall be fitted with a female blank cap and chain.

44.3.7

Blank Caps Provide each inlet with a female instantaneous blank cap acceptable to FSSD. Attach every blank cap to the breeching inlet and landing valve by a suitable lug, s-hook and chain.


Bldg Spec Page 44-6

44.3.8

Signboard The breeching inlets shall be identified by an appropriate sign reading `DRY' or 'WET RISING MAIN'. Where the inlets are not readily visible from the outside, a sign shall be posted in a conspicuous place directing the Singapore Civil Defence Force to the inlets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

44.4.1

Wet Rising Main System Generally, a water supply capable of providing a minimum of 27 litres per second for a residential building or 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building at all times shall be required. When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum common water supply shall be as stated below : (a)

For a residential building 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.

(b)

For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and 19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190 litres per second.

The supply from the breeching inlets shall discharge openly into the tank and at a level of not less than 150mm above the maximum water level in the tank. To reduce the risk of hose bursting, provisions shall be made in accordance with BS 5401 : Part 1 so that when the water is shut off at the nozzle the static pressure in any line of hose connected to a landing valve does not exceed 8 bar. To dispose of excess flows and pressures over and above those required (ie. when only one jet is in use) a pressure control valve shall be incorporated in the body of the landing valve which is then permanently connected into a relief pipe, where applicable. This relief pipe shall run throughout the length of the wet rising main installation and shall terminate either back into the suction tank or to drain. The relief pipe shall be 100mm diameter galvanised steel. All pump control panels shall be of IP 54 enclosures.

44.4.2

Wet Rising Main Water Tank Unless agreeable by the FSSD, tanks supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction or storage tanks for wet rising mains. The tank shall be compartmented into two separate water-tight sections connected by a valve, normally kept open, to permit tank maintenance without interruption to the water supply. Nevertheless, when more than one water tank is provided in parallel to store the required amount of water, tank compartmentation is not necessary provided the tanks are interconnected with isolating valves which are secured open. Each tank or tank compartment shall be provided with a ductile iron cement lined overflow pipe of at least 100mm in diameter, adequately supported, and extended to discharge into a suitable drain. Ductile iron cement lined drain pipe of at least 100mm diameter and controlled by a gate valve shall be provided for each tank or compartment. Voltex inhibitors shall be installed where applicable to maintain the required water tank storage capacity according to SS CP29. An approved visual level indicator shall be fitted to show the depth of water in each tank or compartment. A permanent aluminium gooseneck ladder with safety guard extending a sufficient distance above the top of the tank shall be provided for each tank. UPVC ladder shall also be provided inside each tank. Reinforced concrete tank shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 9 "Reinforced Concrete Water Tank" including all clauses & subclauses under it. However, notwithstanding the requirements specified therein, sterilisation of water is not required.



Wet Rising Main Pumps The horizontal split case fire pumps for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps shall be listed by PSB and UL or FM. The fire pumps / motors for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps / motors shall be tested by approved accredited laboratory and UL (Underwriter Laboratories Inc.), FM (Factory Mutual Approvals). The pumps / motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150mm height plinths. Spring type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be the spring mounted type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water leakage / splash. The pumps shall have an independent source of power supply and each shall be capable of providing independently the necessary flow and pressure requirements. The duty pump (or standby pump, in the event of failure of the duty pump) shall start automatically when there is a flow of water or when a fall in pressure occurs in the rising main exceeding 5% of the fire pump churning pressure. The pump shall be fully operational within 30 seconds after starting. Means shall be provided for manual starting by reproducing the pressure reduction. Once started, the pump shall run continuously until stopped manually. Means shall be provided for the 'lagging' pump to operate should the 'leading' pump fail to function upon closing of the starting circuit. (a)

Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main supply pipes to initiate automatic starting of the pumps. Pressure-sensor switches shall be of approved type with provisions for independent adjustment of high and low pressure settings. The automatic starting of any pump shall also initiate a visible and audible indication in the main fire alarm panel, if any.

(b)

Floatless level control relay unit complete with electrodes shall be provided for each suction and storage tank to override the control of all the pressure switches in such a way that at a pre-set low water level, the pressure switches shall not cause starting of the jockey and wet rising main pumps. In addition, any pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit at that low water level. The relay unit shall also actuate a visible and audible alarm indication when the water level reaches a pre-determined high or low limit.

(c)

The associated jockey pump shall be controlled by pressure-sensor switches so as to maintain a static pressure in the wet rising main about 1 bar (10m) higher than the pressure when the wet rising main pump is churning. The jockey pump shall be automatically de-energised when any of the wet rising main pump operates.

All pumps shall be capable of being started and stopped manually. All pumps shall be primed automatically at all times. This will be effected if the pumps are sited so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, separate priming tanks maintained automatically and foot valves shall be provided for each pump. Pumps which are automatically controlled shall be provided with a reliable float-operated air release or equivalent valve not less than 12mm in size, to automatically release air from the pump. Means must be provided to allow a continuous flow of water through each pump at a sufficient rate to prevent overheating of the pump when churning. The pump motor capacity shall be such that the maximum motor current in any phase under any condition of pump load and voltage unbalance shall not exceed the motor-rated full-load current multiplied by the service factor. The maximum service factor at which a motor can be used is 1.15. These service factors shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard MG-1. A test valve and direct reading flow meter shall be provided on a pipe connection coupled to the pump delivery branch downstream of the check valve to test the pump. The test piping shall be sized not less than the meter size appropriate to the pump rated capacity. The test piping shall discharge to a suitable drain. A discharge pressure gauge shall be connected to the discharge of each pump. The gauge shall have a valve with arrangement for draining. Its indication dial shall have a range of at least twice the rated working pressure of the pump.



Wet Rising Main Pumps (Cont’d) All electrical wiring, including that for the control and monitoring circuits shall be in accordance with PUB requirements and shall be : (a)

of the fire-resistive type complying with SS 299 or

(b)

enclosed in a 2-hour fire-rated duct throughout the run to the pump room.

A fire-rated duct may house electrical wiring for other emergency services if the running of the wiring does not affect the fire-integrity of the duct. The sharing of a common electrical rising main for the wet rising main and other emergency services is acceptable provided that there is proper protection by fuses or circuit breakers for each and every emergency service. Any switches on the power feed to the motor shall be locked "ON" and clearly labelled "WET RISING MAIN PUMP - NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE". Acoustic treatment shall be provided to reduce the noise generated from the pump to be within the MEWR guideline. The proposal for noise reduction shall be approved by the SO Rep before the actual commencement of the pump room pipework installation.

44.4.4

Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the manufacture of control panels. Provision at the Wet rising main pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following : (a)

For each and every pump, indicating lamps shall be provided to show that power supply is available on every phase of each motor. Power failure on any phase of the supply to the wet rising main pumps shall be automatically indicated on the control panel.

(b)

MANUAL/OFF/AUTO rotary selector switches shall be provided for each pump.

(c)

"Start" and "Stop" push-button switches shall be provided for each pump.

(d)

Lead/Lag rotary functions shall be provided for the selection of the duty pumps.

(e)

"Running" and "stop" indicating lamps shall be provided to each pump. Green colour lamps shall be provided to show the pump "Running" status and red colour lamps shall be provided to show the "Stop" status.

(f)

Start push button shall be provided for each pump to close the main contactor for the pump motor mechanically independent of any control circuit.

(g)

Indicator lamps giving indication of the failure of each wet rising main pump to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge.

(h)

Indicating lamps giving indication of 'Pump on Demand' as controlled by the pump actuation pressure switches. The starting of the pump shall not cancel the indication.

(i)

Remote visible and audible indication panel besides the main control panel, if any for the following conditions : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

(j)


Pump on demand Operation of each wet rising main pump Power failure on any phase of the supply to each wet rising main pump Pump fails to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge Manual and auto mode selection

Indicating lamps shall be provided to show the high and low water level of the wet rising main storage tanks.


Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels (Cont’d) (k)

Indicator lamp and buzzer/bell test push button.

(l)

Fault alarm facilities in addition to the indicator lamps shall be provided for the following conditions : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Power failure on any phase of the supply to each pump Pump fail to start High and low level at suction and storage tanks Other faults not mentioned above

The fault alarm facilities shall incorporate a fault alarm buzzer audible from 10m away and a buzzer muting switch. The visual fault alarm indication shall persist unless the fault is rectified. The occurrence of a further different fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to resume the sound again. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning. In addition, a weatherproof red light bulb with wire guard shall be installed outside the pump room near the entrance to indicate the above fault conditions. (m)

44.4.5

Auxiliary contacts to generator panel to be provided. Volt-free contacts and wiring to relay signals to Fire Indicator Board where applicable.

Jockey Pump Control Panel The jockey pump controllers shall be used for pressure maintenance in the installation to prevent unnecessary cycling of the wet rising main pumps. The jockey pump controller shall either be housed in a separate compartment within the wet rising main pump controller or in a totally separate sheet steel cubicle. The jockey pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload relay, contactors, control relays and the following facilities :

44.4.6

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch 'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps 'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp Connections to pressure switch Minimum running period timer to prevent frequent automatic starting of the pump. The timer shall be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute and interlock with the pressure switch.

(h)

Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power supply failure on any phase and pump fail to start.

Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the manufacture of control panels. The transfer pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload relay, contactors and control relays. Provision of transfer pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following : (a)

Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor

(b)

Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch



Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control (Cont’d) (c)

'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps

(d)

'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton

(e)

Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp

(f)

Connections to pressure switch

(g)

Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power supply failure on any phase, pump fail to start and high and low water level.

44.5

TEST

44.5.1

Tests On Rising Main System The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2 months before the date of Substantial Completion of the building block. For wet rising main system, the Contractor shall provide the complete information as produced in Appendix A30 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.

44.5.2

Static Pressure Test The Contractor shall ensure that the system is in order so that water is allowed to flow through it discharging via the topmost and/or lowest outlet to flush out any debris that may be present. The system shall then be completely charged with water to a hydrostatic pressure according to CP 29 (Clause 8.1) for 2 hours. During this period, an inspection of the system shall be made to check that no leakage of water is taking place at any of the joints or landing valves. The system shall also be charged to the working pressure and at selected landing valve to be tested for operational requirements with matching water hose. Landing valves shall be tested randomly on the proper engagement with matching water hose and hose coupling. Provide diesel driven pump for the tests. Alternatively, electric driven pump may be used but the Contractor shall arrange for its own power supply. The Contractor shall arrange for all the necessary parties such as the FSSD to witness the test as and when required. Provide water and all the necessary instruments such as water hose, hose coupling, pressure gauges for the testing. Water from the domestic water tank shall not be used. The Contractor shall find other means of providing the water subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Instrument for the testing shall be properly calibrated by PSB or PSB accredited laboratory. The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes are securely anchored before carrying out any pressure test.

BLDG12/S44.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Flow Test (Wet Rising Mains Only) The following minimum water supply flow-rate shall be maintained in the wet rising system when 3 landing valves within the system are in the fully-open position : (a) (b)

27 litres per second for a residential building. 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building.

A minimum running pressure of 3.5 bar and a maximum of 5.5 bar shall be maintained at each landing valve when any number, up to three, are fully opened. When water is shut off at the nozzle of the hose connected to a landing valve, the static pressure in that hose line shall not exceed 8 bar. When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum water supply flow rate shall be as stated below :

44.5.4

(a)

For a residential building, 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.

(b)

For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and 19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190 litres per second.

Performance Test The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing Form. Additional FSSD requirements shall also be included. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to the SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained. Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements demonstrated on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The test shall be witnessed by the Contractor together with the SO Rep. The testing form shall be endorsed by the QP.

44.5.5

Remedial Action And Re-Testing Remedy all Defect within such time as instructed by the SO Rep and arrange for a re-test of the system.

44.6

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR DRY RISING MAIN The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance service and call-back service to the dry rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period") for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it. Whenever, the rising main system or any portion thereof is out of service for any reason, notice shall be given immediately to the Singapore Civil Defence Force and a suitable sign shall be displayed at a prominent position. When the installation is reinstated, the Singapore Civil Defence Force shall again be informed. All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A31. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.

BLDG12/S44.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR DRY RISING MAIN (CONT’D) Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each inspection. For inspections at every 6 months, rectify any Defect found after the following inspections : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x)

Check and verify operation of breeching inlets. Check that breeching inlets and landing valves are not obstructed. Check and verify that landing valves are fully closed and the handwheel are strapped locked. Check that valve caps are secured in position. Check rubber washers of the outlets and replace them if missing. Check handwheel to ensure that they are not jammed, missing or broken. Inspect the earthing connection and tighten it if necessary. Check for damaged and any leakage of pipes, landing valves Check the valve cabinets for damage. Any other inspection as instructed by the SO Rep.

In addition, wet tests shall be carried out annually when the main can be checked for leaks.

44.7

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance service and call-back service to the wet rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period") for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it. All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A32. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works. The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each inspection. Maintenance of wet rising mains shall include the requirements as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main" including all subclauses under it. In addition, the following checks are also required : (a)

Monthly Tests Inspect and service all machinery and equipment comprising the complete Plant and ancillary equipment under this Contract once a month set out in the code of practice, except where otherwise directed by the SO Rep. At each such monthly inspection and service of the complete Plant and ancillary equipment, the minimum items of Works detailed below and in the relevant code of practice shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements to Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall deemed to be included.

BLDG12/S44.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONT’D) (a)

Monthly Tests (Cont’d) (i)

BLDG12/S44.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Inspect all water pumps, and (1)

Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as necessary.

(2)

Check all pump bearings and lubricate with oil or grease as necessary.

(3)

Check the alignment and condition of all rubber couplings between pumps and drive motors, and rectify as necessary.

(4)

Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary.

(5)

Check and verify the automatic starting of each pump by actuating the drain and test valve in a manner to reduce the applied water pressure and the starting device and simulate a fire condition. Record that the pressure is correct. Keep each pump running for a period of at least five minutes and verify the operation of the relief valve.

(6)

Check and verify pump running alarm and phase failure alarm.

(7)

Check pump starting equipment including fuses, circuit breakers and starters.

(8)

Conduct a running pressure test of each pump at full alarm condition by opening the test valve of the pump testing pipe and recirculate water back to the water tanks. Run each pump for a period of not less than 1 minute.

(9)

Simulate failure on one of the pump and verify the operation of the duty-standby changeover mechanism.

(10)

Check and verify no excessive noise and vibration of each pump and motor whilst the unit is running.

(ii)

Inspect and lubricate with grease as necessary all electric motors.

(iii)

Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and ancillary electrical apparatus, and

(iv)

Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays, and

(v)

Inspect all water suction and storage tank and drains, clean and flush out the tank as necessary. Check that stop valve and tank inlets interconnecting pipes and pump suction pipes are secured fully open. Verify the operation of the automatic tank filling mechanism. Visually check that tank contains requisite amount of water and verify operation of floatless level control units.

(vi)

Check and inspect breeching inlets.

(vii)

Check and verify operation of water level indicators.

(viii)

At the monthly inspection of control valves, a gauge showing water pressure in the system shall be read to make sure that normal pressure are being maintained - check the gauges with an inspection gauge once a year.


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONT’D) (b)

Quarterly Test For quarterly testing, servicing and maintenance, repeat all the testing, servicing and maintenance requirement as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main" including all subclauses under it and subclause 44.7(a) "Monthly Tests" above. In addition, provide the servicing and maintenance as detailed below :

44.8

(i)

Check any relays for correct adjustment and quick effective operation.

(ii)

Thoroughly check the whole system for loose connections, terminals, frayed wires, etc.

(iii)

Replace any broken or faulty equipment as may be required.

(iv)

Enter test results and details of any faulty components, repairs and replacements in the log book.

(v)

Every pump tank shall be completely flushed out and thoroughly cleaned annually. Other maintenance as recommended by the tank supplier shall be carried out. The stays, cleats, bolts and nuts, surface of the plates and other accessories of the tank shall be examined for rust, corrosion, crack, etc.

(vi)

The water in the whole pipework system shall be completely drained out and filled with fresh water again.

(vii)

Meggar test the motor winding cables and wiring to check the insulation resistance between phase to phase and phase to earth.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE For routine tests and inspection during the Defects Liability Period, all parts, Plant and equipment comprising the complete rising main system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A31 and A32. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspection. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the routine inspection upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.

44.9

CALL-BACK SERVICE During the Defects Liability Period, provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) (b) (c)

respond within 30 minutes after being called; or attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;

the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. BLDG12/S44.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MAKING GOOD DEFECTS AND LEAKAGES During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A29 whenever required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defect of the system and equipment. The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of rising main systems and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of rising main systems.

44.11

RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defect. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within fourteen days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

44.12

LOG BOOK Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

44.13

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period : (a)

All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts.

(b)

All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.

(c)

All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears, electric control gears and electric relays.

(d)

All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.

(e)

All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.

BLDG12/S44.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


44.14

FIRE PUMPS/MOTORS FOR USE IN WET RISING MAINS AND TRANSFER PUMPS/MOTORS The fire pumps/motors for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps/motors shall be tested by approved accredited laboratory and UL(Underwriter Laboratories Inc.), FM (Factory Mutual Approvals). The pumps/motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150mm height plinths. Spring type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be the spring mounted type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water leakage/splash.

Section 45/.....

BLDG12/S44.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 45-1 SECTION 45 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION

45.1

DEFINITIONS "Electrical Worker" shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical work under the Electricity Act (Cap. 89A).

45.2

SCOPE OF WORK

45.2.1

General The fire protection installation Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the Fire Fighting and Protection Installation. Unless otherwise specified, the Works shall include : (a)

Fire hose reel system (complete with hose reel, suction tanks, pressure tanks and pumpset)

(b)

Portable fire extinguishers (where applicable)

(c)

Fire hydrants

Pipes shall be made of steel in accordance with BS 1387. However, the pipework for hose reels with direct water supply from PUB mains shall be copper or stainless steel, notwithstanding other provisions specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. For hose reels with direct water supply from the PUB mains, pumpset and its associated Works including suction tanks and pressure tanks shall not be part of the scope of fire protection installation Works for the purposes of this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. The Drawings shall in part be diagrammatic and when read in conjunction with the Specifications shall be intended to convey the scope of the Works, indicate the general arrangement of Plant, piping, and the like, and show approximate sizes of Plant and outlets. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as practicable in laying out the Works and in so doing shall co-ordinate all systems to secure the best possible installation in the available space. Where Works is specified but the exact location of Plant or control is not specifically shown, obtain the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system, unless specified otherwise. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation, materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from the provision of a complete operating and safe system. The Contractor shall provide all technical data as produced in Appendix A33.

45.2.2

Regulations And Codes Of Practice Provide and install the fire hose reel system in accordance with BS 5306 : Part I, EN 671-1, SS CP 29 and the requirements of local governing authorities such as BCA, FSSB and PUB. The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered with the BCA under the registration head of ME06 (Fire Prevention & Protection System) and shall be responsible for all applications to and arrangements with the local authorities such as PUB and FSSD representatives for the necessary completion, testing and commissioning of the installation for each building under the Works and all costs in connection therewith shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, of the relevant authorities, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.



Weatherproof And Flameproof Designs Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design. Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is sited in an area where flammable vapour of explosive gas is liable to occur, such apparatus shall be of flameproof construction.

45.2.4

Provision Of Openings For Electrical Wirings Provide structural openings through walls, floor and roof for the installation of pipework and electrical wiring. Make good such openings with non-combustible and waterproof material to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

45.2.5

Painting Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with two coats of approved enamel paint.

45.2.6

As-built Drawings And Details Of Pumping Plant During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all Fire Protection System Installation, pipe routes, plants, legends and all other related works based on actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings. The Works shall only commence upon approval by the Consultant but additional approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing which the whole installation may not be accepted by the Consultant. The approval of the proposal shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate in any aspect.

45.2.7

Quality Of Goods And Materials The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the relevant Authorities and shall also comply with the relevant Codes of Practices as stipulated. All materials used shall be of the approved type unless otherwise specified. Where products are manufactured under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not be necessary unless otherwise specified. The Consultant shall be consulted when in doubt. Prior to the installation of hose reels at the Site, where corrosion test is not conducted under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, the Contractor shall arrange to submit a sample under the same batch to PSB for the test. The test report shall be submitted to the Consultant. Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.



FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM

45.3.1

General (a)

Installation Fix the hose reels so that the centre is between 0.75 metre and 1.4 metre above floor level. Mount the hose reels on a swivel bracket suitable for mounting in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel hose reel cabinet or recesses clearly marked with "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm high. Hose reel cabinet or recesses shall be painted red. Any doors provided for hose reel cabinet or recess shall be so hinged that they open approximately 180 degrees and they shall not obstruct the running out of the hose in either direction. The door shall have a 4mm glass front with spring locked to open from within. The Contractor shall provide five sets of master keys to the Employer. Where the hose reel is within a service duct, a signplate with the words "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm height shall be displayed on the door.

(b)

Rubber Hose The rubber hose shall be of 25mm internal diameter and shall have a minimum working pressure of 7 bars and shall be of the non-kinking type. The rubber hose shall be manufactured with an inner tube or lining, a reinforcement braided with textile material and an abrasion resistant rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a single rayon braid or double braid of cotton. The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be 30 metres. There shall be no joints in the length of the hose. Samples and certification shall be provided to verify that the hose supplied is manufactured according to the requirements of BS 3169/EN 694.

(c)

Stop-Valve Provide and fix 25mm stop-valve for the connection of the hose reel to water supply. An indication of the open and shut position shall be fixed or permanently marked on the wheel of the valve, and the body of the valve except for gate valves which shall be marked with a directional arrow indicating the direction of flow through the valve.

(d)

Shut-Off Nozzle Provide a shut-off nozzle assembly in accordance with the following requirements :


(i)

The assembly shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant metallic material or other materials approved under EN 671-1.

(ii)

In the absence of a hose reel cabinet, means shall be provided for the secure attachment of the assembly in a locked enclosure in such a manner that it cannot be disengaged until the enclosure has been opened.

(iii)

The assembly shall be permanently marked to indicate the open and shut position of the valve.

(iv)

The internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface.

(v)

The internal diameter of the nozzle shall be 6.35mm.


Hose Reel

45.3.2.1

General The hose reel shall extend not more than 350mm from the mounting surface and shall have an overall diameter not greater than 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a continuous outer rim and shall be rigid in construction. The side of the reel shall be painted red. The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 200mm. When the full length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension, the rim of the side plates of the hose reel shall project at least 10mm beyond the external diameter of the coiled hose at any point. The fittings to which the hose are attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a manner that the hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers. The water connection through the rubber hose shall permit the full flow of water to the hose without external leakage during any rotation of the hose reel. The hose reel waterways connecting the water supply to the hose, including the inlet pipe after the stop valve, shall be constructed of non-ferrous material and/or stainless steel and/or galvanised steel. Where hose reels are within service ducts, they shall be mounted such that their operations are not hindered. The mounting position shall be approved by the SO Rep. The clips used to attach the hose to the nozzle and the drum shall be galvanised ear clips.

45.3.2.2

Markings Mark every hose reel with the following information : (i)

The manufacturer's name, trade name or mark.

(ii)

Instructions for operation and use which shall include the following : (1) Turn on stop valve (2) Run out hose (3) Turn on water at nozzle (4) The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto the reel (5) The year of manufacture (6) The test pressure in Bar

All notices and instructions shall be weather and corrosion resistant and shall be set out in letters easily readable. In addition, the operating instructions "For Emergency Only : Break glass to open the door from inside" and "TO TURN ON THE INLET VALVE BEFORE RUNNING OUT THE HOSE" shall be of 12mm height and printed in white on the hose reel cabinet. Where there is no cabinet, the same notice shall be provided on a 2mm thick aluminium plate affixed to the wall adjacent to the reel. 45.3.2.3

Tests The hose reel shall be factory tested against water leakage after assembly at a test pressure of 13.8 bars (200 psi). The Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence of such factory test to the SO Rep before delivery of the hose reels to the Site on request by the SO Rep.

45.3.3

Pumpset (a)

Hose Reel Pumpset The hose reel pumpset shall consist of two sets of fire pumpsets, one duty and one standby to the approval of the SO Rep. Pumpsets shall be of centrifugal multistage vertical pumps. Notwithstanding the above requirements, single stage centrifugal end suction pumps shall be used where applicable. The pumps shall have stainless steel shafts and mechanical seals and shall be driven through flexible couplings by electric motors with speed of not more than 3000 rpm. Each pump shall be capable of providing a flow of water of at least 0.8 litres per second in the rising main.



Pumpset (Cont'd) (a)

Hose Reel Pumpset (Cont'd) Multistage vertical pumps shall have stainless steel outer sleeve and the suction/discharge casing shall be of cast iron. The pump impeller shall be of either stainless steel or bronze. Each pump shall also be capable of being started or stopped manually. The standby pump shall be so arranged that it will operate automatically on failure of the duty pump. The pumpsets shall be able to withstand 20 times start/stop per hour. Provide each pump with a ball valve and flexible connection at both the suction and discharge ends, a spring loaded check valve at the discharge end and a strainer at the suction end. The suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Screwed suction and discharge connections shall have flange adaptors. Provide pressure gauges at the main discharge pipe. The gauge shall have a range of at least twice the rated working pressure of the pump. All pumps shall be automatically primed at all times. This shall be activated if the pumps are sited so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, provide separate priming tanks with foot valves for each pump. Submit to the SO Rep for approval the characteristic performance curves of the pumps offered. The efficiency of the pumpset shall not be less than 50% at the operating conditions. Mark each pump conspicuously and permanently with letter "P1" or "P2" to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Provide and install all the pipework and accessories connecting the pumpsets to the suction tank and hose reel riser. Provide spring type vibration isolation mounting for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the building structure.

(b)

Hose Reel Pumps Controls Provide, install, connect and test all necessary starting and control equipment. Enclose all such equipment in a front connected wall mounted and manufactured from electrogalvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness IP54 cubicle with full locking hinged door. The cubicle shall be painted in accordance with sub-clause 45.3.6(h)(iv) "Painting". The sequence of operation of the hose reel pumps shall be as follows : (i)

The duty pumpset shall automatically come into operation when a pressure switch located in the branch out pipe feeding the two pressure tanks detects a fall of normal static pressure in the pipe below a predetermined value.

(ii)

If the duty pump fails to start or the demand for water exceeds the nominal output of the duty pump (ie. when three or more hose reels operate simultaneously), this drop in pressure shall be sensed by another pressure switch located adjacent to the first pressure switch, which shall then start the standby pump. The exact cut-in pressure of the standby pump shall be varied according to the normal system pressure and the performance curve of the pump.

(iii)

As the requirements for water reduces, the pressure in the system increases. When there is no demand to the system and the normal static pressure has been established, this preset pressure shall be sensed by both pressure switches and the duty and standby pump shall be switched off respectively. After each start/stop pumping cycle, the duty pump shall be alternated automatically by the use of an auto changeover relay to avoid one pump remaining stationary for long period. Provide a manual selector switch to select the duty or standby pump.



Pumpset (Cont'd) (b)

Hose Reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd) Provide a 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial time switch to start the pumps running for a pre-set duration of time weekly. At a pre-set time of each week, the time switch shall energise the coil of a solenoid valve for a pre-set period of time. The solenoid valve shall be located in a by-pass pipe connecting the main discharge line with both the suction tanks. As the solenoid valve is opened, water shall be forced to flow back to the water tanks by the system pressure which will then reduce progressively. This drop in system pressure shall be sensed by the pressure switch which shall then start the duty pump and the standby pump. Each pump shall be activated after the other when the solenoid valve is opened at two different pre-set times on the time switch. Provide a globe valve to throttle excessive pressure upstream of the solenoid valve. Install a ball stop valve to enable manual test run of the pumpsets and a pressure relief valve to avoid excessive build-up of system pressure in parallel with the solenoid valve. Use the third pressure switch installed next to the above two pressure switches to initiate an audible and visual alarm in the event that the normal pressure in the pipe falls to 1 bar. The controller shall be fully wired and mounted within the cubicle requiring only incoming supply, necessary control and alarm connections. The following starting and control equipment shall be incorporated in the cubicle : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv) (xvi) (xvii) (xviii) (xix)

1 no. ON/OFF isolating switch for incoming. 1 no. MCB unit for incoming. 2 sets ON/OFF isolators, each completed with MCB unit for starters. 2 no. direct on line starters. 2 no. thermal overload relays with ambient temperature compensation. 1 no. rotary selector switch for AUTO/MANUAL selection. 1 no. pump selector switch. 2 sets START/STOP button switch for the starters. 8 no. MCB units for control circuits. 1 no. automatic change over relay (100% continuous rating). 2 no. relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip. 1 set of cancel alarm pushbutton and cancel alarm relay. Relays to control the pumpsets. 1 no. water tank low level warning light. 1 no. power supply on light. 2 no. pump "RUN" indicating lights. 2 no. pump "TRIP" indicating lights. 1 no. low pressure warning light. 1 no. 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch to control the weekly running of the pumpsets. (xx) Voltage-free contacts to relay signal to remote fire indicator board and initiate a fire alarm when flow switch is actuated. (xxi) 2 no. relay for lamp and bell test. (xxii) 1 no. pushbutton for lamp and bell test. (xxiii) 1 no. 230V/24V AC transformer. (xxiv) Terminal block for connection to remote equipment. Submit the control circuit diagram for approval before the installation. Provide the pressure switch settings on a 240mm x 150mm perspex sheet mounted by self-adhesive tape. The details and locations shall be approved by the SO Rep.



Pipes & Fittings (a)

Scope This subclause sets out the requirements, standards of workmanship and materials in general for the piping system for the hose reel system.

(b)

General Before delivery to the Site, clean all pipes thoroughly so that they are free from scale and rust. Reject old and damaged pipes and use only new pipes. On the Site, all pipes shall be checked again and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to the installation. Install all pipework so that clearance of approximately 80mm is left between the outside of the pipe and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipe joints or fittings shall not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.

(c)

Materials Provide and install all pipework as indicated in the Drawings. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect that would impair their performance. Cutting, bending and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipes shall be factory marked with the manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted. Lay pipes outside buildings underground, and the depth of cover measured from the top of the pipe to the finished surface of the ground level shall not be less than 750mm. Stainless steel pipes shall comply with BS 4127:Part 2. Stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary fittings and compression fittings in accordance with BS 864:Part 2. Fittings of 15mm and longer shall be legibly marked with the maker's name or trade mark. All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. Ductile iron cement lined pipes shall comply with BS EN 545 and medium galvanised steel pipes shall comply with SS17. Joints and connections to galvanised steel pipework of up to and including 65mm diameter shall be made by means of screwed connections. Join pipes of 80mm diameter and above by means of flanged connections. Unless otherwise specified, use galvanised steel bolts and nuts for all supports and flanged connections. Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. All flanges shall be flushed and aligned, and shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing compound. Use ductile iron cement lined pipes where pipes are concealed such as those within concrete slabs or below ground.

(d)

Valves All valves shall either be of bronze, brass or cast steel construction and conforming to the relevant British Standard and be suitable for the working pressure encountered. Where valves are located above 2m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be operated by chain mechanism. Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of the flanged type. All valves shall be located in accessible positions. Isolation valves of 50mm diameter and below installed along pipework inside the pump room shall be of ball stop valves approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. Valves up to and including 65mm diameter where connected to steel pipe shall be of brass/bronze with female screwed connections.



Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd) (d)

Valves (Cont'd) Valves of 80mm diameter and above where fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron or ductile iron type. Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. The Contractor shall select these valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve shall operate silently on reversal of water flow. Solenoid valve shall be of the normally closed, magnetically operated pilot type. Valve body shall be of brass or bronze and the solenoid coil shall be replaceable on Site without removing the valve body from pipe fitting. Install "Y-type" strainer upstream of the solenoid valve to trap any dirt and debris. The power supply of the solenoid valve shall be 24V AC 50Hz.

(e)

Strainers Install "Y-type" strainers upstream of all pumpsets. Provide all strainers with isolating valves so that the strainers can be cleaned without draining away the water of the system. Where a system cannot be shut-down for strainer cleaning, install by-pass in parallel to the strainer.

(f)

Pressure Gauges, Pressure Switches And Flow Switches Pressure gauges shall be of the 100mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for pipe mounting and be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of the needles. Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 1780 Part 2. Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type and be calibrated in m-bar. Select suitable gauges for mid-range indications at normal working pressure and the maximum measurable pressure shall be twice the maximum working pressure. Pressure gauges shall have scales with divisions not exceeding 0.2 bar for a maximum scale value of 10 bars, not exceeding 0.5 bar for a maximum scale value of 16 bars, and not exceeding 1.0 bar for a maximum scale values in excess of 16 bars. Pressure switches shall comply with BS 6134 and shall be of automatic reset type. Install pressure gauge and pressure switches near to the pressure tanks. The enclosures of the pressure switches shall be of water tight IP 65 construction. Pressure switches shall be suitable for conduit construction and with terminal block for wire connection. Power supply for the pressure switches shall be 24V AC 50 Hz. Failure of pressurized components of the pressure switches shall not result in a build up of pressure within the enclosure. The parts in contact with water for the pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be of brass, stainless steel or other approved corrosion resistant materials. The pressure switch shall have adjustable and independent high and low pressure settings.

(g)

Pressure Tanks Two rechargeable pressure tanks of replaceable membrane type and pre-charged according to operating conditions shall be installed at the discharge of the pumps to keep the hose reel riser pressurized at any time. The pressure tank shall be of carbon steel, designed and fabricated to British Standard or Standard of American Society of Mechanical Engineers for Pressure Vessels. The Contractor shall furnish the design and detailed calculations for the proposed pressure tanks. The design and construction of the pressure tanks shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The pressure tanks shall be of the vertical type and the impermeable diaphragm shall be of heavy duty vinyl or butyl material.



Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd) (g)

Pressure Tanks (Cont'd) The system shall consist of two numbers of interconnected pressure tanks. The capacity of each tank shall not be less than 50 litres. The pump shall be started automatically by a pressure switch to recharge the pressure tanks in response to a drop of storage pressure below a pre-set value according to operating conditions. The pump shall be stopped automatically when the required storage pressure has been reached in the pressure tanks. Provide each pressure tank with safety relief valve. Technical details including the manufacturer, specification and pressure setting shall be labelled on metal or plastic plate attached to each of the tank.

(h)

Vibration Isolation Connectors All pipe connections to pumpsets and any equipment subjected to vibration shall be carried out by means of flexible neoprene connectors. Unless specifically permitted by the SO Rep, rigid connections between pipelines and equipment shall be rejected. Use neoprene or spring hangers from approved manufacturer for supporting pump delivery and return mains.

(i)

Pipe Supports And Fittings Support all pipework by pipe hangers and supports. Unless otherwise stated, all pipe hangers and supports shall be of mild steel adjustable for height. Vertical pipe risers penetrating through floor slab shall be supported to each floor by clamp or collars. All vertical pipe risers shall have foot elbows or concrete block supports at their lowest point. The spacing of fixings of pipe supports shall not exceed the following :

Material of Pipe

Diameter of Pipe (mm)

Maximum Spacing Horizontal (m)

Vertical (m)

Galvanized Steel Pipe

10 to 15 20 to 25 32 40 to 50 65 to 80

1.75 2.5 2.75 3.0 3.5

2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 4.5

Ductile Iron Pipe

75 to 100

2.75

2.75

Stainless Steel Pipe

10 to 15 20 to 25 32 40 to 50 65 to 80

1.75 2.5 2.75 3.0 3.5

2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 4.5

Fixing shall wherever possible be built into the building structure. Alternatively, they shall be secured to the building structure by means of expansion or power driven bolts.



Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd) (j)

Pipework, Testing And Cleaning All pipework shall be flushed with clean water before final topping up and putting into service. All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bars or two times the working pressure whichever is the greater before lagging or putting into service. The test pressure shall be maintained for a minimum duration of 24 hours.

45.3.5

Suction Tanks (a)

General Tank supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction for hose reel installation. Lay a separate line from the PUB bulk meter position to supply water to the suction tanks or the fire hose reels directly in case boosting of the PUB water pressure is not required. The line shall serve the fire hose reel system only. To prevent contamination, provide approved double check valves assembly complete with drain cocks in accordance with the Drawings. The effective water capacity of two suction tanks with automatic inflow shall not be less than 1100 litres. Effective water capacity shall be labelled on the tanks as directed by the SO Rep. The tanks shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and flanged stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) pipe connections. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be correspondingly aligned. Nominal pipe thickness for stainless steel pipe shall be 4mm complying with JIS G3459 Schedule 20S. Provide and install piping to each suction tank of nominal diameter as follows : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii)

1 no. 54mm diameter stainless steel incoming pipe from PUB bulk meter; 1 no. 50mm diameter galvanised steel outlet pipe to fire hose reel booster pump; 1 no. 32mm diameter galvanised steel by-pass pipe; 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipe; 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron over-flow pipe. The over-flow pipe shall be connected to the washout pipe if suction tanks are situated at the 2nd storey and above. 1 no. 28mm diameter stainless steel over-flow warning pipe if suction tanks are located at 2nd storey and above; and 1 no. 100mm diameter cement mortar lined cast iron or ductile iron interconnecting pipe.

Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC air vent to each tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end and covered by mosquito netting. Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC pipe to each tank for the mounting of level control electrodes. (b)

Level Control (i)

Ball Float Valve Approved 50mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted directly to the incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 700 KN per m2 and shall be approved by the PUB. The fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal valve shall be of bronze with leather trim and the packing plate shall be of gun metal with winged guide and links. The body shall be of cast iron with bronze lines and gun metal seal ring and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504 or BS 10 with approved rating.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Suction Tanks (Cont'd) (b)

Level Control (Cont'd) (ii)

Floatless Level Control Relay Units Connect floatless level control electrodes mounted on each suction tank directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tank. Arrange floatless level control electrodes to stop the pumpset at pre-determined low level. Use a floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank to provide over-riding control of pressure switches such that at a pre-set low water level in the suction tank, the pressure switches shall not start the pump. At that low water level, even a pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit. The floatless level control electrodes shall also actuate a warning indicating light and an alarm bell when the water level in the suction tank falls to a predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type. Electrodes shall be stainless steel and provided with electrode separators. Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable to facilitate maintenance and shall be installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Run the wiring in conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep it as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power supply wiring.

(c)

Alarm And Emergency Device Install alarm device to be turned-on by the floatless level control relay unit which shall be activated when low water level in the suction tanks and/or low pressure relay and/or thermal overload relays for the pump motors are encountered. This alarm device shall be in the form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the pumproom and near the entrance or other location as directed by the SO Rep. The bell shall be weatherproof and of heavy duty type. The alarm bell shall give a distinctive sound different from that of any fire alarm sounder and the audible fault alarm at the fire indicator board. Provide a pushbutton to cancel the alarm bell. The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep.

45.3.6

Power Supply (a)

General The power supply available for electric motors is 415 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating current.

(b)

Motors The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F insulation unless specified otherwise and shall be designed for continuous maximum rating. Motor type and model shall be approved by the SO Rep before the installation. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands. The motor efficiency and power factors of the motors shall be more than 90% and 0.85 respectively at full load and shall comply with the current PUB Regulations.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Power Supply (Cont'd) (c)

Motor Starters The starters for the motors shall be direct on-line type. The starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be automatically actuated by the pressure switches in the main riser pipe. Each starter shall have time relay, undervoltage release, no volt release, adjustable and ambient compensated (-5ºC to 50ºC) thermal overload protection with manual reset and pilot lamp. The starter shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the installation. The operating voltage of the control coil shall be 230V. The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. The mechanical and electrical endurance of the starter shall be not less than 50,000 operations. Provide the manufacturer's certificate to this effect when requested by the SO Rep. The starters shall be wired in such a way that the floatless level control relay unit shall be able to override other pump controls and actuate the pumps according to different pre-set conditions.

(d)

7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch Use an approved type of time switch. Connect the time switch to control the coil of the solenoid valve. Time switch shall be able to operate on a 7-day basis with a minimum 24 hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure. The time switch shall be capable of providing at least two on-off operations per week. Time switches shall incorporate a 7-day dial and a 2-hour dial with a shortest switch period of not more than 3 minutes for the 2-hour dial. Provide ON/OF lever transfer switch for each time switch to facilitate manual ON/OFF to override control without disturbing the preset schedule. The power supply for the timer shall be 230V AC 50 Hz. Provide time switch with a clear plastic front cover.

(e)

Auxiliary Relays Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent self cleaning action. Auxiliary relays shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal volts and hold in satisfactorily at 65% nominal volts. Auxiliary relays with functions common to a number of circuits and which are fitted to a common panel as referred to previously shall be of the plug-in type. Auxiliary relays fitted to demountable units shall be of the plug-in type where possible. Fixed relays are acceptable if they are a design feature of the units. Auxiliary relays shall have a minimum of 6 contacts rated at 5 Amps minimum for an inductive load. Contacts shall be capable of carrying and breaking without damage, the inrush and operating currents of contactor or starter coils they are switching. The contact arrangement shall be easily alterable.

(f)

Pushbuttons Pushbuttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Pushbuttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application. Pushbutton bezels shall be black. Employ the following colour codes : Green Red Black

BLDG12/S45.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)

-

"START" or "ON" "STOP" or "OFF" Reset


Power Supply (Cont'd) (g)

Indicator Lamps Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation of service, circuit and locations. Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type rated at 6 watts. The indication shall be clearly visible from the sides or front. Indicating lamps shall have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals; soldered terminations shall be rejected. Employ the following colour codes : Green Amber Red

(h)

-

"ON" status "OFF" status "FAULT", "FAILURE", "ALARM" status

Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (i)

Construction Provide and install approved switchboard required to serve the booster pumpsets. The wall mounted switchboard cabinet shall be installed in the pumproom and it shall be near to the entrance of the pumproom. The location shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The cabinet shall be of front connected type and unless otherwise specified, manufactured from minimum 2mm gauge sheet steel using folded section or angle form bracing for rigid construction. The cabinet shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The construction shall be such that it permits ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes. The opening of a panel door shall allow access to that compartment only. Provide continuous mild steel to complete separate adjacent cubicle. Provide switchboard cabinet with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing cables. Schematic wiring and field connection diagrams shall be permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door. Instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, selector switches, push buttons, isolating switches, etc shall be mounted directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation. Indicating lights shall be of the transformer type. Isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be opened with the handle in the `ON' position. Carry out the whole of the electrical Works in compliance with the SS CP5 and subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

(ii)

Internal Wiring The control panel shall all be internally wired, including all wirings between individual units and between units and terminal strips located near the room entrance. Number all terminals on the strips and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on the wiring and field connection diagrams permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door. Wiring shall be multi-strand of not less than 1.5 mm2 copper conductors, PVC insulated, colour coded and numbered for identification.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Power Supply (Cont'd) (h)

Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd) (ii)

Internal Wiring (Cont'd) Identification shall be by means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating materials with white glossy finish and black lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. The numbering shall be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables. Each wire shall be separately terminated with tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type terminals are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, connect only one wire to each terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an approved marking and numbering system. Run all control circuit wirings separately from power circuit wiring and protect them by using MCB units or fuses.

(iii)

Labelling Provide each supervisory control panel with a main label mounted in a prominent position. Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed steel screws or in other approved manners. Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be black lettering engraved on white traffolyte. The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Submit schedule to the SO Rep for approval prior to manufacture. Labels shall designate circuit number and equipment function. Label terminal strips to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and function - eg. control, indication, protection, etc. Label clearly all control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located on common panels to identify circuit number, function and rating.

(iv)

Painting After degreasing, apply one coat of etch primer, follow by one undercoat and two top coats of synthetic enamel. All coats shall be stoved baked to paint manufacturer's requirements. The finished colour of internal and external surfaces shall be red. Make good all damages occurred during transit or installation to a standard equal to that manufactured originally.

(v)

Wiring The wiring shall comply with SS CP 5. Label clearly isolation switches and circuit breakers on the power feed to the pumps : "Fire Hose Reel Pump Supply - Do Not Switch Off In Case Of Fire". Install the cables from the pumproom electrical mains isolator to the pump's starting and control switchboard. Trunking cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 230V single phase 50 cycles system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Power Supply (Cont'd) (h)

Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd) (v)

Wiring (Cont'd) The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of screwed socket and smooth bore butt to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work, make permanent metallic connection between the conduit and steel work. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be earthed with matching standing copper link. Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheet, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end at each length. Treat the trunking with anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be by means of round headed bolts and nuts. Lay 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down. Complete the entire trunking and conduit installation before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall comply with SS CP 5. Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V or other approved and obtain an infinity reading before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Terminate wiring in conduit and duct in the floor in approved junction boxes adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the cables between motors and junction boxes. Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductor shall have cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D1 of CP 5.

45.4

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER Provide and install portable fire extinguishers in locations as shown in the Drawings. Extinguishers for use in all Pump Rooms, Ejector Pump rooms, Generator Rooms shall be appropriate for dealing with class B and C fires for eg. CO2 Fire Extinguishers. Those for use in Utilities Centre, Centralised Refuse Chambers, Consumer Switch Rooms, Lift Machine Rooms and similar nature services rooms shall be appropriate for dealing with class A, B & C fires for eg. Type ABC Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers in accordance to CP 55. Provide and install each fire extinguisher complete with horn, wall bracket and visual indicator (indicating whether the extinguisher has been used). Extinguishers equipped with nonmetallic horns, such as plastic or PVC horns, shall be used in location with energised electrical equipment such as switch rooms. Metal horns shall not be used in location with energised electrical equipment. All fire extinguishers’ location, quantity, rating, type and weight shall comply with SS 232, CP 55 and other current codes and regulations and shall be approved for use by all relevant local authorities. Good practice as recommended in BS 5306:Pt 3 shall be observed and implemented where applicable. Install fire extinguisher at a height of 1m above the floor level on the hangers/brackets supplied together with the fire extinguisher. They shall be placed in a manner such that their operating instructions face outward. The operating instructions shall be simple and shown clearly in pictorial form. Fire extinguisher shall be embossed with 2 number of HDB logo not smaller than 30mm x 30mm on the external face of every extinguisher. The logo shall be red and white. No stick-on logo shall be acceptable as a substitute.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)


PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (CONT’D) House each fire extinguisher in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel case complete with front hinged door, 3mm thick glass panel and handle master lock. The case shall be coated with 2 coats of red paint. Lettering such as "FIRE" or "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" shall be eminently and permanently marked on the case and shall be of approved sizes and colour. Provide 5 sets of master keys for the door lock. Provide each case with a master key placed inside a recess covered by a front break glass and the recess shall be mounted on the front hinged door.

45.5

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

45.5.1

General The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning test of the completed installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2 months before the Substantial Completion of the building block. The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A34 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system. Provide a complete set of testing equipment. The minimum requirements of which shall be set out below : (a) (b) (c)

Tachometer with accessories for measurement of pumps and motor shaft speeds. Meter-Recorder for measuring flow rate through orifice plate. All necessary electrical testing equipment such as insulation resistance tester.

The whole of the instruments and equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.

45.5.2

Test Records The records shall include : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

45.5.3

date and time for inspection or test person carrying out the test test results noted any external factors significantly affecting the results follow-up actions required work carried out as a result of (e) above with date and result of re-test

Pipework All water pipework and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bar or 2 times the working pressure whichever shall be the greater, and this test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours. Allowable pressure drop during the 24 hour testing shall be decided by the SO Rep but generally shall not exceed 3% of test pressure. During tests, all welded joints shall be hammered.

45.5.4

Control Equipment Set and calibrate all limit switches, pressure switches, time switches, etc. as required to ensure that operating directions are correct. Test and verify the time and control sequence.

45.5.5

Pumps Check all pumps for alignment, flow rates, pressure and speed and their balance to comply with the required flow and head.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TESTING AND COMMISSIONING (CONT’D)

45.5.6

Performance Test On Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing Form. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to the SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation if adjusted and regulated correctly fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained. Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements demonstrated to him on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

45.5.7

Electrical Commissioning Tests Test the complete installation, both before and after the connection, to the requirements of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests at the Site in the presence of the SO Rep during the whole of the period required for the tests. All materials and equipment provided or installed which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the Contractor and the tests shall be repeated. Conduct all tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Provide all necessary instruments, apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Make accurate records of all tests and furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an approved form. Two copies of such schedules and of each test certificate shall be required. Make good any circuit or section of the installation which fails to comply with the required standard for acceptance. The site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the electrical installation where applicable, shall be as follows : (a)

Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors of cables and wires

(b)

Continuity tests.

(c)

Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc.

(d)

Test operation of alarm devices.

(e)

Rotational tests on all motors.

(f)

Insulation resistance test on any electrical apparatus supplied and/or installed before and after connecting such apparatus to the supply.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TESTING AND COMMISSIONING (CONT’D)

45.5.8

Hose Reel Tests (a)

Flushing Out Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that no harmful matter is passed into the reel. After flushing out, the tubing shall be run out and the water turned on to establish that the assembly is fully operational.

(b)

Procedure For Direct PUB Mains Supplies The most hydraulically remote reel shall provided a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at least 0.4 litres per second.

(c)

Procedure For Boosted Supplies The most hydraulically remote reel shall provided a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at least 0.4 litres per second. Check and verify pump running alarm. Repeat the test with simulated mechanical or electrical failure of the duty pump. Check and test the ability of the standby pump to come into service automatically and to maintain the required outputs. Check and verify pump failure warning indicated on local control panel and remote fire indicator board. Test the various control features of the hose reel booster pump to verify that they function correctly.

(d)

Putting Into Operational Readiness When the tests have been satisfactorily completed, restore the system to its normal operating state. Reels shall never be left under pressure and, where practicable, drain the hose prior to returning it to the drum. Restore the hose on the drum, pay particular attention to automatic hose reels to ensure that the automatic valve is fully closed when the hose has been restored. Where an isolation valve has been incorporated, close the isolation valve on completion of storage, and complete the nozzle interlock, where fitted.

45.5.9

Final Drawings and Operating Manuals During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all Fire Protection System Installation, pipe routes, legends and all other related works based on actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings. On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the testing record/results of each installation.

.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM) The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance service and call-back service to the Fire Protection System as specified hereunder, for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).

45.6.1

General During the Maintenance Period, provide all consumables/materials and make good all Defect and leakages found in the system/Plant/equipment. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A33 whenever required if such repair or replacement has been necessitated by reasons of Defect in the system/Plant/equipment.

45.6.2

Workmanship And Materials The service and maintenance Works shall be performed by workmen skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection systems of all types. All materials to be provided in connection with such service and maintenance Works shall be new and unused, and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and performance.

45.6.3

Supervision Provide a foreman to take charge of the service, maintenance and repair Works. This foreman shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection system, and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor, and acceptable to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall have in his direct employment, workmen who shall be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection system.

45.6.4

Servicing And Maintenance Schedule For monthly tests and inspection, all parts, Plant and equipment comprising the complete hose reel pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the Specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A35. The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection. Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM) (CONT’D)

45.6.4

Servicing And Maintenance Schedule (Cont’d) The Contractor's foreman shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the pump room after completion of each inspection. Items in the check-list for the monthly inspection shall include : (i) General condition of the pumprooms (ii) Correct setting of the time switch (iii) Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position (iv) Power supply selector switch in "On" position (v) Control panel indicating lights (vi) Alarm bell and bulb (vii) Suction tank electrode and control module (viii) Motor running current (ix) Check valves (x) Gate valves (xi) Alignment couplings (xii) Ball float valves (xiii) Motor insulation (xiv) Pump mechanical seal (xv) Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable) (xvi) Contactors and relays (xvii) Hose reel (xviii) Pressure and flow switches

45.6.5

Call-Back Service Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office. The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent callback service can be met. In the event that the Contractor fails to : (a) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or (b) attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or (c) carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system; The SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the Fire Protection System or to carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the Fire Protection System due to or arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Rectification Of Defects Prior To Issuance Of Final Completion Certificate One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of Defect. After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within fourteen days. If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.

45.6.7

Log Book Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

45.6.8

Consumable Materials Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :

45.7

(a)

All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts.

(b)


(c)

All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears, electric control gears and electric relays.

(d)


(e)

All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.

FIRE HYDRANTS Private Fire Hydrants where so required by The Fire Authority shall be provided within the perimeter of the building lot all to the requirements of the Fire Authority. The fire hydrant shall be positioned to be within 50 m from an entry to the building and not more than 50 m apart. In the case of a building where rising mains are installed, the 50 m distance shall be measured up to the breeching inlets of the rising mains. The siting and type of fire hydrants shall comply fully with the requirements stated in SS CP 29: Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose Reels. Fire hydrants shall be of suitably corrosion protected and sufficiently robust material. Their works parts shall be of gunmetal to BS 1400 or other suitable material. The fire hydrant shall be installed on concrete plinths with size of 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm thickness. A control valve shall be installed to each hydrant. The control valve shall be able to open and closed from the surface of the ground.

BLDG12/S45.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)


FIRE HYDRANTS (CONT’D) Fire hydrant mains shall be of heavy duty ductile iron with cement lining type conforming to BS EN 545. The hydrant mains routes and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and intended to indicate the general runs and locations only. The exact routes and locations of the mains shall be determined at the Site all at the Contractor’s cost and expense. Any mains that are routed in basement of building shall be in protective enclosure. The protective enclosure to the mains shall have the same fire resistance as the elements of structure of the building where the mains are located. The protective enclosure to the hydrant mains shall be labelled with the word " HYDRANT MAIN " of minimum 50 mm height at suitable intervals. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such protective enclosures. The fire hydrants shall be painted on the stem with a 100 mm yellow band, the lower edge of which is 300 mm from the ground. The outlets shall be provided with protective standard caps of cast iron or other suitable material and attached to the standpipe by stainless steel chains. The topmost part of the valve shall not exceed a depth of 1000 mm from the ground level. The water supply for the fire hydrant shall comply with the requirements stated in latest Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings. Valve pits shall be of adequate size, and readily accessible for inspection, operation, testing and maintenance and removal of equipment contained therein. They shall be so constructed and arranged as to properly protect the installed equipment from ground movement and accumulation of water as specified in SS CP 29. For fire hydrants sited in roadways, care shall be taken that the pits and covers are capable of bearing the heaviest vehicle that may use the road.


Bldg Spec Page 46-1

SECTION 46 RESERVED

SECTION 47 RESERVED

SECTION 48 RESERVED


Bldg Spec Page 49-1 SECTION 49 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

49.1

REGULATIONS The electrical works include electrical installation, lighting installation, lightning protection works, telephone/data cabling, fire alarm system and other miscellaneous electrical works. The electrical installation works shall comply with all statutory rules, regulations and requirements of the EMA, SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. In particular, the electrical installation works shall comply with the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

49.2

Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP. 89A) including any subsequent updates and amendments of the Regulations. Singapore Standard CP 5; Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid. All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice.

INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS It is the intention of the Drawings and/or Specifications to provide a complete and safe operating system. The omission from the Drawings and Specifications of any details in construction, installation, materials or specialities necessary for a complete, operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. Before submitting the Tender, and also prior to the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall study the Drawings and inspect the Site to satisfy themselves that the Works could be carried out as specified. Should it be deemed necessary to make modifications to the Drawings, method of installation or site adjustments to suit the structural and site constraints and to ensure compliance with the Statutory Rules and Regulations, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of his recommendations within two weeks from the commencement of the Contract and to obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before proceeding with the modifications. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. The Drawings and/or Specifications indicate the minimum requirements of the Employer only. Should the requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications conflict with the requirements of the Statutory Rules and/or Regulations, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.

49.3

AMBIENT CONDITIONS All Plant and equipment or materials specified in the Specifications and any other Plant and equipment or materials provided under the Contract shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in Singapore. The local climate is tropical with a mean shade temperature of 27.8°C. The normal maximum shade temperature is 31°C and the minimum shade temperature is 23.9°C. The mean relative humidity is 80%, the maximum and minimum being 100% and 65.1% respectively.

49.4

ITEMS OF ANY ONE CLASSIFICATION Any items, fittings or accessories which are used in quantity, shall in each case be the product of one manufacturer and shall be used only for the service recommended by the manufacturer.



INCOMING SERVICE CABLES The incoming service cables will be provided by PowerGrid up to and terminated at the incoming service panel provided by the Contractor. For service entries where there are no switch rooms, the Contractor shall provide weatherproof enclosures to house the incoming service terminations. The enclosures shall have hinged doors and facilities for locking. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide concrete pedestal bases to the requirements of SPSL/PowerGrid for mounting the weatherproof enclosures. The Contractor shall provide jumper or consumer terminal service (CTS) cables connecting the Employer's installation to the weatherproof enclosure. For service entries terminated directly at the main switch board, inside a switch room, the Contractor shall provide suitable cable end boxes for the termination. For Bulk Intake Consumer Switchroom, the Contractor shall supply, deliver, install/lay, terminate, test and commission the incoming service cable, on cable tray/cable ladder/trunking, from the Bulk Intake Consumer Switch Room to all Sub-Switchboards in Consumer Switch Room of the residential block, basement carpark and commercial block as indicated in the drawing. The termination shall be with suitable terminated accessories in accordance to PowerGrid's requirement. The Contractor is to maintain the service cable for a period of one year.

49.6

FIXING SCREWS All screws used for fixing meter boards, moulded or steel boxes, switches, socket outlets, consumer control units etc shall be in brass.

49.7

SWITCH ROOMS Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, all switch rooms shall be provided with at least a lighting point controlled by a switch, a 13 Amp switch socket-outlet, a consumer control unit, a fluorescent batten luminaire complete with tube and emergency battery/inverter pack (2 hours), a glass framed single line diagram of the electrical installation in at least A3 size (the wordings of the diagram shall be legible), first aid chart and a 900mm wide rubber mat complying with the latest edition of SS 298. The rubber mat shall be placed all around the floor standing switch board and indoor service electrical distribution box if any. All switches, socket-outlets and consumer control units shall be metal clad. All final sub-circuit wirings to lighting and power points in the switch rooms/meter rooms shall be run in metal conduit. Wirings for public lighting circuits shall be grouped and taped together according to their circuits. The circuits shall be bunched and secured on the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties. All other cables shall run on metal cable trays. The cables shall be neatly secured on the trays by plastic fixing ties or PVC coated metal saddles at regular intervals not exceeding 300mm. No over lapping of cables shall be allowed except for crossing of different circuits which shall be kept to a minimum.

49.8

POWER SUPPLY POINTS OUTSIDE SWITCH ROOMS AND AT STAIRCASE LANDINGS A 15 Amp metal-clad switch socket-outlet housed in a metal enclosure shall be installed outside each switchroom and at staircase landings or as indicated in the Drawings. These power supply points shall be connected to a separate way of the consumer control unit in the switchroom. The wiring to the power supply point shall be installed concealed unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. The metal enclosure shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of 1.2mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving an overall paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. A sample of the metal enclosure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation. The enclosure shall be semi-recessed such that use by external electrical plug is convenient and easy. The Contractor can propose alternative solution to the metal enclosure so long as there is locking provision/facility for these public power supply points. The alternative solution shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep.



TESTING OF INSTALLATION

49.9.1

General The following work of the electrical installation shall be inspected and tested on Site after completion : (a) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables (b) Earthing System (c) Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring (d) Lightning Protection System (e) Telephone System (f) CATV System All electrical tests including continuity, insulation resistance, polarity, earth fault loop impedances, phasing and earth electrode resistance shall be made in a manner prescribed in Singapore Standard CP 5 or other relevant standard specifications and Codes of Practice. Where no Standard/Code/Regulation is applicable, the tests shall be conducted in a manner approved by the SO Rep. For new wiring installations, the value of insulation resistance shall be as follows : (a) (b) (c)

Main Switchboard and Mains Cables shall be more than 10 Megaohms New underground cables shall be more than 5 Megaohms Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring shall be more than 1 Megaohms

The Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure that it is complete and complies with the requirements of the Specifications, the EMA and SPSL. All tests shall be witnessed, endorsed and verified by the Consultant’s LEW. Employer reserve the right to conduct any audit testing if required. lnspection or approval of tests by the SO Rep of any Plant and equipment, work or installation shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to supply the complete Plant and equipment, and complete the Works and installation in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled and unskilled labour and services with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests and any audit testing. If site electricity supply is not available for testing or setting protection relays, the Contractor shall provide a portable diesel generator set for the purpose. Any costs which may be involved in the tests shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum by the Contractor. 49.9.2

Application For HDB Testing HDB reserve the right to conduct audit testings if necessary on main switchboards, risers, distribution boards, telephone and CATV system etc including the earthing system. The Contractor shall test the installation works and submit all the tests reports to SO Rep/or Consultant for verification/endorsement before submission to HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit for audit testings. If any of the test reports and relevant documents are not submitted to HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit for audit testings, HDB reserve the right not to take over the block upon completion until the outstanding test reports and documents are submitted to HDB and HDB is satisfied with the testings. The onus will be on the Contractor to submit all test reports and relevant documents to HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit at least 14 days prior to any scheduled handing over date of the block.

49.9.2.1

The electrical installation to individual residential unit shall be tested by HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit. The Contractor shall apply to the HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit at least 7 working days in advance together with the respective test reports and supporting documents duly endorsed and verified by the Consultant’s LEW. The following shall be submitted at the time of application for testing: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)


One Certificate Of Fitness For Turn-On For Residential Units in each building block. A schedule of electrical installation for each residential building block (Form E) A block layout plan showing the types of residential units on each floor and unit layout plans with relevant single line diagrams. A photocopy of Certificate of Compliance (COC) of the electrical installation for each block A photocopy of licence to use or operate electrical installation for each block A soft copy (in CD Rom) of the as-built Single Line Drawings (in dwg format) of the electrical installations of the main switchboard and sub-switch board for each block. Quality Acceptance Report for the telephone wiring installation Telecom installer testing report for each block One copy of as-built MATV schematic installation drawing and other supporting drawings in A3 size paper.


Re-Testing And Charges Any omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test requirements detected during the testing shall be rectified by the Contractor within three (3) working days and verified by the Consultant . For re-testing of residential unit, the Contractor shall arrange for re-testing with HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit within three (3) working days. If the Contractor fails the first testing/re-tests due to omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test requirements the Employer shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.

49.10

SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY TARGET DATES For building blocks with lifts, Main Distribution Frame (MDF) room, Telecommunication Equipment Room (TER) and Consumer Switch Room (CSR), the main switchboards including the lift electricity cables and the supply cables for the MDF room, TER and CSR shall be energised at least 9 weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of building blocks not more than 30 storeys and 10 weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of building blocks more than 30 storeys. This is to allow time for the testing and commissioning of the lifts and telephone systems by others to meet the date of Substantial Completion of the building blocks. All electrical tests shall be completed and electricity supply to all other parts of the electrical installation shall be energised at least 2 weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of the building blocks.

49.11

WIRING/TRUNKING ROUTES AND POSITION OF ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT/ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS The wiring/trunking routes where indicated in the Drawings and the positions of electrical Plant and equipment/accessories and fittings where indicated in the Drawings are meant to serve as a guide only. The actual routes or positions shall be determined on the Site subject to the approval of the SO Rep. There shall be no variations to the Contract or adjustments to the Contract Sum arising from the selection of a more suitable route or position which might differ from those indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses for complying with these provisions specified herein. The Contractor shall ensure a minimum clearance distance of 100mm between the electrical trunking/fitting and the ventilation opening at the Gas and Water (G&W) duct so as not to block such ventilation opening.

49.12

MAINS CABLE INSTALLATION AT GROUND FLOOR AND RISER DUCT Mains cable installation at the ground floor and riser ducts shall be encased in metal trunking of standard widths of 375mm, 300mm, 200mm, 150mm and 75mm and standard height of 75mm. CATV cables shall be installed in separate 75mm x 75mm metal trunking throughout. Along the ground floor ceiling where the CATV trunkings and electrical trunkings are installed adjacent to each other, the CATV trunking shall be installed on the side nearer the service duct. For CATV cables to cross inside the metal trunking of electrical mains, 20mm diameter metal conduits for the crossing shall be installed as close to the trunking base as possible. The ends of the metal conduits shall be secured to the trunking sides using locknuts and female brass bushes. Only one metal conduit is allowed for each CATV cable.

49.13

SEGREGATION OF METERED SUPPLY CABLES Metered supply cables after the electricity kWH meters shall be installed in their own separate trunkings/conduits or if installed in a common trunking with other unmetered supply cables, then they shall be installed in the manner hereinafter specified. The metered supply cables shall be grouped and secured together by plastic fixing ties. These shall be tagged and identified as metered supply cables within each removable sections of the trunkings.



AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all wiring routes, circuiting, circuitry, electrical points, legends, lightning protection system and all other electrical works based on actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings. The Contractor shall provide two batches of as-built drawings. The first batch of the as-built drawings is for the electrical installation of each individual dwelling unit. These shall be provided inside each dwelling unit before completion of the works for each building block. The size of the as-built drawings shall be A3 size. The as-built drawings for the dwelling unit shall show : (a)

block number and house number of the unit;

(b)

the single-line drawing ( SLD ) of the electrical installation inside the unit;

(c)

the concealed conduit routes in the ceiling slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );

(d)

the concealed conduit routes in the floor slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );

(e)

legend used.

Each as-built drawing shall be duly checked, certified and endorsed by the Contractor. The as-built drawings shall be kept inside a specially - designed and durable envelope and fix adjacent to the unit's consumer unit. For detail arrangement, the Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep. The second batch of as-built drawings is for the complete electrical works and shall be submitted in the following: i. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "pdf" format. Every "pdf" drawing must show the "As-Built" stamp. ii. One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built". iii. Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built". These as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep. on a block-to-block basis not later than two weeks upon the handing over of each building block. The Contractor shall submit a listing of the as-built drawings submitted and a letter certifying that the submitted drawings is a true record of the works asbuilt. Without this certification letter, these as-built drawings will not be accepted. The thickness of these as-built tracings shall be such that its weight is approximately 110 gram per m2. The ink in the as-built tracings shall be permanent and not of the powered-type. The details in the tracings shall be legible and shall not have double or faded images. These as-built tracings will be rejected if found to be of poor quality. 49.15

SAMPLE WORK The Contractor shall put up sample work for the approval of the SO Rep and SPSL before proceeding with the entire installation. The actual positions of all electrical fittings and accessories shall be determined at site by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep when installing lighting and accessories. The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep at least two days in advance between putting up the following sample work so that specific instructions may be given : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Sample unit wiring to all different types of flats Mains trunking Rising mains and horizontal mains Wiring for public lighting Lightning protection system Driving of earth electrodes Other wiring or installation as instructed by the SO Rep

Failure to inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep may result in the rejection of the installation work and no claim for compensation shall be entertained by the Employer. BLDG12/S49.DOC(5) Sal(151211) (DPD)


TEMPORARY STORES The Contractor shall provide suitable temporary store/s at the Site for the safe-keeping of fittings and materials and for their protection against damage or loss by weather or other causes. The location and type of store/s shall be approved by the SO Rep who will have the discretion to exclude in his payment certificates, payment for any fitting or material which is not stored to his satisfaction.

49.17

SUBMISSION OF DETAILS The Contractor's Tender where applicable shall be accompanied by details of the proposed system including details on the technical and performance aspects of the Plant and equipment (antenna, preamplifier, mixer, amplifier, splitter, etc). Single line diagrams of the distribution system with the signal strengths in dbV, for all the distribution points and the proposed underground cable route (if underground system is involved) shall be submitted together with the Tender or when requested by the SO Rep. The approval, with or without amendments, by the SO Rep of the Contractor's System shall not in any way affect vary or relieve the Contractor's liabilities or obligations to ensure compliance of the System with the specified technical performance standards.

49.18

NEW MATERIALS, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT If the Contractor intends to use Plant and equipment and materials which have not been approved previously by the HDB, he shall arrange with the manufacturer or supplier to submit the items for approval prior to the acceptance of the tender. Each article which is submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a full description and technical specification with supporting performance and test data from the manufacturer. In addition, a report of type tests conducted on the article in accordance with the relevant standards shall be submitted. Each article shall be suitably marked for identification and will be retained by the SO Rep for record purposes. When the article is required to be returned, the Contractor shall submit a photograph or illustration suitable for identification and record.

49.19

PLANT, EQUIPMENT/PARTS (a)

The Contractor shall confirm the brands and models of the Plant and equipment and accessories to be used for the Contract within one week from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. At the same time, the Contractor is also required to place order for the Plant and equipment early.

(b)

At the time of tendering, the Contractor shall only offer in his main offer items which have already been approved by the HDB. If the Contractor offers items in his main offer which have not been approved, the tender may be treated as non-compliance with the Specifications and the Employer reserves the right to reject the tender.

(c)

If the Contractor proposed to use a product other than those specified in the Specifications and/or indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed product to the SO Rep for approval not later than one week after the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The provision of subclause 1.2.5 shall be applied accordingly.



TYPE TEST Type test reports issued by the following third-party certified laboratories are acceptable :  Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;  Laboratories with SAC-MRA partners accreditation;  Laboratories participating in IECEE CB scheme. [SAC also signs bilateral Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA) with other national accreditation bodies. It is also a signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) Arrangement and regional cooperation bodies such as Asia Pacific Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (APLAC). IECEE stands for IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment. The IECEE operates the CB (Certification Body) Scheme which is a multilateral certification system based on standards prepared by the International Electrotechnical Commission.]

49.21

SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES) AT BUILDING ROOFTOP The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M & E service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of the service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat arrangement to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical and statutory requirements. The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval before installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner, and the access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not obstructed by service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be supervised and coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the contractor is to provide chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the Drawings. The platform shall be installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such a way as not to pose danger to the maintenance workmen.

49.22

INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when it is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR). The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor. It shall then run on the underside/soffit of the LMR’s floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking. Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location. Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain. Provide a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water from seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit the site conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather. The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it. Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.

Section 50/.....


Bldg Spec Page 50-1 SECTION 50 SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS

50.1

SWITCHBOARDS

50.1.1

General The switchboards shall be suitable for use on a 400/230V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply system and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61439. The switchboards shall incorporate all the items as set out in the Drawings. All costs relating to testing, testing fees and miscellaneous charges necessary for the completion and commissioning of the switchboards ready for continuous operation at its designated Site positions shall be included in the Contract Sum.

50.1.2

Drawings Detailed construction drawings and circuit and wiring diagrams of all switchboards shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before construction. These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly the following (where applicable) : (i)

Plant and equipment

(ii)

Current ratings including short circuit capacities

(iii)

Colour of indicating lamps

(iv)

Position of switches

(v)

Internal connections of all apparatus with all terminal markings

(vi)

All Plant and equipment to be shown in the open or de-energised position

(vii)

All secondary or primary plugged contacts

(viii)

Wire ferrule numbers

(ix)

Size, type and colour of wire

(x)

Current transformer terminal markings and outputs

(xi)

Ammeter and voltmeter scaling

(xii)

Relay settings

(xiii)

The main physical dimensions showing all necessary clearances required for removing covers, opening doors and withdrawing compartments.

(xiv)

Position of all Plant and equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting

(xv)

Identification of all Plant and equipment with the appropriate label engraving describing function and coding

The quantities, sizes and ratings of Plant and equipment incorporated within the switchboards shall be as indicated in the Drawings.

50.1.3

Construction The switchboards shall be of enclosed assembly design, suitable for indoor use in the form of free standing or wall mounting, self-contained, flush fronted cubicles sectionalised as necessary to facilitate easy transportation and erection. The assembly shall be Type Tested in accordance with IEC 61439. The main incoming unit, functional units of metered and unmetered supply, the metered and unmetered busbar sections shall be separately housed in their own cubicles.



Construction (Cont'd) Wall mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front access only and the maximum height shall be 2.0m. Floor mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front and back access. The cubicle sections shall be constructed of electro-galvanised sheet steel frames of minimum thickness of 2.0mm and the panels shall be constructed from electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm. It shall be able to withstand a fault level of 36 KA for 1 second unless specified otherwise in the single-line-diagrams. The enclosures for the switchboards shall provide a degree of protection IP 4X. Each cubicle unit shall be incorporated with a removable cover with hidden hinges. The front cover shall have apertures for the protrusion of operating handles of circuit breakers. The covers shall be constructed of folded electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm. The various units comprising a complete switchboard shall be grouped in a multi-tier arrangement including cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to accommodate terminal boards, cable boxes and gland plates. All external panels of the switchboard shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving a total paint thickness of not less than 50 microns. All coats of paint shall be oven baked and dried.

50.1.4

Busbars Four pole air insulated busbars of uniform cross-sectional area throughout their length with a continuous rating or dimensions not less than that indicated in the Drawings shall be arranged neatly. The busbars and busbar connections between the busbars and various items of the switchgear shall be manufactured from copper. All busbars shall be tinned, and continuous lengths without connections shall be insulated with heat shrinking sleeves. Busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators strong enough to endure, without damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the bars under normal operating conditions and forces created by prospective fault currents. Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments and these compartments shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for coupling to the busbars. Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by the removal of a cover secured by bolts. Behind the covers, an insulating sheet with warning labels bearing the word "DANGER" in bold letters and the lightning symbol shall be provided so that final access can be gained only through removing this sheet secured by round head screws. In addition, for the chambers housing the main busbars, the insulating sheet shall be of transparent material with the word "Danger" in bold letters and the lightning symbol. The material for the transparent sheet shall be of minimum 3mm thick clear polycarbonate with the following properties : (a)

greater than 86% light transmittance

(b)

special treatment for high abrasive resistance

(c)

high self ignition temperature.

The busbars shall, where necessary, have built-in facilities near the load side of the incomer to enable PowerGrid to fit their metering transformers and sealing of this compartment.



Circuits And Connections All connections between busbars and the switchgears shall be copper busbars or PVC insulated copper cables of minimum cross-sectional area of not less than the rating of outgoing cables connected to the switchgear. All cable connections shall be terminated with proper cable lugs and shrouded with heat shrunk PVC sleeves of the appropriate phase identifying colour. Small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, or shall be enclosed in plastic purpose made small wiring trunking or trough. Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the related item of the switchgear. A HRC fuse shall be fixed within the respective compartment to protect the control circuit. Where control circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the fuse shall also be used to isolate the terminals of these contacts. Where auxiliary contacts are used for interlocking purposes and supplies are derived from other sources, isolating facilities shall be provided to render the auxiliary switches safe. This isolation shall be in the form of auxiliary switches mounted on the respective compartment isolating device or a separate isolator mounted within the respective compartment. All small wiring shall be of multi-stranded copper not less than 1.5mm2 (7/0.50mm) with PVC insulation. All control wiring shall be identified with numbered ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the schematic wiring diagram. All fuses shall be of the HRC type complete with bridges, terminal shrouds and carriers. Small wiring associated with external control circuits shall be connected to terminal strips which shall be conveniently arranged to facilitate the termination of incoming multi-core cables. Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than two wires shall be connected to any outgoing. Each terminal block for external wiring shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity. All wiring diagrams shall show the terminal blocks in terminal sequence.

50.1.6

Earth Bar A solid, tinned copper earth bar shall be provided at the base of the switchboard. The minimum crosssectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 25mm x 3mm. It shall run the length of the switchboard and shall be easily accessible by removing the bottom front panels of the switchboard. All earth continuity conductors of the mains cables shall be terminated by means of appropriate cable lugs at the earth bar. The earth terminal of any cubicle of the switchboard shall also be connected to the earth bar by an adequately-sized earth continuity conductor. The earth bar shall be connected by a PVC insulated 70mm copper earth cable to the main earth bar in the switch room.

50.1.7

Metering, Instruments And Accessories Facilities shall be provided on the switchboards for PowerGrid to carry out their metering. The cubicle for housing PowerGrid meters, fuses, cut-outs and neutral links shall comply with the requirements of PowerGrid/SPSL. Where required, the Contractor shall collect and install the meters for PowerGrid all at the Contractor's cost and expense. Where indicated, voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided. Indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 60051, accuracy class 1.5. Instruments shall be of the moving iron type, with external zero adjustment. They shall be flush-mounted and housed in a pressed steel or plastic case with shield plate. Instrument terminals shall be shrouded.



Metering, Instruments And Accessories (Cont'd) Voltmeters shall be incorporated with selector switches for phase to phase and phase to neutral indication. Ammeters shall be of the current transformer operated type and shall be incorporated with selector switches for indication of all phase currents. Switches shall be of the rotary wafer type. Where maximum demand ammeters are specified, they shall be of the bimetallic type with thermal delay to suppress the short-term current and indicate the average effective value. The response time of the maximum demand ammeter shall be 8 minutes. The maximum pointer shifted by the bimetallic mechanism shall be reset manually by means of an external knob. Maximum demand ammeter shall be provided for each phase. Phase indicator lamps shall be of the light emitting diodes (LED) types, operating on direct 230 volts or on step-down voltage provided by a step-down transformer.

50.1.8

Current Transformers Current transformers shall be of the straight through type with suitable ratio, output and class of accuracy for their function and shall comply with IEC 60044. Measuring current transformers shall have accuracy of Class 1 and protective transformers shall have an accuracy of 5P10. Groups of current transformers used on three phase systems shall have their secondary connections starred and earthed. When measuring line current values using a common meter with a selector switch, they shall be connected so that the current transformers shall be shorted out when not being used for indication. This shall be carried out in the selector switch by "make before break" contacts.

50.1.9

Earth Fault Digital Protection Relay The digital protection relays offered shall be in compliance with the following : Parameters Operating temperature Humidity Vibration Shock and Bump Seismic Insulation

Relevant Standard IEC 60068 IEC 60068 IEC 60255 IEC 60255 IEC 60255 IEC 60255

Transient Overvoltage

IEC 60255

High frequency Disturbance

IEC 60255

Electrostatic Discharge Radio Frequency Disturbance Fast Transient Enclosure Protection EMC Compliance

IEC 60255 IEC 60255

Dielectric withstand

IEC 60255 SS IEC 529 EN50081-1,2 EN50082-1,2 89/336/EEC IEC60255

Impulse voltage

IEC60255


Requirements -10C to +55C 56 days at 40C and 95% RH class I class I class I 2kVrms for 1 min between all terminals and earth 2kVrms for 1 min between independent circuits 1kVrms for 1 min across NO contacts class III, 5kV 1.2/50s between all terminals and earth without damage or flashover. 2.5kV common mode <3% deviation 1.0kV series mode <3% deviation 8kV direct without mal-operation or damage 20MHz to 1 GHz at 10V/m and <5% deviation class IV ,4kV 5/50ns <3% deviation IP52 minimum

2KV common mode 1KV differential mode 5KV common mode 1KV differential mode


Earth Fault (Cont’d) Digital Protection Relay (Cont’d) All protective relays shall be mounted in dust-proof cases, which shall be earthed. The relay front shall be protected by a transparent cover and shall be designed for flush mounting at the door of the low voltage compartment of switchgear panel. In the event of a failure, the faulty module can be replaced without the need of soldering. The relays shall have an integrated keypad with LCD or LED display. The LCD display shall be backlighted during reading of relay parameter. There must be at least one LED with one indicating trip (red). Resetting of LEDs’ indications shall be possible with front cover closed. When the relay front cover is closed, only the reading of relay settings is possible. Changing of relay settings shall require the removal of relay’s front cover. The LCD or LED display shall give a clear message of the fault type by indicating the affected phase and the type of operation such as instantaneous, DTL earth fault or IDMTL overcurrrent. Fault code is not preferred and where this is inevitable, a non-fading, waterproof self-adhesive label is to be provided next to the relay. The relay shall be able to store the last fault record. The digital protection relays shall display load current and maximum demand current in primary values. Panel meter shall be used to display primary current. The relay shall be suitable for operation in a 50 Hz system. The relay shall have at least two contacts for direct tripping of the circuit breakers. Relay contacts shall make firmly without bounce. The relay parameter and setting relay parameter shall be intact in the event of power failure. All relays shall be suitably marked, visible from the front of the relay without removing the cover with the following information : (a) (b) (c)

Function of relay (e.g. IDMTL overcurrent/ DTL earth fault relay) Maximum demand current Rated frequency

All digital relays provided shall have at least 2 binary outputs for external telemonitoring connections. The contractor may in lieu of digital protection relay provide electromechanical protection relays complying with the below requirements : Electromechanical Earth Fault Relay Earth fault protection shall be afforded by instantaneous attracted armature earth fault relay with a flag indicator that can be reset by hand. The earth fault relay shall operate at primary fault current not exceeding 140 Amps. Adjustment of operating time lag shall be provided by a solid-state delay timer with a setting range of 0.1 to 1 second. The time lag setting shall not exceed 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated. The relay shall be flush-mounted and located in a cubicle adjacent to the incoming circuit breaker. Electromechanical Overcurrent Relay Overcurrent relays shall be Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) relay or Definite Time Lag (DTL) relay as indicated in the Drawings. IDMTL relay shall be heavily damped induction disc units with time/current characteristics in accordance with IEC 60255-6. Its accuracy shall be calibrated at 50 Hz to fall into accuracy class 1 as given in IEC 60255-6. The relay shall be suitable for flush or project mounting and shall be tropicalised and protected against dust, shock and vibration. It shall remain operative up to an ambient temperature of 50oC without deterioration of its performance characteristics. DTL relay shall have adjustable current setting of 2 Amp to 7 Amp and adjustable delay time setting of 0 second to 1 second. Setting accuracy for current shall be less than 5% at full scale and setting accuracy for time shall be less than 10% at full scale. The relay shall be incorporated with a test button, rest button and indicating lamp.



Identification Of Equipment And Circuits Each item of switchgear, including each switch forming part of a switchboard or panel shall be clearly labelled externally, to identify its relation to Drawings details. Labels shall be of "Formica" engraving laminate or other approved or similar material having black characters on white background, with 5mm minimum height characters. They shall be secured to the front of the panel by instrument headed screws or adhesive or epoxy glue. All circuits shall be phase identified at their terminations by means of colour coded heat shrunk sleeves.

50.1.11

Tests (i)

Type Tests (a)

Switchboards shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance with the requirements laid down in the Specifications. The type tests shall include the following : (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(b)

(ii)

Verification of temperature rise unit Verification of dielectric properties Verification of short circuit strength Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit Verification of clearances and creepage distances Verification of mechanical operation Verification of degree of protections.

The type tests shall be conducted by independent testing authority which shall be a member of the Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA) or by laboratories with either SAC-SINGLAS accreditation or SAC-MRA partners accreditation. The type test certificate shall be accompanied by a complete type test report which shall include amongst other information, arrangement and details of switchboard construction, calibration oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise measurements.

Factory and Delivery Tests With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators and MCCB closed and power fuses fitted, the switchboard panels shall be subjected to a pressure test of 2.5kV for one minute, across the following points : (1) (2) (3) (4)

Phase to phase Phase to neutral Phase to earth Neutral to earth

The above tests shall be conducted at the place of manufacture and witnessed by the SO Rep. A test certificate by the switchboard manufacturer shall be issued on completion of the tests. The site tests of main switchboards and setting of the protective relays shall be also witnessed by the SO Rep. Approval of the tests and test certificates received by the SO Rep shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations to supply the complete Plant and equipment assembly in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.

50.2

Reserved



TAP-OFF BOXES

50.3.1

General The tap-off boxes shall be purpose made according to the details given in the Drawings and shall comply with the following subclauses. The tap-off box shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. A sample of the tap-off box shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.

50.3.2

Design And Dimension The overall dimensions and essential details of the tap-off boxes shall be according to the Drawings. The tap-off boxes shall comply with IEC 60439. The internal layout may be re-arranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box. Tap-off boxes shall have hinged access door facilities for locking with a master key system. Four master keys shall be handed over to the relevant Branch Office by the Contractor on Substantial Completion of the Contract. All line-branch connectors shall be adequately sized for the cables used. It shall allow the main and branch cables to be separately secured to the connecting block with the main cable continuous and uncut.

50.3.3

Metal Box The metal box shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of the box shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the mounting plate for electrical Plant and equipment shall be of 1.5mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint of thickness not less than 45 microns and shall be oven baked and dried. The metal box shall comply with the latest edition of SS 5.

50.3.4

Phase Marking All line-branch connectors shall be identified with their respective phase colours after completion of installation.

50.4

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS Distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, of appropriate size, and they shall house the number of ways and miniature circuit breakers or HRC fuses as indicated in the Drawings. Distribution boards shall have hinged access doors with suitable dustproof seals. Each board shall have insulated protective shields to prevent accidental contact with live parts. Neutral and earth busbars shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor connected to them. Each distribution board shall have an approved circuit list fixed on the inside of the door. Labels shall also be supplied for each distribution board screwed to the front giving board reference. The construction of distribution boards shall comply with the requirements for the construction of switchboards. Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439.



MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) All MCCB shall comply with latest requirements of IEC 60947-2. Triple pole MCCB shall be rated at 400V ac and double pole MCCB shall be rated at 230V ac. The rated service short circuit breaking capacity (lcs) shall be at least 50% of the rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (lcu) for all MCCB. The fault level of the incoming breaker at the main switchboard shall be assumed to be 36 kA at rated voltage of 400V unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. All other MCCB within the main switchboard shall be rated to comply with the calculations based on the above starting fault level or the level as indicated otherwise in the Drawings. The main incoming MCCB shall be fitted with a round type external handle. The handle shall incorporate provisions for locking the handle in either the "OFF" or "ON" position and for interlocking with the hinged door of the compartment. There shall be a marking plate to indicate the "ON", "OFF", "RESET" and "TRIP" modes. It shall be possible to adjust the instantaneous tripping of the main incoming MCCB from 2 to 8 times of its rated current. It shall also be incorporated with shunt trip facility where external earth fault protection is required. Each triple pole MCCB shall be provided with a neutral link housed in the same compartment. The neutral link shall be constructed of tinned copper bar of suitable cross-section to match the circuit conductors with a bridged piece to facilitate disconnection without removal of the connection cables during testing. Connection of cables to the neutral link shall be by cable lugs, bolts and nuts. All MCCB shall be mounted and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

50.6

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) All MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle-type tripping switch and shall comply with the latest requirements of IEC 60898. The MCB shall be rated for phase voltage of 230V, 50 Hz operation and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA (M6) unless stated otherwise.

50.7

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB) The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second. It shall comply with the latest requirements of SS 97. The RCCB shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark. RCCBs installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test Mark.

50.8

SWITCH FUSES, ISOLATORS AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Switch fuses, isolators and isolating switches shall be of the quick-made and break type, suitable for the rating of the Plant and equipment served. Switch fuses shall comply with IEC 60947-3 and shall be fitted with fuses to BS 88, bolted type, Class Q1, certified for 400V and category of Duty AC23. Isolators and isolating switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. For isolating switches, solid copper links shall be fitted in place of fuses.

50.9

CONTACTORS Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase four-wire 400/230V 50 Hz supplies and fitted with 220 - 250V ac coils, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424:Part 1. Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization category shall be AC-3.



BLOCK CONNECTORS All block connectors used for branching of circuits or neutral links shall be tinned brass blocks contained within phenolic moulded cases. They shall be rated for the load current of the circuits. The cable entries and terminals of the connector shall be of the correct size for the termination of the conductors. Not more than one cable shall be terminated into each terminal of the connector. All exposed parts of the connection shall be covered and sealed. Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductor between the metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure but without causing damage to the conductors. The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are properly terminated and all terminations are tightened at each conductor. He shall make good all damages resulting from loose or faulty connections.

Section 51/.....


Bldg Spec Page 51-1 SECTION 51 MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES

51.1

CABLES

51.1.1

General Fire rated cables shall be listed under TUV SUD PSB PLS Class Class 1 or other approved equivalent recognized by FSSD. The cable conductors shall be annealed copper. Identification trade marks, voltage rating and crosssectional area of the conductor shall be embossed or printed on the surface of the sheathing of the cable. Every coil or drum of cable shall have a tag as label attached giving the following information : (a)

Name and type of cable

(b)

Cross-sectional area and number of core

(c)

Length

(d)

Manufacturer's name, mark or other trademark

(e)

Rated operating voltage

All cables shall be new and unused and shall be delivered to the Site with the manufacturer's seals, labels or other proof of origin intact. All cables shall be of the size and type specified in the Drawings or Specifications.

51.1.2

PVC-Insulated Cables All PVC-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise in the Drawings :

51.1.3

(a)

Single core PVC-insulated non-sheathed cables shall comply with SS 358 with all the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 450/750 Volts.

(b)

Single and multi-core PVC-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 502 with all the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.

(c)

Underground cable shall be PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with BS 6346. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.

Fire Rated Cables All fire rated cables use in fire safety measures to maintain integrity of main supplies shall comply with SS 299 and approved by FSSD. Fire rated signal cables shall be rated at least to 300/500V. The rating of other fire rated cables used in 230V and 400V systems can be 450/750V or 600/1000V. They shall be single or multicore cables as shown in the Drawings, each comprising stranded circular annealed copper conductors and a fire resisting barrier. Cable sizes of 1.5mm2 to 4mm2 can be single insulated and cable sizes of 6mm2 and above shall have both insulation and sheath. The thickness of the insulation and sheath shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's technical specification where the relevant BS or IEC standards are not applicable. Further, the construction of the cables shall be in accordance with its relevant SS, BS or IEC standards and a type test report shall be submitted.


Bldg Spec Page 51-2

51.1

CABLES

51.1.4

XLPE-Insulated Cables

(CONT’D)

All XLPE-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise or indicated in the Drawings: (a)

Single and multi-core XLPE-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 60502 with all the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.

(b)

Underground cable shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with IEC 60502. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.

51.2

CABLE INSTALLATION

51.2.1

Cable Installation - General All cables shall be installed generally along the routes and in the manner indicated in the Drawings and in accordance with the notes and instructions therein. Notwithstanding the above requirement, all cable routes shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences. All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints unless the length required is in excess of the length obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer. In such cases, the position of each and every joint shall be approved by the SO Rep. No other joints, whether straight through or tee, will be permitted. All cables shall be run neatly and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building. The cables shall be laid in flat formation and touching each other. Where a cable has no change direction, whether in a horizontal or a vertical plane, the radius of the bend in the cable shall not be less than the minimum laid down in CP 5 or the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise specified, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with the installation of cables, together with all of the work involved, shall be provided by the Contractor whether or not it is or they are specifically mentioned in the Specifications.

51.2.2

Mains Cables Installation Mains cables shall be encased in metal trunking supported on walls, ceilings or structural steelwork where surface mounted unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications. Cables shall be laid flat or trefoil in the trunking and clipped together in sets with nylon cable ties, PVC covered metallic cable ties or stainless steel cable ties. However, only PVC covered metallic cable ties and stainless steel cable ties shall be used to secure fire-resistant cables. No overlapping of set of cables will be permitted. Cables shall be fixed to the perforated steel bridges provided at the base of the trunking. Before placing an order for the trunking, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his proposals relating to the arrangement of the cables in the trunking and the sizes of the trunkings. The SO Rep shall have the right to reject any such proposals if, in his opinion, the metal trunking is of inadequate size to facilitate ease of installation of cables in the trunking. All mains cables shall be run continuously without any joint or break. Branching of horizontal sub-mains or load cables shall be made by the removal of the PVC insulation and sheath of the main cables to facilitate connection at line-taps in tap-off units.



CABLE INSTALLATION

(CONT’D)

51.2.3

Installation Of Underground Cables

51.2.3.1

Installation Of Underground Cables - General Underground cables shall be laid direct in the ground or drawn into pipe ducts as indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall excavate trenches for the laying of cables and/or the installation of cable ducts, and subsequently backfilling them. He shall also dispose of surplus debris arising from the excavations and reinstate the ground surfaces to match adjacent surface finishes. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of existing buried services, and shall bear the cost and expense of any damages incurred. All cables buried direct in the ground shall be laid at a depth such that the vertical distance from the top of the cable to the ground surface is not less than 750mm. Before cable laying commences, all cable trenches shall be drained, the bed graded and tamped, and all loose stones and similar debris removed. After laying, the cable shall be covered with earth which is free of debris to provide a 50mm cover after tamping. All cables shall be further protected by a continuous layer of PVC cover plates.

51.2.3.2

PVC Cover Plates The cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0m and 2.0m. Each cover plate shall be nominal 150mm in width and nominal 2.0mm in thickness. The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistant hard PVC. The colour of the plate shall preferably be yellow and shall remain permanent and non-fading. Each cable cover plate shall be linked to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain. The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards or their equivalent.

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Description Impact Test Tensile Strength Vicat Softening Temperature Accelerated Ageing

Standard Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard) Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard) ASTM D1525 ASTM D3045

The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties : (a)

Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength should not have more than 3 cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). And the drop hammer should not penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens. Should the specimens tested on the second series of test also fail to meet the requirements, the whole test is to be considered as failed.

(b)

The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.

(c)

The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72°C (Rate A at 50°C ±5°C per hour).

(d)

The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70°C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be less than 25% of the original value.



CABLE INSTALLATION

(CONT’D)

51.2.3

Installation Of Underground Cables

51.2.3.2

PVC Cover Plates

(Cont'd)

(Cont'd)

All cables shall run at least 300mm clear of all other services, regardless of whether these other services are laid parallel with or transversely to the cable trench. Cables shall, in general, pass below all intersecting piped services which cross the cable route, unless this would mean the cables descending to a depth of more than 2.0m. In such cases the cables shall be run according to the directions of the SO Rep. Where cables cross roads or carparks, or enter buildings, or elsewhere as indicated in the Drawings, they shall be drawn into underground UPVC pipes of minimum 100mm diameter. Where such pipes are not provided by others, they shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor all at the Contractor's cost and expense. All UPVC pipes shall be Class "B" type in accordance to SS 141. The installation of underground cables shall be carried out in the "loop-in" principle. All cable joints shall be carried out at the terminal boxes and fuse cut-outs. No underground joints shall be permitted without the prior approval of the SO Rep. The cables shall be terminated in brass compression glands with clamping device for the armour. The glands shall be of approved design and of the correct size. At all cable terminations, the armouring of the cables shall be solidly bonded to earth by means of properly designed clamps and a copper conductor of cross-sectional area not less than the requirements of CP5. For excavation work involving existing roads, carparks, paved areas or other services such as gas and water, the Contractor shall seek prior approval from the relevant authorities before commencing any work. 51.2.3.3

Cable Glands All armoured PVC insulated cables shall be properly terminated with brass compression glands of suitable size for clamping the steel wire armour. The glands shall comply with the requirements of EN 50262. All cable glands shall be provided complete with shrouds, brass locknuts and earth tags. The earth tags shall be solidly connected together and to the earth terminal by a PVC insulated copper conductor of cross-section not less than the requirements of CP5.

51.2.3.4

Underground Cable Joints for Armoured PVC Insulated Cables Underground cable joints shall only be permitted where the length of the cable required is in excess of the length of cable obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer, or, in special circumstances where approved in writing by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of any proposed underground cable joints and the position of all joints shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences. The underground cable joint shall be made with a resin type joint kit complete with thermoplastic mould and accessories and the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, full details of the joint kit which he proposes to supply, together with a full jointing specification. All jointing work, once commenced, shall be completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without interruption. No jointing work, shall commence without the prior approval and visual observation of the SO Rep. All joints shall be made exactly in accordance with the cable joint kit manufacturer's instructions, using only the materials approved in the manufacturer's specifications and kit. To ensure continuity and full conductivity of the steel wire armour, a copper lead of minimum crosssectional area as the cable conductors shall be used in conjunction with the armour bond kit available from the cable joint manufacturer.


Bldg Spec Page 52-1 SECTION 52 CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS

52.1

METAL TRUNKING

52.1.1

Metal Trunking - General All metal trunking and associated fittings shall comply with SS 249. They shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at intervals not exceeding 1m by means of brass or steel screws which are protected against corrosion by a finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating. Electro-brass plated screws shall not be used. Trunkings encased by cement when passing through floor slabs shall be of separate sections such that the exposed lids not encased shall be removable. Perforated steel bridges shall be spot welded at the base of the trunking for the fixing of cables. Two rows of perforations of different sizes shall be provided. The bridges shall be spaced at intervals of 400mm and at not more than 200mm from ends. All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and treated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of trunking and fittings shall not be less than those specified in the following table :

Nominal Thickness of Sheet Steel Nominal Width of Trunking (mm)

50mm and below 75mm to 100mm 125mm to 175mm Above 175mm

Thickness of Body (mm)

Thickness of Cover (mm)

1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6

1.0 1.2 1.2 1.4

The standard depths of the trunking used shall be 50mm and 75mm. The standard length shall not be less than 2m. At the ground floor of the buildings, the size of the metal trunking installed from the consumer switch room to all service ducts shall be at least 375 mm by 75 mm throughout. Inside the service ducts, the size of the metal trunkings for the lift risers and flat risers shall be at least 150 mm by 75 mm throughout from the ground floor level to the roof level. Lift risers shall be installed in the Lift and Mechanical (L&M) service duct, located near the lift lobby, where such ducts are provided. Otherwise, a separate metal trunking shall be provided inside the Electrical & Telecoms Services (E&T) duct next to the flat riser. Notwithstanding the above requirements, the figure in percentage of the sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in which they are installed shall not exceed 35%. Cables shall be installed in trefoil, neatly tied together in each set and secured to the bridges at the base of the metal trunkings. The sets shall be clearly labelled for easy identification of its usage and shall be arranged so that the spare space is reserved on one side. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables in the metal trunking.



Metal Trunking - Installation Metal trunking shall be run vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building. In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high. The manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used for bends, angles, offsets, cross-overs and other nonstandard runs. The practice of cutting and bending trunking to form flanges and attachments shall not be permitted. Trunking shall be properly aligned and securely fixed by gun tool method or rawl plug fitted at regular intervals not exceeding 600mm and at not more than 300mm from the ends. Where the trunking is suspended from the ceiling, wall or structure, it shall be supported by mild steel angle or channel iron brackets at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m. The brackets shall be finished to the same standard as the trunking. Each individual piece of trunking on straight runs shall be independently supported. Where bends, angles or offsets occur, additional fixings shall be supplied at a distance of not exceeding 150mm on either side of the accessory. Any bonding links and their fastening supplied to satisfy electrical continuity conditions shall not cause any electrolytic corrosion. Trunking connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be so designed that the trunking sections mate with butting joints. Where the trunking passes through a floor slab or beam, the portion of the trunking which is to be embedded in the floor or beam opening shall have a permanently fixed lid to form a steel sleeve at least 250mm long. Where the trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking joint shall be made. The connector at this point shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10mm in both the horizontal and vertical planes. Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred, it shall be removed and the area treated with a rust proofing agent. After this, it shall be treated by the application of a zinc epoxy and followed by a coat of colour matching paint. Holes cut in the trunking for the passage of PVC covered cables shall be treated as above and provided with grommets, or alternatively bushed or lined to prevent damage to the PVC covering.

52.2

CABLE TRAY

52.2.1

Cable Tray - General Cable trays and accessories shall be perforated and manufactured from hot rolled mild steel conforming to BS 1449:Part 1 or JIS G3131 SOHC with hot dip galvanised finish to BS EN ISO 1461. Electrolytic zinc coated steel sheet conforming to JIS G3313 SECC and coated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 micron can be used in indoor environment.



Cable Tray - General (Cont'd) The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of the cable tray and accessories shall not be less than those specified in the following table : Nominal Width of Tray (mm)

Nominal Thickness Sheet Steel (mm)

100 150 210 300 360 450 600

1.0 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0

The standard length of cable tray shall not be less than 2.4m.

52.2.2

Cable Tray - Installation All accessories including bends (vertical and horizontal), intersections, tees, risers and reducing sections shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer. Where site conditions necessitate site fabrication, obtain the specific approval of the proposals from the SO Rep before commencement of the fabrication and the standards of fabrications and finish shall not be less than that of the manufacturers' standard items. Sections of cable tray and accessories shall be jointed using mushroom-head roofing bolts, nuts and washers. The joint screws, nuts and washers shall all be galvanised or sherardized steel. Brass shall not be used. The cable tray shall be of adequate size to meet the installation requirements. Cables shall be installed on trays in a single layer leaving 25% of the tray width spare for future use. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables on the tray and the width of the trays. Cable trays shall preferably be installed such that they offer direct support to cables. Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1200mm and 150mm from all bends, tees, intersections and risers. They shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar or angle iron or channel iron, and treated with one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint to give a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. Where horizontal runs of cable tray cross building or structure expansion joints, then the tray shall be cut between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint. The tray sections shall then be jointed with bolts, nuts and washers installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of ±10mm from the initial fastening position. Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal and not through perforations. Burrs or sharp edges shall be removed prior to the installation of the tray sections or accessories. The cut or damaged metal shall be made good by the Contractor by first treating the surfaces with a suitable rust proofing agent and then applying finishes comparable to the remainder of the surface. Cables shall be secured to the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties or saddles at intervals of 400mm and at not more than 200mm from the ends. Cable tray and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout its length. Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and secured with a minimum of two screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be effectively bonded to the earthing system.



PVC TRUNKING

52.3.1

General All PVC trunking shall be of a non-flame propagating type complying with the dimensions and performance requirements of SS 275. The PVC trunking shall be made in white base and white clip-on cover from high impact PVC and shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2.0m or more. All PVC trunking shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.

52.3.1.1

Single Compartment Trunking The nominal external dimensions of the PVC trunking shall be 40mm, 32mm and 25mm width and the height shall be in accordance with SS 275. The downdrop for the domestic socket outlets and lighting switches shall be of 32mm by 16mm size except where two-compartment trunking is used. The ceiling tees to lighting points shall be of 25mm by 12.5mm size.

52.3.1.2

80mm x 32mm Two-Compartment Trunking The overall dimensions and essential detailing of the trunking shall be according to the Drawings. The trunking shall have two compartments, one for electrical power cables and the other for telephone and CATV/SCV cables. The space between the cover and the two compartments is reserved for the crossing of these services within the trunking. This space should used for the crossing of these cables only if allowed by CP 5 and IDA COPIF.

52.3.1.3

60mm x 20mm Two-Compartment Trunking This trunking shall have two compartments, 40mm wide and 20mm wide. The larger compartment is for electrical power cables while the smaller is for telephone and CATV cables.

52.3.2

PVC Trunking - Installation

52.3.2.1

General The PVC trunking shall run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines. In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high. For the two-compartment trunkings, the Contractor shall liaise closely with the PTL and other parties involved such that all wiring works could proceed smoothly and the cover is installed after all the wiring works by all other parties (where applicable) are installed. The Contractor shall not in any circumstances be absolved from his responsibility for replacing any trunking or cover found damaged or defective. The PVC trunking shall be installed continuously through beam openings so as to ensure segregation of the low voltage and extra low voltage. Where this is not possible, individual PVC sleeves shall be provided for the protection of the different voltage categories of cables. The trunking cover passing through the beam shall be a short piece so as to facilitate removal of the cover for easy maintenance and replacement or addition of cables.

52.3.2.2

Single Compartment Trunking - Installation The PVC trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular intervals not exceeding 400mm and at not more than 100mm from the ends. The fixings shall be staggered across the width of the trunking base. Cables shall be secured with purpose-made PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the ends except for the two trunking sizes of 32mm by 16mm and 25mm by 12.5mm which do not require PVC clips.



PVC Trunking - Installation (Cont'd)

52.3.2.3

80mm x 32mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, staggered across the two compartments at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 100mm from the ends. The electrical compartment shall be separately enclosed with PVC cover while the other compartment shall be provided with PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the ends. The trunking shall be provided from the electrical tap-off unit, telephone and CATV distribution boxes to all dwelling units at each floor as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall liaise with the PTL to determine the exact locations of their distribution boxes. In addition, the Contractor shall install a short length of trunking above the electrical meter board or outside the units to house the telephone rosette and CATV connectors where applicable.

52.3.2.4

60mm x 20mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 50mm from the ends. Cables shall be secured with PVC clips at intervals of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the ends.

52.4

METAL CONDUIT All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge screwed steel conduits complying with BS 4568:Part 1 and shall have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion. All flexible steel conduit and adapters shall comply with BS 731 including all its latest amendments. All conduit fittings shall comply with BS 4568:Part 2 and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of the item. Bushes and plugs shall be of brass. All other fittings and components shall be galvanised and having Class 4 protection against corrosion. The metal boxes for the enclosure of the electrical accessories shall comply with BS 4662 with heavy protection both inside and outside. All conduit shall be free of rust patches or other Defect on delivery and protected from mechanical damage and weather when stored on the Site. No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used. Spacer bar saddles shall be hot dip galvanised steel with a minimum thickness of 0.8mm. Retaining screws for saddle tops shall be of brass or steel zinc plated. Electro-brass plated screw shall not be used. The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit. Where the conduit has to be bent, it shall be bent using an approved bending machine such that the conduit section shall not be altered. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall be installed in any run of conduit without a conduit box. All metal conduits and its fittings shall pass type test.



RIGID PVC CONDUIT All rigid PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-21: Particular requirements – Rigid conduit systems. All conduit shall be of the high impact heavy mechanical strength type. PVC conduit used in surface wiring shall be white where required to match the adjacent PVC trunking. Otherwise, PVC conduit can be of any colour and as specified. All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-21: Particular requirements – Rigid conduit systems and indelibly marked with the name of the manufacturer or trademark of the item. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the same manufacturer. No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used. All conduit joints shall be made using standard couplers and PVC solvent supplied by the manufacturer of the conduit and to the method laid down by the manufacturer. All such joints shall be watertight. The same conditions apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of conduit and accessories prior to the jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for or when the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal Plant and equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used. Expansion couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m. Within such couplers, a space of not less than 10mm shall be allowed between the ends of the conduit. The solvent adhesive used in such joints shall allow for movement caused by expansion without affecting the watertightness of the joint. A similar system shall be employed when conduits cross building expansion joints in any situation and the couplers shall span the joints. All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25mm and below may be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation. The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending purposes and the manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be taken into accessories without sets or bends.

52.6

INSTALLATION OF RIGID CONDUIT

52.6.1

Installation Of Rigid Conduit - General The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating his work with other trades and for working to any conduit layout in the Drawings that may be issued. Where such Drawings are not issued, the Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings showing all conduit routes to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencing the erection. The maximum number of cables drawn into any one conduit shall not exceed those allowed by reference to the relevant regulations and tables in the current CP 5. The size of the conduits shall be decided on this basis unless otherwise stated. The whole of the conduit system in any particular section shall be completed and swabbed through to remove any dirt or loose matter before cables are drawn in. All sub-circuit cables drawn into one conduit shall be connected to the same phase. In the case of three phase circuits, all three phases and the neutral shall be contained in the same conduit. Conduits shall be supported at intervals not greater than 600mm for vertical run exposed to touch and not greater than 1m for others. Where conduit connects to surface-mounted Plant and equipment or accessories, it shall be additionally supported within 150mm of either side of the item.



Installation Of Rigid Conduit - General (Cont'd) Where bends and sets occur, the conduit shall be fixed at a distance of 150mm, either side of such diversion. The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit. Where the conduit has to be bent it shall be bent without altering its section, using an approved bending machine. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall be installed in any run of conduit without a conduit box. Where conduits connect to distribution boards, trunking, switch fuse units, consumer control units, switch boxes, etc they shall be secured to the apparatus by means of flanged couplings. Where conduits cross the expansion joints they shall be installed so as not to resist relative movement between the sections. A suitable arrangement is to use a flexible conduit and adaptors in these positions. The adaptors shall be earth bonded by a PVC insulated copper conductor of not less than 2.5mm2. Final connections from the conduit installation to all motors, other apparatus subject to vibration and as specified elsewhere, shall be made using watertight, PVC sheathed, rustproof flexible conduit.

52.6.2

Surface-Mounted Surface-mounted conduit shall be run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines. Conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles. Conduits boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit. Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall be installed so that they can remain accessible for purposes such as the withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of new or additional cables. Where metal conduit has been cut or otherwise damaged, including exposed threads and connections, it shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy to generously overlap the existing sound metal coating. Open ends of metal conduit shall be free from burrs and so bushed such that the cables are not damaged.

52.6.3

Concealed Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25mm depth of cover. Conduit buried in plaster shall have a 5mm minimum depth of cover. Dimensions other than the above shall be subject to prior approval by the SO Rep. For conduits to be concealed in walls, reference shall also be made from CP 5 on locations in a wall where conduits are permitted. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed in an electrical installation at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with clause 52.4 shall be used. For conduit concealed in suspended type ceilings, the weight of the conduit shall, under no circumstances be carried by the suspended ceiling. Suitable fixings and hangers shall be installed direct to the structure by the Contractor only after they have been approved by the SO Rep. Concealed conduit work in concrete or composition slabs, walls, cast in-situ and in plaster shall be offered to the SO Rep for inspection prior to concealment. The Contractor shall give the SO Rep two days notice that a reasonable section of concealed conduit work will be ready for inspection. Where conduits are laid in concrete or composition slabs, cast in in-situ slabs, walls, beams, etc, the Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance whilst the pouring operation is being carried out, in order to avoid any damage which may be caused to the conduits. Where it is necessary to hack chases for conduit runs, the Contractor shall mark out the proposed runs at site and shall seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing any work.



Concealed (Cont'd) Immediately on completion of erection of each conduit run, all exposed terminations shall be plugged effectively against the ingress of water and dirt. All concealed conduit work shall be installed on the "loop-in" system. Inspection elbows or bends and tees shall not be allowed. Where it is impracticable to set conduit, normal factory made bends may be used but only with the approval of the SO Rep. Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable; these shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another without undue cramping. No joints shall be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances. Ceiling point boxes or draw-in boxes on a concealed installation shall finish flush with the underside of the ceilings. All conduit boxes not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be installed with a suitable cover fixed with brass or stainless steel roundhead screws. Where any surface mounting control gear or other Plant and equipment is to be installed in conjunction with concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted adaptable box. The back of the Plant and equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and the Plant and equipment mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box.

52.6.4

Pliable PVC Conduit Pliable PVC conduit for use in concealed wiring system shall comply with the requirements of this subclause. The pliable PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-22: Particular requirements – Pliable conduit systems. All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-22: Particular requirements – Pliable conduit systems and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of the item. The conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the same manufacturer. No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used. All conduit joints shall be made in accordance to the recommended methods laid down by the manufacturer of the conduit. All such joints shall be watertight. The same requirements shall also apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is forbidden. Before joints are made, the conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of the conduit and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted into couplers for jointing purposes. Couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m. The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 3 times the outside diameter of the conduit. For concealed wiring system, a short length (maximum 200 mm length) of PVC pliable conduit may be used to connect the misaligned moulded boxes to the PVC rigid conduits Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be taken into accessories without sets or bends. All pliable PVC conduit and its fittings shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.



INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when it is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR). The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor. It shall then run on the underside/soffit of the LMR’s floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking. Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location. Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain. Provide a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water from seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit the site conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather. The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it. Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.

Section 53/.....


Bldg Spec Page 53-1 SECTION 53 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES 53.1

SWITCHES Switches shall be of 6-amp rating designed specifically for use on ac inductive circuits and complying with SS 227. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, switches shall be single-pole, one-way, rocker operated and of white square plate pattern. Where two or more switches are to be fixed adjacent to each other, multi-gang switches on a single cover plate shall be used. For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be decorative model listed in the HDB Materials List and the fixing screws shall be concealed. All switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark. Switches installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test Mark.

53.2

SWITCH SOCKET-OUTLETS Each power point shall be a switched socket-outlet of similar construction by the same manufacturer and product range to match the switches. The switched socket-outlet shall comprise a combined switch and 3-pin shuttered type outlet. The 13 amp and 15 amp switched socket-outlet shall comply with the requirements of SS 145 and SS 472 respectively. In addition to SS 145, 13 amp switched socket-outlets shall pass the positive break test according to Clauses 13.11.2, 13.11.3 and 13.11.4 of BS 1363-2 or approved equivalent. For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch socket outlet shall be decorative model and the fixing screws shall be concealed. All 13 amp and 15 amp switched socket outlets shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark. Switched socket outlets installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test Mark.

53.3

WATER HEATER POINT For water heater point, a double pole switch and a connection unit shall be provided. Both the switch and connection shall be rated at 20 amperes. The switch shall comply with SS 227 and complete with a neon light indicator and a durable mark "Water Heater". The water heater switch shall be of similar construction by the same manufacturer and product range to match other accessories. The connection unit shall have a three terminal connection block with white moulded cover plate and cable clamp included. The connection unit shall be typed tested to SS 241. For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be decorative model listed in the HDB Materials List and the fixing screws shall be concealed. All water heater switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark. Water heater switches installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test Mark.



BELL PUSH POINT Bell push shall be of a similar construction to match the lighting switch, with push to make mechanism. The bell push shall be rated at 5 amp and complying with SS 227. The bell point shall be terminated on a connection block and marked "Bell Point" with approved sticker or tag.

53.5

MOULDED BOX Moulded boxes used for casting in concrete for flush mounting of switches, switched socket outlets and other accessories shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60670 and the dimensions as specified in BS 4662. The maximum temperature during the building process is assumed to be less than 90°C. Surface and flush mounting moulded boxes not used for casting in concrete shall comply with BS 4662. Such boxes shall be suitable for the mounting surface. The colour appearances and the profile of the moulded boxes shall match the switches, switched socket outlets and other accessories.

53.6

BATTEN LAMPHOLDERS Batten lampholders can be white moulded insulated bayonet-type complete with a skirt, two terminals and a loop-in earth terminal. It shall be rated at 2 ampere and shall have a temperature rating of at least T1 complying with SS 125. They can also be Edison screw lampholders complying with IEC 60238 : 2008-08 (Edition 8.1).

53.7

CONSUMER CONTROL UNIT A consumer control unit as indicated in the Drawings shall be provided for each unit. The enclosure box shall be surface-mounted and complete with mounting, rail, multi-terminal earth bar, busbar, busbar’s insulating shield, neutral terminal block, circuit identification label, miniature circuit breakers and RCCB. The consumer control unit shall comply with BS EN 60439-3. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, a main switch shall be provided and placed before the RCCB in the consumer unit. The main switch shall be a double-pole M6 Type B miniature circuit breaker with contact position indicator to indicate the positions of the moving contacts. The main switch shall have in the opening position a minimum isolating distance of 3mm between the contacts. The miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle type tripping switch, and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60898. The MCB shall be rated for 230V, 50 Hz operation. They shall possess a Type B tripping characteristic and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA (M6). The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second. All RCCB shall comply with SS 97 and shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark. In addition, there must be a space provision (2 spare slots) in the main consumer control unit of the dwelling unit for the installation of surge arrestor. Consumer control units installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test Mark.



APPROVAL OF ITEMS Switches, switched socket-outlets, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall be of the same manufacturer and product range. Surface mounting moulded boxes, flush mounting moulded boxes, polarised plugs, socket connectors, batten lamp holders, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall pass type tests conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.

53.9

POLARISED PLUG AND SOCKET CONNECTOR Only one cable shall be terminated at each screw terminal of the polarized plug & socket connector. Where looping is done at the socket, each pole of the socket shall have two screw terminals so that only one cable is terminated at each screw terminal. The polarised plug & socket connector shall comply with the relevant clauses of IEC 60998-1 and IEC 60998-2-1.


Bldg Spec Page 54-1 SECTION 54 LUMINAIRES

54.1

GENERAL The quantity and types of fitting shall be ascertained from the Drawings. All control gears shall be provided together with the fittings by the lighting supplier or using approved control gears specified by the supplier where such control gears are not provided together with the fitting.

54.2

INSTALLATION All lighting fittings shall be securely hung or mounted as follows : (a)

Surface and wall mounted fittings shall be secured with metal threaded studs complete with two lock nuts and washers using approved metal studs cartridge hammer. The threaded metal stud shall penetrate into the ceiling surface to a depth of at least 32mm. Alternatively, the light fittings may be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the lighting fitting manufacturer and using the mounting accessories supplied by the manufacturer.

(b)

For pendant fittings, the downrods shall be securely fixed to the ceiling with conduit terminating boxes.

(c)

Recessed fitting shall be supported independently. The false ceiling grid system shall not be used to support light fittings. There shall be no noticeable ceiling deflection when the fittings are installed in place. Steel wires tied to metal studs that are penetrated into the concrete surface at a depth of at least 32mm shall be used to support the fittings.

The above represents the minimum requirements and the Contractor shall take further precautions if the fittings to be mounted are exceptionally heavy such as high bay fittings. The Contractor shall ensure that all fittings are securely mounted. All light fittings shall be wired from a light point unless otherwise specified. A 3-core cable of 1.5 mm2 in flexible PVC conduit shall be used for the interconnection from the lighting point to the fitting. This connecting cable shall be suitably rated for operation at the surrounding steady state temperature in the light fitting. The Contractor shall ensure all metal parts of components of the fittings be effectively earthed. 54.3

LIGHTING LUMINAIRES All luminaires shall be pre-wired and complete with lamps, control gears, lampholders, capacitors and diffusers. The exact type and rating of the luminaires shall be as specified in the Drawings. All luminaires shall be power factor corrected up to 0.85 lagging or higher. All indoor fluorescent luminaires shall complete with high frequency electronic ballast and comply with SS 263 Part 3: Particular requirements for general purposes luminaires. Where lighting luminaires are specified with two or more lamps, each of the lamps shall be provided with its own control gears unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. All ballasts shall pass type tests. All ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be registered with SPRING Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.



FLUORESCENT LAMPS

54.4.1

T5 Fluorescent Lamps (a)

All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps – Performance specifications.

(b)

The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G5 base and the following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Trademark or mark of origin; Nominal Wattage/Voltage; Colour Definition; and Colour Rendering Index.

(c)

The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 16000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 10000 hours.

(d)

The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Lamp Wattage (W)

Length (mm)

Diameter (mm)

Output (Lumen)

14 28

Approx. 550 Approx. 1150

16 16

1200 (@ 25ْ C) 2600 (@ 25ْ C)

Colour Rendering Index 80 or better 80 or better

The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any time in its life.

54.4.2

(e)

The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000°K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.

(f)

The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against corrosion.

(g)

The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.

(h)

The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.

T8 Fluorescent Lamps (a)

All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps – Performance specifications.

(b)

The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Trademark or mark of origin; Nominal Wattage; Colour Definition; and Colour Rendering Index.

(c)


(d)

The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Lamp Wattage (W)

Length (mm)

Diameter (mm)

Output (Lumen)

18 36

Approx. 600 Approx. 1200

26 26

1300 or better 3200 or better


The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any time in its life. BLDG12/S54.DOC(2) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 54-3

54.4

FLUORESCENT LAMPS (CONT’D)

54.4.2

T8 Fluorescent Lamps (Cont’d)

54.5

(e)

The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000°K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.

(f)


(g)

The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be either T130 or T140 as specified in IEC 60400.

(h)


COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS (a)

All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 901 : Single-capped fluorescent lamps Performance Specifications.

(b)

The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall have a 2 pin base complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency interference suppression capacitor. The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Trademark or mark of origin; Nominal Wattage/Voltage; Colour Definition; and Colour Rendering Index.

(c)

The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.

(d)

The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Wattage/Type (W) 9W PL-S 11W PL-S 13W PL-C 18W PL-C 26W PL-C

Overall Length (mm) 167 237 140 154 173

Base G23 G23 G24d-1 G24d-2 G24d-3

Output (Lumen) 600 900 900 1200 1800

Colour Rendering Index 80 or better 80 or better 80 or better 80 or better 80 or better

The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours. (e)

54.6

The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be 3000°K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.

STARTERS FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS All starters shall be of the glow-switch type and shall comply with the safety and performance requirements of IEC 155. The starters shall be suitable for use with fluorescent lamp of wattage from 4 to 65W at 220-240V. The starter shall have the following distinctly and durably marked on the canister : (i) (ii)


Trademark or mark of origin; and Nominal Wattage/Voltage.


ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

54.7.1

Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp (a)

The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard commercially available T5 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.

(b)

The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free. Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not allowed.

(c)

The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c.  6%

(d)

The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60khz and an output lamp stabilization section.

(e)

The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Safety requirement Performance requirement Harmonics requirement Radio freq. interference

: IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002 : IEC 60929, EN 60929. : IEC 61000-3-2 : CISPRI 15, EN 55015

(f)

All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection.

(g)

The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark.

(h)

The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are not acceptable.

(i)

Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.

(j)

Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.

(k)

Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 15%. Control gear must comply with and be substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.

(l)

Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95.

(m)

Ballast lumen factor (BLF) must be 0.95 and above.

(n)

The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line voltage transient protection.

(o)

The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.

(p)

The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.

(q)

The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of 70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.



ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (CONT’D)

54.7.1

Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp (Cont’d) (r)

The ballast must comply to CELMA’s Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index.

(s)

The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage) A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 14 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 14 W lamps A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 28 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 28 W lamps

54.7.2

Electronic Ballast Loss (max) 3.5 W

Total Circuit Power (max) 14 + 3.5 = 17.5 W

7W

2x14 + 7 = 35 W

6W

28 + 6= 34W

12 W

2x28 + 12 = 68 W

Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp (a)

The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard commercially available T8 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.

(b)


(c)


(d)


(e)

The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Safety requirement Performance requirement Harmonics requirement Radio freq. interference

: IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002 : IEC 60929, EN 60929. : IEC 61000-3-2 : CISPRI 15, EN 55015

(f)


(g)

The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark.

(h)


(i)


(j)




ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (CONT’D)

54.7.2

Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp (Cont’d) (k)


(l)

Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95

(m)


(n)


(o)

The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.

(p)


(q)


(r)


(s)

The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage) A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 18 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 18 W lamps A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 36 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of 36 W lamps

54.8

EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING

54.8.1

General

Electronic Ballast Loss (max) 3W

Total Circuit Power (max)

6W

2x16 + 6 = 38 W

4W

32 + 4 = 36W

8W

2x32 + 8 = 72W

16 + 3 = 19 W

All emergency lighting, emergency exit lighting and emergency lighting conversion kits shall comply with SS CP19 and approved by FSSB. The Contractor shall ensure that the installation complies with the requirements of SS CP19 and the Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Building. 54.8.2

Exit Sign And Exit Lighting All exit lighting and exit signs shall be of white LED type unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, complete with 2 hour nickel cadmium batteries, IP 30 or other approved and shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 19. All luminaires for the exit lighting and exit sign shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1 or other approved equivalent. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours



EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING (CONT’D)

54.8.3

Emergency Lighting And Conversion Kit All emergency lighting including lighting conversion kits shall comply with the requirements of SS CP19. They shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1 or other approved equivalent. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours. Emergency lighting conversion kits shall be provided for some of the lighting luminaires as shown in the Drawings. The luminaire shall be pre-wired in such a manner that, under healthy supply condition, the luminaire shall operate normally, but under supply interruption, the fluorescent/PL or PLC tubes are connected to the emergency lighting conversion kit. Wiring of the conversion kit shall be arranged so as to allow easy removal of the kit, where required, without affecting the normal operation of the luminaire. Terminal blocks shall be provided for this purpose. The emergency lighting conversion kit shall incorporate a charging and changeover device and shall be powered by sealed nickel cadmium batteries. The charging device shall be designed to charge the batteries and keep it in a charged state from a 230 volts 50 Hz supply. The conversion kit shall be located away from the ballasts. A separate unswitched "live" wire which shall be of the same phase as the normal supply, shall be run to provide the line condition monitoring. Such separate unswitched "live" wire shall be clearly marked as "live" and "unswitched" and with a "danger" sign. It shall be terminated at the terminal block before the connection to the conversion kit.

54.9

AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) General The AOL system shall comply with the requirement of "Visual Aids For Denoting Obstacles" specified in the standard of International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and its amendments, and the regulations issued by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore (CAAS) and Ministry Of Defence. The works shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the AOL system as shown in the Drawings. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, the more stringent of the requirements shall govern the works. Where any apparatus/equipment forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus/equipment shall be of weatherproof design. AOL System The AOL system consists of a main AOL, a standby AOL, control circuit panel and remote monitoring panel. The AOL system shall be either of the following 2 types: (a)

low intensity AOL -- where both the main and standby AOL shall be LED low intensity type operate on a DC power supply.

(b)

medium/high intensity AOL -- where the main AOL (medium/high intensity) operates on a AC power supply of 230 volts with standby AOL of LED low intensity type operates on a DC power supply.

The DC power supply shall be provided by sealed type maintenance free lead acid batteries, maintained in an adequately charged condition by a AC/DC rectifier/charger.



AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D) Control Circuit Panel The control circuit panel shall be located at roof level. It shall be weatherproof type and mounted on a wall sheltered from the rain where possible. The control circuit panel shall have the following functions: (a)

Time Of Operation The AOL system shall be switched on by means of photocell connected to the Light Sensitive Switch. It shall be switched on during hours of low visibility (eg. haze, rain and night). In the event the photocell is faulty the system shall automatically by pass the photocell.

(b)

Change Over Relay When the AOL system is switched on the main AOL shall be triggered. In the event the main AOL is faulty the change over relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL.

(c)

Daily Test Relay After the event the main AOL is switched off, the daily test relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL for a few seconds to test the functionality of the standby AOL.

(d)

Fault Relay The fault relay mechanism shall send signals to activate the indicating lamps on the remote monitoring panel in the event the following occurs: (i) (ii) (iii)

main AOL faulty standby AOL faulty AC/DC rectifier/charger faulty

The reset button shall be fixed at the control circuit panel. The reset button shall be unable to reset the fault relay mechanism until the AC/DC rectifier/charger is rectified or replaced. (e)

Mains Power Failure In the event there is a mains power failure the following shall occur: (i) (ii)

for a low intensity AOL, the system shall switch over to DC supply to operate the main AOL. for medium/high intensity AOL, the system shall automatically switch over to the DC supply and operate the standby LED AOL.

The system shall automatically switch back to the mains power supply once the mains power supply is restored. The standby batteries should be designed to be able to last for at least 6 hours. Remote Monitoring Panel The remote monitoring panel shall be located in the switchroom. The remote monitoring panel shall contain the following: (i)

1 No. of push button for lamp test (Main and Standby AOL);

(ii)

3 No. of indicating lamps for main AOL, standby AOL & fault occurence;

(iii)

1 set of contacts for remote warning lamp.



AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D) Indicating Lamp Indicating lamp installed on the panels shall be of light emitting diode (LED) type. Remote Warning Lamp & Warning Notice An amber warning lamp to indicate occurrence of fault shall be extended from the remote monitoring panel to outside of the switchroom. The warning lamp shall be mounted on a wall near the ceiling and clearly visible from the void deck. A warning notice shall be mounted directly under the warning lamp. Labels All panels, push buttons and lamp indicators shall be labelled clearly with an identification tag made of durable material.

54.10

CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMPS (a)

All ceramic metal halide lamps shall comply with the safety requirement defined in IEC 62035.

(b)

The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Trademark or mark of origin; Nominal Lamp Wattage; Colour Definition; and Colour Rendering Index.

(c)

The ceramic metal halide lamps shall be clear and UV-reduced. The burning position for these lamps shall be universal.

(d)

For luminaries without diffuser, the ceramic metal halide lamps shall have maximum protection against shattering due to an integrated protective glass tube.

(e)

The average lamp life of the ceramic metal halide lamps shall be of 12,000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better.

(f)

The ballast for 35W and 70W ceramic metal halide lamps shall be low loss type with a maximum 9 watts and 14 Watts loss at rated voltage and wattage respectively.

(g)

The lamp voltages shall be 90V for both the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamps respectively.

(h)

The maximum and minimum ignition voltage shall be 5kVs and 3.6kVs respectively.

(i)

The lamp current for the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamp shall be 0.5A & 0.98A respectively.

(j)

The ceramic metal halide lamp shall have the following characteristics:Lamp Wattage (W) 35 70

Output (Lumen) 3000 or better 5800 or better


The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 20% of the value indicated above. (k)

The correlated colour temperature of the ceramic metal halide lamp shall be between 3000°K and 4500°K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.

(l)

The maximum permissible base edge temperature is 190°C.

(m)

The permitted mains voltage deviation should be +/- 3%.



54.10

54.11

CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMPS

(CONT’D)

(n)

The ceramic metal halide shall be operated with control gear with thermal protection.

(o)

The right igniter for the particular lamp type must be used to ensure reliable and safe ignition.

T5 CIRCULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (a)

All T5 circular fluorescent lamps shall comply with (IEC 60901: Single -capped fluorescent lamps – Performance specifications.)

(b)

The circular fluorescent lamp shall come with 2GX13 cap base and the following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Trademark or mark of origin ; Nominal Wattage/Voltage ; Colour Definition ; and Colour Rendering Index.

(c)


(d)

The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics : Lamp (W) Wattage 22 40

Width (mm) (Outer/Inner) Approx. 225/193 Approx. 300/268

Diameter (mm) 16 16

Output (Lumen)

Colour Rendering Index

1800 @25 °C 3200( @25°C

80 or better 80 or better

The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any time in its life.

54.12

(e)

The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.

(f)


(g)

The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.

(h)


ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR T5 CIRCULAR FLUORESCENT LAMP (a)

The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard commercially available T5 circular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.

(b)


(c)


(d)


BLDG12/S54.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


54.12

ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR T5 CIRCULAR FLUORESCENT LAMP (CONT’D) (e)

The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements : (i) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002 (ii) Performance requirement : IEC 60929, EN 60929. (iii) Harmonics requirement : IEC 61000-3-2 (iv) Radio freq. interference : CISPRI 15, EN 55015

(f)


(g)

The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar product quality assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories

(h)


(i)


(j)


(k)


(l)

Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95.

(m)


(n)


(o)

The electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.

(p)


(q)


(r)


(s)

The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: Fluorescent Lamp (wattage) A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 22 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 1 number of 40 W lamp A single electronic ballast with 2 numbers of lamps (22W and 40W)

BLDG12/S54.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Electronic Ballast Loss (max) 3W

Total Circuit Power (max) 22 + 3 = 25 W

4W

40 + 4.0 = 44.0 W

8W

71 W


54.13

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH POWERED COMPACT FLUORESCENT (HPCF) LAMP

54.13.1

General The High Powered Compact Fluorescent (HPCF) lamp shall comply with the requirements of this Specifications and Drawings.

54.13.2

Self Ballast HPCF Lamp (a)

The self ballasted HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V-240V 50Hz and shall have the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Mark of origin or trademark Nominal wattage/voltages/frequency Colour designation – the preferred colour temperature is 4000oK – cool white or 6000 oK as specified. Operating current

(b)

The operational life span of the HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.

(c)

The lamp shall have low mercury content of less than 5mg and bears the Singapore Green Label.

(d)

The rating of the lamp can be either 60 or 65 watt. The maximum total system wattage shall not exceed be 60 or 65 watt. The minimum luminous flux after 100 burning hours shall comply with the following requirements :-

Wattage (w)

Luminous Lux (Lumen)

Diameter (MM)

Maximum Length (MM)

Base

Efficacy Lumen/Watt

60 or 65

Better than 4000

Less than 75

Less than 220

E 27 (Metal)

Better than 64

Note : (e)

Colour Rendering Index (CRI) Better than 80

Power Factor Better than 0.9

Maximum length is between lamp top and E27 lamp base (reference plane to IEC requirement)

The self ballast HPCF lamp shall be designed and type tested to comply with the minimum but not limited to the following standards and requirement (i)

Safety requirement : IEC 60968 : 1999

(ii)

Performance requirement : Selected clause of IEC 60969 : 2001 Clause 3 – Dimension Clause 5 – Starting and run up Clause 6 – Lamp wattage Clause 7 – Luminous flux Clause 8 – Colour

(iii)

Other measurement : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi)

BLDG12/S54.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)

IEC 60901 clause 1.57 - Colour rendering Index (CRI) Lamp efficacy Correlated colour temperature (K) Current harmonic reference to Clause 12.1 of IEC60929 : 2003 and measurement method in accordance with IEC 61000 – 3-2 EN 61000-6-1 and the basic standard Surge test IEC61000-4-5 (line-earth: +/- 2KV; Line-line:+/-1KV) Clause 9 of IEC 60929 : 2003 – power factor


54.13

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH POWERED COMPACT FLUORESCENT (HPCF) LAMP (CONT’D)

54.13.2

Self Ballast HPCF Lamp (e)

(Cont’d)

(Cont’d) The type testing shall be conducted by PSB or recognised international testing body. Third party test reports can be used for the following required tests : (i) (ii)

54.13.3

Radio Interference : EN55015 Immunity : EN61547

HPCF Lamp With External Electronic Control Gear (a)

The HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V – 240V 50 Hz and shall have the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Mark of origin or trademark Nominal wattage/voltages/frequency Colour designation – the preferred colour temperature – the preferred colour temperature is 4000oK – cool white or 6000 oK as specified. Operating current

(b)

The operational life span of the HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.

(c)

The lamp shall have low mercury content of less than 5mg bearing the Singapore Green Label.

(d)

The rating of the lamp can be either 55 or 60 watt. The maximum total system wattage shall not exceed 60 watt. The minimum luminous flux after 100 burning hours shall comply with the following requirements :-

Wattage (w)

Luminous Lux (Lumen)

Diameter (MM)

Maximum Length (MM)

Base

Efficacy Lumen/Watt

55 or 60

4000

Less than 75

Less than 220

E 27 (Metal)

Better than 64

Note :

BLDG12/S54.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Colour Rendering Index (CRI) Better than 80

Power Factor Better than 0.9

Maximum length is between lamp top and E27 lamp base (reference plane to IEC requirement)


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH POWERED COMPACT FLUORESCENT (HPCF) LAMP (CONT’D)

54.13.4

Electronic Control Gear (ECG) For HPCF Lamp (a)

The Electronic Control Gear for HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V – 240V 50 Hz and shall have the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Mark of origin or trademark Nominal wattage/voltages/frequency Power Factor Operating current

(b)

The operational life span of the ECG for HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.

(c)

The ECG losses for the HPCF lamp shall not be more than 3 watt

(d)

Testing Requirement For Electronic Control Gear For HPCF Lamp

The Electronic Control Gear HPCF with the lamp shall be designed and type tested to comply with the minimum but not limited to the following standard and requirement. (a)

Safety – IEC 61347-2-9 : 2000 + A1 : 2004 + A2 : 2006

(b)

Performance (including current harmonics) – IEC 60929 : 2003. This test also includes ballast lumen factor (BLF). Typically, BLF of ECG should not less than 0.95

(c)

If lamp is used with a supplied separable ECG, the applicable clauses for testing of lamp with ECG as follows : -

System efficacy – Measured luminous flux (lm) of lamp/system wattage (W) by computation Colour rendering index (Ra) – Reference to clause 1.5.7 c) of IEC 60901 Lamp colour and correlated colour temperature (K) – Reference to clause 1.5.7 b) of IEC 60901 Luminous flux – Reference to clause 1.5.7 a) of IEC 60901 Lumen maintenance test as necessary EN 61000-6-1 and the basic standard surge test IEC61000-4-5 (line-earth :+/- 2KV; Lineline :+/- 1 KV)

The type testing shall be conducted by PSB or recognised international testing body. Third party test reports can be used for the following required tests : (i) (ii)

Radio Interference : EN55015 Immunity : EN61547

54.14

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE

54.14.1

General Requirement The Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaire comprising of LED module, electronic control gear and accessories, where shown in drawings, shall be supplied, installed and commissioned for reliable operation to light up corridor and common areas. The LED luminaire shall be able to fully withstand the current and voltage surges from lighting strikes and the frequent switching operation of the power supplies. The LED luminaire shall be properly selected to ensure that the functional characteristics, failure rate, operating life span and other requirements as mentioned in this specification clause are fully met. Each LED luminaire shall also be provided with its own electronic control gear. The electrical control gear shall be a separate unit with its own housing in the luminaire. The electronic control gear shall be connected to the LED component via a plug and socket connector complies with IEC 998-1 & IEC 998-21.

BLDG12/S54.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)



54.14.2

Light Emitting Diode (LED) Module and Luminaire

(CONT’D)

The LEDs used shall be of illuminated grade LEDs manufactured by either Cree, Osram, Nichia, Philips or other approved equivalent without infringing the Intellectual Property Patent of LED manufacturers. The Contractor and LED luminaire manufactures shall indemnify HDB from any legal responsibilities from any infringement of the patent right. The LED module shall consist of a low profile high flux LED strip and with it Trademark or Mark of Origin, Nominal Wattage, Correlated Colour Temperature and Colour Rendering Index distinctly and durable marked. The LED module and luminaire shall comply with test standards and performance requirements as follows: (a)

The LED module shall have nominal white light output that corresponds to the correlated colour temperature (CCT) in the range of between 3000K and 6500K. The colour rendering index, the target CCT and the tolerance shall base on latest ANSI_NEMA_ANSLG C78.377A, as listed below: Nominal CCT (K) 3000K 4000K 5000K 6500K

Target CCT and tolerance (K) 3045 +/- 175 3985 +/- 275 5028+/- 283 6530 +/- 510

Colour Rendering Index Minimum 70 Minimum 70 Minimum 65 Minimum 65

The CCT for the Luminaire should comply with tolerance quadrangle as stated in the ANSI Chromaticity Standard C78.377A. (b)

The rated LED life L70 should be at least 50,000 hours at luminaire’s operating temperature of 350C.

(c)

The radiation angle of the LED shall be at least +/- 45 degree (half angle/half maximum).

(d)

The luminaire shall comply with:

(e)

(i)

IEC 62471 “Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems” and IEC 62471-2 “Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems – Part 2: Guidance on manufacturing requirements relating to non laser optical radiation safety”.

(ii)

The LED modules shall comply with IEC 62031 “LED modules for general lighting – Safety specifications”.

Test results shall be provided to indicate adequate thermal performance for long-term operation of LED’s at minimum luminaire’s operating temperature of 350C in accordance to test condition with Part 1of SS 263 (or IEC 60598-1). The LED junction temperature shall be maintained at or below manufacturer’s recommendation. The LED luminaire shall be of following type: Type of luminaire

Colour Rendering Index

Max System Power (W)

Luminous Lux (lumen)

12W

Min. 700 (for CCT @4000K/ 5000K/6500K)

Min. 65

a) 2 Feet

b) 4 Feet

24W

Min. 1400 (for CCT @4000K/ 5000K/6500K)

Min. 65

Application

LED Module

BLDG12/S54.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)

For common corridor areas, Staircase, void deck and lift lobbies


54.14

. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE

54.14.2

Light Emitting Diode (LED) Module and Luminaire

(CONT’D)

(Cont’d)

The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with illumination-grade LEDs, heat sinks, electronic control gear and housing. The correlated colour temperature of the LED shall be 4000K unless otherwise indicated in drawings. The LED luminaire shall be resistant to shock and vibration. Light fixture shall consist of anti-glare frosted front cover for uniformity light distribution The LED luminaire housing shall have the following features: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Metal housing with high heat dissipation properties. Provision to prevent unauthorized removal. Corrosion resistant. Heat sinks with high thermal dissipation properties. Diffuser shall be UV resistant. Operate in relative humidity of greater than 90%. Light shall be free of lines / spots / flicker.

The surface mounted LED luminaire shall comply with SS263 Part 3 (and IEC 60598-2-1) “Particular requirements for fixed general purpose luminaires”, used together with SS 263 Part 1 (and IEC 60598-1). The LED module shall be provided with minimum IP rating of 54. The failure rate of the completely assembled LED luminaires (inclusive of the LEDs, heat sinks, diffuser, electronic control gear and housing) shall not be more than 5% per 10,000 hours of operation. A failure is deemed to have occurred if the luminaires malfunctions or does not meet any requirements in the specifications. The luminaire is customized in design for use in HDB projects and shall be non-proprietary. The material and body of the luminaire shall comply with test standards and performance as follows: (a)

electro-galvanised coating of min. 1 micro on steel metal of thickness gauge 22 or 0.8mm +/0.05mm.

(b)

PR 12 or equivalent outdoor durable polyester powder in white colour.

(c) Material – Powder Coating 1 ISO 6272-2 2 ISO 2409 3 ISO 1519 4 ASTM D3363 5 ISO 9227 6 ISO 6270 7 ISO 11341 8 ISO 2808 54.14.3

Impact Resistance Cross-cut adhesion Bend Test Pencil Hardness Test Salt Spray Test duration 500 hrs Humidity test, 1000 hrs Simulated light exposure test duration 1000 hrs Dry firm thickness of powder coating

Electronic Control Gear for LED Lighting Luminaire The electronic control gear shall comply with test standards and performance requirements as follow: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

BLDG12/S54.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)

IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules – Performance requirements. IEC 61347 Part 2-13; Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules. IEC 61547 – EMC Immunity Requirements. IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 3: Limits – Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Less Than 16A per Phase)” IEC 61000-3-3 “Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public lowvoltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current less than or equal 16A per phase and not subject to conditional connection”. CISPR 15 “Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment”.


54.14


54.14.3

Electronic Control Gear for LED Lighting Luminaire (Cont’d)

(CONT’D)

The electronic control gears shall be suitable for use of AC supplies 220 - 240V at 50Hz. It shall be designed for SELV voltage and constant current for LED operation. The electronic control gear shall be provided with protection against short circuits, overload, over voltage, thermal overload and transient overvoltage. It shall be of CE, ROHS compliance. The electronic control gears shall satisfy the following requirements: Life Span Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Power Factor Output current

: : : : :

THD Rated input voltage

: :

Efficiency

:

5 years against defects 200C to 450C 200C to 850C 0.9 or better rated constant current at 350mA (+/- 5%) for 12W rated constant current at 700mA (+/- 5%) for 24W < 15 % AC 220V to 240V (+/-10%) 50 Hz continuous operation At least 75%

The electronic control gears shall power the LED such that the LED is flicker-free. 54.14.4

Luminaire with Motion Sensor For LED luminaire used with motion sensor, it shall have dual level lighting. It shall be provided with driver with a motion detector to dim the light level to 50% (+/- 5%) of its rated lumen output. The motion sensor shall be integrated into the luminaire or remote adjacent to the luminaire. If remote, the sensor shall be placed in its own housing and the supply cable to the sensor shall be connected via socket connector. The LED luminaire shall remain lighted in the event of failure of the motion sensor. The Motion Detector shall have the following characteristic/specifications: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)

54.14.5

Operate in SELV DC . Current Consumption shall be below 50 mA. Operation within temperature ranges of 170C to 500C. Operate in humidity greater than 90% . Have a detection zone of 3600. Have a detection range of 8m from ceiling mount height of 2.5m to 3m. Have built-in features to reduce false alarms due to rapid. temperatures changes, vibration, noises, RFI, static or lightning, insects, etc. Be easily disabled. Provide normally closed cover tamper. The reset shall be automatic and adjustable from 5 to 99 seconds. Be rated IP21.

Type Test Submission The LED luminaires shall be type tested by TUV-SUD PSB or other approved SINGLAS Accredited Test Labs or other recognized international testing body to ensure compliance with the safety, reliability and performance standards specified above. All necessary test reports of the LED luminaire and manufacturer’s in house test procedures, warranty and relevant data shall be submitted to SO Rep for approval.

BLDG12/S54.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Section 55/.....

BLDG12/S54.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 55-1 SECTION 55 EARTHING SYSTEM

55.1

MAIN EARTH BAR The Contractor shall provide and fix to the wall of the switch room a tinned copper earth bar of crosssectional dimensions 31.5mm by 6.3mm mounted on porcelain insulators. The main earth bar shall be at least 240mm long with six holes complete with M6 bolts and nuts. Alternatively, the main earth bar can be an extension of the earth bar of the switchboard such that it is exposed and located on the external of the switchboard. From the main earth bar, two lengths of 25mm by 3mm copper tape shall be run to two separate earth electrodes outside the switchrooms. The earth electrodes shall be interconnected by copper tape to form a loop. A PVC insulated 70mm2 green earth cable shall connect the main earth bar to the earth bar within the main switchboard.

55.2

EARTH ELECTRODE

55.2.1

General The Contractor shall install a minimum of 2 earth electrodes for the earthing system. Each earth electrode shall comprise two sections of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, steel earth rods suitably coupled to form a continuous 3.6m length. Earth rods shall be driven into the ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. During the driving process, the Contractor shall fit an appropriate driving accessory in order to ensure that there is no damage to the top of the electrode. The two electrodes shall be connected to the main earth bar and interconnected by 25mm by 3mm copper tape, forming a loop. Copper tape shall be connected to the electrode with purpose made clamp complying with SS 322. Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance not less than the buried length. The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed 1 ohm. If the resistance exceeds this value, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, drive in extra electrodes complete with interconnecting conductors, clamps, inspection pits, to reduce and achieve the value of earthing resistance.

55.2.2

Earth Rod Each sectional rod shall have a copper-weld, steel earth rod with a nominal size of 16mm x 1800mm. The copper shall be molecularly bonded into the steel core and shall have a thickness of not less than 0.25mm at any point. The proportion of copper maintained on those parts of a sectional rod intended for permanent connecting linkage with other sectional rods shall be such that no bare steel shall be visible with a 4x magnifying aid. The rod shall pass a type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories in accordance with the requirements of the American UL 467 Standard.

55.2.3

Coupling Rod section couplings shall be of bronze counterbored to completely enclose threads, protecting them from damage and corrosion and exhibiting mechanical strength and electrical continuity between sections.



Earth Inspection Pit The top of each earth electrode shall be housed in a purpose made hot dipped galvanised lid inspection pit to facilitate inspection. The dimensions of the cover shall be 250mm by 250mm and the steel used shall be minimum 2 mm thick. It shall have an 8mm diameter opening for lifting up. The pit shall withstand a force of 50 kN and the permanent deflection shall not be more than 0.5 mm. For each pit, an identification tag made of durable plastic or metal shall be fixed onto the inside top. The tag shall include information of the block number, street name, types of earthing (whether main electrical or lightning and etc), value of earth, number of earthing points (e.g. 1 of 4) and the date of testing. All wordings shall be engraved and shall be durable. Where pits are located on the building apron, it shall be sunk flushed with the finish level. Further, all its positions are to be chosen such that they are aligned and co-ordinated with other services' inspection pits, apron line, apron joints, apron drains, building lines or any other immediate features. Earth electrode inspection pits shall not be located within footpath, linkways, shelters and pavilions. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the galvanised pit assembly to the SO Rep for approval before commencing installation. The pit shall be installed such that the bottom is not concreted so that any accumulated water can seep through. After installation and testing, all earth inspection pits shall be filled up with sand or other approved aggregates to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

55.3

PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS For each electrical circuit, circuit protective conductors shall be provided. It shall be installed along the route of its respective circuit conductors. Throughout the electrical installation, protective bonding conductors are also required in accordance with CP 5. The cross sectional area of all such protective conductors shall be calculated in accordance with CP 5. All protective conductors shall be copper. Joints in protective conductors are not permitted other than at terminal points. Connectors between earth bars, Plant and equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be made with the appropriate lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. The earth terminal of all switched socket outlets shall be connected to the protective conductor of the final sub-circuits. For ring circuit, then the circuit protective conductors shall also be run in a ring. An earthing point shall be provided at each lighting point and connected to the circuit protective conductor.

55.4

BONDING (ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION) All non-conducting metal work forming part of the electrical installation shall be effectively bonded to the earth system. Similarly, other metal work which under fault conditions, could become live or constitutes an alternative earth fault return path shall be bonded to the earth system. The main water pipes and main gas pipes entering the building block shall be bonded to the main earth bar immediately after their stop valves. In addition, all direct water supply pipes entering the building block shall be bonded at the ground floor and all indirect water supply pipes shall be bonded at the topmost floors.



BONDING (ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION) (CONT’D) The water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be bonded to the earth terminal of the meter box/meter board/consumer unit whichever is practical. The bonding connections shall be made as near as practical to the point of entry of the service and, where possible, keeping a minimum distance of 150mm away from any pipe joints to prevent the pipes from being deformed and thus giving rise to gas or water leakage at the joints For service ducts serving more than one unit, all bonding connections within the service duct shall be tagged to indicate the units they are bonding. All bonding connections to the water and gas pipes shall be made with purpose made clamps complying with SS 322.

55.5

SEGREGATION FROM EXPOSED METALWORK OF OTHER SERVICES Metal trunking, tray and conduit shall be kept as far away as possible from exposed metalwork of other services. Where metal trunking, tray and conduit have to run in close proximity of these other services, they shall be electrically bonded to the fixed metalwork of these services.

Section 56/.....


Bldg Spec Page 56-1 SECTION 56 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

56.1

GENERAL The lightning protection system shall comply with the latest requirements of SS 555:and its amendments, the Specifications and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA). The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system installed is in accordance with SS 555.

56.2

CONDUCTORS The air termination network and down conductors shall be high conductivity aluminium tape of crosssectional area 25mm x 3mm. Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals recommended by SS 555. The aluminium base strip shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a single set screw and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The thickness of the base strip and clip shall be 3mm and 1.5mm respectively. Screws and nails for securing clips and base strips shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. Coated or plated steel screws or nails are not acceptable.

56.3

AIR TERMINALS Air terminals shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. Each air terminal shall consist of a taper pointed aluminium rod, 16mm in diameter and 300mm in length. The rod shall be tapered to a sharp point and concentric on a centre line of the air terminal point. The distance of the taper shall be a minimum of 4 times the diameter of the rod. Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection to the connecting conductor. The base shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws for the air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel.

56.4

AIR TERMINATION NETWORK Conductors shall be located along ridges, around the perimeter, behind or on top of parapets and across large open areas of the roof, as indicated in the Drawings. They shall be run parallel to the building lines in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest including those on projections above the roof, and form a closed network. For tile roofing, aluminium tape shall be secured by purpose made fasteners and not cement mortar. For metal roofing, aluminium tapes shall be secured by purpose-made fasteners and care must be taken not to puncture the metal roofing sheets.

56.5

JOINTS Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be permitted without the permission of the SO Rep. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound. Joints between aluminium strips shall be made by overlapping clean tinned joint faces and securing with a purpose-made bolted clamp. The length of the overlap shall not be less than 25mm. Alternatively, joints shall be made using welding process such as "Furseweld" exothermic powder ignition method or other approved. The welding process shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.



JOINTS (CONT’D) For cross-over or T-joints, the aluminium strip conductors shall be secured using a purpose-made square tape clamp similar to Furse Cat No. CT005 or other approved. Joints between dissimilar metals shall be effected by bi-metallic joints as recommended in BS PD 6484 (commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation).

56.6

BONDING The Contractor shall bond all exposed metal work on the roof of the building to the lightning protection network. The metal work includes lamp poles, railings, metal roofing, gutters, flashings, etc. Bonding leads shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the lightning protection conductors. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Bonding shall be effected by means of purpose made bonding clamp complying to SS322 where applicable. In places accessible to the public (e.g MSCP roofdeck), the bonding conductors shall be embedded or concealed to prevent it from being removed. The bonding conductors shall be ram-setted for cases or situation where embedding or concealing of the bonding conductors is not possible. For external facade which are metal clad, the Contractor shall bond the metallic structure to the lightning protection system.

56.7

DOWN CONDUCTORS Down conductors shall be distributed round the outside walls of the building in the positions indicated in the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. A down conductor shall follow the most direct path possible between the air termination and the earth termination. Each down conductor shall be connected by an earthing lead of copper tape of cross-sectional dimensions 25mm x 3mm to an earth electrode. The copper earthing lead of the down conductor shall be embedded within a chase subject to approval of Consultant Structural Engineer and the SO Rep. Where it is not possible for the copper tape to be embedded/concealed, the Contractor is required to seek the concurrence of SO Rep for alternative method of installation of the copper tape. In particular, all conductors below ground shall be copper tape.

56.8

EARTH ELECTRODE Earth rods and earth inspection pits shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".

56.9

COUPLING Rod section couplings shall be of bronze alloy. The coupling shall be of sufficient length to completely enclose the threads of two rods coupled together to protect them from damage and corrosion. Couplings shall be suitable for use on the earth electrodes, as recommended by the earth electrode manufacturer or otherwise approved by the SO Rep.



RESISTANCE TO EARTH The overall resistance to earth of the lightning protection system, before bonding to any metal services in or on the structure shall be less than 10 ohms. In addition, each earth termination which is not interconnected at or below ground level shall have a resistance to earth not exceeding 20 ohms. If it is not possible to achieve the 10 ohm overall resistance to earth or the 20 ohm resistance to earth requirement for each individual electrode, then the Contractor shall provide up to two additional earth electrodes per down conductor, all at the Contractor's cost and expense, to reduce the value of earth resistance. The additional earth electrode(s) shall then be connected to the first electrode with 25mm x 3mm copper strip buried at 450mm below ground level, and shall be complete with the necessary earthing clamp and earth inspection pit. Where more than one earth electrode per down conductor are needed to be installed, then, where applicable, they shall be equally spaced at a horizontal distance of not less than the buried length, in a line parallel to the base of the structure.

56.11

COPPER CONDUCTOR The clauses in this Section are also applicable if copper conductors are used. The conductor shall be copper tape of dimensions 25mm x 3mm or stranded copper conductors of cross sectional area as indicated in the Drawings. All materials used including joints and fasteners shall be copper based and complying with SS 555.

56.12

APPROVAL OF ITEMS The approval for earth rod and earth inspection pit shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".

Section 57/.....


Bldg Spec Page 57-1 SECTION 57 PUBLIC LIGHTING

57.1

GENERAL This section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation of public lighting for the corridors, staircases, ground floor play areas and other public areas in the building blocks. Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, surface wiring in PVC conduit/PVC trunking shall be used.

57.2

WIRING All wiring for public lighting shall be in 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. The conductor shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded. All wiring shall be carried out on the 'loop-in' principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in accordance to CP 5. (a)

Surface Wiring For surface wiring of public lighting, the cables shall be installed in PVC trunking in all exposed public areas except that it shall be enclosed in a PVC conduit when passing vertically through floors and when installed behind false ceilings. A square knock-out box or purpose made transformation piece shall be provided at such PVC conduit and PVC trunking interface.

(b)

Concealed Wiring Concealed wiring for public lighting shall be installed as shown in the Drawings and in accordance with the Specifications.

(c)

Automatic Switching-Off the Roof Top Public Lighting The wiring for roof top public lighting shall be design with automatic switching-off feature. The roof top public lighting circuit with automatic switching-off feature shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The activation of the lighting shall be done by any switches located at the roof top and all the switches shall be push button type with LED or neon light indicator. Once activated, the lightings will be switched on for 30 minutes (Time setting can be adjusted at the timer if necessary). After 30 minutes, the public lighting will automatically be switched off. The public lighting can be switched off by pressing any switches if the work is less than 30 minutes. A label with simple instructions shall be provided on the wall next to the lighting switches : “The roof deck lighting circuit is using automatic control system. To switch “on” the lights, press any switch once. The lights will be “on” for 30 minutes. To switch “off” the lights, press any switch.”

57.3

TIME SWITCH All public lighting circuit shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The time switch shall be powered using AC supply and have programmable input and output conditions per line and have minimum three inputs and three outputs. The output shall have a relay switching capacity of 5A at 240V AC with independent common. The time switch’s central processing unit shall be provided with built-in real-time clock and calendar functions. The real time clock shall have an accuracy of +/- 12 minutes maximum per year. The data of real time clock, calendar and counter present value shall be held for a minimum of 48 hours for prolonged power interruptions. The time switch must also be able to store its program and system setting data to prevent loss during power failure. A LCD display with backlight that will be automatically cut-off through adjustable settings shall be provided. Password protection function should also be included to prevent unauthorized modification of time switch programs and settings.



TIME SWITCH

(CONT’D)

The time switch shall support communication via RS232C communication port to devices like computer and personal digital assistant (PDA). It shall allow downloading of program and setting through the RS232C port or infrared port. Windows based (windows CE for PDA) software programming tools and drivers for the set-up of the communication between the time switch and the host devices shall be provided. The time switch shall have self-diagnostic functions and shall be able to display the message on its LCD and communicate all error message back to host devices via RS232C communication port.

57.4

LUMINAIRES Public lighting luminaires shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.


Bldg Spec Page 58-1 SECTION 58 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES

58.1

INDIVIDUAL ELECTRICITY METERING For all dwelling units provided with the electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter board inside the service duct for each unit unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. All meter boards shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The meter boards shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in this Section. For all dwelling units not provided with electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter box just outside the unit or at other locations as shown in the Drawings. The meter boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The meter boxes shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in this Section. For other premises, the Contractor shall supply an incoming service MCB for electricity Kwh meter protection, rated as shown in the Drawings. All such MCB shall also comply with SPSL/Grid requirements. The service MCB shall be provided with a suitable protective cover for wall mounting. The protective cover shall have an opening for the toggle switch and provision of knock-outs for the supply and load cables. Sealing of the toggle switch in the OFF position shall be possible. Protective cover, if fabricated from sheet steel, shall have a minimum thickness of 0.8mm. Instructions for the re-setting of the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be provided and fixed adjacent to the MCB switch. Mounting bracket shall be provided for the MCB. The bracket shall have a terminal for earthing. The service MCB shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The labels of the house numbers shall be of "Formica engraving laminate" or other approved material having black characters on white background with minimum 5mm height characters. They shall be secured to the front of the panel by riveting and shall be tamper-proofed.

58.2

ELECTRICAL METER BOARDS INSIDE SERVICE DUCTS

58.2.1

General Provide and fix electrical meter board to each individual unit of flat and other premises as indicated. Such meter boards are located inside the service ducts. The construction of the meter board shall comply with SPSL/Grid requirements and shall be approved by them for use. The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boards shall be in accordance with the Drawings. The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on DINrail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.

58.2.2

Construction Electrical meter boards shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of the meter board shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the front panel shall be of 1.5mm thickness. It shall be finished with epoxy powder paint giving a total thickness of not less than 45 micron. All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray and scratch test as specified in latest SS5. The removable front meter panel shall be mounted on hinges either on the left or right as required according to the site conditions. Mounting holes for the fixing of electricity Kwh meter shall be provided as indicated. The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalise with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable. Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings. The electrical meter boards shall comply with IEC 60439-1.



Construction (Cont'd) The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35°C when carrying the rated current. The live parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible in accordance with the standard test finger specified in BS 3042. The earth terminals shall be of sufficient size and ways for termination of all protective conductors. Marking and suitable colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.

58.2.3

Type Testing All electrical meter boards shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.. A sample of the electrical meter board shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they are delivered to the Site for installation.

58.3

ELECTRICAL METER BOXES

58.3.1

General Provide and fix electrical meter box to each individual unit of flat and other premise as indicated. The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boxes shall be in accordance with the Drawings. The internal layout may be rearranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box. The electrical meter boxes shall comply with IEC 60439-1. The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on DINrail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.

58.3.2

Construction The electrical meter box may be of metallic or non-metallic material or a composite of both. Boxes of steel material shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.2mm. They shall then be finished with epoxy powder paint, giving a total paint thickness of not less than 45 micron. All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray and scratch tests as specified in latest SS 5. Non-metallic boxes shall be of glass reinforced polyester or other materials of adequate mechanical strength and resistant to ultra violet or chemical deterioration. The front edges of the box shall have rounded profile with the 4 corners rounded. A clear transparent polycarbonate inspection window of minimum dimension 120mm x 160mm shall be provided to allow reading of the Kwh meter. The transparent polycarbonate shall be stabilized against ultra-violet rays. A solid teak board of at least 20mm thick shall be provided for the mounting of PUB Kwh meter. Other alternative mounting methods shall be subject to SPSL/Grid approval. The box shall be provided with hinged door and locking facilities. The locking device shall be opened by a special tool or by a master key. The Contractor shall hand over to the Branch Office four numbers of such tool or master key for each contract. All sharp edges either inside or outside the box shall be filed smooth such that it will not cause injury to users or to workers. The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and compartmentalised with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be individually lockable. Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in the case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the Drawings. The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35°C when carrying the rated current. The live parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible to the standard test finger as specified in BS 3042.



Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be of the insulated, DIN-rail mounted, feed-through type of terminal blocks with screw clamp connections in which conductors can be connected without any special preparation. They shall comply with the relevant requirements of SS 241, IEC 685-1 and 2, DIN 57611 and DIN 57609. All current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of copper or other materials at least equivalent with regard to its conductivity and resistance to corrosion. All other metallic parts shall be electroplated or otherwise specially treated to prevent corrosion. The terminal blocks for each of the incoming live and neutral mains shall contain integral cross-connection facility to form a minimum of 3 way connections : 2 ways suitable for 25mm² copper cables and one way for 10mm² copper cable. The terminal blocks for the earth terminal shall contain similar integral crossconnections to cater for outgoing circuit protective conductors. Marking and suitable colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.

58.3.4

Type Testing All electrical meter boxes shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. A sample of the electrical meter box shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they are delivered to the Site for installation.

58.4

CONCEALED WIRING FOR FLATS Except for services rooms, all wiring within the blocks shall be run in concealed conduit system unless otherwise specified. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed in an electrical installation at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with Clause 52.4 shall be used. For concealed electrical wiring installed at a depth of 50 mm or more from the surface, PVC conduits complying to Clause 52.5 shall be used. PVC conduits shall also be used for telephone data and CATV wiring. In the living room, data point shall be installed next to the TV point and the wirings shall share the same conduit. In the bedroom, TV and telephone wirings shall share the same conduit whenever feasible. The telephone wirings shall be laid via the TV points. Unless otherwise approved by Superintending Officer, metal conduits shall be used at locations where the minimum 50 mm coverage over the conduits cannot be ascertained and there shall be no cost adjustment to the Contract Sum. The concealed conduit system shall allow for easy rewiring. The concealed wiring shall include the following services: (a) (b) (c) (d) (f)

Electrical CATV (Central Antenna Television System) Telephone Bell Data

All flush boxes for the mounting of switches, switch-socket outlets, TV outlets, data and telephone outlets shall be of the galvanised steel type. The galvanised steel flush boxes in the household shelters shall be anchored to the reinforced concrete with galvanised steel 'fishtail' as shown in the Drawings, or other approved method to tie back within the reinforced concrete. In addition, all conduits leading to the outside of the household shelters shall be sealed at both ends for a minimum of 100mm with sealant approved for shelter use to ensure air tightness.

58.5

FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING All final sub-circuit wiring for dwelling units and premises shall be in PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. The conductors shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded. The insulation of the conductors shall be colour identified throughout in accordance with CP 5 and the requirements of SPSL/Grid. Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with terminating points at consumer control units, socket outlets, switches and connection units and at the fixed lighting points in accordance to CP 5. No joint between the terminal points shall be permitted.


Bldg Spec Page 58-4

58.6

BONDING The bonding of the water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be done in accordance with all the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".

58.7

INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT ON SOLID BLOCK WALL For forming of vertical and horizontal recesses on solid block walls in residential units, no hacking is allowed. The contractor shall use modular shaped solid block to form all horizontal and vertical recesses for the electrical conduits


Bldg Spec Page 58-5

Section 59/.....


Bldg Spec Page 59-1 SECTION 59 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP), GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS

59.1

GENERAL The plant rooms shall include consumer switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms, dustbin centres, refuse centres, water tank rooms, generator rooms, telephone MDF rooms, telephone equipment rooms, etc. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate contractors/PTL/occupiers of the plant rooms to determine the desired positions of the isolator and consumer control unit in each plant room.

59.2

MAINS CABLES The mains cables shall be installed in metal trunking or metal conduit from the switch room to the plant rooms in accordance with the Drawings.

59.3

ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT The mains cables for the electrical Plant and equipment shall be terminated in metal-clad isolators.

59.4

LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER The mains cables for lighting and small power for multi-storey carparks/garages and plant rooms shall be terminated in a metal-clad consumer unit or distribution board. The wiring for lighting and small power in the plant rooms shall be installed in metal trunking/metal conduits and multi-storey/basement carparks/garages shall be installed in PVC conduits. All switches and switch socket-outlets shall be of the metal-clad type for plant rooms. Lighting points shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in accordance to CP 5.

Section 60/.....


Bldg Spec Page 60-1 SECTION 60 OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING

60.1

SCOPE This Section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation, diversion and removal of outdoor amenities lighting.

60.2

STEEL LIGHTING COLUMN

60.2.1

General The general dimensions, arrangements and details of the columns shall be as shown in the Drawings. Unless approved or indicated otherwise, all columns supplied shall be of the straight planted type. The design of the lighting columns provided in the Drawings shows the minimum requirements only. The Contractor and his QP shall be responsible for determining and ensuring that the lighting column is structurally adequate to cater to the overall weight, brackets and the luminaire, bending moment as well as the environment and soil conditions. Where these factors necessitate improvements or modifications to the design of the lighting columns, the Contractor and his QP shall provide the necessary modifications or improvements. It is deemed that the Contractor has included the cost and expense for the improvements and modifications in the Contract Sum. The Contractor and his QP shall certify that the lighting columns and bracket arms are designed, constructed and installed in compliance with BS 5649. The thickness of the steel shall be as specified in the Drawings. The tolerance on the thickness of the material shall be ±10% of the thickness. The steel tubes shall be formed either by continuous welding or one of the seamless processes. The tubes so formed shall be free from all injurious Defect. The circular column shall be made of steel tubes of suitable lengths swaged together when hot, or by any other acceptable processes. The exposed edge of each joint shall be welded and shall be chambered off at an angle of 45 degrees. The cross-section of the column shall be nearly as circular as possible and except at joints and door openings, the tolerance on the external diameter of the column shall be +3.0%. The nominal height of the column as shown in the Drawings shall be the distance between the centre line of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level. The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth. The complete column shall not deviate from straightness by more than 2mm per metre length. A weatherproof door shall be provided with a locking device, over the door opening at the base of the column as shown. A baseboard made of sheet steel shall be provided and fitted in each column for the mounting of the control gear and cut-out as shown in the Drawings. A corrosion resistant earthing terminal as a bolt of not less than 8mm in diameter and 20mm long shall be provided inside the column as shown in the Drawings. Two suitably sized washers and two nuts shall also be provided. Each planted column shall have a baseplate securely fixed to its base to prevent the column sinking into the ground and to help prevent the column overturning. The details of the baseplate, planting depths and buried concrete block shall be in accordance with the Drawings.



General (Cont'd) Surface mounted columns secured on top of concrete or other structures shall comply with BS 5649 unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. A cable entry slot of dimensions 150mm x 50mm shall be provided in the column, the lower end of the slot being about 500mm below the intended ground level. Other non-standard columns can be used. Such columns shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649 and approved by the SO Rep.

60.2.2

Columns With Bracket Arms The completed column shall include the bracket arm connected to the column. The bracket arm (single or double) shall be manufactured as separate units suitable for mounting or fixing on to the column. The tolerance on the total length of the columns with bracket arms and planted sections shall be ±1%. The single or double bracket arms shall be formed from one continuous steel tube section or two separate steel tube sections, which will permit electrical wiring to reach the lanterns mounted at the end of the bracket arms. The bracket projection (horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a vertical line passing through the centre of the cross-section of the column) shall be 2m and the tolerance on bracket projection shall be ±2% (without spigot). The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip onto the top of the lighting column and shall be fixed by means of bolts to prevent rotational movement. The top end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter of dimension to suit the specified lantern. The fixing angle of the lantern fixing axis, from the horizontal shall be within ±2 degrees of the angle specified. The lantern fixing angle shall be 5 or 15 degrees as indicated in the Drawings.

60.2.3

Post Top Columns For post top columns, the tolerance on the total length of the columns with planted sections shall be the greater value of ±0.5% or ±50mm. The top end of the column shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter to suit the specified lantern or mounting bracket for the lantern.

60.3

TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS The Contractor shall be required to supply tapered octagonal hot-dip galvanised lighting column as shown. The mounting height and all other requirements shall be similar to those earlier prescribed. In addition, each column section shall be machine-formed and longitudinally welded by continuous automatic gas shielded electric arc process. The bracket arm shall be octagonal in shape and finish with round pipe at the smaller end. The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip into the top section of the main column. The smaller end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot for the safe mounting of the required lantern. The Contractor shall submit the column and arm design including the design calculations (if necessary), test reports, certificates and furnish a test certificate from the manufacturer to show all base metal, zinc coating weight or other test conform to the Specification requirements. Columns which fail to comply with the Specifications shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor.



CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL COLUMNS

60.4.1

Hot Dip Galvanizing All steel columns and brackets shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanizing internally and externally in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Unless otherwise indicated, all welding work for columns and brackets shall be done before galvanising. The treatments prior to galvanizing shall include degreasing, rinsing, pickling, then rising and fluxing. The minimum average zinc coating weight shall be 450 g per m2 and minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be 65 microns. The coating shall be adherent, smooth, continuous and free from flux stains. All bolts shall be galvanized after screwcutting. The Contractor shall furnish a test certificate from the galvanizer, ensuring that all base metal, zinc coating weight or other tests conform to the specification requirements of BS EN ISO 1461. If the lighting column is not in conformity with the specified requirements, the columns will be rejected and be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. Where the length of the column exceeds 10m and the length of the galvanizing bath, the column shall be galvanized in two sections. The joining of the two sections by welding after galvanizing will only be permitted with the approval of the SO Rep. The welded metal and adjacent damaged areas of the zinc coating shall be applied with zinc rich paints conforming to BS 4652. The surface shall be prepared by removing any welding slag with a chipping hammer followed by vigorous wire brushing. The paint is applied by brush in two coats to give a total paint film thickness of about 100 microns. Any damage to the coating of the galvanised columns and brackets during transportation and erection shall be made good by applying two coats of zinc rich paint at the cost and expense of the contractor.

60.4.2

Bitumen Coating One coat of bitumen paint shall be applied externally to the planted section on top of the galvanised coating/epoxy powder coating/synthetic enamel paint. It shall be applied over the length of the buried ground section and for a distance of 200mm above the ground level. For lighting columns not exceeding 4m heights where aesthetic appearance is of concern, then, the latter distance above the ground can be reduced to about 100mm. The contractor shall refer to the Standard Drawings for the various lengths of the planted sections corresponding to the lighting column's heights so as to determine the level of the bitumen coatings. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all contamination before application of bitumen coatings. The bitumen painting shall comply with BS3416:1975 or approved equivalent. The first coat shall be dried before applying the second coat, which shall be applied at right angle to the first. The application for the coating shall be the rate of approximately 6 square metres per litre. The overall dry film thickness of the bitumen coats shall be at least 300 microns. The sections of the lighting columns with bitumen shall be wrapped with durable plastic covering so as to prevent the bitumen from smudging the clean sections of other columns during transportation and storage. The plastic coverings need not be removed during the installation of the columns.


Bldg Spec Page 60-4

60.4.3

Grouting Of Lighting Columns Before grouting, three numbers of 30mm diameter pliable PVC conduits shall be inserted into the lighting column (as shown in the Drawings). Cables shall be pulled in only after (not before) grouting and casting of the concrete footing. The PVC sleeves shall be extended out from the slot hole (as shown in the Drawings) by at least 300mm to ensure that the sleeves’ openings are not covered by the cement grout and concrete footing. If, due to the layout or other constraints/considerations, the PVC sleeves need to be trimmed to flush with the top of the grout, Contractor shall carry out such works at no additional costs and without delay to the schedule. The Contractor shall ensure that three (3) numbers of T10 reinforcement bars are inserted into the lighting column. Each T10 bar shall be inserted till it reaches the base plate of the lighting column and the top of the bar shall stop 25mm short of the top of the grout so as to provide sufficient cover for the bar (as shown in the Drawings). The columns shall be grouted to the specified depth as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall use pre-packed non-shrink grout and pump through the door opening of the column until it reaches 100mm below the bottom of the access door (as shown in the Drawings). The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when grouting is carried out. The Contactor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables can be pulled in and out of the columns at any time and can be connected back to the distribution board after the grouting and casting are completed. Alternatively, the Contractor can grout the lighting column together with the PVC sleeves and T10 bars offsite, before it is delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the galvanised coating of the lighting column during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer.

60.4.4

Glass Fibre/Reinforced Polyester Lighting Column Glass fibre/reinforced polyester column shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5469 and shall include the following features : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

High mechanical strength and high impact strength. Corrosion resistance, impervious to ground decay and insect attack etc. Uniformity in colour Maintenance free

The Contractor shall provide complete details of the proposed column, base plate assembly and details of assembly procedure etc including all dimensional and weight measurements of the column. The expected life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars. The Contractor shall also submit a test certificate from the manufacturer to prove conformity to the Specification.

60.5

POSITION OF LIGHTING COLUMNS Before erection, the Contractor shall peg up the positions of the lighting columns as indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall then confirm with the SO Rep that the positions of the lighting columns are well clear from the way of tree, pavements, walkways, roads, etc, failing which any necessary repositioning of the columns shall be carried out at the cost and expense of the Contractor.



ERECTION The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth and grouted as shown in the Drawings. Excavation of trial holes to locate the buried UPVC pipes of the road crossing, cable entries to the switch rooms including backfilling and making good shall be carried out by the Contractor. Erection of the columns shall include excavation of pit to the required depth, concrete footing, backfilling, concrete skirting around the base of the columns where required, reinstatement of ground surfaces, the transportation and disposal of surplus earth from the site and the painting of identification numbers on the external surface of the column. For the erection of columns or laying of underground cables which affect the building apron, the Contractor shall ensure that provisions are made before the apron is concreted. For existing apron and other concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall include the cost and expense of reinstatement of these surfaces in the Contract Sum. Any hacking and reinstatement shall be carried out in neat, rectangular panels to minimise the mismatch of surface texture. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of existing buried services, and shall bear all the cost and expense arising thereof. The door opening of the column shall be positioned parallel to the bracket arm on the side away from the direction of traffic.

60.7

POWDER COATING AND PAINTING Before the galvanised lighting column is delivered to the Site, the Contractor shall confirm with the SO Rep regarding the colour of the column, if not already specified. All columns of 6m and below shall be powder coated. Polyester powder coating suitable for outdoor application, with resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra-violet light, shall be used. The thickness of the polyester powder coating shall be between 50 to 80 microns. The mentioned work shall be done off- site in a factory with the appropriate facilities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the finishing during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer. No painting shall be allowed on the Site, with the exception of painting of the identification number. For column of length above 6m, only approved lead and chromate free primer conforming to SS 494: 2001and synthetic enamel paint shall be used. Before painting, the surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry and free from grease and oil. Non-oily soils and dirt shall be removed by brushing or scrubbing followed by thorough rinsing by clean water. Grease and oil shall be removed by swabbing generously with a suitable hydrocarbon solvent such as white spirit or mineral turpentine, using several clear swabs on each area. The Contractor shall then apply one coat of lead and chromate free primer, one synthetic enamel undercoat and one synthetic finishing coat to the galvanised steel surfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that the correct types of finishing or paint work are provided and the preparation of galvanised steel surfaces for painting is properly carried out, failing which the column shall be rejected and the Contractor shall make good the Defect. Identification number shall be painted on all lighting columns.



WIRING AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES All lighting columns shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories :

60.9

(a)

a 25 Amp 440V cut-out with provision for looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of up to 25 mm2 and a 5 Amp 'HRC' fuse as shown in the Drawings.

(b)

internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5 mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 1.5 mm2 PVC (green) earth connecting the cut-out to the luminaires.

(c)

brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts and earth tags and support bracket as shown in the Drawings.

CONCRETE FOOTING Concrete footing shall follow the dimensions as indicated in the Drawings for lighting column. All mass concrete used shall compose of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the ratio of 1:3:6. The cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacture and shall comply in every respect with SS 26. Fine aggregates shall be well washed by fresh water or pit sand, free from clay, organic matters and other impurities. It shall comply with SS 31. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite, angular in shape, free from quarry refuse and other impurities and comply with SS 31. It shall not exceed 40mm in size. The ratio of water to cement in all mixes shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6. Concrete shall be mixed in batch-type mixers until the concrete is uniform in colour. The mixing time shall not be less than that specified by the manufacturer. When ready mixed concrete is used, it shall conform to SS 119 and approval shall be sought from the SO Rep.

60.10

BONDING OF LIGHTING COLUMNS All lighting columns inside the concrete surfaces of the playground , fitness corner and hardcourt shall be electrically bonded to its weldmesh. The Contractor shall ensure proper bonding is done. Where the location of playground,fitness corner or hardcourt cannot be protected by the lightning protection system of the nearby buildings the lighting columns must be connected to an earth electrode system to comply with SS 555.

60.11

REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS Removal of lighting columns shall include excavation, uprooting the columns, baseplates and concrete footings, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surfaces, and the transportation and disposal of surplus earth and columns from the Site. Electricity supplies shall be cut-off and the cables made dead, isolated or abandoned before work commences. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps, barriers, flashing lights, guards etc and other measures as may be necessary in the removal work, for the safety and convenience of the public and others. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of existing buried services, and all cost and expense arising thereof shall be borne by the Contractor. The columns shall be lifted and removed using suitable mechanical handling Construction Equipment or cranes. After the columns have been removed, the holes in the ground shall be filled in with suitable earth and compacted with mechanical rammers and the ground surfaces shall be reinstated to match existing adjacent surface finishes.


Bldg Spec Page 60-7

60.12

LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS Lighting distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, and of adequate size to house the number of HRC fuses, miniature circuit breakers, contactors, time switch, isolator, by-pass switch, and associated Plant and equipment, as indicated in the Drawings. The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated for 240V, 50HZ operation and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6kA (M6). The distribution board shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6mm. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint and oven dried to finish with a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. The distribution board shall have a hinged front access door with suitable dustproof seals and facilities for locking. Insulated protective shields shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with live parts when the door is in the open position. Neutral and earth busbars and connecting blocks shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor. A removable copper plate of thickness not less than 1.6mm shall be provided at the base of the distribution board. Suitable sized holes shall be punched for the termination of armoured PVC insulated cables, where necessary. The Contractor shall submit layout drawings in three elevations, circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams to the SO Rep for approval prior to the fabrication of the lighting distribution boards. The distribution board shall have an approved circuit diagram fixed on the inside of the door. Formica engraving laminated labels shall also be supplied and screwed to the front of the distribution board to provide board references. For outdoor lighting distribution control board, the board shall be weatherproof and mounted on concrete pedestal. Suitable cable box terminations shall be arranged to receive the incoming underground cables. A separate earth system shall be provided for each outdoor distribution control board. Identification number shall be printed on the outdoor distribution board. The Contractor shall carry out all wiring and connections between the lighting distribution board and the main switch board. All wiring shall be protected throughout their lengths by a continuous enclosure of metal conduit or metal trunking except where the cables are installed within the enclosure of electrical Plant and equipment.

60.13

TURFING The Contractor shall reinstate the turfing affected by the excavation to match existing adjacent turfing when directed by SO Rep. All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, or other extraneous matter, be friable and porous in texture. The clay content of the approved sub-soil which is the soil strata found just below the top soil, shall not be greater than 45%. The unwashed sand to be used shall be free from any debris, stones or other foreign materials. Soil mixture shall be three parts of topsoil with one part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m³ of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1 kg per m³ of granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4). The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to the turf) at the time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface, followed by the planting of fresh turf. Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm and with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus).


Bldg Spec Page 60-8

60.13

TURFING (Cont’d) The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation. Close turfing shall apply to all of the turfing area to be reinstated. Turfs shall be firmly sunk into the ground attached together without any gaps. Water turf immediately after planting until the turf is thriving. When the level of the completed turfing work is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with garden roller or other approved means. The turfing shall give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out when the turf is established after the second grass cutting. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all reinstated turfing Works as specified hereunder, provided under the Contract. All reinstated turfing Works shall be maintained during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and shall be maintained for a further period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this clause). The maintenance service provided by the Contractor shall be the watering, weeding and mowing whenever required. The Contractor shall replace dying, old or missing turves from the original source during the Maintenance Period.

60.14

MAKING GOOD The Contractor shall make good, patch up and paint all building damages and any openings or recess in the building walls and other part of the structures affected by the Works to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

Section 61/.....


Bldg Spec Page 61-1 SECTION 61 TELEVISION (TV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION

61.1

GENERAL The Section covers the installation of the TV wiring system for cable-ready Television System connection. The TV wiring installation shall be installed by licensed telecommunication wiring contractor to comply with the requirements of the Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building (COPIF) issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of Singapore (IDA), Singapore Code of Practice (CP5) for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings and with all the statutory rules and regulations of the Media Development Authority (MDA), Government Authorities, Statutory Authorities, current at the date of submission of the Tender. The Contractor shall liaise with the Cable TV system Licensee and follow up with the installation and submission requirements for connecting to its system. The Contractor upon completion of the TV wiring installation shall arrange for necessary inspection, testing and certification from Cable TV System Licensee to issue certificate of cable readiness and arrange for connection to the cable TV system. There is a cost chargeable by Cable TV system licensee for certification of cable readiness per block and all cost for submissions, testing and obtaining certification for cable readiness from the Cable System Licensee shall be deemed to be included in the contract sum.

61.2

61.3

THE SYSTEM (a)

The TV wiring installation shall be cable-ready for connection to Cable Ready TV system to provide television reception on Band I, III, IV and Band V, as well as Frequency Modulated Sound on Band II.

(b)

The performance of Cable Ready TV system shall comply in accordance to the requirements stipulated in the COPIF.

(c)

All components installed shall be adequately protected from theft. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the equipment before any official handover.

EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS The requirement and specifications of each component part to be installed (e.g.; amplifiers, tap/tees, splitters, connectors, splice, cables and etc) in the Cable TV system shall comply with the requirements stipulated in the COPIF and Service Provider requirements.

61.4

THE INSTALLATION (a)

The subscriber's outlet shall normally be mounted next to the 13-Amp socket outlets in the flat unit.

(b)

Subscriber's outlets shall be provided as shown in the Drawings. A plastic holder with the TV system single line diagram shall be provided inside the metal enclosure housing the tee unit at the lowest floor of each Telecom Riser duct.

(c)

Under normal circumstances, joints are not allowed for cables laid above the ground. Where joints are inevitable, the approval of the SO Rep shall be obtained. Such joints may only be made by using the correct type of RF couplers, cable splice or connectors and heat shrunk or cold shrunk sleeves. The RLR of the couplers or connectors shall be better than 20 dB for both the VHF and UHF frequencies.

(d)

The positions of the outlets, distribution conduits and trunking shown on the Drawing are only approximate. The Contractor shall provide and install these at the exact positions as determined at the Site by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.

(e)

A label shall be provided on the front cover of every TV subscriber outlet, strictly adhering to the format and lettering as follows: Cable TV Ready System Do not alter or tamper For SCV assistance, please call Tel: 68732828



THE INSTALLATION (CONT'D) (f)

The TV outlets in the household/storey shelters shall come with both TV and FM ports. All other TV outlets shall come with TV ports only.

(g)

Metal base boxes shall be provided for TV isolators installed in household / Storey shelters. The boxes shall be sufficiently strong to resist mechanical damages and the service conditions specified. The boxes shall be constructed in such a way that they cannot be readily deformed. The Contractor shall submit samples to the SO Rep for approval: - All sheet metal threaded to receive a screw shall have sufficient thickness to allow not less than two full threads. - All metal boxes shall be appropriately protected against rust and corrosion. Such protection shall apply to both the inside and outside of the boxes. - Provision shall be made for holes in the base of the boxes for securing it to a mounting surface.

61.5

(h)

The tee units and metal boxes shall be bonded to earth complying with wiring regulation (CP5).

(i)

To prevent unnecessary disruption of power supply to the TV equipment, a label with the words "DO NOT SWITCH OFF POWER SUPPLY FOR TV SYSTEM" shall be indicated at the main electrical distribution board as well as at the consumer unit that provides power supply to the TV equipment.

(j)

Metal conduits and casings shall be earthed in accordance to wiring regulation (CP5).

(k)

All the conduits and PVC trunkings shall be painted with the approved paint. The colour of the paint shall be similar to the surroundings.

(l)

All cables in the junction or tee boxes shall be labelled according to the markings given on the circuit diagram at the amplifier box. The floor and the last 2 digits of the unit number shall be used for marking the cables to the apartments.

(m)

The TV/FM front plate of the isolators and the single cable TV ‘F’ type connector socket shall be made of white polycarbonate, urea or other material approved by the SO Rep and match the colour of the electrical/telecoms outlets and having the same brand/finishes. The polycarbonate, urea or other approved material shall be UV stabilised and shall not discolour within the Defects Liability Period even if the outlet is exposed to sunlight.

METAL TRUNKING AND TEE BOX All metal trunkings shall have removal covers extending over the entire lengths. The covers shall be fixed to the trunking by means of brass screws or stainless steel or steel screws protected with a finish of zinc coating against corrosion. All metal trunkings and associated fittings shall comply with SS249. The main vertical cable shall be installed in the Broadband coaxial cable system metal trunking. The main vertical TV trunk cable shall be labelled accordingly. Where horizontal metal trunkings are to be provided at the ground floor in place of underground pipes, the horizontal main distribution cables linking the vertical main distribution shall be installed in the metal trunking adjacent to the electrical trunking. The horizontal distribution cables shall be installed in cable tray where the installations are concealed by false ceiling & etc. The size of the cable tray / metal trunking to be used shall be in accordance with the COPIF. In the case where crossing of TV cable through the electrical trunking is inevitable, a 20mm conduit shall be installed as close to the trunking base as possible to facilitate the crossing. Only one metal conduit is allowed for each TV cable. Other means of ensuring physical separation of the TV cables and electrical cables can be considered subject to approval by the SO Rep. One tee box shall be provided at every storey for each Telecommunication riser. The tee box shall be shared with Broadband coaxial cable metal trunking system. The tee box shall be of sufficient size to house the tee unit and the associated cables without excessive bending. The size of the tee box shall be approximately (200(W) x 350(H) x 180(D)) mm. All metallic tee boxes shall be bonded to earth. Screws and washers used to mount the tee, splitter, trunkings and outlet boxes shall be of brass type or equivalent type which shall not corrode easily.



MULTIMEDIA BOX The splitter unit(s) and the associated cables shall be housed in the multimedia box. The requirements of the Multimedia box are as follows: (a)

General description The enclosure for the multimedia box shall comply with the relevant clauses of IEC/EN 60439-3 or IEC 60670, for flush and surface mounting. (i) Door -

The door shall be flush to the front. Changing of the door direction to the left and right shall be possible.

-

The door and its hinges shall be reliably constructed to prevent any breakage or impairment to the use of the enclosure. The manufacturer shall provide warranty against any defects of the hinges.

(ii) Door latch -

The door latch shall be recessed grip with hinged pattern handle, flapping back into place automatically or slide side ways and pull out to open.

(iii) Cable entries -

(b)

Cable entry shall be knock-out type, suitable for  25mm and  20mm conduits to be mounted and dismounted onto the wall box. These knock-outs shall be provided at the top and bottom and also at the sides for surface mounting enclosure. These knock-outs shall be removable with or without the use of an appropriate tool.

Standards (i) Test standard

(c)

-

The enclosure shall comply to either IEC / EN 60439-3 or IEC60670.

-

The enclosure shall be tested to comply with the following clauses: IEC/ EN 60439-3 : 8.2.7, 8.2.10, 8.2.11, 8.2.12.1, 8.2.12.3, 8.2.13, 8.2.15 or IEC60670 : 12.9, 13.1.1, 13.2, 15.3, 16.0, 18.0, 20.0

Test Certificate & Report Test certificate and report to IEC/EN 60439-3 or IEC 60670, issued by an independent test laboratory (e.g. TUV SUD PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners, Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation, Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA (Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners accreditation, Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification body) Scheme) shall be submitted for approval.

(d)

Material (i) Wall box


-

Plastic material; resistance to abnormal heat and fire according to IEC/EN 60439-3 or IEC60670.

-

This clause is not applicable if the finished enclosure is made of metal.


MULTIMEDIA BOX - CONTD (ii) Door and door frame -

Sheet steel, powder-coated and stove-enamelled; resistance to rust according to IEC/EN 604393 or IEC 60670.

-

Colour shall be RAL9010 (pure white) or Southern White DuPont EP9000-9032633 or other equivalent approved colour.

(iii) Base plate -

(e)

Sheet steel, electro-galvanized 1.5mm thickness with epoxy powder coating. Brackets for splitters shall be screwed down or spot welded

PVC content All plastic materials used for this enclosure shall be 100% free of PVC.

(f)

Halogen content The polystyrene used shall have a very low halogen content of < 1%. All products shall conform to the ROHS and WEEE directives.

(g)

Dimensions The dimension of the enclosure shall be 330 mm (W) x 442 mm (H) x 90 mm (D). The dimensions are indicative and samples shall be submitted for approval.

(h)

Earthing Terminal An Earthing Terminal shall be provided in the enclosure.

61.7

TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER OF TV SYSTEM The Contractor shall test and commission the TV wiring installation in accordance to requirements stipulated in the COPIF upon completion and issue test reports and certificate of compliance acceptable to Cable TV system Licensee and SO Rep. The Contractor shall arrange for necessary testing and verification by Cable TV system Licensee at least 2 months before flat completion to obtain the certificate of the cable readiness to arrange for connection to its Cable TV system. The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep to handover over the system to the Cable TV system Licensee/Operator after their certification and acceptance of the system before flat completion. The Contractor shall supply the necessary test equipments (signal generators, A/V modulators, amplifiers and etc) to test signals at the TV outlets and verification testing by Cable TV system Licensee and SO Rep. Copies of test reports, material list approved by the service provider and certificates shall be submitted to employer through SO Rep for record.

61.8

MAINTENANCE SERVICE

61.8.1

The maintenance period shall commence from the certified completion of the block or the Employer will assign the rights to the Cable TV Licensee/Operator who takes over the system and the Contractor shall respond to any maintenance service calls from the latter as if from the Employer. The maintenance service shall include all the items specified hereunder during the Maintenance Period. (a)


The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service on a 24-hour basis everyday without charge. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for the cost and expense of all such callback services in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall respond to the SO Rep, EMSU (ie. ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), HDB Branch Office or other HDB appointed agent(s) or Cable TV Licensee/Operator within 1hour of any call or messaging, failing which the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 “Nuisance and Irregularities” to impose charges against the Contractor.


MAINTENANCE SERVICE (CONTD) (b)

The Contractor shall be responsible for informing the above informant/s within one hour after a case has been referred to him, to report on: (i) extent and nature of repair; (ii) when work can commence; (iii) when repair is expected to be completed.

(c)

The Contractor shall attend to and rectify all the faults promptly. For failure of the whole system, the Contractor shall rectify the failures within 3 hours. If the fault is due to poor injection of CableTV signals, the Contractor shall inform the Cable TV Licensee/Operator to rectify the fault.

61.8.2

The Contractor shall liaise with Cable TV Licensee/Operator for carrying out any modification work to the TV system and emergency repairs.

61.8.3

If the contractor fails to attend an urgent call within the same day or fails to attend other faults within 24 hours or fails to rectify the faults successfully after three (3) attempts, the Employer or Cable or TV Licensee/Operator reserves the right to engage another contractor to carry out the works. The costs of the repairs and replacement plus the administration charges shall be borne by the Contractor and will be deducted from any payment due to the Contractor.

61.8.4

The Contractor shall provide standby equipment to keep the system functioning when the faulty equipment are taken back to the workshop for repairs.

61.8.5

The Contractor shall inform the Cable TV Licensee/Operator one month before the expiry of the maintenance period for a final defects list for rectification. After the end of the maintenance period and confirmation of no defects, the Contractor shall obtain a discharge letter from the Cable TV Licensee/Operator to be sent to the Employer for the closing of account.

Section 62/.....


Bldg Spec Page 62-1 SECTION 62 TELEPHONE CABLING

62.1

Scope of Work The telephone cabling works shall be undertaken by a licensed telecommunication wiring contractor. The Works shall comply with latest Code of Practice for Info-communications Facilities in Buildings (COPIF) and meet the requirements of Public Basic Telecommunications Service Operators (PBTS) such as SingTel and StarHub and in accordance with the tender Drawings. The PBTS shall install their block telephone cabling from their main distribution frames in the Main Distribution Frame room (MDF room) or Telephone Equipment room (TER) to their risers’ Distribution Points (DP) at the upper floors. The DPs are normally located inside the Telecommunication riser. The telephone cabling Works under the contract shall include the telephone cabling from the PBTS DP to the internal of the residential units, and testing and commissioning of the telephone cabling works.

62.2

General The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour, tools and materials required for the telephone cabling works. All materials for the telephone cabling works shall be as approved by IDA. It shall match the electrical wiring accessories and of the same construction.

62.3

Installation of Telephone Cables Within Block The contractor shall provide the telecommunication wiring in accordance to the latest Code of Practice for Info-Communication Facilities (COPIF) in Building issued by Info-Communication Development Authority (IDA). The cables installed from the block terminal (BT) to the telephone points within the dwelling units shall be Category 6 or above for sold flats.

62.4

Installation of Telephone Point in Lift Motor Room Telephone points shall be provided in the lift motor rooms/TMS closet of residential blocks, multi-storey car parks and as shown in the drawing. For each telephone point, the Contractor shall install two numbers of minimum Category 5e ( in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A standard) four-pair unshielded twisted pair cable from the nearest Public Basic Telecommunication Services Operator Distribution Point (PBTS DP) to the telephone block terminal (BT). The telephone point shall be located next to the lift isolator for single or multiple motor-room/TMS closet of each block. The telephone point for the lift motor room/TMS closet shall be identified with sleeves marked as "lift motor room/TMS". The telephone point shall be linked via conduit two numbers of minimum Category 5e four-pair unshielded twisted pair cable from one lift motor room/TMS closet to other lift motor-room/TMS closet and to any other telephone extension points in the lift motor room/TMS closet of each block. Each cable shall be terminated at the telephone block terminal (BT).

62.5

Fixing of Telephone Socket The telephone socket shall be installed inside the unit at a position as indicated in the Drawings.

62.6

Fixing of 20mmx9mm Telecom Casing Where surface trunking is required to be installed, the 20mm x 9mm PVC casing shall be extended independently from the 60mm x 20mm multi-compartment trunking to the telephone socket. A minimum of 7 nails shall be used to fix a standard length of 2 m casing.

62.7

Sample Units Sample units of the telephone cabling Works from the DP to the 5-pair BT and sockets inside the dwelling unit, shall be set up for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.



Earth Bars in MDF and TER Rooms The Contractor shall provide an earthing bar in accordance to the latest Code of Practice for InfoCommunication Facilities (COPIF) in Building issued by Info-Communication Development Authority (IDA) for every MDF room and Telephone Equipment Room (TER) of each building block.

62.9

Testing and Completion Upon completion of the telephone cabling Works, the Contractor shall submit an endorsed testing report by their licensed telecommunication wiring contractor to the SO Rep; and inform the SO Rep and PBTS for a joint site inspection. The PBTS may conduct an acceptance test on the cabling to check for insulation, continuity and correct termination during the inspection. The Contractor shall rectify all defects reported during the inspection within one week.

Section 63/.....


Bldg Spec Page 63-1 SECTION 63 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

63.1

SCOPE OF WORK

63.1.1

General The work include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical fire alarm system installation as shown in the Drawings. The fire alarm system shall comply with SS CP 10, BS EN54 : Part 2 & 4 and the requirements of the local authorities. All fire alarm panels shall be approved by FSSD. All fire alarm accessories shall be type tested. Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition, such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design. The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary completion, supervision, testing and commissioning of the fire alarm installation under the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the requisite certificates and reports including the testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep, URA and BCA.

63.1.2

Approval Of Drawings And Details The Contractor shall submit two sets of the following documents within one month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to the SO Rep for approval : (a)

Layout and construction of main alarm panel and sub-alarm panel including the battery compartment.

(b)

Technical specifications and samples (if required) of all Plant and equipment employed in the installation.

(c)

Other information of the system as specified in the Specifications or required by the SO Rep.

Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval given by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remain liable for providing the panel and other Plant and equipment fitting on the Site that meet the operating requirements under the said Code of Practice and the relevant Authorities.

63.2

SYSTEM OF OPERATIONS

63.2.1

General The fire alarm system shall be a closed circuit continuously monitored installation, comprising essentially of a main alarm panel, triggering devices and alarm bells, fed from a continuously charged DC power supply source.



Alarm Operation The operation of one or more trigger devices shall result in an immediate fire alarm given by : (i)

an audible/visual alarm from all the alarm bells/strobe lights situated in the entire building;

(ii)

a visible indication for each zone in which a trigger device operates.

Where a number of alarm signals are received in quick succession, or simultaneously, the Plant and equipment shall be designed so that a general audible alarm continues or resounds as each visible indication commences. The alarm state shall be maintained by the main alarm panel without a continued signal from the trigger device so that even destruction of a connection after the trigger device operates shall not discontinue the sounding of the alarm.

63.2.3

Alarm Silencing Switch The audible and visual alarms shall continue until silenced by the manual operation of a silencing switch; they shall not be automatically silenced. The design of the silencing switch shall be such that the audible alarm can only be silenced after 3 minutes of sounding. The principle of design shall be such that no other control is able to override the silencing switch during the 3 minutes of sounding. The operation of a silencing switch while an alarm condition exists shall not cancel the visual indication of the fire alarm nor shall the operation of the silencing switch prevent the proper receipt of alarms from any zone(s) not yet providing an alarm signal. Further, its operation shall not prevent the transmission of the alarm signal to the monitoring station. There shall be only one switch for the silencing of the audible and visual fire alarm. In addition, the operation of the audible and visual fire alarm re-sounding system shall not require the activation of any other manual switches and devices. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst an alarm condition exists shall transfer the alarm to the fire alarm bells.

63.2.4

Fault Warning The fire alarm system shall be capable of detecting fault automatically whenever it develops in any of the circuits and a fault warning shall be given by both an audible warning from a buzzer and a visible indication in the main alarm panel. This buzzer in the main alarm panel shall be distinctive and of a different character from fire alarm bells. The buzzer warning shall be cancelled by a single silencing switch solely designed for this purpose and unless the fault is rectified, the visual indication shall persist. The removal of a fault shall automatically reset the audible fault warning circuit. The occurrence of another further fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to sound again. Similarly, the restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning of the system. Any fault warning shall not prevent a fire alarm being given at the same time. At any time, an alarm of fire shall take priority over any other indication such as fault warning. A distinct visible and audible fault signal shall be given on the main alarm panel in the event of any of the following situations : (i)

failure or disconnection of the normal power supply to the main alarm panels;

(ii)

failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the standby battery;

(iii)

failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the battery charger;

(iv)

triggering circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring between trigger devices and the main alarm panel including the removal of any trigger devices;



Fault Warning (Cont’d) (v)

bell circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring between alarm bells and the main alarm panel including the removal of any bells;

(vi)

open circuit in any of the looping circuits that control the networking of general alarm, silencing and reset function;

(vii)

rupture or disconnection of any fuse or the operation of any protective devices that would prevent a fire alarm being given.

Should any of the above situations from (i) to (vii) (inclusive) occur in the respective sub-alarm panels a distinct visible signal shall also be given on the main alarm panel.

63.3

MAIN ALARM PANEL

63.3.1

General The main alarm panel (MAP) shall be of the solid state electronic type. Other equivalent types may be proposed, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep. It shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1.The MAP shall contain the following Plant and equipment : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n)

Switches and indicating facilities for zones "System On" indicator "Mains Fault", "Earth Fault", "Charger Fault", "Battery Fault" and "Sounder Fault" indicators A voltmeter to indicate battery voltage Fire alarm buzzer Silencing switch for fire alarm complete with indicator Audible fault warning buzzer Silencing switch for fault warning buzzer complete with indicator Indicator for bell circuit fault Evacuation switch to energise all alarm bells complete with indicator Light indicator test facility System reset switch Auxiliary contacts complete with isolation switch and indicator A separate indicator for each sub-alarm panel to indicate that its isolation switch is activated.

The main alarm panel shall be accommodated in a well-finished self-sustained sheet cabinet constructed from at least 1.5mm thick hot dipped galvanised sheet steel. The cabinet housing shall be coloured bright red and shall be fitted with a hinged, glazed door which shall be locked. All alarm zone indicators and associated switches shall be visible behind the locked door. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly and permanently marked on the front of the cabinet. Two spare zones or 10% of the total zone, whichever is the higher, shall be provided for the alarm panels. Facilities shall be provided in the main alarm panel so that easy connection to extension unit can be made when future expansion of the main alarm panel becomes necessary. A manual call point and an alarm bell/strobe light shall be provided adjacent to the main alarm panel. All main alarm panel shall incorporate the automatic facilities to receive, interpret and operate the signals from their fire fighting systems installed in the building blocks. Letterings using reversed silk screen designating the alarm zone, the functions of the various indicators, apparatus and switches shall be provided for every main alarm panel. All manual controls shall be clearly labelled to indicate their functions. An information chart listing the system operating instruction shall be fixed inside each board. Other type of labelling may also be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Approved silk screen white perspex sheet with reduced scale coloured drawings of approved sizes showing the boundaries and locations of the alarm zone shall be provided by the Contractor and located next to each main alarm panel, sub-alarm and repeater board.



General (Cont’d) Locations of fire protection Plant and equipment such as main alarm panel, sub-alarm panel, portable fire extinguishers, fire hose reels, dry riser, etc shall also be indicated on the white perspex coloured drawings in the form of clear and distinctive symbols. Escape routes including corridor, staircase, etc shall be clearly indicated. The main alarm panels and sub-alarm panels of the automatic alarm system shall be provided with an alarm verification feature complying with CP10 and approved by the relevant Authority.

63.3.2

Alarm Zone - Zone Switches And Indicating Facilities The following switches and indicating facilities shall be provided for each alarm zone or group : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

63.3.3

Fire alarm indicator Fault indicator Isolation indicator Isolation position switch

Fire, Fault And Isolation Indicators The fire alarm indicator shall be twin light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it). The fault indicator and isolation indicator can each be a separate single LED or a single LED incorporating both the fault indicator and isolation indicator. The LED shall light up upon actuation and remain lit until manually reset. The fire alarm indicator shall be coloured red and clearly labelled with the word "FIRE". The fault warning indicator and the isolation indicator shall be coloured yellow and clearly labelled with the words "FAULT" and "ISOLATED" respectively.

63.3.4

Isolation Switch A switch shall be provided for the deliberate isolation of each individual alarm group from the main alarm panel common circuitry. Operation of the isolation switch shall prevent the alarm group from initiating either alarm or fault signals and shall not impair the normal functioning of any other alarm groups. Unless normal conditions have been restored, operation of the isolation switches shall not cause the associated alarm groups to be isolated if the switches are operated after on alarm activation of the respective zones.

63.3.5

Indicators Lamp indicators shall be the light emitting diode (LED) type. The arrangement of indicator circuits and the design of the apparatus shall be such that the operation of one indicator does not prevent the proper and separate operation of other indicators. The operation of any alarm bell or the transmission of fire alarm signal to approved monitoring station shall not be prevented by any faulty indicator and shall not depend on the operation of any indicator.

63.3.6

Connection Of Ancillary Services Ancillary services shall not affect the functioning of the Plant and equipment. A 24V DC supply may be provided from the fire alarm control panel to operate a relay or similar operating device controlling the ancillary Plant and equipment. The mechanism shall be such that it does not impose a continuous load on the battery under non-alarm conditions. Provision for the interface between the main alarm panel and auxiliary Plant, control Plant and equipment or external devices which require to be operated or disconnected in the event of an alarm shall also be made by the use of at least two separate and uncommitted relays. Each relay shall provide 2 sets of voltage free changeover contacts having minimum rating of 5A 30V dc. Outputs to any ancillary services shall be fused or similarly protected to ensure the safety of the control Plant and equipment.



Sub-Alarm Panel The construction and requirements of the sub-alarm panel shall be similar to the main alarm panel. Subalarm panel shall contain indicators together with associated switches and indicating facilities for zones. The sub-alarm panel shall have additional facilities for transmitting a sector signal to the main alarm panel. Where sub-alarm panel is provided in a sector of a premise, the sector in which an alarm originates shall be shown on the main alarm panel, and the zone of origin of the alarm shall be shown on the sub-alarm panel. Where both sector and zone indication are provided on one main alarm panel, clear differentiation shall be made between the two functions.

63.3.8

Power Supply The fire alarm system shall be operated on a DC power supply of 24 volts provided by sealed type maintenance-free lead-acid batteries which are maintained in an adequately charged condition by a 230 volts AC/24 volts DC rectifier/charger. A double-pole 230 volts rated switch with neon indicator shall be provided for the direct termination of the incoming mains supply. This supply shall be exclusive to the fire alarm system and connected to a separate circuit from the main switchboard and the controlling circuit breaker shall be clearly labelled "FIRE ALARM : DO NOT SWITCH OFF". The batteries shall be suitable for standing on open circuit or floating across a constant voltage supply and discharging at infrequent intervals. The capacity of the battery used to energise the alarm system shall be such that in the event of mains failure, the battery is capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24 hours. Thereafter it shall be capable of supplying an additional load resulting from an alarm originating in two separate alarm zones or groups for a period of half an hour and, if utilised to supply emergency evacuation alarms, it shall in addition, be capable of supplying the full emergency evacuation alarm load for a period of at least 10 minutes. Calculations for ascertaining the capacity of the batteries and the design of the battery charging the Plant and equipment to meet the above requirements shall be submitted to the SO Rep. The battery terminal pillars and intercell connectors, bolts, nuts and washers used for fastening of intercell and terminal connectors shall be made of highly conductive and corrosion-free materials. The cell container of the battery shall be enclosed and made of rugged and self-extinguishing type plastic. The battery shall be arranged in the compartment in such a way as to allow easy maintenance so that the inspection of batteries shall not require removal of the cells and connections from the battery assembly. A label containing the following information shall be securely fixed within the battery enclosure : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

63.3.9

Type of cell Number of cells Ampere hour capacity Nominal voltage Final voltage Float voltage of battery charger Output current and limit of battery charger Date supplied and recommended date of replacement

Battery Charger The battery charger shall be of constant voltage current limiting type with automatic boost charge by voltage level sensing and capable of functioning under the following environmental conditions : (i) (ii) (iii)


Temperature Relative humidity Abnormal foreign potential

: : :

10°C to 40°C 20% to 95% Power line surge


Battery Charger (Cont’d) The charger circuit shall be designed to suit the local climate. The charger shall be capable of supplying any possible load of the system while maintaining the battery in a fully charged condition and recharging the battery as prescribed below. The charging system shall be the current limiting constant voltage type. The rating of the battery charger shall be such that : (i)

after the battery has been discharged from the fully charged state by supplying the load as specified in the aforementioned requirements, and

(ii)

after recharging for a period of not more than 24 hours, the battery shall have recovered to the extent that it shall be capable of sustaining a further discharge of supplying the same load as specified in the aforementioned requirements.

The output voltage provided by the battery charger shall be maintained within 0.1% of the preset value whilst operating within any combination of the conditions described below and whilst delivering a current within the range of values required for float charging : (i) (ii)

Voltage Frequency

: :

230 rms +10% 50 Hz +5% single phase

The battery charger shall keep the battery under constant voltage charge. It shall incorporate automatic control features with output designed to charge and maintain the cells of the battery within the limits specified by the battery manufacturer, taking into account any quiescent load imposed by the associated system. The voltage output of the charger shall be adjustable to ±20% of the nominal voltage. The battery maximum allowable charging current shall be designed to suit the selected battery size at fixed current limitation. The trimmers shall be arranged so that adjustment can be done without removing any circuit boards or obstacles. All electronic parts including rectifiers, power transistors and resistor shall be designed to function at the case temperature below 75°C unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. Printed circuit boards, fuses, relays and other electrical parts employed in the battery charger shall be mounted and connected in such a way that facilitate inspection of them without any need to dismantle them from their operating positions. An approved self-resetting low voltage cut-off device with adjustable low voltage setting shall be installed in the circuit between the battery and the system if the system is not self-resetting. This under-voltage protection device shall disconnect the battery from supplying the system if the pre-set low voltage limit as recommended by the battery manufacturer is reached.

63.4

MANUAL CALL POINTS Manual call points shall be of the "break-glass" type complying with the requirements of BS 5839:Part 2 and notwithstanding this, be of a type approved by the relevant statutory authorities. The casing of the call point shall be of shatterproof corrosion resistant plastic, finished in red. The front glass fitted shall be replaceable and shall be such that the possibility of accidental breaking is reduced to a minimum. Manual call point installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof to at least IP65 and watertight steel box construction complete with screwed conduit entry hole. The word "FIRE" shall be embossed on the front surface. For fire alarm systems which are not connected to monitoring stations (DECAM), provide a "IN CASE OF FIRE, CALL 995" signage at every manual call point.



FIRE ALARM DETECTORS Fire alarm detectors shall be of the types approved by the relevant statutory authorities. The detectors shall preferably be flushed mounted where possible and installed in a manner that each can be readily removed for servicing without affecting the effectiveness of the remaining detectors and the system operation. In addition, all heat detectors shall comply with the CP 10:2005, Code of Practice for the Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm Systems and the technical specification EN 54:Part 5:2001 "Fire Detection and Fire Alarm Systems-Part 5: Heat Detectors-Point Detectors" or AS 1603-1:1997 "Automatic Fire Detection And Alarm Systems:Heat Detectors" & relevant parts of AS 2362 "Fire Detection, Warning, Control & Intercom Systems" or UL Standard 521 "Heat Detectors For Fire Protective Signaling Systems" or other approved equivalent.

63.6

ALARM BELLS AND STROBE LIGHT Alarm bells shall be of the cast or pressed steel underdome type, finished in red. It shall be complete with a strobe light on top of the bell cover. The bell shall be the trembling type with a gong diameter of 150mm, and shall be capable of giving a minimum sound level of 90 dBA within a range of 1m continuously. The strobe light shall be attached with the alarm bell or mounted directly above it. The strobe light shall be of a high intensity flashing strobe light with flash rate of 50 to 80 flashes per minute. The lens cover of the light shall be red or amber in colour. The bells and light shall be suitable for operation on 24 volts DC. Alarm bells shall be mounted on conduit boxes above the manual call points. Alarm bells installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof and watertight construction to at least IP65.

63.7

INSTALLATION OF WIRING Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate provisions of SS CP5 except as modified by the relevant clauses in SS CP10. The wiring of the fire alarm system including the incoming supply mains shall be exclusive to the fire alarm installation and shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuit. Fire alarm wiring shall be spaced at least 50mm away from any other service. The mains feed to the power supply Plant and equipment of the fire alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of all other services and also from all other circuits of the fire alarm system. Each alarm zone or group shall be separately wired and indicated on the main or sub-alarm panel. Manual call points shall be connected in an "open" circuit and an "end-of-line" resistor shall be provided to enable line monitoring. All wiring shall be run in steel metal conduits or metal trunking exclusive to the fire alarm system. The Contractor shall ensure that the furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the proper functioning of the system. No joint between terminal points shall be permitted, except in long runs, in which case the joints shall only be made in a suitable enclosed terminal box employing screwed terminations. The box shall be labelled "Fire Alarm Link Box". The wiring diagram shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation commences.



SENSING CIRCUIT A pair of voltage-free normally closed fire-resistant signal cables for sensing the activation of the fire alarm system shall be provided from the main alarm panel to the lift machine room.

63.9

MONITORING FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Where the automatic fire alarm system is required to be connected to monitoring stations as shown in the Drawings, the connection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of SS CP 10 and as approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for the one-time rental charge and installation of the fire alarm transmitter, installation of the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up telephone line from the transmitter to the nearest telephone distribution point and interconnection between the transmitter and the main alarm panel leading to the commissioning of the complete system. The transmitter shall be complete with the leased-line transmitter, digital communicator and all associated power supply units. The Contractor shall also include in the Contract Sum the first three month rental charges for the leasedline and the back-up telephone line from a PBTS and the first year 24 hour monitoring charge by the monitoring station, all commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer. If other means of DECAM transmission, approved by the Singapore Civil Defence Force, are proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall still be required to install the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up telephone line from the telephone terminal block to the transmitter. In addition, the first three-month rental charges for such other means of transmission shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Such alternative shall be approved by the SO Rep.

63.10

AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS On completion of the installation and before the final inspection and testing, the Contractor shall supply to the SO Rep three sets of suitably scaled "As-Installed" drawings of the complete fire alarm installation. The drawings shall comprise the following :

63.11

(a)

positions and boundaries of various alarm zones;

(b)

position of main alarm panel, sub-alarm panels, battery charger, transmitter, manual call points, detectors and bells;

(c)

circuitry diagram of the alarm panels and battery charger;

(d)

legend showing clearly all the symbols and abbreviations used;

(e)

technical specifications of all Plant and equipment used in the system including the manufacturer's recommended testing requirements for detectors in-situ.

INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The commissioning test shall be carried out by the Contractor and to be witnessed by the SO Rep. The format of the test report shall be in accordance with the Specifications. The entire system shall be tested to ensure that it operates satisfactorily and that : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

all manual call points, detectors and bells function correctly; all fault monitoring circuits function correctly; the battery and battery charger comply with the requirements of the Specifications; all ancillary Plant and equipment function correctly; all control features and indicators in the alarm panels function correctly; cable insulation resistance of all circuits are satisfactory in accordance with SS CP5.

The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the test report, duly completed and signed, to the SO Rep not later than 7 days after the test. BLDG12/S63.DOC(8) Sal(151211) (DPD)


MAINTENANCE SERVICE The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance of the Fire Alarm System and an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it). The maintenance during the one year Maintenance Period shall include all items listed in the Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System specified hereunder.

63.12.1

Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System

63.12.1.1

Type Of Maintenance Service This service shall include the following items : (A)

The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service between 9.00 am and 9.00 pm every day without charge. On Substantial Completion of the Works as certified by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall install and maintain one one-way exchange line or apply for the radio paging service from a PTL to receive calls from the Branch Offices. The telephone numbers allotted to the radio paging service shall be kept strictly confidential for use by the Employer. All fees and expenses incurred for the application, installation and maintenance of the one-way exchange line or the radio paging service shall be borne by the Contractor.

(B)

Emergency call-back service shall be provided by the Contractor at any time and all such urgent calls shall be attended to within the same day if the Contractor is notified before 9.00 pm. All other calls shall be attended to within 24 hours on notification by telephone or through the radio paging service as specified in the aforementioned requirement, otherwise the SO Rep reserves the right to engage any other person to rectify the fault and all expenses incurred plus the Employer's charges shall be recovered from the Contractor.

(C)

The Contractor shall provide the following servicing and maintenance : (a)

Monthly Test And Annual Test The Contractor shall inspect, test and service the complete fire alarm system under this Contract at least once a month except where otherwise directed by the Employer. At each such monthly test and the annual test, the minimum items or work detailed below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall also be included. The result of each test shall be recorded in the test report format as produced in Appendix A38 "Monthly/Annual Test Report - Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System" and filed in the log book.

(b)

Monthly Test For monthly tests, the following inspection and testing procedures shall be carried out each month :


(i)

Simulate fire conditions on all alarm zones and reset the system to normal. Confirm with the monitoring station when the test has been completed.

(ii)

Check battery voltage and charging current in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

(iii)

Check batteries and their terminals as specified by the manufacturer to ensure that they are in good serviceable condition. Where applicable, examine to ensure that the specific gravity and the level of the electrolyte in each cell is correct.

(iv)

Check condition of battery cabinet for corrosion and to ensure that batteries are stored in a secure condition.


Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System (Cont'd)

63.12.1.1

Type Of Maintenance Service (Cont'd) (C)

(b)

(c)

Monthly Test (Cont'd) (v)

Check to ensure that all indicating lights are operating correctly and replace if faulty.

(vi)

Check operation of all alarm sounders.

(vii)

Disconnect the battery supply and ensure that the visual and audible fault signals are activated at the main alarm panel.

(viii)

Simulate main power supply failure and ensure that the system will operate correctly with the standby battery power supply (as specified in the Specifications).

(ix)

Simulate fire alarm conditions and check the output signals available to initiate the remote auxiliary functions that is required to be in operation in the event of fire as in accordance with the appropriate codes.

(x)

Simulate fault conditions on all alarm zones to ensure that the main alarm panel is operating correctly.

(xi)

Check that the main alarm panel is in a clean and operative condition.

(xii)

Visually inspect the condition of components, terminations and cables.

(xiii)

Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out satisfactorily. Record in the log book any circuit fault that require repair.

(xiv)

Check that all switches are returned to their operating position after the test.

(xv)

The person carrying out the test shall record in the log, any fault(s) identified and that the above test has been carried out.

Annual Test For annual tests, carry out all the inspection and testing procedures specified in the monthly test in the aforementioned requirement and, in addition, the following shall also be provided : (i)

The maintenance personnel shall arrange to check the operation of at least 20 percent of the detectors in the installation each year. The selection of detectors to be tested shall be spread over as many zones as possible and shall be made in such a way that all the detectors in the installation shall have been checked at least once in 5 years. The checking of detectors shall take the form of either : - the testing of a detector in-situ; or - the removal of a detector and its replacement by a detector which has been checked and calibrated by the supplier/manufacturer.

(c)

Annual Test (ii)

Circuits requiring automatic voltage regulated supplies shall be checked to ensure correct operation and voltage output.

(iii)

Where the heat-sensitive element of thermal detectors or the enclosure of other detectors are found to be coated with paint or any other material likely to affect the operation of the detectors, such material shall be cleaned off or if necessary, have the detector replaced.


Bldg Spec Page 64-1 SECTION 64 VENTILATION SYSTEM

64.1

SCOPE OF WORK The Works to be executed shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the mechanical ventilation system to food stalls, eating houses and complexes as shown in the Drawings. The Drawings shall serve as references only. Where any part of the design contravenes with Codes and Building Authority requirements, the onus is on the Contractor to make amendments to the design but additional approval from the Consultant shall be sought before any deviations from the approved design can be carried out, failing which the whole installation may not be accepted. The Contractor shall be deemed to allow all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the foregoing requirements. The mechanical ventilation system shall be complete with fan, ductworks, silencers, dampers, flexible duct connections, sound attenuation box, vibration isolators, drain traps and other accessories. The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the following requirements and Drawings and in compliance with the current regulations of the Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources, the Statutory Authorities of Singapore, and the Singapore Standard CP 13:1980 on mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning in buildings. Bifurcated fan shall be used for eating houses and food stall. All standards used in the Specifications shall be of the latest version.

64.1.1

Related Documents This Section shall be read in conjunction with Section 65 including all clauses and subclauses under it.

64.1.2

Submission Of Drawings And Details During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all Ventilation System Installation, routes, legends and all other related works based on actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings. On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the testing record/results of each installation.

64.2

OTHER WORKS TO BE INCLUDED The following works shall be included as part of the installation :

64.3

(a)

Provision of openings in wall, floor and roof slabs for the installation of duct as shown in Drawings.

(b)

Where the duct runs through the floor or roof slabs, a raised kerb shall be constructed around the duct and the duct at the opening should be constructed in such a way as to prevent seepage of water.

(c)

Patching up and making good all openings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

(d)

All necessary electrical wiring including accessories to the fan motor.

(e)

Fan motor control panel complete with internal wiring, control Plant and equipment, indication and motor starters.

(f)

Low level exhaust louvres/grilles are to be protected by metal guards.

WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL All material used shall comply with the relevant British Standard Specification. Certificates of origin for any material shall be produced by Contractor on demand by the SO Rep. All electrical Plant and equipment shall be fully tropicalised, suitable for use in a hot humid atmosphere having an ambient temperature of 32°C. Certificates of tests by competent Authorities for all electrical and mechanical components shall be produced by the Contractor on demand for inspection by the SO Rep.



DUCTWORK

64.4.1

General The material, construction and installation of the ductwork shall be in accordance with this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.

64.4.2

Materials All ductwork shall be constructed of best quality galvanised steel sheets with thickness not less than 1.37mm unless otherwise specified.

64.4.3

Construction All ductwork shall be constructed conforming to the dimensions and methods specified. Horizontal dimensions of the rectangular ductwork are shown first and all dimensions shown are CLEAR internal sizes. Ducts which are internally insulated, shall be constructed such that the nominal dimensions which are shown in the Drawings are clear internal sizes inside the insulation. Ductwork shall be free of any waves or buckles. Full size standard galvanised steel sheets shall be used and any patched, made up, or second-hand sheets shall be rejected. Unless otherwise specified, all changes in duct size shall be made in a gradual manner with a total angle of divergence not exceeding 15 degrees whenever possible. Bends shall be made with an inside radius not less than the duct width in the plane of the bend. Where this is not possible due to limitation of space, square bends may be used. All bends whether round or square shall be provided with approved turning vanes. All duct shall be installed without forming dips or traps which may collect residues. A residual trap shall be provided at the base of each vertical riser with provisions for cleanout. Ducts shall be installed with a fall in the direction of flow of not less than 1 in 200. A drain shall be provided at the lowest point of each run of duct and as indicated in the Drawings. Each duct system shall constitute an individual system serving only exhaust hoods on one floor. All duct joints for the eating houses and food stall unless otherwise specified shall be of continuous external welded constructions and all horizontal welded joints shall be at the upper edge and not the lower edge except where any two sections of ducts are joined together. Ducts having width of more than 450mm shall be cross broken or stiffened by approved means.

64.4.3.1

Joints And Seams Sheet metal ducts shall be properly braced and reinforced. The internal ends of all slip joints shall be installed in the direction of the flow. All ducts shall be constructed with minimum number of seams. Ductwork longitudinal joints shall be of an approved air-tight self-locking type. Flat double longitudinal seams shall be used for ductwork connections. Rivets shall be spaced at not more than 65mm centres. All duct joints shall be air-tight. All joints and seams shall be constructed in accordance with approved standard.

64.4.3.2

Flanges Flanges shall be of rolled structural angles welded at the corners and shall be rivetted to the duct. Spot welding is not acceptable. The downstream end of the duct shall be bent around the face of the flange. The upstream end of the duct shall be inserted 50mm into the downstream duct. Flanges shall be jigdrilled or drilled to suit the minimum clearance for bolt. A 5mm rubber gasket shall be installed between flange joints to prevent air leak.



Construction (Cont'd)

64.4.3.3

Construction Method The construction method shall be in accordance with the following : Maximum Size of Duct

Metal Sheet Gauge

Type of Transverse Joint Connection

Type of Bracing

Up to 300mm

26 (0.46mm)

S drive, pocket or bar slips at 2.2m centres

None

301mm to 460mm

24 (0.56mm)

S drive, pocket or bar slips at 2.2m centres

None

461mm to 760mm

24 (0.56mm)

S Drive, 25mm pocket or 25mm bar slips at 2.2m centres

761mm to 1070mm

22 (0.71mm)

25mm x 25mm x 4mm angle iron joints

1071mm to 1400mm

22 (0.71mm)

38mm angle connections or 38mm Bar Slips with 25mm x 4mm reinforcement bar at 2.2m centres

25mm x 25mm x 4mm angles 1.7m from joints

1401mm to 1530mm

20 (0.91mm)

33mm angle connections or 38mm in pockets or 38mm in bar slips at 1m maximum centres with 35mm x 4mm reinforcement bar

38mm x 38mm x 4mm diagonal angles or 38mm x 38mm x 4mm angles 0.7m from joints

1531mm to 2150mm

20 (0.91mm)

Ditto

Ditto

Above 2151mm

28 (1.22mm)

Ditto

Ditto

64.5

DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES

64.5.1

Splitter Dampers

25mm x 25mm x 4mm angles 1.7m from joints Ditto

Splitter dampers shall be installed at branch connections to main ducts. The dampers shall be of sufficient size to completely close off their respective branch ducts and shall be constructed of galvanised metal sheet of 1.5mm thick streamlined around a steel shaft of not less than 12mm diameter. The shaft shall run in brass or nylon bearings fixed to each side of the duct. Each damper shall be fitted with a quadrant and shall have a locking device to hold the damper in position. The dampers shaft shall be clearly marked to show the relationship between damper blade and quadrant. Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die cast aluminium with the words "OPEN" and "CLOSE" cast on the quadrant. The whole of the damper assembly shall be rigidly installed to prevent vibration and rattling.

64.5.2

Multi-Blade Dampers Multi-blade dampers shall be of the opposed blade counter-rotating type. The dampers shall be rigidly constructed of galvanised metal sheet of not less than 1.5mm thick. The blades shall be mounted in a separate channel frame and shall be fitted with 12mm steel spindle at each end, carried by sealed bearing. Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication purposes. Each blade shall be linked by a rigid linkage for operation and control and shall ensure complete closing of all blades in union.



TURNING VANES All 90 degree elbow ducts shall be fitted with approved turning vanes. The turning vanes and runners shall be fabricated of the same sheet metal thickness as those used for the ducts. All turning vanes shall be spot-welded to the ducts. Rivetting or other methods which require making of holes through the sheet metal ducts shall not be allowed.

64.7

DUCTWORK TEST HOLES Test holes shall be provided in the ductwork on the discharge side of each fan, at each floor branch takeoff and each major branch duct handling more than ten percent of the volume of air handled by the fan. This is to enable pivot tube or velometer readings to be taken. Screwed and plugged 25mm I.S.O. Metric Thread half-sockets shall be welded to a 50mm x 6mm double plated fixed to side of the ducts. This arrangement shall not protect into the air stream and internally insulated ductwork and shall allow passage for probes.

64.8

FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS All flexible connections shall be formed from non-combustible, best quality, approved silicone coated glass fabric suitable for extreme temperature of -50°C to 250°C type and special care shall be taken to ensure an air tight seal. Flexible connections shall be provided on inlet and outlet of duct connections of all fans. The flexible connections shall have 100mm to 150mm length free of stress and arranged so as to permit renewal of the fabric without disturbing the ductwork. Flexible connections shall be of high temperature rated fire retardant type with a minimum thickness of 2mm. Manufacturer's test certificate on the high temperature rating shall be provided. All ductwork shall be adequately supported adjacent to all flexible connections. Each flexible connector shall be fastened tautly to matching flanges by adjustable clips/clamp bands.

64.9

DUCT SUPPORTS AND HANGERS The supports shall be spaced at not more than 2500mm centres. The hangers and supports shall be fixed to the building structure with "HILTI" HKD flush anchors or other approved fasteners. Power tool fixing shall only be allowed with the specific approval in writing from the SO Rep. Should the Contractor fail to comply with this requirement and damage results, all making good shall be at his cost and expense. Vertical ducts shall be rigidly supported with structural angles or channels fixed securely to the duct and building structure in an approved manner. Horizontal ducts shall be supported with angle iron trapezes, hung with round mild steel rods of not less than 12mm diameter. The rods shall be threaded at both ends and lock nuts shall be provided to secure the hangers firmly. The angle iron trapezes shall be of not less than 32mm x 32mm x 3mm for ducts of up to 700mm width and 38mm x 38mm x 5mm for ducts for 1100mm width upwards. Where non-insulated ducts sit directly on top of the angle iron trapezes, rubber gaskets of 3mm minimum thickness shall be provided to prevent direct contact of the metal surfaces. Where ducts run at floor level, they shall be supported on 50mm x 50mm x 5mm angle iron saddles securely bolted to the floor. The ducts shall be held in the saddle by 38mm x 3mm steel strips bolted to the angle supports.



ACCESS PANELS The opening shall be large enough to permit cleaning. There shall be one access panel at each change in direction of the duct or as indicated in the Drawings. The opening shall be at the sides of the duct. In horizontal sections the lower edge of the opening shall be not less than 400mm from the bottom of the duct. Access panels shall be constructed of the same material and thickness as the duct and shall not permit the passage of grease under any conditions. Access panels shall be hinged with latches for locking. The opening shall be at least 450mm x 450mm. When the duct is of smaller dimensions than the opening, the panel shall be the biggest possible. The contact planes between duct and frame of panel shall be suitably sealed with compressible and noncombustible gasket of minimum 3mm thick to give an air-tight joint.

64.11

CLEANING AND BLOWING OUT OF DUCTWORK All ducts shall be internally cleaned before starting of fans. During installation, care shall be taken to prevent ingress of foreign material. As soon as practicable, the fans shall start to blow out dust which may collect inside the ductwork during installation.

64.12

DRAIN TAPS Drain taps shall be provided as indicated in the Drawings and the ducts shall be pitched towards these drain taps. The position of drain taps shall be such that it causes minimum inconvenience to people when a duct cleaning job is in progress. The drain taps shall be air-tight when the exhaust system is in normal operation.

64.13

BIFURCATED AXIAL-FLOW FAN Refer to subclause 65.3.4 "Bifurcated Type".

64.14

SILENCER The Contractor shall provide where indicated in the Drawings cylindrical silencer to attenuate the noise emanated from the fan. The casing shall be cylindrical galvanised steel constructed with non-inflammable glass fibre infill with a non-corroding facing material welded securely in place behind perforated galvanised steel. End rings incorporating tapped inserts shall be provided for mounting. The sound absorbent material shall be protected against wet conditions with an impervious covering faced with perforated stainless steel. This covering shall ensure that the silencer can be steam cleaned. The silencer shall operate to temperature of at least 80°C. The internal diameter of the silencer shall match that of the fan. Where indicated in the Drawings a centrally mounted absorbent pod in the airway shall be incorporated for added attenuation. The Contractor shall submit the attenuation data which is obtained by the test specified in BS 848 Part 2:1980. Galvanised steel mounting feet and matching flanges corresponding to those supplied for the fan shall be provided where necessary. Silencer shall be of the same make as the axial flow fans.



SPRING HANGERS Spring hangers shall contain a steel spring and 7mm deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be moulded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree cone before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.

64.16

FAN CONTROL PANEL The fan control panel shall be located as indicated in the Drawings and be mounted at an appropriate height.

64.16.1

Construction The panels shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm steel pressed and rolled to shape having all joints neatly welded and finished flush. Doors shall be screw lock hinges type with concealed hinges and secured by approved lock. Doors shall be fitted all around with compression gaskets. The cabinets shall have adequate ventilation louvre which is vermin proof.

64.16.2

Control Apparatus The fan control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls and indicating devices for manual start of all Plant and equipment :

64.16.3

(a)

Circuit breakers for all motors

(b)

Starters for all motors

(c)

Push button stations for manual starting in local mode

(d)

All necessary timers, controls relays and interlocks for starters

(e)

Indicating lights with the following colours : (i)

Indicating lights for the 3 phase incoming supply shall be RED, YELLOW, BLUE colour respectively;

(ii)

Indicating lights for all motors when they are running shall be GREEN colour, stop shall be RED and trip shall be AMBER/YELLOW.

(f)

All internal interconnecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control panel.

(g)

Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches instruments, indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel system.

Layout Of Motor Control Centres The Contractor shall submit drawings (IN TRIPLICATE) which displays the layout of the instrument, push buttons indicating lights on the panel, together with the schematic electrical circuit drawings to the SO Rep for approval.

64.16.4

Fuses All fuses shall be HRC fuses of Cartridge type.



Motor Starters The Contractor shall install the type of starter which is specified in the Drawings. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, all motors which have rating of 2.2kW or more shall be installed with reduced voltage starters. However, the Contractor shall verify the suitable starter type based on the mechanical and electrical characteristics of the load and motor with the consent of the SO Rep should there be any deviation from the Specifications.

64.16.5.1

Direct-On-Line Starters Direct-on-line starter shall be equipped with adjustable and ambient compensated (-5°C to 50°C) triple pole thermal overload protections with manual reset, local start/stop push buttons, contactors, etc.

64.16.5.2

Star-Delta Starter Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with star and delta contactors mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one adjustable and ambient compensated (5°C to 50°C) triple pole thermal overload relay and one adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with at least 0 to 30 seconds period to control the star-delta operation. The resistor banks shall be wire welded porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance values shall be chosen to suit the mechanical and electrical characteristic of the driven loads. It shall allow 3 consecutive starts followed by 15 minutes rest.

64.16.6

Contactors Contactors used in the starters shall be of the heavy duty type with silver or silver alloy contacts. The contacts shall be non-sticky when de-energised and be free from undue noisy operation. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424 and IEC 158-1, of duty AC3 double break and chatter free type. Contactors shall be manufactured and tested to on-load factor 60% with mechanical life of over ten million operations at 3600 operations per hour. Contactors shall satisfactorily close at a minimum of 80% nominal voltage and thereafter remain closed satisfactorily with a minimum of 65% nominal voltage.

64.16.7

Protective Relays All relays shall be of approved manufacture and type tested at factory and generally conform to BS 145/66 "Electrical Protective Relays".

64.16.8

Thermal Overload Relays Thermal overload relay for three phase motors shall be three pole manual reset type with inherent temperature compensation (-5°C to 50°C) and be easily adjustable within the range of ±10% of nominal setting. Thermal overload relay for single phase motor shall consist of a bi-metallic trip mechanism.

64.16.9

Auxiliary Relays Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent selfcleaning action. It shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65% nominal voltage. They shall be of the plug-in type. Fixed relays are acceptable if they are a design feature approved by the SO Rep. They shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive load for its contacts. There shall be at least one spare contact for each auxiliary relay.

64.16.10

Time Delay Relays Time delay relays shall be of the electronic plug-in type. It shall have selectable time ranges of 0 to 10 seconds; 0 to 60 seconds and whatever other ranges that are required for the satisfactory operation of the control system. The contacts shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive and be energized satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65% nominal voltage.



Transformer Transformer necessary for stepping down the voltage to 24V for controls and indicating lights, shall be provided by the Contractor. It shall be protected by a suitable current breaker. The Plant and equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and shall be suitable for continuous operation.

64.16.12

Earthing Of Switchboard The switchboard metal casing shall be effectively bonded to the earth bar. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before fitting the earth connection. Cable terminations shall be made with tinned copper or approved rustless cable lugs.

64.16.13

Push Buttons Push buttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Push buttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application. Colour codes shall be : "Start" or "On" "Stop" or "Off" "Reset"

: : :

Green Red Black

Push button bezels shall preferably be black.

64.16.14

Indicator Lamps Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation of service, circuit and locations. Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type with lamps rated at 6 watts. The indication shall be clearly visible from either the sides or front. Indicating lamps shall preferably have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals; soldered terminations are unacceptable.

64.16.15

Internal Wiring The control panel shall be completely internally wired, including all wirings between individual units and between units and terminal strips located in a convenient and easily accessible positions. All terminals on the strips shall be numbered and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on the wiring and field connections diagrams permanently secured on the inside of the enclosure door. Wiring shall be multi-strand of adequate section but in no case less than 1.0 sq. mm copper conductors, PVC insulated, colour coded and numbered for identification. Identification shall be by means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating materials with white glossy finish and black lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or dampness. The numbering scheme shall be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables. Each wire shall be separately terminated with suitable tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type terminals are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, only one wire shall be connected to each terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an approved marking and numbering system. All control circuit wirings shall be run separately from power circuit wiring and adequately protected by MCB units or fuses.



Labelling Each control panels shall be fitted with a main label mounted in a prominent position. Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed steel screws or in other approved manners. Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be white lettering engraved on black traffolyte. The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Schedules shall be submitted to the SO Rep prior to manufacture. Labels shall designate circuit number and Plant and equipment function. Terminal strips shall be labelled to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and function, eg. control, indication, protection, etc. Control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located inside and on the door of panels shall be clearly labelled to identify circuit number, function and rating.

64.17

PAINTING (GENERAL) Unless otherwise specified or indicated in the Drawings, all exposed metal surfaces of ductwork, Plant and equipment, grilles, etc shall be cleaned, prime coated and painted regardless of their locations. All painting shall be carried out in a neat, thorough and workmanlike manner by experienced tradesmen.

64.17.1

Preparation Of Surface All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose rust, scale and dirt and shall be free from grease and oil stains, etc. An approved solvent shall be used to remove grease, oil stains, etc if found necessary. The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that original galvanised or rust-proof coat shall not be damaged during surface cleaning. All steel structure after fabrication, shall be thoroughly wire brushed at the welds and other exposed surfaces shall be immediately treated with a coat of primer.

64.17.2

Application Of Paint The first coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning and the interval between subsequent coats shall not be less than the paint manufacturer's recommendation. Before despatch from the manufacturer's factory, the whole of the metal work of the fan control panels shall receive painting and finishing with materials of approved make, composition and colour. All coats shall be stove baked to paint manufacturer's requirements. The application for various types of steel surfaces shall be as specified in the table below : No. of Coats of Etching Primer

Lead And Chromate Free Primer

Gloss Enamel Paint

Exposed Galvanised Sheet Metal Ductwork

1

1

2

Exposed Non-Galvanised Steel Surfaces of Ductwork Construction

-

2

2

Plant and Equipment Surfaces Factory Spray Painted but with Damaged Paintwork

-

2

2

Fan Support

-

2

2

Type of Surface to be painted

64.17.3

Colour Scheme All Plant and equipment, ductwork, accessories and components shall be painted to colour approved by the SO Rep.



64.18.1

TESTING AND BALANCE

General The Contractor shall perform all tests and balancing necessary to ensure that the system installed conform to the Specifications and that such tests are adequate to demonstrate that Plant and equipment will comply with the requirements of the Specifications. All necessary testing and measuring Plant and equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor. All testing and balancing shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.

64.18.2

Air Quantity Balancing All exhaust and supply air outlets shall be correctly adjusted to give the final design air volumes unless otherwise directed. All fixed dampers shall be set and the final position shown with a painted arrow, and saw cut.

64.18.3

Test Log Sheets The Contractor shall submit full detailed test log sheets for inspection and approval by the SO Rep. The test log sheet shall present a clear and precise record of all tests carried out during the commissioning of the Works. It shall include, but not be limited to where applicable, the following data : Fan type, speed, static pressure reading, running current, sound levels and fan curve shall be included to indicate the running condition. All other items of Plant and equipment shall be recorded and tested so that a true indication is given for the Plant and equipment performance.

64.18.4

Performance Test A performance test shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the SO Rep, to show that the system installed fulfills all requirements of the Specifications.

64.19

MAINTENANCE PERIOD

64.19.1

Attendance To Complaints During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to any complaint calls promptly at no cost and expense to the Employer. After the attendance of complaint calls and completion of repair Works, two copies of the fault reports or service chit duly signed by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the SO Rep for information and record.

64.19.2

Replacement Of Defective Parts The Contractor shall replace all defective or damaged parts of the Plant and equipment and system with NEW ones during the Defects Liability Period at no additional cost and expense to the Employer. This subclause shall override any standard warranty condition of the Contractor or his supplier of Plant and equipment. Any additional cost and expense incurred in complying with this requirement shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.

BLDG12/S64.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Stock Of Spares The Contractor shall keep adequate stock of spare parts for the installation and system to ensure that the system down-time in the event of breakdown will be minimized.

64.19.4

Contractor's Obligation The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the installation or the Employer's property during servicings or attendance to complaints through the act of negligence of his workmen except where it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs. All damages shall be made good at Contractor's own expense.

64.19.5

Final Inspection One month prior to the expiry of Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep for a joint inspection on the Plant and equipment and system to note all the outstanding Defect. These Defect shall be rectified within one month after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.

64.20

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM) The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance and emergency repair to the Ventilation System as specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).

64.20.1

General The works covered by this Clause and sub-clauses are for the supply of all Plant, Construction Equipment, materials, appliances, labour and necessary incidentals for the service and maintenance of the mechanical ventilation system during the Maintenance Period.

64.20.2

Workmanship And Supervision The Contractor shall have a foreman in charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried out under this Clause including all sub-clauses under it. This foreman shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor.

64.20.3

Scope Of Work All machinery, Plant and equipment comprising the complete systems and ancillary equipment provided under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall be serviced and maintained strictly in accordance with the Servicing and Maintenance Schedule as specified hereunder. The Contractor shall advise the SO Rep on any Defect in any part of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment observed during the routine inspection and service, and shall repair such Defect if required to do so by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services during normal working hours and also during overtime hours. A log book shall be kept at each separate building block included in the Works, in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, service tests and routine attention given shall be carefully recorded. The exact location within each building block where the log book is to be kept shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.

BLDG12/S64.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Servicing And Maintenance Schedule

64.20.4.1

Quarterly Tests For quarterly tests, inspection and service, the Contractor shall inspect and service the complete Plant and ancillary equipment provided under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and subclauses under it once every three months after the certified Substantial Completion of the Works except where otherwise directed by the SO Rep. At each such quarterly inspection and service of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment, the minimum items of work detailed below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers or directed by the SO Rep shall also be included : (i)

Inspect all electric motors, and (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

(ii)

Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and ancillary electrical apparatus, and (a) (b) (c) (d)

(iii)

Check all motor bearings, and lubricate with grease as necessary. Check carbon brushes and clip rings, if any, of all motors and clean as necessary, Renew carbon brushes as necessary. Check safety devices fitted to all motors, and clean, adjust and lubricate as necessary. Check and record motor speed running current and operating voltage. Check motor load characteristics to ensure normal operation.

Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary. Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary. Renew electric fuses as necessary. Clean and adjust overload elements and oil dashpot controls.

Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays and : (a) (b) (c)

Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary. Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary. Renew electric fuses as necessary.

(iv)

Check and adjust all limit switches, time switches, sequence controllers.

(v)

Inspect and clean damper linkages and adjust when necessary.

(vi)

Inspect keyways, keys and belts on all pulley drives and check alignment.

(vii)

Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out satisfactorily. Note in the log book any circuits that are subject to repair, alteration or extension.

(viii)

Check that all switches are returned to their normal operating position.

(ix)

Inspect and clean fan housing and fan motor. The fan shall be examined to ensure that there is no build-up of dirt or other matter that would cause overheating of the motor or obstruct the impeller track.

(x)

Inspect ductwork system. Investigate and rectify any leakage and abnormal vibrations. Tighten any loose hangers, supports and brackets.

(xi)

Check vibration isolators for correct action and setting.

(xii)

Check for correct volume flow rate through any outlets/inlets.

(xiii)

Check for presence of any excessive abnormal noise and vibration. Investigate and report on causes and initiate remedial measures.

(xiv)

Inspect and check correct setting and function of volume control dampers, fire dampers, splitter dampers, etc.

(xv)

Clean all grease filters and replace if necessary. The cost of the new grease filters shall be borne by the owner.

BLDG12/S64.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)


Servicing And Maintenance Schedule (Cont'd)

64.20.4.1

Quarterly Tests (Cont'd) (xvi)

Clean all oil traps after removing all the trapped oil.

(xvii) Clean all ducts, exhaust hoods, silencers and exhaust air fans. (xviii) Submit service and maintenance report to the Employer. The report shall be written in a format approved by the Owner and shall include but not limited to the following information. (a)

(b) (c) (d) (e) 64.20.4.2

Performance data of all Plant and equipment such as fans, etc. The scope and extent of performance data shall be approved by the owner but generally shall include physical measurements such as air pressures, flow rate, speed, running current and voltage etc. All gauge and meter readings. Any Defect observed, their causes and remedial action taken. Any adjustments, regulations and repairs carried out. All work carried out in accordance with the Schedule.

Annual Service And Maintenance For annual servicing and maintenance, in addition to carrying out the regular monthly/quarterly inspection, and service as specified in the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall also perform the annual servicing and maintenance as specified hereunder:

64.20.5

(i)

All the monthly/quarterly inspection and testing procedures specified above.

(ii)

Tests shall be carried out to ensure that the insulation resistance to earth and between conductors of cables and wires is satisfactory and that the resistance of associate earthcontinuity circuits is not excessive.

(iii)

Meggar test the motor winding to check the insulation resistance between phase to phase and phase to earth.

Consumable Materials The Contractor shall provide the following consumable materials as and when required : (i)

All oils and grease required for lubrication of motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts.

(ii)


(iii)

All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gear, motor starter gears, electric control gears and electric relays.

(iv)


(v)

All cotton washer, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.

The costs of these consumable materials shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.


Bldg Spec Page 65-1 SECTION 65 FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION

65.1

GENERAL Values of the resistance to air flow of items of Plant and equipment, ductwork and/or the total distribution system indicated in the contract documents are approximate. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify these values based on the Plant and equipment offered and provide fans capable of delivering the required air volume when operating against the actual total system resistance. Any required modification to the system (fan, motor, switch gear, cables etc) necessary to meet the required duties and space conditions shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense, except where modification is brought about by written instruction by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit fan static pressure calculation for approval. All fans shall be type tested to the latest British or International Standard. Fan manufacturer shall furnish published curves showing performance that will be achieved when tested to ISO 5801:Part 1, BS 848:Part 1 and equivalent to AMCA standard 210, and sound power level data that will be achieved when tested to BS 848:Part 2 and equivalent to AMCA standard 300-858 Part1. Fans shall be selected at maximum efficiency from the available range of fans. Motor shall be at least 20% higher than the fan brake power absorbed at design conditions. The high temperature fans must have successfully completed an extensive program of high temperature tests in accordance with BS7346 Part2 and independently witnessed by authorities such as LPCB(UK), CITCM(France) or TU(Germany). Fans installed in the Civil Defence stations shall also comply with the CD requirements specified in the "Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification. Equipments which are required to be operated during CD operation shall remain fully functional after being subjected to the shock loads specified in the "Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification. Motors used for basement carpark exhaust fans, smoke stop lobbies, smoke control and any other high temperature application from FSSD requirement shall be of Class 'H' insulation with minimum 250°C. temperature rating for at least 2 hours. Motors used for ventilation fans of battery charging room town and LPG gas and areas with corrosive gas shall be explosion proof and corrosion resistance.

65.1.1

Construction All fans should be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of withstanding the pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. The fan shall be provided with protective casing/guard to belts, pulleys, chains, gears couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotary parts for safety of personnel. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of running continuously at ten per cent in excess of the selected duty speed. Each fan shall be provided with factory fabricated hot-dip galvanised support baseframe or mounting feet to facilitate site installation. Name plates shall be of metal sheet and securely attached on each fan and show manufacturer's name, serial and model number, date of manufacture and country of manufacture. Unless otherwise stated, motor requirements are stipulated in clause 65.8 "Motors" including all subclauses under it.

65.1.2

Installation Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast" bearing surfaces for bolt heads and washers counterfaced. Holding-down bolts for fans and motors shall be provided with means to prevent the bolts turning when the nuts are tightened. Anti-vibration mountings shall be in accordance with Clause 64.5 "Dampers And Accessories" including all subclauses under it. Fans heavier than 20 kg shall be provided with eyebolts or other purpose made lifting facilities.



Inlet Guide Vane Where indicated, fans shall be fitted with variable inlet vanes which shall be matched to the fan performance to give stable control. Vanes shall be closely interlocked to ensure movement in unison and operation shall be manual or automatic as indicated. Where manual control is indicated the operating device shall facilitate positive locking in at least five different positions. Vane blades shall not vibrate or flutter throughout their movement and the construction of the linkage system shall minimise friction and lost motion.

65.1.4

Impellers The shaft and impeller assembly of all centrifugal, axial flow and mixed flow fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. All propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced where the impeller diameter is 750mm or greater. Where indicated, limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with BS 4675 Part 1.

65.1.5

Bearings Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be grease/oil ball and/or roller type or alternatively oil lubricated sleeve type. All bearing housings shall be precision located in position and arranged so that bearings may be replaced without the need for realignment. Bearing housings shall be protected against the ingress of dust and, where fitted with greasing points, they shall be designed to prevent damage from over-greasing. For grease lubricated systems the bearings shall be provided with grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing manufacturer. For oil lubricated systems, the housings shall be provided with an adequate reservoir of oil and shall include an accessible drain plug. All bearings lubricators shall be located to facilitate maintenance.

65.1.6

Flexible Connectors Flexible connectors used for duct connections to fan unit shall have temperature rating same as that of the associated fan unit and ductwork system. Approved oil and high temperature resistance and flame retardant flexible connectors shall be employed for kitchen exhaust fan.

65.1.7

Quality Assurance Furnish fans that are the product of a manufacturer who has proven experience of manufacturing fans of similar types and duties for a period of at least ten years. The manufacturer must be a company committed to Quality Assurance and are registered to BS EN ISO 9001.94. Reference Codes and Standard : - ISO 5801 Method for Testing air performance. - BS 848 Part 1 Method for Testing air performance. - AMCA standard 210 Method for testing air performance. - BS 848 Part2 Method of noise testing. - AMCA standard 300 Method of noise testing. - Fans must comply with EMC regulations. Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all stress and loads under starting, operating and, where applicable, reversing conditions, for the installations as shown on the Specification and/or Drawings. These capabilities shall be verified by submission of design calculations and basis of design for all components and the complete fan assembly to the SO Rep for clearance. Whirl tests shall be performed for all axial fans with design air delivery of l0 cubic metre per second or above for a minimum of 15 minutes duration at 125% of maximum rated fan speed. Manufacturer shall certify and submit the test record to the SO Rep. Type tests shall be carried out in the manufacturer's factory for each fan type and size. Tests shall verify fan performance such as RPM, volume flow rate, total air pressure, noise level, motor current and shall be conducted at the design conditions stated on the Schedules except that air temperature entering fan shall be corrected to 20°C or the specified operating temperature. Manufacturer shall certified and submit the test record.



Submittals Submit certified technical data and performance ratings including but not limited to the following : (a)

Complete catalogue and material specification.

(b)

Certified performance curves for each fan Shall be plotted over the entire range from shut-off to free delivery as static pressure, in Pa. total efficiency in percentages, and operating kW against air flow in m3/h. Curves shall rise continuously with decreasing air flow between free delivery and 15 percent above maximum specified pressure in accordance with fan schedules.

(c)

Plotted curves or tables of the Octave band sound power level at static pressure corresponding to specified capacity with decibels (dB re 10-12 watt) as ordinate versus octave-band center frequency from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz as abscissa.

(d)

Certificates confirming that the fans are rated and tested in accordance with relevant standards from BSI, AMCA or approved internationally recognised institution.

(e)

Certificates confirming that all smoke extraction fans, carpark exhaust air fans, smoke free lobby exhaust fans, and fume extraction fans meet the high temperature requirement. Such as certificates from LPCB(prEN12101-3 Part 3:1997 - Testing specification for powered smoke and heat exhaust ventilation) must be submitted.

(f)

Factory type test reports for all fans. Reports shall be less than 5 years.

(g)

Submit manufacturer's quality assurance/quality control program for the entire manufacturing process, site installation, and testing/commissioning

(h)

Manufacturing shop drawings including wiring diagram and support details.

(i)

Submit 1-50 scale shop drawing of fan installation within fan room complete with ductwork, vibration isolators, electrical work etc indicating clearance for maintenance purpose.

(j)

Comprehensive method statement for installation of the fan units.

(k)

Submit copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals.

(l)

Submit Radiography inspection record of the fan blades.

65.2

CENTRIFUGAL FANS

65.2.1

Fan Type Centrifugal fans for high-velocity high-pressure systems shall be backward bladed type.

65.2.2

Efficiency Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5kW at the fan shaft shall be of the backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency not less than 75%.

65.2.3

Fan Casings Fan casings shall be constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan installation. Fans other than those in air handling units shall be provided with flanged outlet connections and spigoted inlet connections unless otherwise indicated, except that for negative pressures greater than 500 Pa, inlet connections shall be flanged. A plugged drain point shall be fitted at the lowest point in the fan casings. Permanent indication shall be provided to show the correct direction of rotation of the fan impeller. Fan casings shall be provided with removable access panels which shall incorporate purpose made air seals. The sizes of access panels shall be such as to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller.

65.2.4

Material Impellers shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy of riveted, welded or other approved construction, with spiders or hubs of robust design.



AXIAL FLOW FANS Axial flow aerofoil fan shall be either single or multi-stage to suit the performance duty specified. Two stage fans shall have contra-rotating impellers and each impeller shall be driven by separate motor. The axial fan shall be pad mounted type. Fan shall be supplied complete with mounting feet and vibration isolator. The fans offered are to meet ISO 2372 vibration standard for class 2 quality grade C machines. The impellers shall be balanced to G6.3 or better as defined in ISO 1940/1 (6.3mm/s peak to peak or 4.5 mm/s rms).

65.3.1

Fan Casings Axial flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mould steel or aluminium alloy, stiffened and braced where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting to a base or to supports. Inlet and outlet ducts shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. For in-duct mounting fans the length of the fan casing shall be greater than the combined length of the impeller(s) and motor(s) and electrical connections to the motors shall be through an external terminal box secured to the casing. The fan casing and mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from mild steel to BS 1449 Part 1 Grade HR14 with integral rolled flanges. They should have minimum thickness of 2.5mm for fan diameters up to 560mm, 3mm to 5mm thickness for fan diameter 630mm and above.

65.3.2

Impellers Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and the hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to the shaft. Blades shall be aerofoil section or laminar and capable of pitch adjustment. The pitch angle selected shall be less than 24 degrees. Each cast aluminium impeller is X-rayed using Real Time Radiography inspection prior to assembly. The impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and key way. Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft together with a retaining washer and screw fitted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position.

65.3.3

Drive Where axial flow fans are driven by motors external to the casings of the fans the requirements for drives and guards shall be met. Unless otherwise indicated, a guard is not required for any part of a drive which is inside the fan casing. An access panel with purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing; the access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance. Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor complying with BS 4999 Part 20 for dust and weatherproof conditions.

65.3.4

Bifurcated Type The fan shall give the specified air flow at the design static pressure and tested to BS 848 Part 1. The Contractor shall submit performance curves for the fans. The performance curves shall show the duty point and include data about static pressure, efficiency, power consumption and noise versus air volume at different pitch angle. The noise data shall be based on tests carried out in accordance with BS 848:Part 2. The fan shall be of the bifurcated axial flow design, capable of withstanding air temperature of at least 320°C continuously. The aerofoil shaped impellers shall be directly coupled to a purpose design motor, the latter being enclosed in a protection tunnel to isolate it from the oil and particle laden air. The tunnel shall be kept ventilated by ambient air drawn in by an auxiliary fan mounted on a shaft extension at the tail end of the motor. The external terminal box and fan casing shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel. The motor shall be directly coupled to the hub and placed at the discharge side of the fan. The blades shall be securely mounted onto the hub and the pitch angle shall be adjustable at the Site.



Bifurcated Type (Cont’d) The impellers shall be die-cast in aluminium alloy and give a non-overloading characteristics and have an adjustable pitch. All the casings are manufactured in hot-dipped galvanised. The motor shall be totally enclosed, squirrel cage induction design and rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 40°C. The motor shall be fitted with ball bearings of generous size to permit mounting of the fan in any position through 360 degrees. Insulation shall be to Class F specification of BS 2757. Performance and rating shall conform to BS 5000 and IEC 34-1, with protection to IEC 34-5 Group IP 54. Reduced voltage starter shall be provided for motors which has rated kW of 2.2kW or more. The motor shall be pad mounted to the fan casing. Foot-mounted fan motor shall not be acceptable. The fan shall be able to withstand severe moisture-laden conditions. The fan shall be suitable for cleaning by steam jet. High temperature rated flexible connectors shall be provided both at the inlet and outlet of the fan. The Contractor shall observe closely all the manufacturer's instructions for the installation of the fan and frequency/type of lubricant to be used.

65.4

PROPELLER FANS

65.4.1

Impeller Propeller fans shall be ring mounted or diaphragm mounted as indicated. Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece. The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise level and minimum power consumption and made of Aluminised Clad Steel. The fan shall be completed with anti-vibration mounting plate and motor side guard. The motor should be airstream rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures up to 50°C and insulation material to Class F specification. Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and crossings welded and hot-dip galvanised after manufacture shall be fitted to impeller side or motor side or both where appropriate. Where a fan is directly mounted to an external wall. a louvre shutter shall be furnished.

65.5

IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND MIXED FLOW FANS Mixed flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel, or aluminium alloy stiffened and braced where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting to a base or supports. Inlet and outlet shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. Stator vanes shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy. The unit shall be designed to facilitate access to the impeller. Drives and guards shall be provided in accordance with Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and subclauses under it where motors are mounted external to casings. An access panel with a purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing. The access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance. In-Line duct fans shall be of direct driven type and have non-overloading characteristics. Motors shall be totally enclosed with squirrel cage induction type with Class F insulation and shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 50°C and in humid air conditions up to 100% relative humidity.



ROOF EXTRACT UNIT

65.6.1

Weather Cap And Base The weather cap and base shall be moulded ultra violet stabilised glass reinforced polyester resin, rendered fire retardant to BS 476:Part 7. Colourant shall conform to BS 4800-08B-21. The unit shall be load tested to ensure a generous structural factor of safety enabling the unit to withstand all normally encountered weather conditions. The caps shall be secured to the mounting frame by stainless steel screws. It shall be arranged in side discharge.

65.6.2

Anti-Backdraught Shutters The unit shall be equipped with anti-backdraught shutters all around the discharge area. Shutters shall be aluminium opened by air movement and closed by gravity. Synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided to ensure quiet operation.

65.6.3

Impeller

65.6.3.1

Impeller Type The impeller shall be based on propeller type design. The fan blades shall be made of pressed sheet steel not more than four numbers. The blades and the hub shall be one continuous steel structure without any screw, rivet and other mechanical bonding. The whole impeller shall be finished with stoved epoxy powder paint. The impeller shall be mounted on to the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.

65.6.3.2

Centrifugal Type The impeller shall be based on backward curved centrifugal design. The impeller shall be mounted onto the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.

65.6.3.3

Mountings Fan support arms shall be made of mild steel finished with stoved epoxy powder paint and resiliently mounted to the base.

65.6.3.4

Mounting Position The unit shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on a pitch roof up to an angle of 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.

65.6.4

Motor

65.6.4.1

Totally Enclosed Motor The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type for direct on line starting. The motor shall be pad mounted with an isolator fixed in the cowl conforming to IP54 protection. The motor shall have minimum Class F insulation. The motor shall be single phase capacitor start and run. Motors shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 50°C and in humid air conditions up to 100% relative humidity.

65.6.4.2

Flameproof Motor Flameproof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only in abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with BS 4683. The motor shall be Class F Insulation with tapped hole for cable entry.



WALL/WINDOW FANS

65.7.1

Construction The impellers, shutters, fans ducts and outer grilles shall be moulded plastic. The outer grilles shall be projected more than 35mm from external surface. It shall have a solenoid operated backdraught shutter controlled by the ON/OFF switch.

65.7.2

Motor

65.7.2.1

Totally Enclosed Motor The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type for direct on line starting. It shall be capacitor start and run for fan diameter 230mm or above.

65.7.2.2

Flame Proof Motor Flame proof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only in abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with Ex.d requirement, BS 4683. It shall have tapped hole for cable entry.

65.8

MOTORS

65.8.1

General All motors larger than 0.75kW (1 hp) output shall be three phases and designed for operation on 415 volts/3 phases/50 Hz AC supply. All motors shall comply with the current regulations of the Electricity Department PUB and CP 5. The motor power factor shall be more than 0.85. The following types of motor shall be used for different range of power input : Power Input

Type of Motor

Up to 30 kW

Squirrel cage induction type design for: (i) Direct-on-line starting (ii) Reduce voltage starting

Above 30 kW

Wound rotor slip-ring induction type designed for Rotor Resistance starting

Motors shall be continuously rated to BS 5000 Pt 99 and IEC 34-1 and windings of motors shall have Class F insulation conforming to BS 2757 and IEC Publication No. 85 and shall be specially suitable for the high humidity experienced in Singapore. Hydroscopic materials shall not be used either as insulating material or as winding supports. Varnishes shall be inorganic and suitable for tropical service. Electric motors shall be adequately rated to drive the fans under all normal conditions without overloading. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.

65.8.2

Motor Enclosure Except for motors employed in driving fans, all motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with IP 54 protection according to IEC 34-5.



Motor Bearings Motors up to 5kW shall have ball bearings. Motors of 5kW and above shall have roller bearings at the driving end and deep groove ball bearings at the non-driving end. Thrust bearings shall be incorporated where end thrusts are encountered. Bearings shall be of medium duty rating provided with a readily accessible grease nipple and a visible grease relief valve to show when grease charge has been changed and allow greasing without overheating while motor is operating and to prevent over-greasing.

65.8.4

Motor Starters Motor starter shall be provided on each phase with combined thermal overload devices with adjustable time lags. Under-voltage protection shall not be incorporated in the motor starter. All motor starters shall comply with the current regulations of Electricity Department, PUB. Motor starters shall comprise the followings : (a)

Contactors rated in accordance with BS 775 as under : (i) (ii) (iii)

(b)

Class II mechanical duty Class UR current rating Category A4 making and breaking

Thermal type adjustable overload relays with adjustable time lags, one in each phase line.

Starters shall be of the electro-magnetically operated type complying with BS 587 and BS 4941 and be rated for frequent intermittent duty. Star-Delta or auto transformer starter shall be provided for motor with a rating of 2.2kW or more. Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with contactor, star and delta contactors mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one triple pole overload relay and one adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with at least 0-30 seconds period to control the star-delta operation. The resistor banks shall be wire wound porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance values shall be chosen to give high starting torque and low transient current.


Bldg Spec Page 66-1 SECTION 66 REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION

66.1

SCOPE OF WORKS The scope of Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning of Refuse Handling Plant (screw type), complete with chute connection, control panels and other necessary mechanical and electrical parts and accessories (hereinafter referred to as "Refuse Handling Plant") for the purposes of this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. The Contractor shall engage a Specialist from the HDB Approved Refuse Handling Equipment Suppliers to carry out the Works.

66.2

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

66.2.1

General The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications and shall be in compliance with the requirements of MEWR and other relevant authorities in Singapore. The design concept shall incorporate the following points :

66.2.2

(a)

one man operation, particularly by the driver of the refuse collection truck,

(b)

the Refuse Handling Plant shall be able to store minimum refuse as specified and discharge refuse directly into refuse collection truck. The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed to operate during the refuse collection time only,

((c)

the Refuse Handling Plant shall be incorporated with a screw to automatically discharge refuse directly into the refuse collection truck,

(d)

the connection between the bottom of the centralised refuse chute and the Refuse Handling Plant shall be vertical and larger than the dimension of the refuse chute opening,

(e)

emphasis shall be given to minimise odour, noise and vibration,

(f)

sullage water control,

(g)

automatic fire protection system,

(h)

automatic washing of discharge chute,

(i)

automatic/manual control of the operation,

(j)

easy and minimal maintenance,

(k)

reliability of system.

Capacity Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the Refuse Handling Plant shall have an effective storage capacity to comply with the requirements of NEA subject to a minimum of 4.2 m3. For Refuse Handling Plant with an effective storage capacity above 5.0 m3, the supplier and the design of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be approved by the SO Rep.


Bldg Spec Page 66-2

66.2.3

Discharge Operation The minimum discharge rate of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be 1 m3 per minute. The discharge operation shall be synchronised with the sweeping cycle of the compaction blade of the refuse collection truck such that there is no overspillage of refuse onto the floor of the refuse chamber during the discharge process. There shall be no remnants of refuse on the discharge chute upon completion of the discharge process. Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the complete discharge process shall be as follows: Effective Storage Capacity (m3) 4.2 6.0 9.0

Maximum duration of whole discharge process (Min) 5 6 6

.

This is to shorten the time the refuse is exposed to the atmosphere and minimise the problem of foul odour.

66.2.4

Drainage The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed with an effective and efficient drainage system such that sullage water and washwater can be discharged to the gully directly. As the refuse chute is flushed once a week, the Contractor shall consider this in his design of the drainage system. The flushing rate is between 45 to 60 litres per minute.

66.2.5

Level Indication A sight glass shall be installed to each Refuse Handling Plant for monitoring whether the refuse in the Refuse Handling Plant is full.

66.2.6

Odour Control The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed to contain or minimise the emanation of foul odour into the immediate environment. This is especially important as there are apartments directly above the refuse chamber.

66.2.7

Noise And Vibration Control Vibration and noise suppression and/or isolation to the Refuse Handling Plant and building structures shall be given due consideration such that residents living near the refuse chamber are not inconvenienced or distressed. The noise level at a distance of 1m from the open entrance of the refuse room shall not exceed 60 dBA at any point in time. The necessary sound and vibration measuring instruments for the Refuse Handling Plant shall be provided at the time of testing.

66.2.8

Maintenance, Repair And Replacement The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed for good accessibility to all its major parts for maintenance, repair and replacement purposes. In case of blockage in the Refuse Handling Plant, the maintenance personnel or workers shall be able to clear the blockage without having to take apart the Refuse Handling Plant or involving any other major works that require specialist expertise The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed such that it can be isolated or removed from the refuse chute for maintenance and repair purposes. All greasing points shall be readily accessible for ease of maintenance. Each Refuse Handling Plant shall be identified by code numbers (location & block number), which shall be approved by the SO Rep, for the ease of fault reporting.



Safety Feature The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed and built with an emergency stop facility, anti-jamming feature and safety feature against possible damages due to accidental collision with the refuse collection truck. It shall also be built to withstand repeated direct impact from falling refuse from the specified height of the building without damage to it. A safety shutter shall also be fixed permanently at the top of each unit of the Refuse Handling Plant so that the Refuse Handling Plant can be isolated from the refuse chute for maintenance and repair purposes.

66.2.10

Materials And Workmanship The Refuse Handling Plant shall be manufactured of structural steel to BS 4360 at least Grade 50 or its equivalent. Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the panels subjected to the direct impact from the refuse and the bottom panel of Refuse Handling Plant shall be as follows: No. of storeys of building served Below 30 Above 30

Minimum thickness of panels (mm) 12 16

Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the blades of the screw shaft shall be as follows: No. of storeys of building served Below 30 Above 30

Minimum thickness of blades (mm) 12 16

For building above 30 storeys, the refuge handling plant screw shaft shall has a tensile strength of not less than 6800 kg/cm2. Other body works of Refuse Handling Plant shall be made of BS 4360 Grade 43 or its equivalent and the thickness shall not be less than 6mm unless otherwise specified or approved by SO Rep. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners shall be made of stainless steel. All materials used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be new and of the best quality of their respective kinds available. They shall be of correct dimensions, sizes and gauges approved by the SO Rep and free from any Defect or damage upon completion of fabrication, assembly and delivery of the unit. All internal welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. All welds shall be smoothly and securely finished. For all welds performed, if in the opinion of the SO Rep that certain portion of the weld shall be reinforced or redone, the Contractor shall complete the Works as instructed at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. No approval or any acceptance by the SO Rep shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the Works. All materials used or to be used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant and the workmanship shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the SO Rep may direct, whether at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other place or places as the SO Rep may require. The cost of any test (including destructive tests) shall be borne by the Contractor and such cost and expense shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.

66.2.11

Automatic Washing System An automatic washing system shall be installed to wash the adjustable discharge chute of the Refuse Handling Plant for a preset time after the completion of the discharge of refuse into the refuse collection truck.



Automatic Fire Protection System An automatic fire protection system shall be installed in the refuse chamber and the Refuse Handling Plant. The system shall be automatically activated if smoke/fire is detected in the refuse chamber and the Refuse Handling Plant. The automatic fire protection system shall include heat detector, smoke detector, solenoid valve, spraying nozzles and alarm system. The automatic fire protection system shall be linked to automatic refuse chute handling system such that the automatic refuse chute flushing system will be activated in the event of smoke/fire. Two spraying nozzles shall be installed at the top of the Refuse Handling Plant. One shall be centrally located in front and the other at the rear of the Refuse Handling Plant. The main water supply pipe to the nozzles shall be made of 22 mm diameter stainless steel and it shall be painted in red. An alarm bell shall be installed for the fire protection system. Two photoelectric smoke detectors shall be installed hanging in front and back of the refuse chamber room including a waterproof emergency light equipment install outside the refuse chamber such that the alarm bell system and emergency light will be activated in the event of smoke/fire in the chamber room. One pressure sensor shall be installed at the water supply pipe to activate the emergency light when water supply been shut off. The control panel system integrates heat and smoke sensors, Fire Protection functions and automatic refuse chute flushing function using PLC (Programmable Logic Controller).

66.2.13

Stainless Steel Water Pipes The Contractor shall supply and fix stainless steel water supply pipes from the provision of tee-off in the refuse chamber for automatic fire protection system and automatic washing system for discharge chute. The water supply pipe for fire protection system shall be painted in red and shall be installed with double check valves. The check valves used shall be of the type approved by PUB Water Supply (Network) Department. All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and to the requirement of BS 4127:Part 2 and its latest amendments. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect that would impair their performance in service. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. Unless otherwise specified, light gauge stainless steel pipes shall be used for water supply. The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS 864:Part 2 and all PUB latest requirements. Fittings of 15mm size and above shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's name of the trade mark. Pipes shall be well supported by stainless steel supporting clips or hangers.

Nominal Size (mm) 15 20 to 28 35 to 42 54 and above

66.3

Maximum Horizontal Support Spacing (mm) 600 600 1200 1200

Maximum Vertical Support Spacing (mm) 1200 1200 1800 1800

GEARED MOTOR The Refuse Handling Plant shall be powered by a heavy duty 3-phase AC geared motor of minimum class F insulation which shall be at least splashproof. The motor shall be capable of performing intermittent duty without overheating, degradation or degeneration in torque, speed or overall performance. The geared motor shall be at least 4kW and the service factor shall not be less than one.


Bldg Spec Page 66-5

66.4

ELECTRICAL WIRING The Contractor shall run the electrical wiring from a 3-phase 20A electrical isolator provided in the centralised refuse chute chamber. All wiring run shall be continuous and new with no splices permitted. They shall be of the correct sizes and grouped neatly. All wiring installed shall be such that the removal of an electrical device can be made without the removal or relocation of the wiring bundles and harnesses adjacent to the device being removed. All wiring shall be labelled with wiring identification shown on the electrical control and wiring drawings which shall be endorsed by an appropriate grade of EMA Licensed Electrical Worker for the whole system. Wire labels shall be the non-metallic sleeve type or hot-stamped into the insulation. All circuit breakers, disconnectors and switching-type terminal blocks shall be labelled according to the electrical Drawings. All power wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS50. All wiring shall be carried in metal conduit or cable trunking. The metal conduit is to be heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (class B) complying with BS 4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddled at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is or may be in contact with any structural steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and steel work. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire and copper tape in conduits/trunking. Copper earthwire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes. Cable trunking and associated fitting shall comply with SS 249. All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and treated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. Joining of trunking shall be effected by means of sound bolts and nuts or screws. Copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down. The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the PSB Code of Practice CP5. All cables shall be tested with insulation testing equipment at 500V and a reading of more than 50 mega-ohm must be obtained before the conductors are connected to any apparatus. Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in floor, it shall be terminated in approved junction boxes adjacent to the Refuse Handling Plant or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the cables between motors and junction boxes. All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical Plant shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D.2 of CP5.

66.5

CONTROL PANELS The Refuse Handling Plant main control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls and indicating device for automatic and manual operations. (a)

Circuit breakers.

(b)

Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch.

(c)

For automatic operation, push buttons for start, stop and emergency stop of the Refuse Handling Plant shall only be provided; for manual operation, push buttons for individual functions shall be provided so that independent operation can be carried out.

(d)

All necessary timers, control relays, interlocks for starters and contactors.

(e)

Approved LED indicating lights with the following colours shall be used:

(f)


(i)

The colour of the indicating lights for 3-phase incoming supply shall be RED, YELLOW and BLUE respectively.

(ii)

Indicating lights for motor shall be GREEN when running, RED for trip.

All internal inter-connecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control panel including all necessary protection.


CONTROL PANELS (CONT'D) (g)

Voltmeter indicating the phase voltage.

(h)

Ammeter with appropriate ampere range.

(i)

Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches, instruments, indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel.

(j)

Electrical control and wiring drawings of the whole system.

(k)

Buzzer to indicate overload, breakdown & jamming etc.

All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved type. The control panels shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm thickness. It shall be adequately braced to form a rigid housing and be damp and dust proof to IP 54. The control panels shall be located on the right side of the Refuse Handling Plant viewing from the front and shall be mounted at an appropriate height of at least 1 m above the finished floor level. The locations of control panels shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. A single common key shall be used for the Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch, main control panel and fire protection system main control panel. A waterproof start and stop remote panel c/w indicating lights shall be installed inside and near the entrance of the refuse chamber room to activate the refuse chute flushing system manually. A separate fire protection system main control panel shall be provided with the following for automatic and manual operations: 1

Programmable Logic Controller (CPU unit with 20 I/O points and expansion I/O units with 8 I/O points (DC))

3

Nos. 4 Amp MCBs unit for control circuit and solenoid valve

1

Safety-isolating transformer AC 230V / 24V - 50VA

1

No. of printed circuit board with 1 zone heat and 2 zones smoke detector monitoring circuit with a DC 24V power supply.

1

No. of waterproof start & stop button remote panel c/w indicator light.

1

No. Laminated Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel

1

No. of waterproof with stop buttons remote panel for cancelling fire alarm and emergency lighting.

The inner front panel shall be provided with the following:-


1

No. Red/Yellow/Blue indicator LED light to show the power supply is ‘on’.

4

Nos. Green indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No) detector zone initiating circuit are in 'NORMAL' condition respectively.

4

Nos. Yellow indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No) detector zone initiating circuit are in 'FAULT' condition respectively.

4

Nos. Red indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No.) detector zone initiating circuit are in 'ALARM' condition respectively.

1

No. flashing LED light to be activated when any smoke or heat initiating circuit is in 'FAULT' condition.

1

No. Green indicator LED light to show the rooftop solenoid valve is activated.

1

No. Green indicator LED light to show the RHP sprinkler solenoid valve is activated.

1

No. Green push button to 'START' the flushing of the refuse chute.


CONTROL PANELS (CONT'D) 1

No. Red push button to 'STOP' the flushing of the refuse chute.

2

Nos. Yellow push button to cancel flushing and alarm bell respectively.

1

No. of push button to disable the smoke detector alarm initiating circuit when carry out thermal fogging.

1

No. Green indicator LED light to indicate the smoke detector initiating circuit in 'disabled' mode.

1

No. Red push button to be approved by the SO Rep.

1

No. Yellow push button for resetting the counter of the PLC inside the panel.

1

No. Red indicator LED light to show that the water supply been shut off.

Engraved “Traffolyte” labels the control panel, all push buttons, indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel inner door. The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 65. The box shall be made of 1.5mm thick mild steel, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-baked paint. The fire protection system main control panel shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber. The position and location shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The alarm bell shall be located at a location approved by the SO Rep for the maximum audio effect and the unauthorized intervention. A cancel alarm button shall be fixed on the fire protection system control panel for cancelling the alarm and emergency light systems. All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved type. The fire protection system main control panel shall be from an approved panel manufacturer. Provisions shall be made in the control panel to facilitate future expansion and modification of the control circuit by reserving space for future use, etc. 66.6

PAINTING (a)

General All steelwork shall be painted to protect them from corrosion. All painting shall be done in accordance with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice or their equivalents.The paint or coating manufacturer's written recommendations with regard to mixing, painting, application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times and overcoating times of each coat shall be strictly adhered to.

(b)

Surface Preparation All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and other contamination and foreign matters. All weld areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be grounded off. All loose rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed. All steel surfaces to be painted shall be grit-blasted to near white metal equivalent to Swedish Standard SIS 05 5900 1967 Sa 2½ or its equivalent. Before applying the paint system, it shall be ensured that all the steel surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned, free from all dust, rustscales and millscales.

(c)

External Surfaces Of Refuse Handling Plant The external surfaces of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be painted with the following paint system :


(i)

one full coat of fast drying polyamide-cured epoxy zinc phosphate primer of 50 microns dry film thickness;

(ii)

one full coat of polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide of 100 microns dry film thickness, and

(iii)

one full coat of polyamide-cured high built epoxy mastic of 100 microns dry film thickness.

Bldg Spec Page 66-8

66.6

PAINTING (CONT'D) (d)

Coating Specification (i)

Epoxy Zinc Phosphate Primer It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured primer with excellent adhesion to steel. It shall be suitable for epoxy systems used on structural steel. It shall contain zinc phosphate with iron oxide pigments. Its volume solid content shall not be less than 53% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.

(ii)

Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide Primer It shall be high build, two pack epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing micaceous iron oxide. It shall give excellent durability, toughness and abrasion resistance. The volume solid content shall not be less than 65% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.

(iii)

High Build Epoxy Mastic It shall be high build, two packs epoxy polyamide-cured coating which offers long term protection to exposed steelwork against fumes and spillages of mild acids, alkalis, salts and solvents. The coating shall also offer excellent toughness and durability. The volume solid content shall not be less than 60% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.

(e)

Internal Surfaces Of Refuse Handling Plant To prevent corrosion the internal surfaces of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be painted or coated with manufacturer's recommendation of paint system, complete with written recommendations with regard to mixing, painting, application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times and overcoating times of each coat.

66.7

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance and installation of the Refuse Handling Plant. All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.

66.8

MAINTENANCE OF REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

66.8.1

The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant by the Specialist in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44; except for clause 23 "Payment" for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it). For the avoidance of doubt, notwithstanding the requirements of the said Clause 23 "Payment" of the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for such servicing and maintenance Works during the Maintenance Period.

66.8.2

Without prejudice to the Contractor's obligations and liabilities under the Contract, the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist shall carry out the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant for an additional period of five years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A43 and/or Appendix A43(TC); and A44 respectively.



MAINTENANCE OF REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

(CONT’D)

66.8.3

In this respect, subject to the rights of the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) exercising their discretion as hereinafter provided, the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist enter into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event the Specialist is to enter into a separate maintenance agreement with such Town Council(s), the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist submit such Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A43(TC) and A44 respectively to such Town Council(s). The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including stamp fees for the preparation and execution of the maintenance agreement.

66.8.4

In the event that the Specialist fails to enter into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) before the expiry of the Maintenance Period, the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) shall be entitled to arrange for their own maintenance contractor to carry out the service and maintenance and all additional costs and expenses incurred in carrying out the same shall be recoverable from the Contractor.

66.8.5

The Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) shall have the absolute discretion of not requiring the Contractor's Specialist to provide the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant after the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor agrees that the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) may exercise the said discretion at any time before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.

66.9

MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS AND PAYMENT FOR MAINTENANCE SERVICES The Employer and/or Town Council shall have the option of accepting the comprehensive maintenance services offered by the Contractor's Specialist for the Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor hereby agrees that the option is opened for acceptance up to the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall refer to the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44 and shall be deemed to include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses of other maintenance requirements which are necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, but not reflected in Schedule B of the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement. Upon the acceptance of the maintenance services offered by the Contractor's Specialist, the Contractor shall ensure that the Specialist enters into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer and/or Town Council, body or corporation for the maintenance service for a period of five years commencing after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period at a monthly maintenance fee of ONE HUNDRED Dollars ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant and payments shall only be made upon satisfactory completion of the maintenance services. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including stamp fees for the maintenance agreement.

Section 67/.....


Bldg Spec Page 67-1

SECTION 67 RESERVED

SECTION 68 RESERVED

SECTION 69 RESERVED

Section 70/.....

BLDG12/S6769.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Bldg Spec Page 70-1 SECTION 70 LISTS OF APPENDICES

Appendix

A1 and/or A1(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Pre-Treatment Of Soil For Protection Of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites

A2

Reserved

A3

Reserved

A4 and/or A4(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Complete System Of Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing

A5 and/or A5(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For External Painting

A6 and/or A6(TC)

Deed Of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring for Children's Playground

A7 to A10

Reserved

A11

Instruction On Workmen Injury Compensation Policy

A12

Reserved

A13

Conditions For the Supply Of Materials From The Employer

A14

Technical Information On Refuse Chute Flushing System

A15

Application For Final Pressure Test Of Gas Pipe Installation

A16

Appointment of Designated Representative (DR) For Gas Pipe Installation

A17

Approval For Final Pressure Test

A18

Certificate Of Final Pressure Test

A19

Request For Charge-In/Turn-On Of Gas Supply

A20

Approval For Charge-In/Turn-On Of Gas Supply

A21

Statement Of Turn-On Or Charge-In Of Gas Supply

A22

Data On Transfer Pumping System

A23

Testing Data On Transfer Pumping System

A24

Testing Data On Installation Of Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System

A25

Fortnightly/Monthly Routine Inspection Report On Transfer Pumping System During Maintenance Period

A26

Data On Booster Pumping System

A27

Testing Data On Booster Pumping System

A28

Monthly Routing Inspection Report On Booster Pumping System During Maintenance Period


Bldg Spec Page 70-2 SECTION 70 LISTS OF APPENDICES (CONT'D)

Appendix

A29

Schedule of Technical Data

A30

Testing Data On Wet Riser System

A31

Bi-Yearly Routine Inspection Report On Down-Comer/Dry Riser System During Maintenance Period

A32

Monthly/Quarterly Routine Inspection Report On Wet Rising Main System During Maintenance Period

A33

List "A" - Schedule Of Technical Data

A34

Testing Data On Hose Reel System

A35

Monthly Routine Inspection Report On Hose Reel Pumping System During Maintenance Period

A36

List of Relevant British Standards

A37

Schedule of Recommended Gauges For Rectangular Duct Installation

A38

Monthly/Annual Test Report - Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System

A39

Mechanical Ventilation System - Preliminary Inspection

A40

Anchor Torque Test For Ventilation System

A41

Ventilation Fan Commissioning Test Record

A42

Schedule "A" - Schedule Of Technical Data Of Plant And Equipment

A43 and/or A43(TC)

Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant

A44

Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement

A45

Procedure To Obtain StarHub Manhole Cover

A46

Performance Compliance Certificate (For Play Equipment)

A47

Certification Form HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET for Confirmation Of Equipotential Nettings For Playground, Hardcourt, Fitness Corner, Etc. With Reinforced Concrete Base

A48

Performance Compliance Certificate (For Outdoor Fitness Equipment)

A49

Drawings of Refuse Bins, Litter Bins, Bulk Containers And Trolleys


APPENDIX A1

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUB-TERRANEAN TERMITES

To :

Housing & Development Board Republic of Singapore STAMP if stamp duties required

.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)

........................................................................................................................................................................ (Name and Address of Contractor)

.................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)

................................................................................................................................................................... (Name and Address of Specialist)

.................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................ of the Contract, the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.

In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :

1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter called the Warranty Period) that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements notwithstanding). The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG12/A1.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

APPENDIX A1 Page 2

2

The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that : (a)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;

(b)

they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;

(c)

their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised experience and expertise in his particular trade; and

(d)

the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.

3 It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.

4 Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.

5 In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then upon completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order of priority : (a)

by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision, overheads and profits.

6 The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such works.


APPENDIX A1 Page 3

7 It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees, representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the execution of such works.

8 The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.

9 This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5 above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.

10 All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.

11 This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.

12 This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.

13 The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.

14 The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the 20


.

day of

APPENDIX A1(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUB-TERRANEAN TERMITES

To :

..................................................... ..................................................... Republic of Singapore STAMP if stamp duties required

.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)


................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)


................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of ....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.

In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :

1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements notwithstanding). The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.

BLDG12/A1T.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

APPENDIX A1(TC) Page 2

2



(b)


(c)


(d)


3 It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.

4 Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's or Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making good work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the Contractor and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.

5 In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then upon completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order of priority : (a)


(b)


6 The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such works.



7 It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees, representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the execution of such works.

8 The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.

9 This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under Clauses 4 and 5 above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.

10 All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.






.

day of

APPENDIX A2 APPENDIX A3

APPENDIX A2 RESERVED


BLDG12/A2A3.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

APPENDIX A4

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING

To :


.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)

................................................................................................................................................................... (Name and Address of Contractor)

...................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)


..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ....................................................................................................... of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.


1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Five (5) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof, and/or remain free from defects, including but not limited to any premature failure of all components of the roof system. The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.


APPENDIX A4 Page 2

2



(b)


(c)


(d)






(b)




APPENDIX A4 Page 3











.

day of

APPENDIX A4(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING

To :


.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)

.................................................................................................................................................................. (Name and Address of Contractor)

.................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)


.................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Complete System Of Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Roofing (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of ....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the .................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.


1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Five (5) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall be watertight, leakproof and waterproof, and/or remain free from defects, including but not limited to any premature failure of all components of the roof system. The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.



2



(b)


(c)


(d)






(b)














.

day of

APPENDIX A5

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING

To :


.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)


......................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)

....................................................................................................................................................................... (Name and Address of Specialist)

..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................ of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.


1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering, algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking. The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.


APPENDIX A5 Page 2

2



(b)


(c)


(d)






(b)




APPENDIX A5 Page 3











.

day of

APPENDIX A5(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING

To :


.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)


..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)


..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the .................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.


1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of six (6) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering, algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking. The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.



2



(b)


(c)


(d)






(b)














.

day of

APPENDIX A6

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CAST–IN–SITU EPDM RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND

To :


.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)


......................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)

....................................................................................................................................................................... (Name and Address of Specialist)

..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring For Children’s Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................ of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.


1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering, fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.

The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.


APPENDIX A6 Page 2

2



(b)


(c)


(d)






(b)




APPENDIX A6 Page 3











.

day of

APPENDIX A6(TC)

DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CAST–IN–SITU EPDM RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND

To :


.................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... CONTRACT NO. ................................................

WHEREAS :

(1)


..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").

(2)


..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring For Children’s Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the .................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................................... (hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.


1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering, fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.

The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.



2



(b)


(c)


(d)






(b)














.

day of

APPENDIX A7 to APPENDIX A10

APPENDIX A7 to APPENDIX A10 RESERVED

BLDG12/A7A10.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

APPENDIX A11 Page 1

INSTRUCTION ON WORK INJURY COMPENSATION POLICY 1.

The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form produced in Appendix A11 (please do not re-type).

2.

The Policy shall include the following requirements : (a)

The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-contractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".

(b)

The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.


APPENDIX A11 Page 2

Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp :

WORK INJURY COMPENSATION POLICY


APPENDIX A11 Page 3 Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp :

WORK INJURY COMPENSATION POLICY WHEREAS the Insured carrying on the Business described in the SCHEDULE and no other for the purpose of this insurance by an application which shall be the basis of this contract and is deemed to be incorporated herein has applied to the Insurer for the insurance hereinafter contained and has paid or agreed to pay the Premium stated in the SCHEDULE as consideration for such insurance. NOW THIS POLICY WITNESSETH that if any employee in the Insured's employment shall sustain personal injury by accident or disease caused during the Period of Insurance and arising out of and in the course of his employment by the Insured in the Business, the Insurer will subject to the terms exceptions conditions and warranties, and any memorandum if applicable, contained herein or endorsed hereon (all of which are hereinafter collectively referred to as the Terms of this Policy) indemnify the Insured against all sums for which the Insured shall be liable to pay compensation either under the Legislation or at Common Law, and will in addition pay all costs and expenses incurred by the Insured with the written consent of the Insurer. In the event of the death of the Insured the Insurer will indemnify the Insured's legal personal representatives in accordance with the Terms of this Policy in respect of liability incurred by the Insured provided that such personal representatives shall as though they were the Insured observe comply fulfil and be subject to the Terms of this Policy in so far as they can apply. PROVIDED ALWAYS that in the event of any change in the Legislation or the substitution by other Legislation therefor this policy shall remain in force and the Insurer reserves the right to charge additional premium therefor.

JURISDICTION 1.

This Policy shall be governed by the laws of the Republic of Singapore.

2.

The indemnity under this Policy shall not apply in respect of judgements which are not in the first instance delivered by or obtained from a court of tribunal of competent jurisdiction within the Republic of Singapore.

AVOIDANCE OF CERTAIN TERMS AND RIGHT OF RECOVERY Nothing in this Policy or any endorsement hereon shall affect : (a)

the right of any person entitled to indemnity under this Policy; or

(b)

the right of any other person to recover compensation,

under or by virtue of the Legislation. BUT the Insured shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the Legislation.



EXCEPTIONS The Insurer shall not be liable in respect of :

(a)

any employee of the Insured who is not a "employee" within the meaning of the Legislation unless such employee of the Insured is covered under this Policy by virtue of Clauses 11 and 12 of the Conditions;

(b)

any injury by accident or disease attributable to war hostilities (whether war be declared or not) invasion act of foreign enemies rebellion revolution insurrection or military or usurped power or civil war;

(c)

any liability of whatsoever nature directly or indirectly caused by or contributed to by or arising from : (i)

ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component

(ii)

pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds

(d)

any injury to any employee of the Insured resulting from an accident if it is proved that the injury to the employee is directly attributable to the employee having been at the time thereof under the influence of alcohol or a drug not prescribed by a medical practitioner unless the Insured is liable under the Legislation;

(e)

any incapacity or death resulting from a deliberate self-injury or the deliberate aggravation of an accidental injury.

CONDITIONS 1.

This Policy and the SCHEDULE shall be read together as one contract and any word or expression to which a specific meaning has been attached in any part of this Policy or the SCHEDULE shall bear such specific meaning wherever it may appear.

2.

In so far as it is not prohibited by the Legislation the Insured shall at all times observe, comply and fulfil the Terms of this Policy.

3.

The truth of the statements and answers in the application shall be conditions precedent to any liability of the Insurer to make any payment under this Policy and shall be the basis of this contract.

4.

Every notice or communication to be given or made under this Policy shall be delivered in writing to the Insurer.

5.

The Insured shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidents and disease to the Insured's employee and shall comply with all statutory obligations and requirements.


APPENDIX A11 Page 5 Policy No. : Insurer's Company Stamp : 6.

(a)

In the event of the occurrence of any accident/occupational disease that may give rise to a claim under this Policy, the Insured shall give notice of the occurrence in accordance with the time limits set out by Legislation to the Insurer with full particulars. If the notice period is not stipulated by legislation for a particular occurrence then notice of the occurrence shall be given to the Insurer within 10 days of the Insured having knowledge of the same.

(b)

Every letter claim writ summons and process shall be notified or forwarded to the Insurer immediately on receipt. Notice shall also be given to the Insurer immediately the Insured shall have knowledge of any impending prosecution inquest or fatal inquiry in connection with any such accident or disease.

7.

No admission offer promise or payment shall be made by or on behalf of the Insured without the written consent of the Insurer. The Insurer shall be entitled if it so desires to take over and conduct in the Insured's name the defence or settlement of any claim or to prosecute in the Insured's name for its own benefit any claim for indemnity or damages or otherwise and shall have full discretion in the conduct of any proceedings and in the settlement of any claim and the Insured shall give such information and assistance as the Insurer may require.

8.

The Insurer may cancel this Policy by giving thirty (30) days' notice by registered letter to the Insured at his last known address and in such event the Insurer will return to the Insured the premium paid less the actual premium payable for the period during which the Policy had been in force subject to a minimum premium payment of #$ by the Insured. This Policy may be cancelled at any time by the Insured by giving seven (7) days' written notice to the Insurer and provided no claim has arisen during the period which the Policy had been in force the Insured shall be entitled to a return of premium subject to a minimum premium payment of #$ by the Insured and subject to any adjustment of premium required by the terms or conditions of this Policy. The Insurer shall notify the Principal Housing & Development Board before the cancellation of this Policy.

9.

This Policy shall cover all *

's insurance

obligations with regard to Work Injury Compensation stated in the Contract between the Principal Housing & Development

Board

and

*

. 10.

(i)

In the event of any employee employed by the within Insured or by the Insured's Contractors as referred to in (ii) hereon or any dependant of such employee, bringing or making a claim under any Work Injury Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law against the Principal Housing & Development Board for personal injury or disease sustained whilst at work on any Contract covered by this Policy which the Insured may be carrying out for the Principal Housing & Development Board the Insurer will indemnify the said Principal Housing & Development Board against such claim and any costs charges and expenses in respect thereof. Provided always that the Insurer shall be entitled to have the sole conduct and control of all proceedings connected with claims covered by this. Nothing herein shall be construed as affecting the Insured's right to recover damages in any other way under the said Legislation.

(ii)

The indemnity herein granted is intended to cover the legal liability of the Insured to employees in the employment of contractors performing work for the Insured while engaged in the business and occupation in respect of which the Policy is granted but only so far as regards claims under any Work Injury Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law.

*Name of Contractor to be inserted # To be filled in by Insurer



11.

In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in the Schedule it is hereby agreed that the Insurer will not in the event of any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business raise the defence that such employee is not a person employed by way of manual labour within the meaning of the Legislation.

12.

In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in the Schedule it is hereby agreed that the Policy is extended to indemnify the Insured in respect of the Insured's liability at common law for any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business.

13.

All disputes or differences under this Policy shall be referred to Arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration Act (Chapter 10) or any statutory re-enactment thereof. The making of an Award by an Arbitrator or Arbitrators as hereinbefore specified shall be a condition precedent to any right of action against the Insurer.

14.

At any time after the happening of any accident or disease giving rise to a claim or series of claims under this Policy the Insurer may pay to the Insured the full amount of the Insurer's liability and relinquish the conduct of any claim defence or proceedings and the Insurer shall not be responsible for any damage loss or liability alleged to have been caused to the Insured in consequence of any alleged act or omission of the Insurer in connection with such claim defence or proceedings or of the Insurer relinquishing such conduct nor shall the Insurer be liable for any costs or expenses whatsoever incurred by the Insured or any claimant or other person after the Insurer shall have relinquished such conduct.

INTERPRETATION 1.

ALL references to "Legislation" in this Policy shall mean the Work Injury Compensation Act (Cap 354), amendments and re-enactments thereof and any regulations made thereunder.

2.

Words used in the Policy shall have the same meanings as that defined in the Legislation.

WARRANTY The Insured warrants that in the event of any failure by him to comply with any of the Terms of this Policy, he shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the Legislation. PREMIUM WARRANTY CLAUSE 1.

Notwithstanding anything herein contained but subject to clause 2 hereof, it is hereby agreed and declared that if the period of insurance is 60 days or more, any premium due must be paid and actually received in full by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within 60 days of the inception date of the respective coverage under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note or effective date of each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note.

2.

In the event that any premium due is not paid and actually received in full by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within the 60-day period referred to above, then:(a) (b) (c)

3.

the respective cover under the Policy, Renewal Certificate, Cover Note or Endorsement is automatically terminated immediately after the expiry of the said 60-day period; the automatic termination of the respective cover shall be without prejudice to any liability incurred within the said 60-day period; and the Insurer shall be entitled to a pro-rata time on risk premium for the respective coverage subject to a minimum of $25.00.

If the Period of Insurance is less than 60 days, any premium due must be paid and actually received in full by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within the Period of Insurance.

#


To be filled in by Insurer

APPENDIX A12



APPENDIX A13 HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD 480 Lorong 6 TOA PAYOH HDB HUB SINGAPORE 310480

CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF MATERIALS FROM THE EMPLOYER

1

DEFINITION

1.1

In this "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer", the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires : (a)

"Employer"

:

means the Housing & Development Board, Republic of Singapore.

(b)

"Materials"

:

means Ordinary Portland Cement, Concreting Sand and 20mm Aggregate to be supplied by the Employer.

(c)

"Managing Agent"

:

means the company engaged by the Employer for managing the supply & distribution of Materials to the Contractor.

(d)

"SO Rep"

:

means the Superintending Officer's Representative. In addition, for the purposes of managing the supply and distribution of Materials to the Contractor only, shall also means the authorised person of Managing Agent.

(e)

"Destination of Delivery" or "Site"

:

means the Contract Site and/or any other places within Singapore as approved by the SO Rep to which the Materials shall be delivered.

(f)

“Employer’s Supplier”

:

shall mean the Employer’s supplier of the Materials who shall be responsible for delivering the Materials to the Site.

1.2

Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.

2

SUPPLY ARRANGEMENT

The Materials shall be supplied by the Employer inclusive of delivery to the Destination of Delivery as requested by the Contractor and approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's delivery service shall be provided only for Destination of Delivery within Singapore.

3

SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS REQUIREMENT

The Contractor shall complete Form A as attached hereafter and submit by fax to the Managing Agent as indicated at the top of the Form. The Form must be submitted ONE WEEK before the commencement of the Contract for all the Materials to be obtained from the Employer. No Materials will be delivered prior to the receipt of the duly completed Form.


APPENDIX A13 Page 2 4

MONTHLY ORDERS AND QUANTITY SUPPLIED

4.1

The Contractor shall submit monthly orders for each of the Materials required in separate order forms.

4.2

The monthly order forms may be obtained from Managing Agent via: Tel Fax

: :

6786 1618 6786 5996

4.3

All monthly order forms shall reach the Managing Agent by the 20th of each preceding month of usage. Late submission of the monthly orders may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport and priority will be given to monthly orders submitted before the due date and as approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission of monthly order forms. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of late submission of monthly order forms. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any late order.

4.4

The monthly ordered quantities shall indicate the quantities of Materials that the Contractor requires based on the projected progress of work. Notwithstanding the quantities submitted by the Contractor in the monthly orders including any subsequent adjustment in the daily orders, the SO Rep reserves the right to deliver the quantities which the SO Rep considers are the quantities reflective of the Contractor's work progress and/or concrete mixes as specified or as approved by the SO Rep. In the event that there is a discrepancy between the quantities of Materials indicated in the monthly orders and the Form A, the latter will prevail. In such an event, the SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the allocated quantities.

4.5

Additional orders/loads may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of additional orders. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any additional order.

4.6

The quantity of Materials delivered shall be determined by the Employer's weighbridges or the Employer’s Supplier’s weighbridges.

4.7

The Contractor shall consume at least 80% of their monthly orders. Any cancellation of the monthly orders request greater than 20% of the monthly orders shall be made in writing and endorsed by the SO Rep before sending to the Managing Agent. For any cancellation of the monthly orders greater than 20% of the monthly orders without the SO Rep’s endorsement, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.

4.8

Additional orders for any particular month may be accepted only after the Contractor has consumed at least 80% of the monthly ordered/allocated quantity. The Contractor must submit their written additional order duly signed by the SO Rep before sending to the Managing Agent (Please refer to 4.4).

4.9

The Contractor shall maintain at least 3 days' stock of Materials at their Site whenever possible.

4.10

If at any time the Employer’s Supplier fails to supply the quantity of the Materials stated in the daily schedule that is likely to cause disruption to the works, the Contractor shall immediately notify the SO Rep in writing and copied to the Managing Agent within two working day and follow-up with the Managing Agent to arrange the delivery.

5

DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS

5.1

Notwithstanding the submission by the Contractor of the aforementioned Schedule of Materials Requirement and the monthly orders of Materials or the revisions thereof, the Contractor shall place daily orders of Materials in writing directly with the Managing Agent.



DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS

(Cont’d)

5.2

The Contractor shall give at least TWO WORKING DAYS' PRIOR NOTICE for the daily delivery or cancellation of supply. The notice shall reach the Managing Agent before 4.00pm on weekdays and 12 noon on Saturdays & the eves of public holidays.

5.3

The delivery of Materials shall be made from 8.00am to 6.00pm on Mondays to Saturdays. For any delivery of Materials to be made after these hours, the Contractor shall be required to make his own arrangement with the Employer’s Suppliers who are under no obligation to deliver after these hours.

5.4

All deliveries shall be made in full lorry loads and the Contractor shall not request delivery of partial lorry loads in any case. In this respect, the Contractor shall note that delivery will cease at the last lorry load before exceeding the quantity stipulated or approved in the Contract (hereinafter known as “Approved Protected Quantity”). As long as the remaining quantity before exceeding the stipulated quantities are not more than 20 tonnes, the Contractor is deemed to have met the full requirements of the Stipulated Contract Quantity and there shall not be any cost recovery.

5.5

The Contractor shall sign and stamp the Delivery Orders with the appropriate stamp (see Table 2). If the Contractor shall fail to observe this requirement, the SO Rep shall take appropriate action and the Employer shall not be responsible for any resulting delay.

5.5.1

The Delivery Orders can only be stamped once. The Contractor shall inform the Managing Agent immediately and rectify the error if the Contractor has affixed the wrong Company stamp on the Delivery Orders. The SO Rep reserves the right to suspend delivery of Material for three (3) days if such default happens more than three (3) times within a calendar month, or to impose a charge as specified under the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause on the Contractor per default including the first three (3) defaults. The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the delivery of Material for seven (7) days if the Contractor was found to have failed to inform the Managing Agent that they have affixed the wrong Company stamp. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delays resulting from such suspensions. Table 2 Different Types Of Rubber Stamps To Be Used Information to be produced on Contractor's Rubber Stamp

Destination of Delivery

Contract Site

1. 2. 3.

Contractor's Company Name Contract Site Contract No.

Ready-Mixed Company

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Contractor's Company Name Contract Site Contract No. RMC Company RMC Site

Batching Plant Site

1. 2. 3. 4.

Contractor's Company Name Contract Site Contract No. Batching Plant Site

5.5.2

When a Delivery Order is signed by a Contractor's Representative (whether authorised or otherwise) with the Contractor's Company stamp, the delivery is deemed to have been made to and accepted by the Contractor and no dispute shall be raised by the Contractor that the said Materials have not been received and accepted by the Contractor.

5.6

The Contractor shall immediately inform and request the Managing Agent for instructions should there be any load of Material wrongly delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall not alter any Delivery Order without the consent of the Managing Agent. The SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate action against the Contractor for any unauthorised alteration of the Delivery Orders.

5.7

The Contractor may submit a report to the Managing Agent for appropriate action if the load of Material is unloaded at a wrong place within the Site. This notwithstanding, the Contractor shall still acknowledge receipt of the Material.



QUALITY OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED

The quality of Materials supplied by the Employer shall comply with the Specifications in the Contract.

7

WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR DELIVERY TO PLACES OTHER THAN THE CONTRACT SITE

The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the SO Rep for delivery of Materials to ready-mixed companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place.

8

SKETCH MAP AND ACCESS ROAD

8.1

The Contractor shall provide a sketch map in the space provided in Form A, showing the location of the Site and the stockpile areas where the respective Materials should be delivered.

8.2

The Contractor shall maintain and ensure that all access roads at the Site leading to the stockpile areas as shown on their sketch map are accessible to the lorries of the Employer’s Supplier. The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance and facilities to the Employer’s Supplier.

8.3

The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the supply of Materials if the access road to the Site is bad or muddy. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the suspension and the Contractor shall take immediate action to make good the access roads and inform the Managing Agent accordingly before delivery of Materials can resume. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption of the work as a result of this aforesaid suspension.

8.4

The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any summon issued by the National Environment Agency to the Employer’s Supplier(s) for muddying up public roads due to muddy access within the Contractor's Site and the Contractor shall keep the Employer fully indemnified against such penalties and liabilities. The Contractor is advised to employ labourers to wash the lorries of the Employer’ Supplier(s) before the lorries leave the Contractor's Site.

9

ABSENCE OF SITE REPRESENTATIVE OR IN ACCESSIBLE ACCESS

If any load of Materials cannot, upon arrival at Site within the specified time, be unloaded due to the absence of the Contractor's Site representative or bad access or failure to inform the Managing Agent of any termination of the usage of ready-mix companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place, the load of Material will be returned to the Managing Agent. For such cases, the SO Rep reserves the right to recover from the Contractor, the costs involved in transporting the Material and to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.

10

SIPHONING OF MATERIALS

The Contractor shall not siphon Materials obtained from the Employer for his own use. Action shall be taken by the SO Rep to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the event of any such breach.


APPENDIX A13 Page 5

11

LOSS OF DELIVERY ORDERS

If the Contractor loses any Delivery Order and wishes to request for a duplicate copy of the lost Delivery Order, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a fee of $50.00 (DOLLARS: FIFTY ONLY) per occasion.

12

METHOD OF PAYMENT

The Contractor shall pay the Employer in full for the value of Materials supplied every month at the rates specified in the Contract. The amount owed by the Contractor shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor.

13

MISCONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORKMEN

The Contractor is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his workmen, agents and staff at the Site and shall give full cooperation to the Employer’s Supplier’s drivers in the delivery and unloading of Materials. Any grievances should be directed to the SO Rep in writing. The Contractor shall bear all the cost plus administrative cost for investigations and other consequential expenses, if their complaints is proven to be unfounded.


APPENDIX A13 Page 6

FORM A-1 HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD Manager: Managing Agent (___________________________) Fax: :67865996

1)

FOR OFFICIAL USE BCC Code Tpt Zone

Site

Contract No.

Arch Ref

Checked By

Certified By

PARTICULARS OF CONTRACT

Nature of Contract (Building/CE/Others)*

Contract No.

Expiry of the Time For Completion:

Site

Contractor's Office Address

Site Office Tel. No:

Office Tel. No:

Site Office Fax. No:

HDB Project Manager:

Site Office Email:

HDB Residential Engineer:

Site Rep's Name

HDB Resident Technical Officer: (*) Delete where not applicable

2)

CAPACITY OF SITE STOCKYARD FOR

20mm Aggregate

(Tonne)

Concreting Sand

(Tonne)

Cement

(Tonne)

3)

TIME FOR DELIVERY

Weekdays From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.

4)

Saturdays From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.

SAMPLE OF RUBBER STAMP (Separate forms must be used if there are multiple locations for each of these destination)

Contract Site

Batching Plant Site


Ready-Mixed Company

APPENDIX A13 Page 7

FORM A-2 5)

SKETCH MAP [Separate forms MUST be used for different "Destination of Delivery" and/or multiple locations of each "Destination of Delivery"]

The sketch below shows the location of our work and stockpile area where the material should be delivered.

Site

Contract No.

Contractor's Stamp

Date


/

/

APPENDIX A13 Page 8 FORM A-3 SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL'S REQUIREMENT SITE : ___________________________________________ CONTRACT NO. : __________________________________ S/N

MTH/YR

CONCRETING SAND (T)

20MM AGGREGATE (T)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 TOTAL APPROVED PROTECTED QUANTITY Note : Please fill in the month/yr and the quantities of each month's requirements for the whole contract.


CEMENT (T)

APPENDIX A14 Page 1

TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"

The Contractor shall provide the following information when making submission to the SO Rep for approval.

Contract Title

:

__________________________________________

Contract No.

:

__________________________________________

SO Rep

:

__________________________________________

Block No.

:

__________________________________________

Location

:

__________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

SOLENOID VALVES

Brand

:

__________________________________________

Type

:

__________________________________________

Model

:

__________________________________________

Country of Origin

:

__________________________________________

Voltage

:

Coil Insulation

:

Class _____________________________________

Enclosure Protection

:

__________________________________________

Flow Rating

:

Holding Power

:

Operating Temperature

:

Ambient temp

degree celcius

:

Fluid temp

degree celcius

:

0 to

Operating Pressure Range


__

Volts

Hz

l/s when the pressure difference across the value is 1 bar. w

bars

APPENDIX A14 Page 2

TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"

Material - Valve Body

:

__________________________________________

Plunger

:

__________________________________________

Diaphragm

:

__________________________________________

Others (please specify)

:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

CONTROL PANEL

Control Panel Manufacturer

:

__________________________________________

MCB - Make

:

__________________________________________

- Type

:

__________________________________________

- Rating

:

__________________________________________

ELCB - Make

:

__________________________________________

- Type

:

__________________________________________

- Tripping Current

:

__________________________________________

:

__________________________________________

Printed Circuit Board Manufacturer

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of Contractor

:

__________________________________________

Address

:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

Signature

:

__________________________________________

Name & Position

:

__________________________________________

Tel No.

:

__________________________________________

Date

:

__________________________________________


APPENDIX A14 Page 3

TESTING DATA ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster pumping system

Contract Title

:

Contract No.

:

Block No.

:

Ref No.

:

Location

:

Contractor

:

A. SOLENOID VALVE

-

C. CONTROL PANEL

1. Brand

1. Timer ( 0 - 30 ) mins

2. Type

2. Control MCB

3. Model

3. Red indicator light

4. Voltage

4. Green indicator light

B. PIPE, FITTING & VALVES

Brand

Brand

Model

5. Control relay AC 230V

1. Pipe

6. Terminal block

2. Fitting 3. 40mm Ball Stop Valve 4. 40mm Stopcock 5. 32mm Check Valve

Recorded & Submitted by :

________________________________ (Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp

_________________________ (Signature)/Date

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ FOR OFFICIAL USE Solenoid Valve

Tested by :

Pass/Fail

____________________________ (1) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date (2) TO/HTN/TN ( )


Checked & Verified by :

_________________________ STO/HTO ( ) Date

APPENDIX A15-1 FORM PH-G2 Our Ref Date Tel Fax

: : : :

City Gas Ref No: To :

General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd Attn: (City Gas' Project Co-ordinator)

APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS INSTALLATION AT (Address of Premises/Development) PART I I, hereby, submit my application for testing of the following gas installation work : (Please tick the appropriate boxes)

□

External and internal gas service pipe

□

Internal gas pipe

The abovementioned work was carried out by our appointed LGSW. The as-built drawing (inclusive of line diagram) is attached. I confirm that the work has been carried out in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and rules. I will notify all parties of the date for final pressure test. Name of Designated Representative :

Signature :

Date:

I certify that the gas pipe installation for the above project has been completed and is in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and rules, and is ready for the final pressure test. Name of Qualified Person (QP):

Signature : Date: ____________________________________________________________________________ PART II (This section is applicable only for minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installation) I also request that gas be turn-on to the installation upon successful completion of the final pressure test. After turn-on of the gas supply, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation.

Signature of Designated Representative Date ____________________________________________________________________________ cc (1) Developer/Owner (2) Professional Engineer (3) Architect (Please see overleaf on Notes) (4) Main Contractor BLDG12/A15.DOC(1) Sal(151211) (DPD)

APPENDIX A15-2

NOTES: a)

The applicant shall be the Designated Representative.

b)

The Designated Representative must attend the final inspection and final pressure test.

c)

Final pressure test and turn-on of gas supply will be carried out in one operation for the following minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installations: 1

Turn-on of single/multi stall after charge-up to food court/eating house/canteen.

2

Replacement/addition/relocation of appliances, inclusive of minor pipe extensions.

3

Renewal of corroded gas pipes.

4

Installation of valves.

5

Termination/cap-off of gas pipes.

6

Diversion/alteration/addition of existing service pipes in void deck or ground floor of residential premises.


APPENDIX A16 FORM PH-G1B Our Ref

:

Date

:

Tel Fax

: :

General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd 111 Somerset Road #05-05 Singapore 238164 Attn :

___________________________________ (Name of City Gas’ Project Coordinator)

Dear Sir APPOINTMENT OF DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (DR) FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION AT (Name of Project with Block No.)

I hereby appoint the following Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) to be my Designated Representative (DR) to liaise directly with your Project Coordinator on all matters relating to gas pipe installation. However I am still fully responsible for all gas pipe installation matters in this project.

Name of DR (LGSW)

:

Licence No.

:

Address

:

Tel No.

:

Fax No.

:

Yours faithfully

NAME & SIGNATURE OF QUALIFIED PERSON PE NO. : CONTRACT NO.

:

cc PMgr, Consultant (Attn: ______________) Mech Engr, Consultant

Note :

(Attn: ______________)

This Form is to be used by the Qualified Person if he wishes to delegate part of his responsibility to the DR(LGSW).


APPENDIX A17 FORM PH-GR2

To :

Our Ref

:

Your Ref

:

Date

:

Tel Fax No.

: :

_______________________________ (QP / DR) _______________________________ _______________________________

Dear Sir

APPROVAL FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST AT ____________________________________________ (Name of Project & Block No.)

1 We are pleased to inform that your application for Final Pressure Test dated _______________ for gas supply has been approved.

2

The test will be carried out on __________________ at _____________.

3 As the Designated Representative, you are required to be present. You are also required to notify all parties of the date and time for the Final Pressure Test.

4

For clarification, please contact our Project Coordinator Mr _______________ at Tel _____________.

Yours faithfully

for SENIOR MANAGER (CUSTOMER SUPPLY)

cc DDP, HDB (Attn : ________________)


APPENDIX A18 FORM PH-G2A

City Gas Ref No:

To:

General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd Attn: (Name of City Gas’ Project Co-ordinator)

CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PRESSURE TEST LOCATION: ADDRESS: AS-BUILT PLAN NOS: __ _ _ _ _ (1) This is to certify that the gas installation has passed the final pressure test on _______________. No person shall be allowed to carry out any further work on the installation without prior written approval from City Gas.

_

___

_

___

Certified by: ______________________________________ (Designated Representative) PE No./LGSW No: ______________________ Date: __________________ __

_

_

_

Approved by: ________________________________________ (City Gas’ Project Co-ordinator) Date: __________________

cc

1) Architect 2) Owner/Developer 3) Qualified Person 4) Main Contractor


_

APPENDIX A19 FORM PH-G3 Our Ref

:

Date

:

Tel Fax

: :

City Gas Ref No : To : General Manager City Gas Pte Ltd. Attn : (City Gas' Project Co-ordinator) REQUEST FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS TO (Address of premises/development) As-Built Plan Nos : 1. I certify that the site is ready to receive gas. I further certify that the gas installation has passed the final pressure test , no further work has been carried out on the gas installation after the final pressure test and is safe for CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON. 2. After charge-in/turn-on of the gas supply to the above project, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation. I also undertake to affix warning labels at all end-points of the gas pipe installation. 3. I attach a copy of the line drawing of the installation covered under this application. A copy of the line diagram has been given to the owner for display. 4.

.

The number of end-points in the gas pipe installation is

Signature of Designated Representative

Date

PE No/LGSW No : Name Address : Tel No : Note :

1)

In the case of a designated representative who has been nominated by the Qualified Person, he should only be allowed to submit this application with the consent of the main contractor and the Qualified Person.

CONSENT BY QUALIFIED PERSON AND MAIN CONTRACTOR/OWNER (where applicable) We consent to the above application. Name of Qualified Person/Owner : PE No :

Signature : Date :

Name of authorised person on behalf of Main Contractor : (with company stamp) Signature :


Date :


To :

Our Ref

:

Date

:

Tel Fax

: :

____________________________________________ (QP / DR) ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________

Dear Sir

APPROVAL FOR CHARGE-IN / TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY AT ___________________________________ (Name of Project & Block No.)

1 We refer to your application for charge-in/turn-on dated __________________ for gas supply to the above project / block.

2 We are pleased to inform you that your application has been approved and the work will be carried out on __________________ at ___________.

3

You are required to notify all relevant parties to witness the charge-in.

Yours faithfully

for SENIOR MANAGER (CUSTOMER SUPPLY)

cc HDB Project Director (Attn :


)


To :

Our Ref

:

Date

:

Tel Fax

: :

________________________________________ (PE / DR) ________________________________________ ________________________________________

Dear Sir

STATEMENT OF TURN-ON OR CHARGE-IN OF GAS SUPPLY TO _______________________________ (Name of Project & block no)

1 This is to inform you that in response to your application for turn-on/charge-in of gas supply to the above premises, we have on __________________(date) at ______________(time) introduced gas into the above gas pipe installation. Kindly notify all relevant parties that gas has been turned on / charged in to the above premises.

2 You are hereby informed that no further work on the above gas pipe installation can be undertaken without our written approval.

Yours faithfully

_____________________________________ Name & Signature of authorised officer City Gas Pte Ltd

I acknowledge that gas has been turned on / charged in on the date and time as indicated above.

________________________________ Signature & Company Stamp of Applicant / Designated Representative ________________________________ Name & NRIC / Passport No

Witnessed by HDB's Resident Technical Officer (applicable to gas mains only) _________________________________ Name & Signature of HDB's Resident Technical Officer

cc HDB Project Director (Attn : ____________________)


APPENDIX A22 Page 1

DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details Of Transfer Pumping System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all transfer pumping systems when making submission to the SO Rep. Contract Title

:

Contract No.

:

SO Rep

:

Building Block No.

:

No. of Storeys : ___________________________________________________________________________________________

WATER SUPPLY PUB direct water supply to :

storey

No. of dwelling units to be supplied from roof tanks

F = _______________________

Vertical Head from ground floor to inlet of roof tank

H =

metres

ROOF TANKS (a)

Total effective capacity of roof tanks required C1 = 700F =

(b)

No. of separate Tank groups (to be interlinked) =

(c)

Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height)

Litres;

m3

Tank 1 =

x

x

=

m3

Tank 2 =

x

x

=

m3

or; (d)

No. x 11.83 m3 =

Precast tanks =

m3

SUCTION TANKS (a)

m3

Capacity of suction tank =

Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height) =

x

x _________

or (b) Precast tank = No. x 3.731 m3 = m3 ___________________________________________________________________________________________

PUMP ROOM Location

:

Platform Level

:

Floor space available

:


_____________________________ m Length x Width

=

m2

Height

=

m

APPENDIX A22 Page 2

DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System"

PUMP Discharge Capacity Required

:

Q1 = 0.05F =

l/sec

Vertical Head

:

H1 =

m water

Proposed Pumps

:

Make

___________________________

Type

___________________________

Model ___________________________ Flow

:

Q2

l/sec

Total Head

:

H2

m water

Speed

:

rpm

Impeller Diameter

:

mm

Power required

:

KW

Pump efficiency

:

% (Please attach characteristics curve for pumps)

The Contractor must proposed the pump to operate at maximum pump efficiency. However, the flow rate shall preferably not exceed 10 l/s and the pump efficiency shall not in any case be less than 55%. ___________________________________________________________________________________________

MOTOR Make

:

________________________________

Type

:

________________________________

Model

:

________________________________

Rated Output

:

________________________________ KW

Voltage/Phase/Frequency

:

________________________________

No-Load Speed

:

________________________________ RPM

Insulation Class

:

________________________________

Line Current at Full Load : ________________________________ amp _____________________________________________________________________________________________

COUPLING Make and Type

:

________________________________

Main Dimension

:

________________________________


APPENDIX A22 Page 3

DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System"

CONTROL PANEL MCB for main incoming supply

Starter

:

:

Make

_________________________________________

Type

_________________________________________

Rating

_________________________________________

MAKE, TYPE AND MODEL __________________________ Capacity ________________________________________ Overload release ratings ___________________________ Approximate KW ratings:

KW at

V

ph

Floatless Level Switch

:

MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________

Time Switch

:

MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________ Reserve for

hrs

Selector Switch

:

MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________

Automatic Change Over Relay

:

_________________________________________

PIPELINES Diameter of Suction Pipe : Total Length of Suction Line : No. and Type of Valves Along Suction Line : Diameter of Discharge Pipe : Diameter of Rising Main : Total Length of Discharging Line : No. and Type of Valves Along Discharge Line :

Remarks :

Name of Contractor

:

_________________________________________________

Address

:

_________________________________________________

Signature

:

Name :

___________________________

Telephone No.

:

Date

___________________________


:

APPENDIX A23 Page 1

TESTING DATA ON WATER TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 42.26 "Testing of Transfer Pumping System Installation"

Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer pumping system. Contract Name :

Contract No :

Block No :

Ref No :

Street Name :

Contractor :

Building Data No. of Storey :

Dwelling units per storey :

Direct Supply :

storey

Total Head :

m

Total dwelling units from tanks (F) : Required pumping capacity (0.05xF) :

l/s

2

Suction Tank: Precast Tank - Base Area of 2.865 m

Pump / Motor Data Type

Motor

Pump

TEFC

End Suction/Multi-stage

Brand Model Serial No 1 Serial No. 2 Coupling (brand / size ) Rated Output (kW) Volt / Phase / Frequency Insulation Class/Speed (rpm)

NA 415 / 3 / 50 Hz /

Rated Current (A)

rpm

NA NA

Impeller Diameter (mm)

NA

Specified capacity (l/s)

NA

Fittings Data

NA

Ø 80mm (Brand)

Ø 100mm (Brand)

Rubber expansion joint

NA

Suction gate valve

NA

Delivery gate valve Check valve


APPENDIX A23 Page 2

Control Panel Data Starter

- Brand/Model - Type

Starter Changeover Relay

- Brand/Model

Starter MCB

- Brand/Model

Overload Relay

- Brand/Model - Setting Range

Time switch

- Brand/Model - Serial No

Latching Relay

- Brand/Model

8-Pin / 11-Pin Relay

- Brand/Model

Suction Tank Module

- Brand/Model

Storage Tank Module

- Brand/Model

Suction Tank Electrode Holder

- Brand

Storage Tank Electrode Holder

- Brand

Recorded & Submitted by : (Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp

(Signature)

_________ Date

FOR OFFICIAL USE

Motor

Motor 1

Starting/Changeover Current (A) Running Current (A) R/Y/B

/ /

Pump

Motor 2

Pump 1

/ /

/

Pump 2

mm of water

Time for

Approximate Capacity (l/s)

/

Tested by: _________________ 1) TO/HTn/Tn (

) Date

2) TO/HTn/Tn (

)

Electrode Length (mm) ST

NL

EA

BP

E0

Checked & Verified by :

E1

__________________________

E2

STO/HTO (

E3


NA

) Date

APPENDIX A24

TESTING DATA ON INSTALLATION OF TELEMONITORING SYSTEM FOR TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 42.27.9 "Testing Of Installation"

Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the Telemonitoring System for Transfer Pumping System. Contract Title

:

Contract No.

:

Block No.

:

Ref No.

:

Street Name

:

Contractor

:

CONTROL PANEL

BACKUP BATTERY

Brand

Brand

Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

Model

Microprocessor (CPU)

Voltage

Panel Door Key No.

Ampere Hour (AH) Rating

Repair Technician's Key No. TRANSFORMER

RELAYS IN LIFT MOTOR ROOM

Primary Voltage

Brand

Secondary Voltage

Model

Voltage Ampere (VA) Rating

Voltage

Submitted by :

_____________________ Name & Company's Stamp Signature/Date __________________________________________________________________________________________ FOR OFFICE USE ONLY TYPE OF FAULTS

FAULT CODE

1.

SYSTEM POWER ON BATTERY

2.

CONTROL SUPPLY POWER FAILURE

5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY

3.

RED PHASE POWER FAILURE


4.

YELLOW PHASE POWER FAILURE


5.

BLUE PHASE POWER FAILURE


6.

EMERGENCY & ALARM START


7.

PUMP No. 1 TRIP


8.

PUMP No. 2 TRIP


9.

ROOF TANK OVERFLOW


10.

SUCTION TANK OVERFLOW


11.

SUCTION TANK LOW LEVEL


12.

DUTY PUMP FAILURE


REPAIR TECHNICIAN KEY - SWITCH TURNED ON


Tested by

: *TO/HTN/TN(

Checked and Verified by


) Date

/ _________________________ *TO/HTN/TN( ) Date

: ____________________________ *STO/HTO ( ) Date *Delete whichever is not applicable


APPENDIX A25

FORTNIGHTLY/MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD Clause 42.28 "Servicing And Maintenance During Maintenance Period (Transfer Pumping System)" To :

Branch Office )

Head (

Date of Inspection :

Contract Title : _________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room : 1/2# Items

Location : _________________ Remedial Action/Date

Checked

(A) FORTNIGHTLY 1.

General Condition of Pumproom

2.

Correct Setting of Time Switch

3.

Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position

4.

Power supply selector switch in "On" position

5.

Control panel indicating lights

6.

Alarm bell and bulb

7.

Suction Tank electrode and control module

8.

Motor Running Current

Pumpset 1 *

A

*

A

A

Y

*

A

*

A

KW

B

*

A

*

A

Rated current : Motor Output : 9.

Pumpset 2

R

80mm Check Valve

10. 80mm Gate Valve 11. Alignment of Couplings 12. 100mm Check Valve 13. 100mm Gate Valve 14. Ball Float Valve (B) MONTHLY (In addition to items in fortnightly inspection) 1.

Motor insulation (megaohms)

2.

Pump mechanical seal

*

3.

Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)

4.

Contractors and Relays

5.

Storage tank electrode and control module

Signature

:

____________________________________

Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC

:

/_________________

Name of Contractor

:

____________________________________

Acknowledge By

:

____________________________________ HTO/TO/HTn (H&M) ( ) Date

# : √ : X : * :

Delete as necessary Check and found in order To rectify immediately Reading by measuring instrument


APPENDIX A26 Page 1

DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 43.2 "Approval Of Drawings And Details Of Booster Pumping System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all booster pumping systems when making submission to the SO Rep. Contract Title

:

Contract No.

:

Superintending Officer's Representative

:

Building Block No.

:

No. of Storeys

:

No. of Dwelling Units Per Storey

:

No. of Storeys served by Booster Pump

:

No. of Dwelling Units served by Booster Pumps

:

No. of Water Tanks on the Roof Top : _________________________________________________________________________________________

BOOSTER PUMPS

Discharge capacity required

:

Q

l/sec

Pressure Head

:

H

m water

Shut-off Pressure Head

:

Ns

m water

Proposed Booster Pumps

:

Make

_____________________________

Type

_____________________________

Model _____________________________ Speed

:

rpm

Impeller Diameter

:

mm

Power required

:

kw

(Please attach characteristics curve for booster pumps) _________________________________________________________________________________________


APPENDIX A26 Page 2

DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 43.2 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Booster Pumping System"

MOTOR

Make

:

_____________________________________

Type

:

_____________________________________

Model

:

_____________________________________

Rated Output

:


:

No-Load Speed

:

Insulation Class

:

KW _____________________________________ RPM _____________________________________

Line Current at Full Load : amp _________________________________________________________________________________________

CONTROL PANEL

MCB for Main Incoming Supply

:

Make

________________________________________

Type

________________________________________

Rating ________________________________________ Soft-Starters

:

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________ CAPACITY _____________________________________

Overload Release Ratings

:

_______________________________________________

KW Ratings

:

Floatless Level Switch

:

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

Flow Sensor

:

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

Selector Switch

:

BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________

kw at

v

ph

Automatic Change over relay : _______________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of Contractor

:

_________________________________________________

Address

:

_________________________________________________

Signature

:

Name :

_______________________

Tel No.

:

Date

_______________________


:

APPENDIX A27

TESTING DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM Clause 43.18 "Testing of Booster Pumping System Installation"

Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster pumping system. Contract Name :

Contract No :

Block No. :

Ref No. :

Street Name :

Contractor :

Pump Data Brand

Model

Serial No. 1

Rated output

Serial No. 2

Rated current

Fittings Data 40mm Ball Stop Valve

kW Amp

15mm Ball Stop Valve

40mm Check Valve

15mm Stop Cock

Pressure Gauge Range

Flow Sensor

Control Panel Data Brand

Model

Serial No./Range

Soft Starter

NA

Overload Relay

Amp

Timer

Min

Delay Timer Control Module

NA

Control MCB

Amp

Starter MCB

Amp

Control Relay

NA

Latching Relay

NA


__________ Date

(Signature)

FOR OFFICIAL USE Booster Pump Pressure

Mode 1

Passed / Failed

Electrode

E0

Pump No. 1

Mode 2

Passed / Failed

Length/mm

E1

Pump No. 2

Mode 3

Passed / Failed

E2 E3

Tested by : 1) TO/HTn/Tn ( 2) TO/HTn/Tn (


Checked & Verified by : ) Date )

_________________________ STO/HTO ( ) Date

APPENDIX A28

MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD Clause 43.19 "Servicing And Maintenance During Maintenance Period (Booster Pumping System)"

To :

Head (

Branch Office )


Contract Title: __________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room : 1/2# Items

Location : __________________ Remedial Action/Date

Checked

1.

Flow Sensor

2.

Soft-starter, relay and control module

3.

Power, supply selector switch in "On" position

4.


5.

Electrodes in storage tanks

6.


Pumpset 1

Rated current :

A

Motor Output :

KW

7.

Motor insulation (megaohms)

8.

Pump mechanical seal

9.

Pressure gauges

Pumpset 2

R

*

A

*

A

Y

*

A

*

A

B

*

A

*

A

*

*

10. 40mm check valves and bell stop valves 11. Thrust supports at distribution main

Signature : ________________________________________ √ : Check and found in order

Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC: ____________/_______

X : To rectify immediately

Name of Contractor : ________________________________

* : Reading by measuring instrument

Acknowledge By : __________________________________ HTO/TO/HTn (H&M) ( ) Date


APPENDIX A29 Page 1

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA

The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements specified in the Specifications. The requirements specified in the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.

WET RISING MAIN

1.

WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all equipment, etc offered by the Contractor). Particulars Pumps Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Model No. Materials Casing Shaft Impeller Type of Bearings Nominal Characteristics Flow rate (l/min) Discharge head (bar) KW Efficiency (%) Pump RPM Churning Pressure (bar)


Fire Pump Electrical

Fire Pump Diesel Driven

Transfer Pump Electrical

Transfer Pump Diesel Driven

APPENDIX A29 Page 2

1.

WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (CONT'D)

Particulars Motors Manufacturer Country of Origin KW RPM Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz) Full load current (A) Max. Starting Current (A) Type of Drive/Coupling Insulation Class Enclosure Protection Class Vibration Isolators Manufacturer Static Deflection (mm) Type of Model No. Motor Starters Manufacturer Country of Origin Protecting Devices Total Operating Wt of Pumpsets (kg)


Electrical

Diesel Driven

Transfer Pump Electrical

Transfer Pump Diesel Driven

APPENDIX A29 Page 3

2.

JOCKEY PUMPSETS (The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all equipment, etc offered by the Contractor) Particulars Pumps Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Model No. Materials Casing Shaft Impeller Type of Bearings Nominal Characteristics Flow rate (l/min.) Discharge head (bar) KW Efficiency Pump RPM Type of shaft seal Motors Manufacturer Country of Origin Type & Model KW RPM Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz) Full Load Current (A) Max. Starting Current (A) Type of Drive/Coupling Vibration Isolators Manufacturer Make/Type/Model Static Deflection (mm) Total Operating Wt of Pumpsets (kg)


Jockey Pump

APPENDIX A29 Page 4

3.

PIPEWORK (N.B. ONLY ONE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE INDICATED) Ductile Iron Pipe

Steel Pipes to BS 3601

Material of Valve Body

Material of Valve

Other Information

Water Level Gauges

NA

NA

Water Motor Alarms c/w alarm gongs and water turbines

NA

NA

Fire Brigade Breeching Inlet

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

Particulars

Black Steel Pipe

Galvanized Steel Pipe

Stainless Steel Pipe

Manufacturer Local Supplier Country of Origin Grade (Thickness) BS Specification Manufacturer of Pipe Fittings

4.

VALVES, GAUGES & PIPE FITTINGS Particulars

Make

Type

Model

Isolating Gate Valves Alarm Valves Non-return Valves Strainers Drain Cocks Gauge Cocks Combined Drain & Test Valves Automatic Air Vents Anti-Vibration Couplings Ball Float Valves Pressure Gauges Globe Valve Pressure Relief Valve Vortex Inhibitor


APPENDIX A29 Page 5

5.

CONTROL PANELS

Particulars

Manufacturer

Wet Rising Main Pump Control Panel Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control Panel Jockey Pump Control Panel

6.

D.C. POWER SUPPLY UNITS Manufacturer Country of Origin Type/List No./Model Output Voltage Per Cell

Volt

No. of Cell Operating Voltage

Volt

Ampere Hour for 10-hour Rating

AH

Dimension

mm

Battery Chargers Manufacturer Country of Origin Type/List No. Output Voltage Range

Volt

Charging Rate - Normal

Amp

- Maximum


Amp

Country of Origin

Local Supplier

APPENDIX A29 Page 6

7.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN CONTROL PANELS

Particulars

Make

Type

Model

Rated Voltage

Other Information

Contactors Ammeters Voltmeters Push Buttons Key Switches Selector Switches MCB Timers Relays Indicating Lamps (transformer operated) Terminal Boards Anti-Condensation Heaters Current Transformers HRC Fuses Isolating Switches MCCB Earth Leakage Relay

8.

ELECTRICAL WIRING & ACCESSORIES Particulars PVC Cable & Jointing Accessories Conduit & Accessories Cable Trunking & Accessories Cable Tray & Accessories Floatless Level Control Relay Unit


Manufacturer

Country of Origin

Local Agent

APPENDIX A29 Page 7

9.

10.

11.

PIPE SPRING HANGER Make, Type & Model

___________________

Size (mm)

___________________

Rated Capacity (kg)

___________________

Rated Static Deflection (mm)

___________________

Material of Spring

___________________

Spring Constant (kg/m)

___________________

FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR Make, Type & Model

___________________

Material

___________________

Maximum Working Pressure/Temperature

___________________

Maximum Vacuum (mm Hg)

___________________

Minimum burst pressure (Kpa)

___________________

Allowable elongation/compression/transverse movement (mm)

___________________

Allowable Angular Movement

___________________

DIRECT READING WATER FLOW METER Make/Type/Model

___________________

Operation water flow range (1/min)

___________________

Accuracy (%)

___________________

____________________________________ Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor

Date :


APPENDIX A30 Page 1

TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM Clause 44.5 "Test On Rising Main System"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser system.

Contract Title :

Contract No. :

Block No. :

Ref No :

Location :

Contractor :

Building Data Suction Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M

Transfer Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M

Total Head :

(m)

Total Head :

(m)

Required pumping capacity :

(l/s)

Required pumping capacity :

(l/s)

Motor Data

Jockey Pump 1

Fire Pump 1

Fire Pump 2

Transfer Pump 1

Transfer Pump 2

Jockey Pump 1

Fire Pump 1

Fire Pump 2

Transfer Pump 1

Transfer Pump 2

Brand Type (FM,UL,LPC or other acceptable by FSSD) Model Serial No. Rated Output (KW) Volt/Phase/Frequency Insulation Class/Speed (RPM) Rated Current (A)

Pump Data Brand Model Type (FM,UL,LPC or other acceptable by FSSD) Serial No. Impeller Diameter (mm) Specified capacity (l/s)


APPENDIX A30 Page 2

TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM Clause 44.5 "Testing on Rising Main System"


Control Panel Data Starter

Brand

Starter Change over

Starter MCB

Overload Protector

Fitting Coupling

Rubber expansion joint

Gate valve

Check valve

Flow switch Flow meter Motorize valve Pressure gauge Pressure switch


11-Pin Relay

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Type

Brand

8-Pin Relay

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Latching Relay

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Time Switch

Brand

Model

Model

Setting

Type

Size

Brand

Type

APPENDIX A30 Page 3

TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM Clause 44.5 "Testing on Rising Main System"


Fitting

Size

Brand

Type

Limit switch Landing valve Breeching Inlet

Recorded & Submitted by :

________________________ (Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature)/Date ___________________________________________________________________________________________

FOR OFFICIAL USE Motor

Jockey Pump

Fire Pump 1

Fire Pump 2

Transfer Pump 1

Transfer Pump 2

Jockey Pump

Fire Pump 1

Fire Pump 2

Transfer Pump 1

Transfer Pump 2

Starting/Changeover Current (A) Running Current (A)

R Y B

Pump Approximate Capacity (l/s)

Tested by

:

__________________________________ 1) HTO / TO ( ) Date 2) HTO / TO ( )

Checked & Verified by

:

__________________________________


APPENDIX A31

BI-YEARLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON DOWN-COMER / DRYRISER SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main"

To :

Head (

Branch Office )


Contract Title : ____________________________

Block No. :

Location : ________________________________ Items

Checked

Remedial Action / Date

1. Hydrostatic pressure test for 2 hours* 2. Check and inspect all landing valves condition (open and shut position) 3. Check landing valve handle secure with strapper and cap in position 4. Check earthing terminal connection 5. Check Breeching inlets condition 6. Additional requirements from FSSD

Other Comments

# √ X * +

: : : : :

Delete as necessary Check and found in order To rectify immediately Reading by measuring instrument Test to be done Yearly

Signature : _____________________________________ Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :

/_____

Name of Contractor : _____________________________ Acknowledge By : ________________________________ HHMI/HMI ( ) Date


APPENDIX A32 Page 1

MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD Clause 44.7 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Wet Rising Main System"

To :

Head (

Branch Office )


Contract Title : __________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room Location (s) : _________________________ Items

Remedial Action/Date

Checked

Monthly/Quaterly 1.


2.


3.

Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position

4

Power supply selector switch in "On" position

5.


6.

Alarm bell and bulb

7.

Contractors and Relays

8.

Check and tighten control panel wiring +

9.

Suction Tank electrode and control module

10. (i)

Transfer Pumpset 1

Transfer Pump Rated current :

A

Motor Output :

KW

R

A

A

Y

A

A

B

A

A

Fire Pumpset 1

Fire Pumpset 2

R

A

A

Y

A

A

A

A

(ii) Fire Pump Rated current :

A

Motor Output :

KW

B Jockey Pumpset 1

(iii) Jockey Pump Rated current :

A

Motor Output :

KW

11. Pump Running Pressure

Transfer Pumpset 2

R

A

Y

A

B

A Pumpset 1

Pumpset 2

Transfer Pump

(bar)

(bar)

Fire pump

(bar)

(bar)

Jockey Pump

(bar)


APPENDIX A32 Page 2

MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD Clause 44.7 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Wet Rising Main System"

Items

12. Pump / Motor Condition


Checked Jockey Pump

Fire Pumpset 1

Fire Pumpset 2

Transfer Pumpset 1

Transfer Pumpset 2

Motor insulation test + Motor Running condition Pump mechanical seal Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable) 13. Alignment of Couplings 14. Ball Float Valve condition

Tank 1

Tank 2

Transfer tank Fire tank 15. 100mm Check Valve 16. 100mm Gate Valve 17. 150mm Check Valve 18. 150mm Gate Valve 19. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe + 20. Check and inspect all landing valves condition + 21. Check Breeching inlets condition 22. Update Log Book 23. Additional requirements from FSSD

Other Comments :

# √ X * +

: : : : :

Delete as necessary Check and found in order To rectify immediately Reading by measuring instrument Test to be done quarterly

Signature : _____________________________________ Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :

/______

Name of Contractor : _____________________________ Acknowledge By : ________________________________ HHMI/HMI ( ) Date


APPENDIX A33 Page 1

LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA

The Contractor shall provide all technical data as set out below. The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specifications. The requirements of the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible. 1.

2.

HOSE REEL BOOSTER PUMP Make

__________________________________________________

Country of origin

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________________

No. of units

__________________________________________________

Casing material

__________________________________________________

Impeller material

__________________________________________________

Shaft material

__________________________________________________

Flow rate

__________________________________________________

Head

__________________________________________________

Speed (r.p.m.)

__________________________________________________

Impeller diameter

__________________________________________________

Motor rated output

__________________________________________________

Motor make, type and model

__________________________________________________


__________________________________________________

Motor insulation class

__________________________________________________

Line current at full load

__________________________________________________

MOTOR STATER Make, type and model

__________________________________________________

Rating

__________________________________________________

Overload release rating

__________________________________________________ Approx. KW rating ________KW at _______V _______Ph

Voltage/Phase

3.

__________________________________________________

FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT Make

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________________


APPENDIX A33 Page 2

LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA 4.

5.

PRESSURE TANK Country of origin

__________________________________________________

Make

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Model

__________________________________________________

Capacity

__________________________________________________

Operating pressure

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure

__________________________________________________

Casing material

__________________________________________________

Diaphragm material

__________________________________________________

Internal coating material

__________________________________________________

RUBBER HOSE Make

6.

7.

8.

__________________________________________________

Type

__________________________________________________

Material

__________________________________________________

Diameter (internal)

__________________________________________________

Length

__________________________________________________

Working pressure

__________________________________________________

PRESSURE GAUGE Make, type & model

__________________________________________________

Range (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Material in contact with water

__________________________________________________


__________________________________________________

PRESSURE SWITCH Make, type & model

__________________________________________________

Range (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Upper limit (Bar)

__________________________________________________


__________________________________________________


__________________________________________________

Voltage/Frequency

__________________________________________________

FLOW SWITCH Make, type, model

__________________________________________________

Rang (L/s)

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure (bar)

__________________________________________________


__________________________________________________

Enclosure protection

__________________________________________________

Voltage/frequency

__________________________________________________


APPENDIX A33 Page 3

LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA 9.

10.

SOLENOID VALVE Make, type & model

__________________________________________________

Body material

__________________________________________________

Valve seat material

__________________________________________________

Stem material

__________________________________________________

Maximum working pressure

__________________________________________________

Test pressure (Bar)

__________________________________________________

Uv value (MH/Bar)

__________________________________________________

MISCELLANEOUS Make

Type

Model

a.

Gate valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

b.

Check valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

c.

Strainer

_______________

_______________

_______________

d.

Floatless level control relay unit

_______________

_______________

_______________

e.

Globe valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

f.

Selector switch

_______________

_______________

_______________

g.

Automatic changeover relay

_______________

_______________

_______________

h.

Time switch

_______________

_______________

_______________

i.

Automatic air vent

_______________

_______________

_______________

j.

Ball float valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

k.

Shut-off nozzle

_______________

_______________

_______________

l.

Flexible coupling

_______________

_______________

_______________

m. Pipe spring hanger

_______________

_______________

_______________

n.

Ball stop valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

o.

Alarm bell

_______________

_______________

_______________

p.

Auxiliary relay

_______________

_______________

_______________

q.

Pressure relief valve

_______________

_______________

_______________

r.

Indicator lamp

_______________

_______________

_______________

s.

Pipe

_______________

_______________

_______________

_______________________________________ Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor/s

Date : __________________


APPENDIX A34 Page 1

TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM Clause 45.5 "Testing And Commissioning"

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel system.

Contract Name :

Contract No :

Block No. :

Ref No. :

Location :

Contractor :

Building Data Suction Tank size :

M

Suction Tank size :

M

Total Head :

(m)

Required pumping capacity

(l/s)

Hose Reel Hose Reel Motor 1 Motor 2

Motor Data

Hose Reel Hose Reel Pump 1 Pump 2

Pump Data

Brand

Brand

Type (FM, UL, LPC or other acceptable by FSSD)

Type (FM, UL, LPC or other acceptable by FSSD)

Model

Model

Serial No.

Serial No.

Rated Output (KW)

Impeller Diameter (mm)

Volt/Phase/Frequency

Specified capacity (l/s)

Insulation Class/Speed (rpm) Rated Current (A)

Control Panel Data Brand Starter

Floatless level control Relay

Starter MCB


Model

Brand 11-Pin Relay

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Brand

Model

8-Pin Relay

Model

Type

Type

Brand

Brand

Model

Model

Type

Latching Relay

Type

Model

Model

Setting

Type

APPENDIX A34 Page 2



Fitting

Size

Brand

Type

Coupling

Rubber expansion joint Gate valve

Check valve

Flow switch Flow meter Solenoid valve Pressure gauge Pressure switch Limit switch Pressure tank 1 Pressure tank 2 Rubber hose reel



________________________ (Signature)/Date

APPENDIX A34 Page 3



_____________________________________________________________________________________________

FOR OFFICIAL USE

Motor

Hose Reel Pump 1

Hose Reel Pump 1

Hose Reel Pump 1

Hose Reel Pump 1

Starting/Changeover Current (A) Running Current (A)

R Y B

Pump Approximate Capacity (l/s)

Tested by

:

_________________________________ 1) HTO / TO ( ) Date 2) HTO / TO ( )

Checked & Verified by

:

_________________________________ DEng ( ) Date


APPENDIX A35

MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON HOSE REEL PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD Clause 45.6.4 "Servicing And Maintenance Schedule" To :

Head (

Branch Office )


Contract Title : __________________________________

Block No. :

Pump Room Location : ___________________________ Items


Checked

Monthly

# √ X *

1


2


3

Auto/Manual Selector Switch in "Auto" Position

4

Power Supply Selector Switch in "on" Position

5

Control Panel indicating Lights

6

Alarm Bell and Bulb

7

Suction Tank Electrode and Control Module

8


Pumpset 1

Rated Current :

A

Motor Output

KW

:

9

Check Valves

10

Gate Valves

11

Ball Float Valves

12

Motor Insulation (Megaohms)

13

Pump Mechanical Seal

14

Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)

15

Contactors and Relays

16

Hose Reel

17

Pressure and Flow Switches

18

Update Log Book

: Delete as necessary : Check and found in order : To rectify immediately : Reading by measuring instrument

Pumpset 2

R

*

A

*

A

Y

*

A

*

A

B

*

A

*

A

*

*

Signature : _____________________________________ Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : _______________ Name of Contractor : _____________________________ Acknowledge By : ________________________________ HHMI/HMI ( ) Date


APPENDIX A36

LIST OF RELEVANT BRITISH STANDARDS APPLICABLE TO ELECTRICAL WORKS

Current issues of appropriate British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice with particular reference to this project for electrical works are :

BS 10

-

Flanges and Bolting for Pipes, Valves and Fittings

BS 37

-

Electricity meters

BS 81

-

Instrument Transformers

BS 88

-

Electric Fuses

BS 89

-

Electric Indicating Instruments

BS 142

-

Electrical Protection Relays

BS 162

-

Electrical Power Switch Gear and Associated Apparatus

BS 170

-

The Electrical Performance of Fractional Horsepower Electric Motors and Generators

BS 587

-

Motor Starters and Controllers

BS 636

-

Covered Electrodes for the Manual Arc Welding of Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel

BS 729

-

Zinc Coating on Iron and Steel Articles

BS 77

-

Contactors

BS 848

-

Methods of Testing Fans for General Purposes

BS 861

-

Air Break Switches and Isolators

BS 1856

-

General Requirements for the Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel

BS 2004

-

PVC Insulated Cables and Flexible Cords

BS 2613

-

The Electrical Performance of Rotating Electrical Machinery

BS 2757

-

Classification of Insulating Materials

BS 3078

-

Isolators for Alternating Current System

BS 3601

-

Steel Pipes and Tubes for Pressure Purposes

BS 6207

-

Mineral Insulated Cables

BS 6346

-

PVC Insulated Cables for Electricity Supply


APPENDIX A37

SCHEDULE OF RECOMMENDED GAUGES FOR RECTANGULAR DUCT CONSTRUCTION

Dimension of Longest Side of Duct

Steel Metal Gauges

Reinforcement

Thru 250

26

Flat drive slip at 1500 centres

251 thru 300

26


301 thru 350

24


351 thru 450

24


451 thru 500

26


501 thru 650

22

25 x 25 x 2 Steel Angle at 2400 centres

651 thru 750

20


751 thru 900

18


901 thru 1200

16


1201 thru 1350

18


1351 thru 1500

18



APPENDIX A38

MONTHLY/ANNUAL TEST REPORT {Pursuant to subclause 63.12.1.1(C)} MAINTENANCE OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Location :

Time :

_______________________

Type of Test : Monthly/Annual*

Date :

_______________________

Alarm Zone Test Thermal

Isolation In-situ Test

Smoke

Isolation In-situ

Detectors+

Test Flame

Isolation In-situ Test

Manual Call Point

Isolation In-situ

Main Supply Charger+ And Batteries

Operative

Non-Operative

Remarks

Battery Charger Emergency Lamp On

Alarm Monitoring Station

Alarm Transmitter Alarm Sounder

Alarm+ And Ancillary

Ancillary Controls Fault Buzzer

Remarks :

I hereby certify that the above tests have been carried out Tester's Name ___________________________ Signature _______________________________ Witnessed By ____________________________

________________________________________

Signature _______________________________

* Delete if unapplicable. + Tick if satisfactory; put asterisk '*' if unsatisfactory and give explanation under the remarks space.


APPENDIX A39 Page 1

MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM - PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Location of Shelter Estate

:

______________________________________

Block

:

______________________________________

Address

:

______________________________________

Shelter Type

:

______________________________________

Date & Time of Test

:

______________________________________

Ventilation Fan Description

Observation

Remarks

1. To check the size of anchors 2. Fan base to be mounted properly 3. To check the fan could be rotated by hand smoothly 4. Flexible connection to be installed properly 5. Power cable to be connected properly

Ductwork Description 1. To check the size of expansion bolts of ductwork support 2. To check on size and rigidity of support 3. To check on the interval of support 4. To check the joint connection of ductwork 5. To check on proper installation of flexible connection 6. To damper is installed in correct position 7. To check damper is installed rigidly


Design

Actual

Observation

Remarks

APPENDIX A39 Page 2

MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM - PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Ductwork (Cont'd) Description

Design

Actual

Observation

Remarks

8. To check firm sealing around the damper 9. To ensure damper blade is not damaged and operate smoothly

Remarks :

______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________

Tested by

:

Date :

________________

Date :

________________

CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND SIGNATURE

Witnessed by

: HDB PROJECT OFFICER'S NAME AND SIGNATURE


APPENDIX A40

ANCHOR TORQUE TEST FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM

Location and Shelter Estate

:

____________________________________________

Block

:

____________________________________________

Address

:

____________________________________________

Date & Time of Test

:

____________________________________________

S/No

Tested by

Item Tested

Design Torque

:

Actual Torque

Remarks

Date :

_______________

Date :

_______________

CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND SIGNATURE

Witnessed by

: HDB PROJECT OFFICER'S NAME AND SIGNATURE

Note: Please attach layout of points tested.


APPENDIX A41

VENTILATION FAN COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Location of Shelter Estate

:

___________________________________

Block

:

___________________________________

Address

:

___________________________________

Date & Time of Test

:

___________________________________

Plant/Equipment Make/Model

:

___________________________________

Plant/Equipment Serial No.

:

___________________________________

Plant/Equipment Year of Manufacture

:

___________________________________

Test

Design

Actual

Remarks

Air flow (CMH) Fan static pressure (Pa) Fan motor starting amperes Fan motor running amperes Fan motor operating kW Fan motor operating voltage Fan motor speed (rpm) Noise level (dBA) (at 1m distance) Efficiency Condition of ductwork Vibration isolator Flexible connection Supports

Tested By

:

Approved By

:

__________________________

Signature

:

Signature

:

__________________________

Name of Contractor

:

Name of HDB Project Officer

:

__________________________

Date

:

Date

:

__________________________


APPENDIX A42 Page 1

SCHEDULE "A" SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specification. The requirements of the Specification shall be regarded as minimum and should any material or Plant and equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specification shall prevail. Catalogues shall be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible. All entries shall be typewritten. Item

Description

1.

DUCTWORK

(a)

Round Ducting Type Make Country of Origin Standard Material

(b)

Acoustical Insulation Type Make Country of Origin Material Density

(c)

Diffusers Make/Model Type Material Finish

(d)

Grilles Make/Model Type Material Finish

(e)

Flexible Duct Connection Make/Model Size Material


Particulars

APPENDIX A42 Page 2


Item

Description

2.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW SUPPLY AIR FAN

(a)

Fan Make/Brand Type Model Air Flow (CMH) Static Pressure (Pa) Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees) Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length) (mm x mm) Operating Weight (kg) Fan Speed (rpm) Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB) Blade Material Casing Material Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (°C)

(b)

Fan Motor Make/Brand Type Model Input Power (kW) Speed (rpm) Enclosure Protection Class Class of Insulation Rating Lock Rotor Current (Amp) Full Load Current (Amp) Voltage (volt) Frequency (Hz)

(c)

Motor Starter Make/Brand Type


Particulars Axial Flow

APPENDIX A42 Page 3


Item

Description

2.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW SUPPLY AIR FAN (CONT'D)

(d)

Vibration Isolator Make/Brand Type Material Isolation Efficiency (%) Rated Capacity (kg) Rated Deflection (mm)

(e)

Sound Attenuators Make/Brand Type Air Qty (CMH) Pressure Drop (Pa) L x W x H (mm x mm x mm) Insertion Loss - dB Octave band frequency 63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz

(f)

Motor Starter Make Type Air Qty (CMH) L x W x D (mm x mm x mm) Material Efficiency (%) Initial air resistance (Pa) Final air resistance (Pa)



APPENDIX A42 Page 4


Item

Description

3.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW EXHAUST AIR FAN

(a)

Fan Make/Brand Type Model Air Flow (CMH) Static Pressure (Pa) Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees) Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length) (mm x mm) Operating Weight (kg) Fan Speed (rpm) Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB) Blade Material Casing Material Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (°C)

(b)

Fan Motor Make/Brand Type Model Input Power (kW) Speed (rpm) Enclosure Protection Class Class of Insulation Rating Lock Rotor Current (Amp) Full Load Current (Amp) Voltage (volt) Frequency (Hz)

(c)

Motor Starter Make/Brand Type



APPENDIX A42 Page 5


Item

Description

3.

AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW EXHAUST AIR FAN (CONT'D)

(d)

Vibration Isolator


Make/Brand Type Material Isolation Efficiency (%) Rated Capacity (kg) Rated Deflection (mm) (e)

Sound Attenuators Make/Brand Type Air Qty (CMH) Pressure Drop (Pa) L x W x H (mm x mm x mm) Insertion Loss - dB Octave band frequency 63 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz

________________________________ Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor

Date : _________________


APPENDIX A43 Page 1


ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT FOR COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

STAMP if stamp duties required

COMPREHENSIVE

MAINTENANCE

BLOCKS _____

THIS AGREEMENT is made the

AGREEMENT

FOR

REFUSE

HANDLING

AT

PLANT

TO .

day of

20

between THE

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD (hereinafter called the "Owner") and ______________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context so admits includes his legal personal representatives and permitted assigns.

WHEREAS :

(1)

__________________________________________________________________________________ (Name and Address of Contractor)

(hereinafter called the Contractor") is the contractor of the Owner in respect of the Works described as _____________ (Contract No.

Neighbourhood

Contract ______________

) (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract").

(2)

The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under the Contract with the consent of the Owner given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

The Owner is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine or vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the "Plant").

(4)

Pursuant to Clause of of the Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.


APPENDIX A43 Page 2

In consideration of the premises and of the Owner giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :

1.

SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION

1.1

The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to maintain the Plant herein specified.

1.2

In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.

2.

OWNER'S OBLIGATION The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant, the Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.

3.

TYPE OF AGREEMENT This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.

4.

PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rate contained in this Agreement shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately mentioned or described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to completion of the works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties before execution and completion.

5.

CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT Any person, firm, corporation or organization who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no rights whatsoever under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act.

6.

DOCUMENTS The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement viz : (a)

These Articles of Agreement;

(b)

The Contractor's Offer to the Owner dated

(c)

The Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;

(d)

The Drawings as listed in the Schedule thereto;

(e)

All Amendment/Addendum Letters issued by the Owner;

(f)

The Owner's Letter of Acceptance dated accepting the said Contractor's Offer (including any correspondences referred to in the said Letter of Acceptance).


in respect of the Contract;

APPENDIX A43 Page 3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.

Signed by , for and on behalf of the Housing & Development Board in the presence of :

Signed by for and on behalf of the Specialist in the presence of :


) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

______________________________

______________________________

______________________________

______________________________


ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT FOR COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

STAMP if stamp duties required

COMPREHENSIVE

MAINTENANCE

BLOCKS _____

AGREEMENT

FOR

REFUSE

AT

THIS AGREEMENT is made the

PLANT

TO .

__

day of

20

________________________________________ _

HANDLING

_

between the

(hereinafter called the "Owner") and

(hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context

so admits includes his legal personal representatives and permitted assigns.

WHEREAS :

(1)

_____________________________________________________________________________________ (Name and Address of Contractor)

(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the "HDB") in respect of the Works described as Contract

(Contract No.

Neighbourhood _____ ) (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract").

(2)

The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under the Contract with the consent of the HDB given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.

(3)

The HDB is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine or vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the "Plant").

(4)

Pursuant to Clause of of the Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.

(5)

The Owner has now taken over the management and maintenance of the Plant from the HDB and pursuant to Clause of the of the Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to execute this Agreement with the Owner.



In consideration of the premises and of the HDB giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and the Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :

1.

SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION

1.1

The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to maintain the Plant herein specified.

1.2

In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.

2.

OWNER'S OBLIGATION The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant, the Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this Agreement.

3.

TYPE OF AGREEMENT This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.

4.

PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rates contained in this Agreement shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately or specifically mentioned or described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to completion of the works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties before execution and completion.

5.

CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT Any person, firm, corporation or organization who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no rights whatsoever under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act.

5.

DOCUMENTS

5.1

The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement viz :

5.2

(a)

These Articles of Agreement;

(b)

The Contractor's Offer to the HDB dated

(c)

The Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;

(d)

The Drawings as listed in the Schedule thereto;

(e)

All Amendment/Addendum Letters issued by the HDB;

(f)

The HDB Letter of Acceptance dated accepting the said Contractor's Offer (including any correspondences referred to in the said Letter of Acceptance).

in respect of the Contract;

All references to the Board or Employer in the aforesaid documents shall be deemed to refer to the Owner and shall be read and construed as such.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.

Signed by for and on behalf of the ______________________________ Town Council in the presence of :

Signed by for and on behalf of the Specialist in the presence of :


) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

APPENDIX A44 Page 1


CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1.

(1)

In the Agreement (as hereinafter defined) the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires : (a)

"Agreement"

:

means the documents identified as forming the Contract Documents in the Articles of Agreement and all such documents together shall be deemed to form the Agreement.

(b)

"Owner"

:

means the Housing & Development Board, Republic of Singapore, or such Town Council(s) as named in the Articles of Agreement.

(c)

"Specialist"

:

means the person or firm or corporation who is maintaining the Plant and includes the Specialist's legal personal representatives and permitted assigns.

(d)

"Works"

:

means the maintenance works, together with necessary temporary works, described in the Agreement, including all Variations.

(e)

"Plant"

:

means the system or equipment or machine or vehicles, etc described in the Agreement.

(f)

"Contract Rate"

:

means the rate named in the Articles of Agreement.

Definitions

1.

(2)

Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice-versa where the context requires.

Singular and Plural

1.

(3)

The headings and marginal notes in these Conditions shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Agreement.

Headings and Marginal Notes

SCOPE OF WORK

2.

The Specialist shall provide and supply all labour, materials, tools, transport and everything necessary or incidental in so far as they are specified or can be reasonably inferred, for the maintenance of the Plant as listed in Schedule A, and for any call-back service mentioned in Clause 5 herein.


Scope of Works

APPENDIX A44 Page 2

SCOPE OF WORK (CONT'D)

2.

Cont'd Maintenance shall include all items and frequencies of works as listed in Schedule B. The Specialist's obligations shall include any other repair and/or replacement to the Plant or overhaul to the Plant if deemed necessary. The costs of any repair and/or replacement or overhauling including the costs of spare parts and consumables shall be deemed to be included in the monthly maintenance fee. The Specialist shall not use as replacements, any parts which are not original or parts which have not been approved by the Manufacturer of the Plant unless he has the prior consent of the Owner.

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK

3.

The Agreement shall remain in full force and effect for a period stated in the Appendix. Unless either party hereto shall three months prior to the expiration hereof have notified the other party hereto in writing to the contrary then this Agreement shall thereafter continue and remain in full force and effect which can then be terminated by either party hereto giving three month's written notice to the other party hereto to that effect.

Commencement and Duration of Agreement

4.

The Specialist shall provide the Owner a work programme covering routine maintenance, repairs and/or replacements, and major overhaul if applicable, in a form acceptable to the Owner for his agreement. The commencement dates and times for the Works have to be specified and the Specialist shall adhere strictly to the works programme approved by the Owner. The Specialist shall seek the prior approval of the Owner on any amendment to the work programme.

Work Programme

The proposed work programme shall be submitted to the Owner for approval at least 14 (fourteen) days in advance. If required, the Specialist shall submit the programme directly to designated offices as directed by the Owner from time to time.

5.

Call-out Time/Service Time

5.

(1)


The call-out time is the period of time provided in Clause 6 herein and is the time period allowed within which the Specialist's suitably qualified maintenance personnel are required to arrive at the site and start work from the time the fault condition has been reported to the Specialist by any means such as pager, telephone, telex, facsimile, mail, agent or other means of communication.

Call-out-Time

APPENDIX A44 Page 3

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D) 5.

Call-out Time/Service Time (Cont'd)

5.

(2)

The Specialist shall add no additional cost to the Owner in carrying out the necessary repairs and/or replacements to the Plant installed under this Agreement within the number of hours stated in the Appendix or such further extended time as deemed necessary by the Owner, such time known as service time to commence at the time within call-out time the suitably qualified maintenance personnel of the Specialist arrived at the site.

Service Time

Should the Specialist fail to attend within the call-out time, the Owner reserves the right to appoint other party or parties to execute such works and all costs incurred shall be recovered by the Owner from the Specialist by deduction(s) from any money due or that shall become due to the Specialist, or payable direct from the Specialist as a debt due to the Owner PROVIDED that and without prejudice to any other remedies for breach contained in this Agreement the Owner shall in addition to recover under this paragraph whatsoever that may result as a consequence of the Owner having to resort to the provisions of this paragraph. The Specialist shall be equipped with a telephone pager. Should the Specialist fail to respond within one hour after being paged it shall be deemed that the Specialist has failed to make himself available in which case the paragraph above shall apply.

6.

Call-out time for attending to breakdown of the Plant shall not exceed the time stated in the Appendix. Agreed damages stated in the Appendix shall be imposed should the call-out time be exceeded or in the event the Specialist fails to rectify the breakdown within the service time stated in the Appendix or such further extended time deemed necessary by the Owner.

Agreed damages for failure to respond within callout time/to rectify breakdown within service time

Normal office hours are taken to be between 8.00 am and 5.30 pm from Monday to Friday and between 8.00 am and 1.00 pm on Saturday. The provisions of this paragraph shall apply notwithstanding that the Specialist shall also be liable under Clause 5(2) herein. In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for breach of contract as the Owner can prove arise from the Specialist's failure to carry out his obligations herein.

7.

The Specialist shall submit to the Owner a monthly report in such form as may be approved by the Owner containing details of the periodic inspections and servicings including all repairs and/or replacements executed by him. The monthly report shall include a log showing the time when a report of a fault is received and the time when repair and/or replacement commences. The Specialist shall record the nature of the fault and the actual time taken for the necessary repairs and/or replacements. These records shall be signed by the Owner and the Specialist shall submit these records to the Owner within the first week of the following month.


Service Report

APPENDIX A44 Page 4

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D)

8.

9.

(1)

Any replacement of any item or any repair to any breakdown of the Plant shall only be carried out by the Specialist with the consent of the Owner.

Replacement and Repairs

(2)

The Specialist shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Rate all the necessary cost incurred in providing temporary and similar substitute Plant for the Owner's use at premises designed by the Owner during the period of repair and/or replacement, so as to enable the Owner to continue working/operations without any disruption or stoppage.

*Substitute Plant

Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist shall deposit free of interest with the Owner the sum stipulated in the Appendix to be held by the Owner as security for due performance by the Specialist of each and every liability and obligation owing by the Specialist to the Owner, whether of a contractual or tortious nature and whether arising under the Agreement or otherwise, such sum to be retained or otherwise properly dealt with by the Owner. The said sum or the recoverable balance thereof shall be returned to the Specialist upon completion of the whole of the Works.

Security Deposit

Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist may in lieu of the deposit as required under this Clause provided the Owner with a Security Bond for an equivalent sum drawn in the form approved by the Owner and issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner. The quantum of this Security Deposit/Bond shall be a percentage (stipulated in the Appendix) of the product of the Contract Rate multiplied by the period of this Agreement as stated in Clause 3 herein.

10.

The Specialist shall bear all stamp fees and other necessary charges, in respect of this Agreement and any other document whatsoever to be executed hereunder.

Specialist to pay all stamp fees

11.

It is hereby agreed that the Owner shall be at liberty without notice to the Specialist to assign the full benefits of this Agreement to such person body or corporation as may in any manner howsoever be entrusted with the responsibilities of the duties of the Owner in respect of the Works.

Owner's right to assign

12.

The Specialist shall not assign the Agreement or any part thereof or any benefit or interest therein without the prior written consent of the Owner.

Assignment or Sub-lettering

The Specialist shall not make arrangements for the vicarious performance of any of his duties or functions under the Agreement by any other party, nor shall any receiver or liquidator of the Specialist be entitled to carry out such duties or functions.


APPENDIX A44 Page 5

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D)

12.

Cont'd The Specialist shall not sub-let the whole of the Works. Except where otherwise provided in the Agreement, the Specialist shall not sub-let any part of the Works without the prior written consent of the Owner and such consent if given shall not relieve the Specialist of any of his liabilities or obligations under the Agreement and he shall be responsible for the acts defaults and neglects of his sub-contractors their agents servants and workmen as fully as if they were his own acts defaults or neglects.

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST

13.

The Specialist is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his agents, servants and workmen, and of his sub-contractors, their agents, servants and workmen employed on the Works for the purposes of this Agreement.

Behaviour of Workmen

The Specialist shall use or employ in and about the maintenance of the Plant only such persons as are careful skilled and experienced in their several skills, trades and callings and the Owner shall be at liberty to object to and require the Specialist to remove immediately from the Owner's premises any such person employed by the Specialist in or about the maintenance of the Plant who in the opinion of the Owner misconduct himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his duties or whose continued presence is undesirable or unacceptable and such opinion shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Specialist. Such persons shall not be again used or employed upon the Owner's premises without the prior written permission of the Owner. Any person so removed shall wherever necessary, be promptly replaced by a competent substitute. The Specialist shall ensure that all workmen employed are able to produce proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted to premises occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.

14.

The Specialist shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on the Works and produce them for inspection by the Owner. These records shall include the following information : (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Name of Workmen (and alias if any Identity Card No./Passport No. Address Work Permit No., if any Safety Course Orientation Certificate, if any.

This information must be recorded before any workmen is allowed to commence duty.


Keeping Records of Workmen

APPENDIX A44 Page 6

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST (CONT'D)

15.

The Specialist shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement of all workmen. Work Permits from Ministry of Labour must be obtained from these workmen. The Specialist shall be held solely liable for and shall indemnify the Owner in respect of all actions against the Owner for employing foreign workmen without the required permits.

Labour Laws

The Specialist shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays in accordance with all Acts of Parliament Regulations Bye-Laws rules or regulations.

16.

Subject to any provision to the contrary contained in the Agreement, none of the Works shall, save as hereinafter provided, be carried out during the night or on Sundays or on public holidays without the permission in writing of the Owner except when such work is unavoidable or necessary for the saving of life or property or for the safety of the Works in which case the Contractor shall immediately inform the Owner.

No Night Sunday or Public Holiday Work

For the purposes of this Clause, the term "night" shall mean the period from 5.30 pm to 8.00 am. The Owner reserves the right to require urgent repairs and/or replacement work to be carried out during the night or on Sundays or on public holidays. The Specialist is deemed to have provided for such services in the Contract Rate.

17.

The Specialist shall ensure that no illegal immigrant is employed him and/or any sub-contractor in the execution of the Works. The Owner shall not be responsible for such act or acts by the Specialist and/or any of his subcontractors and the Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all consequences arising thereof.

Employment of Illegal Immigrants

For the purpose of this Clause "illegal immigrant" means any person who has entered into the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or reenactment thereof.

18.

The Specialist shall give all notices and pay all fees required to be given or paid by any Act of Parliament Regulation or Bye-law in relation to the execution of the Works and by the rules or regulations of any local or statutory authorities, public bodies or companies whose property or rights may be affected in any way by the Works. The Specialist shall ascertain and conform in all respects with the provisions of any Act of Parliament Regulation and Bye-law that may apply to the Works and with any rules or regulations of the said local or statutory authorities public bodies or companies and shall keep the Owner fully indemnified against penalties and liabilities of every kind arising from the breach of such Acts Regulations Bye-laws rules or regulations.


Compliance with rules and Regulations

APPENDIX A44 Page 7


19.

The Specialist shall give or provide all necessary superintendence during the execution of the Works and as long thereafter as the Owner may consider necessary.

Specialist's Superintendence

The Specialist shall ensure that he is at all times represented on the Works by a competent and authorised agent who shall be deemed to be approved by the Owner provided such agent is not expressly objected to by the Owner in writing within 14 days from the serving of a notice in writing upon the Owner by the Specialist of the appointment of such agent. Such agent shall be on the Works when the Specialist is executing works to supervise the Works. The Owner shall have the authority to withdraw his approval of the authorised agent at any time. If such approval shall be withdrawn the Specialist shall, after receiving notice in writing of, such withdrawal, remove the agent from the Works forthwith and shall not thereafter employ him again on the Works in any capacity and shall promptly replace him with a competent agent approved by the Owner. Such authorised agent shall be empowered to receive on behalf of the Specialist directions and instructions from the Owner. The Specialist shall ensure that his superintending personnel are able to produce proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted to premises occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.

20.

The Specialist shall comply with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and the Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations 1985, and all amendments and re-enactments thereof.

Safety

It shall be the duty of the Specialist to comply with such requirements of the Regulations as affect him or any person employed by him and as relate to any work act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Specialist shall not permit an employee to do anything which is not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practice.

21.

The Specialist shall comply with all the provisions under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) and any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof (hereinafter referred to as "the Act"). Notwithstanding any provision in this Contract to the contrary, the Owner shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or compensation under the Act in consequence of any accident or injury to any workman or other person whether in the employment of the Specialist, his servants or agents or of his sub-contractors, their servants or agents, and the Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all such claims, demands, proceedings, damages, cost, charges and expenses arising in consequence thereof.


Workmen's Compensation

APPENDIX A44 Page 8


21.

Cont'd The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in the joint names of the Specialist and the Owner a policy of insurance with an insurer and on terms approved by the Owner to cover all obligations and to meet in full the assessment of the Commissioner for Labour in respect of compensation due upon the death or injury of any workman of the Specialist, his servant or agents under the Act and in respect of compensation under Common Law. The Specialist shall deliver this insurance policy, together with the premium receipts, to the Owner before proceeding with the Works. Should the Specialist default in making such delivery upon written request made by the Owner, the Owner may then effect and maintain such insurance and deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or become due to the Specialist or recover the same as a debt due by the Specialist. If the Specialist fails to maintain and keep in force the insurance required to be effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in force such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be necessary for the purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any monies due becoming due to the Specialist or recover the same as a debt due by the Specialist. Notwithstanding the provision of the Act, the Specialist shall give notice in writing to the Owner within 10 days of the occurrence of any accident which results in death or temporary incapacity of any workman employed by him or his sub-contractor(s). If a contractor fails to report the occurrence of the accident within the stipulated time, the Owner shall impose charges according to the rates tabulated below : Charges for late reporting Date of Notification to the Owner on the occurrence of accident

Minimum Charges

Amount equal to MOM assessment but subject to a maximum charge of

More than 10 days but equal to or less than 30 days from date of accident

$200.00

$1,000.00

More than 30 days from date of accident

$200.00

$3,000.00


APPENDIX A44 Page 9

PAYMENT

22.

The Agreement is awarded on a firm price basis and the Contract Rate as accepted by the Owner shall remain firm for the duration of the Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, there shall be no change in the amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for the maintenance to the Plant.

Firm Price Contract

Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, the Contract Rate contained in the Agreement shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately or specifically mentioned or described in the Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to execution the Works described in the Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties before execution.

23.

Upon completion of maintenance, the Specialist shall submit his invoice and the relevant service chits in a form acceptable to the Owner. The service chits shall indicate the actual works performed in accordance with the scope of work specified. The Specialist shall ensure all service chits are duly signed and stamped by the Owner.

Payment

If the Plant are not in working condition for a period longer than the number of days, stated in the Appendix, in a month or such other time as may be allowed by the Owner arising from whatsoever cause, the Specialist shall not be entitled to payment for the maintenance for that month in respect of such Plant. Work done by the Specialist under this Agreement shall be payable MONTHLY upon satisfactory completion of the Works. Provided that the Specialist comply fully with the requirements stated herein he shall be paid within 30 days from the date of receipt of the Specialist's bills or invoices by the Owner. In addition the Owner shall pay to the Specialist all agreed additional costs for carrying out such other works as may from time to time be required by the Owner under Clause 27 herein. The Specialist shall claim and the Owner shall pay for such costs in accordance with the requirements under Clause 28 herein.

24.

The Specialist shall duly and punctually pay to the Owner the billed or any other expenses incurred in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc necessary for the proper execution of the Works in this Agreement. Notwithstanding this, the Owner reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or to become due to the Specialist before payment of the balance, if any, to him. In this respect, all bills and expenses incurred by the Owner shall have priority over those incurred by third parties for the benefit of the Specialist.

Payment of Owner's Bills and Expenses etc

25.

If at any time during the Agreement the Specialist is found to have claimed and was paid for more than the value of works done, the Owner reserves the right to deduct from the Specialist's subsequent payments and the sum overpaid together with interests at prevailing commercial rates.

Overclaim leading to Overpayment


APPENDIX A44 Page 10

PAYMENT (CONT'D)

26.

All damages (including agreed damages), costs, charges, expenses, debts or sums for which the Specialist is liable to the Owner under any provision of this Agreement between the Owner and the Specialist may be deducted by the Owner from monies due or becoming due to the Specialist under the Agreement, including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or bonds.

Recovery/ Deduction of Money

All damages (including agreed damages), costs, charges, expenses, debts or sums for which the Specialist is liable to the Owner under any provision of any other Agreement between the Owner and the Specialist may be deducted by the Owner from monies due or becoming due to the Specialist under the Agreement, including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or bonds.

VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS

27.

The Owner may instruct variations. No variation required by the Owner or subsequently sanctioned by him shall vitiate this Agreement.

Variations

"Variation" shall mean any change in the intention of the original Agreement and shall include any addition, omission, substitution of any work or alteration of the kind or standard of any material or good to be used in the Works, and may relate to or include work at other locations than specified in this Agreement and such variations shall be paid for under the provisions of the Clause 28 herein. A variation shall be instructed by means of a Works Order issued by the Owner to the Contractor.

28.

The value of a variation ordered shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order or priority : (a)

by measurement and valuation at the applicable rates and prices specified in the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to Tender Form, if any, or at analogous or pro-rated rates; or

(b)

if the above method is not applicable, then by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or

(c)

if none of the above two methods is applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of necessary materials or goods, labour and equipment (other than ordinary plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools, equipment and existing scaffolding, supervision, overheads and profits.

Any disagreement on rates under the provisions of this clause shall not entitle the Specialist a right to refuse to execute the variation work. The Specialist shall proceed with the variation works with due diligence The Specialist may refer the disagreement to Arbitration under Clause 36 herein.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(10) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Valuation of Variation


VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS (CONT'D)

28.

Cont'd Upon completion of the variation work to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Specialist may submit his claim for variation to the Owner. The value of the variation assessed by the Owner shall be notified to the Specialist in writing. Provided always the Owner may at any time amend the value of a variation previously issued in such manner as he may deem necessary, and any recovery shall be effected under Clause 26 herein. If the Specialist disagrees with the value assessed by the Owner, he shall submit to the Owner any objection to the value in writing within 30 days of the date of notification failing which the value of the variation as assessed by the Owner shall be final and binding and conclusive against the Specialist.

29.

If the Specialist proposes to modify the Plant or the Works in order to facilitate repair and/or replacement such that facilities or operating conditions are affected, he shall notify the Owner and obtain the consent in writing of the Owner to the proposed modifications. The Owner may agree to the modifications if it does not result in any increase in the costs of maintenance or repairs and/or replacements to the modified Plant. If consent is given the Specialist shall carry out the modifications at his own expense at such time to be specified by the Owner.

Specialist's Modification of Plant or Works

The Specialist fully agrees and accepts that as a condition to approval of the modification, any cost saving arising from the approved modifications shall be valued in accordance with Clause 28 herein and be recovered by the Owner under Clause 26 herein.

LIABILITIES FOR AND INSURANCES AGAINST INJURIES AND DAMAGES TO PROPERTY

30.

The Specialist shall be responsible for : (a)

any death of or injury to any person including those employed by the Owner;

(b)

any injury or damage to property of every kind of the Owner or of any other person or corporation; or

(c)

any damage to the Plant the subject of this Agreement

from any cause whatsoever arising directly or indirectly out of or in relation to or in connection with the Works under the Agreement. In particular and without limiting or prejudicing in any way the generality of this Clause, the liability of the Specialist under this Clause shall extend to all damages or injuries which may occur by reason of any act or omission of the Specialist his servants or agents or of his sub-contractors, their servants or agents.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(11) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Damage to Property and Injury to Persons


LIABILITIES FOR AND INSURANCES AGAINST INJURIES AND DAMAGES TO PROPERTY (CONT'D)

30.

Cont'd The Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all losses, injuries or damages in respect of the liabilities and risks described in this clause and against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges expenses arising in consequence thereof. The indemnities given by the Specialist under this Clause shall not be defeated or reduced by reason of any negligence or omission of the Owner in failing to supervise or control the Specialist's operations or methods of working, or to detect or prevent or remedy or mitigate defective Plant, or to ensure proper performance of any other obligation of the Specialist.

31.

The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in the joint names of the Specialist and the Owner until the completion of the Works, a Public Liability policy with an insurer and on terms approved by the Owner for an amount specified by the Owner against all and every liability and risk described in this Clause and shall deliver the policy and the receipt for every premium paid by the Specialist to the Owner. The extent of the insurer's liability under the policy insurance shall be limited in the manner and to the amount stated in the Appendix.

Insurances against Injuries to Persons and Damage to Property

The existence of any such insurance shall not alter or affect the liability of the Specialist to the Owner under the provisions of this Clause, and the Owner may deduct from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist all sums that the Specialist may be liable to pay to the Owner under this Clause, whether or not the same is covered by insurance. If the Specialist fails to effect and keep in force the insurance required to be effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in force such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be necessary for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist or recover the same as a debt due by the Specialist under Clause 26 herein.

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS

32.

If the Specialist neglects or refuses to maintain any of the Plant to be performed by him under the Agreement with due diligence and expedition, or refuses or neglects to comply with any reasonable orders given to him by the Owner in writing in connection with any such Works, or contravenes any of the provisions of the Agreement, the Owner may give notice in writing to the Specialist to make good the neglect, refused or contravention complained of.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(12) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Remedies in the event of Breach


REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS (CONT'D)

32.

Cont'd Should the Specialist fail to comply with the notice within the time specified therein, the Owner shall be at liberty to employ other party or parties to execute such part of the said Works as the Specialist may have failed or neglected to do, or if the Owner shall think fit, it shall be lawful for him, without prejudice to any other rights he may have under the Agreement, to take the Works to be performed by the Specialist under the Agreement wholly or partly out of the Specialist's hands and may himself complete such Works or any part thereof, or may employ any other party or parties to complete such Works or any part thereof, and in either of such event the Owner shall have the free use of such items of maintenance, test and monitoring equipment and tools as may have been brought on to the premises of the Owner by the Specialist without being responsible to the Specialist for fair wear and tear thereof. The Owner shall also be entitled to retain and apply any portion of the Contract Rate which may be otherwise due to the Specialist under the Agreement for the payment of the costs of executing the said Works or part thereof as the case may be. If the cost of completing the said Works or any part thereof exceeds the amount payable to the Specialist, the Specialist shall pay for the excess, failing with such amount shall be recovered under Clause 26 herein. The Specialist shall not be entitled to the monthly maintenance rate for the period within which the default occurs, arising from the Specialist's neglect, refusal or contravention.

33.

If the Specialist fails to comply with the scheduled number of maintenance submitted under Clause 4 herein, the Specialist fully agrees and accepts to a cost deduction per occasion of an amount stated in the Appendix from the Contract Rate payable in the month in which he was failed to comply with the scheduled number of maintenance. The Owner may recover such cost deductions as a debt due by the Specialist or deduct the amount from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist under Clause 26 herein. In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for breach of contract as the Owner can prove arising from the Specialist's failure to carry out the scheduled number of maintenance.

Non-compliance with scheduled number of Maintenance

34.

If the Specialist shall become bankrupt or have a receiving order made against him or shall present his petition in bankruptcy or shall make an arrangement with or assignment in favour of his creditors or shall agree to carry out the Agreement under a committee of inspection of his creditors or (being a corporation) shall go into liquidation (other than a voluntary liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction) or if the Specialist shall assign the Agreement without the consent in writing of the Owner first obtained or shall have an execution levied on his goods or if the Owner shall certify in writing that in his opinion the Specialist :

Termination

BLDG12/A44.DOC(13) Sal(151211) (DPD)



34.

Cont'd (a)

has abandoned the Agreement; or

(b)

without reasonable excuse has failed to commence on the repair and/or replacement; or

(c)

has suspended the progress of the Works for 14 days after receiving from the Owner written notice to proceed; or

(d)

has failed to remove materials or goods from the Plant or to pull down and replace work for 14 days after receiving from the Owner written notice that the said materials or goods or work have been condemned and rejected; or

(e)

despite previous warning by the Owner in writing fails to proceed with the Works with due expedition and without delay or is otherwise persistently or fundamentally in breach of his obligations under the Agreement; or

(f)

has assigned to another person or firm or corporation or permits vicarious performance by another person or firm or corporation of his duties or functions or has assigned any benefit or interest in the Agreement without consent of the Owner; or

(g)

has failed or refused to dismiss or expel from the Works a person whose dismissal has been required pursuant to Clause 13 and Clause 19 herein; or

(h)

has removed tools, temporary works, materials or goods from the Works without the consent of the Owner in a case where the Owner is reasonably entitled to refuse consent under the terms of this Agreement and the Specialist has failed or refused to comply within 14 days' written notice from the Owner requiring him to return the said tools, temporary works, materials or goods to the Works.

(i)

has previously received a valid and justified written notice under paragraphs (c) or (e) hereof with which he has complied at the time but at any time thereafter has again suspended the progress of the Works or failed to proceed with the Works with due expedition and without delay; or

(j)

has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance or the instruction of the Owner to the contrary sub-let any part of the Agreement; or

(k)

has offered or attempted to offer a bribe, commission or gift to any officer of the Owner; or

(l)

has failed to provide the Security Deposit/Bond in accordance with Clause 9 herein; or

BLDG12/A44.DOC(14) Sal(151211) (DPD)



34.

Cont'd then the Owner may after giving 7 days' notice in writing to the Specialist terminate the employment of the Specialist therefrom without thereby avoiding the Agreement or releasing the Specialist from any of his liabilities or obligations under the Agreement or affecting the rights and powers conferred on the Owner by the Agreement and may himself maintain the Plant or may employ any other contractors to maintain the Plant and the Owner or such other contractors may use for such maintenance so much of the tools temporary works and materials or goods. All additional costs incurred by the Owner in fulfilling the requirements under the Agreement arising from the terminations of the employment of the Specialist shall be recoverable by the Owner under Clause 26 herein.

35.

It shall be the express intention of both parties to this Agreement that all rights and obligations in respect of the Works are distinct and independent of all rights and obligations in respect of the supply of spare parts for Plant currently maintained by the Specialist for the Owner and notwithstanding the termination of the said Agreement pursuant to the provisions of Clause 34 herein the rights and obligations in respect of the said supply of spare parts for the Plant are absolute and are not discharged or deemed to be discharged by the termination of the said Agreement and the Owner shall remain entitled to be supplied with spare parts for the Plant maintained by the Specialist prior to the termination of the said Agreement, in accordance with the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to Tender Form and applicable to the purpose of the Works as and when required by the Owner for the continuing maintenance of the Plant.

ARBITRATION

36.

If at any time any question dispute or difference whatsoever shall arise between the Owner and the Specialist upon, in relation to, or in connection with the Agreement, either of them shall as soon as reasonably practical give to the other notice in writing of the existence of such question dispute or difference and the same shall be referred to the arbitration of a person to be agreed upon by the parties and failing such agreement, a person to be appointed by the Minister for National Development of Singapore and any such reference shall deem to be a submission to arbitration within the meaning of the Arbitration Act (Cap 10). The existence of arbitration proceedings shall not constitute a reason for the suspension of the Works.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(15) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Supply of Spare Parts after Termination


LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION

37.

The Agreement shall in all respects be governed by and its terms construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Singapore. For the avoidance of doubt the Specialist agrees that, except for the enforcement of an award made under Clause 36 herein or a judgement of the Singapore Courts or an appeal from a judgement of the Singapore Courts to the Privy Council, no court or other tribunal outside Singapore shall have jurisdiction to entertain or decide actions disputes or differences in connection with or arising out of this Agreement. For the further avoidance of doubt, if a court or other tribunal outside Singapore refuses to accept the agreement contained in the immediately preceding sentence, any award of an arbitrator or judgement of the Singapore Courts in connection with or arising out of this Agreement shall be accepted as binding upon the parties to this Agreement and shall not be questioned in any proceeding before a court or other tribunal outside Singapore.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(16) Sal(151211) (DPD)

Law Applicable/ Jurisdiction


SCHEDULE A - WORKS LOCATION To be confirmed

DESCRIPTION Comprehensive maintenance of refuse handling Plant. Details of maintenance work shall be provided by the Specialist.

With reference to Clause 2.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(17) Sal(151211) (DPD)

MODEL/DETAILS

QUANTITY Final quantity to be confirmed based on the number of residential blocks with centralised refuse chute.


SCHEDULE B - ITEMS AND FREQUENCY OF WORK ITEM OF WORK

FREQUENCY OF WORKS

(a)

A thorough visual inspection of the complete installation for defective paintwork and signs of corrosion.

Monthly

(b)

Check and ensure that all bolts and nuts for power pack, structure, discharge gate, etc, are tightened securely

Monthly

(c)

Check and ensure that limit switches, relays, valves, heat detector, etc are in proper working condition.

Monthly

(d)

Check and ensure that all seals are in good working condition.

Monthly

(e)

Check and ensure that noise and vibration levels are within acceptable limit.

Monthly

(f)

Check and ensure that the drainage outlet is not blocked.

Monthly

(g)

Check motor bearings for wear and tear.

Yearly

(h)

Carry out insulation test for motor winding.

Yearly

(i)

Carry out ampere test for motor

Monthly

(j)

Lubricate bearings.

Monthly

(k)

Rectify all faults detected and replace all defective or worn parts.

Monthly

With reference to Clause 2.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(18) Sal(151211) (DPD)


APPENDIX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Ref

Description

Clause No.

(i)


3

(ii)

Service Time

(iii)

Agreed Damages for failure to respond within call-out time/to rectify breakdown within service time

6

Anytime during 24 hours of the day a) Call-out Time : 2 hours b) Service Time : 24 hours c) Agreed Damages : $10.00 per hour

(iv)

Service Reports

7

Included

(v)

Substitute Plant

8(2)

Included

(vi)

Security Deposit/Bond

9

Not applicable

(vii)

Payment

23

14 days in a month during which the Plant is not in working condition

(viii)

Insurances against Injuries to Persons and Damages to Property

31

Included. Public Liability Policy of $1 Million per claim and unlimited for the period of insurance.

(ix)

Non-Compliance with Scheduled No. of Maintenance

33

Cost deduction per occasion of an amount of $180.00 from the Contract Rate.

BLDG12/A44.DOC(19) Sal(151211) (DPD)

5(2)

Details

Duration of Agreement = 5 years commencing from 20 to 20 . 24 hours.


CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

INDEX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Clause

Title

Page

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1(1)

Definitions

1

1(2)

Singular and Plural

1

1(3)

Heading and Marginal Notes

1

SCOPE OF WORKS 2

Scope of Works

1

REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK 3


2

4

Work Programme

2

5

Call-Out Time/Service Time

2

5(1)

Call-Out Time

2

5(2)

Service Time

3

6

Agreed Damages for Failure to Respond within Call-Out Time/To Rectify Breakdown within Service Time

3

7

Service Reports

3

8(1)

Replacements and Repairs

4

8(2)

Substitute Plant

4

9

Security Deposit

4

10

Specialist to Pay All Stamp Fees

4

11

Owner's Right to Assign

4

12

Assignment or Subletting

4

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST 13

Behaviour of Workmen

5

14

Keeping Records of Workmen

5

15

Labour Laws

6

16

No Night Sunday or Public Holiday Work

6

17

Employment of Illegal Immigrants

6

18

Compliance with Rules and Regulations

6

19

Specialist's Superintendence

7

20

Safety

7

21

Workmen's Compensation

7

BLDG12/A44.DOC(20) Sal(151211) (DPD)


CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT

INDEX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

Clause

Title

Page

PAYMENT 22

Firm Price Contract

9

23

Payment

9

24

Payment for Owner's Bills and Expenses, etc

9

25

Overclaim Leading to Overpayment

9

26

Recovery/Deduction of Money

10

27

Variations

10

28

Valuation of Variations

10

29

Specialist's Modification of Plant or Works

11

VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS

LIABILITIES FOR AN INSURANCES AGAINST INJURIES AND DAMAGE TO PROPERTY 30

Damage to Property and Injury to Persons

11

31

Insurance against Injuries to Persons and Damage to Property

12

REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATION 32

Remedies in the Event of Breach

12

33

Non-Compliance with Scheduled Number of Maintenance

13

34

Termination

13

35

Supply of Spare Parts after Termination

15

ARBITRATION 36

Arbitration

15

LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION 37

Law Applicable/Jurisdiction

BLDG12/A44.DOC(21) Sal(151211) (DPD)

16

APPENDIX A45



APPENDIX A46

Town Council ( Name & Address of Town Council ) _____________________________ _____________________________

PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

Contract No. _______________________________ Location of Playground: ______________________

Playground Type: ___________________________

Reference Standards: SS 457: 2007 Playground Equipment For Public Use SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Playground Equipment

This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the children playground equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring are in accordance with SS457: 2007 and SS495: 2001 respectively.

______________________________ Certified Playground Safety Inspector

_________________ Certification Number

_________________ Date


APPENDIX A47 HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET Head, Technical Management (M&E) Unit Building Quality Department Housing & Development Board HDB Hub, West Wing, 17th Storey 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh Singapore 310480 Dear Sir CONFIRMATION OF EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS FOR PLAYGROUND, HARDCOURT, FITNESS CORNER, ETC. WITH REINFORCED CONCRETE BASE

Project Title:

Location Description: Project Reference No.: This is to confirm that equipotential nettings have been provided for the below amenities/facilities in accordance with the SS 555. (A)

Type of amenities/facilities

Location (near to block no.)

Remark

a)

_________ _______

______________

b)

_________ _______

______________

c)

_________ _______

______________

_________ _______

______________

Yours faithfully

Name & Signature of Consultant LEW or PE

LEW No or PE No.

Date:

Tel No.:

Name, Signature and Stamp of Contractor

Tel. No.:

BQD/UCMS TM(M&E)/18 Jan2008

APPENDIX A48

Town Council ( Name & Address of Town Council ) _____________________________ _____________________________

PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

Contract No. _______________________________ Location of outdoor fitness station: ______________________

Outdoor Fitness Station Type: ___________________________

Reference Standards: SS 534: 2007 Outdoor Fitness Equipment For Public Use SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Fitness Equipment

This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the outdoor fitness equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring are in accordance with SS534: 2007 and SS495: 2001 respectively. .

______________________________ Certified Playground Safety Inspector

_________________ Certification Number

_________________ Date


APPENDIX A49-1

APPENDIX A49-2

APPENDIX A49-3

APPENDIX A49-4

Appendix A49- 5

Appendix A49- 6

Appendix A49- 7

Appendix A49- 8

Appendix A49- 9

APPENDIX A49-10

Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations - 2012

Recommend Documents